Huawei OSN 8800 PDF

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
V100R006C01
Hardware Description
Issue
01
Date
2011-07-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
Product Name
Version
OptiX OSN 8800
V100R006C01
OptiX OSN 6800
V100R006C01
OptiX OSN 3800
V100R006C01
iManager U2000
V100R005C00
iManager U2000 Web LCT
V100R005C00
Intended Audience
This document describes the hardware feature of a cabinet and each subrack, in addition to
application, working principle, front panel, and specifications of each board.
This document is intended for:
l
Network Planning Engineer
Hardware Installation Engineer
Installation and Commissioning Engineer
Field Maintenance Engineer
Network Monitoring Engineer
Data Configuration Engineer
System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

ii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document
Symbol
Description
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save

time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.
Diagram Conventions
The Diagram conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Indicates the flow of optical signals.
Indicates the flow of electrical signals.
Indicates an optical module.
Indicates an electrical module.
All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

iii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version

V100R006C01
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Compared
with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update
Description
Whole manual
l Added descriptions of the TN11LOA, TN55TQX, TN53TDX,

TN13OAU1, TN53NS2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2, TN55NPO2E,
TN12M40, TN12M40V, TN12D40, TN16SCC, TNK4SXH,
TNK4SXM, TNK4XCT, N3EAS2, TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8,
TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX boards.
l Updated the descriptions of cabinets. Cabinets are described by the
cabinet model instead of device model. In addition, descriptions of
typical cabinet configurations and fiber management frames are
added.
l Added the mappings between the board and equipment to the
"Version Description" section.
l Described service configuration in two separate sections: "Physical
and Logical Ports" and "Configuration of Cross-Connection".
14 Optical
Transponder
Unit
15 Tributary
Unit and Line
Unit
l Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections

that list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the
ND2".
16 PID Unit
15.9 TOA
l Added service mapping paths from FC400 and 3G-SDI to ODUflex.

l Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.
l Added the IEEE 1588v2 function to the "Functions and Features"
table.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

iv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document
Update
Description
15.8 THA
l Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.

l Added the IEEE 1588v2 function to the "Functions and Features"
table.
Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.
15.11 TOM
Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.

V100R006C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00.
Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the
following updates.
Update
Description
Whole manual
l Added descriptions of the TN54TOA, TN54THA, TN53TQX,

TN12OBU1P1, and TNK2SXH boards.
l Deleted descriptions of the TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX,
and TN12PTQX boards descriptions.

V100R006C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Compared
with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update
Description
Whole manual
l Added descriptions of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

l Added descriptions of the TN11DAS1, TN11LSQ, and
TN11WSMD9 boards
l Added the "Optical-layer ASON" and "Electrical-layer ASON" rows
to the "Functions and Features" table.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
14.13 LOM
Added a description of the TN12LOM board's capability to support 3GSDI services.
16.6 NPO2
Added descriptions of the TN55NPO2 board.
21.5 XCM
Added descriptions of the TN52XCM02.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document

V100R005C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00.
Compared with the first official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update
Description
14.20 LSXL
Deleted information about the TN13LSXL.
C Quick
Reference Table
of the Units
14 Optical
Transponder
Unit
Added information about the LPT function and protocol or standard

compliance in Functions and Features.
15 Tributary
Unit and Line
Unit
16 PID Unit
21.3 TN52XCH
Added information about the TN52XCH02.

V100R005C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this
release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04,
and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.
Update
Description
Whole manual
l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX

OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any difference
between the products is described in the manual.
l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
l The descriptions of the following boards are added:
TN11LEM24, TN11LEX4, TN13LSXL,TN54NS3, TN53TSXL,
TN54ENQ2, TN54NPO2, TN11SFIU, TN11RMU902,
TN12WSMD4, TN11ST2, TN11OPM8, TNL1STI, N4BPA
30 Optical
Attenuator30.1
Fixed Optical
Attenuator
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Introduction to fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical

attenuators is added.

vi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
About This Document
Update
Description
31 Filler Panels
Introduction to filler panels is added.

vii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 N63B Cabinet..................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Appearance.........................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Configuration......................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................................4
2 N66B Cabinet..................................................................................................................................6
2.1 Appearance.........................................................................................................................................................7
2.2 Configuration......................................................................................................................................................8
2.3 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................................9
3 Fiber Management Frame..........................................................................................................11

4 DC PDU.........................................................................................................................................16
4.1 TN16PDU.........................................................................................................................................................17
4.2 TN11PDU.........................................................................................................................................................18
5 UPM................................................................................................................................................22
6 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack...........................................................................................................29
6.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.........................................................................................................................30
6.1.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................30
6.1.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................32
6.1.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)...........................................................................................33
6.2.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................38
6.3.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................48
6.4 PIU....................................................................................................................................................................57
6.4.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................57
6.4.2 Application..............................................................................................................................................57
6.4.3 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................58
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

viii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
6.4.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................58

6.4.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................59
6.4.6 Specifications of the PIU.........................................................................................................................60
6.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces........................................................................60
6.5.1 ATE.........................................................................................................................................................63
6.5.2 EFI...........................................................................................................................................................70
6.5.3 EFI1.........................................................................................................................................................79
6.5.4 EFI2.........................................................................................................................................................83
6.5.5 STI...........................................................................................................................................................90
7 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category..............................................................................................95

8 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack.........................................................................................................106
8.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................................107
8.2 Slot Description..............................................................................................................................................110
8.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)..................................................................................................111
8.4 PIU..................................................................................................................................................................116
8.4.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................116
8.4.2 Application............................................................................................................................................116
8.4.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................117
8.4.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................118
8.4.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................118
8.4.6 Specifications of the PIU.......................................................................................................................119
8.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces......................................................................119
8.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area..............................................................................................................120
8.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board..................................................................................123
8.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces................................................................................................................124
9 OptiX OSN 6800 Board Category............................................................................................134

10 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis........................................................................................................140
10.1 Chassis Structure..........................................................................................................................................141
10.2 Slot Description............................................................................................................................................143
10.3 Chassis Environment Control System (Fan)................................................................................................144
10.4 PIU................................................................................................................................................................148
10.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................148
10.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................148
10.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................148
10.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................148
10.4.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................149
10.4.6 Specifications of the PIU.....................................................................................................................149
10.5 APIU.............................................................................................................................................................150
10.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................150
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

ix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
10.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................151

10.5.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................152
10.5.6 Specifications of the APIU..................................................................................................................152
10.6 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces....................................................................153
10.6.1 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board................................................................................153
10.6.2 PIN Assignment of Interfaces..............................................................................................................154
11 OptiX OSN 3800 Board Category..........................................................................................160

12 Frame..........................................................................................................................................164
12.1 DCM Frame..................................................................................................................................................165
12.2 CRPC Frame.................................................................................................................................................168
12.3 Digital Video O-E Converter........................................................................................................................169
12.4 Fiber Spooling Frame...................................................................................................................................172
13 Overview of Boards.................................................................................................................174
13.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions.............................................................................................................175
13.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions...............................................................................................................175
13.1.2 Laser Hazard Level Label....................................................................................................................177
13.2 Bar Code for Boards.....................................................................................................................................178
13.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................178
13.2.2 Characteristic Code..............................................................................................................................181
14 Optical Transponder Unit......................................................................................................182

14.1 ECOM...........................................................................................................................................................184
14.1.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................184
14.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................187
14.1.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................191
14.1.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................192
14.1.7 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................192
14.1.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................194
14.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................195
14.1.10 Specifications of the ECOM..............................................................................................................196
14.2 L4G...............................................................................................................................................................200
14.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................201
14.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................206
14.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................208
14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G..........................................................................................................208
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
14.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................211

14.2.11 Specifications of the L4G..................................................................................................................213
14.3 LDGD...........................................................................................................................................................218
14.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................218
14.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................224
14.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................225
14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD......................................................................................................226
14.3.11 Specifications of the LDGD..............................................................................................................231
14.4 LDGS............................................................................................................................................................236
14.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................237
14.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................243
14.4.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................244
14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS.......................................................................................................245
14.4.11 Specifications of the LDGS...............................................................................................................249
14.5 LDM.............................................................................................................................................................256
14.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................256
14.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................264
14.5.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................265
14.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM........................................................................................................266
14.5.10 Specifications of the LDM................................................................................................................269
14.6 LDMD..........................................................................................................................................................278
14.6.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................278
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
14.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................285

14.6.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................286
14.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD.....................................................................................................287
14.6.10 Specifications of the LDMD..............................................................................................................291
14.7 LDMS...........................................................................................................................................................298
14.7.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................299
14.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................306
14.7.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................307
14.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS......................................................................................................308
14.7.10 Specifications of the LDMS..............................................................................................................311
14.8 LDX..............................................................................................................................................................319
14.8.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................319
14.8.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................325
14.8.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................327
14.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX.........................................................................................................327
14.8.8 Board Service Configuration...............................................................................................................327
14.8.10 LDX Loopbacks................................................................................................................................328
14.8.12 Specifications of the LDX.................................................................................................................333
14.9 LEM24..........................................................................................................................................................339
14.9.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................340
14.9.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................348
14.9.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................350
14.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24 ....................................................................................................351
14.9.10 Board Function Configuration...........................................................................................................354
14.9.11 LEM24 loopback...............................................................................................................................354
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

14.9.13 Specifications of the LEM24.............................................................................................................363
14.10 LEX4..........................................................................................................................................................370
14.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................370
14.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................370
14.10.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................371
14.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................374
14.10.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................378
14.10.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................379
14.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4 ....................................................................................................380
14.10.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................380
14.10.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................381
14.10.10 Board Function Configuration.........................................................................................................382
14.10.11 LEX4 loopback................................................................................................................................382
14.10.12 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................385
14.10.13 Specifications of the LEX4 .............................................................................................................388
14.11 LOA............................................................................................................................................................393
14.11.2 Application........................................................................................................................................394
14.11.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................404
14.11.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................406
14.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LOA.......................................................................................................407
14.11.9 Configuring Cross-Connections........................................................................................................412
14.11.10 LOA Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................414
14.11.12 Specifications of the LOA...............................................................................................................429
14.12 LOG............................................................................................................................................................442
14.12.2 Application........................................................................................................................................443
14.12.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................450
14.12.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................452
14.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG.......................................................................................................453
14.12.10 LOG Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................456
14.12.12 Specifications of the LOG...............................................................................................................460
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xiii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
14.13 LOM...........................................................................................................................................................470
14.13.2 Application........................................................................................................................................472
14.13.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................481
14.13.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................485
14.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM......................................................................................................485
14.13.9 LOM loopback...................................................................................................................................487
14.13.11 Specifications of the LOM..............................................................................................................493
14.14 LQG............................................................................................................................................................503
14.14.2 Application........................................................................................................................................504
14.14.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................509
14.14.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................510
14.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG.......................................................................................................511
14.14.11 Specifications of the LQG...............................................................................................................516
14.15 LQM...........................................................................................................................................................522
14.15.2 Application........................................................................................................................................523
14.15.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................532
14.15.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................534
14.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM......................................................................................................534
14.15.11 Specifications of the LQM..............................................................................................................541
14.16 LQMD........................................................................................................................................................550
14.16.2 Application........................................................................................................................................551
14.16.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................560
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xiv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
14.16.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................562

14.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD...................................................................................................563
14.16.11 Specifications of the LQMD............................................................................................................570
14.17 LQMS.........................................................................................................................................................580
14.17.2 Application........................................................................................................................................581
14.17.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................593
14.17.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................595
14.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS....................................................................................................596
14.17.11 Specifications of the LQMS............................................................................................................604
14.18 LSQ.............................................................................................................................................................614
14.18.2 Application........................................................................................................................................615
14.18.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................620
14.18.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................621
14.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LSQ.......................................................................................................622
14.18.9 LSQ Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................622
14.18.11 Specifications of the LSQ................................................................................................................628
14.19 LSX.............................................................................................................................................................631
14.19.2 Application........................................................................................................................................633
14.19.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................640
14.19.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................642
14.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX.......................................................................................................643
14.19.9 LSX Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................643
14.19.11 Specifications of the LSX................................................................................................................649
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
14.20 LSXL..........................................................................................................................................................659
14.20.2 Application........................................................................................................................................660
14.20.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................667
14.20.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................670
14.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL.....................................................................................................671
14.20.9 LSXL Loopbacks...............................................................................................................................672
14.20.11 Specifications of the LSXL.............................................................................................................678
14.21 LSXLR........................................................................................................................................................682
14.21.2 Application........................................................................................................................................682
14.21.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................687
14.21.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................690
14.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR..................................................................................................691
14.21.10 Specifications of the LSXLR...........................................................................................................694
14.22 LSXR..........................................................................................................................................................696
14.22.2 Application........................................................................................................................................697
14.22.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................701
14.22.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................703
14.22.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR.....................................................................................................704
14.22.10 Specifications of the LSXR.............................................................................................................706
14.23 LWX2.........................................................................................................................................................710
14.23.2 Application........................................................................................................................................710
14.23.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................716
14.23.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................717
14.23.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2....................................................................................................718
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xvi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

14.23.10 Specifications of the LWX2............................................................................................................721
14.24 LWXD........................................................................................................................................................728
14.24.2 Application........................................................................................................................................729
14.24.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................735
14.24.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................736
14.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD...................................................................................................736
14.24.10 Specifications of the LWXD...........................................................................................................739
14.25 LWXS.........................................................................................................................................................747
14.25.2 Application........................................................................................................................................748
14.25.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................754
14.25.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................756
14.25.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS....................................................................................................757
14.25.9 LWXS loopback................................................................................................................................757
14.25.11 Specifications of the LWXS............................................................................................................762
14.26 TMX...........................................................................................................................................................769
14.26.2 Application........................................................................................................................................771
14.26.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................776
14.26.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................777
14.26.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX......................................................................................................778
14.26.9 TMX Loopbacks................................................................................................................................779
14.26.11 Specifications of the TMX..............................................................................................................783
15 Tributary Unit and Line Unit................................................................................................796

15.1 ND2..............................................................................................................................................................798
15.1.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................799
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xvii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

15.1.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................817
15.1.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................819
15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2.........................................................................................................820
15.1.10 ND2 loopbacks..................................................................................................................................838
15.1.12 Specifications of the ND2..................................................................................................................853
15.2 NQ2..............................................................................................................................................................860
15.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................861
15.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................879
15.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................881
15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2.........................................................................................................882
15.2.10 NQ2 Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................902
15.2.12 Specifications of the NQ2..................................................................................................................922
15.3 NS2...............................................................................................................................................................928
15.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................929
15.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................947
15.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................948
15.3.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2..........................................................................................................949
15.3.9 Configuring Cross-Connections..........................................................................................................955
15.3.10 NS2 Loopbacks..................................................................................................................................966
15.3.12 Specifications of the NS2..................................................................................................................982
15.4 NS3...............................................................................................................................................................989
15.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................991
15.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1007
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xviii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
15.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1009

15.4.7 Characteristic Code for the NS3........................................................................................................1010
15.4.10 NS3 Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1021
15.4.12 Specifications of the NS3................................................................................................................1052
15.5 TBE.............................................................................................................................................................1055
15.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1056
15.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1062
15.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1064
15.5.9 TBE Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................1067
15.5.11 Specifications of the TBE................................................................................................................1072
15.6 TDG............................................................................................................................................................1078
15.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1079
15.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1083
15.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1085
15.6.9 TDG Parameters................................................................................................................................1089
15.6.10 Specifications of the TDG...............................................................................................................1090
15.7 TDX............................................................................................................................................................1093
15.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1095
15.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1104
15.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1107
15.7.9 TDX Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1113
15.7.11 Specifications of the TDX...............................................................................................................1121
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
15.8 THA............................................................................................................................................................1125
15.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1125
15.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1134
15.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1135
15.8.9 THA Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1145
15.8.11 Specifications of the THA...............................................................................................................1159
15.9 TOA............................................................................................................................................................1161
15.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1162
15.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1171
15.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1173
15.9.9 TOA Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1183
15.9.11 Specifications of the TOA...............................................................................................................1198
15.10 TOG..........................................................................................................................................................1205
15.10.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1205
15.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1206
15.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1206
15.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1208
15.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1211
15.10.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1213
15.10.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1213
15.10.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1215
15.10.10 Specifications of the TOG.............................................................................................................1218
15.11 TOM.........................................................................................................................................................1221
15.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1222
15.11.3 Function and Feature.......................................................................................................................1236
15.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1272
15.11.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1273
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xx
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

15.11.10 Specifications of the TOM............................................................................................................1313
15.12 TQM.........................................................................................................................................................1323
15.12.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1324
15.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1332
15.12.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1333
15.12.10 Specifications of the TQM............................................................................................................1340
15.13 TQS...........................................................................................................................................................1347
15.13.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1348
15.13.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1353
15.13.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1354
15.13.9 TQS Loopbacks...............................................................................................................................1357
15.13.10 TQS Parameters.............................................................................................................................1358
15.13.11 Specifications of the TQS..............................................................................................................1360
15.14 TQX..........................................................................................................................................................1364
15.14.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1366
15.14.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1374
15.14.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1376
15.14.9 TQX Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................1380
15.14.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................1382
15.14.11 Specifications of the TQX.............................................................................................................1386
15.15 TSXL........................................................................................................................................................1390
15.15.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1391
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

15.15.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1397
15.15.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1400
15.15.9 TSXL Loopbacks.............................................................................................................................1403
15.15.11 Specifications of the TSXL...........................................................................................................1408
16 PID Unit...................................................................................................................................1410
16.1 BMD4.........................................................................................................................................................1411
16.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1411
16.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1414
16.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1416
16.1.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4.....................................................................................................1417
16.1.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4........................................................................................................1417
16.1.10 Specifications of the BMD4............................................................................................................1419
16.2 BMD8.........................................................................................................................................................1420
16.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1421
16.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1424
16.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1426
16.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8.....................................................................................................1427
16.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8........................................................................................................1427
16.2.10 Specifications of the BMD8............................................................................................................1431
16.3 ELQX..........................................................................................................................................................1433
16.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1433
16.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1439
16.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1440
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
16.3.10 Specifications of the ELQX.............................................................................................................1448

16.4 PTQX..........................................................................................................................................................1452
16.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1454
16.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1460
16.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1462
16.4.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX......................................................................................................1462
16.4.10 PTQX Parameters............................................................................................................................1468
16.4.11 Specifications of the PTQX.............................................................................................................1471
16.5 NPO2E........................................................................................................................................................1476
16.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1479
16.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1487
16.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1489
16.5.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2E....................................................................................................1490
16.5.10 NPO2E Loopbacks..........................................................................................................................1497
16.5.12 Specifications of the NPO2E...........................................................................................................1505
16.6 NPO2..........................................................................................................................................................1507
16.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1511
16.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1521
16.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1523
16.6.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2......................................................................................................1523
16.6.10 NPO2 Loopbacks.............................................................................................................................1537
16.6.12 Specifications of the NPO2.............................................................................................................1549
16.7 ENQ2..........................................................................................................................................................1551
16.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1552
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxiii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

16.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1559
16.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1560
16.7.9 ENQ2 Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................1570
16.7.11 Specifications of the ENQ2.............................................................................................................1581
17 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Unit................................................................1582

17.1 M40.............................................................................................................................................................1583
17.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1584
17.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1586
17.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1591
17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40.......................................................................................................1592
17.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1592
17.1.10 Specifications of the M40................................................................................................................1593
17.2 M40V..........................................................................................................................................................1594
17.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1595
17.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1598
17.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1602
17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V.....................................................................................................1603
17.2.10 Specifications of the M40V.............................................................................................................1604
17.3 D40.............................................................................................................................................................1606
17.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1607
17.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1609
17.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1614
17.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40........................................................................................................1615
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxiv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
17.3.10 Specifications of the D40................................................................................................................1616

17.4 D40V..........................................................................................................................................................1617
17.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1618
17.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1621
17.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1624
17.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V.....................................................................................................1625
17.4.10 Specifications of the D40V..............................................................................................................1627
17.5 DFIU...........................................................................................................................................................1628
17.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1628
17.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1631
17.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1632
17.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU......................................................................................................1632
17.5.10 Specifications of the DFIU..............................................................................................................1634
17.6 FIU..............................................................................................................................................................1635
17.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1637
17.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1641
17.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1646
17.6.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU.........................................................................................................1647
17.6.10 Specifications of the FIU.................................................................................................................1650
17.7 ITL..............................................................................................................................................................1651
17.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1652
17.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1655
17.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1658
17.7.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL.........................................................................................................1659
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

17.7.10 Specifications of the ITL.................................................................................................................1660
17.8 SFIU............................................................................................................................................................1663
17.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1663
17.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1666
17.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1667
17.8.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU......................................................................................................1668
17.8.9 SFIU Parameters................................................................................................................................1668
17.8.10 Specifications of the SFIU...............................................................................................................1670
18 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit........................................................................1672

18.1 CMR1.........................................................................................................................................................1673
18.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1673
18.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1675
18.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1677
18.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1....................................................................................................1677
18.1.10 Specifications of the CMR1............................................................................................................1678
18.2 CMR2.........................................................................................................................................................1679
18.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1680
18.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1682
18.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1685
18.3 CMR4.........................................................................................................................................................1688
18.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1689
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxvi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
18.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1692

18.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1694
18.4 DMR1.........................................................................................................................................................1698
18.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1699
18.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1701
18.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1704
18.4.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1....................................................................................................1704
18.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1............................................................................................................1706
18.5 MR2............................................................................................................................................................1707
18.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1708
18.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1710
18.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1713
18.5.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2.......................................................................................................1713
18.5.9 MR2 Parameters................................................................................................................................1714
18.5.10 Specifications of the MR2...............................................................................................................1715
18.6 MR4............................................................................................................................................................1716
18.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1717
18.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1720
18.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1722
18.7 MR8............................................................................................................................................................1727
18.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1727
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxvii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

18.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1729
18.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1731
18.8 MR8V.........................................................................................................................................................1736
18.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1736
18.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1739
18.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1741
18.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V....................................................................................................1742
18.8.10 Specifications of the MR8V............................................................................................................1744
18.9 SBM2..........................................................................................................................................................1747
18.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1748
18.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1750
18.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1751
18.9.9 Specifications of the SBM2...............................................................................................................1753
19 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit..........................................1754

19.1 RDU9..........................................................................................................................................................1755
19.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1755
19.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1758
19.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1760
19.1.9 Specifications of the RDU9...............................................................................................................1762
19.2 RMU9.........................................................................................................................................................1763
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxviii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
19.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1764
19.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1767
19.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1769
19.2.9 Specifications of the RMU9..............................................................................................................1772
19.3 ROAM........................................................................................................................................................1773
19.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1774
19.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1777
19.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1780
19.3.9 Specifications of the ROAM.............................................................................................................1782
19.4 WSD9.........................................................................................................................................................1783
19.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1784
19.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1788
19.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1790
19.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9..............................................................................................................1793
19.5 WSM9.........................................................................................................................................................1795
19.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1796
19.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1799
19.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1801
19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9..............................................................................................................1804
19.6 WSMD2......................................................................................................................................................1806
19.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1806
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

19.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1809
19.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1811
19.6.9 Specifications of the WSMD2...........................................................................................................1814
19.7 WSMD4......................................................................................................................................................1815
19.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1816
19.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1819
19.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1821
19.8 WSMD9......................................................................................................................................................1826
19.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1826
19.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1829
19.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1831
19.8.8 WSMD9 Parameters..........................................................................................................................1832
20 Optical Amplifier Unit.........................................................................................................1836

20.1 CRPC..........................................................................................................................................................1837
20.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1837
20.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1841
20.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1843
20.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper......................................................................................................................1843
20.1.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC.....................................................................................................1845
20.1.11 Specifications of the CRPC.............................................................................................................1847
20.2 DAS1..........................................................................................................................................................1848
20.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1848
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxx
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

20.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1854
20.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1856
20.2.8 DAS1 Parameters..............................................................................................................................1857
20.2.9 Specifications of the DAS1...............................................................................................................1861
20.3 HBA............................................................................................................................................................1863
20.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1863
20.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1866
20.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1868
20.3.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA.......................................................................................................1869
20.3.10 Specifications of the HBA...............................................................................................................1872
20.4 OAU1..........................................................................................................................................................1873
20.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1875
20.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1879
20.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1883
20.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1....................................................................................................1885
20.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1.............................................................................................................1889
20.5 OBU1..........................................................................................................................................................1896
20.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1898
20.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1902
20.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1905
20.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1.....................................................................................................1906
20.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1.............................................................................................................1910
20.6 OBU2..........................................................................................................................................................1912
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxxi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
20.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1913
20.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1917
20.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1920
20.6.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2.....................................................................................................1921
20.6.10 Specifications of the OBU2.............................................................................................................1925
21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.........................................1928

21.1 SXM............................................................................................................................................................1929
21.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1929
21.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1932
21.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1934
21.1.7 Specifications of the SXM.................................................................................................................1934
21.2 SXH............................................................................................................................................................1935
21.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1936
21.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1938
21.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1940
21.2.7 Specifications of the SXH.................................................................................................................1940
21.3 TN52XCH..................................................................................................................................................1941
21.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1941
21.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1944
21.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1945
21.3.7 Specifications of the XCH.................................................................................................................1945
21.4 TN16XCH..................................................................................................................................................1946
21.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1946
21.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1949
21.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1951
21.4.7 Jumper...............................................................................................................................................1951
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxxii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
21.4.8 Specifications of the TN16XCH........................................................................................................1952

21.5 XCM...........................................................................................................................................................1952
21.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1953
21.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1955
21.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1957
21.5.7 Specifications of the XCM................................................................................................................1957
21.6 XCS............................................................................................................................................................1957
21.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1958
21.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1960
21.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1961
21.6.7 Specifications of the XCS..................................................................................................................1962
21.7 XCT............................................................................................................................................................1962
21.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1963
21.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1965
21.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1967
21.7.7 Specifications of the XCT.................................................................................................................1967
21.8 SCC.............................................................................................................................................................1968
21.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1970
21.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1974
21.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1980
21.8.7 Jumper...............................................................................................................................................1981
21.8.8 Specifications of the SCC..................................................................................................................1984
21.9 AUX............................................................................................................................................................1985
21.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1987
21.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1991
21.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1996
21.9.7 Jumper...............................................................................................................................................1997
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxxiii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
21.9.8 Specifications of the AUX.................................................................................................................2000
22 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit.....................................................................................2002

22.1 HSC1..........................................................................................................................................................2003
22.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2003
22.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2007
22.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2009
22.1.7 Characteristic Code for the HSC1.....................................................................................................2009
22.1.9 HSC1 Parameters...............................................................................................................................2010
22.1.10 Specifications of the HSC1..............................................................................................................2011
22.2 SC1.............................................................................................................................................................2012
22.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2013
22.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2017
22.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2019
22.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1........................................................................................................2019
22.2.10 Specifications of the SC1................................................................................................................2021
22.3 SC2.............................................................................................................................................................2022
22.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2023
22.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2027
22.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2029
22.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2........................................................................................................2029
22.3.10 Specifications of the SC2................................................................................................................2031
22.4 ST2..............................................................................................................................................................2032
22.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2032
22.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2036
22.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2038
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxxiv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
22.4.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2........................................................................................................2038

22.4.10 Specifications of the ST2.................................................................................................................2040
23 Optical Protection Unit.........................................................................................................2042

23.1 DCP............................................................................................................................................................2043
23.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2044
23.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2048
23.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2051
23.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP.......................................................................................................2052
23.1.10 Specifications of the DCP................................................................................................................2054
23.2 OLP.............................................................................................................................................................2056
23.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2058
23.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2061
23.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2063
23.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP.......................................................................................................2064
23.2.10 Specifications of the OLP................................................................................................................2066
23.3 SCS.............................................................................................................................................................2068
23.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2069
23.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2072
23.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2074
23.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS........................................................................................................2074
23.3.10 Specifications of the SCS................................................................................................................2076
24 Spectrum Analyzer Unit.......................................................................................................2078

24.1 MCA4.........................................................................................................................................................2079
24.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2079
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxxv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

24.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2082
24.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2083
24.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4....................................................................................................2084
24.1.10 Specifications of the MCA4............................................................................................................2086
24.2 MCA8.........................................................................................................................................................2087
24.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2087
24.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2090
24.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2092
24.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8....................................................................................................2092
24.2.10 Specifications of the MCA8............................................................................................................2094
24.3 OPM8..........................................................................................................................................................2095
24.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2096
24.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2098
24.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2100
24.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8....................................................................................................2100
24.3.9 Specifications of the OPM8...............................................................................................................2102
24.4 WMU..........................................................................................................................................................2102
24.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2103
24.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2106
24.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2107
24.4.9 Specifications of the WMU...............................................................................................................2108
25 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit.......................................................................................2110

25.1 VA1............................................................................................................................................................2111
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxxvi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
25.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2111
25.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2114
25.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2115
25.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1.......................................................................................................2116
25.1.10 Specifications of the VA1................................................................................................................2118
25.2 VA4............................................................................................................................................................2119
25.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2120
25.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2123
25.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2124
25.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4.......................................................................................................2125
25.2.10 Specifications of the VA4................................................................................................................2127
26 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit..............................................................2129

26.1 DCU............................................................................................................................................................2130
26.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2130
26.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2133
26.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2134
26.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU.......................................................................................................2134
26.1.10 Specifications of the DCU...............................................................................................................2135
26.2 TDC............................................................................................................................................................2137
26.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2138
26.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2140
26.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2142
26.2.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC.......................................................................................................2142
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxxvii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
26.2.10 Specifications of the TDC...............................................................................................................2144
27 Clock Unit...............................................................................................................................2146
27.1 STG.............................................................................................................................................................2147
27.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2147
27.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2151
27.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2153
27.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG.......................................................................................................2154
27.1.8 Specifications of the STG..................................................................................................................2154
28 OCS System Unit...................................................................................................................2155

28.1 BPA............................................................................................................................................................2156
28.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2156
28.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2158
28.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2160
28.1.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA.......................................................................................................2160
28.1.9 Specifications of the BPA..................................................................................................................2161
28.2 EAS2...........................................................................................................................................................2162
28.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2162
28.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2169
28.2.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2171
28.2.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2171
28.2.9 Configuring the Board Functions......................................................................................................2171
28.2.11 Specifications of the EAS2..............................................................................................................2180
28.3 EGSH..........................................................................................................................................................2183
28.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2183
28.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2190
28.3.6 DIP Switches and Fiber Jumpers.......................................................................................................2192
28.3.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2192
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxxviii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
28.3.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH.....................................................................................................2193

28.3.10 Board Protection..............................................................................................................................2194
28.3.12 Specifications of the EGSH.............................................................................................................2204
28.4 SF64............................................................................................................................................................2206
28.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2206
28.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2210
28.4.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2212
28.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64.......................................................................................................2212
28.4.11 Specifications of the SF64...............................................................................................................2214
28.5 SF64A.........................................................................................................................................................2217
28.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2217
28.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2222
28.5.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2224
28.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A....................................................................................................2224
28.5.11 Specifications of the SF64A............................................................................................................2226
28.6 SFD64.........................................................................................................................................................2228
28.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2228
28.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2233
28.6.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2234
28.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64....................................................................................................2234
28.6.11 Specifications of the SFD64............................................................................................................2236
28.7 SL64............................................................................................................................................................2239
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xxxix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

28.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2239
28.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2244
28.7.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2246
28.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64......................................................................................................2246
28.7.11 Specifications of the SL64...............................................................................................................2248
28.8 SLD64.........................................................................................................................................................2250
28.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2250
28.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2255
28.8.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2257
28.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64...................................................................................................2257
28.8.11 Specifications of the SLD64............................................................................................................2259
28.9 SLH41.........................................................................................................................................................2260
28.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2260
28.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2265
28.9.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2268
28.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41...................................................................................................2268
28.9.11 Specifications of the SLH41............................................................................................................2270
28.10 SLO16.......................................................................................................................................................2272
28.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2272
28.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2277
28.10.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..............................................................................................................2279
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xl
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
28.10.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2279

28.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16.................................................................................................2279
28.10.9 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2279
28.10.11 Specifications of the SLO16..........................................................................................................2281
28.11 SLQ16.......................................................................................................................................................2282
28.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2282
28.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2287
28.11.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2289
28.11.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16.................................................................................................2289
28.11.11 Specifications of the SLQ16..........................................................................................................2291
28.12 SLQ64.......................................................................................................................................................2292
28.12.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2292
28.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2297
28.12.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2298
28.12.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64.................................................................................................2298
28.12.11 Specifications of the SLQ64..........................................................................................................2300
29 Cables.......................................................................................................................................2302
29.1 Power Cables and Ground Cables..............................................................................................................2303
29.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables.....................................................................................2303
29.1.2 Subrack Power Cables.......................................................................................................................2307
29.2 Optical Fibers.............................................................................................................................................2309
29.2.1 Classification.....................................................................................................................................2309
29.2.2 Connectors.........................................................................................................................................2310
29.3 Ground Cables............................................................................................................................................2314
29.3.1 Cabinet Door Ground Cables............................................................................................................2314
29.3.2 PDU Ground Cable............................................................................................................................2315
29.4 Alarm Cables..............................................................................................................................................2316
29.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable.....................................................................................................................2316
29.4.2 Alarm Output Interface Cable...........................................................................................................2318
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xli
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
29.4.3 Alarm Input Interface Cable..............................................................................................................2319

29.5 Management Cables...................................................................................................................................2321
29.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable......................................................................................................................2321
29.5.2 AUX Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................2322
29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable......................................................................................................2327
29.6 Clock/Time Cable.......................................................................................................................................2328
29.6.1 Cables for other equipment Connections...........................................................................................2328
29.6.2 Cables for Internal Connections........................................................................................................2333
29.6.3 Cables for Testing equipment Connections.......................................................................................2335
30 Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................................2339
30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator ...........................................................................................................................2340
30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................... 2340
31 Filler Panels............................................................................................................................2341
31.1 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................2342
31.2 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................2342
31.3 Valid Slots..................................................................................................................................................2343
31.4 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................2344
A Indicators..................................................................................................................................2346
A.1 Cabinet Indicators........................................................................................................................................ 2347
A.2 Subrack Indicator.........................................................................................................................................2347
A.3 Chassis Indicators........................................................................................................................................2348
A.4 Board Indicators...........................................................................................................................................2348
A.5 Fan Indicator................................................................................................................................................ 2352
A.6 PIU Indicator...............................................................................................................................................2352
B Bar Code for Boards................................................................................................................2353

B.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................2355
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.....................................................................................................................2358
B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs..............................................................................................2358
B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs............................................................2360
B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs...............................................................................................2361
B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit..............................................................................................................2362
B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM.............................................................................................................2362
B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1.....................................................................................................2362
B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1.....................................................................................................2364
B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2........................................................................................................2364
B.4.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V.....................................................................................................2366
B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA...................................................................................................................2366
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xlii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.....................................................................................................2367

B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8.....................................................................................................2367
B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU...................................................................................................................2367
B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA........................................................................................................2367
B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1......................................................................................................2368
B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1......................................................................................................2369
B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2......................................................................................................2369
B.6.5 Characteristic Code for the CRPC......................................................................................................2370
B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit................................................................................2370
B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40.........................................................................................................2370
B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V.......................................................................................................2371
B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU.......................................................................................................2371
B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU..........................................................................................................2372
B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL..........................................................................................................2372
B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40.........................................................................................................2372
B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V......................................................................................................2373
B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit.....................................................................................................2374
B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP.........................................................................................................2374
B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP.........................................................................................................2374
B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS.........................................................................................................2374
B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA.....................................................................................................................2375
B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1.........................................................................................................2375
B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4.........................................................................................................2375
B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit............................................................................................................2376
B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU......................................................................................................2376
B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU......................................................................................................2376
B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC......................................................................................................2377
C Quick Reference Table of the Units....................................................................................2378

C.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification.............................................................................2379
C.1.1 OTUs and Tributary Boards Specification on the Client Side............................................................2379
C.1.2 OTUs and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side...................................................................2405
C.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification........................................................................................................2419
C.3 Other Unit Specification..............................................................................................................................2420
C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio..............................................................................................................2424
C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ...................................................................2425
C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..............................................................2429
C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ..................................................................2431
C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..................................................2433
D Parameter Reference..............................................................................................................2438
D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface)............................................................................................2441
D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................................2442
D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold....................................................................................................2444
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xliii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface).........................................................................................................2446

D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)...............................................................................2446
D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)...........................................................................................2447
D.7 Default VLAN ID .......................................................................................................................................2448
D.8 Enabled/Disabled ........................................................................................................................................2448
D.9 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression .....................................................................................................2449
D.10 Enabling LCAS..........................................................................................................................................2450
D.11 Entry Detection .........................................................................................................................................2451
D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)...............................................................................................2451
D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface).................................................................................................2452
D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................................2453
D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................2454
D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)...............................................................................2454
D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)......................................................................................................................2455
D.18 Hardware REG Enabled............................................................................................................................2456
D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)................2457
D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................................2458
D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m)..............................................................................................................2459
D.22 Laser-in-Position Status.............................................................................................................................2460
D.23 LCAS Mode...............................................................................................................................................2461
D.24 Line Rate....................................................................................................................................................2461
D.25 Loop Detection..........................................................................................................................................2464
D.26 Loop Port Shutdown..................................................................................................................................2464
D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................2465
D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface).................................................................................................................2467
D.29 MAC Loopback ........................................................................................................................................2468
D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface).........................................................................................2469
D.31 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)................................................................2469
D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................2470
D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................2471
D.34 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface).................................................................2471
D.35 Min. Members-Transmit Direction............................................................................................................2472
D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface).................................................................................................2472
D.37 MSP Sharing..............................................................................................................................................2473
D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................2474
D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)...........................................................................2475
D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)...........................................................................2476
D.41 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode ...............................................................................................2476
D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface)......................................................................2477
D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface)........................................................................................................2478
D.44 PHY Loopback .........................................................................................................................................2479
D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................2480
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xliv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface)...............................2480

D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................2482
D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................................2484
D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................2485
D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................2485
D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................2486
D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface).............................................................................2488
D.53 Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface)...................................................................................2489
D.54 TSD............................................................................................................................................................2489
D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)....................2490
D.56 VLAN Priority ..........................................................................................................................................2491
E Glossary....................................................................................................................................2492
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

xlv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1 N63B Cabinet
N63B Cabinet
About This Chapter

1.1 Appearance
The N63B is an ETSI middle-column cabinet with 300 mm depth, complying with the ETS
300-119 standard.
1.2 Configuration
Typical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack
type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model.
1.3 Technical Specifications
Technical specifications of the N63B cabinet include dimensions, weight, and voltage.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1 N63B Cabinet
1.1 Appearance
300-119 standard.
The following subracks can be installed on the N63B cabinet: OptiX OSN 8800 T32, OptiX
OSN 8800 T16 and OptiX OSN 6800.
The N63B cabinet consists of the rack (main frame), open-close type front door, rear panel fixed
by screws, and side panels at the left and right sides.
Cabinet doors and side panels can be disassembled. The front door and side panels have
grounding points. Keys to the front door of all N63B cabinets are the same.
Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the N63B cabinet.
Figure 1-1 N63B cabinet appearance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1 N63B Cabinet
1.2 Configuration
Typical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack
Table 1-1 lists the typical configurations of the N63B cabinet.
NOTE
There are two types of ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinets: T63B and N63B. These two types of cabinets
differ in color and door. You can perform an expansion installation on the T63B cabinet based on the typical
configurations of the N63B cabinet.
Table 1-1 Typical configurations of the N63B cabinet

Typ
ical
Con
figu
rati
on
Number of
Subracks and
Frames
PDU Model
Circuit
Breaker a
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on of
Integrated
Equipment
Power
Consumpti
on for the
Typical
Configurati
on
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2 x OptiX OSN
8800 T32 + 1 x
DCM frame
TN16
Eight 63 A
circuit
breakers
5400 W
< 4000 W
1 x OptiX OSN
8800 T32 + 2 x
OptiX OSN 6800
+ 2 x DCM frame
TN16
Four 63 A and
four 32 A
circuit
breakers
5400 W
< 4000 W
1 x OptiX OSN
8800 T32 + 2 x
OptiX OSN 8800
T16 + 1 x DCM
frame
TN16
Eight 63 A
circuit
breakers
5000 W
< 4000 W
4 x OptiX OSN
8800 T16 + 1 x
DCM frame
TN16
Eight 63 A
circuit
breakers
5000 W
< 4000 W
3 x OptiX OSN
8800 T16+1 x
OptiX OSN 6800
+ 2 x DCM frame
TN16
Six 63 A and
two 32 A
circuit
breakers
5000 W
< 4000 W
2 x OptiX OSN
8800 T16+ 2 x
OptiX OSN 6800
+ 2 x DCM frame
TN16
Four 63 A and
four 32 A
circuit
breakers
5000 W
< 4000 W

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Typ
ical
Con
figu
rati
on
1 N63B Cabinet
Number of
Subracks and
Frames
PDU Model
Circuit
Breaker a
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on of
Integrated
Equipment
Power
Consumpti
on for the
Typical
Configurati
on
1 x OptiX OSN
8800 T16+ 3 x
OptiX OSN 6800
+ 2 x DCM frame
TN16
Two 63 A and
six 32 A
circuit
breakers
5000 W
< 4000 W
4 x OptiX OSN
6800 + 1 x DCM
frame
TN11
Four 63 A
circuit
breakers
4800 W
< 4000 W
3 x OptiX OSN
6800 + 2 x CRPC
frame + 3 x DCM
frame
TN11
Four 63 A
circuit
breakers
4800 W
< 4000 W
a: This column lists the number of circuit breakers required on the PDF.
b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum
power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated
equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment can not exceed the maximum
power consumption.
NOTE
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption.
Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the
formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh).
Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in
normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the
device under extreme conditions.

Table 1-2 lists the technical specifications of the N63B cabinet. A 400 mm enclosure frame can
be put in the upper part of the N63B cabinet, which increases the height of the cabinet to 2600
mm. With the added enclosure frame, the cabinet weighs 66 kg.
Figure 1-2 shows the appearance of the 400 mm enclosure frame.
Table 1-2 Technical specifications
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Specification
Dimensions
600 mm (W) x 300 mm (D) x 300 mm (H)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1 N63B Cabinet
Item
Specification
Weight (kg)
60 kg
Standard working voltage
-48 V DC or -60 V DC
Working voltage range
-40 V DC to -72 V DC
Figure 1-2 Enclosure frame appearance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

2 N66B Cabinet
N66B Cabinet
About This Chapter

2.1 Appearance
300-119 standard.
2.2 Configuration
TTypical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

2 N66B Cabinet
2.1 Appearance
300-119 standard.
The following subracks can be installed on the N66B cabinet: OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiX
OSN 8800 T32, OptiX OSN 8800 T16, and OptiX OSN 6800.
The N66B cabinet consists of the rack (main frame), open-close type front and rear doors, and
side panels at the left and right sides.
Cabinet doors and side panels can be disassembled. The front door and side panels have
grounding points. Keys to the front and rear doors of all N63B cabinets are the same.
Figure 2-1 shows the appearance of the N66B cabinet.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

2 N66B Cabinet
Figure 2-1 N66B cabinet appearance
2.2 Configuration
TTypical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack
Table 2-1 lists the typical configurations of the N66B cabinet.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

2 N66B Cabinet
Table 2-1 Typical configurations of the N66B cabinet

Typic
al
Confi
gurat
ion
Number of
Subracks and
Frames
PDU
Mode
Circuit
Breaker a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n of
Integrated
Equipment b
Power
Consumptio
n for the
Typical
Configuratio
n
1 x OptiX OSN
8800 T64 + 2 x
OptiX OSN 8800
T32 + 2 x DCM
frame
TN16
Sixteen 63
A circuit
breakers
10800 W
< 6000 W
1 x OptiX OSN
8800 T64 + 4 x
OptiX OSN 6800
+ 4 x DCM frame
TN16
Eight 63 A
and eight 32
A circuit
breakers
10800 W
< 6000 W
1 x OptiX OSN
8800 T64 + 4 x
OptiX OSN 8800
T16 + 2 x DCM
frame
TN16
Sixteen 63
A circuit
breakers
10000 W
< 6000 W
a: This column lists the number of circuit breakers required on the PDF.
b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum
power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated
equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment do not exceed the maximum
power consumption.
NOTE
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption.
Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the
formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh).
Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in
normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the
device under extreme conditions.

Table 2-2 lists the technical specifications of the N66B cabinet.
Table 2-2 Technical specifications
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Specification
Dimensions
600 mm (W) x 600 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2 N66B Cabinet
Item
Specification
Weight (kg)
85 kg
Standard working voltage
-48 V DC or -60 V DC

10
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

3 Fiber Management Frame
Fiber Management Frame
Used with an N63B or N66B cabinet, a fiber management frame can enhance the fiber capacity
of the N63B or N66B cabinet and make fiber installation and routing more flexible.
Appearance
There are two types of fiber management frames: left-side fiber management frame and rightside fiber management frame. Fiber management frames are used together with N63B and N66B
cabinets, as shown in Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 3-1 Fiber management frames used with the N63B cabinet
3
1
2
1. Left-side fiber management frame
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2. Right-side fiber management frame

3. Fiber spool unit
12
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 3-2 Fiber management frames used with the N66B cabinet
2
1
1,3. Left-side fiber management frame
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2,4. Right-side fiber management frame

13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Functions and features

Table 3-1 lists the functions and features of a fiber management frame.
Table 3-1 Functions and features
Item
Description
Structure feature
l Fiber spool units in a fiber management frame can be adjusted based

on device position in the cabinet.
l A fiber management frame can protect fibers and meet the
requirement for a minimum of 30 mm bending radius.
l A fiber management frame makes fiber spooling more flexible.
Fiber capacity
Internal fiber capacity a
Without a fiber management frame

b: 320 PCS
With a fiber management frame C:
640 PCS
External fiber capacity a
Without a fiber management frame

b: 720 PCS
With a fiber management frame C:
1408 PCS
a: A fiber with a diameter of 2 mm is used as an example to calculate how many internal and
external fibers that can be configured at most. An internal fiber is a fiber used inside a subrack
or between subracks, and an external fiber is a fiber connecting one equipment cabinet to
other equipment.
b: Fibers in Overhead Cabling Mode can be configured at most.
c: An N63B cabinet configured with left-side and right-side fiber management frames is used
as an example to calculate how many internal and external fibers can be configured at most.
Two routing fiber cabinets can be installed on the left and right sides of one N66B cabinet.
In this configuration, a maximum of 1280 internal and 2816 external fibers can configured.
Configuration Principle
Left-side and right-side fiber management frames are installed to the left and right of a cabinet
respectively. Fiber management frames can be used with N63B or N66B cabinet only. You can
determine whether to configure a fiber management frame based on the required fiber capacity.
Observe the following rules when configuring an 80-channel system (fibers with 2 mm diameters
are used as an example):
l
When N63B cabinets are used, fiber management frames must be used for overhead cabling
if more than 320 internal fibers and 720 external fibers are required.
When N66B cabinets are used, fiber management frames must be used for overhead cabling
if more than 640 internal fibers and 1440 external fibers are required.
In addition, observe the following rules when configuring fiber management frames:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

14
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For new network deployment or network expansion, or during network maintenance, fiber
management frames can be configured if the free space on the two sides of a cabinet is
large enough for users to flexibly and freely install and route fibers.
For underfloor cabling, fiber management frames must be used to manage external fibers
because there is not much space left inside the cabinet after the external power cables are
arranged in the cabinet.
NOTE
l Left-side and right-side fiber management frames must be configured at the same time.
l During cabinet expansion, spool internal cascading fibers and external fibers in the fiber management
frames.
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of a fiber management frame are as follows:
l
Outline dimensions: 150 mm (W) x 300 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H).
Weight: 23 kg
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4 DC PDU
DC PDU
About This Chapter

There are three types of power distribution units (PDUs): TN16, TN51 and TN11. The
availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the
product manager of your Huawei local office.
l
The TN51PDU and TN16PDU use the same front panel and provide the same functions,
but they are different in height. The two boards apply to the same scenarios. This manual
uses the TN16PDU board as an example for illustration.
The TN16PDU is used for a cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 8800 subracks or a cabinet
housing OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
The TN11PDU is used only for a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
4.1 TN16PDU
The TN16PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the
cabinet.
4.2 TN11PDU
cabinet.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

16
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4 DC PDU
4.1 TN16PDU
cabinet.
NOTE
The TN51PDU and TN16PDU have the same functions but differ in height. The TN51PDU is 133.4 mm
high. When two OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are installed on a cabinet, one more DCM frame can be
configured if the TN16PDU is used, compared with the TN51PDU.
TN51PDU can be substituted by the TN16PDU.This topic describes the TN16PDU.
The TN16PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive
four -48V/-60V power supplies and output four power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
Whether short-circuiting copper bars are required is determined by the current of power supplied
by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room:
l
When eight 63 A power supplies are provided, no short-circuiting copper bar is required.
When four 125 A power supplies are provided, short-circuiting copper bars are required
for dividing one 125 A power supply into two 63 A power supplies.
For more information about short-circuiting copper bars, see Short-Circuiting Copper
Bar.
Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the TN16PDU.

Figure 4-1 Front panel of the TN16PDU
Power supply Power supply
output area switch area
+
1
+
2
+
3
Power supply
input area
Power supply Power supply

switch area
output area
A
1. Output cable terminal block
+
2
+
3
+
4
B
2. Input cable terminal block
3. Power switch
Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 100 mm (H)
Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output cable terminal
blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.
Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four input cable terminal
blocks and receive four -48V/-60V DC power supplies, eight -48V/-60V DC power supplies
in total.
Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output power switches to control
power supplies for subracks inside the cabinet and provide overcurrent protection for each
other.
Figure 4-2 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN16PDU.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4 DC PDU
Figure 4-2 TN16PDU internal pin assignments
OUTPUT B
OUTPUT A
-
1
+
ON
ON ON
ON
2
+
3
+
4
+
1
+
INPUT A
2
+
3
+
4
+
ON
INPUT B
ON ON
ON
OUTPUT A
+
OUTPUT B
OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF
1
-
INPUT A
INPUT B
Short-Circuit Copper Bar

If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies
in total. In this case, short-circuit copper bars are required for both A and B. Figure 4-3 shows
the appearance of the short-circuiting copper bar.
Figure 4-3 Appearance
Copper Plate
4.2 TN11PDU
cabinet.
DC PDU
The TN11PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive
two -48V/-60V power supplies and output six power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
Whether junction boxes are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power
supply equipment in the telecommunications room:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

18
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4 DC PDU
If a power supply is 63 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power
supplies in total. In this case, no junction box is required.
If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power
supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for dividing one 125 A current
into four 32 A currents.
For more information about junction boxes, see Junction Box.
Figure 4-4 shows the front panel of the TN11PDU.

Figure 4-4 Front panel of the TN11PDU
1
1. Output cable terminal block
2. Ground screw
3. Input cable terminal block
4. Power switch
Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 131 mm (H)
Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six output cable terminal
blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.
Ground screw: used to connect (protection ground) PGND cables.
Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have two input cable terminal
blocks and receive two -48V/-60V DC power supplies, four -48V/-60V DC power supplies
in total.
Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six power output switches (corresponding
to the six output cable terminal blocks) to control power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 6800, both A and B only use power switches SW2, SW3, SW4, and SW5 to
control power supplies for four subracks from bottom to top.
Figure 4-5 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN11PDU.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4 DC PDU
Figure 4-5 TN11PDU internal pin assignments

OUTPUT
+- +- +
+- +
OUTPUT
+- +- +
ON
+- +
ON
OFF
+
INPUT
OFF
INPUT
Junction Box
If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies
in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for both A and B. Figure 4-6 shows the junction
box structure and Figure 4-7 shows the installation position of the junction box.
Figure 4-6 Structure
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

20
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4 DC PDU
Figure 4-7 Installation position
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5 UPM
UPM
The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/
220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM
is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or requires
batteries.
Application
Figure 5-1 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800.
Figure 5-1 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800
OptiX OSN equipment
110V/220V
UPM
Backplane
-48V
PIU
Board A
-48V
PIU
Board B
-48V
Appearance
The UPM is a special power supply system and EPS75-4815AF is one type of the UPM.
The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 2000 W. The EPS75-4815AF
power system is 3U high. Figure 5-2 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

22
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5 UPM
Figure 5-2 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Functions and Features

UPM can work with storage batteries . When the external AC power system supplies power
normally, the batteries store power. When the 110 V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the
batteries can supply power for 3 to 4 hours. To supply power to the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/
6800 equipment, only one power system is required to be connected to the batteries.
The standard maximum configuration of each EPS75-4815AF power system includes five
rectifier modules and one monitoring module.
NOTE
The batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF. Therefore, the batteries need to be configured separately.
If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment
cabinet is reserved for the batteries.
Table 5-1 provides the functions and features of the UPM.

Table 5-1 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and
Feature
EPS75-4815AF
Hot-swappable
function
The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you

replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still
work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is
improved.
Storage battery
protection function
The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the
mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment
automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the
equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a capacity
of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah.
Loading capacity
The loading capability of each rectifier module is 800 W.

23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5 UPM
Function and
Feature
EPS75-4815AF
Lightning-proof
function
The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector.

The rectifier module can bear the 1.2/50 us x 6 kV or 8/20 us x 3 kA
lightning surge. When the lightning current enters the rectifier module
along with the power cable, install category-C and category-B light
arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system
to prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct lightning strike from
damaging the rectifier module.
Working Principle and Signal Flow

The UPM is fed by one 220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts the input
power into 48 V DC voltage to provide four DC branches and one battery branch.
When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage
battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings. The
monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage battery loop,
and load loop.
In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is
connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply
fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring module
reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the battery voltage starts
to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring module reports the DC
undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery group enables the poweroff protection function to interrupt the connection between the battery group and the equipment.
As a result, the batteries are automatically protected.
When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.
Interfaces and Indicators

Figure 5-3 shows the rear view of the GIE4805S power system (subject to the UPM on site).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

24
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5 UPM
Figure 5-3 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system
1. Control miniature circuit breaker

(MCB) of the AC input (30 A)
2. Control MCB of the battery 3. Control MCB of load 1 (10 A)

branch (80 A)
4. Control MCB of load 2 (30 A)
5. Control MCB of load 3 (40 6. Control MCB of load 4 (40 A)

A)
7. AC phase line terminal
8. AC zero line terminal
9. Negative 48 V terminal of the battery

branch
10. Negative 48 V terminal of the load 11. Positive 48 V terminal of

branch
the battery branch
12. Positive 48 V terminal of the load

branch
13. Connecting terminal of the

protection grounding cable
15. Communication interface (COM)
14. DB44 signal interface
16. Communication test interface

(TEST)
Interfaces
The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has seven interfaces. Table 5-2 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF.
Table 5-2 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
Power
input
interface
Power interface
"7" and "8" indicate the AC mains

input terminals, which access 110 V/
220 V AC power.

25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
5 UPM
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
Power
output
interface
Power interface
The power output interfaces are in the

lower left corner on the front panel of
the UPM. The terminals indicated by
"9" and "11" constitute a battery
interface, through which the power
system is connected to the battery
input socket at the back of the storage
battery box through a battery cable.
"10" and "12" indicate the output
interfaces of four loads. The output
interfaces can supply power to the
OptiX OSN equipment by using
power cables.
Connectin
g terminal
of the
protection
grounding
cable
Power interface
The UPM is grounded through the

cabinet.
DB44
signal
interface
DB44
The backplane of the subrack can be

connected to the sensor transfer box
(an optional device) through the DB44
signal interface and to the monitoring
module through the 96-pin DIN
connector. In addition, the sensor
transfer box can be connected to
multiple sensors. As a result, the
monitoring function is extended.
Communi
cation
interface
(COM)
RJ-45
It is used for communication with the

PC. The COM interface can adopt the
RS-485 communication mode or
RS-232 communication mode. Three
baud rates are available, namely, 4800
kbit/s, 9600 kbit/s, and 19200 kbit/s.
The baud rate can be adjusted and the
default baud rate is 9600 kbit/s.
Communi
cation test
interface
(TEST)
RJ-45
It is used for internal test.

26
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5 UPM
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
Switch
button
Button
The switch buttons are on the left of

the UPM, as shown in Figure 5-3. "1"
indicates the control MCB of the AC
input (30 A), which enables and
disables the input of the AC mains
supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5" indicate
the load control switches, which
enable and disable the load output.
Indicators
The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators:
l
Running status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) one color (yellow)
Faulty state indicator (FAULT) one color (red)
The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators:
l
Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) one color (red)
Power supply system status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Valid Slots
The UPM is case shaped. Therefore, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack.
Technical Specifications
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output
power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W.
Table 5-3 lists the power parameters of the UPM.
Table 5-3 Power parameters of the UPM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Parameter
Value
Voltage range
of the AC input
90-290 V AC
AC input
One single-phase three-wire system: 45-65 Hz
Rated input
current
28 A
Output
nominal
voltage
53.50.5 V

27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5 UPM
Parameter
Value
Rated output
current
DC output branches
Load MCB 1: 10 A
Load MCB 2: 30 A
Load MCB 3: 40 A
Load MCB 4: 40 A
Battery MCB: 80 A
Total output DC current
37.53 A to 753 A
Regulated
voltage
precision
1%
Non-balance of
load sharing
5% (50%-100% load)
Rated
efficiency of
the integrated
equipment
89%
Power factor
0.99 (nominal input or output)
Peak-to-peak
noise voltage
200 mV (within the range of 20 MHz)
Electrical
network
adjustment rate
0.1%
Lightning
protection
performance
When the UPM works alone, the input end can bear the simulated lightning
surge current whose waveform is 8/20s and amplitude is 5 kA for five
times in both directions. The interval between two surges must be at least
one minute. If the lightning surge current is higher than the preceding
indexes, the UPM may be damaged and cannot work normally.
Cooling
method
The fan that is embedded in the rectifier module cools the module.
The mechanical specifications of the UPM are as follows:
l
Dimensions of the UPM: 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 133 mm (H) (17.2 in. (W) x 10.0
in. (D) x 5.2 in. (H))
Weight: 15 kg (33.1 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

28
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack
About This Chapter

6.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
6.4 PIU
PIU: power interface unit
6.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces
The equipment provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment
maintenance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


6.1.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Each subrack has independent
power supply.
Figure 6-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Figure 6-1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack structure
5
3
4
1. Board area
2. Fiber cabling area
3. Fan tray assembly
4. Air filter
5. Fiber spool
6. Mounting ear
Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 93 slots are available.
Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed
to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack.
Fan tray assembly: Four fan tray assemblies are available for this subrack. Each fan tray
assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack.
The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and
related information.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 6.1.3 Subrack Environment Control System
(Fan).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

30
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.
Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in
the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack.
Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
Table 6-1 describes the technical specifications of the 8800 T64 subrack.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the
same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with
the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the normal temperature. Maximum power consumption
indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in the extreme environment.
Table 6-1 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
Item
Specification
Dimensions
498 mm (W) 580 mm (D) 900 mm (H)

(19.6 in. (W) 22.8 in. (D) 35.4 in. (H))
Weight (empty subracka)
65 kg (143 lb.)
Maximum subrack power consumptionb
9600 W
Recommended typical configuration power

consumption (OTN)
less than 4000 W

consumption (OCS)
less than 3200 W
Rated working current
200 A (four 50 A switched-mode power

supplies)
Nominal working voltage
-48V DC/-60V DC
-40V DC to -72V DC
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly
or air filter is installed.
b: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption
configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability of
the subracks. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption
of the subrack in typical configuration.
Table 6-2 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the 8800
T64.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 6-2 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Unit Name
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n at 25C (77
F) (W)a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n at 55C
(131F) (W)a
Remarks
Subrack
OTU
subrack
1804.6
3135.9
It is the power consumed after

you install thirty-two LDXes,
one SCC, eight PIUs, two
AUXes, one EFI1, one EFI2,
one ATE and four fan tray
assemblies in an OTU subrack.
OTU
subrack
1839.1
3084.7

you install two XCTs, two
SXMs, twenty NQ2s, one SCC,
eight PIUs, five TOAs, five
TQXes, two AUXes, one EFI1,
one EFI2, one ATE and four fan
tray assemblies in an OTU
subrack.
OTM
subrack
963.78
2168.28

you install one M40V, one D40,
one OAU1, one OBU1, twelve
LDXes, one SCC, one SC2, four
PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one
EFI2, one ATE and four fan tray
assemblies in an OTM subrack.
2169.9

you install two SXMs, twenty
SLD64s, eight SLO16s, four
SLQ16s, four SLH41s, four
EGSHes, two STGs, one STI,
two SCCs, eight PIUs, two
AUXes, one EFI1, one EFI2,
one ATE and four fan tray
assemblies in an OCS system.
OCS System
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and
cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
6.1.2 Slot Description

The board area and the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provides 93 slots.
Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack are shown in Figure 6-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

32
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 6-2 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

Front
Back
IU91
PIU
PIU
EFI2
IU69
IU70
IU71
IU
19
IU
1
IU
20
IU
2
IU
21
IU
3
IU
22
IU
4
IU
23
IU
5
IU
24
IU
6
A
U
X
IU
72
IU
25
IU
7
IU
73
IU93
SCC
STG
IU74
IU75
IU
26
IU
27
IU
28
EF
I1
IU
76
IU
77
IU
29
IU
30
PIU
PIU
PIU
PIU
STI
IU78
IU79
IU80
IU81
IU82
IU
31
IU
32
IU
33
IU
34
IU
53
IU
54
IU
55
IU
56
IU
57
IU
58
A
U
X
IU
83
IU
59
IU
84
SCC
STG
IU85
IU86
IU
60
XCT
SXM
XCT
SXM
IU
9
IU
10
IU
43
IU
44
IU
8
IU
11
IU
12
IU
13
IU
14
IU
15
IU
16
IU
17
IU
18
IU
35
IU
36
IU
37
IU
38
IU
39
IU
40
IU
41
IU90
IU
42
ATE
IU87
PIU
PIU
IU88
IU89
IU
61
IU
62
IU
63
IU
64
IU
65
IU
66
IU
67
IU
68
IU
45
IU
46
IU
47
IU
48
IU
49
IU
50
IU
51
IU
52
IU92
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, and IU45-IU68 are reserved for service boards.
IU71 is reserved for the EFI2.
IU87 is reserved for the ATE.
IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81, IU88, and IU89 are reserved for the PIU.
IU72 and IU83 are reserved for the AUX.
IU73, IU77 and IU84 are reserved for future use.
IU75 and IU86 are reserved for the STG.
IU82 is reserved for the STI.
IU74 and IU85 are reserved for the SCC.
IU9 and IU43 are reserved for the XCT.
IU10 and IU44 are reserved for the SXM or SXH.
IU90-IU93 are reserved for the fans.
6.1.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has four fan areas. In each subrack, the lower fan area
consists of the fan tray assembly and the air filter, and the upper fan area consists of one fan tray
assembly. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51.

Table 6-3 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 6-3 Functions

Function
Description
Basic function
Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that

the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature
range.
Commissioning control
l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed

regulation, depending on the subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan
speed.
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide

efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is
independently regulated.
Hot swapping
Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly.
Alarming
Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information.
Status checking
Checks and reports on the fan status.
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly implements heat dissipation on a subrack, which allows the subrack to
operate normally within the designated temperature range. The lower fan tray assembly blows
air up. The fan tray assembly located on the upper part of the subrack uses a pulling mechanism.
The two fan tray assemblies form an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack
are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure
reliable heat dissipation.
Figure 6-3 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
Figure 6-3 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Fan tray assembly
Board
Area
Fan tray assembly
Optical fiber
laying area
Air inlet
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

34
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 6-4. The partitioned
speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate
fans in Auto Speed Mode by default.
Table 6-4 FAN speed mode
FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode
Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the

temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed.
l If the ambient temperature is lower than 25C (77F), the fans run at
low speed.
l If the ambient temperature is higher than 45C (113F), the fans run
at high speed.
l If the ambient temperature is from 25C to 45C (77F to 113 F),
the fans adjust the rotating speed to help ensure that the heat
dissipation of each board continues to be stable. This automatic
adjustment also helps ensure that the equipment runs quietly and
consumes less energy than the manually adjustable fan mode.
Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.
If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed.
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Six fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low
Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You
can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in
all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned
manual fan speed adjustment.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has two sides. Each side has three partitions. See Figure
6-4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 6-4 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
IU91
FAN2
FAN1
IU69
IU70
IU19 IU20
IU21
IU71
IU22 IU23
IU24
IU72
IU74
IU73
IU25 IU26
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU7
FAN3
IU75
IU27
IU9
IU76
IU77
IU28 IU29
IU30
IU78
IU31
FAN2
FAN1
IU80
IU79
IU32 IU33
IU34
IU53 IU54
IU81
IU55
IU82
IU56 IU57
IU58
IU83
FAN3
IU86
IU87
IU61
IU62 IU63
IU45
IU46
IU88
IU89
IU64
IU65
IU66 IU67
IU68
IU47 IU48
IU49
IU50 IU51
IU52
IU43 IU44
IU11
FAN5
IU85
IU59 IU60
IU12
IU13 IU14
IU15
IU16 IU17
IU18
IU35 IU36
IU37 IU38
IU39 IU40
IU41 IU42
IU50
FAN4
IU84
IU10
IU8
IU93
Back
Front
IU50
FAN6
FAN4
IU90
FAN5
FAN6
IU92
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, a cabinet has two sides (front and back). The fan tray assemblies
IU90 and IU91 are on the front and the fan tray assemblies IU92 and IU93 are on the back. The
fans in the four fan tray assemblies dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where
the fans reside. FAN1 and FAN4 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU1-IU6, IU19IU24, and IU69-IU71. FAN2 and FAN5 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU7IU12, IU25-IU28, and IU72-IU75. FAN3 and FAN6 dissipate heat generated by the boards in
slots IU13-IU18, IU29-IU34, and IU76-IU79. FAN7 and FAN10 dissipate heat generated by
the boards in slots IU35-IU40, IU53-IU58, and IU80-IU82. FAN8 and FAN11 dissipate heat
generated by the boards in slots IU41-IU46, IU59-IU62, and IU83-IU86. FAN9 and FAN12
dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU47-IU52, IU63-IU68, and IU87-IU89.
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F).
Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations:
l
Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.
One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run
at the same speed.
The fan tray assembly consists of three fans and one fan control unit. Figure 6-5 shows the
functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

36
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 6-5 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly

Status signal
Speed adjusting signal
Fan control unit
Status signal
FAN
External power External power

supply 1
supply 2
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the
fan tray assembly.
Fan control board:

Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals.
Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case,
the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed.
Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan
tray assembly.
Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the
fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 6-6 shows a fan tray assembly.
Figure 6-6 Fan tray assembly
3
SYSTEM
1. Air filter
2. Operating status indicators
3. Fans (three in total)
NOTE
Only the lower fan tray assembly has the air filter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU90 IU91,
IU92 and IU93 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly

Table 6-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly.
NOTE
same. Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly

Item
Specification
Dimensions
493.7 mm (W) x 280.5 mm (D) x 64.0 mm (H) (19.4 in. (W) x

11.0 in. (D) x 2.5 in. (H))
Weight
3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)
Power Consumptiona
l 70 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed

l 95 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed
l 150 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed
l 225 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed
l 347 W when the fans rotate at High Speed
a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured,
rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully
configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high
ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 347 W.

6.2.1 Structure
power supply.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

38
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 6-7 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack structure diagram
1
5
3
4
1. Board area
4. Air filter
5. Fiber spool
6. Mounting ear
Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that
indicate fan status and related information.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 6.2.3 Subrack Environment Control System
(Fan).
Table 6-6 describes the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with
the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the normal temperature. Maximum power consumption
indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in the extreme environment.
Item
Specification
Dimensions
498 mm (W) 295 mm (D) 900 mm (H)

(19.6 in. (W) 11.6 in. (D) 35.4 in. (H))
35 kg (77.1 lb.)
4800 W

consumption (OTN)
less than 3000 W

consumption (OCS)
less than 2400 W
100 A (two 50 A switched-mode power

supplies)
-48V DC/-60V DC
-40V DC to -72V DC
the subrack. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption
T32.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

40
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 6-7 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 8800
T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit Name
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n at 25C (77
F) (W)a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n at 55C
(131F) (W)a
Remarks
Subrack
OTU
subrack
1633.4
2408.6

you install thirty-two LDXes,
one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX,
one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE
and two fan tray assemblies in
an OTU subrack.
OTU
electrical
crossconnect
subrack
1641.6
2320.5

you install two XCHes, twenty
NQ2s, one SCC, four PIUs, five
TQXes, five TOAs, one AUX,
one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE
and two fan tray assemblies in
an OTU electrical crossconnection subrack.
OTM
subrack
792.5
1441.1

you install one M40V, one D40,
one OAU1, one OBU1, twelve
LDXes, one SCC, four PIUs,
one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2,
one ATE and two fan tray
assemblies in an OTM subrack.
OLA
subrack
290.3
860

you install four OBU1s, four
VA1s, one SC2, one SCC, four
EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray
assemblies in an OLA subrack.
OADM
subrack
974
1651.2

you install two OAU1s, two
MR8Vs, sixteen LDXes, one
SC2, one SCC, four PIUs, one
AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one
ATE and two fan tray
assemblies in an OADM
subrack.

41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit Name
OCS System
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n at 25C (77
F) (W)a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n at 55C
(131F) (W)a
Remarks
378.2
965

you install two M40Vs, two
D40s, two FIUs, one SC2, two
RMU9s, two WSM9s, two
OAU1s, two OBU1s, one SCC,
four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1,
one EFI2, one ATE and two fan
tray assemblies in an OADM
subrack.
373.1
460.6

you install two M40s, two
D40s, two WSMD9s, two
DAS1s, one SCC, four PIUs,
one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2,
one ATE and two fan tray
assemblies in an OADM
subrack.
1507.4

you install two XCMs, ten
SLQ64s, eight SLO16s, two
SLH41s, two EGSHes, two
STGs, one STI, two SCCs, four
EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray
assemblies in an OCS system.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

42
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


IU51
AUX
EFI2
EFI1
PIU
PIU
IU37
IU38
IU39
IU40
OTU OTU OTU
OTU OTU OTU OTU
IU20 IU21
IU23 IU24
IU22
IU25
STG
STG
IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44
OTU
IU26 IU27
PIU
PIU
STI
ATE
IU45
IU46
IU47
IU48
SCC OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
IU28 IU29
IU30 IU31
IU32
IU33
IU34 IU35
IU36
OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
IU14 IU15
IU16
IU17 IU18
IU19
XCH/ XCH/
XCM XCM
IU9
IU10
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
SCC OTU
OTU OTU
IU1
IU3
IU4
IU6
IU7
IU11 IU12
IU13
IU2
IU5
IU8
IU50
IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36 are reserved for service boards.
IU47 is reserved for the STI.
IU39, IU40, IU45 and IU46 are reserved for the PIU.
IU41 is reserved for the AUX.
IU42 and IU44 are reserved for the STG.
IU43 is reserved for future use.
IU28 is reserved for the active SCC.
IU11 is available for the standby SCC or the other boards.
IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the XCH/XCM.
IU50 and IU51 are reserved for the fans.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has two fan areas. In each subrack, the lower fan area
consists of the fan tray assembly and the air filter, and the upper fan area consists of one fan tray
assembly. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.
Version Description

Table 6-8 Functions
Function
Description
Basic function

range.

speed.
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide

Hot swapping
Alarming
Status checking
Working Principle
operate normally within the designated temperature range. The lower fan tray assembly blows
air up. The fan tray assembly located on the upper part of the subrack uses a pulling mechanism.
The two fan tray assemblies form an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack
are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure
reliable heat dissipation.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

44
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Air outlet
Fan tray assembly
Board
Area
Fan tray assembly
Optical fiber
laying area
Air inlet
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 6-9. The partitioned
speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate
fans in Auto Speed Mode by default.
FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode

low speed.
at high speed.
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Six fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low

45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is divided into three partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
The subrack adopts two fan tray assemblies to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See
Figure 6-10.
FAN2
FAN1
IU37
IU20 IU21
IU38
IU22
IU39
IU23 IU24
IU40
IU25
IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44
IU26 IU27
IU9
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU7
IU51
FAN3
IU45
IU46
IU28 IU29
IU30 IU31
IU11 IU12
IU13
IU47
IU48
IU32
IU33
IU34 IU35
IU36
IU14 IU15
IU16
IU17 IU18
IU19
IU10
IU8
IU50
FAN4
FAN5
FAN6
IU50
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, the fans on the two fan tray assemblies in slots IU50 and IU51
dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. FAN1 and FAN4
dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU-IU6, IU20-IU25, and IU37-IU40. FAN2 and
FAN5 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU7-IU12, IU26-IU29, and IU41-IU45.
FAN3 and FAN6 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU13-IU19, IU30-IU36, and
IU46-IU49.
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations:
l
Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.
One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run
at the same speed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

46
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Status signal
Fan control unit
Status signal
FAN

supply 1
supply 2
fan tray assembly.
Fan control board:

tray assembly.
Appearance
3
SYSTEM
1. Air filter
3. Fans (three in total)
NOTE
Only the lower fan tray assembly has the air filter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU50 and
IU51 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

NOTE

Item
Specification
Dimensions

11.0 in. (D) x 2.5 in. (H))
Weight
3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)
Power Consumptiona

l 95 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed
l 225 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed

6.3.1 Structure
power supply.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

48
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 6-13 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack structure diagram
5
2
3
4
1. Board area
4. Air filter
5. Fiber spool
6. Mounting ear
Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that
indicate fan status and related information.
Table 6-11 describes the technical specifications of the 8800 T16 subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Specification
Dimensions
498 mm (W) 295 mm (D) 450 mm (H)

(19.6 in. (W) 11.6 in. (D) 17.7 in. (H))
18 kg (39.6 lb.)
1800 W

consumption
700 W
37.5 A
-48V DC/-60V DC
-40V DC to -72V DC
the subrack. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption
T16.
Table 6-12 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Unit Name
Subrack
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Typical
Power
Consumpt
ion at 25C
(77F) (W)a
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(131F) (W)
Remarks
OTU subrack
509.2
615.6
It is the power consumed after you

install eight 10G OTUs (LDXes),
one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX,
one EFI, one ATE and one fan
tray assembly in an OTU subrack.
OTN
electrical
cross-connect
subrack
501
808

install five NQ2s, two XCHes,
two PIUs, one TQX, two TOAs,
one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and
one fan tray assembly in an OTN
electrical cross-connect subrack.

50
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit Name
Typical
Power
Consumpt
ion at 25C
(77F) (W)a
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(131F) (W)
Remarks
OTM subrack
468.7
569.7

install one M40V, one D40, one
OAU1, one OBU1, six LDXes,
tray assembly in an OTM
subrack.
OLA subrack
228.1
294.3

install four OBU1s, four VA1s,
one SC2, two FIUs, one XCH,
two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one
ATE and one fan tray assembly in
an OLA subrack.
OADM
subrack
449.5
561.5

install two OAU1s, two MR8vs,
two FIUs, eight LSXes, one SC2,
tray assembly in an OADM
subrack.
221
269.2

install one M40, one D40, one
WSMD9, one DAS1, one XCH,
two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one
ATE and one fan tray assembly in
an OADM subrack.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IU20
PIU
IU19
EFI
IU21
AUX
IU22
AUX
IU9
IU
1
IU
2
IU
3
IU
4
IU
5
IU
6
IU
7
IU24
ATE
IU10
IU
8
IU25
IU23
PIU
IU
IU
IU
IU
11
12
13
14
IU
15
IU
16
IU
17
IU
18
FAN
IU1-IU8, and IU11-IU18 are reserved for service boards.
IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the XCH/SCC or for the other service boards.
NOTE
Slots IU9 and IU10 can be used to house other service boards only when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions
as a slave subrack.
Each of slots IU9 and IU10 must be filled with a filler panel when they are used to house service boards.
IU19 is reserved for the EFI.
IU20 and IU23 are reserved for the PIU.
IU21 and IU22 are reserved for the AUX.
IU25 is reserved for the fans.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack has one fan area. The fan area consists of the fan tray
assembly and the air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.
Version Description

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

52
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 6-13 Functions

Function
Description
Basic function

range.

speed.
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide

Hot swapping
Alarming
Status checking
Working Principle
operate normally within the designated temperature range. The fan tray assembly is installed in
the lower part of the subrack and blows air up, creating an air duct from bottom to top. Other
boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This
design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation.
Air outlet
Board area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 6-14. The
partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that
you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode

low speed.
at high speed.
Five fan speed modes are available: Low Speed, Medium-Low
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure
6-16.
IU20
PIU
IU19
EFI
IU21
AUX
IU22
AUX
IU9
IU
1
IU
2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
IU
3
IU
4
IU
5
IU
6
IU
7
IU23
PIU
IU24
ATE
IU10
IU
8
IU
IU
IU
IU
11
12
13
14

IU
15
IU
16
IU
17
IU
18
Fan tray
assembly
54
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, there are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two
fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive
hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F).
Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
Status signal
Fan control unit
Status signal
FAN

supply 1
supply 2
fan tray assembly.
Fan control board:

tray assembly.
Appearance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

SYSTEM
1
1. Air filter
3. Fans (ten in total)
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU25 in the
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

NOTE

Item
Specification
Dimensions
493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W)

x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))
Weight
3.6 kg (7.9)
Power Consumptiona
l 42.7 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed

l 74.8 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed
l 106.8 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed
l 165.5 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed
l 256.3 W when the fans rotate at High Speed
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 256.3 W.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

56
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6.4 PIU
6.4.1 Version Description

The functional versions of the PIU board are TN16 and TN51.
Table 6-16 lists the version description of the PIU board.
Table 6-16 Version description of the PIU board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the PIU board are TN16 and TN51.
This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the
availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the
boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office.
Difference
l Function:
Only the TN16PIU supports the intelligent ammeter function. For
details, see 6.4.3 Functions and Features.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see PIU
Specification.
Replacement
Table 6-17 lists the substitution rules for the PIU board.
Table 6-17 Substitution rules of the PIU board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN51PIU
TN16PIU
The TN16PIU can be created as TN51PIU on the NMS. The

former can substitute for the latter, without any software
upgrade. After substitution, the TN16PIU functions as the
TN51PIU.
TN16PIU
None
6.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 is configured with eight PIU boards. The eight boards provide power
supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup. The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is configured with four
PIU boards. The four boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup. The
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies
to the system with 1+1 hot backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6.4.3 Functions and Features

The PIU board accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering functions.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-18.
Table 6-18 Functions and features of the PIU board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning

protection and power filtering functions. Unlike the TN51PIU, the
TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which enables the
TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack and
report the power consumption to the system control unit.
NOTE
The overcurrent protection function for the access power supplies of each subrack is realized by the
magnetic circuit breaker of the PDU.
6.4.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the PIU board.
Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-19 shows the front panel of the TN51PIU board.
Figure 6-20 shows the front panel of the TN16PIU board.
Figure 6-19 Front panel of the TN51PIU board
PIU
RTN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
PWR
-48V

58
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 6-20 Front panel of the TN16PIU board

PIU
RTN(+)
PWR
NEG(-)
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l
Power indicator (PWR) - green
Interface
There is only one power interface on the front panel of the PIU board. The interface is used to
access the DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V.
6.4.5 Valid Slots

One slot houses one PIU board.
Table 6-19 and Table 6-20 shows the valid slots for the PIU board.
Table 6-19 Valid slots for the TN51PIU board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU20 and IU23

59
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6.4.6 Specifications of the PIU

Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Performance Specifications
Table 6-21 Performance specifications of the PIU board
Item
Unit
Value
Number of DC input power supplies
Input DC power voltage range
V DC
-40 to -72
Input DC power current
60
l
Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in.
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight:
TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.)
TN16PIU: 0.65 (1.43 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
Consumption at 25C (77
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN51PIU
1.8
1.8
TN16PIU
3.6
6.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance

Interfaces
The equipment provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment
maintenance.
These OptiX OSN 8800 T64 interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800
T64 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI1, EFI2, ATE, and STI, as shown in Figure
6-21.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

60
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 6-21 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

EFI1
EFI2
PIU
53A
PWR
ATE
STI
PIU
RTN
-48V
53A
PWR
-48V
ALMO3
TOD1
ALMI2
CLK1
TOD2
ALMI1 ALMO1
CLK2
ALMO4
ALMO2
NM_ETH1
ETH3
SERIAL
ETH2
LAMP1 LAMP2
ETH1
NM_ETH2
RTN
T32 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI1, EFI2, ATE, and STI, as shown in Figure
6-22.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

61
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


EFI2
EFI1
PIU
ATE
STI
53A
PWR
-48V
ALMO3
TOD1
ALMI2
CLK1
ALMI1 ALMO1
TOD2
ALMO4
ALMO2
ETH3
NM_ETH1
SERIAL
ETH2
CLK2
ETH1
LAMP1 LAMP2
NM_ETH2
RTN
T16 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI, and ATE, as shown in Figure 6-23.
PIU
EFI
NEG(-)
ALMI1
ALMI2
ALMO1
CLK1
TOD1
ALMO3
ALMO4
ALMO2
NM_ETH1
TOD2
LAMP2
ETH3
NM_ETH2
ETH2
CLK2
LAMP1
SERIAL
ETH1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ATE
PWR
RTN(+)

62
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6.5.1 ATE
ATE: Interface Board of Alarm & Timing & Expanding
Version Description
The functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51.
Table 6-22 lists the version description of the ATE board.
Table 6-22 Version description of the ATE board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51.
This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the
availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the
boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office.
Difference
l Appearance:
The number of interfaces varies according to the board version. For
details, see Front Panel.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see ATE
Specification.
Replacement
The TN16ATE and TN51ATE cannot replace each other.
Application
The ATE provides alarm output/concatenation interface and alarm input interface. The
TN16ATE provides interfaces for inputting and outputting clock signals.
Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the
cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display
of alarms.
External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the
external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the ATE board.

Figure 6-24 shows the front panel of the TN51ATE board.
Figure 6-25 shows the front panel of the TN16ATE board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

63
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 6-24 Front panel of the TN51ATE board

ATE
ALMI2
ALMI1
ALMO3
ALMO1
ALMO4
ALMO2
Figure 6-25 Front panel of the TN16ATE board

ATE
ALMI2
ALMI1
ALMO3
TOD2
ALMO4
ALMO1
ALMO2
CLK1
TOD1
CLK2
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the TN51ATE board and there are ten interfaces
on the front panel of the TN16ATE board. Table 6-23 lists the types and functions of each
interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

64
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 6-23 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ATE board
Interface
Type
Function
ALMO1
ALMO4
RJ-45
l Alarm signals can be output either to an alarm

cabinet or an external device through ALMO1
ALMO4. At the alarm cabinet or external device,
all alarms are displayed.
l The definitions for the pins of the ALMO1 and
ALMO2 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces
are used for output/cascading, respectively. The
definitions for the pins of the ALMO3 and ALMO4
interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used
for output/cascading, respectively. For example, if
ALMO1 is used to output alarm signals, ALMO2
can be cascaded to ALMO1 on another subrack.
l The OptiX OSN 8800 provides eight alarm outputs.
Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major
alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved.
Alarm outputs can be cascaded.
ALMI1
ALMI2
RJ-45
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides eight alarm inputs. The

name of the eight alarms can be configured to cooperate
with the external system to implement remote
monitoring of external alarms.
CLK1/CLK2
RJ-45
CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals.

CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they
input and output signals at the same time.
TOD1/TOD2
RJ-45
TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals.

At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input
or output time signals.
Pin assignment of the RJ-45 Connector

Figure 6-26 shows the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector.
Figure 6-26 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin Assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces, refer to Table 6-24.
Table 6-24 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces
Pin
Signal
Function
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP
Outputs the critical alarm

signal positive
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN

signal negative
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP
Outputs the major alarm

signal positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P
Outputs the minor alarm

signal positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N

signal negative
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN

signal negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P
Alarm signal output 1

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N

negative

Table 6-25 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N

negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N

negative

66
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N

negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT6P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT6N

negative
Pin Assignment of the ALMI1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface, refer to Table 6-26.
Table 6-26 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface
Pin
Signal
Function
SWITCHI_IN1
Alarm input 1
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN2
Alarm input 2
SWITCHI_IN3
Alarm input 3
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN4
Alarm input 4
GND
Ground

Table 6-27 Pin assignment of the ALMI2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
SWITCHI_IN5
Alarm input 5
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN6
Alarm input 6
SWITCHI_IN7
Alarm input 7
GND
Ground

67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN8
Alarm input 8
GND
Ground
Pin Assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface, refer to Table 6-28.
Table 6-28 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface
Pin
Signal
Function
RJ0_E1_RX_N
2MHz/2Mbit input negative
RJ0_E1_RX_P
2MHz/2Mbit input positive
NC
Not connected
RJ0_E1_TX_N
2MHz/2Mbit output negative
RJ0_E1_TX_P
2MHz/2Mbit output positive
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Pin Assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface, refer to Table 6-29.
Table 6-29 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
DCLS_IN0_N
DCLS/1PPS input negative
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
DCLS_IN0_P
DCLS/1PPS input positive
DCLS_OUT0_N
DCLS/1PPS output negative

68
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
DCLS_OUT0_P
DCLS/1PPS output positive
Valid Slots
One slot houses one ATE board.
Table 6-30 shows the valid slots for the TN51ATE board.
Table 6-30 Valid slots for the TN51ATE board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU87
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU48
Table 6-31 shows the valid slots for the TN16ATE board.
Table 6-31 Valid slots for the TN16ATE board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU24
Specifications of the ATE

Specifications include dimensions, weight and power consumption.
l
Dimensions of front panel:

TN51ATE: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
TN16ATE: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
Weight:
TN51ATE: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb.)
TN16ATE: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

69
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN51ATE
0.3
0.3
TN16ATE
0.2
0.3
6.5.2 EFI
EFI: EMI Filter Interface Board
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI board is available, that is, TN16.
Application
The EFI provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface,
subrack communication interface and OAM interfaces.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI board.

Figure 6-27 shows the front panel of the EFI board.
Figure 6-27 Front panel of the EFI board
EFI
ETH1
LAMP1
ETH2
LAMP2
SERIAL
NM_ETH1
ETH3
NM_ETH2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

70
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

CAUTION
The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on
a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK
interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be
damaged.
Interfaces
There are eight interfaces on the front panel of the EFI board. Table 6-32 lists the type and
function of each interface.
Table 6-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI board
Interface
Type
Function
LAMP1
LAMP2
RJ-45
Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of

the cabinet that holds the subrack.
ETH1ETH3
RJ-45
l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/

ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding
interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the
communication between the master subrack and
slave subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3
interface cannot be used for the communication between
the master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board

to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP
board.
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
RJ-45
l Connects the network interface on the equipment

through a network cable to that on an NM server so
that the NM can manage the equipment.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network
interface on one NE through a network cable to that
on another NE to achieve communication between
NEs.
SERIAL
DB9
The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25

protocol.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

71
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Pin Assignment of the DB9 Connector

Figure 6-29 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector.
Figure 6-29 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
Pin Assignment of the ETH1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 6-33.
Table 6-33 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH1_TXP
Positive pole for transmitting

the data for ordinary intersubrack communication
ETH1_TXN
Negative pole for

transmitting the data for
ordinary inter-subrack
communication

72
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ETH1_RXP
Positive pole for receiving

ETH1_CRIT_TXP

the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH1_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

emergent inter-subrack
communication
ETH1_RXN
Negative pole for receiving

ETH1_CRIT_RXP

ETH1_CRIT_RXN


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH2_TXP

ETH2_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH2_RXP

ETH2_CRIT_TXP


73
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ETH2_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH2_RXN

ETH2_CRIT_RXP

ETH2_CRIT_RXN


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH3_TXP

ETH3_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH3_RXP

ETH3_CRIT_TXP

ETH3_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH3_RXN


74
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ETH3_CRIT_RXP

ETH3_CRIT_RXN

Pin Assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 6-36.
Table 6-36 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces
Pin
Signal
Function
CRIT_ALMP
Positive pole for critical

alarm signals
CRIT_ALMN
Negative pole for critical

alarm signals
MAJ_ALMP
Positive pole for major alarm

signals
RUNP
Positive pole for power

indicating signals
RUNN
Negative pole for power

indicating signals
MAJ_ALMN
Negative pole for major

alarm signals
MIN_ALMP
Positive pole for minor alarm

signals
MIN_ALMN
Negative pole for minor

alarm signals
Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface, refer to Table 6-37.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

75
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 6-37 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface

Pin
Signal
Function
NM_ETNTXP

the data for communication
with the NM
NM_ETNTXN
Negative pole for

communication with the NM
NM_ETNRXP

with the NM
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NM_ETNRXN

with the NM
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
NMJL_ETNTXP

the concatenated data for
communication with a
network management system
(NM)
NMJL_ETNTXN
Negative pole for

transmitting the concatenated
data for communication with
an NM
NMJL_ETNRXP

communication with an NM
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected

76
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
NMJL_ETNRXN

NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Pin Assignment of the SERIAL Interface

For the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 6-39.
Table 6-39 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface
Pin
Signal
Function
N.C
Not defined
RXD
Receive end
TXD
Transmit end
DTR
Data terminal equipment

ready
GND
Ground
Reserved
Reserved
GND
Ground
N.C
Not defined
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI board.
Table 6-40 shows the valid slots for the EFI board.
Table 6-40 Valid slots for the EFI board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU19
DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

77
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The master and slave subracks are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the
EFI. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI board. The value that
can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these
ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. ID7 and ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID6ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. The value is 000000 by default. "0" indicates
the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 6-30 shows the position of
the DIP switches on the EFI board.
l
The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the T1.
When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
As shown in Figure 6-30, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 0000001, which is 1 in
decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Figure 6-30 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board
U8
SERIAL
SW1
NM_ETH2
SW2
T1
(ID8)
(ID7)
(ID6)
(ID5)
(ID4)
(ID3)
(ID2)
(ID1)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW1
SW2
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave
Subrack" in the Product Description.
Specifications of the EFI

l
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight: 1.1 lb. (0.5 kg)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

78
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
EFI
2.5
6.5.3 EFI1
EFI1: EMI Filter Interface Board
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI1 board is available, that is, TN51.
Application
The EFI1 provides network management and OAM interfaces.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI1 board.

Figure 6-31 shows the front panel of the EFI1 board.
Figure 6-31 Front panel of the EFI1 board
EFI1
NM_ETH2
SERIAL
Interfaces
There are two interfaces on the front panel of the EFI1 board. Table 6-41 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

79
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 6-41 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI1 board
Interface
Type
Function
NM_ETH2
RJ-45

through a network cable to that on an NM so that
the NM can manage the equipment.
NEs.
NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.
DB9
SERIAL
The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25

protocol.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

80
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
NMJL_ETNTXP

communication with a
network management system
(NM)
NMJL_ETNTXN
Negative pole for

transmitting the concatenated
data for communication with
an NM
NMJL_ETNRXP

NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NMJL_ETNRXN

NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
N.C
Not defined
RXD
Receive end
TXD
Transmit end
DTR

ready

81
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
GND
Ground
Reserved
Reserved
GND
Ground
N.C
Not defined
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI1 board.
Table 6-44 provides the valid slots for the EFI1 board.
Table 6-44 Valid slots for the EFI1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU76
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU38
DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI1 board.
The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface.
The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can
be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these
the DIP switches on the EFI1 board.
l
The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the
CPLD.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

82
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 6-34 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board
NM_ETH2
CPLD
SERIAL
(ID5)
ON
(ID1)
ON
(ID6)
ON
(ID2)
ON
(ID7)
ON
(ID3)
ON
(ID8)
ON
(ID4)
ON
SW1
SW2
Specifications of the EFI1

l
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D)
x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
EFI1
6.5.4 EFI2
EFI2: EMI Filter Interface Board
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI2 board is available, that is, TN51.
Application
The EFI2 provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface and
subrack communication interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

83
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI2 board.

Figure 6-35 shows the front panel of the EFI2 board.
Figure 6-35 Front panel of the EFI2 board
EFI2
LAMP1
ETH1
LAMP2
ETH2
NM_ETH1
ETH3
CAUTION
damaged.
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the EFI2 board. Table 6-45 lists the type and
Table 6-45 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI2 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Type
Function
LAMP1
LAMP2
RJ-45
Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of


84
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
NM_ETH1
RJ-45

through a network cable to that on an NM server so
that the NM can manage the equipment.
NEs.
NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.
ETH1ETH3
RJ-45
l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/

ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding
interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the
communication between the master subrack and
slave subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3
interface cannot be used for the communication between
the master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board

to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP
board.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

85
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
ETH1_TXP

ETH1_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH1_RXP

ETH1_CRIT_TXP

ETH1_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH1_RXN

ETH1_CRIT_RXP

ETH1_CRIT_RXN


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH2_TXP

ETH2_TXN
Negative pole for

communication

86
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ETH2_RXP

ETH2_CRIT_TXP

ETH2_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH2_RXN

ETH2_CRIT_RXP

ETH2_CRIT_RXN


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH3_TXP

ETH3_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH3_RXP

ETH3_CRIT_TXP


87
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ETH3_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH3_RXN

ETH3_CRIT_RXP

ETH3_CRIT_RXN


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
CRIT_ALMP

alarm signals
CRIT_ALMN

alarm signals
MAJ_ALMP

signals
RUNP

indicating signals
RUNN

indicating signals
MAJ_ALMN

alarm signals
MIN_ALMP

signals
MIN_ALMN

alarm signals

88
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
NM_ETNTXP

with the NM
NM_ETNTXN
Negative pole for

communication with the NM
NM_ETNRXP

with the NM
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NM_ETNRXN

with the NM
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI2 board.
Table 6-51 shows the valid slots for the EFI2 board.
Table 6-51 Valid slots for the EFI2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU71
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU37
Specifications of the EFI2

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

89
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
EFI2
13
15
6.5.5 STI
STI: Synchronous Timing Interface Board
Version Description
The functional versions of the STI board are TN52 and TNL1.
In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version
must be TN52.
Application
The STI, a clock interface unit, provides interfaces for input and output of clock signals.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the STI board.

Figure 6-37 and Figure 6-38 show the front panel of the STI board.
Figure 6-37 Front panel of the TN52STI board
STI
CLK1
CLK2
TOD1
TOD2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

90
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 6-38 TNL1STI front panel

STI
CLK1
CLK2
TOD1
TOD2
F1
PHONE
NOTE
In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version must be TN52.
Interfaces
The STI board functions as an interface board of the system for STG. The TNL1STI can provide
an orderwire phone interface and F1 interface. Table 6-52 provides descriptions of the interfaces
on the STI board.
Table 6-52 Interface description of the STI
Interfa
ce
Silkscreen
Connector
Function
CLK1/
CLK2
CLK1/
CLK2
RJ-45
CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals.

CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they input
and output signals at the same time.
TOD1/
TOD2
TOD1/
TOD2
RJ-45
TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals.

At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input or
output time signals.
PHONE
PHON
E
RJ-45
Orderwire phone interface
F1
F1
RJ-45
F1 interface

Figure 6-39 describes the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

91
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Pin Assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface, refer to Table 6-53.
Table 6-53 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface
Pin
Signal
Function
RJ0_E1_RX_N
2MHz/2Mbit input negative
RJ0_E1_RX_P
2MHz/2Mbit input positive
NC
Not connected
RJ0_E1_TX_N
2MHz/2Mbit output negative
RJ0_E1_TX_P
2MHz/2Mbit output positive
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Pin Assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface, refer to Table 6-54.
Table 6-54 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
DCLS_IN0_N
DCLS/1PPS input negative
GND
Ground

92
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
GND
Ground
DCLS_IN0_P
DCLS/1PPS input positive
DCLS_OUT0_N
DCLS/1PPS output negative
DCLS_OUT0_P
DCLS/1PPS output positive
Pin Assignment of the PHONE Interface

For the pin assignment of the PHONE interface, refer to Table 6-55.
Table 6-55 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface
Pin
Signal
Function
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
RING
Signal 1
TIP
Signal 2
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Pin Assignment of the F1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the F1 interface, refer to Table 6-56.
Table 6-56 Pin assignment of the F1 interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
TX_P
Transmitting (+)
TX_N
Transmitting (-)
RX_P
Receiving (+)
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
RX_N
Receiving (-)

93
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Valid Slots
One slot houses one STI board.
Table 6-57 shows the valid slots for the STI board.
Table 6-57 Valid slots for the STI board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU82
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU47
Specifications of the STI

l
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight of TN52STI: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb)
Weight of TNL1STI: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN52STI
1.5
1.5
TNL1STI

94
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

7 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category
OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category
The following types of boards are available for the system.

Table 7-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800.
Table 7-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
Optical
transpon
der unit
TN12L
DM
2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/

s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion
board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11L
DMD

board, dual fed and selective receiving
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11L
DMS

board, single fed and single receiving
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12L
DX
2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11LE
M24
22GE + 210GE and 2OTU2

Ethernet switch board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11LE
X4
410GE and 2OTU2 Ethernet switch

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11L
OA
8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength

Conversion Board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11L
OG
8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed

95
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
TN12L
OG
TN11L
OM
8-port multi-service multiplexing &

optical wavelength conversion board
TN12L
OM
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN13L
QM

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12L
QMD

unit, dual fed and selective receiving
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12L
QMS

unit, single fed and single receiving
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11LS
Q
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12LS
X
10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN13LS
X
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
TN12LS
XL
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12LS
XLR
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11LS
XR
10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12L
WXS
arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s)

wavelength conversion board (single
transmit)
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed

96
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
TN11T
MX
4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
asynchronism mux OTU-2
wavelength conversion board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12T
MX
Tributar
y unit
TN52T
DX
2 x 10G tributary service processing

board
TN53T
DX
Line unit
TN52T
OG
8 x GE service processing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN52T
OM
8 x multi-rate ports service processing

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN52T
QX
4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service

processing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN53T
QX
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN55T
QX
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN53TS
XL
40 Gbit/s tributary service processing

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN54T
HA
16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing

Board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN54T
OA
8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing

Board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN52N
D2
2 x 10G line service processing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN53N
D2
TN52N
Q2
4 x 10G Line Service Processing

Board
TN53N
Q2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

97
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
TN54N
Q2
TN52N
S2
10G Line Service Processing Board
TN53N
S2
TN52N
S3
40G line service processing board
TN54N
S3
PID unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN54E
NQ2
4 x 10G Line Service Processing

Board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN54N
PO2
12 x OTU2 PID Board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN55N
PO2
Crossconnect
unit and
system
and
commun
ication
unit
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
TN55N
PO2E
10G PID line service processing

board, 20channel extended
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN16X
CH
High Cross-connection, System

Control and Clock Processing Board
Not
suppor
ted
Not
support
ed
Support
ed
TNK2S
XM
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized

cross connect board
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
TNK4S
XM
TN52X
CH

cross connect board
Not
suppor
ted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN52X
CM
Cross & connect process board

(Support high- cross and low-cross)
Not
suppor
ted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed

98
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
TNK2X
CT

cross connect board
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Not
suppor
ted
Not
support
ed
Support
ed
TN51SC
C
Not
suppor
ted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN52SC
C
Not
suppor
ted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TNK2S
CC
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Not
suppor
ted
Not
support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TNK4X
CT
TN16SC
C
TN16A
UX
system control and communication

unit
system auxiliary interface unit
TN51A
UX
TNK2S
XH

cross connect board
TNK4S
XH
Optical
multiple
xer and
demultip
lexer unit
TN11M
40
TN12M
40
TN11D4
0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
40-channel multiplexing unit
40-channel demultiplexing unit

99
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
TN12D4
0
TN11M
40V
40-channel multiplexing unit with

VOA
TN12M
40V
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
40-channel demultiplexing unit with

VOA
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12FI
U
fiber interface unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11IT
L
interleaver board
TN12IT
L
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
TN11D4
0V
TN13FI
U
Optical
add and
drop
multiple
xing unit
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
TN11SF
IU
fiber interface unit for sync timing
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11C
MR2
CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop

multiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11C
MR4
CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop

multiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11D
MR1
CWDM 1-channel bidirectional

optical add/drop multiplexing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11M
R2
2-channel optical add/drop

multiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11M
R4

multiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11M
R8

multiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11M
R8V

multiplexing unit with VOA
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed

100
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Reconfig
urable
optical
add and
drop
multiple
xing unit
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
TN11SB
M2
2-channel CWDM single-fiber

bidirectional add/drop board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11R
DU9
9-port ROADM demultiplexing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11R
MU9a
9-port ROADM multiplexing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11R
OAM
reconfigurable optical adding board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12W
SD9
9-port wavelength selective switching

demultiplexing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN13W
SD9
TN12W
SM9

multiplexing board
TN13W
SM9
TN11W
SMD2

multiplexer and demultiplexer board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11W
SMD4

multiplexer and demultiplexer board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12W
SMD4
Optical
amplifier
unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN11W
SMD9
9-port wavelength selective

multiplexing and demultiplexing
board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11C
RPC
case-shape Raman pump amplifier

unit for C-band
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11D
AS1
optical amplifier unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11H
BA
high-power booster amplifier board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed

101
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
TN11O
AU1
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12O
AU1
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN13O
AU1
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11O
BU1
optical booster unit
TN12O
BU1
TN11O
BU2
TN12O
BU2
Optical
supervis
ory
channel
unit
Optical
protectio
n unit
TN11H
SC1
High Power Unidirectional optical

supervisory channel board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12SC
1
unidirectional optical supervisory

channel unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12SC
2
bidirectional optical supervisory

channel unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11ST
2
bidirectional optical supervisory

channel and timing transmission unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11D
CP
2-channel optical path protection unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12D
CP
TN11O
LP
optical line protection unit
TN12O
LP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

102
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
TN11SC
S
sync optical channel separator unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11M
CA4
4-channel spectrum analyzer unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11M
CA8
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11O
PM8
8-channel optical power monitoring

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11W
MU
wavelength monitoring unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Variable
optical
attenuato
r unit
TN12V
A1
1-channel variable optical attenuator

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12V
A4
4-channel variable optical attenuator

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Optical
power
and
dispersio
n
equalizin
g unit
TN11D
CU
dispersion compensation board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11T
DC
single-wavelength tunable-dispersion
compensation board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Clock
unit
TN52ST
G
centralized clock board
Not
suppor
ted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Spectru
m
analyzer
unit
TNK2S
TG
OCS
system
unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
SSN4BP
A
optical booster and pre-amplifier

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN3E
AS2
2-port 10xGE switching and

processing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN1E
GSH
16 x GE Ethernet switching and

processing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed

103
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
ROPA
subsyste
m unitb
Interface
area unitc
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
SSN4SF
64
1 x STM-64 optical interface board

with the FEC function
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN1SF
64A

Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SF
D64

Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SL
64
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SL
D64
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN3SL
H41
16 x STM-4/STM-1 optical interface

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SL
O16
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SL
Q16
4xSTM-16 optical interface board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SL
Q64
4 x STM-64 line interface board
Not
suppor
ted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11G
FU
gain flatness unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11R
GU
ROPA gain unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11R
OP
ROPA pumping unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN16A
TE
interface board of alarm & timing &

expanding
Not
suppor
ted
Not
support
ed
Support
ed

104
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
TN51A
TE
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN16EF
I
EMI filter interface board
Not
suppor
ted
Not
support
ed
Support
ed
TN51EF
I1
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN51EF
I2
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TNL1S
TI
synchronous timing interface board
Suppo
rted
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN52ST
I
TN51PI
U
power interface unit
TN16PI
U
a: For TN11RMU9: OptiX OSN 8800 T16 only supports the TN11RMU902.
b: For details of the ROPA subsystem unit refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide.
c: For details of the interface area unit refer to 6 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

105
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack
About This Chapter

8.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN
6800 has an independent power supply.
8.2 Slot Description
The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right.
8.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)
In the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray
assembly and air filter. The air filter can be removed, cleaned and replaced.
8.4 PIU
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment
maintenance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

106
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN
6800 has an independent power supply.
Figure 8-1 shows the structure of the subrack.
Figure 8-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram
1
3
6
4
5
1. Indicator
2. Board area
5. Air filter
6. Fiber spool
7. Mounting ear
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel
before you connect cables.
Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.
Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 21 slots are available.
to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. The mechanical
VOA is also installed in this area.
Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack.
Air filter: The air filter protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic
cleaning.
Interface area: The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as management
interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface,
alarm input and output interface. It is behind the subrack indicator panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

107
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-1 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered
as the same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 8-1 Technical specifications of the subrack

Item
Specification
Dimensions
497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 400 mm (H)
13 kg (28.6 lb.)
Maximum Power Consumption
1200 W
25 A (-48 V)
-48 V DC/-60 V DC
Table 8-2 lists the power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit Name
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(77F)a
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 55C
(131F)a
Remarks
Su
bra
ck
OTU subrack
566
722.2

install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one
SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one
fan tray assembly in an OTU
subrack.
OT
M
subr
ack
Subrack
1
566
722.2

fan tray assembly in an OTM
subrack.
Subrack
2
168.7
281.6

OAU101, one OBU103, one FIU,
one SC1, one SCC, two PIUs, one
AUX, and one fan tray assembly
in an OTM subrack.

108
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit Name
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(77F)a
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 55C
(131F)a
Remarks
OLA subrack
144.9
253.9

install two OAU101s, two FIUs,
in an OLA subrack.
FOADM
subrack
292.3
418.3

install two OAU101s, two VA4s,
two OBU103s, two MR4s, four
10G OTUs (LSXes), two FIUs,
in an FOADM subrack.
RO
AD
M
subr
ack
(two
dime
nsio
ns)
Subrack
1
87.4
96.4

install one M40, one D40, two
WSMD2s, two DAS1s, one SCC,
two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan
tray assembly in an ROADM
subrack.
Subrack
2
566
722.2

fan tray assembly in an ROADM
subrack.
RO
AD
M
subr
ack
(four
dime
nsio
ns)b
Subrack
1
160
268.8

install one WSMD4, one DAS1,
one M40, one D40, one SCC, two
PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray
assembly in an ROADM subrack.
Subrack
2
160
268.8

Subrack
3
160
268.8


109
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit Name
OTN
subr
ack
Ca
bin
et
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(77F)a
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 55C
(131F)a
Remarks
Subrack
4
160
268.8

Optical
subrack
168.7
281.6

OBU103, one OAU101, one SC1,
one FIU, one SCC, two PIUs, one
in an OTN subrack.
Electrica
l subrack
557
723.8

install ten ND2s, two TQXes, two
TOAs, two XCSes, one SCC, two
assembly in an OTN subrack.
1422.2
1951.1
It is the power consumption when

the cabinet is installed with two
OTU subracks, oneand one OTM
subrack 2 in an OTM cabinet.
OTM cabinet
(40x10 Gbit/s)
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis
and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
b: Subrack 1 and subrack 2 are used as subracks in the line dimensions at a four-dimension
RADOM station; subrack 3 and subrack 4 are used as subracks for adding/dropping local
services. Service boards can be configured in another subrack.

The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right.
Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 8-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

110
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-2 Slots of the subrack
Board area
X
C
I I I I I I I I S
U U U U U U U U /
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I
U
9
X
C
S
/
I
U
1
0
5
I
U
1
1
I
U
1
2
I
U
1
3
I
U
1
4
I
U
1
5
I
U
1
6
S
C
C
/
I
U
1
7
P
I
S U
C
C P
/ I
I U
U
1 A
8 U
X
IU1-IU17 are reserved for service boards.
IU18 is reserved for the active SCC.
IU17 is available for the standby SCC or the other service boards.
IU9 and IU10 are available for the XCS or for the other service boards.
IU15 and IU16 are available for the STG.
IU19
IU20
IU21
VOA area
Mapping of Pair Slots

Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses
on the backplanes. For the two boards in the paired slots, the inter-board cross-connection can
be directly configured, and the cross-connect grooming of services can be realized without the
cross-connect board. The OptiX OSN 6800 supports seven paired slots, which are IU1 and IU2,
IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16. The
paired slots support distributed grooming.
8.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)

In the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray
assembly and air filter. The air filter can be removed, cleaned and replaced.
Version Description

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

111
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-3 Functions of a fan tray assembly

Function
Description
Basic function
Dissipates the heat generated by an NE so that the NE can operate

normally within the designated temperature range.

speed.
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide

Hot swapping
Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly.
Alarming
Status checking
Working Principle
operate normally within the designated temperature range. The fan tray assembly is installed in
the lower part of the subrack and blows air up, creating an air duct from bottom to top. Other
boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This
design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation.
Figure 8-3 and Figure 8-4 show the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN
6800.
Figure 8-3 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Board area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

112
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-4 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Airduct frame
Air outlet
Board area
Fan tray assembly
Optical fiber
laying area
Air inlet
NOTE
If multiple subracks are used, an air duct frame is required to help in heat dissipation.
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 8-4. The partitioned
speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you set the
speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.
FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode

l If the temperature of a partition is lower than 45C (113F), the fans
run at low speed.
l If the temperature of a partition is higher than 65C (149F), the fans
run at high speed.
l If the ambient temperature is from 45C to 65C (113F to 149F),
the fans in this partition run with linear stepless speed.
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium
Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In
Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed
and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.

113
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The
subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure
8-5.
Figure 8-5 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
I
U
1
9
I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I
U U U U U U U U U U
U U U U U U U U U
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I
U
2
1
1
VOA
Fan Tray
Assembly
There are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate
heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if:

Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control unit. Figure 8-6 shows the
Status signal
Fan control unit
Status signal
FAN

supply 1
supply 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

114
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

fan tray assembly.
Fan control board:

Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals.
the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same partition to run at
full speed.
Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of
the fan tray assembly.
Appearance
1. Air filter
3. Fans (ten in total)
Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU22.

Table 8-5 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 fan tray assembly.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

115
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Specification
Dimensions
493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm

(H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in.
(H))
Weight
3.6 kg
Power Consumptiona

l 60 W when the fans rotate at Medium
Speed
8.4 PIU

Only one functional version of the PIU board is available, that is, TN11.
Type
Table 8-6 lists the types of the TN11PIU.
Table 8-6 Type description of the PIU
Unit
Type
Description
TN11PIU
02
Provides the subrack with a -48 V DC or -60 V DC power through the

backplane, and provides the fan tray assembly with a -48 V DC power.
8.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 6800 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies
to the system with 1+1 hot backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

116
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-8 Reference diagram for the application of the PIU board
Backplane
-48V
PIU A
-48V
PIU B
Board A
Board B
-48V
-48V
The system accesses two power supplies through PIU A and PIU B. The power distribution parts
of the backplane are connected to different external power supplies. The power supplies provided
by PIU A and PIU B are converged and converted into the -48 V power supply at the service
board. In this manner, the PIU boards provide the -48 V power to each service board. The two
PIU boards are of mutual hot backup. There is no active/standby relation between the two PIU
boards. Thus, the subrack can work normally as long as any PIU board works normally. The
total power provided by the two PIU boards is equal to the power consumption of the subrack.
When the input voltage of the two PIU boards is different from each other, the two PIU boards
provide uneven current. The PIU board with higher voltage provides most of the current. When
the power output of one PIU board is abnormal or one PIU board is offline, the system reports
alarms on the related boards. During the removal of the faulty board and the insertion of a new
board, the system works normally. In this way, the maintenance is easier.

As a power interface unit, the PIU board accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering
functions.
Table 8-7 Functions and features of the PIU board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides

lightning protection and power filtering functions.
l Provides the subrack with a -48 V DC or -60 V DC power through
the backplane, and provides the fan tray assembly with a -48 V
DC power.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

117
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Fault detection
The SCC board detects the overvoltage or undervoltage of the input

voltage on each PIU board. The SCC board reports alarms to the NMS
after it detects overvoltage or undervoltage. In this case, the system
does not shut down the PIU board. The maintenance personnel should
check for the cause according to the alarms.
8.4.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the PIU board.

Figure 8-9 shows the front panels of the PIU boards.
Figure 8-9 Front panel of the PIU
PIU
RUN
NEG(-)
RTN(+)
Indicators
l
Running status indicator (RUN) - green
Interface
There is one power interface on the front panel. The interface is used to access DC power from
in a range from -40 V to -72 V.
8.4.5 Valid Slots

One slot houses one PIU board.
Table 8-8 shows the valid slots for the TN11PIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

118
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU19 and IU20

Specifications include performance indexes, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Table 8-9 Performance specifications of the PIU board
Item
Unit
Value
V DC
-40 to -72
30
l
Dimensions of front panel: 28 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 65 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in.
(D) x 2.6 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power Consumption at

25C (77F)

at 55C (131F)
TN11PIU
24 W
38 W

Interfaces
maintenance.
These interfaces are located in the interface area of the subrack and on the front panel of the
AUX, as shown in Figure 8-10.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

119
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-10 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack

COM
ETH3
ALM01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM04
SERIAL
ALMI1
ALMI2
LAMP1 ALMP2
xcs
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PIU
RUN
NEG(-)
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RTN(+)
SubRACK_ID
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 ETH1

ETH2
Fan
RESET
STAT
PROG
LAMP TEST
AUX
ALM CUT
xcs
SCC
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel
before you connect cables.
8.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area

The interface area provides functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack
communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Figure 8-11
shows the front panel.
Figure 8-11 Interfaces in the interface area
COM
ETH3
ALM01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM04
SERIAL
ALMI1 ALMI2 LAMP1 LAMP2
Description of interfaces in the interface area is list in Table 8-10.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

120
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

CAUTION
damaged.
Table 8-10 Description of interfaces in the interface area

Interface
Silk-screen
Connector
Function
Commissioning
interface
COM
RJ-45
It is for the commissioning.
Inter-subrack
communication
interface
ETH3
RJ-45
l Connects a network cable from

the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3
interface on one subrack to
corresponding interfaces on the
other subracks to achieve the
communication between the
master subrack and slave
subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is
configured, the ETH3 interface
cannot be used for the
communication between the
master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a

CRPC or ROP board to achieve
communication with the CRPC
or ROP board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

121
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Silk-screen
Connector
Function
Alarm output
and cascading
interface
ALMO1
ALMO2
ALMO3
ALMO4
RJ-45
l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC

power distribution cabinet
through the output interface and
the cascading interface. You can
configure it to be the other
outputs to implement integrated
display of alarms.
l The definitions for the pins of
the ALMO1 and ALMO2
interfaces are the same. The two
interfaces are used for output/
cascading, respectively. The
definitions for the pins of the
ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces
are the same. The two interfaces
are used for output/cascading,
respectively. For example, if
ALMO1 is used to output alarm
signals, ALMO2 can be
cascaded to ALMO1 on another
subrack.
l The OptiX OSN 6800 provides
eight alarm outputs. Defaults of
the first three are critical alarm,
major alarm, and minor alarm.
The other five are reserved.
Alarm outputs can be cascaded.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OAM interface
SERIAL
DB9
The OAM interface is a serial NM

interface, providing functions of
serial NM and supporting X.25
protocol.
Alarm input
interface
ALMI1 ALMI2
RJ-45
External alarm signal input function

is designed for requirements when
the alarm signals of the external
systems (such as the environment
monitory) need remote monitoring.
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides
eight alarm inputs. The name of the
eight alarms can be configured to
cooperate with the external system
to implement remote monitoring of
external alarms.
Subrack alarm
output and
cascading
interface
LAMP1
LAMP2
RJ-45
This interface drives the running

indicators and alarm indicators of

122
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board

The AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and
emergent communication interface.
Figure 8-12 shows the front panel of the AUX. Slot IU21 houses the AUX board.
Figure 8-12 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
ETH1
ETH2
STAT
PROG
AUX
Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board is list in Table 8-11.
Table 8-11 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board
Interface
Silk-screen
Connector
Function
NE
management
interface
NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2
RJ-45
l Connects the network interface

on the OptiX OSN 6800 through
a network cable to that on the
U2000 server to achieve the
management of the U2000 over
the OptiX OSN 6800.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2 network interface
on one NE through a network
cable to that on another NE to
achieve communication
between NEs.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

123
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Silk-screen
Connector
Function
Inter-subrack
communication
interface
ETH1/ETH2
RJ-45
l Connects the ETH1/ETH2/

ETH3 interface on one subrack
through a network cable to such
interfaces on the other subracks
to achieve the communication
between the master subrack and
slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a
CRPC or ROP board to achieve
communication with the CRPC
or ROP board.
8.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces

The interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 used for data communication and equipment maintenance
use the RJ-45 and the DB9 connectors. The pin assignment figures and the functions of the pins
are given in this section.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

124
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
Pin Assignment of the COM Interface

For the pin assignment of the COM interface, refer to Table 8-12.
Table 8-12 Pin assignment of the COM interface
Pin
Signal
Function
ETNTX_P_1
Transmits the data positive
ETNTX_N_1
Transmits the data negative
ETNRX_P_1
Receives the data positive
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
ETNRX_N_1
Receives data negative
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH3_TXP

for inter-subrack ordinary
communications

125
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ETH3_TXN

communications
ETH3_RXP
Receives the data positive for

inter-subrack ordinary
communications
ETH3_CRIT_TXP

for inter-subrack emergent
communications
ETH3_CRIT_TXN

communications
ETH3_RXN
Receives the data negative

communications
ETH3_CRIT_RXP

inter-subrack emergent
communications
ETH3_CRIT_RXN

communications

Table 8-14 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP

signal positive
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN

signal negative
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP

signal positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P

signal positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N

signal negative

126
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN

signal negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N

negative

Table 8-15 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces
Pin
Signal
Function
ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N

negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N

negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N

negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT6P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT6N

negative

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
N.C
Not defined

127
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
RXD
Receive end of data
TXD
Transmit end of data
DTR

ready
GND
Ground
Reserved
Reserved
GND
GND
5VOADM
Power supply for OADM

Pin
Signal
Function
SWITCHI_IN1
Alarm input 1
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN2
Alarm input 2
SWITCHI_IN3
Alarm input 3
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN4
Alarm input 4
GND
Ground

Table 8-18 Pin assignment of the ALMI2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
SWITCHI_IN5
Alarm input 5
GND
Ground

128
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
SWITCHI_IN6
Alarm input 6
SWITCHI_IN7
Alarm input 7
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN8
Alarm input 8
GND
Ground

Pin
Signal
Function
CRIT_ALMP
Critical alarm signal positive
CRIT_ALMN
Critical alarm signal negative
MAJ_ALMP
Major alarm signal positive
RUNP
Power indicating signal

positive
RUNN
Power indicating signal

negative
MAJ_ALMN
Major alarm signal positive
MIN_ALMP
Minor alarm signal positive
MIN_ALMN
Minor alarm signal negative
Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface, refer to Table 8-20.
Table 8-20 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
NM_ETNTXP
NM communications,
transmits the data positive
NM_ETNTXN
NM communications,
transmits the data negative

129
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
NM_ETNRXP
NM communications,
receives the data positive
NC
Not connected.
NC
Not connected.
NM_ETNRXN
NM communications,
receives the data negative
NC
Not connected.
NC
Not connected.
Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface, refer to Table 8-21.
Table 8-21 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface
Pin
Signal
Function
NMJL_ETNTXP
Transmits the concatenated

data positive for NM
communications
NMJL_ETNTXN
Transmits the concatenated

data negative for NM
communications
NMJL_ETNRXP
Receives the concatenated

data positive for NM
communications
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NMJL_ETNRXN
Receives the concatenated

data negative for NM
communications
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

130
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
ETH1_TXP

communications
ETH1_TXN

communications
ETH1_RXP

communications
ETH1_CRIT_TXP

communications
ETH1_CRIT_TXN

communications
ETH1_RXN

communications
ETH1_CRIT_RXP

communications
ETH1_CRIT_RXN

communications

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH2_TXP

communications
ETH2_TXN

communications

131
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ETH2_RXP

communications
ETH2_CRIT_TXP

communications
ETH2_CRIT_TXN

communications
ETH2_RXN

communications
ETH2_CRIT_RXP

communications
ETH2_CRIT_RXN

communications
DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI1 board.
The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface.
The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can
be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these
the DIP switches on the EFI1 board.
l
The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the
CPLD.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

132
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-15 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board
NM_ETH2
CPLD
SERIAL
(ID5)
ON
(ID1)
ON
(ID6)
ON
(ID2)
ON
(ID7)
ON
(ID3)
ON
(ID8)
ON
(ID4)
ON
SW1
SW2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

133
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
Optical
transponder
unit
TN11ECOM
Enhanced communication interface unit
TN11L4G
Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit

Ethernet line capacity
TN11LDGS
2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
TN11LDGD
2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LDM
2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion board
TN11LDMD

conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving
TN11LDMS

conversion board, single fed and single receiving
TN12LDX
2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
TN11LEM24
22GE + 210GE and 2OTU2 ethernet switch board
TN11LEX4
410GE and 2OTU2 ethernet switch board
TN11LOA
8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board
TN11LOG
TN12LOG
TN11LOM
TN12LOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength

conversion board

134
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN11LQG
4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
TN13LQM

conversion unit
TN11LQMD

conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LQMD
TN11LQMS
TN12LQMS

conversion unit, single fed and single receiving
TN11LSQ
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
TN11LSX
TN12LSX
TN13LSX
TN11LSXL
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
TN12LSXL
TN11LSXLR
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
TN12LSXLR
TN11LSXR
TN11LWX2
arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength

conversion board
TN11LWXD
arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion board (double transmit)
TN11LWXS

conversion board (single transmit)
TN12LWXS
TN11TMX
TN12TMX
Tributary unit
4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux

OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
TN11TBE
10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board
TN11TDG
2 x GE tributary service processing board
TN11TDX
2 x 10G tributary service processing board
TN12TDX
TN52TDX
TN53TDX
TN52TOG
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

135
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN11TOM
8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
TN52TOM
TN11TQM
4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
TN12TQM
TN11TQS
4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing

board
TN11TQX
4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
TN52TQX
TN55TQX
Line unit
TN11TSXL
40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
TN11ND2
2 x 10G line service processing board
TN12ND2
TN52ND2
TN53ND2
TN51NQ2
4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
TN52NQ2
TN53NQ2
TN11NS2
TN12NS2
TN52NS2
TN53NS2
TN11NS3
40G line service processing board
TN52NS3
TN54NS3
PID unit
Cross-connect
unit and
system and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN11BMD4
PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz
TN11BMD8
PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz
TN12ELQX
4Electrical OTU2 with 410G Tributary Board
TN12PTQX
12 OTU2 PID board with 410G Tributary
TN11XCS
centralized cross connect board
TN12XCS

136
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
communicatio
n unit
TN11SCC
system control and communication unit
TN51SCC
TN52SCC
Optical
multiplexer
and
demultiplexer
unit
TN11AUX
TN11M40
40-channel multiplexing unit
TN12M40
TN11D40
40-channel demultiplexing unit
TN12D40
TN11M40V
40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
TN12M40V
TN11D40V
40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA
TN11FIU
TN12FIU
TN13FIU
TN11ITL
interleaver board
TN12ITL
Optical add
and drop
multiplexing
unit
Reconfigurabl
e optical add
and drop
multiplexing
unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN11SFIU
fiber interface unit for sync timing
TN11CMR2
CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
TN11CMR4
TN11DMR1
CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop

multiplexing board
TN11MR2
2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
TN11MR4
TN11MR8
TN11MR8V
8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA
TN11SBM2
2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop

board
TN11RDU9
9-port ROADM demultiplexing board
TN11RMU9
9-port ROADM multiplexing board
TN11ROAM
reconfigurable optical adding board

137
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN11WSD9
9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing

board
TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
TN11WSM9
9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
TN11WSMD2
2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and

demultiplexer board
TN11WSMD4
4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and

demultiplexer board
TN12WSMD4
Optical
amplifier unit
TN11WSMD9
9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and

demultiplexing board
TN11CRPC
case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band
TN11DAS1
TN11HBA
high-power booster amplifier board
TN11OAU1
TN12OAU1
TN13OAU1
TN11OBU1
TN12OBU1
TN11OBU2
TN12OBU2
Optical
supervisory
channel unit
TN11HSC1
High Power Unidirectional optical supervisory channel

board
TN11SC1
unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC1
TN11SC2
bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC2
TN11ST2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing

transmission unit

138
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
Optical
protection unit
TN11DCP
TN12DCP
TN11OLP
TN12OLP
Spectrum
analyzer unit
Variable
optical
attenuator unit
TN11SCS
TN11MCA4
TN11MCA8
TN11OPM8
8-channel optical power monitoring board
TN11WMU
wavelength monitoring unit
TN11VA1
1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
TN12VA1
TN11VA4
TN12VA4
Optical power
and dispersion
equalizing unit
TN11DCU
TN11TDC
single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation

board
Clock unit
TN11STG
centralized clock board
ROPA
subsystem
unita
TN11GFU
gain flatness unit
TN11RGU
ROPA gain unit
TN11ROP
ROPA pumping unit
TN11EFI
TN11PIU
Interface area
unitb
a: For the details of the ROPA subsystem unit, refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide.
b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 8 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

139
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis
10
OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis
About This Chapter

10.1 Chassis Structure
The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact
intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short).
The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right.
10.3 Chassis Environment Control System (Fan)
Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis is equipped with a fan tray assembly.
10.4 PIU
PIU: Power Interface Unit
10.5 APIU
APIU: AC Power Interface Unit
maintenance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

140
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10.1 Chassis Structure

The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact
intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short).
The chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800 can operate with an independent DC or AC power supply
and can be installed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet, a standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet,
or a 19 and 23-inch open rack.
Figure 10-1 shows an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.
Figure 10-1 OptiX OSN 3800 chassis
5
1
4
2
1. Grounding connector
2. Fiber frame
3. Board area
4. Antistatic jack
5. Fan indicator
Ground connector: Access the ground cables.
Fiber frame: Fiber jumpers in the service board area are routed through the fiber frame.
Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. In total, 11 slots are available.
Antistatic jack: The ESD strap is in this area.
Fan indicator: The fan indicator indicates the status of the fans.
Table 10-1 list the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.
Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the chassis
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Specification
Dimensions
436 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 134

mm (H) or 17.17 in. (W) x 11.61 in.
(D) x 5.28 in. (H)
Weight of an empty chassis (with backplane)
6 kg (13.23 lb)
350 W
Direct current
-48 V DC/-60 V DC
Alternative current
220 V AC

141
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Specification
Direct current
Alternative current
90 V AC to 285 V AC
Table 10-2 lists the power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 3800.
Unit Name
Chassi
s
OADM
chassis
(Using
the
DPIU)
OADM
chassis
(Using
the
APIU)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption at
25C (77
F)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(131F)
Remarks
Chassis 1
99.4
135.3

you install two TN21MR2s,
four 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs, one
SCC, two DPIUs, one AUX,
and one fan tray assembly in
an OADM chassis.
Chassis 2
77.7
111.5

you install one DFIU, one
SC2, two OAU101s, one
an OADM chassis.
Chassis 1
162.2
207.5

you install two TN21MR2s,
four 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs, one
SCC, two APIUs, one AUX,
an OADM chassis.
Chassis 2
117.7
154.5

SC2, two OAU101s, one
an OADM chassis.
79.7
113.7

SC2, two OBU103s, one
an OLA chassis.
OLA chassis (Using

the DPIU)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

142
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit Name
OLA chassis (Using

the APIU)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption at
25C (77
F)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(131F)
Remarks
119.7
156.7

SC2, two OBU103s, one
an OLA chassis.
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration.
The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated
based on the power consumption of each module.

The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right.
Slots of the chassis are shown in Figure 10-2.
Figure 10-2 Slots of the chassis
IU1
FAN
IU11
IU6/PIU
IU2
IU7/PIU
IU3
IU8/SCC
IU4
IU9/SCC
IU5
IU10/AUX
IU1 and IU11 can hold two OADM boards each, or hold one service board such as IU11.
IU2 to IU5 are reserved for the service boards.
The OptiX OSN 3800 can operate with AC and DC power supplies. The arrangement of boards
in IU6, IU7, IU8, and IU9 is different for the two power supply modes.
In DC mode
l
IU8 and IU9 are reserved for the SCC. IU9 is reserved for the active SCC. IU8 is available
for either the standby SCC or the OADM board.
In AC mode:
IU6, IU7, IU8 are reserved for two APIU boards. The IU9 is reserved for the SCC. The IU8 is
occupied and is not available for the standby SCC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

143
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Mapping of Mesh Group

A mesh group refers to a group of slots housing the boards whose overhead can be processed
by the buses on the backplane. The OptiX OSN 3800 supports a four-slot mesh group: IU2, IU3,
IU4, and IU5.
Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses
on the backplanes. The OptiX OSN 3800 supports two paired slots: IU2 and IU3, IU4 and IU5.
Figure 10-3 Mesh group of the chassis
IU1
IU11
IU2
Paired slots
IU3
Mesh group
IU4
Paired slots
IU5
10.3 Chassis Environment Control System (Fan)

Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis is equipped with a fan tray assembly.
Version Description

Table 10-3 shows the functions of a fan tray assembly.
Table 10-3 Functions of a fan tray assembly
Function
Description
Basic function
Dissipates heat generated by the equipment

so that the equipment can operate normally
within the designated temperature range.
l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic

fan speed regulation, depending on the
subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can
manually adjust the fan speed.
NOTE
Only when the chassis accesses DC power, Auto
Speed Mode is available.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

144
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
Description
Hot swapping
Provides the hot swapping function for the

fan tray assembly.
Alarming
Reports alarms of the fans and reports the inservice information.
Status checking
Checks the fan status.
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly is located on the left hand of the chassis. The fan blows air up, which
creates an air duct from left to right. Other boards in the chassis are installed horizontally and
are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation.
Figure 10-4 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 3800.
Figure 10-4 Front view of the heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Air inlet
Board Area
FAN
The OptiX OSN 3800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 10-4. It is recommended
that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.
NOTE
Auto Speed Mode is only available when the chassis operates with DC power.

FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode
The fan speed depends on the temperature.

l If the temperature is lower than 45C (113F), the fans run at low
speed.
l If the temperature is higher than 65C (149F), the fans run at high
speed.
l If the temperature ranges from 45C (113F) to 65C (149F), the
fans run at medium speed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

145
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium
Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In
Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed
and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if:

Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assembly.
The fan tray assembly consists of six fans and one fan control unit. Figure 10-5 shows the
functional block of the fan tray assembly.
Status signal
Fan control unit
Status signal
FAN

supply 1
supply 2
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the chassis. FAN is the core of the
fan tray assembly.
Fan control board:

Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals.
Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm.
Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of
the fan tray assembly.
Appearance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

146
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


1
1. Fans (6 in total)
2. Operating status indicator
Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU12.

Table 10-5 list the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly for the OptiX OSN 3800
system.
NOTE

Item
Specification
Dimensions

10.34 in. (D) x 4.98 in. (H))
Weight
0.81 kg (1.79 lb)
Power Consumptiona

l 32.7 W when the fans rotate at High Speed
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 32.7 W.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

147
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10.4 PIU
PIU: Power Interface Unit

Only one functional version of the PIU board is available, that is, TN21.
10.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3800 has two PIU boards, which supply power to the system and provide 1+1
hot backup.

The PIU is a power interface unit, which accesses power and provides protection and filtering
functions.
Table 10-6 Functions and features of the PIU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V.

l Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions.
l Provides the fan tray assembly with a -48 V DC power after
voltage reduction.
10.4.4 Front Panel

There is one indicator and one interface on the front panel of the PIU board.

Figure 10-7 shows the front panel of the PIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

148
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 10-7 Front panel of the PIU board
RUN
DO not hot
plug this unit
S1
S4
S2
SCC
PIU
PIU
S5
AUX
SCC
S11
S6
NEG(-)
RTN(+)
PIU
Indicator
l
Interface
There is one power interface on the front panel of the PIU board. The interface is used to access
the DC power in the range of -40 V to -72 V.
10.4.5 Valid Slots

Valid slots for the PIU board are IU6 and IU7.

Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 10-7 Performance specifications of the PIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
V DC
-38.4 to -72

149
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
l
Dimensions of front panel: 218.50 mm (H) x 107.76 in. (W) or 8.6 in. (H) x 4.2 in. (W)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21PIU
10
12
10.5 APIU
APIU: AC Power Interface Unit

Only one functional version of the APIU board is available, that is, TN21.
10.5.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3800 has two APIU boards, which supply power to the system and provide 1
+1 hot backup.

The TN21APIU is a power interface unit, which accesses AC power and provides protection
and filtering functions.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

150
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 10-8 Functions and features of the APIU

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Accesses AC power in a range from 90 V to 285 V, and provides

-48 V DC power.
l Provides lightning protection, filtering and power factor
adjustment functions for the accessed power.
l Supplies power to the fan tray assembly.
10.5.4 Front Panel

There is one indicator and one interface on the front panel of the APIU board.

Figure 10-8 shows the front panel of the APIU board.
Figure 10-8 Front panel of the APIU board
APIU
RUN
ON
OFF
~100-240V
S1 S11 APIU
S2
S3 APIU
S4 SCC
S5 AUX
Indicator
There is one indicator on the front panel of the APIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

151
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There is only one power interface on the front panel of the APIU board. The interface is used to
access the AC power in the range of 90 V to 285 V.
10.5.5 Valid Slots

IU6, IU7 and IU8 together house two APIU boards. That is, each APIU requires 1.5 slots.
10.5.6 Specifications of the APIU

Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, and weight.
Table 10-9 Performance specifications of the APIU
Item
Unit
Value
Input power voltage range
V AC
90 to 285
Input frequency
Hz
50
Input power current
A AC
Output rated voltage
V DC
-48
Output rated current
A DC
6.3
Output power
300
l
Dimensions of front panel: 37.5 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) or 1.5 in. (H) x 3.9
in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D)
Weight: 1.8lb. (0.8 kg)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21APIU
50
55

152
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Interfaces
maintenance.
10.6.1 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board

The AUX board provides NM interfaces and extended auxiliary interfaces.
Figure 10-9 shows the front panel of the AUX board. The AUX board is housed in slot IU10.
Figure 10-9 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board
STAT
PROG
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
EXT
AUX
Table 10-10 describes the functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

153
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 10-10 Functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board
Interface
Silk-Screen
Connector
Function
NM interface
NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2
RJ-45
l Connects the network interface

on the OptiX OSN 3800 through
a network cable to that on the
U2000 server so that the
U2000 over the OptiX OSN
3800.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2 network interface
on one NE through a network
cable to that on another NE to
achieve communication
between NEs.
EXT
Extended
auxiliary
interfaces
DB9, RJ-45
Accesses and outputs each kind of

external signals.
NOTE
EXT interfaces include ALMO, LAMP1, LAMP2, ETH, SERIAL, ALMI1, and ALMI2.
10.6.2 PIN Assignment of Interfaces

The OptiX OSN 3800 provides RJ-45 and the DB9 ports to enable data communication and
equipment maintenance. This section shows the pin assignments of the RJ-45 and DB9
connectors and describes the pins of each connector.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

154
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
Pin Assignment of the ETH Interface

For the pin assignment of the ETH interface, refer to Table 10-11.
Table 10-11 Pin assignment of the ETH interface
Pin
Signal
Function
ETNTX_P_1

the data
ETNTX_N_1
Negative pole for

transmitting the data
ETNRX_P_1

the data
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined
ETNRX_N_1

the data
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined
Pin Assignment of the ALMO Interface

For the pin assignment of the ALMO interface, refer to Table 10-12.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

155
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 10-12 Pin assignment of the ALMO interface

Pin
Signal
Function
SWCRIT_OUT1+
Alarm output signal 1

positive
SWCRIT_OUT1-

negative
SWCRIT_OUT2+

positive
SWCRIT_OUT1+
Cascaded alarm output signal

1 positive
SWCRIT_OUT1-

1 negative
SWCRIT_OUT2-

negative
SWCRIT_OUT2+

2 positive
SWCRIT_OUT2-

2 negative

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
N.C
Not defined
RXD
Receive end
TXD
Transmit end
DTR

ready
GND
Ground
Reserved
Reserved
GND
Ground
V5_OADM
Power supply for OADM

156
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
SW_IN1P
Alarm input signal 1
GND
Ground
SW_IN2P
SW_IN3P
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
SW_IN4P
GND
Ground

Pin
Signal
Function
SW_IN5P
GND
Ground
SW_IN6P
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined
GND
Ground
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

157
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
RED+

alarm signals
RED-

alarm signals
YELLOW+

signals
GREEN+

indicating signals
GND

indicating signals
YELLOW-

alarm signals
ORG+

signals
ORG-

alarm signals
Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface, refer to Table 10-17.
Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
ETNTX12P

with an NM
ETNTX12N
Negative pole for

ETNRX12P

with an NM
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined
ETNRX12N

with an NM

158
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin
Signal
Function
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined

159
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

11

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
Optical
transponder
unit
TN11ECOM
Enhanced communication interface unit
TN11L4G
Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet

line capacity
TN11LDGS
2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
TN11LDGD
2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LDM

conversion board
TN11LDMD

conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving
TN11LDMS

conversion board, single fed and single receiving
TN12LDX
2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
TN11LOA
8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board
TN11LOG
TN12LOG
TN11LOM
TN12LOM
TN11LQG
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength

conversion board
4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board

160
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN13LQM

conversion unit
TN11LQMD

conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LQMD
TN11LQMS
TN12LQMS
TN11LSX

conversion unit, single fed and single receiving
TN12LSX
TN13LSX
TN11LSXR
TN11LWX2
arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength

conversion board
TN11LWXD

conversion board (double transmit)
TN11LWXS

conversion board (single transmit)
TN12LWXS
TN11TMX
TN12TMX
Tributary unit
4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux

OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
TN11TBE
10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board
TN11TDG
2 x GE tributary service processing board
TN11TDX
2 x 10G tributary service processing board
TN52TOG
TN11TOM
8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
TN52TOM
TN11TQM
4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
TN12TQM
Line unit
TN11TQS
4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing

board
TN11NS2
TN12NS2
TN52NS2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

161
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN53NS2
Optical
multiplexer
and
demultiplexer
unit
TN21DFIU
bidirectional fiber interface board
TN13FIUa
Optical add
and drop
multiplexing
unit
TN21CMR1
TN11CMR2
TN21FIU
TN21CMR2
TN11CMR4
TN21CMR4
TN11DMR1
TN21DMR1
TN11MR2
CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop

multiplexing board
TN21MR2
TN11MR4
TN21MR4
Optical
amplifier unit
TN11SBM2
2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop

board
TN11DAS1
TN11OAU1
TN12OAU1
TN13OAU1
TN11OBU1
TN12OBU1
TN11OBU2
TN12OBU2
Cross-connect
unit and
system and
communicatio
n unit
TN21SCC
system control and communication unit
TN22SCC
TN21AUX
TN22AUX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

162
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
Optical
supervisory
channel unit
TN11HSC1
High Power Unidirectional optical supervisory channel

board
TN11SC1
unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC1
TN11SC2
bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC2
Optical
protection unit
TN11ST2
bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing

transmission unit
TN11DCP
TN12DCP
TN11OLP
TN12OLP
Spectrum
analyzer unit
Variable
optical
attenuator unit
TN11SCS
TN11MCA4
TN11MCA8
TN11OPM8
8-channel optical power monitoring board
TN11VA1
TN12VA1
TN11VA4
TN12VA4
Optical power
and dispersion
equalizing unit
TN11DCU
Interface area
unitb
TN21PIU
TN21APIU
AC Power Interface Unit
a: For TN13FIU: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01.

b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 10 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

163
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12 Frame
12
Frame
About This Chapter

12.1 DCM Frame
The DCM frame is used to hold DCM modules. DCM modules compensate for the positive
dispersion of transmitting fiber, to help maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
12.2 CRPC Frame
The CRPC frame is used to hold the CRPC board, fan tray assembly, and power distribution
box. The frame is installed into the open rack.
12.3 Digital Video O-E Converter
The digital video O-E converter performs O-E conversion of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI
services.
12.4 Fiber Spooling Frame
The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil. It can accommodate 4 x 10 m
fiber jumpers and hold eight fixed or tunable attenuators.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

164
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12 Frame
12.1 DCM Frame

The DCM frame is used to hold DCM modules. DCM modules compensate for the positive
dispersion of transmitting fiber, to help maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
After an optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is expanded
because of accumulation of the positive dispersion. An expanded pulse has a negative impact
on system transmission performance. A DCM module is a passive device that compensates for
dispersion. The DCM module uses the inherent negative dispersion of a dispersion compensation
fiber to offset the positive dispersion of a transmission fiber to prevent pulse expansion.
The system provides two types of DCM: the DCM based on dispersion compensation fiber
(DCF) and the DCM based on Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG).
The DCF-based DCM and the FBG-based DCM have similar compensation features. The
differences are as follows:
l
The insertion loss of the DCF-based DCM increases with the distance in km.
The insertion loss of the FBG-based DCM is always 4 dB regardless of the distance in km.
The DCM modules are available in different compensation distance specifications: 5 km (3.1
mi.), 10 km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.),
100 km (62.1 mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.), 160 km (99.4 mi.), 200 km (124.2 mi.), and 240 km (149.1
mi.).
Each DCM frame holds two DCM modules. The DCM frame is installed on the columns of a
cabinet with mounting airs and screws, as shown in Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-1 DCM frame
1. DCM frame
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2. DCMs

165
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12 Frame
Table 12-1 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G.
652 fiber)
Item Type
Distance
(mi./km)
Max.
Inserti
on Loss
(dB)
DSC
R
PMD
(ps)
PD
L
(dB
)
Max.
Allow
Powera
(dBm)
Operatio
n
Wavelen
gth (nm)
DCM(S)
3.1/5
2.3
0.3
0.1
20
DCM(T)
6.2/10
2.8
90%
to
110%
0.3
0.1
20
1528 to
1568
DCM(A)
12.4/20
3.3
0.4
0.1
20
DCM(B)
24.8/40
4.7
0.5
0.1
20
DCM(C)
37.3/60
6.4
0.6
0.1
20
DCM(D)
49.7/80
0.7
0.1
20
DCM(E)
62.1/100
0.8
0.1
20
DCM(F)
74.5/120
9.8
0.8
0.1
20
FBG-DCM
(80)
49.7/80
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(100)
62.1/100
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(120)
74.5/120
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(160)
99.4/160
1.6
0.4
23
FBG-DCM
(200)
124.2/200
1.6
0.4
23
FBG-DCM
(240)
149.1/240
1.6
0.4
23
a: The Max. Allow Power refers to the maximum input optical power that does not damage
the optical module.
655 LEAF fiber)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item Type
Distance
(mi./km)
Max.
Inserti
on Loss
(dB)
DSC
R
PMD
(ps)
PD
L
(dB
)
Max.
Allow
Powera
(dBm)
Operatio
n
Wavelen
gth (nm)
DCM(A)
12.4/20
0.4
0.3
20
DCM(B)
24.8/40
90%
to
110%
0.5
0.3
20
1528 to
1568

166
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12 Frame
Item Type
Distance
(mi./km)
Max.
Inserti
on Loss
(dB)
DCM(C)
37.3/60
DCM(D)
DSC
R
PMD
(ps)
PD
L
(dB
)
Max.
Allow
Powera
(dBm)
5.9
0.7
0.3
20
49.7/80
6.9
0.8
0.3
20
DCM(E)
62.1/100
7.8
0.9
0.3
20
DCM(F)
74.5/120
8.8
1.0
0.3
20
FBG-DCM
(120)
74.5/120
3.7
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(160)
99.4/160
3.7
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(200)
124.2/200
3.7
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(240)
149.1/240
3.7
1.0
0.2
23
Operatio
n
Wavelen
gth (nm)
the optical module.
653 fiber)
Item Type
Distance
(mi./km)
Max.
Insert
ion
Loss
(dB)
DSC
R
PMD
(ps)
PDL
(dB)
Max.
Allow
Powera
(dBm)
Opera
tion
Wavel
ength
(nm)
DCM(S)
3.1/5
0.2
0.1
20
DCM(T)
6.2/10
90%
to
110%
0.3
0.1
20
1528 to
1568
DCM(A)
12.4/20
0.5
0.1
20
the optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

167
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12 Frame
Table 12-4 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (TWRS fiber)
Item Type
Distance
(mi./km)
Max.
Insert
ion
Loss
(dB)
DSC
R
PMD
(ps)
PDL
(dB)
Max.
Allow
Powera
(dBm)
Opera
tion
Wavel
ength
(nm)
DCM(A)
12.4/20
2.3
0.3
0.1
20
DCM(B)
24.8/40
2.8
90%
to
110%
0.3
0.1
20
1528 to
1568
DCM(C)
37.3/60
3.3
0.4
0.1
20
DCM(D)
49.7/80
3.8
0.4
0.1
20
DCM(E)
62.1/100
4.2
0.5
0.1
20
DCM(F)
74.5/120
4.7
0.5
0.1
20
the optical module.
Table 12-5 Mechanical specifications of the DCM frame

Item
Specification
Dimensions
48 mm (H) x 484 mm (W) x 270.5 mm (D) (1.9 in. (H) x 19.1 in. (W)
x 10.6 in. (D) )
Weight
1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
H = Height, W = Width, D = Depth
12.2 CRPC Frame

The CRPC frame is used to hold the CRPC board, fan tray assembly, and power distribution
box. The frame is installed into the open rack.
Figure 12-2 shows the appearance of a CRPC frame. In the middle of the frame, the one with
the front panel is the CRPC board. The fan tray assembly is at the left of the board. At the right
are two power supplies as mutual backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

168
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12 Frame
Figure 12-2 CRPC frame
2
1
1: Fan tray assembly
2: CRPC board
3: Power distribution box
Table 12-6 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame

Item
Value
Mechanical specifications
535 mm (W) x 257 mm (D) x 86 mm (H) or 21.1 in.

(W) x 10.1 in. (D) x 3.4 in. (H)
Weight
3 kg (6.6 lb)
12.3 Digital Video O-E Converter

The digital video O-E converter performs O-E conversion of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI
services.
Figure 12-3 and Figure 12-4 show the appearance of the digital video O-E converter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

169
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12 Frame
Figure 12-3 Front view of the digital video O-E converter
Figure 12-4 Rear view of the digital video O-E converter
Table 12-7 Mechanical specifications

Item
Value
Weight
1.58 kg (3.5 lb.)
Maximum Power
40 W (fully-loaded frame with all

accessories) Note - power consumption
dependent on the SFP type
Dimensions
482.6 mm (W) x 105.66 mm (D) x 45.72 mm

(H) (19 in.(W) x 4.16 in.(D) x 1.8 in.(H))
Table 12-8 Electrical specifications
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Impedance
75
Connector
BNC per IEC 61169-8 Annex A
Reclocked Standard
SMPTE 424M (3Gb/s), SMPTE 292M, (1.5Gb/s),

SMPTE 259M (270Mb/s), DVB-ASI

170
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12 Frame
Item
Value
Equalization
Automatic to 80m @ 3Gb/s, 100m@1.5Gb/s, 250m

@ 270Mb/s
Table 12-9 Optical specifications

Item
Value
Optical Output:
Number of Outputs
Up to 2 per SFP
Connector
LC
Optical Power
-1dBm 1dBm
Operating Wavelength
1310nm
Optical Input:
Number of Inputs
Up to 2 per SFP
Connector
LC
Operating Wavelength
1310nm
Maximum Input Power
-1dBm
Power Box of the Digital Video O-E Converter

The SDI board has a separate power box. Figure 12-5 and Figure 12-6 show the appearance of
the power box.
Figure 12-5 Front view of the power box
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

171
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12 Frame
Figure 12-6 Rear view of the power box
Table 12-10 Technical specifications of the power box

Item
Value
Number of Inputs
Input Voltage
Auto ranging, 100-240V AC
Frequency
50/60Hz
Power
250W max per input
Number of Outputs
6 Primary + 6 Secondary
Output Voltage
12V DC
Output Current
3.5 A
Dimensions
482.6 mm (W) x 119.38 mm (D) x 45.72 mm (H)

(19 in.(W) x 4.7 in.(D) x 1.8 in.(H))
Environmental Temperature
-20C to +70C (-4 F to 158 F)
12.4 Fiber Spooling Frame

The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil. It can accommodate 4 x 10 m
fiber jumpers and hold eight fixed or tunable attenuators.
The fiber spool box is installed at the bottom of the cabinet, more than 50 mm away from the
chassis. Figure 12-7 and Figure 12-8 show a fiber spooling frame.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

172
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12 Frame
Figure 12-7 Fiber spooling frame
2
1: Captive screw
2: Fiber holder
3: Fiber spool
4: Attenuator holder
Figure 12-8 Drawing out the tray
1
2
3
1: Box
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2: Mounting ear
3: Cable hole

4: Tray
173
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

13 Overview of Boards
13
Overview of Boards
About This Chapter

13.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions
The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser
hazard level label.
13.2 Bar Code for Boards
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, which indicates the basic information about
the board, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board
characteristic code.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

174
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

13.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions

The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser
hazard level label.
13.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions

This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.
CAUTION
Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is
properly grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.
Table 13-1 shows the board appearance and dimensions.
Table 13-1 Board appearance and dimensions
Board Appearance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Name
Number
of Slots
for Each
Board
Height
(mm)
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
TN11L4G
264.6
25.4
220.0

175
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Appearance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Name
Number
of Slots
for Each
Board
Height
(mm)
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
TN11OA
U1
264.6
50.8
220.0
TN11M40
264.6
76.2
220.0
TN11AU
X
107.6
25.4
220.0

176
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Appearance
Board
Name
Number
of Slots
for Each
Board
Height
(mm)
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
TN12LSX
L
264.6
101.6
220.0
TN21MR4
118.9
25.4
220.0
13.1.2 Laser Hazard Level Label

Lasers are of two hazard levels according to the value of the output power.
WARNING
It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface during the installation and maintenance
of the fiber, because the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.
Table 13-2 shows the laser hazard levels of the unit.
Table 13-2 Hazard levels
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Hazard Level
Label
Reference Power Range
HAZARD LEVEL 1
<10.00 dBm (<10.00 mW)

177
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Hazard Level
Label
Reference Power Range
HAZARD LEVEL 1M
10.00 dBm - 21.3 dBm (10.00

mW - 136 mW)
CAUTION
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
13.2 Bar Code for Boards

There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, which indicates the basic information about
the board, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board
characteristic code.
13.2.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code.
The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
The information about a bar code can be queried on the U2000, for details refer to Supporting
Tasks.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from
that on the bar code.
Figure 13-1 and Figure 13-2 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules.
Figure 13-3 and Figure 13-4 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules.
Figure 13-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)
Delivery
information
Board model
number
Board version
(TN12)
2102314840107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 19210AG

BOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
Board
name

Characteristic
code
178
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Delivery
information
Board model
number
Board version
(TN12)
2102315653108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01 TPT

Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
BOM
Board Tunable Characteristic

name
code

Delivery
information
Board version Board

name
(TN12)
2103070768107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01

Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
BOM
Board model
number
First four numbers

of the BOM
Delivery
information
Board version Board

name
(TN12)
03OHFY 108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01
The complete BOM should be

0303OHFY. "03" are taken out in
the BOM above.
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
Board model
number
The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical
module. Table 13-3 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

179
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-3 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for OTN boards
Board
Configuration
First Four
Numbers in
the board
BOM
Description
First Four Numbers

in the BOM of the
Required Optical
Module
Board not installed

with optical modules
0303
The board is installed

with a wavelength
tunable optical module
on its WDM side.
Client-side optical
modules need to be
selected as required for
the board.
3406 or 0303 (client

side)
0303
The board is not

installed with any
optical module. WDMand client-side optical
modules need to be
selected for the board as
required.
3406 or 0303 (client side

and WDM side)
0307

with a fixed optical
module on its WDM
side. Client-side optical
modules need to be
required.

side)
0302
The board is not

installed with any
modules need to be
required.

and WDM side)
0231
Optical modules are

installed on the client
and WDM sides of the
board.
NA
Board installed with

optical modules
Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows:
l
For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the
board is delivered with optical modules installed.
For the SSN3SLH41 board,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

180
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The first four numbers are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not
installed. The first four numbers in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the
board are 3406.
When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four numbers in
the BOM are 0305.
Table 13-4 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for of other OCS
boards.
Table 13-4 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOM for an OCS board (excluding
SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41)
Board
Configuration
First Four
Numbers in
the board
BOM
Description
First Four Numbers

in the BOM of the
Required Optical
Module
Board not installed

0302
The board is not

installed with any
optical module. Optical
modules need to be
required.
3406

optical modules
0305

optical modules.
NA
13.2.2 Characteristic Code

The board characteristic code indicates information about frequency of signals, type of the
For the detailed description of the board characteristic code, refer to B Bar Code for Boards.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

181
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14 Optical Transponder Unit
14
Optical Transponder Unit
About This Chapter

14.1 ECOM
ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit
14.2 L4G
L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity
14.3 LDGD
LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
14.4 LDGS
LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
14.5 LDM
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board
14.6 LDMD
LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and
selective receiving
14.7 LDMS
LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and
single receiving
14.8 LDX
LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
14.9 LEM24
LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE + 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board
14.10 LEX4
LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board
14.11 LOA
LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board.
14.12 LOG
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

182
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.13 LOM
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board
14.14 LQG
LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
14.15 LQM
LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board
14.16 LQMD
LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual
fed and selective receiving
14.17 LQMS
LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single
fed and single receiving
14.18 LSQ
LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
14.19 LSX
LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
14.20 LSXL
LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
14.21 LSXLR
LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
14.22 LSXR
LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
14.23 LWX2
LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board
14.24 LWXD
LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)
14.25 LWXS
LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)
14.26 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion
board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

183
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.1 ECOM
ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit

The available functional version of the ECOM board is TN11.
Mappings Between the Board and Equipment

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the
boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of
your Huawei local office.
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
ECO
M
14.1.2 Application
The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/
3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE
service.
Application Scenario 1: Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN

6800/3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A
The management signal and service signal of the OptiX OSN 900A are together transmitted to
the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 over the line. The FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 separates
the signal received into management signal and service signal. The service signal is processed
by the OTU board. The management signal is accessed by the ECOM board through the FE port
and then is transmitted to the SCC board through the backplane.
For the position of the ECOM in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and OptiX
OSN 900A, see Figure 14-1 and Figure 14-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

184
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-1 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800 and
OptiX OSN 900A
OptiX OSN
900A
OptiX OSN
900A
Service signal
F
I Management
signal
U
Management
signal
F
I Service signal
U
OTU
ECOM
ETH
OptiX OSN
6800
SCC
OTU
NOTE
Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.
Figure 14-2 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 3800 and
OptiX OSN 900A
OptiX OSN
900A
OptiX OSN
900A
Service signal
F
I Management
signal
U
Management
signal
F
I Service signal
U
OTU
ECOM
ETH
OptiX OSN
3800
SCC
OTU
NOTE
Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 3800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.
Application Scenario 2: Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE

Service
When used for convergence or deconvergence, the ECOM board can be used only in the CWDM
system. For the position of the ECOM in the WDM system, see Figure 14-3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

185
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-3 Position of the ECOM board in the WDM system

GE
GE
MUX
FE
DMUX
ECOM
FE
ECOM
DMUX
MUX
GE
8
GE
Client side
Client side
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the MUX and DMUX boards shown in the figure are the OADM boards used
in the CWDM system.

The ECOM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and loopback
on the client side.
Table 14-1 Functions and features of the ECOM board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Achieves the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/

3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A.
l Converges/deconverges 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.
Client-side service
type
FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
WDM
specification
Supports the CWDM specifications.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the transmission of one GE signal each to

working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the
backplane. Supports the transmission of one GE signal to the paired slots
through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one GE signal from one
board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three
boards belonging to the mesh group.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Tunable
wavelength
function
Not Supported
PRBS function
Not Supported
Protection scheme
Not Supported

186
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events monitoring
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
Not Supported
Test frame
Not Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not Supported
eSFP
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the

client side.
l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of

the board.

WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
14.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The ECOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply
module.
Figure 14-4 and Figure 14-5 show the functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

187
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board
Backplane(management signal transmission)
FE
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
E/O
RX8
L2 switching
module
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Cross-connect
module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Control and communication module

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow (Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/3800
and the OptiX OSN 900A)
The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the SCC board,
and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one channel of FE signals (management signals)
from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module, and
groomed by the backplane to the SCC board through the ETH interface.
Receive direction
The L2 switching module receives FE signals from the SCC board, and then sends them to
the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the FE electrical signals, and
then outputs the optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

188
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM

Backplane(service cross-connection)
GE
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
E/O
RX8
L2 switching
module
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Cross-connect
module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow (Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service)

The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the WDM side
of the ECOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching
module. The module performs operations such as converging eight channels of FE signals
into one channel of GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of GE signals to the
cross-connect module.
The cross-connect module performs operations such as service cross-connection of the GE
signals.
The GE signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths GE optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant GE optical signals
at CWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the IN optical interface.
Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

189
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

After the O/E conversion, the GE signals are sent to the cross-connect module. The module
performs operations such as service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs one
channel of GE signals.
The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends a maximum of eight
channels of FE signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l
Client-side optical module

The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of FE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of internal
electrical signals to FE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
WDM-side optical module

The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to
GE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
L2 switching module
Forwards service signals.
Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals.
Cross-connect module
OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals
between the ECOM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through
the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals
from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards
belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are
GE signals.

Controls board operations.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection from each functional module on the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

190
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each
module on the board.
14.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ECOM board.

Figure 14-6 shows the front panel of the ECOM board.
Figure 14-6 Front panel of the ECOM board
ECOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
OUT
IN
ECOM
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

191
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ECOM board. Table 14-2 lists the type
and function of each interface.
Table 14-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ECOM board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical

demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical

multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX8
LC
Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment.
RX1-RX8
LC
Receives service signals from the client-side

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum output
optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
14.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one ECOM board.
Table 14-3 shows the valid slots for the ECOM board.
Table 14-3 Valid slots for ECOM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
14.1.7 Physical and Logical Ports

This section describes the logical ports displayed on the NMS and the physical ports of the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

192
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Display of Physical Ports

Table 14-4lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers
displayed on the NMS.
Table 14-4 Mapping between the physical ports on the ECOM board and the port numbers
displayed on the NMS
Physical Port
Port Number on the NMS
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One
transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, AP1 is a
logical port of the board.
Figure 14-7 shows the application model of the ECOM board. Table 14-5 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 14-7 Port diagram of the ECOM board
Client side
PORT3
PORT4
PORT5
PORT6
PORT7
PORT8
PORT9
PORT10
WDM side
VCTRUNK1
101( AP1/AP1)-1
L2 switching module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1(IN/OUT)-1
Cross-connect WDM-side optical

module
module

193
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-5 Meaning of NM port of the ECOM board

Port Name
Meaning
PORT3-PORT10
These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1RX8/TX8.
VCTRUNK1
Internal virtual port.
AP1
Internal convergence port.
IN/OUT
Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
14.1.8 Configuration of Cross-connection

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS.
If the ECOM board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM
interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Service Mode and HUB
Mode.
NOTE
If the HUB mode need be configured, there must be one-to-one connection between ports, which need not
be set on the U2000.
If the service mode need be configured, the following items must be created on the U2000:
l
During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the eight
channels of FE optical signals and one channel of GE electrical signals accessed from the
client-side ports is implemented through the L2 switching module.
Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and AP port of other boards (The GE
services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client
in Figure
side of other boards for the inter-board services deconvergence), as shown
14-8.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and LP port of other boards (The GE
services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the WDM
side of other boards for the inter-board services convergence), as shown
14-8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
in Figure
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of GE level between the AP port and the IN/OUT port of the ECOM, realizing
the cross-connect grooming of GE services.

194
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-8 Cross-connection diagram of the ECOM

Client side
Other board
101(AP1/AP1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
103(AP3/AP3)-1
201(LP/LP)-3
104(AP4/AP4)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
1
ECOM
101(AP1/AP1)-1
2
The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client side of
other boards
The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to theWDM side of
other boards
1
2
14.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.
For parameters of ECOM, refer to Table 14-6.
Table 14-6 ECOM parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Displays the position of the optical

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Set and query the optical interface name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused
The Channel Use Status parameter sets the

occupancy status of the current channel of
a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM
Interface) for more information.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Default: NonLoopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The Optical Interface Loopback

parameter sets the loopback mode for the
current optical interface of a board.
See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback
(WDM Interface) for more information.

195
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Off, On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser

status of a board.
See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface)
for more information.
Default: On
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Queries the operating wavelength at the

WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type
Queries the band type.
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Queries the tunable wavelength range at the

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
The Planned Wavelength No./

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
parameter sets the wavelength number,
wavelength and frequency of the current
optical interface on the WDM side of a
board.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Board Mode
HUB Mode, Service

Mode
Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets

the band type of the current working
wavelength.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM
Used to configure the working mode of the
board.
Default: HUB Mode
14.1.10 Specifications of the ECOM

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

196
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
11E
CO
M
N/A
100 BASE-FX-10
km
N/A
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
100 BASE-FX-40
km
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
100 BASE-FX-80
km
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board
and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board
are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Table 14-7 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FE services
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
100 BASEFX-10 km
100 BASEFX-40 km
100 BASEFX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
10
40
80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580

197
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Eye pattern
mask
Value
100 BASEFX-10 km
100 BASEFX-40 km
100 BASEFX-80 km
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
(EOL)
dBm
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
Table 14-8 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for colored wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0

198
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module
Type
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
30
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask

Receiver type
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Table 14-9 Specifications of CWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating wavelength
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean launched

power
dBm
Minimum extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5

199
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Optical Module
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F)
TN11ECOM
19.6
21.6
14.2 L4G
L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity

The available functional version of the L4G board is TN11.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

200
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
L4G
14.2.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the L4G board implements the conversion between six
channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the L4G board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-9.
Figure 14-9 Position of the L4G board in the WDM system
1
MUX
L4G
GE
G.694.1
Client side
G.694.1
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
GE
L4G
6
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

The L4G is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical
layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 14-10 Functions and features of the L4G board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converges up to six non-full bandwidth GE service signals into four GE

service signals and multiplexes these four signals into an OTU 5G/FEC 5G
signal. Converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with
ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
201
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type
GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s
Crossconnect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services

each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through
the backplane. Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired
slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one
OTN
function
l Provides the OTU5G interface on WDM-side.

l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU5G and ODU5G.
l Supports TCM function for ODU5G.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Supported
NOTE
The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional
EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source C-VLAN and Sink CVLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.
FEC
encoding
Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures.
l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as
well as the optical power.
l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ALS
function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown
(ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter
module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is
received on the WDM side.
Test frame
Supported

202
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electricallayer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
l Supports VLAN SNCP.
l Supports client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports OWSP protection.
l Supports MS SNCP protection.
eSFP
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
MAC
Supported
PHY
Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with

which transparently transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.1q VLAN

All L2 protocols including xSTP,
LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, and PPP
MPLS protocols
All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP,
OSPF, RIP, and IGRP
Protocols or standards
(performance monitoring) for
processing services
IEEE 802.3x pause frame

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1p priority
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IGMP
STP
RSTP

The L4G board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 14-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

203
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board
GE
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
6GE
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
4GE
L2
switching
module
E/O
Client-side
optical 6GE
module
E/O
GE
CrossOTN
encapsulation
connect
processing
and mapping
module
module
module
4GE
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the L4G board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the L4G board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the L4G to the WDM side
of the L4G, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives a maximum of six channels of flat-rate GE optical
signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 interfaces, and performs O/E
conversion.
After O/E conversion, the six channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching
module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs
a maximum of four channels of GE signals to the signal processing module.
The signal processing module performs operations such as the service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals.
The OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receive direction
204
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The WDM-side optical module receives OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the
module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as OTU 5G/FEC 5G framing, decoding of
FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs four channels of GE signals.
The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends six channels of the signals
with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of six channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from six channels of internal electrical
signals to GE optical signals.

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals.
OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals.
L2 switching module

The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module,
and OTN processing module.
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical
signals between the L4G and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other
three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming
service signals are GE signals.
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

205
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU 5G/
FEC 5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE
performance.
OTN processing module
Frames OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, processes overheads in OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals,
and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
l

Power supply module

14.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the L4G board.

Figure 14-11 shows the front panel of the L4G board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

206
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-11 Front panel of the L4G board
L4G
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
OUT
IN
L4G
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the L4G board. Table 14-11 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

207
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the L4G board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX6
LC
RX1-RX6
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one L4G board.
Table 14-12 shows the valid slots for the L4G board.
Table 14-12 Valid slots for the L4G board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G

The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.

This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS and the
logical ports of the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

208
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 14-13 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers
displayed on the NMS. .
Table 14-13 Mapping between the physical ports on the L4G board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a
Figure 14-12 describes the application model of the L4G board. Table 14-14 describes the
meaning of each port.
Figure 14-12 Port diagram of the L4G board
Client side
PORT3
PORT4
PORT5
PORT6
PORT7
PORT8
WDM side
VCTRUNK1 101(AP1/AP1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
L2 swithing module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
201(LP/LP)-1
1(IN/OUT)-1
Cross-connect Service processing WDM-side optical

module
module
module

209
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-14 Meaning of NM port of the L4G board

Port Name
Meaning
PORT3-PORT8
These ports correspond to the client-side

optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX6/TX6
respectively.
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4
Internal virtual ports.
AP1-AP4
Internal convergence ports.
LP
Internal logical port. The optical paths are

numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
IN/OUT
Corresponding to the WDM-side optical

interfaces.

If the L4G board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the six channels
of GE optical signals and the four channels of GE electrical signals accessed from the clientside ports is realized through the L2 switching module.
NOTE
One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports.

The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 1.25 Gbit/s.
There are one-to-one port connections between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of
the cross-connect module. These connections do not need to be set on the U2000.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is
implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can
be created:
Create the cross-connection between the internal AP and LP ports of the L4G board
(create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by
and
in Figure 14-13.
Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the LP port of
other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 14-13. (The GE services accessed from the
client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and inter-board service convergence.)
Create the cross-connection between the AP port or RX/TX port of other boards and
the LP port of the L4G board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-13. (The GE services
accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of
the L4G board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

210
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other
board, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-13. (This cross-connection enables the passing-through
of the broadcast services.)
Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the AP port of other
boards, as shown by 6 in Figure 14-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side
of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and
the inter-board service deconvergence.)
The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. This connection does not need to be configured on the U2000.
Figure 14-13 Cross-connection diagram of the L4G board

Client side
Other board
4
102(AP2/AP2)-1/4(RX2/TX2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1/5(RX3/TX3)-1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
101(AP1/AP1)-1/3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
104(AP4/AP4)-1/6(RX4/TX4)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
101(AP1/AP1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
Client side
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
104(AP4/AP4)-1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-2
2
1
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
L4G
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board
The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the
WDM side of the L4G board
The WDM side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDMside of other boards
The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to thec lient side of other boards
Other board
1
2
3
4
5
6
TN11L4G/TN11LDGD/TN11LDGS/TN11LOG/TN12LOG/TN11LQG/TN13LQM/
TN11LQMD/TN12LQMD/TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS/ TN11TBE/TN11TDG/TN11TOM/
TN11TQM/TN12TQM

For parameters of L4G, refer to Table 14-15.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

211
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-15 L4G parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Displays the position of the optical interface.
Optical
Interface Name
Sets and queries the optical interface name.
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

occupancy status of the current channel of a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Optical
Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: Used
Default:
l WDM side:
On
The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the

loopback mode for the current optical interface of a
board.
See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a
board.
See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more
information.
l Client side:
Off
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown
Disabled,
Enabled
Service Mode
OTN, SDH
Default: Enabled
Default: OTN
LPT Enabled
Disabled,
Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
Disabled,
Enabled
Default: Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter

determines whether to automatically shut down the
laser after the signals received by a board are lost.
See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM
The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode
of a board.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more
information.
The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to
enable the link pass-through (LPT).
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more
information.
The FEC Working State parameter determines
whether to enable or disable the forward error
correction (FEC) function of the current optical
interface.
See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for
more information.

212
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side

optical interface of a board.
Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDMside optical interface of a board.
Planned
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196
.050 to
80/1560.61/19
2.100
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/

Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength
number, wavelength and frequency of the current
optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/20
8.170 to
18/1611.00/18
8.780
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DE
G
Default: C
Default: None
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band

type of the current working wavelength.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for
more information.
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the
relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or
channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger
conditions of the protection group in which this OTU
board resides.
See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM
14.2.11 Specifications of the L4G

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

213
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
4G
N/A
3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD
N/A
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD

(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
NOTE

Table 14-16 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2

214
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
Table 14-17 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2

215
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module

Table 14-18 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable

Wavelength-NRZAPD
NRZ
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-2
-3

216
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value

Wavelength-NRZAPD
10
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
Dispersion tolerance
ps/nm
3400
3400

Receiver type
APD
APD
range
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-25
-25
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at 25
C ( 77F ) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55
C ( 131F ) (W)
TN11L4
G
3400 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
50.0
55.0

217
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at 25
C ( 77F ) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55
C ( 131F ) (W)
3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD
53.0
58.0
14.3 LDGD
LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

The available functional version of the LDGD board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LDG
D
14.3.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGD board implements the conversion between two
channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendation, and dually
feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
For the position of the LDGD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-14.
Figure 14-14 Position of the LDGD board in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
1
GE
1
LDGD
G.694.1/
G.694.2
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
G.694.1/
LDGD
G.694.2
DMUX
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
GE
WDM side
MUX
WDM side

Client side
218
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LDGD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the
electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 14-19 Functions and features of the LDGD board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one OTU1/STM-16 signal

and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.
l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM
side.
Client-side
service type
Cross-connect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE

services each to working/protection cross-connection boards
respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two
GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one
l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side.
OTN function
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring

to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping
process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM
specification
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this

module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side
within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing
of 100 GHz.
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
Not supported.
LPT function
Supported
219
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
FEC encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser
as well as the optical power.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser
shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding
optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down
if no optical signal is received on the WDM side.
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
eSFP

client side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Protocols or
standards (nonperformance
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3z

220
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LDGD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 14-15 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

221
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board
Backplane (service cross-connection)
GE
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
GE
CrossOTN
encapsulation
and mapping Processing connect
module
module
module
Client side
Optical
module
E/O
Splitter
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
O/E
WDM side
Optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGD board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LDGD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGD to the WDM side
of the LDGD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation
and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs
one channel of OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of
identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1OUT2 optical interfaces.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

222
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of
FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs two channels of GE signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to GE optical signals.

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.
OTU1 optical signals.

signals between the LDGD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE
performance.
Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC
encoding and decoding.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

223
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Power supply module

14.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGD board.

Figure 14-16 shows the front panel of the LDGD board.
Figure 14-16 Front panel of the LDGD board
LDGD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LDGD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

224
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDGD board. Table 14-20 lists the
type and function of each interface.
Table 14-20 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGD board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDGD board.
Table 14-21 shows the valid slots for the LDGD board.
Table 14-21 Valid slots for LDGD board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

225
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD

The characteristic code for the LDGD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 14-22.
Table 14-22 Characteristic code for the LDGD board
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
The frequency of forth

optical signal
The last four digits of the

frequency value of the first
channel of signals on the
WDM side.
Last four digits

optical signal

frequency value of the
second channel of signals on
the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGD board is 92109210.
l
"92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM
side both are 192.10 THz.


Table 14-23 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDGD board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

226
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Logical Ports
Figure 14-17 shows the application model of the LDGD board. Table 14-24 describes the
Figure 14-17 Port diagram of the LDGD board
3 (RX1/T X1)-1
4 (RX2/T X2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-2
Cross-connect
mo dule
Servi ce
p rocessing
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2 /OUT2)-1
WDM-si de
opti cal modu le
Table 14-24 Meaning of NM port of the LDGD board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2
These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces.
LP
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and

2.
IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2
These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical

interfaces.

If the LDGD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services
is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGD
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
and
in Figure 14-18.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGD board and the LP
port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGD board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

227
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown
in Figure 14-18.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port
of the LDGD board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board for protection and the inter-board
in Figure 14-18.
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGD board and the LP port of
other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGD board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services),
as shown
in Figure 14-18.
The two paths of the LP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2
ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Figure 14-18 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGD board

Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
4
4(RX2/TX2)-1
3
5
201(LP/LP)-2
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
2
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
LDGD
The client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
LDGD board
The WDM side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Other board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1
2
3
4
5
TN11TQM/TN12TQM

228
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


For parameters of LDGD, refer to Table 14-25.
Table 14-25 LDGD parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

occupancy status of the current channel of a
board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On
The Optical Interface Loopback parameter

sets the loopback mode for the current optical
interface of a board.
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status
of a board.
See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for
more information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Service Mode
OTN, SDH
Default: Enabled
Default: OTN
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

determines whether to automatically shut down
the laser after the signals received by a board are
lost.
The Service Mode parameter sets the service
mode of a board.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for
more information.
The LPT Enabled parameter determines
whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT).
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for
more information.

229
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled

interface.
See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Queries the operating wavelength at the WDMside optical interface of a board.
Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.
050 to
80/1560.61/192
.100
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength

(nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the
wavelength number, wavelength and frequency
of the current optical interface on the WDM side
of a board.
Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM
Default: Enabled
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208
.170 to
18/1611.00/188
.780
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M FullDuplex
Default: C
Default: 9600
Default: AutoNegotiation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the

band type of the current working wavelength.
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and
queries the maximum packet length supported by
a board and is applicable to the boards supporting
Ethernet services.
See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets
and queries the working mode of the Ethernet.
See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM

230
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG

channels of an OTU board as SD switching
trigger conditions of the protection group in
which this OTU board resides.
Default: None
14.3.11 Specifications of the LDGD

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
DG
D
N/A
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN
N/A
1000 BASE-LX-10
km
1000 BASE-LX-40
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km

6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZAPD
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

231
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

232
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

233
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
(Four
Channels
Tunable)
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-4
-4
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-8
-8
-5
-5
-5
-5
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant
PIN
APD
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
APD
1300 to
1575
-28
-18
-28

-28
-28
234
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
(Four
Channels
Tunable)
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
Table 14-29 Specifications of CWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD
NRZ

Maximum mean launched
power
dBm

power
dBm
0.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation
nm
6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

235
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Receiver type
APD
Operating wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
Minimum receiver overload
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Bo
ard
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
TN
11L
DG
D
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN
34.0
37.4
38.0
41.8
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD

1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
14.4 LDGS
LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

236
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The available functional version of the LDGS board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LDG
S
14.4.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGS implements the conversion between two
For the position of the LDGS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-19.
Figure 14-19 Position of the LDGS board in the WDM system
1
MUX
GE
Client side
G.694.1/ LDGS
G.694.2
DMUX
DMUX
LDGS G.694.1/
G.694.2
WDM side
MUX
GE
2
WDM side
Client side

The LDGS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

237
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-30 Functions and features of the LDGS board

Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one 2.5 Gbit/s OTU1/STM-16 signal
and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with
ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.
694.2. The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
Crossconnect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services

the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired
slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one
OTN
function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping
process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
service signal.
FEC
encoding
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT
function
Supported
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well
as the optical power.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

238
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
ALS
function
Test frame
Supported
Opticallayer ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3z

239
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LDGS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 14-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

240
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board
GE
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
GE
CrossOTN
encapsulation processing connect
and mapping
module
module
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGS board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LDGS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGS to the WDM side
of the LDGS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

241
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface.
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two
channels of GE signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l



signals between the LDGS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board
performance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

242
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Power supply module

14.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGS board.

Figure 14-21 shows the front panel of the LDGS board.
Figure 14-21 Front panel of the LDGS board
LDGS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT
IN
LDGS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

243
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on front panel of the LDGS board. Table 14-31 lists the type
Table 14-31 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGS board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDGS board.
Table 14-32 shows the valid slots for the LDGS board.
Table 14-32 Valid slots for LDGS board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

244
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-33 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDGS board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 14-22 shows the application model of the LDGS board. Table 14-34 describes the
Figure 14-22 Port diagram of the LDGS board
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
Cross-connect
module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Service
processing
module
1(IN/OUT)-1
WDM-side
optical module

245
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-34 Meaning of NM port of the LDGS board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2
LP
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and

2.
IN/OUT

his section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS.
If the LDGS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGS
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
and
in Figure 14-23.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGS board and the LP
port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGS board
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
in Figure 14-23.
of the LDGS board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board for protection and the inter-board
in Figure 14-23.
NOTE
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGS board and the LP port of
other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGS board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services),
as shown
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
in Figure 14-23.
The two paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/
OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000

246
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-23 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGS board
Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
4
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
2
1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
LDGS
1

The client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LDGS board
The WDM side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Other board
2
3
4
5
TN11TQM/TN12TQM

For parameters of LDGS, refer to Table 14-35.
Table 14-35 LDGS parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical
Interface
Name

247
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

occupancy status of the current channel of a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Optical
Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: Used
Default:
l WDM side:
On
The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the

loopback mode for the current optical interface of a
board.
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a
board.
See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more
information.
l Client side:
Off
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Service Mode
OTN, SDH
Default: Enabled
Default: OTN
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

determines whether to automatically shut down the
The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of
a board.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more
information.
The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to
enable the link pass-through (LPT).
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more
information.
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side

Band Type
Default: Enabled

interface.
See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for
more information.

248
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDMside optical interface of a board.
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries

the maximum packet length supported by a board and
is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet
services.
See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Planned
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196
.050 to
80/1560.61/19
2.100
Default: 9600
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/20
8.170 to
18/1611.00/18
8.780
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/

Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength
number, wavelength and frequency of the current
optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type

of the current working wavelength.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Ethernet
Working
Mode
AutoNegotiation,
1000M FullDuplex
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and

queries the working mode of the Ethernet.
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None

channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger
conditions of the protection group in which this OTU
board resides.
See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)
14.4.11 Specifications of the LDGS

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

249
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
11L
DG
S
N/A
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZ1000 BASE-LX-10 PIN

km
12800 ps/nm-C Band1000 BASE-LX-40 Fixed Wavelength-NRZAPD
km
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
N/A
1000 BASE-ZX-80 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZkm

PIN
1.25 Gbit/s
3200 ps/nm-C BandMultirate (eSFP
Fixed Wavelength-NRZCWDM)-40 km
APD
2.67 Gbit/s
12800 ps/nm-C BandMultirate (eSFP
Tunable WavelengthCWDM)-80 km
NRZ-APD
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

250
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

251
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

252
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
-2
-2
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant
PIN
APD
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
APD

1300 to
1575
253
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-28
-18
-28
-28
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
2.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600

254
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Eye pattern mask
Value
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Bo
ard
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F)
TN
11L
DG
S
32.0
35.2
36.0
39.6

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

255
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.5 LDM
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board

Only one functional version of the LDM board is available, that is, TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN12
LDM
Type
The system provides two types of the LDM board: One has a pair of input and output optical
interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 14-40 lists
the types of the LDM board.
Table 14-40 Type description of the LDM board
Board
Type
Description
LDM
One type is the single transmitting and

single receiving board.
The WDM-side interfaces are

IN1/OUT1.
Other type is the dual-fed selectively

receiving board.
The WDM-side interfaces are

IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.
NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of LDM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and
selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.
14.5.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDM board converts between signals at the rate of 100
Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LDM board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-24 and Figure 14-25.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

256
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-24 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LDM
DMUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/ LDM
G.694.2
DMUX
MUX
2
WDM side
Client side
Client side
WDM side
Figure 14-25 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
DMUX
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
1
LDM
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
2
DMUX
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LDM
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

The LDM board is mainly used to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

257
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-41 Functions and features of the LDM board

Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5
Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard
DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard
CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process
is similar.
l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and
single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application
scenario.
Client-side
service type

OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s
STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s
STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s
FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s
FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s
FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s
HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at
a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s
DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s
SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s
ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s
FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
OTN
function
l Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and

multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than
2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.709.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM
specification
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type
is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.

258
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
LPT function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme

eSFP

side.
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM
side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

259
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
Transport Systems: Common Generic
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES
(FC-PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND
SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND
SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE
COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL
(FC-SB-2)
SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for
the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous
Serial Interface (ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc
Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface
NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets
CONnection architecture (SBCON)
ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed
Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access
Control(MAC)
Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer
Protocol(PHY)
Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium
Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

260
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LDM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 14-26 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

261
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
O/E
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
( controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.5.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LDM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDM to the WDM side
of the LDM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client
module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing,
OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1
signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

262
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

optical signals. A laser converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical
optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2
optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of
Any signals.
optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single
receiving function on the WDM side.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals.
electrical signals to Any optical signals.


The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN
processing module.
Service encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
performance monitoring function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

263
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Power supply module

14.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDM board.

Figure 14-27 shows the front panel of the LDM board.
Figure 14-27 Front panel of the LDM board
LDM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

264
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDM board. Table 14-42 lists the
Table 14-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN12LDM board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDM board.
Table 14-43 shows the valid slots for the LDM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

265
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-43 Valid slots for the LDM board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
14.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM

The board characteristic code indicates information about frequency of signals, type of the
Code for OTUs.


Table 14-44 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDM board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE

For parameters of LDM, refer to Table 14-45.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

266
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-45 LDM parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
The Channel Use Status parameter sets

the occupancy status of the current
channel of a board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Used
Default: Non-Loopback
Service Type
None, Any, FE, GE, GE

(GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,
FC-200, FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI
Default: None

parameter sets the loopback mode for
the current optical interface of a board.
(WDM Interface) for more
information.
The Service Type parameter sets the
type of the service accessed at the optical
interface on the client side.
NOTE
GE services can be encapsulated in two
formats. When Service Type is GE, the
encapsulation format is GFP-F; when
Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the
encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value
GE(GFP-T) is recommended.
The GE services at the transmit and receive
ends must be encapsulated in the same
format.
Client Service
Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s)
100 - 2200
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 0
Default:
l WDM side: On
sets the rate of the accessed service at the

optical interface on the client side of a
board.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
The Laser Status parameter sets the
laser status of a board.
See D.20 Laser Status (WDM
l Client side: Off
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

267
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
The Automatic Laser Shutdown

parameter determines whether to
automatically shut down the laser after
the signals received by a board are lost.
See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown
information.
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
Queries the tunable wavelength range at

the WDM-side optical interface of a
board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
Default: Enabled
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The LPT Enabled parameter

determines whether to enable the link
pass-through (LPT).
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM
C, CWDM
Default: C
The FEC Working State parameter

determines whether to enable or disable
the forward error correction (FEC)
function of the current optical interface.

wavelength.

268
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
The Max. Packet Length parameter

sets and queries the maximum packet
length supported by a board and is
applicable to the boards supporting
Ethernet services.
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: 9600
Default: None
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The SD Trigger Condition parameter

sets the relevant alarms of certain optical
interfaces or channels of an OTU board
as SD switching trigger conditions of the
protection group in which this OTU
board resides.
See D.50 SD Trigger Condition
information.
Determines whether to process GCC1
and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the
processing is not required, set this
parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it
to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the client
side accesses OTN services.
PRBS Test
Status
Disabled, Enabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Default: Disabled
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets

the pseudo-random binary sequence
(PRBS) test status of a board.
See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM
Determines whether to enable the
special frame test before deployment.
When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the board sends the test frame where the
payload consists of only 0. This
parameter is used in the deployment
commissioning.
14.5.10 Specifications of the LDM

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

269
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
WDM-Side
Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical
Module
Module
TN
12L
DM
N/A
I-16
N/A

(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
S-16.1

(eSFP DWDM)-120
km
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
NOTE

NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-46 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM

270
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Target
distance
km
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28

271
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module, or 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be
used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below
apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed
signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2

272
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1,
FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly
different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVBASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The
actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

273
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

274
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-49 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for

the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required
for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

275
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
80

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
nm
1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1270 to 1620
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Table 14-51 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km

NRZ
276
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Target distance
Value
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
km
120

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
nm
12.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant (5% margin

are required for the eye pattern
of STM-16 services and

Receiver type
APD
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

277
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN12LDM
22.6
24.8
14.6 LDMD
LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and
selective receiving

Only one functional version of the LDMD board is available, that is, TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LDM
D
14.6.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMD converts between signals at the rate of 100
Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually
feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
For the position of the LDMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-28.
Figure 14-28 Position of the LDMD board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
1
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LDMD
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
2
DMUX
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LDMD
WDM side
MUX
WDM side

Client side
278
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE

The LDMD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 14-52 Functions and features of the LDMD board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5
DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process
is similar.
Client-side
service type

OTN
function

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

279
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
WDM
specification
Supports DWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
NOTE
ALS
function
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

280
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network
(SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

281
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LDMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 14-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

282
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
Splitter
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LDMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMD to the WDM side
of the LDMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
signals.
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

283
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output
through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of
Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l



processing module.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

284
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

14.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMD board.

Figure 14-30 shows the front panel of the LDMD board.
Figure 14-30 Front panel of the LDMD board
LDMD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LDMD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

285
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDMD board. Table 14-53 lists the
Table 14-53 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMD board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDMD board.
Table 14-54 shows the valid slots for the LDMD board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

286
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-54 Valid slots for the LDMD board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
14.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD

The characteristic code for the LDMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
Table 14-55 Characteristic code for the LDMD board
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

optical signal

WDM side.
Last four digits

optical signal

the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDMD board is 92109210.
l


displayed on the NMS..
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

287
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-56 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDMD board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE

For the parameters of LDMD, refer to Table 14-57.
Table 14-57 LDMD Parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Click D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Used
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Click D.27 Optical Interface
Loopback (WDM Interface) for more
information.

288
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Type

OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,

Default: None
NOTE
format.
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/
s)
100 - 2200
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 0
Default:
l WDM side: On

board.
Click D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate
information.
Click D.20 Laser Status (WDM
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Default: Enabled

Click D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown
information.
pass-through (LPT).
Click D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM
Click D.15 FEC Working State (WDM
Used to query the operating wavelength
at the WDM-side optical interface of a
board.

289
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Band Type
Used to query the band type.
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
Click D.46 Planned Wavelength No./
information.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: C
Default: 9600
Default: None
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

wavelength.
Click D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM
Ethernet services.
Click D.32 Max. Packet Length
information.
board resides.
Click D.50 SD Trigger Condition
information.
to Disabled.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

290
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled

Click D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

commissioning.
14.6.10 Specifications of the LDMD

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
DM
D
N/A
I-16
N/A
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km

Channels-Tunable)

(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

291
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30

292
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Eye pattern
mask
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed
below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

293
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1,
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

294
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

295
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9

296
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

km
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/nmC Band-Fixed
WavelengthNRZ-APD
12800 ps/nmC BandTunable

WavelengthNRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C
BandTunable
WavelengthNRZ-APD
(Four
ChannelsTunable)
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-4
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-8
-5
-5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
35
ps/nm
12800
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant

Receiver type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
APD
APD

APD
297
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module
Type

WavelengthNRZ-APD

WavelengthNRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C
BandTunable
WavelengthNRZ-APD
(Four
ChannelsTunable)
range
nm
1200 to 1650
1300 to 1575
dBm
-28
-28
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11LDMD
26.9
29.6
14.7 LDMS
LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and
single receiving

Only one functional version of the LDMS board is available, that is, TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

298
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LDM
S
14.7.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMS board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LDMS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-31.
Figure 14-31 Position of the LDMS board in the WDM system
1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LDMS
DMUX
G.694.1
DMUX
MUX
2
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1 LDMS
2
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE

The LDMS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 14-63 Functions and features of the LDMS board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/
s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
299
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

OTN
function

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
NOTE

300
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

301
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent
(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

302
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LDMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 14-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

303
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
OTN
processing
module
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LDMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMS to the WDM side
of the LDMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
signals.
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

304
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l



processing module.

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

305
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMS board.

Figure 14-33 shows the front panel of the LDMS board.
Figure 14-33 Front panel of the LDMS board
LDMS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT
IN
LDMS
Indicators
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

306
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDMS board. Table 14-64 lists the type
Table 14-64 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMS board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.7.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDMS board.
Table 14-65 shows the valid slots for the LDMS board.
Table 14-65 Valid slots for the LDMS board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

307
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
14.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-66 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDMS board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE

For the parameters of LDMS, refer to Table 14-67.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

308
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-67 LDMS Parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type

OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,
Default: None

information.
NOTE
format.
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/
s)
100 - 2200
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 0
Default:
l WDM side: On

board.
Click D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate
information.
l Client side: Off
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

309
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled

information.
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

board.
Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
Default: Enabled
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

pass-through (LPT).
C, CWDM
Default: C

Click D.15 FEC Working State
information.

wavelength.

310
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600

Ethernet services.
information.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: 9600
Default: Disabled

to Disabled.
NOTE
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

board resides.
information.
commissioning.
14.7.10 Specifications of the LDMS

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

311
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
DM
DS
N/A
I-16
N/A
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km

Channels-Tunable)

(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
NOTE

NOTE
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM

312
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Target
distance
km
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28

313
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
NOTE
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed
below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2

314
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
NOTE
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

315
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

316
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

317
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
WavelengthNRZ-APD

WavelengthNRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C
BandTunable
WavelengthNRZ-APD
(Four
ChannelsTunable)
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-2
-2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
35
ps/nm
12800
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
APD
APD
range
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
-28
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
1300 to 1575

318
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11LDMS
26.9
29.6
14.8 LDX
LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

Only one functional version of the LDX board is available, that is, TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN12
LDX
14.8.2 Application
The LDX board is an optical transponder unit that converts two channels of 10 Gbit/s service
signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signals and
WDM signals that comply with the ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-34.
Figure 14-34 Position of the LDX board in the WDM system
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
MUX
LDX
DMUX
G.694.1
G.694.1
DMUX
LDX
MUX
WDM side

WDM side
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
Client side
319
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LDX board provides OTN interfaces and electrical supervisory channels (ESCs).
Table 14-73 Functions and features of the LDX board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Maps two channels of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals
and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signals and WDM signals that
comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
Client-side
service type
10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s

10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s
OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s
NOTE
The 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service are processed identically. For the 10GE
WAN service, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.
OTN
function
l Provides the OTU2 interface on the WDM side.

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing to comply with
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2 into OTU2
signals, and the transparent mapping of 10GE LAN/OTU2e into OTU2e
signals.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM
specification
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT
function
is 10GE LAN.
NOTE
is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.

320
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
FEC
encoding
l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.
l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE
Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Test frame
Not supported
Opticallayer ASON
Supported
Not supported
Protection
l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the
board.

XFP
Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the client side.

Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed
Wavelength).
Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable
Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783

321
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LDX board consists of a client-side optical module, a WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, a control and communication module, and a power supply module.
Figure 14-35 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

322
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board
RX1
O/E
Client-side OTN
processing
module
10
TX1
WDM side
SDH/ SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client side
E/O
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
O/E
IN1
E/O
OUT2
O/E
IN2
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
RX2
TX2
O/E
Client - side OTN
processing module
10
E/O
Clientside
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC
)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDX board can access the following optical signals:
l
OC-192 optical signals
STM-64 optical signals
10GE LAN optical signals
10GE WAN optical signals
OTU2 optical signals
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

323
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OTU2e optical signals
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LDX board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDX to the WDM side
of the LDX. The receive direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the LDX
to the client side of the LDX.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX optical interface and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2
or OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance
monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules
for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Finally, the module outputs two channels of
OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals.
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After E/O conversion,
the module transmits OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals
at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2 or OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU2 or OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/
AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels
of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, orOTU2e electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN,
10GE WAN, OTU2, orOTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals
through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to
OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

324
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN
encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN
processing module.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
or OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
SONET performance monitoring function.
10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
or OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE
LAN performance monitoring function.
Client-side OTN processing module
Implements the OTN performance monitoring function.
Frames OTU2 or OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and
performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.

Power supply module

14.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDX board.

Figure 14-36 shows the front panel of the LDX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

325
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-36 Front panel of the LDX board
LDX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LDX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDX board. Table 14-74 describes
the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

326
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-74 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDX board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC
Receives a wavelength from the optical demultiplexing

unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
Transmits a wavelength to the optical multiplexing unit

or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDX board.
Table 14-75 shows the valid slots for the LDX board.
Table 14-75 Valid slots for the LDX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
14.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX

The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type,
wavelength, and so on.
Code for OTUs.
14.8.8 Board Service Configuration

This section describes the interface information on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

327
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM
are listed in Table 14-76.
Table 14-76 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDX board displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
NOTE


Table 14-77 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDX board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
NOTE
14.8.10 LDX Loopbacks

Table 14-78 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LDX boards.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

328
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-78 Loopbacks supported by LDX boards

Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN12LDX
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-37.
WDM-side outloop
WDM-side inloop
Client-side outloop
When 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192

services are received, see Figure 14-38.
When OTU2/OTU2e services are received, see Figure
14-39.
The implementation of client-side inloops is similar to the implementation of WDM-side

outloops. The implementation of client-side outloops is similar to the implementation of WDMside inloops.
l
Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop

As shown in Figure 14-37, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into
one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked
to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Figure 14-37 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN12LDX board
RX1/TX1
10GE LAN/10GE
ODU2/
WAN/STM-64/OCODU2e
192/OTU2/OTU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
RX2/TX2
10GE LAN/10GE
ODU2/
WAN/STM-64/OCODU2e
192/OTU2/OTU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN2/OUT2
Client-side
WDM-side
Pass-through services
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloop and client-side outloop

Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when one 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192 service is received on the client side.
As shown in Figure 14-38, one 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 service
received on the client side is loopbacked to the client side at the client-side port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

329
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-38 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LDX board (1)
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when one OTU2/OTU2e service is received
on the client side.
As shown in Figure 14-39, one OTU2/OTU2e service received on the client side is
demapped into one ODU2/ODU2e service after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is
terminated. The OTU2/OTU2e service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2/
ODU2e loopback point.
Figure 14-39 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LDX board (2)
RX1/TX1
OTU2/
OTU2e
ODU2/
ODU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
RX2/TX2
OTU2/
OTU2e
ODU2/
ODU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN2/OUT2
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

For the parameters of the LDX, refer to Table 14-79.
Table 14-79 LDX Parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

a board.
Default: Used
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

330
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop

Service Type
None, 10GE LAN,

10GE WAN,FC-1200,
OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2v, STM-64
The Service Type parameter sets the type

of the service accessed at the optical
Default: 10GE LAN

Port Mapping
Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
The Port Mapping parameter sets and

queries the mapping mode of a port service.
See D.47 Port Mapping (WDM
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

status of a board.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

automatically shut down the laser after the
signals received by a board are lost.
whether to enable the link pass-through
(LPT).
determines whether to enable or disable the
forward error correction (FEC) function of
the current optical interface.
The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC
mode of the current optical interface.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)

331
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Used to query the operating wavelength at

the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
NOTE
Only support C band.

wavelength.
NOTE

SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets

the relevant alarms of certain optical
interfaces or channels of an OTU board as
SD switching trigger conditions of the
protection group in which this OTU board
resides.

332
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Determines whether to
process GCC1 and
GCC2 in OTN
overheads. If the
processing is not
required, set this
parameter to Enabled;
otherwise, set it to
Disabled.Determines
whether to process
GCC1 and GCC2 in
OTN overheads. If the
processing is not
required, set this
parameter to Enabled;
otherwise, set it to
Disabled.
Determines whether to process GCC1 and

GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing
is not required, set this parameter to
Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the client side
accesses OTN services.
Default: Disabled
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the

pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS)
test status of a board.
Determines whether to enable the special
frame test before deployment. When this
parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends
the test frame where the payload consists of
only 0. This parameter is used in the
deployment commissioning.
14.8.12 Specifications of the LDX

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

333
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
12L
DX
N/A
10 Gbit/s Multirate -10

km
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band

(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP

km
km
800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Single Rate

-0.3 km
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd
& Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
NOTE

NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 40 km, and 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 80 km module
can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, and OTU2 signals. The following
specifications completely apply to OTU2 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, or 10GE WAN signals.
The 10Gbit/s single rate -0.3km module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals. The specifications
listed following completely apply to 10GE LAN signals.
Table 14-80 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10 Gbit/s rate services
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

334
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate )
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5

335
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
& Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
Operating frequency range
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

336
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity (FEC

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

337
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Table 14-83 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

PIN
338
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Bo
ard
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at 25
C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55
C (131F) (W)
LD
X
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
44.5
51.2

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
45.5
52.2
14.9 LEM24
LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE + 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board

The available functional version of the LEM24 board is TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

339
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LEM
24
14.9.2 Application
The LEM24 board is an optical transponder unit.
As an OTU, the LEM24 board converts 22 channels of GE/FE services or two channels of 10GE
WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side or two channels of 10GE
services cross-connected from the backplane into two channels of standard WDM wavelength
OTU2 signals. The LEM24 board also performs the reverse process. The LEM24 board supports
convergence of multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. Further,
the board supports transparent transmission of 16 channels of GE or two channels of 10GE
services.
Figure 14-40 shows the application of the LEM24 board in a WDM system.
Figure 14-40 Application of the TN11LEM24 board in a WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
5
GE
FE
LEM24
10GE LAN
10GE WAN 28
Client
side
MUX
DMUX
LEM24
DMUX
WDM
side
MUX
WDM
side
GE
FE
10GE LAN
28 10GE WAN
Client
side
NOTE
The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports and are capable of processing 10GE LAN and
10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports and are capable of processing
GE and FE services.

The LEM24 board supports electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function.
Table 14-84 lists the functions and features of the LEM24 board.
NOTE
The 10GE cross-connections are supported only by OptiX OSN 6800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

340
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-84 Functions and features of the LEM24 board

Function and
Feature
Basic function
Description
l Converts 22 channels of GE/FE services or two channels of 10GE
WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side or two
channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into
two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals and
performs the reverse process.
l Converges multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE services into one channel of
10GE service.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
l The LEM24 board supports both FE/GE electrical signal and FE/GE optical
signal.
l It is recommended to change RX21/TX21, RX22/TX22 optical interfaces to
electrical interfaces only.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA.
OTN function
l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE

electrical signals between the LEM24 board and the cross-connect board.
l Supports mapping of 10GE signals into OTU2 signals.

l Supports section monitoring (SM) and path monitoring (PM) at the
OTU2 and ODU2 layers.
l Supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) at the ODU2 layer.
WDM
specification
LPT function
Supported
NOTE
FEC encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Supports remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.
l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with
FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

341
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
ALS function
shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical
transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no
optical signal is received on the WDM side.
IEEE 1588v2
Supported in the WDM side.
Physical clock
Supported in the Client side and WDM side.
QinQ
Supports stacking VLAN.
QoS (Quality of
Service)
Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS).

Supports IEEE802.1p.
Supports DSCP.
ETH OAM
Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah.
LAG (Link
Aggregation
Group)
l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and

trunk ports.
l Supports manual and static LAGs.
l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.
VLAN
multicast
Supports VLAN-based multicast.
Port CVLAN
group
Supports a group of CVLANs being used as one VLAN.
L2 layer
switching
Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D.

Supports MAC address learning and aging.
Supports IGMP snooping.
Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP.
Supports 32K MAC addresses.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Flow control
Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow

control termination.
Maximum
transmission
unit (MTU)
Supports a maximum of 9600 bytes frames.
Ethernet private
line (EPL)
Provides point-to-point EPLs.
Ethernet virtual
private line
(EVPL)
Provides point-to-multipoint EVPLs and supports VLAN-based

switching.

342
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Port working
mode
Description
10GE optical port: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN
GE optical port: 1000MFUL, auto-negotiation
GE electrical port: auto-negotiation
FE optical port: 100MFULL
FE electrical port: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL,
auto-negotiation
PRBS function
Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
SFP+/XFP
Supports enhanced SFP+ optical modules on the client side.

Supports 10 Gbit/s tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM
side (Tunable Wavelength).
Wavelength).
Loopback
10GE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
GE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
GE electric
interface
MAC
PHY
FE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported

343
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
FE electric
interface
MAC
PHY
WDM side
optical interface
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

services comply
IEEE 802.1q VLAN

LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc.
MPLS protocols
All L3 protocols including ARP,
IGMP, OSPF, RIP, IGRP etc.
processing services

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
IEEE IGMP
STP, RSTP, MSTP
R-APS

The LEM24 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, signal processing module, 1588 module, control and communication module,
and power supply module.
Figure 14-41 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board in the OptiX
OSN 8800.
Figure 14-42 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board in the OptiX
OSN 6800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

344
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-41 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
RX5
RX6
WDM side
10GE
O/E
RX28
TX5
TX6
TX28
E/O
L2 switching
module
10GE
OTN
processing
Module
E/O
OUT3
O/E
IN3
IN4
OUT4
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
1588
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
345
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-42 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
10GE
Client side
RX5
RX6
WDM side
10GE
O/E
RX28
TX5
TX6
TX28
E/O
L2 switching
module
10GE
OTN
processing
Module
E/O
OUT3
O/E
IN3
IN4
OUT4
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
1588
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEM24 board.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LEM24 board. The
transmit direction is the direction from the client side of the LEM24 to the WDM side of the
LEM24. The receive direction is from the WDM side of the LEM24 to the client side of the
LEM24.
l
Transmit direction
The RX5 to RX28 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client
equipment and perform O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module
performs operations, such as convergence. After convergence, the module outputs a
maximum of two channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module.
The signal processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals
into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of
OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT3 and OUT4 optical ports.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN3-IN4 optical
interfaces. After receiving the signals, the module performs O/E conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

346
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. After performing
the operation, the module sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching
module for service cross-connection.
The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends 24 channels of the
signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the 24 channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs 24 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX5-TX28
optical interfaces.
NOTE
The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN
services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports that can process GE and FE services.
The LEM24 board processes clock signals in two directions.

l
Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock
processing board through the communication module.
Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the
downstream NE through a service board.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN
signals.
Client-side receiver: Performs E/O conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN
signals.

L2 switching module
Performs convergence/deconvergence of service signals.

Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding
and decoding.
1588 module
The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to
the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

347
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal
to the STG board.
l

Power supply module

14.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEM24 board.

Figure 14-43 shows the front panel of the LEM24 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

348
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-43 Front panel of the LEM24 board
LEM24
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
5 ~ 6: 10 GE
7 ~ 28: GE
TX
RX TX
RX TX RX
OUT OUT
IN
IN
13
5
21
22
23
24
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
20
4
3
LEM24
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are fifty-two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LEM24 board. Table 14-85
describes the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

349
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-85 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEM24 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX5-RX28a
LC

equipment.
TX5-TX28a
LC
IN3-IN4
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT3-OUT4
LC

multiplexing unit.
a: The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE
LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports that
can process GE and FE services.
Laser Hazard Level

14.9.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11LEM24 board.
Table 14-86 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEM24 board.
Table 14-86 Valid slots for the LEM24 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35-IU41,

IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU15
The rear connector of the LEM24 board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the
two occupied slots in the subrack. The slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM
is the number of the left slot.
For example, if you install the LEM24 board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the LEM24
board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

350
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24

For detailed descriptions of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.

This section describes how the physical interfaces of the board are displayed on the NMS and
the logical ports of the board.

Table 14-87 Mapping between the physical ports on the LEM24 board and the port numbers
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Physical Port
IN3/OUT3
IN4/OUT4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
TX9/RX9
TX10/RX10
10
TX11/RX11
11
TX12/RX12
12
TX13/RX13
13
TX14/RX14
14
TX15/RX15
15
TX16/RX16
16
TX17/RX17
17
TX18/RX18
18
TX19/RX19
19
TX20/RX20
20
351
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Physical Port
TX21/RX21
21
TX22/RX22
22
TX23/RX23
23
TX24/RX24
24
TX25/RX25
25
TX26/RX26
26
TX27/RX27
27
TX28/RX28
28
NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is
a logical port of the board.
Figure 14-44 shows the application model of the LEM24 board. Table 14-88 describes the
Figure 14-44 Port diagram of the LEM24 board
Client side
WDM side
PORT5
PORT6
PORT28
VCTRUNK1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
VCTRUNK2
102(AP2/AP2)-1
VCTRUNK3
103(AP3/AP3)-1
VCTRUNK4
104(AP4/AP4)-1
L2 sw itching
module
3(IN3/OUT3)-1
4(IN4/OUT4)-1
Backplane
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
WDM side
optical
module
Table 14-88 Definition of NM port of the LEM24 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Name
Definition
PORT5 - PORT28
Respectively corresponds to the client-side optical

interfaces: RX5/TX5 - RX28/TX28.
VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4
AP1 - AP4

352
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Port Name
Definition
ClientLP1 - ClientLP2
Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1
ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2
Internal logical ports.
IN3/OUT3 - IN4/OUT4
Corresponds to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

If the LEM24 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create cross-connections between
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and
VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections
between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports, or converge optical signals received by the clientside optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals.
NOTE
l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports.

l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.
One-to-one port connections are between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the
cross-connect module. You are not required to set one-to-one port connections on the
U2000.
Create a cross-connection between the AP port of the LEM24 board and the AP port of
other boards, as shown in Figure 14-45.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The ClientLP port connects to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port connects to the
IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration of these connections on the U2000.

353
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-45 Cross-connection diagram of the LEM24 board

Client
side
WDM
side
103(AP3/AP3)-1
Other board
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Client
side
WDM
side
103(AP3/AP3)-1
LEM24
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Other board
TN11LEM24/TN11LEX4
14.9.10 Board Function Configuration

The LEM24 board provides multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
LAG, and QoS.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the LEM24 by using the U2000:
l
VLAN SNCP Protection
DBPS Protection
QoS (OTN)
Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
MPLS Tunnel
MSTP
STP and RSTP
LAG
RMON
IGMP Snooping
ETH-OAM
14.9.11 LEM24 loopback

Table 14-89 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LEM24 boards.
Table 14-89 Loopbacks supported by LEM boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boa
rd
Service Type
Loopback
Type
Description
TN1
1LE
M24
Clien
t-side
PHY
outloop
See Figure 14-46.
10GE
optical
port

354
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boa
rd
Service Type
Loopback
Type
Description
MAC
outloop
See Figure 14-47.
MAC/PHY
inloop
See Figure 14-48.
GE/FE
optical
port
MAC/PHY
inloop
See Figure 14-49.
GE/FE
electrical
port
PHY
outloop
See Figure 14-50.
MAC/PHY
inloop
See Figure 14-51.
inloop
See Figure 14-52.
outloop
See Figure 14-53.
WDM-side
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of 10GE Services on the LEM24 Board

l
PHY outloop
As shown in Figure 14-46, two 10GE services are received on the client side. Any of the
two 10GE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point.
Figure 14-46 PHY outloop of one 10GE service on the LEM24 board
RX5/TX5
10GE
PHY
10GE
MAC
RX6/TX6
10GE
PHY
10GE
MAC
RX7/TX7
GE/FE
PHY
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK1
ODU2
OTU2
IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK3
GE/FE
PHY
RX28/TX28
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
MAC outloop
355
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

As shown in Figure 14-47, two 10GE services are received on the client side. Any of the
two 10GE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the MAC loopback point.
Figure 14-47 MAC outloop of one 10GE service on the LEM24 board
10GE
MAC
RX5/TX5
10GE
PHY
RX6/TX6
10GE
PHY
10GE
MAC
RX7/TX7
GE/FE
PHY
GE/FE
MAC
ODU2
OTU2
IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK2 ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK3
GE/FE
PHY
RX28/TX28
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
MAC/PHY inloop
As shown in Figure 14-48, two OTU2 services from the WDM side are converted into two
10GE services, or two 10GE services from the backplane are received by the L2 switching
module. Any of the two 10GE services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC
loopback point.
Figure 14-48 MAC/PHY inloop of one 10GE service on the LEM24 board
10GE
MAC
RX5/TX5
10GE
PHY
RX6/TX6
10GE
PHY
10GE
MAC
RX7/TX7
GE/FE
PHY
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK1
ODU2
OTU2
IN3/OUT3
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK3
RX28/TX28
GE/FE
PHY
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

356
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

PHY and MAC Loopbacks of GE/FE (Optical Port) Services on the LEM24 Board
l
MAC/PHY inloop
10GE services. The two 10GE services are then deconverged by the L2 switching module
into two 10GE services and twentytwo GE/FE services. Any N of the GE/FE services
can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC loopback point.
Figure 14-49 MAC/PHY inloop of one GE/FE (optical port) service on the LEM24 board
RX5/TX5
10GE
PHY
10GE
MAC
RX6/TX6
10GE
PHY
10GE
MAC
RX7/TX7
GE/FE
PHY
GE/FE
MAC
ODU2
OTU2
IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK2 ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK3
GE/FE
PHY
RX28/TX28
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of GE/FE (Electrical Port) Services on the LEM24 Board
l
PHY outloop
As shown in Figure 14-50, twenty-two GE/FE services are received on the client side. Any
N of the GE/FE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

357
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-50 PHY outloop of one GE/FE (electrical port) service on the LEM24 board
RX5/TX5
10GE
PHY
10GE
MAC
VCTRUNK1
RX6/TX6
10GE
PHY
10GE
MAC
VCTRUNK2
RX7/TX7
GE/FE
PHY
GE/FE
MAC
ODU2
OTU2
IN3/OUT3
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK3
GE/FE
PHY
RX28/TX28
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
MAC/PHY inloop
10GE services. The two 10GE services are then deconverged by the L2 switching module
into two 10GE services and twentytwo GE/FE services. Any N of the GE/FE services
can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC loopback point.
Figure 14-51 MAC/PHY inloop of one GE/FE (electrical port) service on the LEM24 board
10GE
MAC
RX5/TX5
10GE
PHY
RX6/TX6
10GE
PHY
10GE
MAC
RX7/TX7
GE/FE
PHY
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK1
ODU2
OTU2
IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK3
RX28/TX28
GE/FE
PHY
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

358
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

WDM-side Loopbacks on the LEM24 Board

l
WDM-side inloop
As shown in Figure 14-52, twenty-four services received on the client side are mapped
into two ODU2 service. Any of the two ODU2 services can be loopbacked to the client
side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Figure 14-52 WDM-side inloop on the LEM24 board

RX5/TX5
10GE
PHY
RX6/TX6
10GE
PHY
10GE
MAC
RX7/TX7
GE/FE
PHY
GE/FE
MAC
10GE
MAC
VCTRUNK1
ODU2
OTU2
IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK3
GE/FE
PHY
RX28/TX28
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
NOTE
The LEM24 board supports both GE/FE electrical signals and GE/FE optical signals. The figure only
demonstrates how GE/FE optical signals are received.
WDM-side outloop
As shown inFigure 14-53, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped
into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any of the two ODU2
services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point. The ODU2
service is then mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is regenerated, and
then transmitted back to the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

359
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-53 WDM-side outloop on the LEM24 board

10GE
MAC
RX5/TX5
10GE
PHY
RX6/TX6
10GE
PHY
10GE
MAC
RX7/TX7
GE/FE
PHY
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK1
ODU2
OTU2
IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
VCTRUNK3
RX28/TX28
GE/FE
PHY
GE/FE
MAC
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

For parameters of the LEM24, refer to Table 14-90.
Table 14-90 LEM24 Parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/Channel
Displays the position of the

optical interface.
Optical Interface Name
Set and query the optical

interface name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused
The Channel Use Status

parameter sets the occupancy
status of the current channel
of a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status
information.
Default: Used
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

360
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
The Optical Interface

Loopback parameter sets the
loopback mode for the
current optical interface of a
board.
See D.27 Optical Interface
Loopback (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Off, On
Laser Status
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default:
l WDM side: Enabled
l Client side: Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

The Laser Status parameter

sets the laser status of a
board.
See D.20 Laser Status
information.
The Automatic Laser
Shutdown parameter
determines whether to
automatically shut down the
laser after the signals
received by a board are lost.
See D.1 Automatic Laser
Shutdown (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
determines whether to enable
the link pass-through (LPT).
See D.28 LPT Enabled
information.
The FEC Working State
parameter determines
whether to enable or disable
the forward error correction
(FEC) function of the current
optical interface.
See D.15 FEC Working
State (WDM Interface) for
more information.
361
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
The FEC Mode parameter

sets the FEC mode of the
current optical interface.
Default: FEC
NOTE
only support FEC.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM

Interface) for more
information.
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Used to query the operating

wavelength at the WDM-side
Actual Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range
Queries the tunable

wavelength range at the
WDM-side optical interface
of a board.
Planned Wavelength No./

Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100
The Planned Wavelength

No./Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz) parameter
sets the wavelength number,
wavelength and frequency of
the current optical interface
on the WDM side of a board.
See D.46 Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170 18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
OTN Overhead
Transparent Transmission
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

The Planned Band Type

parameter sets the band type
of the current working
wavelength.
See D.45 Planned Band
Type (WDM Interface) for
more information.
process GCC1 and GCC2 in
OTN overheads. If the
processing is not required, set
this parameter to Enabled;
otherwise, set it to Disabled.
362
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
SD Trigger Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
The SD Trigger Condition

parameter sets the relevant
alarms of certain optical
interfaces or channels of an
OTU board as SD switching
trigger conditions of the
protection group in which
this OTU board resides.
See D.50 SD Trigger
Condition (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Synchronous Clock
Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
The PRBS Test Status

parameter sets the pseudorandom binary sequence
See D.48 PRBS Test Status
information.
enable the special frame test
before deployment. When
this parameter is set to
Enabled, the board sends the
test frame where the payload
consists of only 0. This
parameter is used in the
enable lock synchronization.
Set the parameter to
Enabled if clock
synchronization is required.
When this parameter is set to
Enabled, service clocks are
synchronized with NE
clocks. When the parameter
is set to Disabled, service
clocks will not be
synchronized with NE
clocks.
14.9.13 Specifications of the LEM24

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

363
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
11L
EM
24
N/A
1000BASE-SX, I-850LC
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band

(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
1000BASE-LX, I-1310LC
10GBASE-SR (SFP+)
10GBASE-LR (SFP+)
10GBASE-ER/EW
(SFP+)

10 Gbit/s Multirate-10
km
km
km
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
1000BASE-SX,
I-850-LC
1000BASE-LX,
I-1310-LC
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source type
MLM
SLM
Target distance
km
0.5
10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-9.5
-9.5

364
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module
Type
1000BASE-SX,
I-850-LC
1000BASE-LX,
I-1310-LC
9
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern mask
IEEE802.3z compliant

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
770 to 860
1260 to 1620
dBm
-17
-20
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
NOTE
The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.
Table 14-92 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10GE services
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10GBASE-SR
(SFP+)
10GBASE-LR
(SFP+)
10GBASE-ER/
EW (SFP+)
Optical
interface service
rate
Gbit/s
10.3125
10.3125
10.3125
Optical source
type
MLM
SLM
SLM
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
0.3
10
40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
840 to 860
1260 to 1355
1530 to 1565
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
0.5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-7.3
-8.2
-4.7

365
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical
Module Type
10GBASE-SR
(SFP+)
10GBASE-LR
(SFP+)
10GBASE-ER/
EW (SFP+)
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
3.5
Output optical
power in case of
laser shutdown
dBm
-30
-30
-30
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
840 to 860
1260 to 1355
1530 to 1565
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11.1
-14.4
-14.1
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
0.5
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-12
-12
-26

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB

366
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
THz
192.10 to 196.05

367
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
GHz

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Table 14-95 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1

368
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

369
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at 25
C (77F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55
C (131F)
TN11
LEM2
4

Wavelengths)-Fixed
81
83
82
84
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km
14.10 LEX4
LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board

The available functional version of the LEX4 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LEX4
14.10.2 Application
The LEX4 board is an optical transponder unit.
The LEX4 board converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly
on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane, into
two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals. The LEX4 board also performs the
reverse process. The LEX4 board supports convergence of multiple flat-rate 10GE services into
one channel of 10GE service. The board also supports transparent transmission of two channels
of 10GE services.
Figure 14-54 shows the application of the LEX4 board in a WDM system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

370
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-54 Application of the TN11LEX4 board in a WDM system

G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
1
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
DMUX
LEX4
LEX4
4
DMUX
Client
side
MUX
WDM
side
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
WDM
side
Client
side

The LEX4 board provides electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function.
Table 14-96 lists the functions and features of the LEX4 board.
NOTE
The 10GE cross-connections are only supported by the OptiX OSN 6800.
Table 14-96 Functions and features of the LEX4 board

Function and
Feature
Basic function
Description
l Converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received
directly on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services crossconnected from the backplane, into two channels of standard WDM
wavelength OTU2 signals and performs the reverse process.
l Converges multiple flat-rate 10GE services into one channel of 10GE
service.
Client-side
service type
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA.
OTN function
l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE

electrical signals between the LEX4 board and the cross-connect board.
l Supports mapping of 10GE signals into OTU2 signals.

l Supports section monitoring (SM) and path monitoring (PM) at the
OTU2 and ODU2 layers.
l Supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) at the ODU2 layer.
WDM
specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

371
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
LPT function
Supported
NOTE
FEC encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Supports remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.
l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with
FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.
ALS function
IEEE 1588v2
Supported in the WDM side.
Physical clock
Supported in the Client side and WDM side.
QinQ
Supports stacking VLAN.
QoS (Quality of
Service)
Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS).

Supports IEEE802.1p.
Supports DSCP.
ETH OAM
Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah.
LAG (Link
Aggregation
Group)
l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and

trunk ports.
l Supports manual and static LAGs.
l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.
VLAN
multicast
Supports VLAN-based multicast.
Port CVLAN
group
Supports a CVLAN group that is being used as one VLAN.
L2 layer
switching
Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D.

Supports MAC address learning and aging.
Supports IGMP snooping.
Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP.
Supports 32K MAC addresses.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

372
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Flow control
Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow

control termination.
Maximum
transmission
unit (MTU)
Supports a maximum of 9600 bytes frames.
Ethernet
private line
(EPL)
Provides point-to-point EPLs.
Ethernet virtual
private line
(EVPL)
Provides point-to-multipoint EVPLs and supports VLAN-based switching.
Port working
mode
10GE optical port: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN
PRBS function
Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme

l Supports VLAN SNCP.
l Supports DBPS protection.
l Supports ERPS protection
SFP+/XFP
Supports enhanced SFP+ optical modules on the client side.

Supports 10 Gbit/s tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM
side (Tunable Wavelength).
Wavelength).
Loopback
10GE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
WDM side
optical interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

373
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Description
services comply
IEEE 802.1q VLAN

MPLS protocols
processing services

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
IEEE IGMP
STP, RSTP, MSTP
R-APS

The LEX4 board consists of a client-side optical module, a WDM-side optical module, a L2
switching module, a signal processing module, a 1588 module, a control and communication
module, and a power supply module.
Figure 14-55 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board in the OptiX
OSN 8800.
Figure 14-56 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board in the OptiX
OSN 6800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

374
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-55 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
10GE
O/E
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX4
E/O
L2 switching
module
10GE
OTN
processing
Module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
O/E
IN1
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
1588
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
375
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-56 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
10GE
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
10GE
O/E
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX4
E/O
L2 switching
module
10GE
OTN
processing
Module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
O/E
IN1
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
1588
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEX4 board.
In the signal flow of the LEX4 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LEX4 to the WDM side
of the LEX4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The RX1 to RX4 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client
equipment and perform O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module
performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of two
channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module.
The signal processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals
into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of
OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1 and OUT2 optical ports.
Receive direction
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then,
the module performs O/E conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

376
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. Then, the module
sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching module for service crossconnection.
The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends four channels of the
signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4
optical interfaces.
The LEX4 board processes clock signals in two directions.
l
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals.
Client-side receiver: Performs E/O conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals.

L2 switching module

Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding
and decoding.
1588 module
to the STG board.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

377
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

14.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEX4 board.

Figure 14-57 shows the front panel of the LEX4 board.
Figure 14-57 Front panel of the LEX4 board
LEX4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LEX4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

378
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are twelve optical interfaces on the front panel of the LEX4 board. Table 14-97 lists the
Table 14-97 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEX4 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
TX1-TX4
LC
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

14.10.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TN11LEX4 board.
Table 14-98 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEX4 board.
Table 14-98 Valid slots for the LEX4 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

379
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-99 Mapping between the physical ports on the LEX4 board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is
Figure 14-58 shows the application model of the LEX4 board. Table 14-100 describes the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

380
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-58 Port diagram of the LEX4 board

Client side
WDM side
PORT5
PORT6
PORT7
PORT8
VCTRUNK1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
VCTRUNK2
102(AP2/AP2)-1
VCTRUNK3
103(AP3/AP3)-1
VCTRUNK4
104(AP4/AP4)-1
L2 sw itching
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
Backplane
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
WDM side
optical
module
Table 14-100 Meaning of NM port of the LEX4 board

Port Name
Meaning
PORT5 - PORT8
These ports correspond to the client-side optical

interfaces: RX1/TX1 - RX4/TX4.
VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4
AP1 - AP4
ClientLP1 - ClientLP2
ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2
Internal logical ports.
IN1/OUT1 - IN2/OUT2

If the LEX4 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and
VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections
between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports or converge the optical signals received by the
client-side optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals.
NOTE
l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports.

l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.
Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000.
Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the LEX4 board and the AP port of
other boards, as shown in Figure 14-59.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

381
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The ClientLP port is connected to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port is connected
to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Figure 14-59 Cross-connection diagram of the LEX4 board

Client
side
WDM
side
103(AP3/AP3)-1
Other board
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Client
side
WDM
side
103(AP3/AP3)-1
LEX4
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Other board
TN11LEM24/TN11LEX4
14.10.10 Board Function Configuration

The LEX4 board supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
LAG, and QoS. Configure the functions according to actual requirements.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the LEX4 by using the U2000:
l
VLAN SNCP Protection
DBPS Protection
QoS (OTN)
Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
MPLS Tunnel
MSTP
STP and RSTP
LAG
RMON
IGMP Snooping
ETH-OAM
14.10.11 LEX4 loopback

Table 14-101 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LEX4 boards.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

382
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-101 Loopbacks supported by LEX4 boards

Board
Loopback
Type
Description
TN11L
EX4
10GE PHY
outloop
See Figure 14-60.
10GE MAC
outloop
See Figure 14-61.
10GE MAC/
PHY inloop
See Figure 14-62.
WDM-side
inloop
See Figure 14-63.
WDM-side
outloop
See Figure 14-64.
10GE services PHY outloop

As shown in Figure 14-60, four 10GE services are received on the client side. Any N of
the 10GE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point.
Figure 14-60 PHY outloop of one 10GE service on the TN11LEX4 board
10GE
MAC
PHY
RX1/TX1
PHY
RX2/TX2
RX3/TX3
PHY
RX4/TX4
PHY
MAC
VCTRUNK1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
10GE services MAC outloop

As shown in Figure 14-61, four 10GE services are received on the client side. Any N of
the 10GE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

383
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-61 MAC outloop of one 10GE service on the TN11LEX4 board
10GE
RX1/TX1
PHY
RX2/TX2
PHY
RX3/TX3
PHY
RX4/TX4
PHY
MAC
MAC
VCTRUNK1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
10GE services MAC/PHY inloop

10GE services, or two 10GE services from the backplane are received by the L2 switching
module. Any of the two 10GE services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC
loopback point.
Figure 14-62 MAC/PHY inloop of one 10GE service on the TN11LEX4 board
10GE
RX1/TX1
PHY
RX2/TX2
PHY
RX3/TX3
PHY
RX4/TX4
PHY
MAC
MAC
VCTRUNK1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloop
As shown in Figure 14-63, four services received on the client side are mapped into two
ODU2 service. Any of the two ODU2 services can be loopbacked to the client side at the
ODU2 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

384
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-63 WDM-side inloop on the TN11LEX4 board

10GE
RX1/TX1
PHY
RX2/TX2
PHY
RX3/TX3
PHY
RX4/TX4
PHY
MAC
MAC
VCTRUNK1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop
As shown inFigure 14-64, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped
services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point. The ODU2
service is then mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is regenerated, and
then transmitted back to the WDM side.
Figure 14-64 WDM-side outloop on the TN11LEX4 board

10GE
RX1/TX1
PHY
RX2/TX2
PHY
RX3/TX3
PHY
RX4/TX4
PHY
MAC
MAC
VCTRUNK1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK4
L2 switching module
Backplane
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

For the parameters of LEX4, refer to Table 14-102.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

385
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-102 LEX4 Parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default:
l WDM side: Enabled
l Client side:
Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.
pass-through (LPT).

386
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC

Default: FEC
NOTE
only support FEC.

Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

board.
Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

wavelength.
board resides.
information.

387
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Synchronous Clock
Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Determines whether to enable lock

synchronization. Set the parameter to
Enabled if clock synchronization is
required.
Default: Disabled

service clocks are synchronized with NE
clocks. When the parameter is set to
Disabled, service clocks will not be
synchronized with NE clocks.
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

commissioning.
14.10.13 Specifications of the LEX4

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
11L
EX
4
N/A
10GBASE-SR (SFP+)
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band

(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
10GBASE-LR (SFP+)
10GBASE-ER/EW
(SFP+)

km
km
km
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

388
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 14-103 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10GE services
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10GBASE-SR
(SFP+)
10GBASE-LR
(SFP+)
10GBASE-ER/
EW (SFP+)
Optical
interface service
rate
Gbit/s
10.3125
10.3125
10.3125
Optical source
type
MLM
SLM
SLM
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
0.3
10
40

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
840 to 860
1260 to 1355
1530 to 1565
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
0.5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-7.3
-8.2
-4.7
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
3.5
Output optical
power in case of
laser shutdown
dBm
-30
-30
-30
Eye pattern
mask
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
840 to 860
1260 to 1355
1530 to 1565
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11.1
-14.4
-14.1
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
0.5
-1

389
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical
Module Type
Maximum
reflectance
dB
10GBASE-SR
(SFP+)
10GBASE-LR
(SFP+)
10GBASE-ER/
EW (SFP+)
-12
-12
-26

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm

390
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Maximum reflectance
Value
dB
-27
Table 14-105 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

391
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7

392
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Maximum
reflectance
dB
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F)
TN11
LEX4

64
67
65
68
10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km

14.11 LOA
LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board.

The available functional version of the LOA board is TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

393
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LOA
14.11.2 Application
The LOA board converges a maximum of 8 x Any service signals at a rate ranging from 125
Mbit/s to 4.25 Gbit/s or 1 x FC800 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then
converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The
LOA board also performs the reverse process.
Ports on the LOA board can work in any of the following modes: ODU0 non-convergence mode
(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2),
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2), and ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).
Ports on the LOA board support the service package configuration, that is, 8xGE ODU0
configuration. After this configuration is applied, all client-side ports on the LOA board always
work in ODU0 non-convergence mode with mapping path Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, and
GE (GFP-T) services are supported on the client side of the LOA board accordingly.
Application Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2)

The LOA board converges a maximum of 8 * Any service signals at a rate ranging from 125
Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the
reverse process. Figure 14-65 shows the details.
Figure 14-65 Application of the LOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
1
125Mbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
MUX
LOA
G.694.1
G.694.1
DMUX
8
Client Side
DMUX
MUX
WDM Side
125Mbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
LOA
8
WDM Side
Client Side
NOTE
In this scenario, the client-side services are FE, GE, STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, FC100, ESCON,
FICON, FDDI, SDI, DVB-ASI services.
Application of the LOA board in 8 * GE ODU0 configuration is the same as that of the ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

394
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2>OTU2)

The LOA board converges a maximum of 4 x Any service signals at a rate ranging from 1.49
Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the
reverse process. Figure 14-66 shows the details.
Figure 14-66 Application of the LOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2)
1
1.49 Gbit/s
2.67 Gbit/s
MUX
LOA
G.694.1
1.49 Gbit/s
2.67 Gbit/s
G.694.1 LOA
DMUX
4
Client Side
DMUX
WDM Side
MUX
4
WDM Side
Client Side
NOTE
In this scenario, the client-side services are HD-SDI, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, STM-16, and OC-48
services.
In this scenario, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive and transmit services.
Application Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2)

The LOA board converges a maximum of 4 x OTU1 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical
signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITUT G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 14-67 shows the details.
Figure 14-67 Application of the LOA board in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0
[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
1
OTU1
MUX
LOA
G.694.1
Client Side
G.694.1
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
WDM Side
OTU1
LOA
4
WDM Side
Client Side
NOTE
In this scenario, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive and transmit services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

395
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2)

The LOA board converges a maximum of 2 x 3G-SDI, 2 x FC400, or 1 x FC800 service signals
into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure
14-68 shows the details.
Figure 14-68 Application of the LOA board in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)
1
3G-SDI,
FC400, and
FC800
MUX
LOA
G.694.1
G.694.1 LOA
DMUX
2
WDM Side
Client Side
DMUX
MUX
3G-SDI,
FC400, and
FC800
2
WDM Side
Client Side
NOTE
In this scenario, any two of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports receive and transmit 3G-SDI or FC400 services,
and the RX1/TX1 port receives and transmits FC800 services.
Application Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)

The LOA board converges a maximum of 1 x FC800 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical
signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITUT G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 14-69 shows the details.
Figure 14-69 Application of the LOA board in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2)
MUX
FC800
LOA
G.694.1
G.694.1
DMUX
Client Side
DMUX
LOA
1 FC800
MUX
WDM Side
WDM Side
Client Side
NOTE
In this scenario, client-side port RX1/TX1 receives and transmits FC800 services.

The LOA board supports functions and features such as wavelength tunable, OTN functions,
and ESC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

396
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-107 Functions and features of the LOA board

Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l The LOA board converges a maximum of eight channels of Any service

signals at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gbit/s or 1 x FC800
service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals
into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The
LOA board also performs the reverse convergence and conversion.
l The LOA board's ports can work in any of five modes: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1
non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1_ODU0
mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex
non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2), and ODU2
non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).
l Ports on the LOA board support the batch port configuration, that is, 8 *
GE ODU0 configuration.
Client-side
service type

3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s
NOTE
The LOA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

397
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
OTN
function
l Maps Any signals into OTU2 signals. It encapsulates and maps signals in
compliance with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM functions specific to the OTU1 and OTU2 layers.
l Supports PM functions specific to the ODU0 layers.
l Supports PM and TCM functions specific to the ODU1 and ODU2 layers.
l Supports the non-intrusive monitoring function at the TCM and PM
specific to the ODU1 and ODU2 layers.
l Supports the non-intrusive monitoring function at the PM specific to the
ODUflex layer.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of: 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz.
ESC
function
service signal.
FEC
encoding
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with
ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
LPT function
This function is supported only when the LOA board receives GE/FE services
on its client side.
PRBS
function
l Supports PRBS tests on client-side signals: STM1-1, STM1-4, STM1-16,

OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, AND OTU1.
l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the
board.
l Supports PRBS tests on WDM-side OTU2 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Supported

398
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Test frame
This function is supported only when the LOA board receives GE/FE services
on its client side.
Protection
scheme
XFP/eSFP/
SFP+

Wavelength).

Wavelength).
side.
The client-side ports RX1/TX1 on the LOA board support pluggable SFP+
modules.
Loopback
Channel
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop
Outloop
Supported
NOTE
For FC800 services, Inloop is not supported only
in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).
Inloop
Not supported
Outloop
Supported
NOTE
It is supported only in FC800 services in ODU2
non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
NOTE
It is not supported in FC800 services.

399
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND
CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the
implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial
Interface (ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite
Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface
ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data
Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC)
Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY)
Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

400
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LOA board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM side optical module, signal
Figure 14-70 shows the block diagram of the functions of the LOA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

401
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-70 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOA board
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
FC encapsulation
and mapping module
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
WDM side
GE encapsulation
and mapping module
FICON
encapsulation and
mapping module
E/O
OTN
processing
module
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal flow
The LOA board can receive Any optical signals on the client side (signals at a rate ranging from
125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gibt/s or FC800 signals).
NOTE
The LOA board supports hybrid transmission of signals at a rate of 4.25 Gibt/s or lower, but does not
support hybrid transmission of FC800 signals and low-rate signals.
The total rate of signals received at the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. For details on the signal types,
see 14.11.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOA to the WDM side
of the LOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX8 ports, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then,
the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

402
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical port.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical port. Then, the module
performs O/E conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight
channels of any signals.
optical ports.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of any optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal
electrical signals to any optical signals.


The module consists of service encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing
module.
The module encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps them into OTU2
payload. It also performs the reversion operations. The module also monitors
performance of Any signals.
Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/
AFEC encoding and decoding.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

403
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

14.11.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOA board.

Figure 14-71 shows the front panel of the LOA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

404
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-71 Front panel of the LOA board
LOA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6 RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
OUT
IN
LOA
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

405
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOA board. Table 14-108 lists the type
Table 14-108 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOA board
Interface
Type
Function
INa
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUTa
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX8
LC
RX1-RX8
LC

equipment.
a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface.
NOTE
All of the eight pairs of ports on the client side can be used to receive and transmit the supported services
except FC800, which must be received and transmitted by the RX1 and TX1 ports.
The total bandwidth for the eight pairs of ports on the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
Laser Hazard Level

14.11.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LOA board.
Table 14-109 shows the valid slots for the LOA board.
Table 14-109 Valid slots for the LOA board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU1IU8, IU11IU42, IU45IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1IU8, IU12IU27, IU29IU36
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1IU8, IU11IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1IU8, IU11IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2IU5

406
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LOA

Code for OTUs.

This section describes the logical ports displayed on the NMS and the physical ports of the LOA
board.
Display of Optical Ports

The serial numbers of the optical ports on the front panel of the board displayed on the NMS
Table 14-110 Serial numbers of the ports of the LOA board displayed on the NMS
Port on the Panel
Port on the NMS
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
Logical Ports
l
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)

When the LOA board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port
models vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 14-72 shows the
port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure
14-73 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign
consecutive. For details about ODU timeslot configuration modes, see 14.11.11
Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

407
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-72 Port diagram 1 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side
WDM Side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to
3(RX1/TX1)-1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1 to 8)
ODU0:1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
.
.
.
ODU0:2
.
.
.
.
.
.
10(RX8/TX8)-1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
IN/OUT
ODU0:8
Figure 14-73 Port diagram 2 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side
WDM Side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ClientLP/
ClientLP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-2
4(RX2/TX2)-1
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4)-ODU0:(1 to 2)
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU0:2
ODU2:1
207(ClientLP7/
ClientLP7)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
IN/OUT
ODU0:1
207(ClientLP7/
ClientLP7)-2
208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8)-1
OCH:1
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8)-2
NOTE
8*GE ODU0 configuration: all client-side ports on the LOA board always work in ODU0 nonconvergence mode with mapping path Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, and GE(GFP-T) services are
supported on the client side of the LOA board accordingly. Figure 14-72 show the port diagram.
When the LOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a
client-side optical port on the LOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the
ClientLP port of the LOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1
on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the LOA board.
ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)

Figure 14-74 shows the port diagram when the LOA board works in ODU1 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

408
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-74 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
WDM Side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4)
ODU1:1
ODU1:2
ODU2:1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
ODU1:3
ODU1:4
OCH:1
IN/OUT
NOTE
In this mode, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive services.
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)

When the LOA board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port
models vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 14-75 shows the
port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure
14-73 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign
consecutive. For details about ODU timeslot configuration modes, see 14.11.11
Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS.
Figure 14-75 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0(1~8)
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
ODU0:1
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-2
ODU0:2
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1
ODU0:3
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-2
ODU0:4
ODU2:1
208(ClientLP8
/ClientLP8)-1
ODU0:7
208(ClientLP8
/ClientLP8)-2
ODU0:8

OCH:1
WDM side
IN/OUT
409
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-76 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
WDM side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1(1~4)-ODU0(1~2)
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-2
ODU0:2
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1
ODU0:1
202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-2
ODU0:2
ODU1:2
208(ClientLP8
/ClientLP8)-1
ODU0:1
208(ClientLP8
/ClientLP8)-2
ODU0:2
ODU2:1
OCH:1
IN/OUT
ODU1:4
NOTE
In this mode, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive services.
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)

Figure 14-77 shows the port diagram when the LOA board works in ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).
Figure 14-77 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1
WDM Side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1 to 2)
ODUflex:1
ODU2:1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8)-1
OCH:1
IN/OUT
ODUflex:2
NOTE
Only the RX1/TX1 port can receive FC800 services.

Any two of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive 3G-SDI/FC400 services as shown in the figure
(the RX1/TX1 ports are used as an example).
ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)

Figure 14-78 shows the port diagram when the LOA board works in ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

410
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-78 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2)
WDM Side
Client Side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
IN/OUT
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need

to be configured on the NMS.
Service processing module
Cross-connection that must be configured on the

NMS.
Table 14-111 Meanings of the LOA board's ports on the NMS (port modes)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Logical Port Name
Channel Name
Meaning
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1/201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-2 to 208
(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/208
(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1
ODU0:(1 to 8)
Indicates mapping path

when the board works in
ODU0 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2)
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-2 to 208
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1
ODU1:(1 to 4)ODU0: (1 to
2)

mode (Any->ODU0>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1
ODU1:(1 to 8)
Indicates the mapping path

mode (Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2).
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-2 to 208
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1
ODU0:(1 to 8)

ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2).
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-2 to 208
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1
ODU1:(1 to 4)ODU0:(1 to
2)

ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).

411
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Logical Port Name
Channel Name
Meaning
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1
ODUflex:(1 to 2)

ODUflex non-convergence
mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2).
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1

mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2).
14.11.9 Configuring Cross-Connections

The section describes how to configure service cross-connections of the LOA board on the NMS.
To transmit services using the LOA board, you need to perform the following configurations on
the U2000:
l
Choose Configuration > Working Mode and set Port Working Mode or Service
Package. The LOA board's ports can work in any of five modes: ODU0 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2>OTU2), and ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).
Specify required services types for the board.
On the U2000, create cross-connections and select optical channels specific to working
modes. Figure 14-79 is used as an example.
The ClientLP1 port works in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).
Then, logical port is 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)1 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1
in Figure 14-79.
ODU2:1. For details, see
The ClientLP2 port works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random for
IN/OUT port. For cross-connection 1, optical port is RX4/TX4 and logical port is 202
(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1. For cross-connection 2, logical port is 202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:3. For details, see
and
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP3 port works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive
for IN/OUT port. For cross-connection 1, optical port is RX5/TX5 and logical port is
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1. For cross-connection 2, logical port is 203(ClientLP3/
ClientLP3)-1 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:1. For
details, see
and
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP4 port works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random for
IN/OUT port. For cross-connection 1, logical port is 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 and
channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:5. For cross-connection 2, logical port is
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

412
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:6. For

details, see
and
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP5 port works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive
for IN/OUT port. For cross-connection 1, logical port is 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1
and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:4ODU0:1. For cross-connection 2,
logical port is 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1
ODU1:4ODU0:2. For details, see
and
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP6 port works in ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2>OTU2). Then, logical port is 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)1 and channel is IN/OUT
OCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:3. For details, see
10
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP7 port works in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random for
IN/OUT port. Then, logical port is 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)1 and channel is IN/
OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODUflex:1. For details, see
11
in Figure 14-79.
NOTE
When configuring a cross-connection, set ODUflex Timeslot to 3 if the client service type is 3G-SDI,
and set it to 4 if the client service type is FC400, and set it to 7 if the client service type is FC800.
NOTE
If all the eight clientside ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can configure the
8*GE->ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the working
mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) and the service
type to GE(GFP-T) for the eight ports. The mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2.
The total rate of client-side services cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
Figure 14-79 Cross-connections of the LOA board

Client side
WDM side
2
RX4/TX4
RX5/TX5
1
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Cross-connect
module
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:3
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:1
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODUflex:2
Cross-connect
module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which

needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

413
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.11.10 LOA Loopbacks

Table 14-112 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LOA boards.
Table 14-112 Loopbacks supported by LOA boards
B
oa
rd
Port Working Mode
Loopback Type
Description
T
N
11
L
O
A
ODU0 nonconvergence mode

(Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2)
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-80.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-81.
Channel inloop
See Figure 14-82.
Channel outloop
See Figure 14-83
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-84.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-85.
Channel inloop
See Figure 14-86
Channel outloop
See Figure 14-87.
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-88.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-89
Channel inloop
See Figure 14-90.
Channel outloop
See Figure 14-91.
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-92
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-93.
Channel inloop
See Figure 14-94.
Channel outloop
See Figure 14-95.
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-96.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 14-97.

(Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2)
ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2)
ODUflex nonconvergence mode

(Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2)

(Any->ODU2>OTU2)
NOTE
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, the mapping path is ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 ;
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random, the mapping path is ODU0>ODU2.
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Client-side outloop
414
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

As shown in Figure 14-80, eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services are received on the client
side. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the client
side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Figure 14-80 Client-side outloop
RX1/TX1
125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s

client-side services
ODU0
RX2/TX2

client-side services
ODU0
RX3/TX3

Client-side services
ODU0
RX4/TX4

ODU0
RX5/TX5

ODU0
RX6/TX6

ODU0
RX7/TX7

ODU0
RX8/TX8

ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 14-81, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped,
decoded, and decapsulated into eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services. Any N of the eight
125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client
side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

415
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-81 Client-side inloop

RX1/TX1
125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s

ODU0
RX2/TX2

ODU0
RX3/TX3

ODU0
RX4/TX4

ODU0
RX5/TX5

ODU0
RX6/TX6

ODU0

ODU0
RX7/TX7
RX8/TX8
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU0
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Channel inloop
As shown in Figure 14-82, eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services received on the client
side are mapped into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped
back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Figure 14-82 Channel inloop

RX1/TX1

Client-side sercices
ODU0
RX2/TX2

ODU0
RX3/TX3

ODU0
RX4/TX4

ODU0
RX5/TX5

ODU0
RX6/TX6

ODU0
RX7/TX7

ODU0
RX8/TX8

ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

416
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Channel outloop
one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is
deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped
back to the WDM side, The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Figure 14-83 Channel outloop

RX1/TX1

ODU0
RX2/TX2

ODU0
RX3/TX3

ODU0
RX4/TX4

ODU0
RX5/TX5

ODU0
RX6/TX6

ODU0
RX7/TX7

ODU0
RX8/TX8

ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client side
Loopbacked services
ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-84, four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services are received on the client
side. Any N of the four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the client
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
(Any four of the eight
ports)
1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s

ODU1

ODU1
ODU2

ODU1

ODU1
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

417
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Client-side inloop
decoded, and decapsulated into four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services. Any N of the four
1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client
side services can be passed through.
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ports)

ODU1

ODU1
ODU2

ODU1

ODU1
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Channel inloop
As shown in Figure 14-86, four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services received on the client side
are mapped into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be looped back
to the client side. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
(Any four of the
eight ports)

ODU1

ODU1
ODU2

ODU1

ODU1
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be looped
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

418
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ports)

ODU1

ODU1
ODU2

ODU1

ODU1
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-88, four OTU1 services received on the client side are demapped
into four ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU1
services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed
through.

OTU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ports)
OTU1
OTU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2
OTU2 OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
OTU1
Client-side
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
decoded, and decapsulated into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can
be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

419
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


OTU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ports)
OTU1
OTU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1 ODU2
OTU2 OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Channel inloop
As shown in Figure 14-90, four OTU1 services received on the client side are mapped into
eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped back to the client
side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.

OTU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ports)
OTU1
OTU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1 ODU2
OTU2 OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
Clientside
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

420
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


OTU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ports )
ODU1
OTU1
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1 ODU2
OTU2 OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
OTU1
ODU1
Client-side
ODU0
ODU0
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-92, two 3G-SDI/FC400 services are received on the client side, or
one FC800 service is received on the client side. Any N of client side services can be looped
back to the client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
(Any two of the eight
ports)
3G-SDI/
FC400
ODUflex
ODU2
3G-SDI/
FC400
OTU2
IN/OUT
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODUflex
a: Client-side service type is 3G-SDI/FC400
RX1/TX1
FC800
ODUflex
ODU2
b: Client-side service type is FC800

Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
decoded, and decapsulated into two 3G-SDI/FC400 services. Any N of the two 3G-SDI/
FC400 services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client side services
can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

421
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
Client-side inloop is not supported in FC800 services.

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ports)
3G-SDI/
FC400
ODUflex
ODU2
3G-SDI/
FC400
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODUflex
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Channel inloop
As shown in Figure 14-94, two 3G-SDI/FC400 services received on the client side are
mapped into two ODUflex services. Any N of the two ODUflex services can be looped
back to the client side. The remaining ODUflex services can be passed through.
NOTE
Channel inloop is not supported in FC800 services.

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ports)
3G-SDI/
FC400
ODUflex
3G-SDI/
FC400
ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
decoded, and decapsulated into a maximum of two ODUflex services. Any N of the two
ODUflex services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining ODUflex services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

422
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ports)
3G-SDI/
FC400
ODUflex
ODU2
3G-SDI/
FC400
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODUflex
a: Client-side services type is 3G-SDI/FC400
FC800
RX1/TX1
ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
b:Client-side services type is FC800

WDM side
Client side
Loopbacked services
ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-96, one FC800 service is received on the client side, the FC800
service can be looped back to the client side.
FC800
RX1/TX1
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop
decoded, and decapsulated into one ODU2 service, the ODU2 service can be looped back
to the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

423
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-97 WDM-side outloop
FC800
RX1/TX1
ODU2
IN/OUT
OTU2
Client-side
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

For parameters of LOA, refer to Table 14-113.
Table 14-113 LOA parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Channel Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

Query or set the Channel Loopback.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

424
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Type
None, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, FC100,
FC200, FC400, FC800,
FDDI, FE, FICON,
FICON Express, SDI,
GE(TTT-AGMP), GE
(GFP-T), HDSDI,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
OTU-1, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, 3GSDI

Default: None
NOTE
The LOA board's ports may work in any of
five working modes and the type of the clientside services received by the ports varies with
the working modes.
NOTE
formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTAGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTAGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T),
the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value
GE(TTT-AGMP) is recommended.
ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2):

Supports FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4,
OC-12, FC100, ESCON, FICON, FDDI,
SDI, and DVB-ASI services.
l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2): Supports
HD-SDI, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1,
STM-16, and OC-48 services.
l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2):
Supports OTU1 service.
l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2): Supports
3G-SDI, FC400, FC800 services.
l ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2): Supports FC800
service.
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

status of a board.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled


425
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,

300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Specifies the hold-off time for

automatically disabling lasers. With ALS
enabled, the hold-off time is a time period
from the point when the system detects
service interruption to the point when
ALS automatically shuts down the related
lasers.
Default: 0s
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,

300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s

automatically enabling lasers. With ALS
enabled, the hold-off time is a time period
from the point when the system detects
service recovery to the point when ALS
automatically enables the related lasers.
Default: 0s
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN

Mode
Default: Client Mode
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

(LPT).
The Service Mode parameter sets the
service mode of a board.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type

426
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
NOTE

wavelength.
NOTE

Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: 1000M FullDuplex
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets

and queries the maximum packet length
supported by a board and is applicable to
the boards supporting Ethernet services.
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter
sets and queries the working mode of the
Ethernet.
See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode
parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to
Disabled.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

427
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG

resides.
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode
Assign random, Assign

consecutive
Default: Disabled
Default: Assign
random
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

parameter is set to Enabled, the board
sends the test frame where the payload
consists of only 0. This parameter is used
in the deployment commissioning.
When the ODU timeslot configuration
mode is Assign consecutive, the internal
ODU0 mapping path is: ODU0
>ODU1>ODU2. When the mode is set
to Assign random, the internal ODU0
mapping path is: ODU0>ODU2.

428
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Port Working Mode

(Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2), ODU1 nonconvergence mode
(Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2),
ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2),
(Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2), and
(Any->ODU2>OTU2).
This parameter is used to set the working

mode of the interface on the board
according to the actual application
scenario and service mapping trail.
Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode

(Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2)
14.11.12 Specifications of the LOA

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

429
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
11L
OA
N/A
I-16
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band

(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s
multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km

km
km
Multirate (SFP+)
1600-M5E-SN-I (SFP+)
1600-SM-LC-L (SFP+)
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
NOTE

NOTE
FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and
FE signals. The specifications listed above apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly
different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON,
FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

430
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
APD
APD
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver
type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
PIN
PIN

431
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and
FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values might be slightly different
from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, or FE
signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals. The
specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON,
FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std
802.3.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

432
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

433
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-116 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDI services
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
10
Service rate
Gbit/s

nm
1290 to 1330

power
dBm

power
dBm
-7
dB

width
nm
3.0

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1260 to 1620
dBm
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Table 14-117 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FC400 services
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
Multirate (SFP+)
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
0.3
Service rate
Gbit/s
4.25

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm

1290 to 1330
434
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
Multirate (SFP+)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-7
dB

width
nm
3.0

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1260 to 1620
dBm
-15
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-12
Table 14-118 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FC800 services
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
1600-M5E-SN-I
(SFP+)
1600-SM-LC-L
(SFP+)
Optical interface
service rate
Gbit/s
8.5
8.5
Optical source type
MLM
SLM
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
0.3
10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength range
nm
840 to 860
1290 to 1330
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-7
-6
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB

435
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module
Type
1600-M5E-SN-I
(SFP+)
1600-SM-LC-L
(SFP+)

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
dBm
-7.5
-14.4
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-1
0.5
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-12
-27
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals.
The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100,
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, or DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The
specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from
these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE,
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2

436
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

437
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

438
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

439
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


wavelengths
Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
Line code format

-
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
km
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source type
SLM
SLM

440
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Target distance
km
Value
km
km
10
40

Operating
wavelength range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
NA
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
dBm
-11
-14
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 1.19 kg (2.64b.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

441
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LOA
800 ps/nm-C Band

(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
31.8
36
32.8
37
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
14.12 LOG
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit

The available functional versions of the LOG board are TN11 and TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LOG
TN12
LOG
Differences Between Versions

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function:
442
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The TN11LOG supports AFEC, and the TN12LOG supports AFEC-2. Boards that use
different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 14.12.3
Functions and Features.
The TN12LOG supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal, while the
TN11LOG supports only the GE optical signal. For details, see 14.12.3 Functions and
Features.
The TN12LOG board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM side, whereas
the TN11LOG does not. For details, see 14.12.3 Functions and Features.
l
Specification:
For the power consumption and specification of each version, see 14.12.12
Specifications of the LOG.
Substitution Relationship
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LOG
TN12LOG
The TN12LOG can be created as TN11LOG on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOG functions as the
TN11LOG.
NOTE
l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC
code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board
and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution
does not apply.
l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board
with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive
optical power are different.
TN12LOG
None
14.12.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOG board implements conversion between eight
channels of GE optical signals and OTU2 optical signals that comply with ITU-T
Recommendations.
For the position of the LOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-98.
Figure 14-98 Position of the LOG board in the WDM system
1
GE
MUX
LOG
G.694.1
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM side
GE
G.694.1 LOG
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
8
WDM side

Client side
443
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LOG board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelengths, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 14-124 Functions and features of the LOG board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes eight channels of GE service signals into one channel of

OTU2 optical signals and converts them to a DWDM standard that
complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1 or a CWDM standard
wavelength that complies with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is
similar.
Client-side
service type
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA.
NOTE
The TN12LOG board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of eight channels of GE

services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively
through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight GE signals to
the paired slots through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of eight GE signals from one
OTN function

to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU2 signals. The
encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function

within the range of:
l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
ESC function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
service signal.
444
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
PRBS function
Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
LPT function
Supported
FEC encoding
TN11LOG:
l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.
975.
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies
with ITU-T G.975.1.
TN12LOG:
975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LOG
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 only supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1
protection and the OWSP protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

445
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
eSFP/XFP

client side.
TN12LOG:
Wavelength).
Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3z
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LOG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

446
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-99 and Figure 14-100 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOG
board.
Figure 14-99 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
GE
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
RX8
TX1
TX2
TX8
E/O
E/O
GE
OTN
Crossencapsulation
processing connect
and mapping
module
module
module
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
447
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-100 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
NOTE
The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding
electrical signals on the TN12LOG.
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals
is considered as an example.
The client side of the LOG board accesses GE optical signals.

In the signal flow of the LOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOG to the WDM side
of the LOG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then,
the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

448
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through
the OUT optical interface.
l
Receive direction
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM wavelengths that comply with
ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E
conversion.
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight
channels of GE signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal


OptiX OSN 8800: NA.
OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the
electrical signals between the LOG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the
electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to
the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The
grooming service signals are GE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

449
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

performance.
l

Power supply module

14.12.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOG board.

Figure 14-101 shows the front panel of the LOG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

450
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-101 Font panel of the LOG board
LOG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
OUT
IN
LOG
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOG board. Table 14-125 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

451
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-125 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOG board
Interface
Type
Function
INa
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUTa
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX8
LC
RX1-RX8
LC

equipment.
a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOG.
Laser Hazard Level

14.12.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LOG board.
Table 14-126 shows the valid slots for the TN11LOG board.
Table 14-126 Valid slots for TN11LOG board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 14-127 shows the valid slots for the TN12LOG board.
Table 14-127 Valid slots for TN12LOG board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

452
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
14.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-128 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOG board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

453
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical
port of the board.
Figure 14-102 shows the application model of the LOG board. Table 14-129 describes the
Figure 14-102 Port diagram of the LOG board
Client side
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-5
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
Cross-connect
module
201(LP/LP)-1
1(IN/OUT)-1
Service
processing
module
WDM-side
opticalmodule
Table 14-129 Meaning of NM port of the LOG board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
LP
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3,

4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.
IN/OUT
These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections between LOG boards and other
boards on the NMS.
If the LOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LOG board
(create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by
and
in Figure 14-103.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LOG board and the LP port
of other boards, as shown by
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
in Figure 14-103. (The GE services accessed from the

454
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and the inter-board service convergence.)
of the LOG board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-103. (The GE services accessed from
the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board
for protection and the inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.
There should be no more than eight cross-connections between the RX/TX ports of the local
board or other boards and the LP port of the local board.
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LOG board and the LP port of other
boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-103. (The GE services accessed from the WDM side
of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming
of the WDM-side services.)
The eight paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by
and
in Figure 14-103.
Figure 14-103 Cross-connection diagram of the LOG board

Client side
Other board
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-5
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
5
3
4
2
1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-5
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
LOG
The client side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LOG board
The WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
1
2
3
4
5
Other board TN11L4G/TN11LDGD/TN11LDGS/TN11LOG/TN12LOG/TN11LQG/TN13LQM/

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

455
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.12.10 LOG Loopbacks

Table 14-130 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LOG boards.
Table 14-130 Loopbacks supported by LOG boards
Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN11LO
G/
TN12LO
G
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-104.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-105.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 14-106.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 14-107.
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-104, eight GE services are received on the client side. One of the
eight GE services is loopbacked to the client side and the other seven GE services are passed
through.
Figure 14-104 Client-side outloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
RX3/TX3
RX4/TX4
RX5/TX5
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
RX8/TX8
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
decoded, and decapsulated into eight GE services. One of the eight GE services is
loopbacked to the WDM side and the other seven GE services are passed through.
Figure 14-105 Client-side inloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
RX3/TX3
RX4/TX4
RX5/TX5
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
RX8/TX8
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

456
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

WDM-side inloop
As shown in Figure 14-106, eight GE services received on the client side are mapped into
one ODU2 service. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2
loopback point.
Figure 14-106 WDM-side inloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
RX3/TX3
RX4/TX4
RX5/TX5
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
RX8/TX8
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-107, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped
into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is
loopbacked at the ODU2 loopback point, mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2
overhead is regenerated, and then transmitted back to the WDM side.
Figure 14-107 WDM-side outloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
GE
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
RX3/TX3
RX4/TX4
RX5/TX5
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
RX8/TX8
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services

For the parameters of LOG, refer to Table 14-131.
Table 14-131 LOG Parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name

457
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
Service Type
GE, GE(GFP-T)
Default: GE

The Service Type parameter sets the type of
the service accessed at the optical interface on
the client side.
NOTE
GE services can be encapsulated in two formats.
When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation
format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value
The GE services at the transmit and receive ends
must be encapsulated in the same format.
Off, On
Laser Status
Default:
l WDM side: On

status of a board.
more information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

determines whether to automatically shut
down the laser after the signals received by a
board are lost.
(LPT).
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface)
forward error correction (FEC) function of the

458
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode

of the current optical interface.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Default: FEC
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
Used to query the operating wavelength at the

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

wavelength number, wavelength and
frequency of the current optical interface on
the WDM side of a board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: C
Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

queries the maximum packet length supported
by a board and is applicable to the boards
supporting Ethernet services.

459
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG

Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test
status of a board.
NOTE
Only TN12LOG supports this parameter.
14.12.12 Specifications of the LOG

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

460
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
11L
OG
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band

(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN
N/A
1000 BASE-LX-10
km
1000 BASE-LX-40
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km

(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km

4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
TN
12L
OG
N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band

(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and
Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

461
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE
Std 802.3.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22

462
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-3
-3
-3
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620

463
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Table 14-134 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN
NRZ
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

PIN
464
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
800 ps/nm-C Band

(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Table 14-135 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code
format
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavele
ngthNRZAPD
4800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthODBAPD
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-DRZPIN
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
NRZ
NRZ
ODB
DRZ
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
10
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3

465
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavele
ngthNRZAPD
4800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthODBAPD
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-DRZPIN
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/
nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
APD
APD
PIN
PIN

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
-16
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

466
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

467
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

468
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

469
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN11LOG: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)

TN12LOG: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1LO
G
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even

wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN
40
45
43
48

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
43.5
48.5

Wavelength-ODB-APD
55.0
60.5

Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
37.0
41.44

38.0
42.44

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
41.61
46.6

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
43.04
48.0

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
TN1
2LO
G
14.13 LOM
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board

The available functional versions of the LOM board are TN11 and TN12.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

470
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LOM
TN12
LOM

l
Function:
The TN11LOM supports AFEC, and the TN12LOM supports AFEC-2. Boards using
different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other. For details, see 14.13.3
Only the TN12LOM supports 3G-SDI, InfiniBand 2.5G and InfiniBand 5G. For details,
Appearance:
The TN11LOM and TN12LOM versions use different front panels. For details, see
14.13.5 Front Panel.
Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 14.13.11 Specifications of the LOM.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LOM
TN12LOM
The TN12LOM can be created as TN11LOM on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOM functions as the
TN11LOM.
NOTE
does not apply.
TN12LOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
None

471
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.13.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOM board multiplexes a maximum of eight channels
of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand 2.5G, or two
3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G signals into one channel of OTU2 signals. It also
implements conversion between these signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T
Recommendations. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal width
does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. The LOM board also supports
hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above.
For the position of the LOM board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-108 and Figure
14-109.
Figure 14-108 Position of the TN11LOM board in the WDM system
ISC 1G/
ISC 2G/
1
GE/
FC100/
FC200/
FC400/
FICON/
8
FICON Express/
FICON4G
MUX
LOM
G.694.1
G.694.1 LOM
DMUX
Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
ISC 1G/
ISC 2G/
GE/
1
FC100/
FC200/
FC400/
FICON/
8 FICON Express/
FICON4G
Client side
Figure 14-109 Position of the TN12LOM board in the WDM system

GE
ISC 1G
ISC 2G
FC100
FC200
FC400
FICON
FICON4G
FICON Express
InfiniBand 2.5G
InfiniBand 5G
3G-SDI
MUX
LOM
G.694.1
G.694.1
DMUX
Client side
DMUX
LO
M
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
GE
ISC 1G
ISC 2G
FC100
FC200
FC400
FICON
FICON4G
FICON Express
InfiniBand 2.5G
InfiniBand 5G
3G-SDI
Client side
NOTE
For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all
available.
For FICON Express, ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3,
TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available.
For 3G-SDI, FC400, InfiniBand 5G and FICON4G services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are
available.
The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
The client-side interfaces are divided into two groups: RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8. Each
group of these optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

The LOM board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

472
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-139 Functions and features of the LOM board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Multiplexes eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G services,

four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand 2.5G services, or
two 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G services into one
channel of OTU2 optical signals and converts them to a DWDM
standard wavelength that complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.
694.1. It can also perform the reverse process.
l Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The
overall bandwidth of the first and last four optical interfaces should
be equal to or less than 5 Gbit/s, respectively.
l The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the data width
does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. For
FC100/FC200/FC400 services, the maximum transmission distance
of the WDM side is 3000 km.
Client-side
service type

FICON4G: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s
ISC 1G: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s
ISC 2G: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s
InfiniBand 2.5G: SAN service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s
InfiniBand 5G: SAN service at a rate of 5 Gbit/s
NOTE
The LOM board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Only the TN12LOM supports InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G and 3G-SDI.
OTN function
l Supports the mapping of up to eight channels of client-side signals

into OTU2/OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping process
is compliant with GDPS, ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM functions for OTU2.
l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

473
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
LPT function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service
type is GE.
FEC encoding
TN11LOM:
l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T
G.975.
with ITU-T G.975.1.
TN12LOM:
G.975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LOM
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of

the board.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

474
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
XFP/eSFP
TN11LOM/TN12LOM:
client side.
TN12LOM:
Wavelength).
Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3z
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3
(FC-SW-3)
COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING
PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel
Sysplex) Protocol
IBM Private Protocol
NOTE
Only the TN12LOM supports IBM Private Protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

475
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 14-110 and Figure 14-111 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOM
board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

476
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-110 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LOM board
Client side
GE
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX1
TX2
TX8
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
FICON
encapsulation and
mapping module
WDM side
E/O
OTN
processing
module
OUT
O/E
IN
ISC
encapsulation and
mapping module
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
477
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-111 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LOM board
GE
encapsulation and
mapping module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client side
RX1
RX2
FICON
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
ISC
encapsulation and
mapping module
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
O/E
InfiniBand
encapsulation and
mapping module
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Any
encapsulation and
mapping module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled
by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LOM board can access the following signals:
l
GE optical signals
GE electrical signals
ISC 1G optical signals
ISC 2G optical signals
FC100 optical signals
FICON optical signals
FICON Express optical signals
FICON4G optical signals
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

478
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

InfiniBand 2.5G optical signals
InfiniBand 5G optical signals
3G-SDI optical signals

NOTE
Only the TN12LOM supports 3G-SDI, InfiniBand 2.5G, and InfiniBand 5G service.
NOTE
available.
For FICON Express,ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3,
TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available.
available.
NOTE
electrical signals.
Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
In the signal flow of the LOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOM to the WDM side
of the LOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels (GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service
signals) or four channels (FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G /InfiniBand 2.5GI service
signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G service signals) of the
optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E
conversion.
After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation
and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one
channel of OTU2 signals.
conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface.
module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC,
demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs eight channels (GE/
FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four channels (FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/
InfiniBand 2.5G service signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand
5G service signals) of the electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

479
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels (GE/FC100/
FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four channels (InfiniBand 2.5G/FC200/FICON Express/
ISC 2G service signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G service
signals) of the electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/
ISC 1G optical signals or four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G /InfiniBand
2.5G optical signals or two channels of 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G
optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight or four or two channels of
the internal electrical signals to the corresponding optical signals.

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.

The module consists of the GE encapsulation and mapping module, ISC encapsulation and
mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, FICON encapsulation and
mapping module, and OTN processing module.
performance.
ISC encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of ISC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors ISC
performance.
FC encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2e
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FC
performance.
FICON encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of FICON signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FICON
performance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

480
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and

performs FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l

Power supply module

14.13.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOM board.

Figure 14-112 and Figure 14-113 show the front panel of the LOM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

481
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-112 Front panel of the TN11LOM board
LOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK/ACT1
LINK/ACT2
LINK/ACT3
LINK/ACT4
LINK/ACT5
LINK/ACT6
LINK/ACT7
LINK/ACT8
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
RX5
OUT IN
TX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
LOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

482
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-113 Front panel of the TN12LOM board

LOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
OUT IN
LOM
Indicators
There are twelve indicators on the front panel.
l
Data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn) - green

NOTE
Only the TN11LOM board has the data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

483
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOM board. Table 14-140 lists the type
Table 14-140 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOM board
Interface
Type
Function
INa
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUTa
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX8
LC

Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the optical module is used.
Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the electrical module is used.
RX1-RX8
LC

equipment.
Receives the optical service signal from the client-side
Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.
a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOM.
NOTE
available.
For FICON Express,ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G, Any(622M-4G) and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/
RX1, TX3/RX3, TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available.
available.
It is recommended to RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Hazard Level

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

484
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.13.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11LOM board. One slot houses one TN12LOM board.
Table 14-141 and Table 14-142 show the valid slots for the LOM board.
Table 14-141 Valid slots for the TN11LOM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59,

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU3-IU5
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along
the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board
displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11LOM
board, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU1.
OptiX OSN 3800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of
the two occupied slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the
NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the TN11LOM board, the
slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU3.
Table 14-142 Valid slots for TN12LOM board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
14.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM

Code for OTUs.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

485
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



Table 14-143 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOM board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required
by each type of service is listed below.
Service Type
Number of Timeslots
GE
FC100
FC200
FC400
FICON
FICON4G
FICON Express

486
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Type
Number of Timeslots
ISC 1G
ISC 2G
3G-SDI
InfiniBand 2.5G
InfiniBand 5G
14.13.9 LOM loopback

Table 14-144 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LOM boards.
Table 14-144 Loopbacks supported by LOM boards
Board
Loopbac
k Type
Description
TN11L
OM/
TN12L
OM
Client-side
outloop
See Figure 14-114.
Client-side
inloop
See Figure 14-115.
WDMside inloop
See Figure 14-116.
WDMside
outloop
See Figure 14-117.
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-114, eight services are received on the client side. Any N of the
services can be loopbacked to the client side while the remaining services can directly be
passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

487
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-114 Client-side outloop on the TN11LOM/TN12LOM board
RX1/TX1
ANY
RX2/TX2
ANY
RX3/TX3
ANY
RX4/TX4
ANY
RX5/TX5
ANY
RX6/TX6
ANY
RX7/TX7
ANY
RX8/TX8
ANY
ODU2
OTU2
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
decoded, and decapsulated into eight services. Any N of the services can be loopbacked to
the WDM side while the remaining services can be directly passed through.
Figure 14-115 Client-side inloop on the TN11LOM/TN12LOM board
RX1/TX1
ANY
RX2/TX2
ANY
RX3/TX3
ANY
RX4/TX4
ANY
RX5/TX5
ANY
RX6/TX6
ANY
RX7/TX7
ANY
RX8/TX8
ANY
ODU2
OTU2
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloop
As shown in Figure 14-116, eight services received on the client side are mapped into one
ODU2 service. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2 loopback
point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

488
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-116 WDM-side inloop on the TN11LOM/TN12LOM board
RX1/TX1
ANY
RX2/TX2
ANY
RX3/TX3
ANY
RX4/TX4
ANY
RX5/TX5
ANY
RX6/TX6
ANY
RX7/TX7
ANY
RX8/TX8
ANY
ODU2
Client-side
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop
loopbacked at the ODU2 loopback point, mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2
overhead is regenerated, and then transmitted back to the WDM side.
Figure 14-117 WDM-side outloop on the TN11LOM/TN12LOM board
RX1/TX1
ANY
RX2/TX2
ANY
RX3/TX3
ANY
RX4/TX4
ANY
RX5/TX5
ANY
RX6/TX6
ANY
RX7/TX7
ANY
RX8/TX8
ANY
ODU2
Client-side
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

For the parameters of LOM, refer to Table 14-145.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

489
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-145 LOM Parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
l TN11LOM: None,
FC-100, FC-200,
FC-400, FICON,
FICON Express,
FICON4G, GE, GE
(GFP-T), ISC 1G,
ISC 2G
Service Type
l TN12LOM: None,
Any, FC-100,
FC-200, FC-400,
FICON, FICON
Express,
FICON4G, GE, GE
(GFP-T), ISC 1G,
ISC 2G, InfiniBand
2.5G, InfiniBand
5G, 3G-SDI

the client side.
NOTE
Default: None
Client Service
Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s)
622 - 5000
Default: 622

optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE
This parameter is supported only by the
TN12LOM.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

490
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Off, On

status of a board.
more information.
Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
FC Internal
Working Mode
Normal Mode, Special

Mode
Default: Normal Mode

board are lost.
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface)
In different internal working mode, the board
can work with the FC storage equipment of
different vendors.
l Normal mode: In this mode, the board can
work with the mainstream FC switch
storage equipment (such as the Brocade
switch). Such equipment inserts the
10B_ERR alarm after detecting a link
failure.
l Special mode: In this mode, the board can
work with the switch storage equipment
(such as the McData switch) that uses
special processing standard. Such
equipment inserts the NOS alarm after
detecting a link failure.
OFC Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
The open fiber control (OFC) function

controls the transmit power of the laser when
the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC
function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse,
rather than remains in the enabled state, to
check whether the fiber is connected. In this
way, the output optical power of the laser is
cut, which prevents eye injury.
NOTE
l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled
after the OFC function is enabled.
l The OFC function cannot coexist with
protection.
l This parameter is valid only when the Service
Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.
Only TN11LOM supports this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

491
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled

FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: Enabled
Default: FEC
The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode

of the current optical interface.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: C
Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


492
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FC Distance
Extension
Disabled, Enabled
A flow control mechanism is applied between

FC service client-side equipment and between
two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching
function of FC services, which ensures that the
bandwidth does not decrease during long haul
transmission of FC services.
See D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: Disabled
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

status of a board.
NOTE

NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

deployment commissioning
NOTE
14.13.11 Specifications of the LOM

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

493
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
11L
OM
N/A

1000 BASE-LX-10
km
1000 BASE-LX-40
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km
FC400/FICON4G
Module (Multimode)
FC400/FICON4G
Module (Single
mode)
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module
(Multimode)
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module
(Single mode)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
800 ps/nm-C Band

(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN
N/A
TN
12L
OM
N/A

800 ps/nm-C Band

(Odd & Even
NOTE
NOTE

NOTE
Std 802.3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

494
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

495
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-147 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FC services

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
FC400/
FICON4G
Module
(Multimode
)
FC400/
FICON4G
Module
(Single
mode)
FC100/
FC200/
FICON/
FICON
Express
Module
(Multimode)
FC100/
FC200/
FICON/
FICON
Express
Module
(Single
mode)
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.3
10
0.5

Transmitter
parameter
specifications
at point S
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
830 to 860
1266 to 1360
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-2
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9
-8
-9.5
-10
Eye pattern
mask
Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface (FC-PI-2)

parameter template
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1260 to 1600
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-14
-16
-17
-18
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-12
-12
-12
-27

496
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

497
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN
NRZ
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

PIN
498
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code
format
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavele
ngthNRZAPD
4800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthODBAPD
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-DRZPIN
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
NRZ
NRZ
ODB
DRZ
NRZ

Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
10
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/
nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
APD
PIN
PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
APD

499
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavele
ngthNRZAPD
4800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthODBAPD
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-DRZPIN
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
Receiver
sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
-16
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

500
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz

width
nm
0.3

501
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
TN11LOM:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN12LOM:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1LO
M

wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN
92.7
101.7

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

502
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
92.9
101.9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
93.4
102.7

Wavelength-ODB-APD
98.2
108.0

61.8
69.2

62.8
70.2

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
64.8
72.6

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
66.7
75.0

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
TN1
2LO
M
NOTE
When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board
increases by another 2 W.
14.14 LQG
LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board

The available functional version of the LQG board is TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LQG

503
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.14.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQG board implements the conversion between four
For the position of the LQG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-118.
Figure 14-118 Position of the LQG board in the WDM system
1
MUX
LQG
GE
Client side
G.694.1 LQG
G.694.1
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
WDMside
GE
4
WDM side
Client side

The LQG board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connect at the electrical
layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 14-153 Functions and features of the LQG board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Multiplexes four channels of GE service optical signals into one channel of

OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals and converts them to a DWDM standard
wavelength that complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. The
reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
Crossconnect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services

the backplane, and supports the transmission of four GE signals to the
paired slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

504
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
OTN function
l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side service

signals into OTU5G signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 5
Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T
G.709.
l Supports SM functions for OTU5G.
l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU5G.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and CWDM specification.
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
Supported
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

505
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
eSFP

side.
WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3z
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 14-119 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

506
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-119 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board
Backplane (service corss-connection)
GE
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
E/O
GE
OTN
Crossencapsulation processing connect
and mapping
module
module
module
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQG board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LQG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQG to the WDM side
of the LQG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of GE optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
one channel of OTU5G/FEC5G signals.
The OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals from the WDM side through
the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

507
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

After O/E conversion, the OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU5G/FEC5G framing, decoding of FEC,
demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs four channels of GE signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals.
OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals.

electrical signals between the LQG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to
the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The
grooming service signals are GE signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU5G/
FEC5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE
performance.
Frames OTU5G/FEC5G signals, processes overheads in OTU5G/FEC5G signals, and
performs FEC encoding and decoding.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

508
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

14.14.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQG board.

Figure 14-120 shows the front panel of the LQG board.
Figure 14-120 Front panel of the LQG board
LQG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT
IN
LQG
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

509
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQG board. Table 14-154 lists the type
Table 14-154 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQG board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.14.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LQG board.
Valid Slots
Table 14-155 shows the valid slots for the LQG board.
Table 14-155 Valid slots for the LQG board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

510
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
14.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-156 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQG board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical
port of the board.
Figure 14-121 shows the application model of the LQG board. Table 14-157 describes the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

511
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-121 Port diagram of the LQG board

WDM side
Client side
201(LP/LP)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
Cross-connect
module
201(LP/LP)-1
Service
processing
module
1(IN/OUT)-1
WDM-side
optical
module
Table 14-157 Meaning of NM port of the LQG board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
LP

IN/OUT
Corresponding to the WDM-side optical

interfaces.

If the LQG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LQG board
(Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
and
in Figure 14-122.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQG board and the LP port
of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LQG board are
cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
in Figure 14-122.
of the LQG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board for protection and the inter-board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
in Figure 14-122.

512
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LQG board and the LP port of other
boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LQG board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services),
as shown
in Figure 14-122.
The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Figure 14-122 Cross-connection diagram of the LQG board

Client side
Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(LP/LP)-3
6(RX4/TX4)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4
2
1
201(LP/LP)-1
WDM side
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
LQG
The client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LQG board
The WDM side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
3
4
5

TN11TQM/TN12TQM

For the parameters of LQG, refer to Table 14-158.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

513
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-158 LQG Parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
GE, GE(GFP-T)
Default: GE

information.
NOTE
format.
Off, On
Laser Status
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Service Mode
OTN, SDH
Default: Enabled
Default: OTN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.
Click D.51 Service Mode (WDM

514
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled

pass-through (LPT).
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

board.
Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
Default: Enabled
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Max. Packet
Length
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1518 - 9600
Default: 9600

Click D.15 FEC Working State
information.

wavelength.
Ethernet services.
information.

515
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation, 1000M
Full-Duplex
The Ethernet Working Mode

parameter sets and queries the working
mode of the Ethernet.
Click D.12 Ethernet Working Mode
information.
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

board resides.
information.
commissioning.
14.14.11 Specifications of the LQG

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

516
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
11L
QG
N/A
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-50
km
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-70
km
1000 BASE-LX-10
km
1000 BASE-LX-40
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3

517
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

518
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value

Wavelength-NRZAPD
NRZ
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

519
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value

Wavelength-NRZAPD
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-2
-3
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
3400
3400

Receiver type
APD
APD
range
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-25
-25
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-50
km
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-70
km
NRZ
NRZ

520
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Target distance
km
Value
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-50
km
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-70
km
50
70

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
ps/nm
1000
1400

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1450 to 1620
1450 to 1620
dBm
-18
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

521
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LQG
28.4
32

Wavelength-NRZAPD
31.0
34.4
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-50
km
23.18
26
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-70
km
14.15 LQM
LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board

The available functional version of the LQM board is TN13.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN13
LQM
Type
The system provides two types of the LQM: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces,
and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 14-163 lists the types
of the LQM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

522
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-163 LQM type description

Board
Type
Description
LQM
Single transmitting and single

receiving board
The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/

OUT1.
Dual-fed selective receiving board
The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/

OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.
NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of the LQM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed
and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.
14.15.2 Application
The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM converts between signals at the rate
between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the LQM in the WDM system, see Figure 14-123 and Figure 14-124.
Figure 14-123 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LQM
DMUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/ LQM
G.694.2
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
Client side
Client side
WDM side
Figure 14-124 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
DMUX
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
1
LQM
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
4
DMUX
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LQM
WDM side
MUX
WDM side

Client side
523
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

The main functions and features supported by the LQM are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 14-164 Functions and features of the LQM
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5
is similar.
l With this board, many services, such as data services (Ethernet services),
SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice
services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength.
l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and
single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application
scenario.
Client-side
service type

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

524
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA.

OptiX OSN 6800:
l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/
protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane.
l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and
2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards)
to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh
group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to
the mesh group.
OTN
function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and

2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with
GDPS, ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU1.
WDM
specification
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
NOTE
ALS
function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

525
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and
the OWSP protection.
eSFP

side.
side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

526
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

527
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 14-126 and Figure 14-125 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

528
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-125 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
O/E
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
529
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-126 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
Client side
100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
CrossOTN
processing connect
module
module
O/E
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQM to the WDM side
of the LQM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client
signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

530
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. A laser
converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then
the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with
ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E
conversion.
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels
of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals.


The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping
module, and OTN processing module.
OptiX OSN 8800: NA.
electrical signals between the LQM and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The signaling module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

531
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of
four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
l

Power supply module

14.15.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQM board.

Figure 14-127 shows the front panel of the LQM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

532
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-127 Front panel of the LQM board
LQM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
LQM
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQM board. Table 14-165 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

533
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-165 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces

Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC
Receives single-wavelength signals from the

optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and
drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4
LC
Transmits service signals to the client-side

equipment.
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.15.6 Valid Slots

The LQM occupies one slot.
Table 14-166 shows the valid slots for the LQM board.
Table 14-166 Valid slots for the LQM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
14.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

534
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-167 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQM board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is
Figure 14-128 shows the application model of the LQM board. Table 14-168 describes the
Figure 14-128 Port diagram of the LQM
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
WDM side
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
Cross-connect
module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Service
processing
module

1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
WDM-side
optical
module
535
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-168 Meaning of NM port of the LQM

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
ClientLP

IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2

interfaces.
Configuration Principle of Timeslots :

l
The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a
timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services.
In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of
the transmit end.
For each LQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1 and HD-SDI services, timeslots can
be configured only in channel 1 of the LQM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Service Type
Number of Timeslots
GE
FE
OTU1
16
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
16
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
16
FC100
FC200
12
FICON
FICON Express
12

536
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Type
Number of Timeslots
HD-SDI
11
DVB-ASI
SDI
ESCON
FDDI

If the LQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level
(GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQM
board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
by
and
in Figure 14-129.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQM board and the
ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 14-129. (The GE/Any/OTU1
services accessed from the client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the
WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP
port of the LQM board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-129. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services
accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of
the LQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port.
Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQM board and the ClientLP
port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-129. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services
accessed from the WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/
OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and
receive timeslots. For details, see 14.15.8 Physical and Logical Ports.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

537
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-129 Cross-connection diagram of the LQM

Client side
Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4
2
1
WDM side
WDM side
LQM
1

The client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LQM board
The WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
3
4
5

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by (1) and (2) in Figure 14-129.

For the parameters of the LQM, refer to Table 14-169.
Table 14-169 LQM Parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name

538
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
Service Type
None, Any, FE, GE,

GE(GFP-T), OTU-1,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48,
FC-100, FC-200,
FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
Default: None
Client Service
Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s)
100 - 2200
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 0
Default:
l WDM side: On

the client side.
NOTE

status of a board.
more information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN

Mode

board are lost.
more information.
Used to set the service mode of the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

539
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled

Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

Default: Enabled
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: C
Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


540
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled

GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is
not required, set this parameter to Enabled;
Default: Disabled
NOTE
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
PRBS Test
Status
Disabled, Enabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Default: Disabled

status of a board.
14.15.11 Specifications of the LQM

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

541
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
WDM-Side
Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical
Module
Module
TN
13L
QM
N/A
I-16
N/A

(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
S-16.1

(eSFP DWDM)-120
km
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
NOTE

NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48 module and L-16.2/LR-2
OC-48 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, and OC-48 signals. The
FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM

542
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Target
distance
km
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28

543
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The
specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2

544
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be
slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16,
and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed
signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

545
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply
to STM-16, and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE
signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

546
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

547
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
80

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
nm
1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1270 to 1620
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km

NRZ
548
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Target distance
Value
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
km
120

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
nm
12.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask


Receiver type
APD
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

549
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN13LQM
32.6
35.9
14.16 LQMD
LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual
fed and selective receiving

The available functional versions of the LQMD board are TN11 and TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LQM
D
TN12
LQM
D

l
Function:
The TN12LQMD board supports access OTU1,HD-SDI,SDI and FDDI services,
whereas the TN11LQMD board does not support. For details, see 14.16.3 Functions
and Features.
The TN11LQMD board supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications, whereas
the TN12LQMD board supports DWDM specifications. For details, see 14.16.3
The TN11LQMD supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. The TN12LQMD
supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side. For details, see 14.16.3
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Specification:
550
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the specification of each version, see 14.16.11 Specifications of the LQMD.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LQM
D
TN12LQM
D
The TN12LQMD can be created as TN11LQMD on the NMS.

The former can substitute for the latter, without any software
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMD functions as the
TN11LQMD.
NOTE
A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with
APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power
are different.
None
TN12LQM
D
14.16.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMD board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and
dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
For the position of the LQMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-130.
Figure 14-130 Position of the LQMD board in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
1
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
1
LQMD
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
4
DMUX
Client side
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/ LQMD
G.694.2
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE

The LQMD board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

551
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-176 Functions and features of the LQMD board

Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5
is similar.
l With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet
services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and
voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength.
side.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only TN12LQMD supports OTU1, HD-SDI, SDI and FDDI services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

552
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA.

OptiX OSN 6800:
l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/
protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane.
l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800
2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards)
l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh
group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to
the mesh group.
OTN
function

signals into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5
Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T
G.709.
WDM
specification
TN11LQMD: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
TN11LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
TN12LQMD: Supports the DWDM specification.
TN12LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE
LPT function
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

553
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
ALS
function
Test frame
TN11LQMD: not supported

TN12LQMD: supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and
the OWSP protection.
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

554
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
the implementation and usage of the DVB
Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

555
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 14-132 and Figure 14-131 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD
board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

556
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-131 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
Splitter
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
557
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-132 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 6800/
OptiX OSN 3800)
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
OTN
Crossprocessing connect
module
module
Splitter
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LQMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMD to the WDM side
of the LQMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

558
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. An optical
splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals,
and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
ITU-T G.694.2. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
FEC, demapping, cross-connection and service decapsulation processing. Then, the module
outputs four channels of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l



OptiX OSN 8800: not applicable.
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect
module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMD and the board in the
paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service
signals are Any signals.
module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
(consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

559
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l

Power supply module

14.16.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMD board.

Figure 14-133 shows the front panel of the LQMD board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

560
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-133 Front panel of the LQMD board
LQMD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
LQMD
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQMD board. Table 14-177 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

561
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-177 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMD board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.16.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LQMD board.
Table 14-178 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMD board.
Table 14-178 Valid slots for TN11LQMD board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 14-179 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMD board.
Table 14-179 Valid slots for TN12LQMD board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

562
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
14.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD

The characteristic code for the LQMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
Table 14-180 Characteristic code for the LQMD board
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Frequency of the forth optical

signal

WDM side.
Last four digits
Frequency of the forth optical

signal

the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the LQMD board is 92109210.
"92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side is
192.10 THz.


Table 14-181 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQMD board and the port numbers
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
2
563
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Physical Port
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 14-134 shows the application model of the LQMD board. Table 14-182 describes the
Figure 14-134 Port diagram of the LQMD board
Client side
WDM side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
WDM-side
optical
module
NOTE
TN11LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/
ClientLP)-4.
Table 14-182 Meaning of NM port of the LQMD board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
ClientLP

IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2

interfaces.

564
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
the transmit end.
For each LQMD board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HD-SDI services, timeslots can be
configured only in channel 1 of the LQMD board.
Service Type
Number of Timeslots
GE
FE
OTU1
16
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
16
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
16
FC100
FC200
12
FICON
FICON Express
12
HD-SDI
11
DVB-ASI
SDI
ESCON
FDDI

If the LQMD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

565
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the
LQMD board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board),
as shown by
and
in Figure 14-135.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMD board and the
services accessed from the client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the
port of the LQMD board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-135. (The GE/Any/OTU1
services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM
side of the LQMD board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMD board and the
ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side
of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming
of the WDM-side services), as shown by
in Figure 14-135.
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/
OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

566
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-135 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMD board

Client side
Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
WDM side
WDM side
LQMD
1

The client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LQMD board
The WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
3
4
5

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by
and
in Figure 14-135.

For parameters of LQMD, refer to Table 14-183.
Table 14-183 LQMD parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name

567
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
Service Type
None, Any, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON,

FC-100, FC-200,
FDDI, FE, FICON,
FICON Express, GE,
GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
OTU-1, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16
Default: None

the client side.
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMD supports Any, SDI, FDDI,
HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services.
NOTE
Client Service
Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s)
100 - 2200
Default: 0

NOTE
Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.

Off, On
Laser Status
Default:
l WDM side: On

status of a board.
more information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

board are lost.
more information.

568
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN

Mode
The Service Mode parameter sets the service

mode of a board.
NOTE
Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for

more information.
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.05
0 to
80/1560.61/192.1
00

Default: Enabled
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.1
70 to
18/1611.00/188.7
80

Default: /
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Default: C
Default: 9600


569
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex


OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is
not required, set this parameter to Enabled;
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

status of a board.
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
14.16.11 Specifications of the LQMD

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

570
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
QM
D
N/A
I-16
N/A
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km

Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
TN
12L
QM
D
N/A
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
N/A

Channels-Tunable)

(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

571
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE

NOTE
STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA

572
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
30
30
30
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Line code
format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

573
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Target
distance
km
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be
slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

574
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals
are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9

575
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Maximum reflectance
dB
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals
are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

576
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

km

Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
(Four
Channels
Tunable)
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-4
-4
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-8
-8
-5
-5
-5
-5
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

577
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
(Four
Channels
Tunable)
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant
PIN
APD
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-28
-18
-28
-28
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
1300 to
1575
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

578
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1600 ps/nm-CWDM

power
dBm

power
dBm
0.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

579
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11
LQM
D

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
57.1
65.7
61.1
67.2
31.1
34.3

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
TN12
LQM
D
14.17 LQMS
LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single
fed and single receiving

The available functional versions of the LQMS board are TN11 and TN12.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LQM
S

580
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN12
LQM
S

l
Function:
The TN11LQMS board does not support access OTU1,HD-SDI,SDI and FDDI services,
whereas the TN12LQMS board supports. For details, see 14.17.3 Functions and
Features.
The TN11LQMS board supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications, whereas
the TN12LQMS board supports DWDM specifications. For details, see 14.17.3
The TN12LQMS supports the grooming of ODU1 signal, whereas the TN11LQMS
does not support.
Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 14.17.11 Specifications of the LQMS.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LQM
S
TN12LQM
S
The TN12LQMS can be created as TN11LQMS on the NMS.

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMS functions as the
TN11LQMS.
NOTE
are different.
TN12LQM
S
None
14.17.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMS board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations or
between ODU1 signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

581
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application Scenario 1 for the TN11LQMS and TN12LQMS: Conversion Between

Signals at the Rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T RecommendationCompliant WDM Signals
Figure 14-136 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (LQM Mode)
1
MUX
DMUX
4
Client side
DMUX
LQMS G.694.1/
G.694.2
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
MUX
G.694.1/
LQMS
G.694.2
WDM side
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
4
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
Application Scenario 2 for the TN12LQMS: Conversion Between ODU1 Electrical

Signals and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals
Figure 14-137 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (NS1 Mode)
MUX
TOM
DMUX
LQMS G.694.1
G.694.1 LQMS
DMUX
TOM
MUX
NOTE
Scenario 2 is supported on the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800.

The LQMS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

582
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-190 Functions and features of the LQMS board

Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to
a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.
l With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet
services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and
voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength.
l Maps ODU1 signal into OTU1 optical signal and converts it into the
standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse
process is similar.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only TN12LQMS supports OTU1,HD-SDI,SDI and FDDI services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

583
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA.

OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to
backplane.
Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/
s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
l TN12LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal each to
backplane.
Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/
OptiX OSN 3800
l TN11LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh
group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging
to the mesh group.
l TN12LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal from
one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other
three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN
function

signals into one channel of OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must
be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is
compliant with ITU-T G.709.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM
specification
TN11LQMS: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
TN12LQMS: Supports the DWDM specification.

584
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
TN11LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.

TN12LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE
LPT
function
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Test frame
TN11LQMS: not supported

TN12LQMS: supported
Opticallayer ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
l Supports the tributary SNCP protection (NS1 Mode).
l Supports the ODUk SNCP (NS1 Mode).
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop

Supported
585
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

586
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent
(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

587
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 14-138, Figure 14-139 and Figure 14-140 show the functional modules and signal flow
of the LQMS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

588
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-138 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
589
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-139 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LQMS and TN12 LQMS board
(LQM mode) (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Service
OTN
and mapping
module
module
module
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
TN12LQMS supports the DWDM specifications only.
In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the WDM side
of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

590
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the
OUT optical interface.
l
Receive direction
conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four
channels of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Figure 14-140 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 mode)(OptiX
OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
ODU1
WDM side
E/O
Crossconnect
module
OTN
processing
module
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
SCC

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
591
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow (NS1 Mode)

In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the backplane
of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane.
The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.
Receive direction
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the module
sends out one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
Module Function
l



OptiX OSN 8800: NA.
module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMS and the board in the
paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service
signals are Any/ODU1 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

592
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals.
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors Any
performance.
l

Power supply module

14.17.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMS board.

Figure 14-141 shows the front panel of the LQMS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

593
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-141 Front panel of the LQMS board
LQMS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT
IN
LQMS
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQMS board. Table 14-191 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

594
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-191 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMS board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.17.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LQMS board.
Table 14-192 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMS board.
Table 14-192 Valid slots for TN11LQMS board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 14-193 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMS board.
Table 14-193 Valid slots for TN12LQMS board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

595
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
14.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-194 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQMS board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 14-142 and Figure 14-143 show the application model of the LQMS board. Table
14-195 describes the meaning of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

596
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-142 Port diagram of the TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS board (LQM Mode)

Client side
WDM side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
WDM-side
optical module
NOTE
TN11LQMS: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12LQMS (LQM Mode): The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201
(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4.
Figure 14-143 Port diagram of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 Mode)

WDM side
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
Cross-connect
module
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
Service
processing
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
WDM-side
optical module
Table 14-195 Meaning of NM port of the LQMS board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
ClientLP

ODU1LP
Internal logical port.
IN/OUT

interfaces.

l
the transmit end.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

597
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For each LQMS board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can
be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMS board.
Service Type
Number of Timeslots
GE
FE
OTU1
16
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
16
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
16
FC100
FC200
12
FICON
FICON Express
12
HD-SDI
11
DVB-ASI
SDI
ESCON
FDDI

If the LQMS board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM
interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are LQM Mode and NS1
Mode.
NOTE
The TN11LQMS board does not require the configuration of the board mode. The electrical cross-connect
services of the TN11LQMS are created in the same way as the electrical cross-connect services of the
TN12LQMS in the LQM mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

598
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

LQM Mode:
l
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the
LQMS board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board),
as shown by
and
in Figure 14-144.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMS board and the
services accessed from the client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the
port of the LQMS board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-144. (The GE/Any/OTU1
services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM
side of the LQMS board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP
port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-144. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services
accessed from the WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side
of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There
is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

599
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-144 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Client side
WDM side
Other board
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4
2
1
WDM side
LQMS
1

The client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LQMS board
The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
3
4
5

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by
and
in Figure 14-144.
NS1 Mode (Supported only by the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800):
l
Create the cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the LQMS board and the
ClientLP port of other boards shown in Figure 14-145.
The four paths of the ODU1LP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There
is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

600
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-145 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board

Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
WDM side
WDM side
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
LQMS
The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Other board TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/

TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS
(NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2

For parameters of LQMS, refer to Table 14-196.
Table 14-196 LQMS parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

the occupancy status of the current channel
of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


601
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

SDI, ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16

Default: None
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMS supports Any, SDI,
FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services.
NOTE
encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service
Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format
is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is
recommended.
ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/
s)
100 - 2200
Default: 0

board.
NOTE
Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.

information.
Off, On
Laser Status
Default:
l WDM side: On

status of a board.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Service Mode

(LPT).
Client Mode, OTN

Mode

NOTE
Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

602
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

wavelength.
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter
sets and queries the working mode of the
Ethernet.

603
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled

GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the
Disabled.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Board Mode
LQM Mode, NS1 Mode
Default: Disabled
Default: LQM Mode

resides.
The Board Mode parameter is used to set
the board mode of a board depending on
the service application scenario.
NOTE
This parameter is only available for
TN12LQMS.
See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)

14.17.11 Specifications of the LQMS

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

604
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
QM
S
N/A
I-16
N/A
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km

Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
TN
12L
QM
S
N/A
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
N/A

Channels-Tunable)

(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

605
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE

NOTE
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA

606
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
30
30
30
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Line code
format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

607
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Target
distance
km
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4,
OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE
signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed
signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

608
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to
STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9

609
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Maximum reflectance
dB
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
-27
-27
NOTE
STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed
signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

610
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

km

Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
-2
-2
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

611
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant
PIN
APD
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-28
-18
-28
-28
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
1300 to
1575
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

612
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
Wavelength-NRZ-APD

power
dBm

power
dBm
2.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

613
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1LQ
MS

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
56.3
64.5
60.4
66.4
29
33.3

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
TN1
2LQ
MS
14.18 LSQ
LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

Only one functional version of the LSQ board is available, that is, TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LSQ

614
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.18.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSQ board converts between one channel of STM-256/
OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations.
For the position of the LSQ board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-146.
Figure 14-146 Position of the LSQ board in the WDM system
MUX
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
LSQ
DMUX
G.694.1
G.694.1
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
Client side
LSQ
WDM side
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
Client side

The LSQ board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 14-203 Functions and features of the LSQ board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Maps one STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signal into one OTU3 optical signal

and converts the signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM
wavelength. It also performs the reverse process and compensates for the
dispersion in the signals accessed on the WDM side.
Client-side
service type
OTN function

to the ITU-T G.709.
l Maps a maximum of one channel of client-side service signals into
OTU3 signals.
WDM
specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

615
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Tunable
wavelength
function

ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
Supports the PRBS function on the client side.

NOTE
The PRBS function of LSQ on the client side is supported only when the client-side
service type is STM-256/OC-768.
LPT function
Not supported
FEC encoding

975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
Test frame
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme

Loopback
Client side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

616
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
ITU-T G.707
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSQ board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 14-147 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

617
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-147 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ board
Client side
RX
TX
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
E/O
WDM side
E/O
OTN
processing
module
O/E
Client-side OTN
processing module
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSQ board can access the following optical signals:
l
In the signal flow of the LSQ board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSQ to the WDM side
of the LSQ, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion.
signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring.
Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for
encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3
electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

618
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Receive direction
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/
OTU3 electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical
signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical
interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical
signals.
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals.


The module consists of a SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side
OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module.
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET
Monitors OTN performance.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

619
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

14.18.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSQ board.

Figure 14-148 shows the front panel of the LSQ board.
Figure 14-148 Front panel of the LSQ board
LSQ
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX
RX
OUT
IN
LSQ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

620
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSQ board. Table 14-204 lists the type
Table 14-204 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSQ board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX
LC
RX
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.18.6 Valid Slots

Two slots houses one LSQ board.
Table 14-205 shows the valid slots for the LSQ board.
Table 14-205 Valid slots for the LSQ board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

621
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17
The rear connector of the LSQ is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the LSQ board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one
of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the LSQ board, the slot number of the LSQ board
displayed on the NM is IU2.
14.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LSQ

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-206 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSQ board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX/RX
NOTE
14.18.9 LSQ Loopbacks

Table 14-207 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LSQ boards.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

622
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-207 Loopbacks supported by LSQ boards

Board
Type of
Received
Service
Loopback Type
Description
TN11LS
Q
STM-256
or OC-768
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-149.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-150.
WDM-side outloop
OTU3
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 14-151.
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-152.
WDM-side inloop
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-153.
WDM-side outloop
Loopbacks on the TN11LSQ Board

When the TN11LSQ board receives STM-256 or OC-768 services, client-side inloop are similar
to WDM-side outloop.
l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-149, one STM-256 or OC-768 service received on the client side
is looped back to the client side directly.
Figure 14-149 Client-side outloop on the TN11LSQ board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service

As shown inFigure 14-150, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped
into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is looped
back to the WDM side at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

623
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-150 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN11LSQ board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service
WDM-side inloop
As shown inFigure 14-151, one STM-256/OC-768 service received on the client side is
converted into one ODU3 service, and then is looped back to the client side.
Figure 14-151 WDM-side inloop on the TN11LSQ board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service
When the TN11LSQ board receives OTU3 services, the client-side outloop are similar to the
WDM-side inloop and the client-side inloop are similar to the WDM-side outloop.
l
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop

As shown in Figure 14-152, one OTU3 service received on the client side is demapped
back to the client side at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

624
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-152 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN11LSQ board
OTU3
RX/TX
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service

Figure 14-153 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN11LSQ board
OTU3
RX/TX
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service

For parameters of LSQ, refer to Table 14-208.
Table 14-208 LSQ parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

625
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, OC-768, OTU-3,

STM-256
Default: STM-256
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

status of a board.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


626
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Receive Wavelength
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
Set Receive Wavelength of a board. The

value of the Receive Wavelength is as
follows:
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
l When the receive wavelength of the

board is the same as the transmit
wavelength of the local board, use the
default value, which indicates keeping
the receive wavelength the same as the
transmit wavelength of the local board
automatically.
board is different from the transmit
wavelength of the local board, the
value of this parameter must be the
same as the transmit wavelength of the
peer board; otherwise, services are
affected.
NOTE
In the case of ASON services, this parameter
must be set to the default value.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
NOTE


627
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: Disabled
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

Disabled.
resides.
14.18.11 Specifications of the LSQ

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

628
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side Fixed
Optical Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
SQ
40G Transponder
N/A
800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN
N/A
800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN
NOTE
Client-Side Fixed Optical Module

Table 14-209 Specifications of client-side fixed optical module
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
40G Transponder
NRZ
nm
1530 to 1565
Maximum mean launched power
dBm
Minimum mean launched power
dBm
dB
8.2
Minimum side mode suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
40
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1290 to 1570
dBm
-6
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

629
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
ODB
DQPSK

Operating frequency
range
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
NA
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5
2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.6
NA
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
-800 to 800
-800 to 800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27

630
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LS
Q

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
75.0
82.0

Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN
82.0
89.0
14.19 LSX
LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

The available functional versions of the LSX board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LSX
TN12
LSX
TN13
LSX

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function:
631
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The TN11LSX/TN12LSX supports AFEC, and the TN13LSX supports AFEC-2.

Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details,
The TN12LSX board and the TN13LSX board support access FC1200 service, whereas
the TN11LSX board does not. For details, see 14.19.3 Functions and Features.
The TN13LSX board supports the OTU2e service, whereas the TN11LSX and
TN12LSX board does not. For details, see 14.19.3 Functions and Features.
The TN12LSX board and the TN13LSX board support the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical
module on the client side, whereas the TN11LSX board does not. The TN13LSX board
supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the WDM side, whereas the
TN11LSX board and the TN12LSX board do not. For details, see 14.19.3 Functions
and Features.
When client-side services are 10GE LAN services:
TN11LSX: Port Mapping can be set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC
Transparent Mapping(10.7G), or Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G).
TN12LSX: Port Mapping can be set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) or Bit
Transparent Mapping(10.7G).
TN13LSX: Port Mapping can be set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) or MAC
Transparent Mapping(10.7G).
For more information, see 14.19.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS.
l
Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 14.19.11 Specifications of the LSX.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LSX
TN12LSX
The TN12LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LSX functions as the
TN11LSX.
NOTE
are different.
TN13LSX

TN11LSX.
NOTE
does not apply.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

632
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN12LSX
TN13LSX

TN12LSX.
NOTE
does not apply.
TN13LSX
None
14.19.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSX board maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service
signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and
WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LSX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-154.
Figure 14-154 Position of the LSX board in the WDM system
10GE LAN /
MUX
10GE WAN /
STM-64/
LSX G.694.1
OC-192/
OTU2/
DMUX
OTU2e/
FC1200
Client side
WDM side
10GE LAN /
10GE WAN /
STM-64/
G.694.1 LSX
OC-192/
OTU2/
MUX
OTU2e/
FC1200
WDM side
Client side
DMUX

The LSX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

633
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-211 Functions and features of the LSX board

Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals
and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and the ITU-T
Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64/OC-192 service is the same.
Therefore, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the
STM-64/OC-192 service on the U2000.
The FC1200 service is only supported by the TN12LSX and TN13LSX.
When an XFP module is used as a WDM-side module on the TN13LSX board, the
TN13LSX board does not support FC1200.
The OTU2e service is only supported by the TN13LSX.
OTN
function

the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/
OTU2/OTU2e into OTU2/OTU2e signals, and the transparence mapping
of 10GE LAN into OTU2e signals.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is only supported when the client-side service type

634
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
LPT
function
is 10GE LAN.
FEC
encoding
TN11LSX/TN12LSX:
ITU-T G.975.1.
TN13LSX:
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Test frame
Not supported
Opticallayer ASON
Supported by the TN12LSX and TN13LSX
Not supported
Protection
scheme

XFP
TN12LSX/TN13LSX:
Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side.
TN13LSX:
Supports 10 Gbit/s tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side
(Tunable Wavelength).
Wavelength).
Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

635
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

636
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-155 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX.
Figure 14-156 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX.
Figure 14-155 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX board
Client side
RX
O/E
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
processing module
TX
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
WDM side
E/O
OTN
processing
module
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
637
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-156 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX board
Client side
RX
TX
WDM side
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
Client-side OTN
processing module
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
E/O
OTN
processing
module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSX board can access the following optical signals:
TN11LSX:
l
TN12LSX:
l
TN13LSX:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

638
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

In the signal flow of the LSX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSX to the WDM side
of the LSX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
equipment through the RX optical interface, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2/
OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance
monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules
for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2/
OTU2e electrical signals.
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/
O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths
Receive direction
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC,
demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of
OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical
signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals.
OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

639
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l

encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, FC encapsulation
and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/
OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/
OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE
LAN performance monitoring function.
Encapsulates one channel of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance
monitoring function.

Power supply module

14.19.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the LSX front panel.

Figure 14-157 shows the LSX front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

640
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-157 Front panel of the LSX board
LSX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX
RX
OUT
IN
LSX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the LSX front panel. Table 14-212 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

641
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-212 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSX board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX
LC
RX
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.19.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LSX board.
Valid Slots
Table 14-213 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSX board.
Table 14-213 Valid slots for the TN11LSX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

642
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
14.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-216 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSX board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX/RX
NOTE
14.19.9 LSX Loopbacks

Table 14-217 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LSX boards.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

643
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-217 Loopbacks supported by LSX boards

Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN11LSX/
TN12LSX
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-158.
WDM-side inloop
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 14-159.
Client-side inloop
TN13LSX
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-160.
WDM-side outloop
Client-side outloop
When non-OTN services are

received, see Figure 14-161.
When OTN services are
received, see Figure 14-162.
WDM-side inloop
Loopbacks on the TN11LSX/TN12LSX Board

The implementation of client-side outloops is similar to the implementation of WDM-side
inloops. The implementation of WDM-side outloops is similar to the implementation of clientside inloops.
l

As shown in Figure 14-158, one 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/
FC1200 service received on the client side is converted into one ODU2 service, and then
is loopbacked to the client side.
Figure 14-158 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN11LSX/TN12LSX
board
RX/TX
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC192/OTU2/FC1200
ODU2
IN/OUT
OTU2
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
NOTE
Only the TN12LSX board supports FC1200 services.
WDM-side outloop and client-side inloop

loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

644
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-159 WDM-side outloop and client-side inloop on the TN11LSX/TN12LSX

board
RX/TX
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC192/OTU2/FC1200
OTU2
ODU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
NOTE
Only the TN12LSX board supports FC1200 services.
Loopbacks on the TN13LSX Board

The implementation of client-side inloops is similar to the implementation of WDM-side
outloops. The implementation of client-side outloops is similar to the implementation of WDMside inloops.
l

Figure 14-160 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN13LSX board
RX/TX
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC- ODU2
192/OTU2/FC1200
IN/OUT
OTU2
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services

Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when non-OTN services are received on the
client side
As shown in Figure 14-161, one 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC1200
service received on the client side is loopbacked to the client side at the client-side port.
Figure 14-161 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN13LSX board (1)
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC192/FC1200
RX/TX
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when OTN services are received on the client
side
As shown in Figure 14-162, one OTU2/OTU2e service received on the client side is
demapped into one ODU2/ODU2e service after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is
terminated. The OTU2/OTU2e service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2/
ODU2e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

645
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-162 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN13LSX board (2)
OTU2/
OTU2e
RX/TX
ODU2/
ODU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services

For parameters of LSX, refer to Table 14-218.
Table 14-218 LSX parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, 10GE LAN,

10GE WAN,FC-1200,
OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2v, STM-64
Default: 10GE LAN

NOTE
Only TN12LSX and TN13LSX support the
FC-1200 service.
Only TN 13LSX support the OTU-2v service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

646
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Port Mapping
l TN11LSX: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G),
Bit Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)

queries the mapping mode of a port service.
l TN12LSX: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
Bit Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
l TN13LSX: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

status of a board.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

(LPT).
forward error correction (FEC) function of
the current optical interface.

647
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
NOTE

wavelength.
NOTE

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

resides.
GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing
is not required, set this parameter to
Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


648
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only TN13LSX supports this parameter.
14.19.11 Specifications of the LSX

Bo
ard
ClientSide
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
11L
SX
N/A
10 Gbit/s Multirate
-10 km
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd

& even wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN
N/A
10 Gbit/s Multirate
-40 km
10 Gbit/s Multirate
-80 km
-0.3 km

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

649
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
ClientSide
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
12L
SX
N/A
10 Gbit/s Multirate
-10 km
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd

& even wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN
N/A
10 Gbit/s Multirate
-40 km
10 Gbit/s Multirate
-80 km
-0.3 km
800 ps/nm-C Band
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed

TN
13L
SX
N/A
10 Gbit/s Multirate
-10 km
10 Gbit/s Multirate
-40 km
10 Gbit/s Multirate
-80 km


-0.3 km
800 ps/nm-C Band

(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
800 ps/nm-C Band

(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
NOTE
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

650
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km
module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2 signals. The
specifications following completely apply to OTU2 signals. The actual values may be slightly different
from these specifications when the accessed signals are OC-192, STM-64, FC1200, 10GE LAN, or 10GE
WAN signals.
The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals. The
specifications below apply to 10GE LAN signal. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed FC1200 signal.
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA

651
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
30
30
30
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate )
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12

652
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

653
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN
NRZ
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

PIN
654
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code
format
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavele
ngthNRZAPD
4800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthODBAPD
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-DRZPIN
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
NRZ
NRZ
ODB
DRZ
NRZ

Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
10
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/
nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
APD
PIN
PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
APD

655
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavele
ngthNRZAPD
4800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthODBAPD
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-DRZPIN
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
Receiver
sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
-16
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

656
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz

width
nm
0.3

657
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11LSX: 2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
TN12LSX: 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
TN13LSX: 2.4 lb (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1LS
X

47.7
50.1
47.9
50.9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

658
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
TN1
2LS
X
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
49.7
52.7

Wavelength-ODB-APD
52.7
55.7

30.5
36.6
30.7
36.8

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
32.5
39

Wavelength-ODB-APD
35.5
42.6

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
29.4
32.8

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
29.5
33.9

27
30.4

28
31.4

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
TN1
3LS
X
14.20 LSXL
LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

The available functional versions of the LSXL board are TN11, TN12, .

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

659
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LSXL
TN12
LSXL

l
Function:
The TN11LSXL board does not support the function of accessing OTU3 services,
whereas the TN12LSXL board supports. For details, see 14.20.3 Functions and
Features.
Appearance:
The LSXL boards of TN11, TN12 versions use different front panels. For details, see
Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 14.20.11 Specifications of the LSXL.
The LSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
14.20.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXL board converts between one channel of
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1
Recommendations.
For the position of the LSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-163.
Figure 14-163 Position of the LSXL board in the WDM system
MUX
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
LSXL
G.694.1
G.694.1 LSXL
DMUX
Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
Client side
NOTE
l Client-side service types of the TN11LSXL board are STM-256 and OC-768.
l Client-side service types of the TN12LSXL board are STM-256, OC-768, and OTU3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

660
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LSXL board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 14-225 Functions and features of the LSXL board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Maps one STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signal into one OTU3 optical signal

and converts the signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM
wavelength. It also performs the reverse process and compensates for the
dispersion in the signals accessed on the WDM side.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only TN12LSXL supports OTU3 services.
OTN function

to the ITU-T G.709.
l Maps a maximum of one channel of client-side service signals into
OTU3 signals.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
TN11LSXL/TN12LSXL:
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
TN11LSXL: not supported

TN12LSXL: supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE
The PRBS function of TN12LSXL on the client side is supported only when the
client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.
LPT function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Not supported

661
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
FEC encoding
TN11LSXL/TN12LSXL:
975.
with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
Test frame
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LSXL.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme

NOTE
Only the TN12LSXL supports intra-board 1+1 protection.
TN11LSXL:
Loopback
Client side
Inloop
Not supported
Outloop
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
TN12LSXL:
Loopback
Client side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

662
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
ITU-T G.707
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSXL board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 14-164 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL.
Figure 14-165 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

663
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-164 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL board
WDM side
Client side
RX
TX
O/E
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
OTN
processing
module
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
664
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-165 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL board
Client side
RX
TX
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
E/O
WDM side
E/O
OTN
processing
module
O/E
Client-side OTN
processing module
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSXL board can access the following optical signals:
TN11LSXL:
l
TN12LSXL:
l
In the signal flow of the LSXL board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSXL to the WDM side
of the LSXL, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring.
Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

665
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3
electrical signals.
l
Receive direction
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical
signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical
interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical
signals.
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals.


The module consists of a SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side
OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module.
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

666
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l

Power supply module

14.20.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXL board.

Figure 14-166, Figure 14-167 show the front panel of the LSXL board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

667
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-166 Front panel of the TN11LSXL board
LSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX
RX
OUT
IN
LSXL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

668
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-167 Front panel of the TN12LSXL board
LSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
TX
IN
RX
LSXL
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXL board. Table 14-226 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

669
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-226 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXL board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX
LC
RX
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.20.6 Valid Slots

Four slots house one TN11LSXL board. Three slots house one TN12LSXLboard.
Table 14-227 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXL board.
Table 14-227 Valid slots for the TN11LSXL board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU14
The rear connector of the TN11LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left one of the four slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXL board, the slot number of
the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Table 14-228 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXL board.
Table 14-228 Valid slots for the TN12LSXL board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU63-IU68

670
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU3-IU17
The rear connector of the TN12LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the
of the right one of the three slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN12LSXL board, the slot number of the
TN12LSXL board displayed on the NM is IU3.
The rear connector of the TN15LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot in the
of the middle one of the three slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN15LSXL board, the slot number of the
TN15LSXL board displayed on the NM is IU2.
14.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-229 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXL board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX/RX
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

671
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.20.9 LSXL Loopbacks

Table 14-230 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LSXL boards.
Table 14-230 Loopbacks supported by LSXL boards
Board
Type of
Received
Service
Loopback Type
Description
TN11LS
XL
STM-256
or OC-768
WDM-side inloopterminal loopback
See Figure 14-168.
WDM-side outloopfacility loopback
See Figure 14-169.
TN12LS
XL
STM-256
or OC-768
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-170.
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-171.
WDM-side inloop
OTU3
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 14-172.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-173.
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-174.
WDM-side inloop
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 14-175.
Loopbacks on the TN11LSXL Board

The TN11LSXL board supports only STM-256 and OC-768 services and WDM-side inloop and
WDM-side outloop. It does not support Client-side inloop or Client-side outloop.
l
WDM-side inloop
As shown in Figure 14-168, one STM-256 or OC-768 service received on the client side
is converted into one ODU3 service, which is then mapped into one OTU3 service. The
OTU3 service is looped back to the client side at the OTU3 loopback point.
Figure 14-168 WDM-side inloop on the TN11LSXL board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

672
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

WDM-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-169, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is looped back
to the WDM side directly.
Figure 14-169 WDM-side outloop on the TN11LSXL board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service
Loopbacks on the TN12LSXL Board

The TN12LSXL board supports STM-256, OC-768, and OTU3 services. The Client-side
outloop are similar to the WDM-side inloop.
l
STM-256 or OC-768
Client-side inloop
converted into one STM-256 or OC-768 service, which is then looped back to the WDM
side.
Figure 14-170 Client-side inloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service

As shown in Figure 14-171, one STM-256 or OC-768 service received on the client
side is looped back to the client side directly.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

673
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-171 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
OTU3
ODU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service
WDM-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-172, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is looped
back to the WDM side directly.
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service
OTU3
Client-side inloop
mapped into one OTU3 service, which is then looped back to the WDM side.
Figure 14-173 Client-side inloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

674
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


As shown in Figure 14-174, one OTU3 service received on the client side is looped
back to the client side directly.
Figure 14-174 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LSXL board
OTU3
RX/TX
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service
WDM-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-175, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is looped
back to the WDM side directly.
OTU3
RX/TX
ODU3
OTU3
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked service

For parameters of LSXL, refer to Table 14-231.
Table 14-231 LSXL parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

675
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, OC-768, OTU-3,

STM-256
Default: STM-256

NOTE
Only the TN12LSXL supports the OTU-3
services.
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

status of a board.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


676
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Receive Wavelength
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

follows:
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /

automatically.
affected.
NOTE
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
NOTE


677
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

Disabled.
NOTE
Only TN12LSXL supports this parameter.
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

resides.
NOTE
Only TN12LSXL supports this parameter.

NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
PMD Threshold(ps)
Default: Disabled

Queries the PMD threshold of the board.
14.20.11 Specifications of the LSXL

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

678
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
SX
L
40G Transponder
N/A
N/A
TN
12L
SX
L
40G Transponder
400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-DRZPIN

N/A
N/A
NOTE
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
40G Transponder
NRZ
nm
1530 to 1565
dBm
dBm
dB
8.2
dB
35
ps/nm
40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

679
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
40G Transponder
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1290 to 1570
dBm
-6
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthDQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthODB-PIN
400 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthDRZ-PIN
DQPSK
ODB
DRZ

Operating frequency
range
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.00
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
-5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
NA
8.2
8.2
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5
2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
0.6
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
NA
NA
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
35
ps/nm
500
500
400

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

680
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthDQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthODB-PIN
400 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthDRZ-PIN
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
TN11LSXL
l
Dimensions of front panel: 101.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (4.0 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN12LSXL
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LS
XL

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
103.0
110.0

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
98.0
101.0

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
74
81

84
94
TN12LS
XL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

681
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.21 LSXLR
LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board

The available functional version of the LSXLR board are TN11 and TN12.

Board
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11L
SXLR
TN12L
SXLR

l
Function:
The TN12LSXLR board supports access OTU3e services, whereas the TN11LSXLR
board does not support. For details, see 14.21.3 Functions and Features.
Appearance:
The TN11LSXLR and TN12LSXLR versions use different front panels. For details, see
Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 14.21.10 Specifications of the LSXLR.
The LSXLR boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
14.21.2 Application
The LSXLR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical
regeneration of optical signals.
For the position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-176.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

682
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-176 Position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system

WDM side
WDM side
LSXLR
DMUX
G.694.1
MUX
MUX
G.694.1
LSXLR
DMUX

The LSXLR board is used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and
ESC.
Table 14-234 Functions and features of the LSXLR board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Implements the electrical regeneration of corresponding optical signals and

compensates for the dispersion in the service signals. This board is used at an
electrical REG station in a system.
Regenerati
ng rate

NOTE
Only TN12LSXLR supports OTU3e service.
OTN
function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by complying with
the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specificati
on
Tunable
wavelengt
h function
of:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

683
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
FEC
encoding
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITUT G.975.1.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Alarms
and
performan
ce events
monitorin
g
ALS
function
Not supported
Opticallayer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LSXLR
Electricallayer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Loopback
Not supported
Protocol or
standard
complianc
e
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which

transparently transmitted services
comply

684
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or standards (performance

monitoring) for processing services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LSXLR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
Figure 14-177 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

685
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-177 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board
WDM side
IN
Decoding
module
O/E
Optical
receiving
module
Overhead
module
WDM side
Encoding
module
E/O
OUT
Optical
transmitting
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The LSXLR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals.
The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU3/OTU3e optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN
interface, and performs O/E conversion.
The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals.
During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are
performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames.
After encoding, the signals are sent to an optical transmitting module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module transmits OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l
Optical receiving module

Performs O/E conversion of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

686
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Optical transmitting module

Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3/OTU3e optical
signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The signal processing module

The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module.
Decoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the
performance of WDM-side services.
Encoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals.
Overhead module
Performs overhead processing of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the performance
of WDM-side services.

Power supply module

14.21.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXLR board.

Figure 14-178 and Figure 14-179 show the front panel of the LSXLR board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

687
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-178 Front panel of the TN11LSXLR board
LSXLR
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
LSXLR
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

688
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-179 Front panel of the TN12LSXLR board
LSXLR
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
LSXLR
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXLR board. Table 14-235 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

689
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-235 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXLR board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

14.21.6 Valid Slots

Four slots house one TN11LSXLR board. Two slots house one TN12LSXLR board.
Table 14-236 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board.
Table 14-236 Valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU14
The rear connector of the TN11LSXLR is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the
number of the left one of the four slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXLR board, the slot number of
the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU1.
The TN11LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed
in slots IU1 and IU5, IU9 and IU13.
Table 14-237 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board.
Table 14-237 Valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

690
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17
The rear connector of the TN12LSXLR board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot
in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is
the number of the right one of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12LSXLR board, the slot number of the
TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU2.
l
OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same
wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and
IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38,
IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and
IU64, or IU66 and IU68.
OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same
IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, or IU34 and IU36.
OptiX OSN 6800: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same
wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, or IU14
and IU16.
14.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR

Code for OTUs.

This section describes how the physical interfaces of the board are displayed on the NMS and
the logical ports of the board.

Table 14-238 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXLR board and the port numbers
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Physical Port
IN/OUT

691
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE

For parameters of the LSXLR, refer to Table 14-239.
Table 14-239 LSXLR parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

status of a board.
l Client side: Off

Enable AutoSensing
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of

the board to Enabled or Disabled.
l When it is set to Enabled, the board
supports Line Rate of the received
signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus
no manual setting is required.
l When it is set to Disabled, Line
Rate of the board must be set
manually and the values of the
previous two parameters must be the
same as that of the received signals.
Otherwise, the services are
unavailable.
NOTE
must be set to Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

692
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled

FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Receive
Wavelength
Default: Enabled
Default: FEC

l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

follows:
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780

automatically.
Default: /

affected.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.

693
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
NOTE

wavelength.
NOTE

PMD Threshold
(ps)
Board Mode
Electrical Relay Mode,

Optical Relay Mode

See D.2 Board Mode (WDM
Default: Electrical Relay

Mode
14.21.10 Specifications of the LSXLR

Board
WDM-Side Pluggable
Optical Module
TN11LS
XLR
500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODBPIN
N/A
400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZPIN

TN12LS
XLR
500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN
N/A
500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODBPIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

694
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthDQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthODB-PIN
400 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthDRZ-PIN
DQPSK
ODB
DRZ

Operating frequency
range
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.00
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
-5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
NA
8.2
8.2
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5
2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
0.6
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
NA
NA
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
35
ps/nm
500
500
400
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561

695
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthDQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthODB-PIN
400 ps/nm-C
Band-Tunable
WavelengthDRZ-PIN
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
TN11LSXLR
l
Dimensions of front panel: 101.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (4.0 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN12LSXLR
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 5.5 lb.(2.5 kg)
Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11
LSXL
R

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
87.0
90.0

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
82.0
85.0
TN12
LSXL
R

62
68.2

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
67.0
70.0
14.22 LSXR
LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

696
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The available functional version of the LSXR board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN1L
SXR
14.22.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXR board is used in an electrical REG station in the
system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals.
For the position of the LSXR board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-180.
Figure 14-180 Position of the LSXR board in the WDM system
WDM side
WDM side
LSXR
DMUX
G.694.1
MUX
MUX
G.694.1
LSXR
DMUX

The LSXR is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and
ESC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

697
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-241 Functions and features of the LSXR board

Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement

electrical regeneration of optical signals.
Regenerati
ng rate
OTN
function
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the
ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specificati
on
Tunable
wavelengt
h function
of:
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
FEC
encoding
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITUT G.975.1.
NOTE
Alarms
and
performan
ce events
monitorin
g
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

698
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
ALS
function
Not supported
Opticallayer
ASON
Supported
Electricallayer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Loopback
Not supported
Protocol or
standard
complianc
e

comply

ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSXR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
Figure 14-181 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

699
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-181 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board
WDM side
IN
Decoding
module
O/E
Optical
receiving
module
Overhead
module
WDM side
Encoding
module
E/O
OUT
Optical
transmitting
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The LSXR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals.
The signals at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN
After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM wavelengths that
The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l

Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

700
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The signal processing module

The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module.
Decoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the
performance of WDM-side services.
Encoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
Overhead module
Performs overhead processing of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the performance
of WDM-side services.

Power supply module

14.22.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXR.

Figure 14-182 shows the front panel of the LSXR.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

701
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-182 Front panel of the LSXR
LSXR
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
LSXR
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXR board. Table 14-242 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

702
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-242 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXR board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

14.22.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LSXR board.
Table 14-243 shows the valid slots for the LSXR board.
Table 14-243 Valid slots for LSXR board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same
IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21
and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32,
IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67
and IU68.
OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same
or IU35 and IU36.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

703
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 6800: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength
must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and
IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.
14.22.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-244 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXR board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
NOTE

For parameters of the LSXR, refer to Table 14-245.
Table 14-245 LSXR parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

704
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: On
Enable AutoSensing
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

status of a board.
Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of
the board to Enabled or Disabled.
supports FEC Type and Line Rate of
the received signals in auto-sensing
mode, and thus no manual setting is
required.
l When it is set to Disabled, FEC
Type and Line Rate of the board must
be set manually and the values of the
unavailable.
NOTE
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: Enabled
Default: FEC

NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Enable
Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type

705
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
NOTE

wavelength.
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

Disabled.
NOTE
Line Rate
Standard Mode, Speedup

Mode
The Line Rate parameter provides an

option to set the OTN line rate.
Default: Standard Mode
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Enable
Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled
See D.24 Line Rate for more information.

Board Mode
Electrical Relay Mode,

Optical Relay Mode
Default: Electrical Relay
Mode

14.22.10 Specifications of the LSXR

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

706
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical

Module
TN11L
SXR

wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN
N/A

1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN
NRZ
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

707
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelengt
h-NRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelengt
h-NRZAPD

Wavelengt
h-ODBAPD
800 ps/nm-C
BandTunable
WavelengthDRZ-PIN
NRZ
NRZ
ODB
DRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05

708
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelengt
h-NRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelengt
h-NRZAPD

Wavelengt
h-ODBAPD
800 ps/nm-C
BandTunable
WavelengthDRZ-PIN
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
1200
1200
4800
800
APD
APD
PIN

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

709
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1LS
XR

34.8
37.8
35.0
38.0

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
36.8
39.8

Wavelength-ODB-APD
39.8
42.8

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
14.23 LWX2
LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

Only one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is, TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LWX
2
14.23.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWX2 board implements the conversion between two
channels of optical signals at the rate in the range of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals
that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

710
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-183.
Figure 14-183 Position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
M
U
X
1
16Mbit/s2.7Gbit/s
LWX2
D
M
U
X
2
Client side
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
WDM side
16Mbit/s2.7Gbit/s
LWX2
2
WDM side
Client side

The LWX2 is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and provide ESC.
Table 14-248 Functions and features of the LWX2 board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Receives two channels of optical signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/
s and converts them into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with
the ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelengths compliant with the
Client-side
service type

WDM
specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

711
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. In the case of configuring

four-wavelength tunable optical module, configure every four continuous
wavelengths (first group started with the 1st wavelength) in the C band with
100 GHz channel spacing as one group. In this way, the optical signal output
on the WDM side are tunable within the four wavelengths of every group.
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Not supported
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
The optical modules on the WDM side have the automatic laser shutdown
(ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical
transmitter module on the WDM side is automatically shut down if no optical
signal is received on the client side.
Test frame
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

712
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

713
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LWX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
Figure 14-184 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board.
Figure 14-184 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board
Client side
RX1
WDM side
O/E
OUT1
E/O
RX2
OUT2
TX1
E/O
TX2
Client-side
optical
module
IN1
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
IN2
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWX2 board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LWX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWX2 to the WDM side
of the LWX2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client
After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the service
processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

714
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends
the signals to the WDM-side optical module.
After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two channels
of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the OUT1-OTU2
optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the
performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs two channels
of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l


WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals.
Any optical signals.

Regenerates Any signals in two directions.
Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

715
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.23.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWX2 board.

Figure 14-185 shows the front panel of the LWX2 board.
Figure 14-185 Front panel of the LWX2 board
LWX2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LWX2
NOTE
The WDM-side optical modules must be inserted in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in an
ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

716
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 8 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX2 board. Table 14-249 lists the type
Table 14-249 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWX2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.23.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LWX2 board.
Table 14-250 shows the valid slots for the LWX2 board.
Table 14-250 Valid slots for the LWX2 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

717
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.23.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2

The characteristic code for the LWX2 board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
Table 14-251 Characteristic code for the LWX2 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

optical signal

WDM side.
Last four digits

optical signal

the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 board is 92109220.
l
"9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is
192.10 THz.
"9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 192.20 THz.


Table 14-252 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWX2 board and the port numbers
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2

718
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE

For parameters of LWX2, refer to Table 14-253
Table 14-253 LWX2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16

Default: Any
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)
16 - 2500
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 2500
Default:
l WDM side: On

board.
information.
status of a board.
l Client side: Off
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

719
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled

Default:
l WDM side: Disabled
l Client side: Enabled
Current Bearer Rate

(Mbit/s)
parameter provides an option to query the

rate of services accessed at the optical
interface on the client side for the OTUs
at any rate.
See D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s)
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

wavelength.
resides.

720
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.23.10 Specifications of the LWX2

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
WX
2
N/A
N/A
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km

Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NOTE

NOTE
The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16
signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed
below completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

721
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-254 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
MLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
0.5
15
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
NA
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant

Receiver
type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
PIN
PIN

PIN
APD
722
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-18
-18
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may
be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1,
FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals.
The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200,
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

723
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

724
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

725
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C BandFixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-PINa
12800 ps/
nm-C BandFixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-APDa
6500 ps/nmC BandFixed

Wavelength
-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength
-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength
-NRZ-APD
(Four
ChannelsTunable)
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
-2
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
8.2
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant
PIN
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
nm
wavelength range
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
-18
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
dBm
APD
1300 to 1575
-28
-18

-26
-28
726
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C BandFixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-PINa
12800 ps/
nm-C BandFixed
Wavelength
-NRZ-APDa

Wavelength
-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength
-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength
-NRZ-APD
(Four
ChannelsTunable)
Minimum
receiver overload
dBm
-9
-10
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
2.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
APD

727
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
Consumption at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum Power
F) (W)
LWX2
38.5
42.4
14.24 LWXD
LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

Only one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is, TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LWX
D

728
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.24.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXD board implements the conversion between the
optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with
ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
For the position of the LWXD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-186.
Figure 14-186 Position of the LWXD board in the WDM system
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
G.694.1/
LWXD G.694.2
Client side
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
G.694.1/
LWXD
G.694.2
WDM side
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
Client side

The LWXD board is used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC.
Table 14-259 Functions and features of the LWXD board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Receives a signal at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and converts the
signals into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T
G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.
side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

729
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Not supported
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Test frame
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported

730
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protection
scheme

eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

731
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

732
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LWXD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
Figure 14-187 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board.
Figure 14-187 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board
WDM side
Client side
RX
O/E
TX
E/O
Splitter
E/O
IN1
IN2
O/E
Client-side
optical
module
OUT1
OUT2
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LWXD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXD to the WDM side
of the LWXD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The
module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance
monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side
optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

733
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out the ITU-T
G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at
CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1
optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels
signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
The module performs operations such as received signal selection, the regeneration of Any
signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs
one channel of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then
outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals.


Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.

Power supply module

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

734
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.24.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXD board.

Figure 14-188 shows the front panel of the LWXD board.
Figure 14-188 Front panel of the LWXD board
LWXD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LWXD
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

735
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWXD board. Table 14-260 lists the
Table 14-260 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXD board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX
LC
RX
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.24.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LWXD board.
Table 14-261 shows the valid slots for the LWXD board.
Table 14-261 Valid slots for the LWXD board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
14.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD

The characteristic code for the LWXD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

736
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-262 Characteristic code for the LWXD board

Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

optical signal

WDM side.
Last four digits

optical signal

the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWXD is 92109210.

l


Table 14-263 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWXD board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX/RX
NOTE

For parameters of LWXD, refer to Table 14-264
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

737
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-264 LWXD parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON Express,
GE, OC-3, OC-12,
OC-48, STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16

information.
type of the service accessed at the
optical interface on the client side.
Default: Any
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)
16 - 2500
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 2500
Default:
l WDM side: On
sets the rate of the accessed service at

the optical interface on the client side of
a board.
information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default:
l WDM side: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.

738
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Current Bearer Rate

(Mbit/s)
parameter provides an option to query

the rate of services accessed at the
optical interface on the client side for the
OTUs at any rate.
information.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None

wavelength.
board resides.
information.
14.24.10 Specifications of the LWXD

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

739
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
WX
D
N/A
N/A
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km

Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NOTE

NOTE
The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed
below completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

740
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
MLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
0.5
15
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
NA
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant

Receiver
type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
PIN
PIN

PIN
APD
741
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-18
-18
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may
be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1,
FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals.
The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200,
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

742
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

743
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

744
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPINa
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPDa
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-4
-4
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-8
-8
-5
-5
-5
-5
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant
PIN
APD
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
APD
1300 to
1575
-28
-18
-26

-28
-28
745
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPINa
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPDa
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
(Four
Channels
-Tunable)
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-10
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
0.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

746
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1600 ps/nm-CWDM

Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
(W)
Maximum Power
F) (W)
LWXD
35.8
39.4
14.25 LWXS
LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

The available functional versions of the LWXS board are TN11 and TN12.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

747
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
LWX
S
TN12
LWX
S

l
Functions:
The TN11LWXS board does not support access ETR/CLO services, whereas the
TN12LWXS board supports, see 14.25.11 Specifications of the LWXS.
The LWXS boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
14.25.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXS board implements the conversion between the
optical signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T
Recommendations.
For the position of the LWXS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-189.
Figure 14-189 Position of the LWXS board rate in the WDM system
MUX
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
DMUX
LWXS G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
LWXS
G.694.2
DMUX
Client side
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
Client side

The LWXS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

748
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-270 Functions and features of the LWXS board

Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Receives a channel of signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and converts
the signals into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T
G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.
Client-side
service type

ETR: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s
CLO: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s
NOTE
Only TN12LWXS supports ETR and CLO services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Not supported
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring

749
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
ALS
function
Test frame
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

750
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex)
Protocol
NOTE
Only TN12LWXS supports IBM GDPS( Geographically
Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

751
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services

The LWXS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
Figure 14-190 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board.
Figure 14-190 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board
Client side
WDM side
RX
O/E
TX
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

752
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In the signal flow of the LWXS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXS to the WDM side
of the LWXS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The
module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance
monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the
WDM-side optical module.
After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out Any optical
signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of Any optical signals at DWDM
conversion.
The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the
performance monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one
channel of Any electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then
outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals.


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

753
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Monitors the performance of SDH/SONET and GE signals in two directions.

l

Power supply module

14.25.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXS board.

Figure 14-191 shows the front panel of the LWXS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

754
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-191 Front panel of the LWXS board
LWXS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
OUT
IN
LWXS
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWXS board. Table 14-271 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

755
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-271 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXS board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX
LC
RX
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.25.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LWXS board.
Table 14-272 shows the valid slots for the TN11LWXS board.
Table 14-272 Valid slots for theTN11LWXS board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 14-273 shows the valid slots for the TN12LWXS board.
Table 14-273 Valid slots for theTN12LWXS board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

756
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.25.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-274 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWXS board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX/RX
NOTE
14.25.9 LWXS loopback

Table 14-275 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LWXS boards.
Table 14-275 Loopbacks supported by LWXS boards
Board
Loopback
Type
Description
TN11L
WXS/
TN12L
WXS
Client-side
outloop
See Figure 14-192.
WDM-side
inloop
Client-side
inloop
See Figure 14-193.
WDM-side
outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

757
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The implementation of client-side outloop supported by LWXS boards is similar to the

implementation of WDM-side inloop. The implementation of WDM-side outloop supported by
LWXS boards is similar to the implementation of client-side inloop.
l

As shown in Figure 14-192, one service received on the client side is loopbacked to the
client side through the Any service processing module.
Figure 14-192 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN11LWXS/
TN12LWXS board
ANY
RX/TX
ODU2
Client-side
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

As shown in Figure 14-193, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is regenerated
by the Any service processing module and then loopbacked to the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

758
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-193 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN11LWXS/

TN12LWXS board
ANY
RX/TX
ODU2
OTU2
Client-side
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

For parameters of the LWXS, refer to Table 14-276
Table 14-276 LWXS parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


759
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, ETR, CLO

NOTE
Only TN12LWXS supports ETR, and CLO
services.
Default: Any
Client Service
Bearer Rate (Mbit/
s)
16 - 2500
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 2500
Default:
l WDM side: On

board.
information.
status of a board.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default:
l WDM side:
Disabled
Current Bearer
Rate(Mbit/s)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

rate of services accessed at the optical
interface on the client side for the OTUs at
any rate.

760
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OFC Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
The open fiber control (OFC) function

controls the transmit power of the laser
when the fiber is disconnected. When the
OFC function is enabled, the laser sends
short pulse, rather than remains in the
enabled state, to check whether the fiber is
connected. In this way, the output optical
power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye
injury.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled
after the OFC function is enabled.
l The OFC function cannot coexist with
protection.
l Only the TN12LWXS supports this
parameter.
l This parameter is valid only when the
Service Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or
ISC 2G.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
C, CWDM
Default: C

band type of the current working
wavelength.

761
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG

resides.
Default: None
14.25.11 Specifications of the LWXS

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
11L
WX
S
N/A
N/A
TN
12L
WX
S
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km

Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

762
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE

NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 can be used to access ETR,
CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.
The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from
these specifications when the accessed signals are ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications below
apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed
signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
MLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
0.5
15
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2

763
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
NA
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-18
-18
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual
values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are ETR, CLO, FC100,
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply
to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE
signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

764
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

765
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

766
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code
format
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZPINa
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPDa
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
(Four
ChannelsTunable)
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
-2
-2
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
Eye pattern
mask
G.959.1-compliant
PIN
APD
APD
APD

Receiver type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
PIN
APD

767
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZPINa
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPDa
6500 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Wavelen
gth-NRZPIN
3200 ps/
nm-C
BandFixed
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
12800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gth-NRZAPD
6400 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZAPD
(Four
ChannelsTunable)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
1300 to
1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-28
-18
-26
-28
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-10
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
2.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm

768
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
(W)
Maximum Power
F) (W)
LWXS
33.9
37.3
14.26 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion
board.

The available functional versions of the TMX board are TN11 and TN12.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

769
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
TMX
TN12
TMX

l
Function:
TN11TMX supports AFEC, and the TN12TMX supports AFEC-2. Boards that use
different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 14.26.3
Specification:
The TN11TMX board supports fixed optical module and tunable optical module on the
WDM side. The TN12TMX board supports fixed optical module, tunable optical
module, XFP module and gray optical module on the WDM side. For specifications of
each version, see 14.26.11 Specifications of the TMX.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11TMX
TN12TMX
The TN12TMX can be created as TN11TMX on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TMX functions as the
TN11TMX.
NOTE
does not apply.
TN12TMX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
None

770
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.26.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the TMX board multiplexes four channels of STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1 service signals into one channel of OTU2 signals, and implements conversion
between these service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the TMX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-194.
Figure 14-194 Position of the TMX board in the WDM system
1
MUX
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
TMX
G.694.1
G.694.1
DMUX
4
Client side
DMUX
TMX
MUX
WDM side
4
WDM side
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
Client side

The TMX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 14-282 Functions and features of the TMX board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 service optical

signals into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converts them to a
DWDM standard wavelength that complies with ITU-T
Recommendation G.694.1 or a standard CWDM wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.2. It can also perform the reverse process.
Client-side
service type
OTN function

to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports 4ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2.
l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

771
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function

ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
LPT function
Not supported
FEC encoding
TN11TMX:
G.975.
with ITU-T G.975.1.
TN12TMX:
G.975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
Test frame
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

772
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
XFP/eSFP
TN11TMX/TN12TMX:
client side.
TN12TMX:
Wavelength).
Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
ITU-T G.707
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The TMX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

773
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-195 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board.
Figure 14-195 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
Client-side OTN
processing module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TMX board can access the following optical signals:
l
OTU1 (without FEC) optical signals
In the signal flow of the TMX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX to the WDM side
of the TMX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client
After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. OTU1 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for
performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to the SDH/SONET encapsulation
and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the
OTN framing and FEC/AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module
outputs one channel of OTU2 electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

774
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Receive direction
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals.


The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side
OTN processing module, and OTN processing module.
Encapsulates multiples channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the
OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

775
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

14.26.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TMX board.

Figure 14-196 shows the front panel of the TMX board.
Figure 14-196 Front panel of the TMX board
TMX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT
IN
TMX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

776
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMX board. Table 14-283 lists the type
Table 14-283 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TMX board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.26.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TMX board.
Table 14-284 shows the valid slots for the TN11TMX board.
Table 14-284 Valid slots for TN11TMX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

777
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 14-285 shows the valid slots for the TN12TMX board.
Table 14-285 Valid slots for TN12TMX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
14.26.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX

Code for OTUs.


Table 14-286 Mapping between the physical ports on the TMX board and the port numbers
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
4
778
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Physical Port
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
14.26.9 TMX Loopbacks

Table 14-287 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TMX boards.
Table 14-287 Loopbacks supported by TMX boards
Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN11TMX/
TN12TMX
Client-side outloop
See Figure 14-197.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 14-198.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 14-199.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 14-200.
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-197, four STM-16/OC-48 services are received on the client side.
One STM-16/OC-48 service is loopbacked to the client side and the other three services
are passed through.
Figure 14-197 Client-side outloop on the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board
RX1/TX1
STM-16/OC-48
ODU1
RX2/TX2
STM-16/OC-48
ODU1
RX3/TX3
STM-16/OC-48
ODU1
RX4/TX4
STM-16/OC-48
ODU1
ODU2
Client-side
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

779
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

deconverged into four ODU1 services. The four ODU1 services are converted into four
STM-16/OC-48 services. One of the four STM-16/OC-48 services is loopbacked to the
WDM side and the other three STM-16/OC-48 services are passed through.
Figure 14-198 Client-side inloop on the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board
RX1/TX1
STM-16/OC-48
ODU1
RX2/TX2
STM-16/OC-48
ODU1
RX3/TX3
STM-16/OC-48
RX4/TX4
STM-16/OC-48
ODU2
IN1/OUT1
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
NOTE
When OTU1 services are received on the client side of the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board, OTU1 services
must be converted into ODU1 services before being loopbacked.
WDM-side inloop
As shown in Figure 14-199, four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services received on the client
side are mapped into four ODU1 services and then converged into one ODU2 service. The
ODU2 service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Figure 14-199 WDM-side inloop on the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board
RX1/TX1
STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1
ODU1
RX2/TX2
STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4
STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

780
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-200 WDM-side outloop on the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board

RX1/TX1
STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1
ODU1
RX2/TX2
STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4
STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1
ODU1
ODU2
IN/OUT
OTU2
WDM-side
Client-side
Loopbacked services

For parameters of the TMX, refer to Table 14-288.
Table 14-288 TMX parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, OTU-1, OC-48,

STM-16
Default: OTU-1
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

781
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled

FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC

Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
NOTE

wavelength.
NOTE

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

782
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG

board resides.
Default: None
NOTE
Only TN11TMX supports this parameter.

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

to Disabled.
NOTE
Only TN12TMX supports this parameter.
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

NOTE
Only TN12TMX supports the parameter.
14.26.11 Specifications of the TMX

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

783
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical Module
TN
11T
MX
N/A
I-16
N/A
L-16.2
800 ps/nm-C Band

(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km

(eSFP DWDM)-120
km
S-16.1
L-16.1

TN
12T
MX
N/A
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km


(eSFP DWDM)-120
km
800 ps/nm-C Band

(Odd & Even
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
NOTE
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

784
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30

785
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
Eye pattern
mask
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
1471 to 1611
dBm
dBm
dB
8.2

786
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

CWDM)-80 km
nm
6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width
nm
1.0
Minimum side mode suppression

ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1270 to 1620
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
NOTE
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

787
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

km

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask


Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN
NRZ
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

788
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

PIN
789
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code
format
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavele
ngthNRZAPD
4800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthODBAPD
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-DRZPIN
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
NRZ
NRZ
ODB
DRZ
NRZ

Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
10
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/
nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
APD
PIN
PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
APD

790
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavele
ngthNRZAPD
4800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthODBAPD
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-DRZPIN
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
Receiver
sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
-16
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

791
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz

width
nm
0.3

792
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2

793
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11TMX: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)
TN12TMX: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

794
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1TM
X

40.3
44.3
42.1
46.4

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
44.5
51.2

Wavelength-ODB-APD
48.4
55.7

31.4
36.1

32.4
37.1

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
41
45.5

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
39
43.7

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
TN1
2TM
X
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

795
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
15
Tributary Unit and Line Unit
About This Chapter

15.1 ND2
ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board
15.2 NQ2
NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
15.3 NS2
NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board
15.4 NS3
NS3: 40G line service processing board
15.5 TBE
TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board
15.6 TDG
TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board
15.7 TDX
TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
15.8 THA
THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board
15.9 TOA
TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board
15.10 TOG
TOG: 8 x GE service processing board
15.11 TOM
TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
15.12 TQM
TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
15.13 TQS
TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

796
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.14 TQX
TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
15.15 TSXL
TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

797
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.1 ND2
ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board

The available functional versions of the ND2 board are TN11, TN12, TN52, TN53.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
ND2
TN12
ND2
TN52
ND2
TN53
ND2

Function:
l
The TN11ND2 supports AFEC. The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 supports AFEC-2.

The TN12ND2/TN53ND2 board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM side,
the TN53ND2 board supports tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side.
The TN11ND2 or TN52ND2 board does not support that function.
Only the TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2 supports IEEE 1588v2 function. The
TN11ND2 board does not support that function.
The TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2 board regenerates OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.

The TN11ND2 board cannot regenerate OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
The TN11ND2 and TN12ND2 support the cross-connections at the ODU1 and ODU2 level.
The TN52ND2 supports the cross-connections at the ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2 level. The
TN53ND2 supports the cross-connections at the ODU0, ODU1, ODUFlex and ODU2 level.
For details, see 15.1.3 Functions and Features.

Specification:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

798
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see
15.1.12 Specifications of the ND2.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11ND2
TN12ND2
The TN12ND2 can be created as TN11ND2 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12ND2 functions as the
TN11ND2.
NOTE
When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code
pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and
transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not
apply.
TN12ND2
TN53ND2

TN12ND2.
NOTE
The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on
the WDM side and it cannot substitute for the TN12ND2 in relay mode.
TN52ND2
TN53ND2

TN52ND2.
TN53ND2
None
15.1.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the ND2 board implements conversion between 16 crossconnect ODU0 signals or eight cross-connect ODU1 signals or four cross-connect ODUflex
signals or two cross-connect ODU2 signals and two ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
OTU2 signals. The ND2 board also converts between two cross-connect ODU2e signals and
two ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid
transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODUflex service and the ODU2/ODU2e
service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

799
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application scenario 1 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2:

conversion between eight channels of ODU1 signals and two channels of OTU2
signals
Figure 15-1 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1
1
TOM
G.694.1
4
Client
MUX
DMUX
ND2
DMUX
1
TOM
G.694.1
ND2
side
Client side
MUX
1
WDM side
TOM
WDM side
TOM
4
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board
must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 2 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2:

conversion between two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and two channels of
OTU2/OTU2e signals
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
TDX
ND2
ND2
DMUX
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
DMUX
WDM side
TDX
MUX
WDM side

Client side
800
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In the application scenario with the TN11TDX board, the ND2 board receives eight channels of ODU1 signals.
In the application scenario with the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53ND2 board, the ND2 board receives two
channels of ODU2 signals.
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be
set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 3 of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: Implements the

regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
WDM side
DMUX
IN1
G.694.1
MUX
WDM side
OUT2
OUT1
ND2 G.694.1
IN2
MUX
DMUX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board
must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.
The input and output wavelengths can be different.
Only the TN12ND2 board equipped with an 800 ps/nm DRZ tunable optical module supports regeneration
of 11.3 Gbit/s OTU2e.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

801
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application scenario 4 of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between 16

channels of ODU0 signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN
8800)
1
1
TOM
G.694.1
8
MUX
DMUX
ND2
DMUX
1
TOM
G.694.1
ND2
Client side
Client side
MUX
1
WDM side
TOM
WDM side
TOM
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to
Line Mode.
The TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN
8800.
Application scenario 5 of the TN53ND2: conversion between four channels of

ODUflex signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
G.694.1
1
MUX
Client side
DMUX
ND2
TQX
4
G.694.1
1
ND2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
1
TQX
Client side
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53ND2 board must be set to
Line Mode.
In this application scenario, only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

802
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The ND2 board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-1 and Table 15-2.
NOTE
ODU1 and ODU2 is only supported by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 in OptiX OSN 6800.
The relay mode is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2. The relay mode can be set to either
Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. In the case of an optical-layer ASON system, however, the
regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Table 15-1 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Line Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
Maps 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or four

channels of ODUflex signals or double channels of ODU2 signals sent from
the cross-connect board into two channels of OTU2 signals, or maps double
channels of ODU2e signals sent from the cross-connect board into two
channels of OTU2e signals. The board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals
into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse
process is similar.
Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signal, ODU1 signal , ODUflex
signals and the ODU2/ODU2e signal.
Crossconnect
capabilities
l TN11ND2/TN12ND2: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of

ODU1 signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the
ND2 and the cross-connect board.
l TN52ND2: Supports the cross-connection of 16 channels of ODU0 signals
or eight channels of ODU1 signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e
signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board.
l TN53ND2: Supports the cross-connection of 16 channels of ODU0 signals
or eight channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODUflex signals
or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the ND2 and the
cross-connect board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

803
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
OTN
function
l Supports 16 x ODU0 multiplexing into two OTU2.

l Supports 4 x ODUflex multiplexing into two OTU2.
l Supports 4 x ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2.
l Supports ODU2 mapping into OTU2.
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2.
l TN52ND2 supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
l TN53ND2 supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
l TN53ND2 supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function

NOTE
If the TN53ND2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled
for the TN53ND2 board and the connected line board when the following condition is
met:
ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured on the TN53ND2 board,
or the TN53ND2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured
for it.
LPT function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
TN11ND2:
ITU-T G.975.1.
TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2:
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

804
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Alarm and
performance
event
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 supports two channels of IEEE 1588v2

clock signals.
Physical
clock
The TN12ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU1 signals are crossconnected from the backplane.
The TN52ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals
are cross-connected from the backplane.
The TN53ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1,
ODUflex signals are cross-connected from the backplane.
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Supported by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2
XFP
TN12ND2/TN53ND2:
Wavelength).
TN53ND2:
Wavelength).
Protection
scheme
l Supports ODUk SNCP.

l Supports ODUk SPRing protection.
l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Client side
Not supported
Channel Loopback
Supported

805
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Interface (ASI)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

806
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1
Table 15-2 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Relay Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function

Regeneratin
g rate

OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3Gbit/s
NOTE
The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s.
OTN
function

the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

807
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2:
NOTE
Alarm and
performance
event
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
Physical
clock
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
XFP
TN12ND2/TN53ND2:

Wavelength).
TN53ND2:
Wavelength).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

808
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Loopback
Not supported
Protocol or
standard
compliance

services comply
processing services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The ND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, 1588
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 15-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ND2.
Figure 15-7 and Figure 15-8 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2.
Figure 15-7, Figure 15-9 and Figure 15-10 show the functional modules and signal flow of the
TN52ND2.
Figure 15-7, Figure 15-9, Figure 15-10, Figure 15-11 show the functional modules and signal
flow of the TN53ND2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

809
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ND2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e
WDM side
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OTN
processing
module
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
IN1
IN2
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
SCC

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
810
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 (Line
Mode)(OptiX OSN 6800)
8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e

WDM side
E/O
OUT2
OTN
processing
module
1588
OUT1
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
IN1
IN2
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
SCC

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
811
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2 (Relay Mode)(OptiX OSN
6800)
WDM
side
WDM
side
IN1
O/E
OUT2
E/O
OTN
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
OUT1
O/E
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
812
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 (Line Mode)
(OptiX OSN 8800)
16 X ODU0/ 8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e
Backplane ( service corss-connection)
WDM side
E/O
OUT2
OTN
processing
module
1588
OUT1
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
IN1
IN2
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplne
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
SCC
Backplane
( controlled by SCC )

813
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 (Relay Mode)
(OptiX OSN 8800/6800)
WDM
side
WDM
side
IN1
O/E
OUT2
E/O
OTN
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
OUT1
O/E
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
814
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-11 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53ND2 (Line Mode)(OptiX
OSN 8800)
16 X ODU0/ 8 X
ODU1/4XODUFlex/ 2 X ODU2(e)

WDM side
E/O
OUT2
OTN
processing
module
1588
OUT1
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
IN1
IN2
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplne
Required
voltage
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow (Line Mode)

The signal processing module of the ND2 board can access the following optical signals:
l
ODU0 electrical signals
ODUflex electrical signals
ODU2e electrical signals
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the ND2 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the ND2 to the WDM side
of the ND2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The OTN processing module receives 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals or eight
channels of ODU1 electrical signals or four ODUflex electrical signals or double channels
of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane.
The module performs operations such as OTN framing and encoding of FEC/AFEC. After
processing, the module outputs two channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

815
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical
interfaces. After receiving the signals, the module performs O/E conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC/AFEC. In the
final step, the module sends out 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals or eight channels
of ODU1 electrical signals or four ODUflex electrical signals or double channels of ODU2
electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board processes clock signals in two directions.

l
Signal Flow (Relay Mode)

The ND2 board regenerates two channels of optical signals. The signals at the receive and
transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN2
optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion.
The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing, and signal encoding.
After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that
The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l


The OTN processing module frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/
OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1588 module
816
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the
IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from
a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to
the STG board.
NOTE
The IEEE 1588v2 function is not supported if the working mode of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/
TN53ND2 board is Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode.

Power supply module

15.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ND2 board.

Figure 15-12 shows the front panel of the ND2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

817
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-12 Front panel of the ND2 board
ND2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
ND2
NOTE
You must insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in ascending
order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

818
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ND2 board. Table 15-3 lists the type and
Table 15-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ND2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

15.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one ND2 board.
Table 15-4 shows the valid slots for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board.
Table 15-4 Valid slots for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-5 shows the valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board.
Table 15-5 Valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

819
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2

Code of a Line Unit.


Table 15-6 Mapping between the physical ports on the ND2 board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP
is a logical port of the board.
The ND2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and
compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the
Configuration Guide.
l
Figure 15-13 and Figure 15-14 show the port diagrams for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/
TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board in compatible mode. Table 15-7 lists the port descriptions.
Figure 15-15 shows the port diagram for the TN53ND2 board in standard mode. Table
15-8 lists the port descriptions.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

820
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
For the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are only supported
when D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) is set to Line Mode.
For the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: The OptiX OSN 6800 only supports signal grooming at the ODU1 and ODU2
levels from the backplane.
The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection
granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see
21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.
NOTE
When the ND2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points:
l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0
channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have
been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services.
l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot
be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services,
the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.
Figure 15-13 Port diagram for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (compatible mode)
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Backplane
16 x ODU0
2 x ODU2/ODU2e
8 x ODU1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
51
ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
71
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
51
165
(ODU0LP5/ODU0LP5)-1
165
(ODU0LP5/ODU0LP5)-2
52
72
168
(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1
168
(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
2
(IN2/OUT2)-1
52
Crossconnect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexin
g module
ODU2 mapping path

821
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Service
processing
module
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to

be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0
signals are required, users only need to configure
cross-connections from other boards to the
ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The
board's internal structure enables transmission of the
multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do
not need to configure a cross-connection for
transmitting the multiplexed signal.
ODU0
mapping
path

NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Figure 15-14 Port diagram for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board (compatible mode)
Other tributary/line/PID board
Backplane
2 x ODU2/ODU2e
8 x ODU1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
ODU2
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
ODU2
72
(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
2
(IN2/OUT2)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
52
(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1
52
(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing module
ODU2 mapping path

822
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Service processing
module
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need

to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU1
signals are required, users only need to configure a
cross-connection from another board to the
Cross-connection that
must be configured on
the NMS to receive
ODUk signals from
other boards
Table 15-7 Descriptions of the ports on the ND2 board (compatible mode)
Port Name
Description
Automatic CrossConnection
ODU0LP1-ODU0LP8
Internal logical ports of the board.

Each of the ports provides optical
channels 1 and 2.
Automatic crossconnections are established

between these ports and the
ODU1LP ports.
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP2
Internal logical ports. Each of the port

provides optical channels 1, 2, 3, and
4.

ODU2LP ports.
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP2

channel 1.

IN/OUT ports.
1(IN1/OUT1)
WDM-side optical ports.
2(IN2/OUT2)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

823
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-15 TN53ND2 board model (standard Mode)

Baclplane
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
ODUflex:1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODUflex:2
4XODUflex
ODUflex:1
ODUflex:2
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1
2 xODU2/
2xODU 2e
ODU2:1
OCH :1
ODU2:1
OCH :1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:1
8xODU1
ODU 2: 1
OCH :1
ODU 2: 1
OCH :1
ODU1:4
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
1(N1/OUT1)
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
2(N2/OUT2)
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
ODU 0:1
ODU 0:2
16 xODU0
ODU 0:1
ODU 0:2
ODU0:1
ODU 1:1
ODU 2:1
OCH :1
ODU 1:4
ODU 1:1
ODU 2:1
OCH :1
ODU1:4
ODU 0:2
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)
ODU0:1
16 xODU0
ODU0: 8
ODU0:1
ODU2:1
OCH :1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODU0: 8
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
ODUflex mapping path
ODU0 mapping
path (ODU0
>ODU1
>ODU2)

ODU0 mapping
path (ODU0
>ODU2)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

824
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2,
or ODUflex and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2.
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or
ODU2 and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2.
Table 15-8 Descriptions of the ports on the TN53ND2 board (standard Mode)
Port Name
Description
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:
(1-2)
Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the

backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:
(1-2)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)

backplane (ODU0->ODU2)

backplane
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1

backplane
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)
Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from the

backplane
1(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)
1(IN1/OUT1)
WDM-side optical ports
2(IN2/OUT2)

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the
required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM
side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site.
l
The
side.
cross-connection is used to locally add services to or drop services from the WDM
The
cross-connection is used to locally pass through services on the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

825
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in
compatible mode on the WDM side.
The ND2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible
modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide.
In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible
mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in
standard mode.
ODU0 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-16, Figure 15-17, and Figure 15-18 show the created ODU0 cross-connections.
Figure 15-16 TN52ND2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level)
Client side
Other board a
1
WDM side
ND2
(compatible mode)
2
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
Other board c
(standard mode)
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
Other board a
TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

826
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Other board b
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/
TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Other board c
TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

827
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-17 TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
2
compatible
mode
ND2
standard
mode
WDM side
Other
board b
(compatible
mode)
Other
board c
(standard
mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
Other
board d
(standard
mode)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

828
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign
consecutive.
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random.
Other board a
Other board b
Other board c
Other board d
TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

829
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-18 TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2)

Client side
Other
board a
1
WDM side
ND2
(standard mode)
WDM side
Other
board b
(standard
mode)
Other
board c
(standard
mode)
Other
board d
(compatible
mode)
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode is Assign consecutive.
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is
Assign random.
Other board a
Other board b
Other board c
Other board d
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/
TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

830
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-19 and Figure 15-20 show the created ODU1 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

831
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-19 TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
ND2
(compatible mode)
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM

side of the ND2
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM
side of the ND2
Other board a
TN11ND2/TN12ND2:
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS
TN52ND2:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

832
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS/
TN54THA/TN54TOA
Other board b
TN11ND2/TN12ND2:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/
TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode)
TN52ND2:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/
TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/
Other board c
TN11ND2/TN12ND2:
TN52ND2:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

833
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
Other board a
WDM side
ND2
compatible mode
standard mode
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board a
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS/TN54THA/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

834
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN54TOA
Other board b
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/
TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/
TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Other board c
Figure 15-21 TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board cross-connections (ODU2 level)
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
ND2
(compatible mode)
WDM side
2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)

side of the ND2
side of the ND2
Other board a
TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/
TN53TQX
Other board b
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

835
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
Other board a
WDM side
ND2
compatible mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1
2
standard mode
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)

side of the ND2
side of the ND2
Other board a
TN53TQX
Other board b
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/
TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/
Other board c
ODUflex Cross-Connections
Figure 15-23 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

836
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-23 TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODUflex level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
ND2
WDM side
Other
boardb
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of
the ND2 board
The WDM side of the ND2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random.
Other board a
TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN54THA/TN54TOA
Other board b
TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2
Cross-Connection Example
Figure 15-24 shows an example of service cross-connections on the ND2 board.
l
The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals.
The same board can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODUflex signals.
Different IN/OUT ports can work in different service modes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

837
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-24 Example of service cross-connections on the ND2 board

IN1/OUT1
ODU0
TOM
ODU0
ND2
TOM
ODU1
ND2
NS2 ODUflex
TDX/ ODU2
ND2
IN2/OUT2
15.1.10 ND2 loopbacks

Table 15-9 lists the types of loopbacks supported by ND2 boards.
Table 15-9 Loopbacks supported by ND2 boards
Cros
sCon
nect
Leve
l
Board
Loopback
Type
Description
ODU
0
(avail
able
only
for
Opti
X
OSN
8800)
TN52ND2
Channel inloop
For channel inloops at ODU0 loopback

points, see Figure 15-25.
For channel inloops at ODU1 loopback
Channel
outloop
For channel outloops at ODU0 loopback

For channel outloops at ODU1 loopback
TN53ND2
WDM-side
inloop
See Figure 15-31.
WDM-side
outloop
See Figure 15-32.
Channel inloop
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1>ODU2

>OTU2, See Figure 15-25.
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2>OTU2,
See Figure 15-26.
Channel
outloop
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1>ODU2

>OTU2, See Figure 15-29.
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2>OTU2,
See Figure 15-28.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

838
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Cros
sCon
nect
Leve
l
Board
Loopback
Type
Description
ODU
1
TN11ND2/
TN12ND2/
TN52ND2
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-33.
Channel
outloop
See Figure 15-34.
WDM-side
inloop
See Figure 15-35.
WDM-side
outloop
See Figure 15-36.
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-33.
Channel
outloop
See Figure 15-34.
TN53ND2
ODU
2/
ODU
2e
TN11ND2/
TN12ND2/
TN52ND2/
TN53ND2
WDM-side
inloop
See Figure 15-37.
WDM-side
outloop
See Figure 15-38.
ODU
flex
TN53ND2
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-39.
Channel
outloop
See Figure 15-40.
Loopbacks Supported by TN52ND2/TN53ND2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is

ODU0
l
Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points

As shown in Figure 15-25 and Figure 15-26, 16 ODU0 services are cross-connected from
the backplane. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane at the
ODU0 loopback points. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

839
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-25 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52ND2/TN53ND2

board (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Figure 15-26 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53ND2 board (ODU0>ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked-services
Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points

As shown in Figure 15-27, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped
into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The two ODU2 services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

840
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

are deconverged into four ODU1 services, each ODU1 service being deconverged into two
ODU0 services. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services are looped back to the WDM side at ODU0
loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Figure 15-27 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52ND2/TN53ND2
board (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
As shown in Figure 15-28, two OTU2 service received from the WDM side is demapped
into two ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is
deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services can be looped
back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can
be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

841
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-28 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53ND2 board (ODU0>ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked-services

As shown in Figure 15-29, 16 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into eight
ODU1 services. Any N of the eight ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at
the ODU1 loopback point and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Figure 15-29 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52ND2board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

842
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


are deconverged into eight ODU1 services. Any N of the eight ODU1 services can be looped
back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback point and the remaining ODU1 services can
be passed through.
Figure 15-30 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52ND2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloops
As shown in Figure 15-31, 16 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into eight
ODU1 services. Then, the eight ODU1 services are converged into two ODU2 services.
Any of the two ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback
point and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

843
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-31 WDM-side inloops on the TN52ND2 board

ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
IN2/OUT2
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloops
services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point and the
remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Figure 15-32 WDM-side outloops on the TN52ND2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

844
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Loopbacks Supported by TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 /TN53ND2 When the

Cross-Connect Level Is ODU1
l
Channel inloops
As shown in Figure 15-33, eight ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane.
Any N of the eight ODU1 services from the backplane can be looped back to the backplane
at ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Figure 15-33 Channel inloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Channel outloops
are deconverged into eight ODU1 services. Any N of the eight ODU1 services can be looped
back to the WDM side at ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be
passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

845
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-34 Channel outloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloops
As shown in Figure 15-35, eight ODU1 services from the backplane are converged into
two ODU2 services. Any of the two ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane
at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Figure 15-35 WDM-side inloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloops
remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

846
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-36 WDM-side outloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 When the

Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e
For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloops and WDM-side outloops
can be performed at ODU2/ODU2e loopback points.
l
WDM-side inloops
As shown in Figure 15-37, Any of the two ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane can
be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback point and the remaining
ODU2/ODU2e service can be passed through.
Figure 15-37 WDM-side inloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2
board
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

847
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

WDM-side outloops
As shown in Figure 15-38, two OTU2/OTU2e services received on the WDM side are
demapped into two ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated.
Any of the two ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2/
ODU2e loopback point and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e service is passed through.
Figure 15-38 WDM-side outloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2
board
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN53ND2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODUflex

For ODUflex services from the backplane, Channel inloops and Channel outloops can be
performed at ODUflex loopback points.
l
Channel inloops
As shown in Figure 15-39, Any N of the four ODUflex services from the backplane can
be looped back to the backplane at the ODUflex loopback point and the remaining ODUflex
services can be passed through.
Figure 15-39 Channel inloops at ODUflex loopback points on the TN53ND2 board
ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODUflex
ODUflex
ODUflex
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked-services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

848
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Channel outloops
are deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODUflex services can be
looped back to the WDM side at ODUflex loopback points and the remaining ODUflex
Figure 15-40 Channel outloops at ODUflex loopback points on the TN53ND2 board
ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
ODUflex
ODUflex
ODUflex
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked-services

For parameters of the ND2, refer to Table 15-10.
Table 15-10 ND2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Sets the optical interface name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.

849
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Loopback
Outloop
Sets the channel loopback.
l TN11ND2: ODU1,
ODU2
Service Mode
Default: ODU1
l TN12ND2:
Automatic, ODU1,
ODU2
Default: Automatic

NOTE
The parameter is supported by the TN53ND2
only in the compatible mode.

l TN52ND2/
TN53ND2:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
Off, On
Laser Status
Default: On
Enable Auto-Sensing
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

Sets the Enable Auto-Sensing function
of the board to Enabled or Disabled.
supports FEC Type and Line Rate
of the received signals in autosensing mode, and thus no manual
setting is required.
Type and Line Rate of the board
must be set manually and the values
of the previous two parameters must
be the same as that of the received
signals. Otherwise, the services are
unavailable.
NOTE
This parameter is only valid when the Board
Mode is set to Relay Mode.
TN12ND2 /TN52ND2/TN53ND2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

850
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled

Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC

Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
NOTE
CBAND is the only band now supported.

information.
wavelength.
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

to Disabled.

851
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Line Rate
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode

See D.24 Line Rate for more
information.
Default: Standard
Mode
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode

consecutive
Sets ODU Timeslot Configuration

Mode of the board.
Default: Assign
random
Assign random: The service rate can be

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and
the mapping path is ODU0>ODU2,
ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2.
Default: Disabled

commissioning.
Assign consecutive: The service rate can

be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the
mapping path is ODU0>ODU1
>ODU2, or ODU1->ODU2.
NOTE
The parameter is supported only by the
TN53ND2 in the standard mode.
Synchronous Clock
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

required.
NOTE
TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

852
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Board Mode
Line Mode, Electrical

Relay Mode, Optical
Relay Mode
The Board Mode parameter is used to

set the board mode of a board depending
on the service application scenario.
Default: Line Mode
NOTE
TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.
15.1.12 Specifications of the ND2

Board

Module
TN11ND
2

Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN
N/A

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN12ND
2

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

TN52ND
2

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
N/A

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN53ND
2
N/A

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

853
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

854
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
Wavelength-NRZPIN
NRZ
DRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
range
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

PIN
855
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

856
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
Line code format

-
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code
format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

857
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27

858
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb. )
TN52ND2: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN53ND2: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN1
1ND
2

61.1
68.4
62.7
70.2
68.4
76.6
57.2
64
62
69

46
52
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
48
54
TN5
2ND
2
70.5
77.5
67.8
74.6
TN5
3ND
2

25
28
TN1
2ND
2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

859
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
27
30
15.2 NQ2
NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

The available functional version(s) of the NQ2 board are TN51, TN52 , TN53, and TN54.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN51
NQ2
TN52
NQ2
TN53
NQ2
TN54
NQ2

l
Function:
The TN51NQ2 board supports FEC. The TN52NQ2/TN53/TN54NQ2 board supports
FEC and AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC codes cannot interoperate with each
other.
The TN51NQ2 board supports the cross-connections at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels.
The TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board supports the cross-connections of at the ODU0, ODU1
and ODU2 levels.The TN53NQ2 board supports ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and
ODUflex cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

860
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Only the TN54NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 function. For details,
see 15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.
Only the TN54NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board can realize the regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e
signals. For details, see 15.2.2 Application.
l
Specification:
15.2.12 Specifications of the NQ2.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN51NQ2
TN52NQ2/
TN53NQ2
The TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN51NQ2

on the NMS to function as a TN51NQ2 board. In this scenario,
the TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 only provides the functions of the
TN51NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be
upgraded.
NOTE
When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code
pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and
transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not
apply.
TN52NQ2
TN53NQ2/
TN54NQ2
The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 can be created as TN52NQ2 on the

NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any
software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2
functions as the TN52NQ2.
NOTE
Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports the TN54NQ2.
TN54NQ2
TN53NQ2
The TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN54NQ2 on the NMS

to function as a TN54NQ2 board. In this scenario, the
TN53NQ2 board only provides the functions of the TN54NQ2
board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded.
TN53NQ2
None
15.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the NQ2 board implements conversion between 32 crossconnect ODU0 signals or 16 cross-connect ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex
signals or four cross-connect ODU2 signals and four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
OTU2 signals. The NQ2 board also converts between four cross-connect ODU2e signals and
four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid
transmission of the ODU0 service, ODUflex, ODU1 service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

861
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application scenario 1 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:

conversion between 16 channels of ODU1 and four channels of OTU2 signals
Figure 15-41 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1
1
TOM
G.694.1
4
MUX
TOM
G.694.1
DMUX
NQ2
Client side
NQ2
1
TOM
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
8
4
Client side
1
TOM
WDM side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to
Line Mode.
Application scenario 2 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:

conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e and four channels of OTU2/
OTU2e signals
G.694.1
4
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
TQX
4
G.694.1
Client side
1
NQ2
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
1
TQX
Client side
NOTE
Line Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

862
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application scenario 3 of the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between

32 channels of ODU0 signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX
OSN 8800)
1
1
TOM
G.694.1
8
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
DMUX
1
TOM
TOM
G.694.1
NQ2
Client side
WDM side
MUX
8
4
Client side
1
1
TOM
WDM side
NOTE
Line Mode.
Application scenario 4 of the TN53NQ2 board: conversion between eight channels

of ODUflex signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
1
TQX
G.694.1
4
1
TQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TQX
G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
Client side
NQ2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
4
Client side
1
TQX
WDM side

863
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In this application scenario, Only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex.

The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals
cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2 board must be set to Line
Mode.
Application scenario 5 of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: implements the electrical

regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
WDM side
IN1
OUT1
DMUX
MUX
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
WDM side
IN2
OUT2
DMUX
NQ2
IN3
DMUX
MUX
G.694.1
MUX
OUT3
OUT4
G.694.1
IN4
DMUX
NOTE
Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.

The NQ2 board carries out cross-connection at the electrical layer, and provides the OTN
interfaces and ESC.
NOTE
ODU0 is supported only by the TN52NQ2 , TN53NQ2 and TN54NQ2 in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Only the TN53NQ2 board used in the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODUflex.
The relay mode is supported only by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2. The relay mode can be set to either Electrical
Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. For an optical-layer ASON system, the regeneration mode must be set
to Optical Relay Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

864
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-16 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Line Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
Maps 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals 8

channels of ODUflex signals or four channels of ODU2 signals sent from the
cross-connect board into four channels of OTU2 signals, or maps four
channels of ODU2e signals sent from the cross-connect board into four
channels of OTU2e signals. The board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals
process is similar.
Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The overall
bandwidth must be equal to or less than 40 Gbit/s.
Crossconnect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels

of ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex signals or four channels of
ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NQ2 board and the cross-connect board.
OTN
function
l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side.

the ITU-T G.709.
l TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports PM non-intrusive monitoring
for ODU0.
l The TN53NQ2 board supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex.
l The TN53NQ2 board supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring
for ODU0.
WDM
specification
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function

NOTE
If the TN53NQ2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled
for the TN53NQ2 board and the connected line board when the following condition is
met:
ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured on the TN53NQ2 board,
or the TN53NQ2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured
for it.
LPT function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Not supported

865
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
FEC
encoding
TN51NQ2:
TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
Physical
clock
Supported only when the TN53NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex

signals cross-connected from the backplane
NOTE
The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board supports four channels of IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
Supported only when the TN54NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1 signals

cross-connected from the backplane
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Supported by the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2
XFP
TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:
Wavelength).
TN53NQ2:
Wavelength).
Protection
scheme

NOTE
The ODUk SPRing protection is supported by the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

866
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Loopback
WDM side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Client side
Not supported
Channel Loopback
Supported
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Interface (ASI)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

867
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1
Table 15-17 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Relay Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function

Regeneratin
g rate
WDM
specification
OTN
function

the ITU-T G.709.
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

868
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
PTP clock
(1588 V2)
Not supported
Physical
clock
Not supported
XFP
TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2:

Wavelength).
TN53NQ2:
Wavelength).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Loopback
Not Supported
Protocol or
standard
compliance

services comply

869
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
processing services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The NQ2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 15-46 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN51NQ2 board.
Figure 15-47 and Figure 15-49 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NQ2
board.
Figure 15-48, Figure 15-50 and Figure 15-52 show the functional modules and signal flow of
the TN53NQ2 board.
Figure 15-51 and Figure 15-52 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NQ2
board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

870
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-46 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN51NQ2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
16XODU1/4XODU2/4XODU2e

WDM side
Cross-connect
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
O/E
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
Backplane
SCC (controlled by SCC)

871
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


WDM side
Cross-connect
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
O/E
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
Backplane

872
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16XODU1//4XODU2/4XODU2e
WDM side
Crossconnect
module
1588
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
O/E
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
873
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

32XODU0/16XODU1/
4XODU2/ 4XODU2e

WDM side
Cross-connect
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
O/E
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
Backplane

874
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-50 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NQ2 (Line Mode) (OptiX OSN
8800)
32XODU0/16XODU1/
8XODUflex/4XODU2/4XODU2e

WDM side
Crossconnect
module
1588
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
O/E
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
875
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-51 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NQ2 (Line Mode) (OptiX OSN
8800)
32XODU0/16XODU1/
4XODU2/ 4XODU2e

WDM side
Crossconnect
module
1588
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
O/E
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
Backplane

876
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-52 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 (Relay Mode)
WDM
side
IN1
IN3
OUT2
OUT4
WDM
side
O/E
E/O
OTN
processing
module
E/O
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
OUT1
OUT3
IN2
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

The signal processing module of the NQ2 board can access the following optical signals:
l
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NQ2 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NQ2 to the WDM side
of the NQ2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The signal processing module can receive 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of
ODU1 signals, 8 channels of ODUflex electrical signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e
signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs
operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the module
outputs 4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the WDM-side optical module. After
performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

877
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT4 optical
interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN4
optical interfaces. The module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the
module sends out 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of ODU1 signals, 8 channels
of ODUflex electrical signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane
for service cross-connection.
The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board processes clock signals in two directions.

l

The NQ2 board regenerates four channels of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and
transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN4
optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion.
The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they are decoded. After performing
E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l


The module consists of a cross-connect module and an OTN processing module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

878
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Grooms electrical signals between the NQ2 and the cross-connect board through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1//ODUflexODU2/ODU2e
signals.
performs FEC encoding and decoding.
l
1588 module
the STG board.

Power supply module

15.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NQ2 board.

Figure 15-53 shows the front panel of the NQ2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

879
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-53 Front panel of the NQ2 board
NQ2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
NQ2
NOTE
You must insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 to IN4/OUT4 interfaces in ascending
order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

880
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the NQ2 board. Table 15-18 lists the type
Table 15-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NQ2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN4
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT4
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

15.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one NQ2 board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800: If slot IU1, IU4, IU11, or IU14 houses the NQ2 board, the NQ2 board
supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s. If any of the other slots house the NQ2 board,
the NQ2 board supports a maximum service capacity of 20 Gbit/s.
For the OptiX OSN 8800: The NQ2 board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s in
any slot.
Table 15-19 shows the valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board.
Table 15-19 Valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

881
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, U11-IU16
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2



Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

882
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-23 Mapping between the physical ports on the NQ2 board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
IN3/OUT3
IN4/OUT4
NOTE
Logical Ports
The TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board can work in compatible mode. The TN53NQ2
board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible
l
Figure 15-55 shows the port diagrams of the TN51NQ2 board in compatible mode.
Figure 15-54 shows the port diagrams of the TN53NQ2 board in compatible mode and
Figure 15-56 shows the port diagrams of the board in standard mode.
NOTE
For the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when D.2
Board Mode (WDM Interface) is set to Line Mode.
For the TN52NQ2: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals only at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels
from the backplane.
NOTE
When the NQ2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and Assign
consecutive, observe the following points:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

883
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-54 Port diagram of the TN53NQ2(compatible mode)/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2

Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Backplane
32 x ODU0
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
16x ODU1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
51
71
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
51
173
(ODU0LP13/ODU0LP13)-1
173
54
74
176
176
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
4
(IN4/OUT4)-1
54
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service processing
module

ODU0 mapping
path


884
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-55 Port diagram of the TN51NQ2

Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
Backplane
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
16 x ODU1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
ODU2
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
ODU2
74
(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1
4
(IN4/OUT4)-1
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
Cross-connect
module
ODU2 mapping path
Multiplexing
module

multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not
need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting
the multiplexed signal.
Service processing
module

ODU1 mapping
path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

885
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-24 Meaning of NM port of the TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN51NQ2

(compatible mode)board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Name
Meaning
Automatic CrossConnection
ODU0LP1ODU0LP16
Internal logical port. The optical

paths are numbered 1, 2.
Automatic cross-connections
between the ports and the
ODU1LP port
ODU1LP1ODU1LP4

paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
ODU2LP port
ODU2LP1ODU2LP4
Internal logical ports. The optical

paths are numbered 1.
between the ports and the IN/
OUT port
IN1/OUT1-IN4/
OUT4
Corresponding to the WDM-side

optical interfaces.

886
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-56 Port diagram of the TN53NQ2 (standard mode)

Backplane
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)
ODUflex:1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODUflex:2
8xODUflex
ODUflex:1
ODUflex:2
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
ODU2:1
OCH :1
ODU2:1
OCH :1
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:1
ODU 2: 1
OCH :1
ODU 2: 1
OCH :1
ODU1:4
16xODU1
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
1(N1/OUT1)
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
4(IN4/OUT4)
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU0:2
ODU 2:1
ODU 0:1
ODU 0:2
32xODU0
OCH :1
ODU 1:4
ODU 0:1
ODU 1:1
ODU 0:2
ODU 2:1
ODU0:1
OCH :1
ODU1:4
ODU 0:2
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)
ODU0:1
ODU2:1
OCH :1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODU0: 8
32xODU0
ODU0:1
ODU0: 8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Crossconnect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module

887
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU0
mapping path
(ODU0
>ODU1
>ODU2)
Cross-connection that must be configured

on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from
other boards
ODU0
mapping path
(ODU0
>ODU2)
NOTE
Table 15-25 Meaning of ports on the TN53NQ2 (standard mode)

Port Name
Meaning
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)

for the ODU0 signals that are
received through the
backplane. (ODU0->ODU1>ODU2)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)

backplane. (ODU0->ODU2)

backplane.
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1

backplane.
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)

for the ODUflex signals that
are received through the
backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

888
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Port Name
Meaning
1(IN1/OUT1)
Indicates the WDM-side port.
2(IN2/OUT2)
3(IN3/OUT3)
4(IN4/OUT4)

l
The
side.
The
NOTE
The NQ2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible
mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in
standard mode.
Figure 15-57, Figure 15-58, and Figure 15-59 show the created ODU0 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

889
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-57 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU0 level)

Client side
Other board a
1
WDM side
NQ2 board
2
Compatible mode
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Other board a
Other board b
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/
TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Other board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

890
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-58 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1>ODU2)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
Compatible
mode
NQ2 board
Standard
mode
WDM side
2
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
Other board c
(standard
mode)
Other board d
(standard
mode)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

891
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Assign random.
Other board a
Other board b
Other board c
Other board d
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

892
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-59 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2)

Client side
Other board a
standard
mode
NQ2 board
2
WDM side
Other
board b
(standard
mode)
Other
board c
(standard
mode)
Other
board d
(compatible
mode)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

893
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Assign random.
Other board a
Other board b
Other board c
Other board d
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

894
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-60 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU1 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NQ2
Compatible mode
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board a
TN51NQ2:
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/
TN11TQS
TN52NQ2:
TN11TQS/TN54THA/TN54TOA
TN54NQ2:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

895
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Other board b

TN51NQ2:
TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1
Mode)
TN52NQ2:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/
TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/
TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
TN54NQ2:
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /
Other board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

896
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-61 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU1 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
Compatible mode
NQ2 board
Standard mode
WDM side
2
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

897
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Other board b
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/
TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/
TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Other board c
Figure 15-62 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2(compatible mode)/TN52NQ2
(compatible mode)/TN54NQ2(compatible mode) (ODU2 level)
Client side
Other board a
1
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
NQ2 board
Cross-connect
module
Compatible mode
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1
Other board c
(standard mode)
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1
Other board a
TN51NQ2:
TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL
TN52NQ2:
TN53TQX
TN54NQ2:
TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

898
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Other board b

TN51NQ2:
TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3
TN52NQ2:
TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/
TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
TN54NQ2:
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/
Other board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

899
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-63 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU2 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
compatible mode
NQ2 board
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1
IN2/OUT2-OCH:1
IN3/OUT3-OCH:1
standard mode
IN4/OUT4-OCH:1
WDM side
2
Other board b
(compatible mode)
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1
IN2/OUT2-OCH:1
IN3/OUT3-OCH:1
Other board c
(standard mode)
IN4/OUT4-OCH:1
Other board a
TN53TQX
Other board b
Other board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

900
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-64 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections.
Figure 15-64 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2(standard mode ) (ODUflex level)
Client side
Other boarda
WDM side
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
NQ2 board
WDM side
2
Other boardb
the NQ2
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
NQ2
NOTE
Other board a
TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN54THA/TN54TOA
Other board b
Example of Service Cross-Connections

Figure 15-65 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NQ2 board.
l
One IN/OUT can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals.
One board can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODUflex signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

901
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The Service Mode parameters of different IN/OUT ports are independent of each other.
Figure 15-65 Example of service cross-connections on the NQ2 board
ODU0
TOM
TOM
ODU0
IN1/OUT1
ODU1
ODU1
NS2
ODU1
NQ2
ODUflex
TDX ODUflex
IN2/OUT2
ODU2
IN3/OUT3
ODU2
IN4/OUT4
ND2
15.2.10 NQ2 Loopbacks

Table 15-26 lists the types of loopbacks supported by NQ2 boards.
Table 15-26 Loopbacks supported by NQ2 boards
Cross-Connect
Level
Board
Loopback Type
Description
ODU0 (available
only for OptiX
OSN 8800)
TN52NQ2/
TN54NQ2
Channel inloop
For channel inloops at

ODU0 loopback points,
see Figure 15-66.
For channel inloops at
see Figure 15-70.
Channel outloop
For channel outloops at

see Figure 15-68.
For channel outloops at
see Figure 15-71.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

902
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN53NQ2
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 15-72.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-73.
Channel inloop
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure

15-66.
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2->OTU2, see
Figure 15-67.
Channel outloop
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure

15-68.
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2->OTU2, see
Figure 15-69.
ODU1
ODU2/ODU2e
ODUflex
TN51NQ2/
TN52NQ2/
TN54NQ2
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-74.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-75.
TN52NQ2/
TN54NQ2
Channel outloop
See Figure 15-76.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 15-77.
TN53NQ2
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-74.
Channel outloop
See Figure 15-76.
TN51NQ2/
TN52NQ2//
TN53NQ2
TN54NQ2
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 15-78.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-79.
TN53NQ2
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-80.
Channel outloop
See Figure 15-81.
Loopbacks Supported by TN52NQ2/TNM53NQ2/TN54NQ2 When the CrossConnect Level Is ODU0

For ODU0 services from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops can be performed
at ODU0 and ODU1 loopback points and WDM-side inloops and WDM-side outloops can be
performed at ODU2 loopback points.
l

As shown in Figure 15-66, 32 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane.
Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU0 loopback
points. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

903
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-66 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TNM53NQ2/

TN54NQ2 board(ODU0ODU1-ODU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

904
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-67 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NQ2 board(ODU0
ODU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

As shown in Figure 15-68, four OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped
into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The four ODU2 services
are deconverged into 16 ODU1 services, each ODU1 service being deconverged into two
ODU0 services. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services are loopbacked to the WDM side at ODU0
loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services are passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

905
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-68 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TNM53NQ2/

TN54NQ2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

906
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-69 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NQ2 board(ODU0
ODU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

As shown in Figure 15-70, 32 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into 16
ODU1 services. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at
the ODU1 loopback points. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

907
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-70 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services

are deconverged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back
to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be
passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

908
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-71 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloops
As shown in Figure 15-72, 32 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into 16
ODU1 services. Then, the ODU1 services are converged into four ODU2 services. Any N
of the four ODU2 service can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point
and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

909
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-72 WDM-side inloops on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloops
remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

910
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-73 WDM-side outloops on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2//TNM53NQ2TN54NQ2 When the

When ODU1 services are cross-connected from the backplane, the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
supports channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points and WDM-side outloops at ODU2 loopback
points, but the TN51NQ2 board supports only channel inloops and WDM-side outloops.
l
Channel inloops
Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at ODU1 loopback
points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

911
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-74 Channel inloops on the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2//TNM53NQ2TN54NQ2 board
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloops
remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

912
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-75 WDM-side outloops on the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Channel outloops
are deconverged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped
back to the WDM side at ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be
passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

913
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-76 Channel outloops on the TN52NQ2//TNM53NQ2TN54NQ2 board
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloops
As shown in Figure 15-77, 16 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are
converged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be loopbacked
to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 services can be
passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

914
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-77 WDM-side inloops on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2//TNM53NQ2TN54NQ2 When the

Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e
For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloops and WDM-side outloops
can be performed at ODU2/ODU2e loopback points.
l
WDM-side inloops
As shown in Figure 15-78, any N of the four ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane
can be loopbacked at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback point and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

915
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-78 WDM-side inloops on the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloops
As shown in Figure 15-79, four OTU2/OTU2e services received on the WDM side are
demapped into four ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is
terminated. Any N of the four ODU2/ODU2e services can be loopbacked to the WDM side
at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback point and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e services can be
passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

916
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-79 WDM-side outloops on the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN4/OUT4
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN53NQ2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODUflex

For ODUflex services cross-connected from the backplane, channel inloops and channel
outloops can be performed at ODUflex loopback points.
l
Channel inloops
As shown in Figure 15-80, any N of the eight ODUflex services cross-connected from the
backplane can be loopbacked to the backplane at the ODUflex loopback point while the
remaining ODUflex services can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

917
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-80 Channel inloops on the TN53NQ2 board
ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODUflex
ODUflex
ODUflex
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Channel outloops
As shown in Figure 15-81, four OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped
into four ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Each ODU2 service is
deconverged into two ODUflex services. Any N of the eight ODUflex services can be
loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODUflex loopback point while the remaining ODUflex
services can directly be passed through.
Figure 15-81 Channel outloops on the TN53NQ2 board
ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
ODUflex
ODUflex
ODUflex
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

918
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


For parameters of the NQ2, refer to Table 15-27.
Table 15-27 NQ2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Channel Loopback
Outloop

information.
Sets the path loopback.
Service Mode
l TN51NQ2: ODU1,
ODU2

Default: ODU1
NOTE
The parameter is supported by the
TN53NQ2 only in the compatible mode.
l TN52NQ2/
TN54NQ2:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2

Default: Automatic
l TN53NQ2:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: On
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


919
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Enable Auto-Sensing
Disabled, Enabled
Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function

Default: Enabled

supports FEC Type and Line Rate
of the received signals in autosensing mode, and thus no manual
setting is required.
Type and Line Rate of the board
must be set manually and the values
of the previous two parameters must
be the same as that of the received
signals. Otherwise, the services are
unavailable.
NOTE
This parameter is only supported by the
TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
For ASON services, this parameter must be
set to Enabled.
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC

NOTE
Only TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2
supports AFEC.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.

920
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Planned Band Type
NOTE
Default: /

information.
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Line Rate
Default: Standard
Mode
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Used to configure the line rate of OTN.

information.

to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is supported only by
TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

commissioning.

921
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode

consecutive
Sets ODU Timeslot Configuration

Mode of the board.
Default: Assign random

ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex>ODU2.
NOTE
TN53NQ2 in the standard mode.
Synchronous Clock
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

required.
NOTE
The parameter is only supported by the
TN53NQ2.
Board Mode

Relay Mode, Optical
Relay Mode
Default: Line Mode

NOTE
TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
15.2.12 Specifications of the NQ2

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

922
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
TN51NQ
2
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed

800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP
TN52NQ
2
N/A

TN53NQ
2
N/A

TN54NQ
2
N/A

NOTE
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

923
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

924
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
Line code format

-
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code
format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

925
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27

926
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN51NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN52NQ2: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb.)
TN53NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN54NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
TN51
NQ2

88
95
92
99

88
97
92
101

45
50
49
54

53
58.3
TN52
NQ2
TN53
NQ2
TN54
NQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

927
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
57
62.3
15.3 NS2
NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board

The available functional versions of the NS2 board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
NS2
TN12
NS2
TN52
NS2
TN53
NS2

Function:
l
The TN11NS2/TN12NS2 supports AFEC, and the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 supports AFEC-2.

Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see
15.3.3 Functions and Features.
TN11NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals. TN12NS2 supports the crossconnection of ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e signals. TN52NS2 supports the cross-connection
of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e signals. TN53NS2 supports the cross-connection of
ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2 and ODU2e signals.
OptiX OSN 6800: The TN11NS2 supports cross-connection of paired slots while the
TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 does not.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

928
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 3800: The TN11NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals between
any slots of the four-slot mesh group. The TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 supports the
cross-connection of ODU1 signals between any two boards in the non-paired slots of the
four-slot mesh group.
The TN12NS2/TN53NS2 board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM side, the
TN53NS2 board supports tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side. The
TN11NS2 or TN52NS2 board does not support that function.
For details, see15.3.3 Functions and Features.

Specification:
l
The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see
15.3.12 Specifications of the NS2.
Table 15-31 Substitution rules of the NS2 board
Origin
al
Board
Substi
tute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11N
S2
None
TN12N
S2
TN53
NS2
The TN53NS2 can be created as TN12NS2 on the NMS. The former can
substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution,
the TN53NS2 functions as the TN12NS2.
NOTE
When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the
substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the
AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply.
TN52N
S2
TN53
NS2
The TN53NS2 can be created as TN52NS2 on the NMS. The former can
substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution,
the TN53NS2 functions as the TN52NS2.
TN53N
S2
None
15.3.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the NS2 board implements conversion between eight crossconnect ODU0 signals or two cross-connect ODUflex signals or four cross-connect ODU1
signals or one cross-connect ODU2 signals and one ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
OTU2 signals. The NS2 board also converts between one cross-connect ODU2e signals and one
ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2e signals.
Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion

between four channels of ODU1 and one channel of OTU2 signals
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

929
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-82 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1
Client
side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
MUX
MUX
WDM
side
1
Client
side
TOM
4
WDM
side
Application scenario 2 of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between

one channel of ODU2/ODU2e and one channel of OTU2/OTU2e signals
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
NS2
Client
side
DMUX
NS2
TDX
Client
side
TDX
NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
NS2
WDM side
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between eight

channels of ODU0 and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
1
Client
side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
MUX
MUX
WDM
side
1
Client
side
TOM
8
WDM
side
NOTE
The TN52NS2/TN53NS2 boards support this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

930
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application scenario 4 of the TN53NS2: conversion between two channels of

ODUflex and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
MUX
Client
side
TDX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
TDX
Client
side
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
In this application scenario, only the TN53NS2/TN53TDX boards support ODUflex signals.
The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot
exceed 10 Gbit/s.

The NS2 board is used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN
interfaces and ESC.
NOTE
The ODUflex is only supported by the TN52NS2 in the OptiX OSN 8800.
The ODU0 is only supported by the TN52NS2 and TN53NS2 in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 support ODU2/ODU2e.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

931
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-32 Functions and features of the NS2 board

Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
OptiX OSN 8800:

l TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Maps eight channels of ODU0 signals or four
channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODUflex signals or one
channel of ODU2 signals sent from the cross-connect board into one
channel of OTU2 signals, or maps one channel of ODU2e signals sent
from the cross-connect board into one channel of OTU2e signals. The
board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals into standard DWDM signals
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Supports
hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals and ODU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals sent from the crossconnect board into one channel of OTU2 signals. The board converts the
OTU2 signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.
l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals or
one channel of ODU2 signals sent from the cross-connect board into one
channel of OTU2 signals, or maps one channel of ODU2e signals into one
channel of OTU2e signals. The board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals
process is similar.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l TN11NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals sent from the other three
boards in the four-slot mesh group into one channel of OTU2 signals, and
converts the OTU2 signals into a standard DWDM signal compliant with
l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals
sent from any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh
group into one channel of OTU2 signals, and converts the OTU2/OTU2e
signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

932
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800:

l TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of
ODU0 signals, four channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of
ODUflex signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the
NS2 board and the cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1
signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board or the board
in the paired slot.
l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four
channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals
between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l TN11NS2: Supports the grooming of four channels of ODU1 signals from
one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three
l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports grooming of four channels of
ODU1 signals to any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot
mesh group, that is, supports an ODU1 cross-connection between slots
IU2 and IU4, slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

933
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
OTN
function
TN11NS2:
l Supports the OTU2 interface on the WDM side.
the ITU-T G.709.
TN12NS2:
the ITU-T G.709.
TN52NS2/TN53NS2:
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU0.
l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
l TN53NS2 supports TCM functions and TCM non-intrusive monitoring
for ODU0.
l TN53NS2 supports PM functions for ODUflex.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
ESC
function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
service signal.

934
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
PRBS
function

NOTE
If the TN53NS2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled
for the TN53NS2 board and the connected line board when the following condition is
met:
ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured on the TN53NS2 board,
or the TN53NS2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured
for it.
LPT function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
TN11NS2/TN12NS2:
ITU-T G.975.1.
TN52NS2/TN53NS2:
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Supported by the TN53NS2
Physical
clock
Supported only when the TN53NS2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex

signals cross-connected from the backplane
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Supported by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2
Protection
scheme
NOTE
The TN53NS2 board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

935
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
XFP
TN12NS2/TN53NS2:
Wavelength).
TN53NS2:
Wavelength).
Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Client side
Not supported
Channel Loopback
Supported

936
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Interface (ASI)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

937
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The NS2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588
Figure 15-86 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2 board.
Figure 15-87 and Figure 15-90 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2
board.
Figure 15-88, Figure 15-89 and Figure 15-90 shows the functional modules and signal flow
of the TN52NS2 board.
Figure 15-90, Figure 15-91 and Figure 15-92 shows the functional modules and signal flow
of the TN53NS2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

938
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-86 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2 board (OptiX OSN 6800/
3800)
ODU1
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
Backplane

939
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-87 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/ 1XODU2e

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
940
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-88 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
8XODU0/4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/
1XODU2e

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
941
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-89 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/ 1XODU2e
WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
942
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-90 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
(OptiX OSN 3800)
4XODU1

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
Backplane

943
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-91 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NS2 board(OptiX OSN 6800)
4 X ODU1/
1 X ODU2/1 X ODU2e
WDM side
E/O
1588
OUT
OTN
processing
module
O/E
Signal processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module
IN
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
944
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-92 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NS2 board(OptiX OSN 8800)
8 X ODU0/4 X ODU1/
2 X ODUflex/
1 X ODU2/1 X ODU2e
WDM side
E/O
OTN
processing
module
1588
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The signal processing module of the NS2 board can access the following optical signals:
l

NOTE
ODU0 is supported by TN52NS2/TN53NS2 in OptiX OSN 8800.

ODUflex is supported by TN53NS2 in OptiX OSN 8800.
ODU2/ODU2e is supported in OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

945
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS2 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the NS2,
l
Transmit direction
The signal processing module receives eight channels of ODU0 signals, or four channels
of ODU1 signals, or two channels of ODUflex signals, or one channel of ODU2 signals,
or one channel of ODU2e signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations
such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel
of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After
performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU2 optical signals at DWDM
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 from the WDM side through the
IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the
module sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals, or four channels of ODU1 signals, or
two channels of ODUflex signals, or one channel of ODU2 signals, or one channel of
ODU2e signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
Module Function
l

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.

The module consists of a cross-connect module and an OTN processing module.
Grooms electrical signals between the NS2 and the other board through the backplane.
The groomed service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex/ODU2/ODU2e signals.
NOTE
The signal processing module of the TN12NS2 does not contain a cross-connect unit. This board,
however, is always connected to the cross-connect board.

Frames OTU2 or OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and
l
1588 module
to the STG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

946
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Power supply module

15.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NS2 board.

Figure 15-93 shows the front panel of the NS2 board.
Figure 15-93 Front panel of the NS2 board
NS2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
NS2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

947
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NS2 board. Table 15-33 lists the type
Table 15-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

15.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one NS2 board.
Table 15-34 shows the valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board.
Table 15-34 Valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 15-35 shows the valid slots for the TN52NS2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

948
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-35 Valid slots for the TN52NS2 board

Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
15.3.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2



Table 15-37 lists the mapping between the logical ports on the board and the port numbers
Table 15-37 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS2 board and the port numbers
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Physical Port
IN/OUT
1
949
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Logical Ports
The NS2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and
l
Figure 15-94, Figure 15-95 and Figure 15-96 show the port diagrams for the TN52NS2/
TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN11NS2 board in the compatible mode. Table 15-38 lists the port
descriptions.
Figure 15-97 shows the port diagram for the TN53NS2 board in standard mode. Table
15-39 lists the port descriptions.
NOTE
When used in OptiX OSN 6800, the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 and ODU2
signals from the backplane. When used in OptiX OSN 3800, the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board can only crossconnect ODU1 signals from the backplane.
When used in OptiX OSN 3800, the TN12NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 signals from the backplane.
When used in OptiX OSN 6800, the TN52ND2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 and ODU2 signals from
the backplane.
The cross-connect granularity supported by the board is determined by that supported by the cross-connect board
in the same subrack. For information about cross-connect boards, see 21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and
Communication Unit.
NOTE
When the NS2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

950
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-94 Port diagram of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (compatible mode)

Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
8 x ODU0
Other tributary/
line/PID board
1 x ODU2/ODU2e
4 x ODU1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Backplane
51
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
51
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
ODU2
Crossconnect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexin
g module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module

ODU0
mapping
path


951
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-95 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 board (compatible mode)

Other tributary/
line/PID board
Other tributary/
line/PID board
1 x ODU2/ODU2e
4 x ODU1
Backplane
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
ODU2
Crossconnect
module
ODU2 mapping path
Multiplexin
g module

Service
processing
module

ODU1
mapping
path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

952
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-96 Port diagram of the TN11NS2 board (compatible mode)

Other tributary/
line/PID board
Backplane
4 x ODU1
1(IN/OUT)-1
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
1(IN/OUT)-4
Crossconnect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexin
g module

Service
processing
module
Table 15-38 Meaning of NM port of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board

(compatible mode)
Port Name
Meaning
Automatic Cross-Connection
ODU0LP1ODU0LP4

channels 1 and 2.
Automatic cross-connections are

established between these ports
and the ODU1LP port.
ODU1LP1
Internal logical ports. Each of the

port provides optical channels 1, 2,
3, and 4.

and the ODU2LP port
ODU2LP1

channel 1.

and the IN/OUT port
IN/OUTa
Internal logical ports. Each of the

port provides optical channels 1, 2,
3, and 4.
IN/OUT
WDM-side optical ports.
a: The port is available only on the TN11NS2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

953
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-97 Port diagram of the TN53NS2 (standard mode)

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
ODUflex:1
2XODUflex
ODU2:1
ODUflex:2
IN/OUT-OCH:1
OCH:1
OCH :1
1 xODU2/
1xODU 2e
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
ODU1:1
4 xODU1
ODU2:1
OCH : 1
IN/OUT
ODU1:4
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
8 xODU0
ODU1:1
ODU2:1
ODU 0:1
ODU 0:2
OCH :1
ODU 1:4
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
ODU0:1
8 xODU0
ODU2:1
OCH :1
ODU0: 8
Backplane
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
ODU0 mapping
path (ODU0
>ODU1
>ODU2)

ODU0 mapping
path (ODU0
>ODU2)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

954
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Table 15-39 Meaning of NM port of the TN53NS2 board (standard mode)

Port Name
Definition
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
Mapping path for ODU0 signals

received from the backplane
(ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)

(ODU0->ODU2)
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)

IN/OUT-OCH:1
Mapping path for ODU2/ODU2e

signals received from the
backplane
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)
Mapping path for ODUflex

signals received from the
backplane
IN/OUT
WDM-side optical ports
15.3.9 Configuring Cross-Connections

Cross-Connection Configuration of Services

l
The
side.
The
NOTE
The NS2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible
standard mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

955
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-98, Figure 15-99 and Figure 15-100 show the created ODU0 cross-connections.
Figure 15-98 TN52NS2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level)
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NS2
2
WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
Other board c
(standard
mode)
the NS2 board
The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA

Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

956
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-99 TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
2
compatible
mode
NS2
standard
mode
WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
Other board c
(standard
mode)
Other board d
(standard
mode)
the NS2 board
other boards
NOTE
Assign random.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

957
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Other board d TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2
Figure 15-100 TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NS2
2
Standard mode
WDM side
Other board b
(standard
mode)
Other board c
(standard
mode)
Other board d
(compatible
mode)
the NS2 board
other boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

958
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Assign random.
Other board b TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2
Other board d TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/
Figure 15-101, Figure 15-102 and Figure 15-103 show the created ODU1 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

959
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-101 TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NS2
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 (standard mode)

WDM side of the NS2 board
The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the
WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN12NS2:

TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS
TN52NS2:
Other board b TN12NS2:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/
TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode)
TN52NS2:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

960
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NS2
2
compatible
mode
standard
mode
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
Other board c
(standard
mode)
the NS2 board
other boards
Other board a TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/

Other board b TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

961
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2
NS2
1(IN/OUT)-3
1(IN/OUT)-4
WDM side
Other board b

Other board a TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/
Other board b TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

962
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-104 TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board cross-connections (ODU2 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NS2
2
WDM side
Other board b
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 (compatible mode)

IN/OUT-OCH:1
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board a TN12NS2:

TN52NS2:
TN53TQX
Other board b TN12NS2:
TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3
TN52NS2:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/
TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/
TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

963
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NS2
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 compatible mode

2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
standard mode
WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board a TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/

TN53TQX
Other board b TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/
TN54ENQ2
Figure 15-106 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections..
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

964
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-106 TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODUflex level)
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NS2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
WDM side
Other board b
NOTE
Other board a TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN54THA/TN54TOA
Other board b TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2

Figure 15-107 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NS2 board.
l
As shown in (1) of Figure 15-107, signals at the ODU0 , ODUflex and ODU1 levels are
transmitted together.
As shown in (2) of Figure 15-107, signals at the ODU2 level are processed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

965
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-107 Example of service cross-connections on the NS2 board

ODU0
TOM
TDX
ODU0
ODUflex
IN/OUT
NS2
IN/OUT
TDX/ ODU2
NS2
ND2
ODU1
ND2
ODU1
(1)
(2)
15.3.10 NS2 Loopbacks

Table 15-40 lists the types of loopbacks supported by NS2 boards.
Table 15-40 Loopbacks supported by NS2 boards
Cros
sCon
nect
Leve
l
Board
Loopback
Type
Description
ODU
0
TN52NS2
Channel inloop
For channel inloop at ODU0

loopback points, see Figure
15-108.
For channel inloop at ODU1
15-112.
Channel
outloop
For channel outloop at ODU0

15-110.
For channel outloop at ODU1
15-113.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM-side
inloop
See Figure 15-114.
WDM-side
outloop
See Figure 15-115.

966
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Cros
sCon
nect
Leve
l
Board
Loopback
Type
Description
TN53NS2
Channel inloop
Mapping path: ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2, see Figure

15-108.
Mapping path: ODU0->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure 15-109.
Channel
outloop
Mapping path: ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2, see Figure

15-110.
Mapping path: ODU0->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure 15-111.
ODU
1
TN11NS2/TN12NS2/
TN52NS2
TN53NS2
ODU
2/
ODU
2e
TN12NS2/TN52NS2/
TN53NS2
ODU
flex
TN53NS2
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-116.
Channel
outloop
See Figure 15-117.
WDM-side
inloop
See Figure 15-118.
WDM-side
outloop
See Figure 15-119.
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-116.
Channel
outloop
See Figure 15-117.
WDM-side
inloop
See Figure 15-120.
WDM-side
outloop
See Figure 15-121.
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-122.
Channel
outloop
See Figure 15-123.
NOTE
Only the TN52NS2 and TN53NS2 boards used in the OptiX OSN 8800 support ODU0.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

967
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Loopbacks Supported by TN52NS2/TN53NS2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is

ODU0
For ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane, channel inloops and channel
outloops can be performed at ODU0 and ODU1 loopback points, and WDM-side inloops and
WDM-side outloops can be performed at ODU2 loopback points.
l

As shown in Figure 15-108, any N of the eight ODU0 services cross-connected from the
backplane can be loopbacked to the backplane at ODU0 loopback points while the
remaining ODU0 services can directly be passed through.
Figure 15-108 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
(ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

968
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-109 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NS2 board(ODU0>ODU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

deconverged into four ODU1 services, each ODU1 service being deconverged into two
ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side
at ODU0 loopback points while the remaining ODU0 services can directly be passed
through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

969
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-110 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
(ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU2
ODU0
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be
loopbacked to the WDM side at ODU0 loopback points while the remaining ODU0 services
can directly be passed through.
Figure 15-111 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NS2 board(ODU0>ODU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

970
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


As shown in Figure 15-112, eight ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are
converged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be loopbacked
to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback point while the remaining ODU1 services can
directly be passed through.
Figure 15-112 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NS2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services

deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be loopbacked
to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback point while the remaining ODU1 services can
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

971
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-113 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NS2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloops
As shown in Figure 15-114, eight ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are
converged into four ODU1 services. Then, the four ODU1 services are converged into one
ODU2 services. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback
point.
Figure 15-114 WDM-side inloops on the TN52NS2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM-side outloops

972
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-115 WDM-side outloops on the TN52NS2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 When the

For ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane, channel inloops and channel
outloops can be performed at ODU1 loopback points, and WDM-side inloops and WDM-side
outloops can be performed at ODU2 loopback points.
l
Channel inloops
As shown in Figure 15-116, any N of the four ODU1 services cross-connected from the
backplane can be loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback point while the
remaining ODU1 services can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

973
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-116 Channel inloops on the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2 OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Channel outloops
deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be loopbacked
to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback point while the remaining ODU1 services can
Figure 15-117 Channel outloops on the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2 OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM-side inloops
974
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

As shown in Figure 15-118, four ODU1 services from the backplane are converged into
one ODU2 service. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU2
loopback point.
Figure 15-118 WDM-side inloops on the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2 OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloops
Figure 15-119 WDM-side outloops on the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2 OTU2
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

975
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Loopbacks Supported by TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 When the Cross-Connect

Level Is ODU2/ODU2e
For ODU2/ODU2e services cross-connected from the backplane, WDM-side inloops and
WDM-side outloops can be performed at ODU2/ODU2e loopback points.
l
WDM-side inloops
As shown in Figure 15-120, one ODU2/ODU2e service from the backplane is loopbacked
at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback point.
Figure 15-120 WDM-side inloops on the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloops
As shown in Figure 15-121, one OTU2/OTU2e service received on the WDM side is
demapped into one ODU2/ODU2e service after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated.
The ODU2/ODU2e service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback
point.
Figure 15-121 WDM-side outloops on the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

976
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Loopbacks Supported by TN53NS2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODUflex

For ODUflex services cross-connected from the backplane, channel inloops and channel
outloops can be performed at ODUflex loopback points.
l
Channel inloops
As shown in Figure 15-122, any of the two ODUflex services cross-connected from the
backplane can be loopbacked to the backplane at the ODUflex loopback point while the
remaining ODUflex service can directly be passed through.
Figure 15-122 Channel inloops on the TN53NS2 board
ODUflex
ODU2 OTU2
IN/OUT
ODUflex
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Channel outloops
deconverged into two ODUflex services. Any of the two ODUflex services can be
loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODUflex loopback point while the remaining ODUflex
service can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

977
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-123 Channel outloops on the TN53NS2 board
ODUflex
ODU2 OTU2
IN/OUT
ODUflex
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services

For parameters of NS2, refer to Table 15-41.
Table 15-41 NS2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.

978
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Loopback
OutloopS
Sets the path loopback.
l TN11NS2: NA
Service Mode
l TN12NS2: ODU1,
ODU2
Default: ODU1
l TN52NS2:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2

NOTE
The parameter is supported by the TN53NS2
only in the compatible mode.

Default: Automatic
l TN53NS2:
Automatic, ODU1,
ODU2
Default: Automatic
Off, On
Laser Status
Default: On
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.

979
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Planned Band Type
NOTE
Default: /

information.
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

to Disabled.
NOTE
TN12NS2 /TN52NS2/TN53NS2.
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None

board resides.
information.
NOTE
TN11NS2 board.
Line Rate
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Default: Standard
Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

NOTE
TN12NS2/TN52NS2//TN53NS2.

information.

980
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

commissioning.
NOTE
TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN53NS2.
The parameter is supported by the TN53NS2
only in the standard mode.
Synchronous Clock
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

required.
NOTE
TN53NS2.
ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode

consecutive
Default: Assign random
The ODU Timeslot Configuration

Mode parameter sets and queries the
timeslot configuration mode of a board.
ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex>ODU2.
NOTE
TN53NS2 in the standard mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

981
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.3.12 Specifications of the NS2

Board

Module
TN11NS
2

N/A

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-ODB-APD
Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
TN12NS
2



Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-ODB-APD
Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN52NS
2

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
N/A

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN53NS
2
N/A

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

982
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm-C Band
(odd & even
wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZPIN
NRZ
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

PIN
983
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code
format
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavele
ngthNRZAPD
4800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthODBAPD
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-DRZPIN
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
NRZ
NRZ
ODB
DRZ
NRZ

Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
10
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/
nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
APD
PIN
PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
APD

984
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthNRZPIN
1200 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavele
ngthNRZAPD
4800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Wavelen
gthODBAPD
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-DRZPIN
800 ps/
nm-C
BandTunable
Waveleng
th-NRZPIN
Receiver
sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
-16
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

985
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz

width
nm
0.3

986
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
km
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source type
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
NA

987
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
km
km
30
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
dBm
-11
-14
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11NS2/TN12NS2: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb)
TN52NS2: 1.3 kg (2.86 lb.)
TN53NS2: 1 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN11NS
2

38.0
41.8
39.0
42.9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

988
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
TN12NS
2
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
41.0
45.1

Wavelength-ODB-APD
44.0
48.4

39.5
43.45

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
40.5
44.55

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
42.5
46.75

Wavelength-ODB-APD
45.5
50.05

25.35
28.39

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
30.32
34

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
46.5
51.1

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
47
51.7

20
24
21
25

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
TN52NS
2
TN53NS
2
15.4 NS3
NS3: 40G line service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

989
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The available functional versions of the NS3 board are TN11, TN52, and TN54.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
NS3
TN52
NS3
TN54
NS3

l
The TN11NS3/TN52NS3 supports AFEC, and the TN54NS3 supports AFEC-2. Boards
that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 15.4.3
Function:
The TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board support the cross-connections of ODU0/ODU1 level,
and only the TN54NS3 board supports the cross-connections of ODU3 level. For details,
see 15.4.3 Functions and Features and 15.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.
Only the TN54NS3 board supports IEEE 1588v2 function. For details, see 15.4.4
Working Principle and Signal Flow.
The TN54NS3 board can implement the electrical regeneration of OTU3/OTU3e
signals. For details, see 15.4.2 Application.
Appearance:
The TN11NS3 board and the TN52NS3 board use the same front panel. The TN54NS3
board uses a different front panel from the preceding boards. For details, see 15.4.5
Front Panel and 15.4.12 Specifications of the NS3.
Specification:
The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details,
see 15.4.12 Specifications of the NS3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

990
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-47 Substitution rules of the NS3 board
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11NS3
TN52NS3
The TN52NS3 can be created as TN11NS3 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN52NS3 functions as the
TN11NS3.
TN52NS3
None
TN54NS3
None
15.4.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the NS3 board implements conversion between 32 crossconnect ODU0 signals or 16 cross-connect ODU1 signals or four cross-connect ODU2 signals
or one cross-connect ODU3 signals and one ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU3
signals. The NS3 board also converts between four cross-connect ODU2e signals or one crossconnect ODU3e signals and one ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU3e signals. In
addition, the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0, ODU1,
and ODU2/ODU2e services.
Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion

between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and one channel of OTU3/OTU3e
signals
1
MUX
1
NS3 G.694.1
TQX
4
Client side
DMUX
G.694.1 NS3
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
1
TQX
4
WDM side
4
Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Line
Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

991
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application scenario 2 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion between

sixteen channels of ODU1 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals
1
1
TOM
Client
side
TOM
4
MUX
MUX
NS3 G.694.1
G.694.1 NS3
DMUX
1
TOM
8
4
DMUX
1
WDM side
Client
side
1
1
TOM
WDM side
NOTE
Mode.
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion between

thirty-two channels of ODU0 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals
1
1
TOM
Client
side
TOM
8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
DMUX
G.694.1 NS3
DMUX
8
4
MUX
1
TOM
MUX
NS3 G.694.1
1
WDM side
TOM
WDM side

Client
side
992
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Mode.
Application scenario 4 of the TN54NS3 board: conversion between one channel of

ODU3/ODU3e signals and one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
TSXL
DMUX
NS3
NS3
DMUX
Client side
TSXL
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
Mode and the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.
Application scenario 5 of the TN54NS3 board: implement the electrical

regeneration of one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signal
WDM side
DMUX
IN
NS3
G.694.1
MUX
OUT
WDM side
OUT
MUX
G.694.1
NS3
IN
DMUX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Electrical
Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. In the case of an optical-layer ASON system, however, the
The TN54NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only supports this application scenario.

The NS3 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

993
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
ODU0 is only supported by the TN52NS3 /TN54NS3 in the OptiX OSN 8800.
ODU3/ODU3e is only supported by the TN54NS3 in the OptiX OSN 8800.
The relay mode is only supported by the TN54NS3. The relay mode can be set to either Electrical Relay
Mode or Optical Relay Mode. In the case of an optical-layer ASON system, however, the regeneration
mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
The TN54NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only supports relay mode.
Table 15-48 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Line Mode)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
Maps 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of ODU1 signals, or four

channels of ODU2 signals or one channel of ODU3 signals sent from the
cross-connect board into one channel of OTU3 signals, or maps four channels
of ODU2e signals or one channel of ODU3e signals sent from the crossconnect board into one channel of OTU3e signals. The board converts the
OTU3/OTU3e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1. The reverse process is similar, and in this process, dispersion
compensation can be performed for signals received on the WDM side.
Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals and the
ODU2/ODU2e signals.
Crossconnect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels

of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or one channel
of ODU3/ODU3e signals between the NS3 and the cross-connect board.

994
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
OTN
function
TN11NS3:
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU3 and ODU2.
TN52NS3:
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU3, ODU2, ODU1, and ODU0.
l Supports TCM function for ODU3, ODU2 and ODU1.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1 and ODU2.
l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
TN54NS3:
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU0, ODU1, ODU3, and ODU3.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1, ODU2 and ODU3.
l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and
ODU3.
l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function

995
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
LPT function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
TN11NS3/TN52NS3:
ITU-T G.975.1.
TN54NS3:
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Supported by TN54NS3.
Physical
clock
The TN54NS3 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1 or
ODU2/ODU2e signals are cross-connected from the backplane.
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Supported by the TN52NS3 and TN54NS3
Protection
scheme

Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Client side
Not supported
Channel Loopback
Supported

996
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Interface (ASI)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

997
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1
Table 15-49 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Relay Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function

Regeneratin
g rate
OTN
function

the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

998
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported
Physical
clock
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Loopback
Not Supported
Protocol or
standard
compliance

services comply

999
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
processing services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The NS3 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 15-129 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS3 board.
board.
board.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports the ODU0 and ODU3/ODU3e signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1000
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-129 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS3 board in the OptiX OSN
6800
4 X ODU2/4 X ODU2e

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
Backplane

1001
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6800

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
1002
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8800
32XODU0/16XODU1/
4XODU2/4XODU2e

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
1003
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8800 (Line Mode)
32 X ODU0/16 X ODU1/4 X ODU2/
4 X ODU2e/1XODU3/1XODU3e

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
1588
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
1004
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8800/6800 (Relay Mode)
WDM
side
WDM
side
O/E
OTN
processing
module
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
OUT
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
( controlled by SCC)

The signal processing module of the NS3 board accesses ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/
ODU3e electrical signals.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS3 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS3 to the WDM side
of the NS3, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The OTN processing module receives thirty-two channels of ODU0 or sixteen channels of
ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e or one channel of ODU3/ODU3e electrical
signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs
operations such as OTN framing and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs
one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals.
O conversion, the module sends out the OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical
interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the OTN processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU3/OTU3e framing and decoding of FEC/
AFEC. Then, the module sends out thirty-two channels of ODU0 or sixteen channels of
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1005
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e or one channel of ODU3/ODU3e electrical

signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
NOTE
Only the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 support ODU0 signals.

Only the TN54NS3 supports ODU3/ODU3e signals.
The TN54NS3 board processes clock signals in two directions.

l

The NS3 board implements the regeneration of one channel of optical signals. The wavelengths
at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM
wavelengths that carry OTU3/OTU3e optical signals.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN optical
After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module sends out the OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
The optical signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l


Frames OTU3/OTU3e signals, processes overheads in OTU3/OTU3e signals, and performs
the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
1588 module
the STG board.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1006
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

15.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NS3 board.

Figure 15-134 and Figure 15-135 show the front panel of the NS3 board.
Figure 15-134 Front panel of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board
NS3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
NS3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1007
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-135 Front panel of the TN54NS3 board
NS3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
NS3
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NS3 board. Table 15-50 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1008
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-50 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS3 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

15.4.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11NS3 board, TN52NS3 board, and one slot houses one TN54NS3
board.
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16
NOTE
The online signal bus on the TN11NS3 board connects to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. The
slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28-IU34, IU36-IU42,

IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

1009
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The online signal bus on the TN52NS3 board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the
two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN52NS3 board, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed
on the NM is IU2.
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
When the TN54NS3 board needs to be used as a regeneration board, observe the following
principles for selecting a valid slot:
l
OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same
IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67
and IU68.
or IU35 and IU36.
wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8,
IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16.
OptiX OSN 6800: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same
wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8,
IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.
15.4.7 Characteristic Code for the NS3

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1010
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



Table 15-54 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS3 board and the port numbers
Interface on the NMS
IN/OUT
NOTE
Logical Ports
The NS3 board can work in compatible mode.
Figure 15-136, Figure 15-137 and Figure 15-138 show the logical Ports of the NS3 board.
Table 15-55 describes the meaning of each port.
NOTE
For TN54NS3:
l
ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when D.2 Board Mode (WDM
Interface) is set to Line Mode.
When used with a TN53TSXL board, Line Rate must be set to Standard Mode for the board.
For TN52NS3: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels only from
the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1011
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-136 Port diagram of the TN54NS3 board

Other
tributary/line/
PID board
Other
tributary/line/
PID board
Other
Other
tributary/line/ tributary/line/
PID board
PID board
Backplane
4xODU2/
ODU2e
ODU3/ODU3e
16 x ODU1
32 x ODU0
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-2
71(ODU2LP1/O
ODU1 DU2LP1)-1001
164(ODU0LP4/
ODU0LP4)-1
164(ODU0LP4/
ODU0LP4)-2
71(ODU2LP1/O
ODU1 DU2LP1)-1004
173(ODU0LP13/
ODU0LP13)-1
173(ODU0LP13/
ODU0LP13)-2
71(ODU2LP1/O
ODU1 DU2LP1)-1013
176(ODU0LP16/
ODU0LP16)-1
176(ODU0LP16/
ODU0LP16)-2
ODU3
81(ODU3LP1/
ODU3LP1)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
71(ODU2LP1/O
ODU1 DU2LP1)-1016
Cross-connect
module
ODU2 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU3 mapping path
Service
processing
module
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be

configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are
required, users only need to configure cross-connections from
other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS.
The board's internal structure enables transmission of the
multiplexed signal to the ODU3LP port. Users do not need to
configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed
signal.
ODU0
mapping path
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to

receive ODUk signals from other boards
ODU1
mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1012
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The ODU1 and ODU2 ports in each of the following combinations cannot be used to configure cross-connections at the same time
because they share the same ODU2 timeslot:
l
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1001 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1004 ODU1 ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 ODU2 port
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1013 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1016 ODU ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-4 ODU2 port

Other
tributary/line/
PID board
Other
tributary/line/
PID board
Other
tributary/line/
PID board
Backplane
32 x ODU0
16 x ODU1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
173
173
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
51
Other
tributary/line/
PID board
ODU2
51
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
54
ODU2
176
176
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
71
(ODU2LP1/
ODU2LP1)-1
71
(ODU2LP1/
ODU2LP1)-4
54
ODU1(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing module
ODU2 mapping path
ODU0 mapping path
Cross-connection that
must be configured on the
NMS to receive ODUk
signals from other boards


1013
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Backplane
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
ODU2 mapping path
Multiplexing module
Cross-connection that must be

configured on the NMS to
receive ODUk signals from
other boards
Table 15-55 Meaning of NM port of the NS3 board

Port Name
Meaning
ODU0LP1ODU0LP16

paths are numbered 1-2.
ODU1LP port
ODU1LP1ODU1LP4

ODU2LP port
ODU2LP1

ODU2LP port
NOTE
This port is used for crossconnections at the ODU1 level.

TN11NS3/TN52NS3: Automatic
cross-connections between the
ports and the IN/OUT port
TN54NS3: Automatic crossconnections between the ports and
the ODU3LP port
ODU3LP1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

path is numbered 1.

between the ports and the IN/OUT
port
1014
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Port Name
Meaning
IN/OUT
Corresponding to the WDM-side

optical interfaces.

l
The
side.
The
NOTE
standard mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1015
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-139 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board (ODU0 level)
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NS3
(compatible
mode)
2
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
Other board c
(standard
mode)
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
board a
board b
board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1016
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-140 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3 board (ODU1 level)
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NS3
(compatible
mode)
2
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
board a
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS/TN54THA/
TN54TOA
borad b
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/
TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/
TN54ENQ2
board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1017
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
WDM side
NS3
(compatible mode)
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
board a
board b
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/
board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1018
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-142 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board (ODU2
level)
Client side
WDM side
NS3
(compatible mode)
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1
4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
board a
TN11NS3:
TN52NS3:
TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/TN53TQX
TN54NS3:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1019
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

board b

TN11NS3:
TN52NS3:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/
TN54ENQ2
TN54NS3:
board c
Client side
1
Other board a
WDM side
NS3
(compatible mode)
WDM side
Other board b
WDM side of the NS3
The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the
WDM side of the NS3
board a
TN53TSXL
board b
TN54NS3

Figure 15-144 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NS3 board.
l
As shown in (1) of Figure 15-144, signals at the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2 levels are
transmitted together.
As shown in (2) of Figure 15-144, signals at the ODU3 level are processed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1020
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-144 Example of service cross-connections on the NS3 board

ODU0
TOM ODU0
TOM
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ND2
NS3
IN1/OUT1
TSXL
ODU3
NS3
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
ODU2
TDX
ODU2
(1)
(2)
15.4.10 NS3 Loopbacks

Table 15-56 lists the types of loopbacks supported by NS3 boards.
Table 15-56 Loopbacks supported by NS3 boards
Cros
sCon
nect
Leve
l
Board
Loopback Type
Description
ODU
0
(avail
able
only
for
Opti
X
OSN
8800)
TN52
NS3
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-145.
Channel outloop
See Figure 15-146.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 15-147.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-148.
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-149.
Channel outloop
See Figure 15-150.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 15-151.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-152.
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-153.
Channel outloop
See Figure 15-154.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 15-155.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-156.
ODU
1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN54
NS3
TN52
NS3

1021
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Cros
sCon
nect
Leve
l
ODU
2/
ODU
2e
ODU
3/
ODU
3e
(avail
able
only
for
Opti
X
OSN
8800)
Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN54
NS3
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-157.
Channel outloop
See Figure 15-158.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 15-159.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-160.
TN11
NS3/
TN52
NS3/
TN54
NS3
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-161.
Channel outloop
See Figure 15-162.
TN11
NS3/
TN52
NS3
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-163.
TN11
NS3
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 15-164.
TN52
NS3
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 15-165.
TN54
NS3
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 15-166.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-167.
TN54
NS3
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 15-168.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-169.
Loopbacks Supported by TN52NS3 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU0

at ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2 loopback points, WDM-side inloops can be performed at ODU2
loopback points and WDM-side outloops can be performed at OTU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1022
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
If channel inloops and channel outloops are configured at ODU2 loopback points, neither inloops nor
outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels.
Similarly, if channel inloops and channel outloops are configured at ODU1 loopback points, neither
inloops nor outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU0 channels.
Channel inloop
Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown inFigure 15-145
, 32 ODU0
services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be
looped back to the backplane at the ODU0 loopback points. The remaining ODU0 services
Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-145
, 32 ODU0
services are cross-connected from the backplane and are converged into 16 ODU1 services.
, 32 ODU0
services are cross-connected from the backplane. The ODU0 services are converged into
16 ODU1 services and then into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services
can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback points. The remaining ODU2

32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU3
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
IN/OUT
Pass-through
services
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
Loopbacked
services

1023
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Channel outloop
Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-146
, one OTU3
service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3
overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is deconverged into four ODU2 services, each
of which is then deconverged into four ODU1 services. After that, each ODU1 service is
further deconverged into two OD0 services. Any N of the ODU0 services can be looped
back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can
be passed through.
, one OTU3
of which is then deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can
be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1
, one OTU3
overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is then deconverged into four ODU2 services.
Any N of the ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1024
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU3
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
IN/OUT
Pass-through
services
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
Loopbacked
services
WDM-side inloop
NOTE
WDM-side inloops and Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points are similar except for the number
of services looped back.
converged into 16 ODU1 services, which are then converged into four ODU2 services. The
four ODU2 services are looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback points.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1025
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-148, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is directly looped
back to the WDM side at the OTU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1026
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-148 WDM-side outloop on the TN52NS3 board

32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked service

at ODU0 and ODU1 loopback points, WDM-side inloop and WDM-side outloop can be
performed at ODU3 loopback point.
NOTE
outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU0 channels.
Channel inloop
, 32 ODU0
, 32 ODU0
services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services. Any
N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1027
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
OTU3
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
Channel outloop
, one OTU3
service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 services after the OTU3
overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is deconverged into 16 ODU1 services, each of
which is then deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the ODU0 services can be
looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0
, one OTU3
overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is then deconverged into 16 ODU1 services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1028
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
OTU3
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
WDM-side inloop
converged into 16 ODU1 services, which are then converged into one ODU3 service. The
ODU3 service is looped back to the backplane at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1029
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-151 WDM-side inloop on the TN54NS3 board
32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked service
WDM-side outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1030
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked service

at ODU1 and ODU2 loopback points, WDM-side inloops can be performed at ODU2 loopback
points and WDM-side outloop can be performed at OTU3 loopback point.
NOTE
outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU1 channels.
Channel inloop
, 16 ODU1
, 16 ODU1
Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points: As shown in Figure 15-153
services are cross-connected from the backplane and are converged into four ODU2
services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane at the
ODU2 loopback points. The remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1031
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
Channel outloop
, one OTU3
of which is then deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can
be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1
service can be passed through.
, one OTU3
overhead is terminated. The ODU3 services is then deconverged into four ODU2 services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1032
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
Pass-through
services
Loopbacked
services
WDM-side inloops
NOTE
WDM-side inloops and Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points are similar except for the number
of services looped back.
converged into four ODU2 services, which are looped back to the backplane at the ODU2
loopback points.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1033
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-156, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is direclty looped
back to the WDM side at the OTU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1034
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked service

at ODU1 loopback points, WDM-side inloop and WDM-side outloop can be performed at ODU3
loopback point.
l
Channel inloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1035
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is then
deconverged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to
the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be
passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1036
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloop
converged into one ODU3 service, which is looped back to the backplane at the ODU3
loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1037
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked service
WDM-side outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1038
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked service
Channel Loopbacks Supported by TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 When the CrossConnect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e

For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops supported
by TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 can be performed at ODU2/ODU2e loopback points.
l
Channel inloop
As shown in Figure 15-161, four ODU2 or ODU2e services are cross-connected from the
backplane. Any N of the four ODU2 or ODU2e services can be looped back to the backplane
at the ODU2 loopback points. The remaining ODU2 or ODU2e services can be passed
through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1039
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-161 Channel inloops on the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
As shown in Figure 15-162, one OTU3 or OTU3e service received on the WDM side is
demapped into one ODU3 or ODU3e service after the OTU3 or OTU3e overhead is
terminated. The ODU3 or ODU3e service is then deconverged into four ODU2 or ODU2e
services. Any N of the ODU2 or ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM side at
the ODU2 loopback points and the remaining ODU2 or ODU2e services can be passed
through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1040
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-162 Channel outloops on TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side Outloops Supported by TN11NS3/TN52NS3 When the Cross-Connect

Level Is ODU2/ODU2e
For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side outloops supported by TN11NS3/
TN52NS3 can be performed at OTU3/OTU3e loopback point.
l
WDM-side outloop
directly looped back to the WDM side at the OTU3 or OTU3e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1041
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-163 WDM-side outloops on the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked service
WDM-side Inloop Supported by TN11NS3 When the Cross-Connect Level Is

ODU2/ODU2e
For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloops can be performed at OTU3/
OTU3e loopback point.
l
WDM-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-164, four ODU2 or ODU2e services cross-connected from the
backplane are converged into one ODU3 or ODU3e service, which is mapped into one
OTU3 or OTU3e service after being added with the OTU3 overhead. The OTU3 or OTU3e
service is looped back to the backplane at the OTU3 or OTU3e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1042
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked service
WDM-side Inloops Supported by TN52NS3 When the Cross-Connect Level Is

ODU2/ODU2e
For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloops can be performed at ODU2/
ODU2e loopback points.
l
WDM-side inloop
backplane are looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 or ODU2e loopback points.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1043
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side Loopbacks Supported by TN54NS3 When the Cross-Connect Level Is

ODU2/ODU2e
For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloop and WDM-side outloop can
be performed at ODU3/ODU3e loopback point.
l
WDM-side inloop
backplane are converged into one ODU3 or ODU3e service, which is looped back to the
backplane at the ODU3 or ODU3e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1044
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked service
WDM-side outloop
terminated. The ODU3 or ODU3e service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3
or ODU3e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1045
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked service
Loopbacks Supported by TN54NS3 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU3/

ODU3e
For ODU3/ODU3e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloop and WDM-side outloop can
be performed at ODU3/ODU3e loopback point.
l
WDM-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-168, one ODU3 or ODU3e service cross-connected from the
backplane are looped back to the backplane at the ODU3 or ODU3e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1046
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked service
WDM-side outloop
terminated. The ODU3 or ODU3e service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3
or ODU3e loopback point.
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked service

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1047
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For parameters of the NS3, refer to Table 15-57.

Table 15-57 NS3 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Channel Loopback
Outloop

information.
Query or set the path Loopback.
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: On
Service Mode
l TN11NS3: not
supported
l TN52NS3:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic

l TN54NS3:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2,
ODU3, Mix
Default: Automatic
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1048
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Enable Auto-Sensing
Disabled, Enabled
Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function

Default: Enabled

supports Line Rate of the received
signals in auto-sensing mode, and
thus no manual setting is required.
l When it is set to Disabled, Line
Rate of the board must be set
manually and the values of the
unavailable.
NOTE
TN54NS3.
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


1049
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Receive Wavelength
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

follows:
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /

default value, which indicates
keeping the receive wavelength the
same as the transmit wavelength of
the local board automatically.
same as the transmit wavelength of
the peer board; otherwise, services
are affected.
NOTE
For ASON services, this parameter must be
set to the default value.
Receive Band Type
C, CWDM
Sets Receive Band Type of a board.
Default: C
NOTE
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
NOTE

information.

1050
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Line Rate
Default:

information.
l ODU2LP channel:
Standard Mode
l ODU2LP channel:
Speedup Mode
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

to Disabled.
NOTE
Only TN52NS3/TN54NS3 supports this
parameter.
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

NOTE
Only TN52NS3/54NS3 supports this
parameter.
PMD Threshold(ps)
Board Mode

Relay Mode, Optical
Relay Mode

Default: Electrical
Relay Mode
NOTE
Only the TN54NS3 supports this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1051
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.4.12 Specifications of the NS3

Board

Module
TN11NS
3

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
N/A

TN52NS
3

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
N/A

TN54NS
3

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
N/A

NOTE
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
ODB
DQPSK
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating frequency
range
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5

1052
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
NA
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5
2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.6
NA
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
-500 to 500
-500 to 500

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
ODB
DQPSK
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating frequency
range
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

1053
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
NA
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5
2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.6
NA
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
-800 to 800
-800 to 800

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
TN11NS3:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN52NS3:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN54NS3:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1054
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Boa
rd
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131C) (W)
TN1
1NS
3

76.8
86

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
67
75
TN5
2NS
3

118
130

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
110
118
TN5
4NS
3

71
78

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
60
66
15.5 TBE
TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board

The available functional version of the TBE board is TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
TBE

1055
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.5.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TBE board converges eight channels of GE services and a
maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and
deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services, converges multiple flatrate GE services into one full-rate GE service, and implements transparent transmission of GEGE services.
Application Scenario 1: Converging/Deconverging 8xGE Services and a Maximum

of 16 Cross-Connect GE Services to/from One 10GE Service
For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-170.
Figure 15-170 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system
8GE Local
client
side
G.694.1
10GE
TBE 4
L4G
G.694.1
MUX
10GE
L4G 4 TBE
DMUX
GE
4
8GE
Local
client
side
L4G
Client side
DMUX
WDM side
GE
L4G 4
MUX
WDM side
Client side
Application Scenario 2: Transparent Transmission of GE-GE Services

For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-171.
Figure 15-171 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system
GE
G.694.1
G.694.1
1
L4G
1
TBE
GE
1
MUX
GE
TBE
GE
1
L4G
DMUX
L4G
MUX
4
Client side
L4G
DMUX
1
8
GE
4
WDM side
WDM side
GE Client side

The TBE board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and ALS.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1056
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-60 Functions and features of the TBE board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Converges eight channels of GE services and a maximum of 16

channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE
services and deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple
GE services.
l Converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE
service.
l Implements transparent transmission of GE-GE services.
The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
The TBE board supports both FE/GE electrical signal and FE/GE optical signal.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports cross-connecting 16 channels of GE signals

to the central working/protection cross-connect board.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of 16 channels of GE signals

from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other
Alarms and
performance
events monitoring
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown
optical signal is received on the backplane side.
QinQ
supported
QoS (Quality of
Service)
Supports CAR (Committed Access Rate) and CoS (Class of Service).
ETH OAM
Supports IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah-compliant ETH OAM

protocol.
LAG (Link
Aggregation
Group)
l Supports the aggregation group protocol to aggregate services from

IP port to Trunk port.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the

FE, GE, 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN.
l Supports manual and static link aggregation.

l Supports payload equalization and non-payload equalization
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
VLAN broadcast
Supports VLAN-based service group broadcast.
CVLAN group
port
Supports a group of CVLAN to be used as one VLAN.

1057
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Layer 2 switching
Supports the MAC address learning and aging.
Flow control
Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and

flow control termination.
EPL (Ethernet
Private Line)
Provides point-to-point EPL dedicated line.
EVPL (Ethernet
Virtual Private
Line)
Provides point-to-multipoint EVPL dedicated line and supports VLANbased switching.
Port working
mode
10GE optical interface: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN

GE optical interface: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation
GE electric interface: auto-negotiation
FE optical interface: 100MFULL
FE electric interface: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL,
auto-negotiation
Test frame
Not supported
PRBS function
Not supported
LPT function
Supported
NOTE
The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for
bidirectional EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source CVLAN and Sink C-VLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Loopback
10GE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
GE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
GE electric
interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
MAC

Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
1058
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
PHY
FE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
FE electric
interface
MAC
PHY
Protocol or
standard
compliance

services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.1q VLAN

MPLS protocols
processing services

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
IEEE IGMP
STP, RSTP, MSTP
R-APS

The TBE board consists of the client-side GE optical module, client-side 10GE optical module,
L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 15-172 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1059
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-172 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board
GE
16
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
16
E/O
TX8
Client-side
GE optical
module
RX
O/E
TX
E/O
L2
switching
module
Cross-connect
module
16
Client-side
10GE optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TBE board accesses the following signals:
l
GE optical signals
FE optical signals
FE electrical signals
GE electrical signals
NOTE
l The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the
corresponding electrical signals.
l It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
l The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals
Convergence of Multiple GE Services into 10GE Services

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1060
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Positive process:
The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from
client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2
switching module. The eight channels of GE electrical signals are converged with a
maximum of sixteen channels of GE electrical signals groomed from the cross-connect
module into one channel of 10GE electrical signals.
The 10GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side 10GE optical module. After
performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out 10GE optical signals through the
TX optical interface.
Negative process:
The client-side 10GE optical module receives 10GE optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, 10GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. This
module deconverges the one channel of 10GE electrical signals into multiple channels
of GE electrical signals.
A maximum of eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side GE
optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out GE optical
signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
A maximum of 16 channels of GE electrical signals are sent to other boards by the crossconnect module through the backplane.
Convergence or Transparent Transmission of GE-to-GE Services

l
Positive process:
The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2
switching module. Based on the service requirement, the L2 switching module either
transparently transmits the received GE signals or converges the received multiple
channels of flat-rate GE signals into one channel of GE signals.
The GE signals are sent to other boards by the cross-connect module through the
backplane.
Negative process:
The cross-connect module receives the GE electrical signals groomed from other boards
GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The L2 switching module
either transparently transmits the received GE signals or deconverges the received GE
signals into multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals.
The client-side GE optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals,
and then outputs the optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE/10GE optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1061
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to GE/10GE optical signals.
l
L2 switching module
Implements cross-connecting 16 GE signals to the other boards through the backplane.
The grooming service signals are GE signals.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports cross-connecting 16 channels of GE signals to the central
working/protection cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of 16 channels of GE signals from one board
of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the
mesh group.

Power supply module

15.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TBE board.

Figure 15-173 shows the front panel of the TBE board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1062
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-173 Front panel of the TBE board
TBE
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
TX
RX
TBE
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eighteen optical interfaces on the front panel of the TBE board. Table 15-61 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1063
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-61 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TBE board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX8
LC

TX
LC
Transmits the 10 GE service signal to the client-side

equipment.
RX1-RX8
LC

RX
LC
Receives the 10 GE service signal from the client-side

equipment.
NOTE
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Hazard Level

15.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TBE board.
Table 15-62 shows the valid slots for the TBE board.
Table 15-62 Valid slots for the TBE board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1064
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-63 Mapping between the physical ports on the TBE board and the port numbers
Physical Port
TX/RX
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
10
TX8/RX8
11
NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections.
Figure 15-174 describes the application model of the TBE board. Table 15-64 describes the
Figure 15-174 Port diagram of the TBE board
16 x GE
Backplane
PORT3
PORT4
PORT11
Client side
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
101(AP1/AP1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
L2 switching
model
Cross-connect
model
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other
boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1065
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-64 Meaning of NM port of the TBE board

Port Name
Meaning
PORT3
The port corresponds to the client side optical interface RX/

TX.
PORT4-PORT11
These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8.
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
AP1-AP16

If the TBE board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The deconvergence of the 10GE services that are accessed
from the client-side PORT3 port is implemented through the L2 switching module.
Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which do not need to be set on the U2000.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the AP port of other boards, as shown
in Figure 15-175. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board
by
are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
service deconvergence.)
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the LP port of other boards, as shown
in Figure 15-175. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board
by
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service
convergence.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1066
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-175 Cross-connection diagram of the TBE board

Client side
WDM side
Other board
Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
103(AP3/AP3)-1
201(LP/LP)-3
104(AP4/AP4)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
101(AP1/AP1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
116(AP16/AP16)-1
TBE
The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the

client side of other boards
The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the


TN11TQM/TN12TQM
15.5.9 TBE Loopbacks

Table 15-65 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TN11TBE board.
Table 15-65 Loopbacks supported by TN11TBE board
Service
Type
Loopback Type
Description
10GE
PHY outloop
See Figure 15-176.
PHY inloop
See Figure 15-177.
MAC outloop
See Figure 15-178.
MAC inloop
See Figure 15-179.
PHY outloop
See Figure 15-180.
PHY inloop
See Figure 15-181.
MAC inloop
See Figure 15-182.
PHY inloop
See Figure 15-183.
MAC inloop
See Figure 15-184.
FE/GE
electrical port
FE/GE optical
port
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1067
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

PHY and MAC Loopbacks of 10GE Services on the TN11TBE Board

l
PHY outloop
As shown in Figure 15-176, one 10GE service received on the client side is loopbacked to
the client side at the PHY loopback point.
Figure 15-176 PHY outloop of one 10GE service on the TN11TBE board
PHY
RX1/TX1
MAC
VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect
module
PHY
RX8/TX8
RX/TX
10GE
PHY
MAC
MAC
VCTRUNK16
L2 switching module
Client-side
TBE board
Backplane
Loopbacked services
PHY inloop
As shown in Figure 15-177, a maximum of 16 GE services from the backplane and eight
GE services (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8) received on the L2 switch module are converged into
one 10GE service and is loopbacked at the PHY loopback point.
Figure 15-177 PHY inloop of one 10GE service on the TN11TBE board
PHY
RX1/TX1
MAC
VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect
module
PHY
RX8/TX8
RX/TX
10GE
PHY
MAC
MAC
VCTRUNK16
L2 switching module
TBE board
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
MAC outloop
As shown in Figure 15-178, one 10GE service received on the client side is loopbacked to
the client side at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1068
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-178 MAC outloop of one 10GE service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1
PHY
MAC
VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect
module
RX8/TX8
RX/TX
10GE
PHY
MAC
PHY
MAC
VCTRUNK16
L2 switching module
TBE board
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
MAC inloop
As shown in Figure 15-179, a maximum of 16 GE services from the backplane and eight
GE services (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8) received on the L2 switch module are converged into
one 10GE service and is loopbacked at the MAC loopback point.
Figure 15-179 MAC inloop of one 10GE service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1
PHY
MAC
VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect
module
PHY
RX8/TX8
10GE
RX/TX
PHY
MAC
MAC
VCTRUNK16
L2 switching module
TBE board
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of FE/GE (Electrical Port) Services on the TN11TBE
Board
l
PHY outloop
As shown in Figure 15-180, eight FE/GE services are received on the client side. One of
the eight FE/GE services is loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1069
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-180 PHY outloop of one FE/GE (electrical port) service on the TN11TBE board
PHY
RX1/TX1
MAC
VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect
module
RX8/TX8
PHY
MAC
PHY
MAC
10GE
RX/TX
VCTRUNK16
L2 switching module
Client-side
TBE Board
Backplane
Loopbacked services
PHY inloop
As shown in Figure 15-181, one 10GE service received on the client side of the L2 switch
module is deconverged into eight GE services or eight GE services are cross-connected
from the backplane of a cross-connect module. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked
at the PHY loopback point.
Figure 15-181 PHY inloop of one FE/GE (electrical port) service on the TN11TBE board
PHY
RX1/TX1
MAC
VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect
module
RX8/TX8
RX/TX
10GE
PHY
MAC
PHY
MAC
VCTRUNK16
L2 switching module
Client-side
TBE board
Backplane
Loopbacked services
MAC inloop
module is deconverged into eight GE services or eight GE services are cross-connected
from the backplane of a cross-connect module. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked
at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1070
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-182 MAC inloop of one FE/GE (electrical port) service on the TN11TBE board
PHY
RX1/TX1
MAC
VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect
module
RX8/TX8
10GE
RX/TX
PHY
MAC
PHY
MAC
VCTRUNK16
L2 switching module
TBE board
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of FE/GE (Optical Port) Services on the TN11TBE Board
l
PHY inloop
module is deconverged into eight GE services. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked
at the PHY loopback point.
Figure 15-183 PHY inloop of one FE/GE (optical port) service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1
PHY
MAC
VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect
module
RX8/TX8
RX/TX
10GE
PHY
MAC
PHY
MAC
VCTRUNK16
L2 switching module
TBE board
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
MAC inloop
module is deconverged into eight GE services. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked
at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1071
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-184 MAC inloop of one FE/GE (optical port) service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1
PHY
MAC
VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect
module
RX8/TX8
RX/TX
10GE
PHY
MAC
PHY
MAC
VCTRUNK16
L2 switching module
TBE board
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services

For parameters of the TBE, refer to Table 15-66.
Table 15-66 TBE parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Laser Status
Off, On

status of a board.
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled

(LPT).
15.5.11 Specifications of the TBE

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1072
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Client-Side Fixed Optical

Module
Client-Side Pluggable Optical

Module
TN11TB
E
N/A
100 BASE-FX-10 km
100 BASE-FX-80 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40
km
km
10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km
NOTE

Table 15-67 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FE services
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
100 BASE-FX-10 km
100 BASE-FX-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
10
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-11.5
-2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
Central frequency
nm
1310
1550

1073
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Eye pattern mask
Value
100 BASE-FX-10 km
100 BASE-FX-80 km
IEEE802.3zcompliant
IEEE802.3zcompliant

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
(EOL)
dBm
-19
-22
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

1074
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
Std 802.3.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5

1075
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3
1530 to 1565
840 to 860

Operating
wavelength
range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565

1076
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate )
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1

1077
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TBE
40.7
44.8
15.6 TDG
TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board

Only one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is, TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
TDG

1078
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.6.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDG board implements conversion between two channels of
GE optical signals and two channels of GE electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical
signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TDG board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-185.
Figure 15-185 Position of the TDG board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
GE
TDG
NS2
NS2
DMUX
Client side
DMUX
TDG
GE
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side

The TDG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 15-71 Functions and features of the TDG board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts between two channels of GE optical signals and two channels of GE

electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical signals through the crossconnect board or with the board in the paired slot.
Client-side
service type
Crossconnect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of an ODU1 signal and

two GE signals between the TDG and the cross-connect board or the board
in the paired slot through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one ODU1 signal and two
GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical
signal is received on the backplane side.
l Monitors alarms and performance events of the OTN.


1079
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Supported
Test frame
Supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Protocols or
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3z

1080
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TDG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 15-186 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1081
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-186 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board
2 X GE/ 1 X ODU1
Client side
RX1
O/E
RX2
TX1
TX2
E/O
GE
Encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TDG board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the TDG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDG to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out two channels of
GE signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then,
If the signals are GE signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1082
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing,
demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of
GE signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and
then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal

Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TDG and the board in
the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming
service signals are GE and ODU1 signals.
Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane.
The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU1
performance.
Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals.

Power supply module

15.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1083
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Figure 15-187 shows the front panel of the TDG board.
Figure 15-187 Front panel of the TDG board
TDG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TDG
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1084
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDG board. Table 15-72 lists the type
Table 15-72 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDG board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

15.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TDG board.
Table 15-73 shows the valid slots for the TDG board.
Table 15-73 Valid slots for the TDG board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


Table 15-74 Mapping between the physical ports on the TDG board and the port numbers
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Physical Port
TX1/RX1
3
1085
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Physical Port
TX2/RX2
NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 15-188 describes the application model of the TDG board. Table 15-75 describes the
Figure 15-188 Port diagram of the TDG board
Other line/
OTU board
Other tributary/
PID board
Backplane
2 x GE
201
(LP/LP)-1
3
(RX1/TX1)-1
201
(LP/LP)-2
4
(RX2/TX2)-1
ODU1
201
(LP/LP)-1
Client Side
Crossconnect
module

Multiplexin
g module
Table 15-75 Meaning of NM port of the TDG board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2

1086
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Port Name
Meaning
LP
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1and

2.

If the TDG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports to implement the cross-connect grooming of
GE services. The following three cross-connections can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the TDG board
(Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
and
in Figure 15-189.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TDG board and the LP port
of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TDG board are
cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
in Figure 15-189.
of the TDG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the client side of the TDG board for protection and the inter-board
in Figure 15-189.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1087
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-189 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board

Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
Client side
WDM side
4
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
3
4(RX2/TX2)-1
2
1
201(LP/LP)-2
TDG
The straight-through of the TDGboard
The internal cross-connection of the TDG board
The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
TDG board
3
4

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1
cross-connection between the LP port and ODU1LP port of other boards (or IN/OUT port
of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as
shown in Figure 15-190.

1088
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-190 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board

WDM side
Other board a
(compatible
mode)
Other board b
(standard
mode)
201(LP/LP)-1
TDG
201(LP/LP)-2
Client side
The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM
side of other boards
Other board a TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/

Other board b TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
15.6.9 TDG Parameters

For parameters of TDG, refer to Table 15-76.
Table 15-76 TDG parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.

1089
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Off, On

Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None

information.
pass-through (LPT).
Ethernet services.
information.
board resides.
information.
15.6.10 Specifications of the TDG

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1090
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board

Module

Module
TN11TD
G
N/A

1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
km
km
NOTE
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2

1091
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2

1092
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TDG
30
33
15.7 TDX
TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1093
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The available functional versions of the TDX board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
TDX
TN12
TDX
TN52
TDX
TN53
TDX

Function:
l
The TN11TDX board supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU1
electrical signals. The TN12TDX board supports the conversion between the client-side
signals and ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN52TDX board supports the conversion
between the client-side signals and ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN53TDX board
supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
electrical signals.
Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board supports the OTU2/OTU2e service on the client
side.
Only the TN53TDX board supports the FC800 and FC1200 services on the client side.
Only the TN53TDX board supports two channels of IEEE 1588v2 function.
Only the TN53TDX board supports two channels of the physical clock function.

Specification:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 15.7.11 Specifications of
the TDX.

1094
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-79 Substitution rules of the TDX board
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11TDX
None
TN12TDX
TN53TDX
The TN53TDX can be created as TN12TDX on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the
TN12TDX.
TN52TDX
TN53TDX
The TN53TDX can be created as TN52TDX on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the
TN52TDX.
TN53TDX
None
15.7.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDX board implements conversion between two channels of
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and
eight channels of ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals or two ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex electrical signals using cross-connections.
For the position of the TDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-191, Figure 15-192 and
Figure 15-193.
Figure 15-191 Position of the TN11TDX board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
4
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
NS2
MUX
NS2 4
DMUX
TDX
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
TDX
4
DMUX
NS2
Client side
WDM side
NS2 4
MUX
WDM side
Client side
Figure 15-192 Position of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board in the WDM system

G.694.1
G.694.1
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
MUX
TDX
DMUX
ND2
ND2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side

TDX
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
Client side
1095
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-193 Position of the TN53TDX board in the WDM system

G.694.1
G.694.1
10G E LAN
10G E WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
FC800
FC1200
MUX
TD X
Client side
DMUX
ND2
ND2
DMUX
10G E LAN
10G E WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
FC800
FC1200
TDX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The TN11TDX board supports the conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192 optical signals and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals.
The TN12TDX board supports the conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
The TN52TDX board supports conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
The TN53TDX board supports conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
electrical signals, and supports conversion between two channels of FC800 optical signals and two channels
of ODUflex electrical signals.

The TDX board is mainly used to achieve cross-connections at the electrical layer.
For detailed functions and features, see Table 15-80.
Table 15-80 Functions and features of the TDX board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
TDX convert signal as follows:

l TN11TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<>8xODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals
l TN12TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<>2xODU2/ODU2e
l TN52TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/
OTU2e<->2xODU2/ODU2e
l TN53TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/
OTU2e/FC800/FC1200<->2xODU2/ODU2e, 2xFC800<>2xODUflex
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1096
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

NOTE
The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same.
Therefore, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the
STM-64 service on the U2000.
Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services.
Only the TN53TDX board supports FC800 and FC1200 services.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800:

l TN52TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/
ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board
using the backplane.
ODU2e/ODUflex signals between the TDX board and the crossconnect board using the backplane.
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11TDX: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU1
signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board or the
board in the paired slot using the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l TN11TDX: Supports the grooming of eight channels of ODU1 signals
from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the
other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1097
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
OTN function
l Maps each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2 signals at the ODU2
interface of the backplane.
to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T
G.709 and G.Sup43.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
LPT function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service
type is 10GE LAN.
PRBS function
NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service
type is STM-64/OC-192.
Test frame
Supports the test frame of 10GE LAN services.
IEEE 1588v2
Supports two channels of IEEE 1588v2 only when the TN53TDX board
receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent
Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, or receives OTU2 services on its
client side.
Physical clock
Supports two channels of physical clock only when the TN53TDX board
Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN52TDX/TN53TDX
Protection
scheme

l Supports tributary SNCP protection (TN12TDX/TN52TDX/
TN53TDX).
XFP
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

1098
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3ae
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TDX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 15-194, Figure 15-195 and Figure 15-196 show the functional modules and signal flow
of the TDX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1099
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-194 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TDX board
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
OTN
processing
module
8 x ODU1
Crossconnet
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
1100
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-195 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
ODU2/ODU2e
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
E/O
OTN
processing
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
1101
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-196 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TDX board
ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
E/O
OTN
processing
module
1588
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TDX board can access the following optical signals:
l

NOTE
Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board supports the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.

Only the TN53TDX board supports FC800 and FC1200 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1102
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDX to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX2 ports, and performs O/E conversion.
processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of ODU1
signals or two channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals to the backplane for grooming.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives eight channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of
ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations
such as ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex framing, demapping and decapsulation
processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs two
channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 ports.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/
FC1200 optical signals.

The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and
mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing
module.
NOTE
The signal processing module of the TN12TDX, TN52TDX and TN53TDX do not contain a crossconnect unit. This board, however, is always connected to the cross-connect board.

Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the
ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse
process and monitors SDH/SONET performance.
Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the
ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse
process and monitors 10GE LAN performance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1103
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/
ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process
and has the FC performance monitoring function.
NOTE
FC800 services can be mapped into ODU2/ODUflex payload area and FC1200 services can be mapped
into ODU2e payload area.

Frames ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals and processes overheads in ODU1/
ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals.
l
1588v2 module
According to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, the module transmits the clock information of the
clock board to the next NE or extracts the clock information from the service board and
then transmits the clock information to the clock board.

Power supply module

15.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDX board.

Appearance of the front panel of the TDX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1104
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-197 Front panel of the TN11TDX/TN53TDX board
TDX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TDX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1105
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-198 Front panel of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
TDX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TDX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDX board. Table 15-81 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1106
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-81 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDX board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

15.7.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TDX board.
Table 15-82 shows the valid slots for the TN11TDX board.
Table 15-82 Valid slots for the TN11TDX board
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 15-83 shows the valid slots for the TN12TDX board.
Table 15-83 Valid slots for the TN12TDX board
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-84 shows the valid slots for the TN52TDX and TN53TDX board.
Table 15-84 Valid slots for the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU36
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

1107
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



Table 15-85 Mapping between the physical ports on the TDX board and the port numbers
Physical Port
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP/
151(imp1/imp1)-1 is a logical port of the board.
Figure 15-199, Figure 15-200, Figure 15-201 show the port diagrams of the TDX board. Table
15-86 describes the meaning of each port.
Figure 15-199 Port diagram of the TN11TDX
Other line/PID board
Backplane
8 x ODU1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
151(imp1/imp1)-1
151(imp1/imp1)-2
151(imp1/imp1)-3
151(imp1/imp1)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-1
152(imp2/imp2)-2
152(imp2/imp2)-3
152(imp2/imp2)-4

1108
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-200 Port diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX

Backplane
2 x ODU2/ODU2e
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Figure 15-201 Port diagram of the TN53TDX

Other line/
PID board
Backplane
2 x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1

configured on the NMS.
Table 15-86 Meaning of NMS port of the TDX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2
imp1-imp2
Inverse multiplexing ports. The optical channels are

ClientLP1-ClientLP2
Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.

1109
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


If the TDX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
TN11TDX: Configuration of cross-connection

In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the
service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, configure the
bandwidth binding of the imp port.
NOTE
The bandwidth of each imp port that accesses 10GE must be bound with 4 ODU1s.
For bandwidth binding, each 10GE signal must be bound in order. For example, when the TN11TDX
board works with the TN12NS2 board, imp1.1 must be bound to ODU1LP1.1, imp1.2 must be bound
to ODU1LP1.2, and so on.
level cross-connections between the imp port and the IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2
board (or the ODU1LP port of other board), realizing the cross-connect grooming of ODU1
services, as shown in Figure 15-202.
l
TN12TDX/TN52TDX: Configuration of cross-connection

level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of other board,
as shown in Figure 15-203.
TN53TDX: Configuration of cross-connection

Create ODU2 cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service
pass-through.
In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to set the
Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode
(Any->ODU2->OTU2)
level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of other board,
as shown in Figure 15-203.
Create ODUflex cross-connections between this board and other boards to support
service pass-through.
In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to set the
Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence
mode (Any->ODUflex)
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the
ODUflex level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODUflex port of
other board, as shown in Figure 15-204.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1110
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The TN53TDX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring
cross-connections for the board, set ODUflex Timeslot to 7.
Figure 15-202 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TDX

WDM side
Other board a
(standard
mode)
Cross-connect
module
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
Client side
151(imp1/imp1)-1
151(imp1/imp1)-2
151(imp1/imp1)-3
151(imp1/imp1)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-1
152(imp2/imp2)-2
152(imp2/imp2)-3
152(imp2/imp2)-4
TDX
Cross-connect
module
The client side of the TDX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a
Other board b
TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1
Mode)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1111
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-203 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX

WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
Cross-connect
module
Other board a
(standard
mode)
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
Client side
TDX
Cross-connect
module
Other board a
Other board b
TN12TDX:
TN52TDX:
TN53TDX:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1112
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-204 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TDX

WDM side
Other board
Cross-connect mode
Client side
TDX
Cross-connect mode
Other board
15.7.9 TDX Loopbacks

Table 15-87 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TDX boards.
Table 15-87 Loopbacks supported by TDX boards
Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN11TDX
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-205.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-206.
TN12TDX/
TN52TDX
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-207.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-208.
TN53TDX
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-209.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-210.
Loopbacks Supported by TN11TDX

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-205, any N of two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192
services from the client side can be looped back to the client side and the remaining 10GE
LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1113
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-205 Client-side outloop on the TN11TDX board

ODU1
RX1/TX1
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
RX2/TX2
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-206, eight ODU1 services from the backplane are converted into
two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services after being framed, demapped, and
decapsulated. Any N of the two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services can be
looped back to the backplane and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192
service can be passed through.
Figure 15-206 Client-side inloop on the TN11TDX board
ODU1
RX1/TX1
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
RX2/TX2
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN12TDX/TN52TDX

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-207, any N of the two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192
services from the client side can be looped back to the client side and the remaining 10GE
LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1114
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-207 Client-side outloop on the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192
RX1/TX1
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-208, two ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane are converted
into two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services after being framed, demapped,
and decapsulated. Any N of the two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services
can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192 service can be passed through.
Figure 15-208 Client-side inloop on the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192
RX1/TX1
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN53TDX

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-209, any N of two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/
FC800/FC1200 services from the client side can be looped back and the remaining 10GE
LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1115
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-209 Client-side outloop on the TN53TDX board
10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC192/FC800/FC1200
RX1/TX1
10GE LAN/10GE
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-210, two ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex services from the backplane are
converted into two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services
after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. Any N of the two 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services can be looped back to the backplane and
the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 service can be
passed through.
Figure 15-210 Client-side inloop on the TN53TDX board
10GE LAN/10GE
RX1/TX1
10GE LAN/10GE
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
NOTE
When receiving OTU2/OTU2e services, the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board supports client-side inloops and
outloops.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1116
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


For parameters of the TDX, refer to Table 15-88.
Table 15-88 TDX parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Service Type
Outloop

information.
l TN11TDX: 10GE
LAN, OC-192,
STM-64

Default: 10GE LAN

l TN12TDX: None,
10GE LAN,
OC-192, STM-64
Default: None
l TN52TDX: None,
10GE LAN,
OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2E, STM-64
Default: None
l TN53TDX: None,
10GE LAN, 10GE
WAN, OC-192,
OTU-2, OTU-2E,
STM-64, FC800,
FC1200
Default: None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1117
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Port Mapping
l TN11TDX: doesn't
support this
parameter

queries the mapping mode of a port
service.
l TN12TDX/
TN52TDX/
TN53TDX: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC transparent
mapping (10.7G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
NOTE
For the TN12TDX: only
the ClientLP1 port
supports MAC
transparent mapping
(10.7G).
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,

300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: Enabled
Default: 0s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.
automatically disabling lasers. With
ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time
period from the point when the system
detects service interruption to the point
when ALS automatically shuts down the
related lasers.
NOTE
Only the TN53TDX supports this
parameter.

1118
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,

300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s

automatically enabling lasers. With
detects service recovery to the point
when ALS automatically enables the
related lasers.
Default: 0s
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
NOTE
Only the TN53TDX supports this
parameter.

pass-through (LPT).
Client Mode, OTN

Mode

NOTE
Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this
parameter.

PAUSE Frame Flow
Control
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

switch of the flow control.
NOTE
Only TN11TDX supports this parameter.
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600
Default: 9600

Ethernet services.
NOTE
For the TN52TDX and TN53TDX board,
when Port Mapping is set to Bit
Transparent Mapping(11.1G),
Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on
the U2000.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1119
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled

to Disabled.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this
parameter.
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Service
Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.

FEC
FEC Mode
Default: FEC

NOTE

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

board resides.
information.

1120
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled

commissioning.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
TN53TDX.
Port Working Mode

(Any->ODU2>OTU2), ODUflex
non-convergence mode
(Any->ODUflex),
NONE Mode(Not for
port)

NOTE
TN53TDX.

(Any->ODU2->OTU2)
15.7.11 Specifications of the TDX

Board

Module

Module
TN11TD
X/
TN12TD
X/
TN52TD
X
N/A
TN53TD
X
N/A
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1121
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA

1122
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
30
30
30
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate )
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12

1123
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
l
TN11TDX: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb)
TN12TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1124
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN52TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb)
TN53TDX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TDX
78.0
80.0
TN12TDX
37.4
40.7
TN52TDX
57.3
63.0
TN53TDX
25.0
35.0
15.8 THA
THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

The available functional version of the THA board is TN54.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN54
THA
15.8.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the THA at the client side is 40
Gbit/s.
The THA board has four scenarios.
l
Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0).
Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1).
Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1).
Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
The THA board supports two types of service package:

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1125
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16*GE for ODU0

By applying this service package, users can set the working mode of the sixteen client-side
ports on the board to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the port service
type GE at the same time.
16*STM-16/OC-48 for ODU1

By applying this service package, users can set the working mode of the eight client-side
type to STM-16/OC-48 at the same time.
THA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)

The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at any rate in the
range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure
15-211.
Figure 15-211 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 1)
G.694.1
125Mbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
THA
MUX
G.694.1
4
DMUX
NQ2
THA
NQ2
16
16
DMUX
16
MUX
125Mbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
16
4
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI and ESCON services can be accessed.
If all the sixteen client-side ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can apply the 16*GE for
ODU0 service package to the board on the NMS.
THA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)

range of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure
15-212.
G.694.1
1.49Gbit/s
2.67Gbit/s
16
1
THA
G.694.1
MUX
NQ2
16
4
DMUX
THA
16
MUX
1
NQ2
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
DMUX
1.49Gbit/s
2.67Gbit/s
16
WDM side

1126
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, and OTU1 services can
be accessed.
If all the sixteen client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can apply the
16*STM-16/OC-8 for ODU1 service package to the board on the NMS.
THA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1)

range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.2 Gbit/s and two to sixteen channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see
Figure 15-213. The THA board converges multiple client-side services into two ODU1 electrical
signals or maps one client-side service into one channel of electrical ODU1 electrical signals.
NOTE
The client signals received by the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports cannot be encapsulated together with the client
signals received by the RX9/TX9RX16/TX16 ports.

G.694.1
125Mbit/s
2.2Gbit/s
THA
DMUX
THA
NQ2
16
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
16
16
MUX
G.694.1
16
WDM side
125Mbit/s
2.2Gbit/s
WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the Any, FE, FDDI, GE, FC100, FC200, DVB-ASI, ESCON, STM-1,
STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , FICON and FICON Express services can be accessed.
THA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

The THA board performs conversion between 16 OTU1 optical signals and 32 ODU0 electrical
signals, see Figure 15-214.
G.694.1
G.694.1
THA
OTU1
16
MUX
NQ2
32
4
DMUX
THA
OTU1
32
MUX
1
NQ2
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
DMUX
16
WDM side

1127
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The THA board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
Table 15-91 Functions and features of the THA board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
THA convert signal as follows:

l 16x125Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s<->16xODU0.
l 16x1.49Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s<->16xODU1.
l 16x125Mbit/s to 2.2Gbit/s<->1 to 16xODU1.
l 16xOTU1<->32xODU0.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
The THA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Crossconnect
capabilities
Cross-connects a maximum of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels

of ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board.
OTN
function
l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The
board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers,
and the PM function at the ODU0 layer.
l Supports the PM function at ODU1 layer, and the non-intrusive
monitoring function at the TCM and ODU0 layers.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1128
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
ESC
function
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
LPT function
This function is supported only when the THA board receives FE or GE

services on its client side.
PRBS
function
Test frame
Supported
NOTE
is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1
NOTE
The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFPT).
IEEE
1588v2
When receiving GE(GFP-T) and OTU1 services on the client side, the board
can process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
NOTE
When receiving OTU1 services, the TX8/RX8 and TX16/RX16 optical ports cannot
process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
When receiving GE(TTT-AGMP) services, the board can transparently

transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
Physical
clock
Supported only when the THA board receives GE(GFP-T) services on its
client side.
Supported.
Protection
scheme

eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

side.

1129
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Loopback
Channel
Loopback
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
Inloop
Outloop
Supported
NOTE
The Channel Loopback is supported only when
port working mode is ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Interface (ASI)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1130
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The THA board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Signal flow
Figure 15-215 shows the block diagram of the functions of the THA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1131
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-215 Functional modules and signal flow of the THA board
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
Service
OTN
encapsulation
processing
and mapping
module
module
RX8
TX1
TX2
16X ODU0/8X ODU1
16X ODU0/8X ODU1
E/O
Crossconnect
module
TX8

RX9
RX10
1588
O/E
RX16
OTN
processing
module
TX9
TX10
E/O
TX16
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Crossconnect
module
Control
Memory
Communication
CPU

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
NOTE
For more information regarding the type of signals received on the client side, see section 15.8.3 Functions
and Features.
In the signal flow of the THA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the THA to the backplane
of the THA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives 16 channels of optical signals from client equipment
through the RX1-RX16 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the 16 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1132
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 32
channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The
module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 16 channels of Any signals to the
client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and
then outputs 16 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX16 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals.
to standard optical signals.

module, OTN processing module.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the THA and the cross-connect
board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 or ODU0 signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/
ODU1/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has
the Any performance monitoring function.
Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
1588 module
The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according
to the 1588 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from
a service board according to the 1588 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG
board.

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

1133
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the THA board.

Figure 15-216 shows the front panel of the THA board.
Figure 15-216 Front panel of the THA board
SM SFP WORK WITH
G.657B FIBER ONLY
G.657B
RX 1
2 TX
THA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
RX 1
2 TX
TX 15
16 RX
TX 15
16 RX

1134
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Label
Label
Description
Supports single-mode optical module,and
uses G.657A2 optical fibers.
SM SFP WORK WITH

G.657A2 FIBER ONLY
G.657A2
Indicators
l
Interfaces
Table 15-92 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Table 15-92 Types and functions of the interfaces on the THA board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1-RX16
LC
Receives optical signals.
TX1-TX16
LC
Transmits optical signals.
Laser Hazard Level

15.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one THA board.
Table 15-93 shows the valid slots for the THA board.
NOTE
Two THA boards cannot be housed in adjacent slots.

To easy maintenance of fibers, do not house the THA board in the most left or right slot.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1135
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-93 Valid slots for the THA board

Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU33, IU36IU42, IU45-IU51, IU54-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17


Table 15-94 Mapping between the physical ports on the THA board and the port numbers
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Physical Port
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
TX9/RX9
11
TX10/RX10
12
TX11/RX11
13
TX12/RX12
14
TX13/RX13
15
TX14/RX14
16
TX15/RX15
17
1136
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Physical Port
TX16/RX16
18
NOTE
Logical Ports
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP
Figure 15-217 to Figure 15-220 show the port diagrams for the THA. Table 15-95 to Table
15-98 describe the meaning of each port.
The THA board's NM ports may work in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1
non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1),
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). Select a proper working mode on the NMS as
required.
Figure 15-217 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0))
Backplane
16xODU0
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
18(RX16/TX16)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1137
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-218 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))
Backplane
16xODU1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
16(RX14/TX14)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-1
18(RX16/TX16)-1
Figure 15-219 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1))
Backplane
1-16xODU1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-1
18(RX16/TX16)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1138
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-220 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0))
Backplane
32xODU0
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-1
18(RX16/TX16)-1
Cross-connect
module
Automatic cross-connection, which does

not need to be configured on the NMS.
Multiplexing module

on the NMS.
Service processing
module
Table 15-95 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0))
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1RX8/TX8

interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered

1 to 2..
Table 15-96 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1RX8/TX8

interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8

1.

1139
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-97 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1))
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1RX8/TX8

interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8

1 to 8.
Table 15-98 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0))
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1RX8/TX8

interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8

1.
ODU0LP1ODU0LP8

1 to 2.

If the THA board is used to transmit services, set Port Working Mode in Configuration >
Working Mode on the U2000.
The valid values of the port working mode field are ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)

l
On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0).
Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
NOTE
If all the 16 clientside ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can configure the 16 *
GE->ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the working mode to
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the service type to GE for the 16 ports.
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and
ClientLP ports. For details, see
in Figure 15-221.
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other
boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
in Figure 15-221.

1140
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-221 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0))
WDM side
Other board a
(standard mode)
Other board
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
THA
16(TX14/RX14)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1
18(TX16/RX16)-1
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS
Other board TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2

a
Other board TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/
b
TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
NOTE
When the TOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side
optical port on the TOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the TOA
board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board
to the client-side ports on the TOA board.

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to .

1141
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
If all the 16 client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can configure
the 16 * STM-16/OC-48>ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the working
mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and service type to STM-16/OC-48 for the 16
ports.
in Figure 15-222.
Figure 15-222 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1))
WDM side
Other board a
(standard mode)
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
THA
16(TX14/RX14)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1
18(TX16/RX16)-1
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

a
Other board TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/
b
TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1142
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1)

l
l
l
On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1).
On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ClientLP port.
For details, see 1 in Figure 15-223.

Create cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODU1LP ports.
For details, see
in Figure 15-223.
Figure 15-223 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1))
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Other board a
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 (standard mode)
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
2
17(TX15/RX15)-1
18(TX16/RX16)-1
THA
Multiplexing module
The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which

a
b
TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1143
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured
on the first optical channel of each ClientLP.
The first eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the first
eight LP ports; the last eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only
to the last eight LP ports.
Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

l
On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0).
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ODU0LP port and
other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see
in Figure 15-224.
Figure 15-224 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
WDM side
Other board a
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 (standard mode)
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1
18(TX16/RX16)-1
THA
Multiplexing module

a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1144
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


b
TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
15.8.9 THA Loopbacks

Table 15-99 lists the types of loopbacks supported by THA boards.
Table 15-99 Loopbacks supported by THA boards
B
oa
rd
Port Working Mode
Loopback Type
Description
T
N
54
T
H
A

(Any->ODU0)
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-225.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-226.

(Any->ODU1)
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-227.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-228.
ODU1 convergence
mode (n*Any>ODU1)
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-229.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-230.
ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-231.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-232.
Channel outloop
See Figure 15-233.
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-234.
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-225, sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services are received on the
client side. Any N of the sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to
the client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1145
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
16
RX1/TX1
125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s

ODU0
RX8/TX8

ODU0
RX9/TX9

ODU0
RX16/TX16

ODU0
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-226, sixteen ODU0 services received from the backplane is
demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services. Any
N of the sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The
remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1146
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
16
RX1/TX1

ODU0
RX8/TX8

ODU0
RX9/TX9

ODU0
RX16/TX16

ODU0
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-227, sixteen 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s services are received on the
client side.
When receiving STMsixteen/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express services, Client-side
outloop: as shown in Figure 15-227
When receiving OTU1 services, Client-side outloop: as shown in Figure 15-227
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1147
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
16
RX1/TX1
1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s

ODU1
RX8/TX8

ODU1
RX9/TX9

ODU1
RX16/TX16

ODU1
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services at the

ODU1 loopback points
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-228, sixteen ODU1 services received from the backplane is
demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into sixteen 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s services.
When receiving STMsixteen/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express services, Client-side
inloop: as shown in Figure 15-228
When receiving OTU1 services, Client-side inloop: as shown in Figure 15-228
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1148
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
16
RX1/TX1

ODU1
RX8/TX8

ODU1
RX9/TX9

ODU1
RX16/TX16

ODU1
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-229, sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services are received on the
client side. Any N of the sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the
client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1149
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
RX1/TX1
1 - 8
xODU1
RX8/TX8

RX9/TX9

1 - 8
xODU1
RX16/TX16
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-230, two to sixteen ODU1 services received from the backplane is
demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services. Any N
of the sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1150
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
RX1/TX1
1 - 8
xODU1
RX8/TX8

RX9/TX9

1 - 8
xODU1
RX16/TX16
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-231, sixteen OTU1 services received on the client side are
demapped into sixteen ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Then the
sixteen ODU1 services are deconverged into 32 ODU0 services. Any N of the 32 ODU0
through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1151
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
16
RX1/TX1
OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
RX16/TX16
OTU1
32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-232, 32 ODU0 services are received from the backplane. Any N
of 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining ODU0 services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1152
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
16
RX1/TX1
OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
RX16/TX16
OTU1
32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
As shown in Figure 15-233, sixteen OTU1 services received on the client side are
demapped into sixteen ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Then the
sixteen ODU1 services are deconverged into 32 ODU0 services. Any N of the 32 ODU0
through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1153
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
16
RX1/TX1
OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
RX16/TX16
OTU1
32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Channel inloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1154
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


16
16
RX1/TX1
OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
RX16/TX16
OTU1
32
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services

TThis section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.
For parameters of the THA, refer toTable 15-100.
Table 15-100 THA parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1155
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop

information.
Channel Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE(TTTAGMP), GE(GFP-T),
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
OTU-1, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16
Default: None

NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Port
Working Mode is set to ODU1_ODU0
mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

NOTE
formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTAGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTAGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The
value GE(TTT-AGMP) is recommended.
format.
The THA board's ports may work in any

of four working modes and the type of
the client-side services received by the
ports varies with the working modes.
NOTE
l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0): Supports DVB-ASI, ESCON,
FC-100, FDDI, FE, FICON, GE(GFPT), GE(TTT-AGMP), OC-3, OC-12,
STM-1, and STM-4 services.
l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1): Supports Any, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON Express, and GE(GFPT) services.
l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1): Supports FC-200, FICONExpress, OC-48, OTU-1, and STM-16
services.
l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0): Supports OTU1 services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1156
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Client Service Bearer

Rate (Mbit/s)
l Channel 1 at each of
ports 201
(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1) to 216
(ClientLP16/
ClientLP16): 125 2200

a board.
l Channels 28 at
each of ports 201
(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1) to 216
(ClientLP16/
ClientLP16): 125
1250
NOTE
Type is set to Any.

information.
Default: /
Off, On
Laser Status
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN

Mode
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.
pass-through (LPT).

1157
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600

Ethernet services.
Default: 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

information.
to Disabled.
NOTE
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

board resides.
information.

1158
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Port Working Mode

(Any->ODU0), ODU1
(Any->ODU1), ODU1
convergence mode
(n*Any->ODU1),
ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1>ODU0), NONE Mode
(Not for port)


(Any->ODU0)
15.8.11 Specifications of the THA

Board
Client-Side Fixed
Optical Module
TN54TH
A
N/A
S-16.1
1000BASE-LX-10km (I-1310-LC)
NOTE

NOTE
S-16.1 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The
actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
S-16.1
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
15

1159
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
S-16.1

nm
1260 to 1360

power
dBm

power
dBm
-5
dB
8.2

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1compliant

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1270 to 1580
dBm
-18
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI
signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from
these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1000BASE-LX-10km
(I-1310-LC)
Line code format
NRZ
Optical source type
SLM
Target distance
km
10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1160
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1000BASE-LX-10km
(I-1310-LC)
nm
1270 to 1355

power
dBm
-3

power
dBm
-9.5
dB
Eye pattern mask

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1260 to 1620
dBm
-20
dBm
-3
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN54THA
35
40
15.9 TOA
TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

The available functional version of the TOA board is TN54.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1161
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN54
TOA
15.9.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the TOA at the client side is 20
Gbit/s.
The TOA board has four scenarios.
l
Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)
Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)
The TOA board supports two types of service package:

l
8*GE for ODU0

type GE at the same time.
8*STM-16/OC-48 for ODU1

type to STM-16/OC-48 at the same time.
TOA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)

The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at any rate in the
range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure
15-235.
Figure 15-235 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 1)
G.694.1
125Mbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
TOA
G.694.1
MUX
NQ2
8
4
DMUX
125Mbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
TOA
8
MUX
1
NQ2
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
DMUX
WDM side

1162
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, FDDI, GE , STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, ESCON and SDI services can be accessed.
If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can apply the 8*GE for
ODU0 service package to the board on the NMS.
TOA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)

range of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure
15-236.
G.694.1
G.694.1
1.49Gbit/s
2.67Gbit/s
TOA
MUX
NQ2
DMUX
1
NQ2
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
1.49Gbit/s
2.67Gbit/s
TOA
WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the HD-SDI, STM16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express and OTU1
services can be accessed.
If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can apply the
8*STM-16/OC-8 for ODU1 service package to the board on the NMS.
TOA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1)

range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.2 Gbit/s and one to eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, as shown
in Figure 15-237. In this scenario, the TOA board converges multiple client-side services into
one ODU1 electrical signals or maps one client-side service into one channel of electrical ODU1
electrical signals.
G.694.1
G.694.1
125Mbit/s
2.2Gbit/s
TOA
MUX
NQ2
8
4
DMUX
TOA
8
MUX
1
NQ2
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
DMUX
125Mbit/s
2.2Gbit/s
8
WDM side

1163
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the Any, FE, FDDI, GE , FC100, FC200, DVB-ASI, ESCON, STM-1,
STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , SDI, HD-SDI, FICON and FICON Express services can be accessed.
TOA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

The TOA board performs conversion between eight OTU1 optical signals and 16 ODU0
electrical signals, see Figure 15-238.
G.694.1
G.694.1
TOA
OTU1
DMUX
NQ2
DMUX
1
TOA
NQ2
16
MUX
16
MUX
WDM side
OTU1
WDM side
TOA scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)

The TOA board performs conversion between five 3G-SDI optical signals and five ODUflex
Figure 15-239 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (3G-SDI<->ODUflex)
G.694.1
1
1
TOA4
3G-SDI
5
G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
5
4
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
3G-SDI
TOA
NQ2
WDM side
The TOA board performs conversion between four 3G-SDI optical signals and four ODUflex
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1164
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-240 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (FC400<->ODUflex)
G.694.1
1
1
TOA4
FC400
4
G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
4
4
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
FC400
TOA
NQ2
WDM side
NOTE
Only the TN53NQ2 board supports ODUflex.

The TOA board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
Table 15-103 Functions and features of the TOA board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
TOA convert signal as follows:

l 8x125Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s<->8xODU0.
l 8x1.49Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s<->8xODU1.
l 8x125Mbit/s to 2.2Gbit/s<->1 to 8xODU1.
l 8xOTU1<->16xODU0.
l 5x3G-SDI<->5xODUflex
l 4xFC400<->4xODUflex
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1165
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

NOTE
The TOA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Crossconnect
capabilities
Cross-connects a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or 8 channels of

ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board.
Cross-connects a maximum of five channels of ODUflex signals by using
buses on the backplane and the cross-connect board.
NOTE
Only the 3G-SDI and FC400 services support the ODUflex signals.
OTN
function
l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The
board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers,
and the PM function at the ODU0 layer.
l Supports the PM function at ODU1 layer, and the non-intrusive
monitoring function at the TCM and ODU0 layers.
l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring function at the ODUflex layer.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ESC
function
service signal.
FEC
encoding

1166
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
LPT function
This function is supported only when the TOA board receives FE or GE

services on its client side.
PRBS
function
IEEE
1588v2
When receiving GE(GFP-T) and OTU1 services on the client side, the board
can process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
NOTE
is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1.
NOTE
When receiving OTU1 services, the TX8/RX8 optical port cannot process IEEE 1588v2
clock signals.
When receiving GE(TTT-AGMP) services, the board can transparently

transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
Physical
clock
Supported only when the TOA board receives GE(GFP-T) services on its
client side.
Supported
Test frame
Supported
NOTE
The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFPT).
Protection
scheme

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
eSFP

side.
Loopback
Channel
Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Supported
NOTE
The Channel Loopback is supported only when
port working mode is ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

1167
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Interface (ASI)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1168
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TOA board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, 1588 module, and power supply module.
Signal flow
Figure 15-241 shows the block diagram of the functions of the TOA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1169
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-241 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOA board
Backplane (service crossconnection)
16xODU0/8xODU1/5xODUflex
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
OTN
processing
module
RX8
TX1
TX2
TX8
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Crossconnect
module
1588
Signal processing
module
Client-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
SCC
NOTE
For more information regarding the type of signals received on the client side, see section 15.9.3 Functions
and Features.
In the signal flow of the TOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOA to the backplane
of the TOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of optical signals from client equipment
through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the 8 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 16
channels of ODU0 signals, or 8 channels of ODU1 or 5 channels of ODUflex signals to
the backplane.
Receive direction
module performs operations such as ODU0, or ODU1, or ODUflex framing, demapping
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1170
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 8 channels of Any signals to the
interfaces.
Module Function
l

to standard optical signals.

module, OTN processing module.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOA and the cross-connect
board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1, or ODU0, or
ODUflex signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/
ODU1/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has
the Any performance monitoring function.
Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
1588 module
the 1588 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a
service board according to the 1588 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG
board

Power supply module

15.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1171
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Figure 15-242 shows the front panel of the TOA board.
Figure 15-242 Front panel of the TOA board
TOA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
TOA
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are sixteen optical interfaces on the front panel of the TOA board. Table 15-104 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1172
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-104 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOA board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX8
LC
Transmits the service signal.
RX1-RX8
LC
Receives the service signal.
Laser Hazard Level

15.9.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TOA board.
Table 15-105 shows the valid slots for the TOA board.
Table 15-105 Valid slots for the TOA board
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Table 15-106 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOA board and the port numbers
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Physical Port
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
6
1173
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Physical Port
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 15-243 to Figure 15-247 show the port diagrams for the TOA. Table 15-107 to Table
15-111 describe the meaning of each port.
The TOA board's NM ports may work in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1
non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1),
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0), or ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex). Select a proper working mode on the NMS as required.
Figure 15-243 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0))
Backplane
8xODU0
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1174
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-244 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))
Backplane
8xODU1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
Figure 15-245 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1))
Backplane
1-8xODU1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
7(RX5/TX5)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1175
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-246 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0))
Backplane
16xODU0
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
Figure 15-247 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex))
Other line board
Backplane
5xODUflex
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Cross-connect
module
Automatic cross-connection, which does

not need to be configured on the NMS.
Multiplexing module

on the NMS.

1176
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service processing
module
Table 15-107 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0))
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1RX8/TX8

interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8

1 to 2..
Table 15-108 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1RX8/TX8

interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8

1.
Table 15-109 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1))
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1RX8/TX8

interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8

1 to 8.
Table 15-110 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1RX8/TX8

interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8

1.

1177
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Port Name
Meaning
ODU0LP1ODU0LP8

1 to 2.
Table 15-111 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex))
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1RX8/TX8

interfaces.
ClientLP1ClientLP8

1.

If the TOA board is used to transmit services, set Port Working Mode in Configuration >
Working Mode on the U2000.
The valid values of the port working mode field are ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0), and ODUflex non-convergence
mode (Any->ODUflex).

l
NOTE
If all the eight clientside ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can configure the 8 *
GE->ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the working mode to
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the service type to GE for the eight ports.
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and
ClientLP ports. For details, see
in Figure 15-248.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
in Figure 15-248.

1178
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-248 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0))
WDM side
Other board a
(standard mode)
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,

a
b
TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
NOTE
When the TOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side
optical port on the TOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the TOA
board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board
to the client-side ports on the TOA board.

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1179
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can
configure the 8 * STM-16/OC-48->ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the
working mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and service type to STM-16/OC-48 for
the eight ports.
in Figure 15-249.
Figure 15-249 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1))
WDM side
Other board a
(standard mode)
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOA

a
b
TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1180
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)

l
On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1).
On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ClientLP port.
For details, see
in Figure 15-250.
Create cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODU1LP ports.
For details, see
in Figure 15-250.
Figure 15-250 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1))
WDM side
Other board a
(standard
mode)
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
2
TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Multiplexing module
The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which

a
b
TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1181
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured
on the first optical channel of each ClientLP.

l
On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0).
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ODU0LP port and
other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see
in Figure 15-251.
Figure 15-251 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
WDM side
Other board a
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 (standard mode)
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
9(TX9/RX9)-1
10(TX10/RX10)-1
TOA
Multiplexing module

a
b
TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1182
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)

l
On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex).
boards' ODUflex ports. For details, see
in Figure 15-251.
NOTE
When configuring a cross-connection, set ODUflex Timeslot to 3 if the client service type is 3G-SDI, and set
it to 4 if the client service type is FC400.
Figure 15-252 ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)

WDM side
Other board
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOA
Other board TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2
15.9.9 TOA Loopbacks

Table 15-112 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TOA boards.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1183
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-112 Loopbacks supported by TOA boards

Boar
d
Port Working Mode
Loopback Type
Description
TN5
4TO
A

(Any->ODU0)
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-253.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-254.

(Any->ODU1)
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-255.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-256.
ODU1 convergence
mode (n*Any>ODU1)
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-257.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-258.
ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-259.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-260.
Channel outloop
See Figure 15-261.
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-262.
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-263.
Channel inloop
See Figure 15-264.

(Any->ODUflex)

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-253, eight 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services are received on the
client side. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the
client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
RX1/TX1

ODU0
RX2/TX2

ODU0
RX3/TX3

ODU0
RX4/TX4

ODU0
RX5/TX5

ODU0
RX6/TX6

ODU0
RX7/TX7

ODU0
RX8/TX8

ODU0
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1184
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-254, eight ODU0 services received from the backplane is
demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services. Any N
of the eight 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The
RX1/TX1
125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s

ODU0
RX2/TX2

ODU0
RX3/TX3

ODU0
RX4/TX4

ODU0
RX5/TX5

ODU0

ODU0
RX7/TX7

ODU0
RX8/TX8

ODU0
RX6/TX6
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-255, eight 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s services are received on the
client side.
When receiving HD-SDI/STM16/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express services, Client-side
outloop: as shown in Figure 15-255
When receiving OTU1 services, Client-side outloop: as shown in Figure 15-255
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1185
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


RX1/TX1

ODU1
RX2/TX2

ODU1
RX3/TX3

ODU1
RX4/TX4

ODU1
RX5/TX5

ODU1
RX6/TX6

ODU1
RX7/TX7

ODU1
RX8/TX8

ODU1
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-256, eight ODU1 services received from the backplane is
demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s services.
When receiving HD-SDI/STM16/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express services, Client-side
inloop: as shown in Figure 15-256
When receiving OTU1 services, Client-side inloop: as shown in Figure 15-256

RX1/TX1
1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s

ODU1
RX2/TX2

ODU1
RX3/TX3

ODU1
RX4/TX4

ODU1
RX5/TX5

ODU1
RX6/TX6

ODU1
RX7/TX7

ODU1
RX8/TX8

ODU1
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1186
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-257, eight 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services are received on the client
side. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the client
RX1/TX1

RX2/TX2

RX3/TX3

RX4/TX4

RX5/TX5

RX6/TX6

RX7/TX7

RX8/TX8

1 - 8
xODU1
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-258, one to eight ODU1 services received from the backplane is
demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services. Any N
of the eight 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1187
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


RX1/TX1

RX2/TX2

RX3/TX3

RX4/TX4

RX5/TX5

RX6/TX6

RX7/TX7

RX8/TX8

1 - 8
xODU1
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-259, eight OTU1 services received on the client side are demapped
into eight ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Then the eight ODU1
services are deconverged into 16 ODU0 services. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services can be
looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1188
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


RX1/TX1
OTU1
RX2/TX2
OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4
OTU1
ODU1
RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1
ODU1
RX7/TX7
OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8
OTU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
RX6/TX6
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1189
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


RX1/TX1
OTU1
RX2/TX2
OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4
OTU1
ODU1
RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1
ODU1
RX7/TX7
OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8
OTU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
RX6/TX6
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
As shown in Figure 15-261, eight OTU1 services received on the client side are demapped
into eight ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Then the eight ODU1
services are deconverged into 16 ODU0 services. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services can be
looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1190
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


RX1/TX1
OTU1
RX2/TX2
OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4
OTU1
ODU1
RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1
ODU1
RX7/TX7
OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8
OTU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
RX6/TX6
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Client-side
ODU0
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Channel inloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1191
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


RX1/TX1
OTU1
RX2/TX2
OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4
OTU1
ODU1
RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1
ODU1
RX7/TX7
OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8
OTU1
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
RX6/TX6
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-263, five 3G-SDI services or four FC400 services are received on
the client side. Any N of the services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining
client side services can be passed through.
RX1/TX1 - RX8/TX8
(Any five of the eight
ports)
3G-SDI
ODUflex
3G-SDI
ODUflex
3G-SDI
ODUflex
3G-SDI
ODUflex
3G-SDI
ODUflex
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1192
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ports)
FC400
ODUflex
FC400
ODUflex
FC400
ODUflex
FC400
ODUflex
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-264, five ODUflex services received from the backplane is
demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into five 3G-SDI services. Any N of the five 3GSDI services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can
be passed through, or four ODUflex services received from the backplane is demapped,
decoded, and decapsulated into four FC400 services. Any N of the four FC400 services
can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed
through.
RX1/TX1 - RX8/TX8
(Any five of the eight
ports)
3G-SDI
ODUflex
3G-SDI
ODUflex
3G-SDI
ODUflex
3G-SDI
ODUflex
3G-SDI
ODUflex
Backplane
Client-side
Loopbacked services
RX1/TX1- RX8/TX8
ports)
FC400
ODUflex
FC400
ODUflex
FC400
ODUflex
FC400
ODUflex
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1193
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


For parameters of the TOA, refer toTable 15-113.
Table 15-113 TOA parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Channel Loopback
Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Port
Working Mode is set to ODU1_ODU0
mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

1194
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

SDI, ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FC-400,
FDDI, FE, FICON,
FICON Express, GE
(TTT-AGMP), GE
(GFP-T), HD-SDI,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
OTU-1, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, 3GSDI

Default: None
NOTE
formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTAGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTAGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The
value GE(TTT-AGMP) is recommended.
format.
NOTE
The TOA board's ports may work in any of
five working modes and the type of the
client-side services received by the ports
varies with the working modes.
l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0): Supports DVB-ASI, ESCON,
FC-100, FDDI, FE, FICON, GE(GFPT), GE(TTT-AGMP), OC-3, OC-12,
SDI, STM-1, and STM-4 services.
l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1): Supports Any, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON Express, STM-1,
STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , SDI, HDSDI,
and GE(GFP-T) services.
l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1): Supports FC-200, FICONExpress, HDSDI, OC-48, OTU-1, and
STM-16 services.
l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0): Supports OTU1 services.
l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex):Supports FC400, 3G-SDI
services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1195
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description

Rate (Mbit/s)
l Channel 1 at each of
ports 201
(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1) to 208
(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8): 125 2200

board.
l Channels 28 at
each of ports 201
(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1) to 208
(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8): 125
1250
NOTE
Type is set to Any.

information.
Default: /
Off, On
Laser Status
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN

Mode
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.
pass-through (LPT).

1196
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600

Ethernet services.
Default: 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

information.
to Disabled.
NOTE
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

board resides.
information.

1197
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Port Working Mode

(Any->ODU0), ODU1
(Any->ODU1), ODU1
convergence mode
(n*Any->ODU1),
ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1>ODU0), ODUflex
(Any->ODUflex),
NONE Mode(Not for
port)


(Any->ODU0)
15.9.11 Specifications of the TOA

Board
Client-Side Fixed
Optical Module
TN54TO
A
N/A
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10
km
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1198
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and
FE signals. The specifications listed above apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly
different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON,
FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30

1199
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Eye pattern
mask
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and
FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values might be slightly different
from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, or FE
signals.
NOTE
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The
specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON,
FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

1200
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The
actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4,
OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1201
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9

1202
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Maximum reflectance
dB
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
-27
-27
NOTE
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400

1203
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Eye pattern mask
Value
km


Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI signals.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
10
Service rate
Gbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
1290 to 1330

power
dBm

power
dBm
-7
dB

1204
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

width
Value
multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km
nm
3.0

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1260 to 1620
dBm
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN54TOA
23
25
15.10 TOG
TOG: 8 x GE service processing board

The available functional version of the TOG board is TN52.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1205
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN52
TOG
15.10.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TOG board implements conversion between 8 channels of GE
optical signals or GE electrical signals and 4 channels of ODU1 electrical signals or 8 channels
of ODU0 electrical signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-265 and Figure
15-266.
Figure 15-265 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 8800)
1
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOG
GE
MUX
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
client side
1
TOG
GE
8
client side
WDM side
Figure 15-266 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
1
8
client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOG
GE
MUX
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
TOG
4
WDM side
1
GE
8
client side

The TOG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1206
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-119 Functions and features of the TOG board

Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts between eight channels of GE optical signals or GE electrical signals

and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals or eight channels of ODU0
electrical signals.
Client-side
service type
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0

signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1
signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one
board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards
belonging to the mesh group.
OTN
function
l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of eight channels of client-side service

signals into four channels of ODU1 signals.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing defined in the
ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU1/ODU0.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
PRBS
function
Not supported.
Test frame
Not supported.
IEEE
1588v2
Supported.
Physical
clock
Supported.
ALS
function
Supported
Protection
scheme

1207
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3z
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TOG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 15-267 or Figure 15-268 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOG
board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1208
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
Figure 15-267 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)
8XODU0
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
1588
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

( Backplane controlled by SCC )

SCC
1209
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-268 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/
3800)
4XODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
Encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
1588
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
( Backplane controlled by SCC)

SCC
The client side of the TOG board can access the following optical signals:
l
GE optical signals.
GE electrical signals.
In the signal flow of the TOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOG to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of the optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and
mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out 4 channels of ODU1 signals or
8 channels of ODU0 signals to the backplane for grooming.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU1 or ODU0 electrical signals sent from the
cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as
ODU1 or ODU0 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module
sends out 8 channels of GE signals to the client-side optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1210
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and
interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of 8 channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from 8 channels of the internal

The module consists of a GE service encapsulation and mapping module and an OTN
processing module.
GE service encapsulation and mapping module
It encapsulates multiple GE signals and maps the GE signals to the ODU1 or ODU0
payload area and performs the reverse of the preceding process. It supports the function
of GE performance monitoring.
Frames ODU1 or ODU0 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 or ODU0 signals.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOG and the cross-connect
board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 or ODU0 signals.
1588 module
the STG board.
NOTE
Two channels IEEE 1588v2 signals are supported by the TOG.

Power supply module

15.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1211
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Figure 15-269 shows the TOG front panel.
Figure 15-269 Front panel of the TOG board
TOG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
TOG
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1212
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are 16 optical interfaces on the front panel of the TOG board. Table 15-120 lists the type
Table 15-120 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOG board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX8
LC
RX1-RX8
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

15.10.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TOG board.
Table 15-121 shows the valid slots for the TOG board.
Table 15-121 Valid slots for TOG board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1213
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-122 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOG board and the port numbers
Physical Port
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 15-270 shows the application model of the TOG board.Table 15-123 describes the
Figure 15-270 Port diagram of the TOG board
Other tributary/
PID board
Backplane
8xODU0/4xODU1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
Client Side
Crossconnect
module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


1214
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Service
processing
module
Table 15-123 Meaning of NM port of the TOG board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ClientLP1-ClientLP8

If the TOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU0LP port of the other
boards, as shown in Figure 15-271.
level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU1LP port of the other
boards, as shown in Figure 15-272.
Figure 15-271 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU0 level)

WDM side
Other board a
(compatible mode)
Other board b
(standard mode)
Client side
TOG
The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM
Other board a TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1215
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-272 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU1 level)

WDM side
Other board a
(compatible mode)
IN/OUT-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:1
Other board b
(standard mode)
Client side
TOG
The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM
Other board a TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/


For parameters of the TOG, refer to Table 15-124.
Table 15-124 TOG parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

board.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


1216
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Off, On

status of a board.
more information.
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex

NOTE
This parameter must be set to Auto-Negotiation
when the PTP clock function is used.
Default: Enabled
Default: 9600

board are lost.

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
Synchronous
Clock Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

Enabled if clock synchronization is required.
When this parameter is set to Enabled, service
clocks are synchronized with NE clocks.
When the parameter is set to Disabled, service
clocks will not be synchronized with NE
clocks.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1217
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Synchronous/
Asynchronous
Mode
Asychronous,
Sychronous
Specifies a clock source, or determines

whether to transparently transmit the upstream
clock information or to trace the local clock.
Set the parameter based on the network
design. The default value is Asynchronous
for the board to trace the local clock. The
default value is recommended because the
local clock has higher quality.
Default: Asychronous
When the parameter is set to Asynchronous,

the board will terminate the clock information
in the client-side services. Instead, it will trace
the local clock and transmit the clock
information to the downstream station. When
the parameter is set to Synchronous, the board
will extract the clock information from its
client-side services and transparently transmit
the clock information to the downstream
station.
NOTE
Value change of this parameter will cause service
interruption.
15.10.10 Specifications of the TOG

Board
Client-Side Fixed
Optical Module
TN52TO
G
N/A

1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1218
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

1219
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Std 802.3.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

1220
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 0.85 kg (1.87 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN52TOG
41.8
46.0
15.11 TOM
TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board

The available functional versions of the TOM board are TN11 and TN52.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
TOM
TN52
TOM

Function:
l
The TN52TOM board supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU0
electrical signals. The TN11TOM board does not support the conversion. For details, see
15.11.3 Function and Feature.
Specification:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
15.11.10 Specifications of the TOM.
1221
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The TOM boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
15.11.2 Application
The TOM can be used in different application scenarios. In different application scenarios, eight
pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side
interfaces. The total service access rate of the eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot exceed
10 Gbit/s.
The TOM board has two working modes, that is, Cascading mode and Non-cascading mode.
There are totally 5 scenarios of the TN11TOM. There are totally 12 scenarios of the TN52TOM.
The scenarios of the TN11TOM:
l
In cascading mode, there are two scenarios.

Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1)
Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1)
In non-cascading mode, there are three scenarios.

Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1)
Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1)
Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1)
The scenarios of the TN52TOM:

l
In cascading mode, there are four scenarios.

Scenario 1: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
Scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
Scenario 3: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)
Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)
In non-cascading mode, there are eight scenarios.

Scenario 5: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)
Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1)
Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
Scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)
Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1222
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In scenario 1 of the TN52TOM, the service mapping path in OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 and
OptiX OSN 3800 are difference. The details are as follows:
l
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0.
For the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU1.
In scenario 5 of the TN52TOM, the service mapping path in OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 and
OptiX OSN 3800 are difference. The details are as follows:
l
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0.
For the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU1.
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports scenario 11 of the TN52TOM,

Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports scenario 12 of the TN52TOM,
The TN52TOM board supports six types of service package, see Table 15-134.
TN11TOM scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) in cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-273. For the port diagram of the
TOM, see Figure 15-312. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-329.
Figure 15-273 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1)
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
TOM
8
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
1
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
8
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
TN11TOM scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in

cascading mode
Implements conversion between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and
selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any
signals and one OTU1 signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1223
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-274 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system

G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
DMUX
1
DMUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
TOM
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
Client side
WDM side
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
WDM side
MUX
TOM
Client side
DMUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/
G.694.2 TOM
DMUX
Client side
MUX
WDM side
7
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
TN11TOM scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals.
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
MUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side

1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
4
8
Client side
1224
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In this application scenario, the client-side internal logical ports of the TOM are divided into four groups:
ClientLP1-ClientLP2, ClientLP3-ClientLP4, ClientLP5-ClientLP6, and ClientLP7-ClientLP8. Any group
of these internal logical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
TN11TOM scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in noncascading mode

Implements conversion between four optical signals at the rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s
and four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
G.694.1/
G.694.2
1
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
DMUX
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
TOM
4
Client side
G.694.1/
G.694.2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
4
Client side
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as described in the system
plan.
TN11TOM scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration board)

Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1225
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


W DM side
W DM side
DMUX
TOM
G.694.1
MUX
MUX
G.694.1
4 DMUX
TOM
NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal, only
RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal.
Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.
TN52TOM scenario 1: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) in cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and two ODU0 signals or one ODU1 signal.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-278 and Figure 15-279. For the
port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-317. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM,
see Figure 15-334.
Figure 15-278 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0)
1
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
MUX
WDM side
MUX
8
WDM side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
8
Client side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1226
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-279 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0->ODU1)

1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
NS2 G.694.1
1
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
8
Client side
DMUX
WDM side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
MUX
8
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
TN52TOM scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)

in cascading mode
signals and one OTU1 signal.
Figure 15-280 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1)
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
1
DMUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
DMUX
MUX
TOM
MUX
DMUX
6
DMUX
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
MUX
WDM side

WDM side
Client side
1227
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
G.694.1/
G.694.2
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/
G.694.2 TOM
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
7
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5
Gbit/s.
In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
TN52TOM scenario 3: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) in cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal.
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
TOM
8
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
1
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
8
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
TN52TOM scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) in

cascading mode
signals and one OTU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1228
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-282 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU)

G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
1
DMUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
DMUX
MUX
TOM
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
Client side
WDM side
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
WDM side
MUX
TOM
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
DMUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/
G.694.2 TOM
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
7
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5
Gbit/s.
In this scenario, mapping of ODU0 services is not supported. This is different than the TN52TOM scenario
2.
TN52TOM scenario 5: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) in non-cascading

mode
Implements conversion between eight Any Signals and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1
signals.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-283 and Figure 15-284. For the
see Figure 15-338.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1229
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-283 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0)

1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
MUX
WDM side
MUX
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
8
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
Figure 15-284 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0->ODU1)

1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
MUX
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
4
8
Client side
NOTE
TN52TOM scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)

in non-cascading mode
Implements conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements
conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-285 or Figure 15-286. For the
see Figure 15-339.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1230
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-285 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: A)

G.694.1
1
G.694.1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
TOM
TOM
DMUX
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
DMUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
The conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals.
NOTE
On the client side, six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
Figure 15-286 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: B)

G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
1
DMUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
4
DMUX
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
TOM
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and
selective receiving function on the WDM side.
NOTE
On the client side, each optical interface can access services at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s.
On the client side, four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
TN52TOM scenario 7: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals, or implements
conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1231
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-287 or Figure 15-288. For the
see Figure 15-340.
NOTE
In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 8.
Figure 15-287 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: A)

1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
MUX
MUX
WDM side
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
4
WDM side
Client side
The conversion between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals.
Figure 15-288 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: B)

1
4
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
OTU1
MUX
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
1
TOM
OTU1
4
Client side
The conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals.
TN52TOM scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals through Any reencapsulation.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1232
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


1
4
Client side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
OTU1
MUX
WDM side
MUX
1
TOM
OTU1
4
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and
then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.
TN52TOM scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line

mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode
Implements conversion between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any reencapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
OTU1
Client side
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
TOM
TOM
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
OTU1
Client side
NOTE
TN52TOM scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)

in non-cascading mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1233
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


A: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
W DM side
W DM side
DMUX
TOM
G.694.1
MUX
MUX
G.694.1
4 DMUX
TOM
B: Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Implements conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements
conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective
G.694.1
1
G.694.1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
TOM
TOM
DMUX
Client side
DMUX
WDM side
WDM side
G.694.1
1
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
TOM
MUX
DMUX
4
DMUX
Client side
Client side
G.694.1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system
plan.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1234
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN52TOM scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) in noncascading mode

Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals.
4
Client side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
OTU1
MUX
WDM side
MUX
1
TOM
OTU1
4
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 12.
TN52TOM scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals through Any reencapsulation.
4
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
OTU1
MUX
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
1
TOM
OTU1
4
Client side
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1235
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.11.3 Function and Feature

The TOM board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
NOTE
ODU0 is only supported by the TN52TOM in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1236
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-127 Functions and features of the TOM board

Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
TN11TOM:
l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5
Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal.
l Converts between six optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5
Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and converts the signals into a standard
DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1, and the dual fed and
selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion
between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and converts the signals
into a standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
Gbit/s and four ODU1 signals.
l Converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5
Gbit/s and four OTU1 signals, and converts the signals into a standard
DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
l Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
TN52TOM:
Gbit/s and two ODU0 signals or one ODU1 signal.
Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven
optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1
signal.
Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal.
Gbit/s and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1 signals.
Gbit/s and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four
optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and two OTU1
signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM
side.
l Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals, or
implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1
signals.
l Converts between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals or four
ODU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation.
l Converts between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any
re-encapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the
WDM side.
l Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1237
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
The TN52TOM board supports six types of service package, see Table
15-134.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
The TOM board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. It is
recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces
only, for detailed description of the configuration. see Configuring Electrical Ports of
a Board in Configuration Guide.
The TOM board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI electrical signals.
When the TOM board accesses these electrical signals, the digital video O/E converter
must be used for O/E or E/O conversion. For details, see 12.3 Digital Video O-E
Converter. The access optical module on the client side requires the SDI access module.
See Table 15-140.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1238
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800:

l TN52TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals or eight ODU0
signals through the cross-connect bus on the backplane and the crossconnect board.
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM
and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of four
ODU1 signals to the paired slots through the backplane.
Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE
signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the
cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals to the
Supports the transmission of maximum of eight signals at the rate
between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the
backplane.
l TN52TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM
and the cross-connect board.
Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals to the
Supports the transmission of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/
OptiX OSN 3800:
l TN11TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals from
one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other
Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE
signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards)
Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight signals at the rate
between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group
(consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the
mesh group.
l TN52TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals
between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and
any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group, that
is, supports the ODU1 cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU4,
slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1239
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals between

one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired
slot of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports the GE crossconnection between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5.
Supports the cross-connection of six signals at the rate between 100
Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between one board of the
mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired slot of the fourslot mesh group, that is, supports the cross-connection of six signals at
the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals,
between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5.
OTN
function
l The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
Supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the
ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the SM and TCM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers on
the WDM side.
l Supports the PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions at the
ODU1 layer.
l Supports the SM and PM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers.
l TN52TOM supports the PM function at the ODU0 layer.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications.
ESC
function
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Alarm and
performance
event
monitoring
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ALS
function
PRBS
function
LPT
function
is FE or GE.
NOTE
is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.

1240
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Test frame
Supported
Opticallayer ASON
Not supported
Supported by the TN52TOM
Protection
scheme
OptiX OSN 3800/OptiX OSN 6800:

l Supports SW SNCP.
OptiX OSN 8800:
l Supports SW SNCP.
eSFP

side.
side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
NOTE
When being used as tributary & line
board, the TOM board only supports the
loopback between ClientLP1ClientLP4.
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

1241
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING
INTERFACE (FC-PH)
Interface (ASI)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1242
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
The signal flow of the board and the functional modules over which the signals travel vary with
the application scenarios. Figure 15-294 to Figure 15-298 and Figure 15-299 to Figure
15-310 show the block diagram of the functions of the TOM board. The transmit and the receive
directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as
the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive
direction is defined as the reverse direction.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1243
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal flow
Figure 15-294 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary Mode
(Any->ODU1) in cascading mode)
4 x 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s / 1 x ODU1
Client
side
RX 1
RX 2
O/E
8
RX 8
TX 1
TX 2
E/O
TX 8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
Control
Memory
Communication
CPU

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC )
Converts between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal.

On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5
Gbit/s.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out one
channel of ODU1 signals or eight channels of Any signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1244
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For Any signals, the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module.
For ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals
to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then
outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical
interfaces.
Signal flow
Figure 15-295 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line
Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
Service
CrossOTN
encapsulation processing connect
and mapping module
module
module
E/O
TX7
TX8
O/E
RX7
WDM-side
optical
module
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
Converts between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1
signal.
NOTE
On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
1245
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The client-side optical module receives six or seven channels of the Any optical signals
from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E
conversion.
After O/E conversion, the six or seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the module outputs one
channel of OTU1 signals.
conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical optical
signals, and then output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of OTU1 optical signals at
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX7-RX8 optical interfaces.
After processing, the module performs O/E conversion.
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. After processing, the module outputs
seven or six channels of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels or seven
channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals
through the TX1-TX6 or TX1-TX7 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1246
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
Figure 15-296 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary Mode
(Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 4X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
OTN
encapsulation processing
and mapping
module
module
Crossconnect
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals.

On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10
Gbit/s.
l
Transmit direction
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four
channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1247
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For Any signals, the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module.
For ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals
interfaces.
Signal Flow
Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
WDM side
O/E
E/O
Service
OTN
Crossprocessing connect encapsulation
module
module and mapping
module
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
TX5
TX6
TX7
TX8
RX5
RX6
RX7
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
Converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and four ITUT Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10
Gbit/s.
NOTE
plan.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
1248
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

module. The module performs operations, such as service cross-connection, encapsulation
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends the signals to the
WDM-side optical module.
After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out four channels
of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1
or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the TX5- TX8
optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of Any optical signals at DWDM
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX5-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module
The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping,
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
NOTE
In this application scenario, the client-side internal logical ports of the TOM are divided into four groups:
ClientLP1-ClientLP2, ClientLP3-ClientLP4, ClientLP5-ClientLP6, and ClientLP7-ClientLP8. For client
services at a rate greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI),
any group of these internal logical ports can access only one channel.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-298 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (electrical regeneration
board)
Non-cascading mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1249
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

WDM side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
Service
regeneration
module
Cross-connect
O/E
RX3
module
RX4
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Cascading mode
WDM side
WDM side
Cross-connect
RX7
O/E
module
Client-side
optical
module
Service
regeneration
module
E/O
TX7
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
The TOM board implements the regeneration of one/four channels of unidirectional optical
signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1250
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only
RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the OTU1 optical signals at
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the RX1RX4 interfaces and performs O/E conversion.
The signal processing module performs service cross-connection, decoding, overhead
processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming
based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames.
The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they have been encoded. After
performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical signals are output through the TX1-TX4 interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-299 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1])in cascading mode)
OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1251
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


2X ODU0
Client
side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1252
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal or between eight Any signals and
two ODU0 signals.
NOTE
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane
of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces and performs O/E conversion.
processing module. The module performs operations, such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module
sends out two channels of ODU0 signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1253
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the
interfaces.
Signal Flow
mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
E/O
Service
OTN
and mapping module
module
module
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
TX7
TX8
RX7
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
Converts between six Any signals and one ODU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one ODU1
signal.
NOTE
In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
The transmit and receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit
direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the
TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
1254
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The client-side optical module receives six or seven channels of the Any optical signals
from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E
conversion.
processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of
OTU1 signals.
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical
optical signals, and then are output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of OTU1 optical signals at
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs seven or six
or TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1255
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
Figure 15-301 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 mode (OTU1/
Any->ODU1) in cascading mode)
1X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal.

NOTE
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
l
Transmit direction
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out one
channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receive direction
1256
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation
processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side
optical module.
interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-302 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 tributary-line
mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
E/O
Service
OTN
and mapping module
module
module
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
TX7
TX8
RX7
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
Converts between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1.
NOTE
In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1257
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of
OTU1 signals.
comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical
optical signals, and then are output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of the OTU1 optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs seven or six
or TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-303 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1])in non-cascading mode)
OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1258
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8X ODU0
Client
side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1259
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between eight Any Signals and eight ODU0 signals, or between eight Any signals and
four ODU1 signals.
NOTE
l
Transmit direction
equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces and performs O/E conversion.
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module
sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals or four channels of ODU1 signals to the
backplane.
Receive direction
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1260
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the
interfaces.
Signal Flow
Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
Service
OTN
and mapping module
module
module
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
TX7
TX8
O/E
RX7
WDM-side
optical
module
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
Converts between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between
four Any signals and two OTU1 signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on
the WDM side.
NOTE
On the client side, four or six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/
s.
plan.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals from client
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1261
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the module outputs two
channels of OTU1 signals.
comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels or four channels
of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels or four channels of the OTU1 optical
signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX1-RX8 optical
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs six or four
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six or four channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs six channels or four channels of client-side optical
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1262
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
Figure 15-305 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 mode (OTU1/
Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
4X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals, or converts between four OTU1
signals and four ODU1 signals.
NOTE
The OTU1 service can be input through ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals or four OTU1
signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E
conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels or four channels of electrical signals are sent to
the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1263
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing,
the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l
Receive direction
processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals or four OTU1 to the
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals or ODU1
electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels or four channels of client-side optical
Signal Flow
Figure 15-306 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM
(ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
4X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1264
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four OTU1 signals from client equipment through
the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
and mapping processing, re-encapsulation and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out
four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping, re-encapsulation and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of OTU1 to the clientside optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of ODU1 electrical signals, and
then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical
interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-307 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM
(ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
E/O
Service
OTN
and mapping module
module
module
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
TX7
TX8
RX7
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
1265
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Converts between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation, and
the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
NOTE
plan.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the OTU1 optical signals from
re-encapsulation, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs two
channels of OTU1 signals.
comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels or four channels
of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Receive direction
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX1-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module
FEC, demapping, re-encapsulation and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs
two channels of OTU1 signals.
optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1266
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
WDM side
O/E
E/O
Service
OTN
Crossprocessing connect encapsulation
module
module and mapping
module
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
TX5
TX6
TX7
TX8
RX5
RX6
RX7
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
Converts between OTU1 signal and OTU1 signal, or converts between six Any signals and two
OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals.
NOTE
plan.
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals or four
channels of OTU1 from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs
O/E conversion.
module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, regeneration
of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and Any signals. Then, the module
sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module.
After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two or four
channels of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T
G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the
TX1- TX8 optical interfaces.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two or four channels of Any optical signals at
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1267
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals, performance
monitoring of SDH and Any signals and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs four channels of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four or six channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the
Signal Flow
Figure 15-309 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)
8X ODU0
Client
side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals.

NOTE
This scenario is only supported in the OptiX OSN 8800.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1268
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Transmit direction
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of
ODU0 signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of four OTU1 to the client-side
optical module.
interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1269
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
Figure 15-310 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)
8X ODU0
Client
side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Crossconnect
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals through Any re-encapsulation.
NOTE
This scenario is only supported in the OptiX OSN 8800.
l
Transmit direction
and mapping processing, re-encapsulation and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out
eight channels of ODU0 signals to the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1270
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Receive direction
module performs operations such as ODU0 framing, demapping, re-encapsulation and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of four OTU1 to the
interfaces.
Module Function
l

standard optical signals.

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard optical signals.
standard optical signals.

module, OTN processing module, service processing module, and service regeneration
module.
Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and
the WDM-side signals of the board.
Regenerates Any signals and monitors SDH and Any signals in two directions.
Service regeneration module
Implements the FEC decoding/encoding and overhead processing of OTU1 signals.
Monitors the performance of WDM-side services.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1271
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

15.11.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOM board.

Figure 15-311 shows the front panel of the TOM board.
Figure 15-311 Front panel of the TOM board
TOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
TOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1272
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are sixteen optical interfaces on the front panel of the TOM board. Table 15-128 lists the
Table 15-128 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOM board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX8
LC
Transmits the service signal.
RX1-RX8
LC
Receives the service signal.
Laser Hazard Level

15.11.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TOM board.
Table 15-129 shows the valid slots for the TN11TOM board.
Table 15-130 shows the valid slots for the TN52TOM board.
Table 15-129 Valid slots for the TN11TOM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 15-130 Valid slots for the TN52TOM board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

1273
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


Table 15-131 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOM board and the port numbers
Physical Port
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
Logical Ports
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1274
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-312 to Figure 15-316 show the port diagrams of the TN11TOM board. Figure
15-317 to Figure 15-328 show the port diagrams of the TN52TOM board. Table 15-132 and
Table 15-133 describe the meaning of each port.
The TOM board has two working modes, that is, Cascading mode and Non-cascading mode.
You can select a proper mode by using the U2000 according to the actual application
requirements. The difference between the two modes lies in the ports of the board and the crossconnection routes. For the TN11TOM, in Cascading mode, there are two modes of the board.
In non-cascading mode, there are four modes of the board. For the TN52TOM, in cascading
mode, there are four modes of the board. In non-cascading mode, there are eight modes of the
board.
Figure 15-312 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any>ODU1))
11TOM
52NS2
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: Client-side services
: WDM-side services
: Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS
: Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Figure 15-313 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode
(Any->ODU1->OTU1))
Converts between six Any signals and one ODU1 signal and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side.
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
10(RX8/TX8)
8(RX6/TX6)
: WDM-side services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1275
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Converts between seven Any signals and one ODU1 signal.

11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
Figure 15-314 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode
(Any->ODU1))
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
52NS2
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) and 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) ports can access a maximum
of four services, and the 202 (ClientLP2/ ClientLP2) and 204 (ClientLP4/ ClientLP4) ports can access a
maximum of two services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1276
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-315 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line
Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1))
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
7(RX5/TX5)
4(RX2/TX2)
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
9(RX7/TX7)
6(RX4/TX4)
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
Mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1))
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
7(RX5/TX5)
4(RX2/TX2)
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
9(RX7/TX7)
6(RX4/TX4)
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only
RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces.
Figure 15-317 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0
[->ODU1]))
OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1277
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


52TOM
52NS2
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0

52TOM
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
1(IN/OUT)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the
two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection
from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202
(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time.
Figure 15-318 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line mode
(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the
two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection
from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202
(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1278
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-319 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1))
52TOM
52NS2
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
Figure 15-320 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 tributary-line mode
(OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
10(RX8/TX8)
8(RX6/TX6)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
Figure 15-321 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1]))
OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1279
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
52NS2
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
1(IN/OUT)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1

52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
52NS2
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
1(IN/OUT)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, or ClientLP7 port is the same as that
of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4, ClientLP6, or ClientLP8 port, the two routes cannot be configured
with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not
supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is
configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same
time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule
applies.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1280
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Mode: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
7(RX5/TX5)
4(RX2/TX2)
8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, or ClientLP7 port is the same as that
of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4, ClientLP6, or ClientLP8 port, the two routes cannot be configured
with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not
supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is
configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same
time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule
applies.
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as required.
Figure 15-323 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1))
OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800:
A
52NS2
A
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
1(IN/OUT)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
: Working service direction
: Virtual channel
OptiX OSN 3800:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1281
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
52NS2
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
1(IN/OUT)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
Particularly, in the OptiX OSN 3800, inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the 52TOM and 52NS2
boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3-1 port on the 52TOM board
is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-3 port on the 52NS2 board, the ClientLP5-1 port on the 52TOM board
is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2 port on the 52NS2 board.
Figure 15-324 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0))
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
5(RX3/TX3)
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
9(RX7/TX7)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.
The OTU1 signals are accessed on the client side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1282
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-325 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0))
52TOM
52NS2
237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1
3(RX1/TX1)
5(RX3/TX3)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
9(RX7/TX7)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
Figure 15-326 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1

re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1))
52TOM
52NS2
3(RX1/TX1)
5(RX3/TX3)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
9(RX7/TX7)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1283
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-327 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1

re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
plan.
Figure 15-328 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 tributary-line
mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1))
OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
7(RX5/TX5)
4(RX2/TX2)
8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
6(RX4/TX4)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
: WDM-side services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1284
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
plan.
Table 15-132 Meaning of NM port of the TOM board (Cascading mode)

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a
ClientLP1/ClientLP2
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8.
ODU1LP1
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
ODU0LP1
a: In different application scenarios, RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as clientside interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.
Table 15-133 Meaning of NM port of the TOM board (Non-cascading mode)

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a
TN11TOM:
l ClientLP1
l ClientLP3
TN52TOM:
l ClientLP1
l ClientLP2
l ClientLP5
l ClientLP6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1285
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Port Name
Meaning
TN11TOM:
l ClientLP2
l ClientLP4
TN52TOM:
l ClientLP3
l ClientLP4
l ClientLP7
l ClientLP8
AnyLP1-AnyLP12
ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4
a: In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used
as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.
NOTE
Only the display of NM port in cascading mode is different from that in non-cascading mode. The
configuration in cascading mode is similar to the configuration in non-cascading mode.

Configuration
If the TOM board is used to transmit services, set Board working Mode in Configuration >
WDM interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Cascading and
Non-cascading.
l
Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 1

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1
service is implemented through the cross-connect module in cascading mode, as shown in
Figure 15-329
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1286
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-329 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 1)

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Standard
mode
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
Compatible
mode
WDM side
2
TOM
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
Other board
(Compatible mode)
Other board (Standard TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2

mode)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Then the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-330

Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
2
TOM
Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
3
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1287
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1
service is implemented through the cross-connect module in non-cascading mode, as shown
in Figure 15-331.

mode
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
Compatible
mode
WDM side
TOM
Other board
(Compatible mode)

mode)

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Then the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in non-cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-332.

WDM side
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
3
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
8(TX6/RX6)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
9(TX7/RX7)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1288
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 5 (Non-cascading mode: ODU1

Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Then the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in non-cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-333.

WDM side
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
3
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
8(TX6/RX6)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
9(TX7/RX7)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 1 (Cascading mode:ODU0 mode

(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Cascading.
Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). Create the
cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then,
create the following cross-connections:
Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and
ODU0LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU0 services in OptiX OSN
8800, as shown (2) in Figure 15-334.
Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and
6800/3800, as shown (2) in Figure 15-334.
NOTE
When creating the internal cross-connection of ODU0 signal, only the first route can be selected. For
Example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1.
Two channels with the same type of services at the ClientLP1 and ClientLP2 ports respectively must
not be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is
configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type must not be configured.

OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1289
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

WDM side
Standard
mode
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Other board
(Compatible mode)
Compatible
mode
WDM side
TOM

mode)

mode
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
Compatible
mode
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
2
3
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-2
TOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1290
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Other board
(Compatible
mode)
Other board
(Standard
mode)
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 2 (Cascading mode: ODU0

Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections:
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM
board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-335.
Create OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX7/TX7 or RX8/
TX8 of the TOM board, as shown (2) in Figure 15-335.

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
WDM side
10(TX8/RX8)-1
3
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-2
TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1
WDM side
10(TX8/RX8)-1
2
3
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-2
TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 3 (Cascading mode: ODU1 mode

(OTU1/Any->ODU1))
Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). Create the crossconnection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create
the following cross-connections:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1291
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU1LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1
services, as shown (2) in Figure 15-336.
mode
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
Compatible
mode
WDM side
2
TOM
Other board
(Compatible
mode)
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /TN52NS3/
Other board
(Standard mode)
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 4 (Cascading mode: ODU1 tributaryline mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1))
Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1>OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections:
Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8
of the TOM board, as shown (2) in Figure 15-337.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1292
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
2
TOM
Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
3
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM

mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).
board. Then, create the following cross-connections, as shown in Figure 15-338.
8800, as shown (3) in Figure 15-338.
Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and
6800/3800, as shown (4) in Figure 15-338.
NOTE
When configuring the internal cross-connection of ODU0 signal, only the first route can be selected.
For Example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1.

OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1293
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


WDM side
Standard
mode
Other board
Compatible
mode
Cross-connect
module
Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Other board
(Compatible
mode)
Other board
(Standard
mode)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1294
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

mode
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
WDM side
Compatible
mode
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
162(ODU0LP2
/ODU0LP2)-1
163(ODU0LP3
/ODU0LP3)-1
164(ODU0LP4
/ODU0LP4)-1
Other board
(Compatible
mode)
Other board
(Standard
mode)

Tributary-Line Mode: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections:
Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM
NOTE
In this scenario, all the eight pairs of the optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either
the client-side or the WDM-side interfaces. If six Any services are input, two OTU1 services are
output. If four Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output for dual transmitting and
selective receiving.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1295
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-2
162(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1
52(ODU1LP2/
ODU1LP2)-1
162(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-2
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 7 (Non-cascading: ODU1 mode

(OTU1/Any->ODU1))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). Then,
create the following cross-connections:
create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port on the TOM board and
the ODU1LP port on the TN52NS2 boards to implement grooming of ODU1 services,
defined as (2) in Figure 15-340.
NOTE
When the internal cross-connection of ODU1 signal is configured, only the first route can be selected.
For example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1. Only ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7 can be
used.
Each ClientLP logical port can access a maximum of 2.5 Gbit/s signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1296
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


mode
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
Compatible
mode
WDM side
TOM
Other board
(Compatible mode)

mode)
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 8 (Non-cascading:

ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1). Then, create the
following cross-connections:
Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TN52TOM board, as
shown (3) in Figure 15-341.
create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1297
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


mode
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Client
side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
201(ClientLP1
/ClientLP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
203(ClientLP3
/ClientLP3)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
205(ClientLP5
/ClientLP5)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
203(ClientLP7
/ClientLP7)-1
WDM
side
Compatible
mode
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
WDM
side
4
162(ODU0LP2
/ODU0LP2)-1
163(ODU0LP3
/ODU0LP3)-1
TOM
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
164(ODU0LP4
/ODU0LP4)-1
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Other board
(Compatible mode)

mode)

ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
Then, create the following cross-connections:
Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown
(3) in Figure 15-342.
NOTE
In this scenario, all the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the
client-side or the WDM-side interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1298
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
201(ClientLP1
/ClientLP1)-1
203(ClientLP3
/ClientLP3)-1
205(ClientLP5
/ClientLP5)-1
207(ClientLP7
/ClientLP7)-1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1
/ODU1LP1)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
2
162(ODU0LP2
/ODU0LP2)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
4
52(ODU1LP2
/ODU1LP2)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module

tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections:

OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
WDM side
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
TOM
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
3
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Any->ODU1->OTU1 dual fed and selective receiving mode.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1299
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 11 (Non-cascading: ODU1_ODU0

mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0). Then, create the following cross-connections:

WDM
side
Standard
mode
Other board
Cross-connect
module
Client
side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
1
Compatible
mode
WDM
side
Other board
(Compatible mode)

mode)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1300
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation
mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0). Create the cross-connection between the internal
RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board.
Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown
(3) in Figure 15-345.
Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the AnyLP port of the TOM board and

WDM
side
Standard
mode
Other board
Client
side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
Cross-connect
module
Compatible
mode
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
WDM
side
4
Cross-connect
module
Other board
(Compatible mode)

mode)
The TN52TOM board supports six types of service package, Service packages enable one-click
configuration of typical services by issuing multiple configuration commands in batches,
facilitating product deployment commissioning and reducing maintenance costs. The
configuration commands include commands for configuring working modes, service types,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1301
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

cross-connections, and port types. Table 15-134 lists the service packages for the TN52TOM
board and the corresponding configuration contents.
Table 15-134 Service packages for the TN52TOM board and the corresponding configuration
contents
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Service
Package
Name
Board
Working
Mode
Port
Working
Mode
Service
Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio
n
Configurat
ion
Tributary
4*STM-16/
OC48>4*ODU1
NonCascading
mode
Port
Working
Mode is set
to ODU1
Mode
(OTU1/
Any>ODU1) for
ports
ClientLP1,
ClientLP3,
ClientLP5,
and
ClientLP7.
Service
Type is set to
STM-16/
OC48 for
channel 1 of
ports
ClientLP1,
ClientLP3,
ClientLP5,
and
ClientLP7.
Bidirectional
ANY-level
crossconnections
are
configured
between
ports from
RX1/TX1 to
RX4/TX4
and channel
1 of ports
ClientLP1,
ClientLP3,
ClientLP5,
and
ClientLP7.

1302
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service
Package
Name
Board
Working
Mode
Port
Working
Mode
Service
Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio
n
Configurat
ion
Tributary
8*GE>8*ODU0
NonCascading
mode
Port
Working
Mode is set
to ODU0
Mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1]) for
ports
ClientLP1,
ClientLP3,
ClientLP5,
and
ClientLP7.
Service
Type is set to
GE for
channel 1 of
ports from
ClientLP1 to
ClientLP8.
l Bidirecti
onal GElevel
crossconnectio
ns are
configure
d
between
ports
RX1/
TX1,
RX3/
TX3,
RX5/
TX5, and
RX7/
TX7 and
channel 1
of ports
ClientLP
1,
ClientLP
3,
ClientLP
5, and
ClientLP
7.
l Bidirecti
onal GElevel
crossconnectio
ns are
configure
d
between
ports
RX2/
TX2,
RX4/
TX4,
RX6/
TX6, and
RX8/
TX8 and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1303
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service
Package
Name
Board
Working
Mode
Port
Working
Mode
Service
Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio
n
Configurat
ion
channel 2
of ports
ClientLP
2,
ClientLP
4,
ClientLP
6, and
ClientLP
8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1304
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service
Package
Name
Board
Working
Mode
Port
Working
Mode
Service
Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio
n
Configurat
ion
Tributary
line
7*STM-1/
OC3>ODU1
Cascading
mode
Port
Working
Mode is set
to ODU1
tributaryline (OTU1/
Any>ODU1>OTU1) for
port
ClientLP1.
Service
Type is set to
STM-1/
OC3 for
channels 1 to
4 of port
ClientLP1.
Port Type is
set to Line
Side Color
Optical
Port for port
RX8/TX8.
l Bidirecti
onal
ANYlevel
crossconnectio
ns are
configure
d
between
ports
from
RX1/
TX1 to
RX7/
TX7 and
channels
1 to 7 of
port
ClientLP
1.
l Bidirecti
onal
OTU1level
crossconnectio
ns are
configure
d
between
port
RX8/
TX8 and
channel 1
of port
ODU1LP
1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1305
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service
Package
Name
Board
Working
Mode
Port
Working
Mode
Service
Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio
n
Configurat
ion
Tributary
line 7*FE>ODU0
Cascading
mode
Port
Working
Mode is set
to ODU0
tributaryline (Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1) for
port
ClientLP1.
l Service
Type is
set to FE
for
channels
1 to 4 of
port
ClientLP
1 and
channels
5 to 7 for
port
ClientLP
2.
Port Type is
set to Line
Side Color
Optical
Port for port
RX8/TX8.
l Bidirecti
onal
ANYlevel
crossconnectio
ns are
configure
d
between
ports
from
RX1/
TX1 to
RX7/
TX7 and
channels
1 to 4 of
port
ClientLP
1 and
channels
5 to 7 of
port
ClientLP
2.
l Bidirecti
onal
OTU1level
crossconnectio
ns are
configure
d
between
port
RX8/
TX8 and
channel 1
of port
ODU1LP
1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1306
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service
Package
Name
Board
Working
Mode
Port
Working
Mode
Service
Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio
n
Configurat
ion
4*OTU1
REG
NonCascading
mode
Port
Working
Mode is set
to ODU1
tributaryline (OTU1/
Any>ODU1>OTU1) for
ports
ClientLP1,
ClientLP3,
ClientLP5,
and
ClientLP7.
Service
Type is set to
OTU1 for
channel 1 of
ports
ClientLP1,
ClientLP3,
ClientLP5,
and
ClientLP7.
Port Type is
set to Line
Side Color
Optical
Port for
ports from
RX5/TX5 to
RX8/TX8.
l Bidirecti
onal
OTU1level
crossconnectio
ns are
configure
d
between
ports
from
RX1/
TX1 to
RX4/
TX4 and
channel 1
of ports
ClientLP
1,
ClientLP
3,
ClientLP
5, and
ClientLP
7.
l Bidirecti
onal
OTU1level
crossconnectio
ns are
configure
d
between
ports
from
RX5/
TX5 to
RX8/
TX8 and
channel 1
of ports
from
ODU1LP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1307
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service
Package
Name
Board
Working
Mode
Port
Working
Mode
Service
Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio
n
Configurat
ion
1 to
ODU1LP
4.
Tributary
4*OTU1>ODU1 (reencapsulated
into ODU0)
NonCascading
mode
Port
Working
Mode is set
to
ODU1_AN
Y_ODU0_O
DU1 reencapsulati
on
tributaryline mode
(OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1) for
ports
ClientLP1,
ClientLP3,
ClientLP5,
and
ClientLP7.
Service
Type is set to
OTU1 for
channel 1 of
ports
ClientLP1,
ClientLP3,
ClientLP5,
and
ClientLP7.
Bidirectional
OTU1-level
crossconnections
are
configured
between
ports from
RX1/TX1 to
RX4/TX4
and channel
1 of ports
ClientLP1,
ClientLP3,
ClientLP5,
and
ClientLP7.

For parameters of TOM, refer to Table 15-135.
Table 15-135 TOM parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

1308
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Channel Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

SDI, ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, OC-3,
0C-12, OC-48, OTU-1,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16
Default: None

Rate (Mbit/s)
100 - 2200
Default: /

information.
NOTE
Only the TN52TOM supports this
parameter.

NOTE
format.

board.
NOTE
parameter.

information.
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1309
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled

information.
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN

Mode
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

pass-through (LPT).
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
information.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1310
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

Ethernet services.
information.
to Disabled.
NOTE
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

board resides.
information.

1311
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled

commissioning.
Board Mode
Cascading Mode, Noncascading Mode
Default: Disabled
Default: Noncascading Mode

NOTE
parameter.

Board Working mode
Cascading, NonCascading
Default: NonCascading

NOTE
parameter.
Cascading: Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8
can be used as WDM side optical ports. The
board supports multiplexing up to six
channels of Any signals into one channel of
OTU1 signals.
Non-Cascading: RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can
be used as WDM-side optical ports. The
board supports multiplexing up to four
channels of Any signals into two channels of
OTU1 signals.
Port Working Mode
In Non-Cascading
mode, nine working
modes are supported.a
In Cascading mode,
five working modes are
supported.b
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

scenario and service mapping trail. For
the configuration methods of different
application scenarios of the TOM board,
see the Configuration Guide.

1312
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
a: Working modes supported in Non-Cascading mode are as follows:

l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)
l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
l Application 3 of ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)
l ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1)
l NONE Mode (Not for Port)
b: Working modes supported in Cascading mode are as follows:
l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)
l ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)
l NONE Mode (Not for Port)
15.11.10 Specifications of the TOM

Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Fixed
Optical
Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
TN
11T
OM
N/A
I-16
N/A

(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
TN
52T
OM
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2

(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
(Video eSFP)-20 km
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1313
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
NOTE

NOTE
listed above apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2

1314
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the
NOTE
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications
below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1315
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

1316
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values might
be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals
are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620

1317
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
NOTE
OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals
are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400

1318
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

Eye pattern mask

km
-


Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video
eSFP)-20 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
20
Service rate
Gbit/s
1.5

nm
1290 to 1330
dBm
dBm
-7
dB
nm
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
1260 to 1620
dBm
-22
dBm

1319
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video
eSFP)-20 km
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
80

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
nm
1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
nm
1270 to 1620
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

1320
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
nm
12.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

1321
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-143 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical for SDH services

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
APD
APD

Receiver
type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
PIN
PIN

1322
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11TOM: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN52TOM: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TOM
55
60
TN52TOM
81
89.1
15.12 TQM
TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board

The available functional versions of the TQM board are TN11 and TN12.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1323
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
TQM
TN12
TQM

l
Function:
Only the TN12TQM supports the OTU1/HD-SDI/SDI/FDDI services, PRBS function,
Test frame and Tributary SNCP protection. For details, see 15.12.3 Functions and
Features.
Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 15.12.10 Specifications
of the TQM.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11TQM
TN12TQM
The TN12TQM can be created as TN11TQM on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TQM functions as the
TN11TQM.
TN12TQM
None
15.12.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQM board converts between four optical signals at the rate
between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical
signal through cross-connection.
For the position of the TQM board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-346.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1324
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-346 Position of the TQM board in the WDM system

G.694.1
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1
MUX
TQM
NS2
1
NS2
DMUX
4
Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TQM
4
WDM side
Client side
NOTE

The TQM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 15-144 Functions and features of the TQM board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s
into four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal and sends
the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection.

1325
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only the TN12TQM supports SDI, HD-SDI, OTU1 and FDDI services.
The TQM supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800:

l Supports the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/
s and 2.5 Gbit/s between the boards in paired slots.
l Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal or two GE signals
between the TQM and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired
slot.
OptiX OSN 3800:
2.5 Gbit/s or one ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group
(consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh
group.
OTN
function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and

multiplexed into ODU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than
the ITU-T G.709.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1326
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
PRBS
function
TN11TQM: not supported.

TN12TQM: supports the PRBS function on the client side.

NOTE
is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
LPT
function
is FE or GE.
Test frame
TN11TQM: not supported

TN12TQM: supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
l Supports the Tributary SNCP protection (TN12TQM).
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

1327
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
NOTE
Only the TN12TQM supports the following standards and
protocols.

Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1328
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TQM board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 15-347 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1329
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-347 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM

4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 1X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Service
OTN
encapsulation and Processing Cross-connect
module
mapping module
module
Client-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and GE electrical signals.
NOTE
NOTE
electrical signals.
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
In the signal flow of the TQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQM to the backplane,
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
1330
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of
Any signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then,
If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing,
demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of
Any signals to the client-side optical module.
interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal

OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQM
and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane.
The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU1
Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1331
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

15.12.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQM board.

Figure 15-348 shows the front panel of the TQM board.
Figure 15-348 Front panel of the TQM board
TQM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TQM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1332
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQM board. Table 15-145 lists the
Table 15-145 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQM board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX4
LC

RX1-RX4
LC

NOTE
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Hazard Level

15.12.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TQM board.
Table 15-146 shows the valid slots for the TQM board.
Table 15-146 Valid slots for the TQM board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800

1333
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


Table 15-147 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQM board and the port numbers
Physical Port
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 15-349 shows the application model of the TQM board. Table 15-148 describes the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1334
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-349 Port diagram of the TQM board

Other line/
OTU board
Other tributary/
PID board
Backplane
ODU1
4 x GE/Any/OTU1
201
201
201
201
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
201
Client Side
Crossconnect
module

NMS to receive GE/Any/OTU1/ODU1 signals from
other boards
Service
processing
module
NOTE
TN11TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/
ClientLP)-4.
Table 15-148 Meaning of NM port of the TQM board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
ClientLP

Configuration Principle
l
the transmit end.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1335
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For each TQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can
be configured only in channel 1 of the TQM board.
Service Type
Number of Timeslots
GE
FE
OTU1
16
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
16
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
16
FC100
FC200
12
FICON
FICON Express
12
HD-SDI
11
DVB-ASI
SDI
ESCON
FDDI

If the TQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
can be created.
1336
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TQM
board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
by
and
in Figure 15-350.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TQM board and the
services accessed from the client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the
port of the TQM board, as shown by 4 in Figure 15-350. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services
accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of
the TQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
Figure 15-350 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board

Client side
Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4
2
1
WDM side
TQM
The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the
TQM board
3
4

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the board and ODU1LP port of other boards
(or IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of
ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 15-351.
1337
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-351 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board

WDM side
Other board a
(compatible mode)
IN/OUT-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:1
Other board b
(standard mode)
Client side
TQM
The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM
Other board a
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/
TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/
TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode)
Other board b
receive timeslots.

For parameters of the TQM, refer to Table 15-149.
Table 15-149 TQM parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1338
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop

information.
Service Type
None, Any, DVBASI,SDI, ESCON,

FC-100, FC-200,
FDDI, FE, FICON,
FICON Express, GE,
GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, OTU-1
Default: None

NOTE
Only the TN12TQM supports Any, SDI,
FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services.
NOTE
format.

Rate (Mbit/s)
100 - 2200
Default: 0

a board.
NOTE
Only TN12TQM supports this parameter.

information.
Off, On
Laser Status
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.
pass-through (LPT).

1339
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN

Mode


Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

Ethernet services.
information.
to Disabled.
NOTE
Only available for TN12TQM.
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

board resides.
information.
NOTE
Only available for the TN12TQM.
15.12.10 Specifications of the TQM

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1340
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board

Module
TN11TQ
M
N/A
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
TN12TQ
M
N/A
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
NOTE
NOTE

NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1341
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
APD
APD
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver
type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
PIN
PIN

1342
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Std 802.3.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580

Operating
wavelength
range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355

1343
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may
be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1344
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

1345
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9

1346
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

km
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight
l
TN11TQM: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb.)
TN12TQM: 1.1 kg (2.43 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TQM
50.3
57.6
TN12TQM
25
27.5
15.13 TQS
TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board

Only one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is, TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
TQS

1347
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.13.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQS board implements conversion between four STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals.
For the position of the TQS board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-352.
Figure 15-352 Position of the TQS board in the WDM system
G.694.1
1
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
MUX
Client side
NS2
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
DMUX
NS2
TQS
4
G.694.1
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
TQS
4
WDM side
4
Client side

The TQS board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
Table 15-154 Functions and features of the TQS board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals into four ODU1 signals

and sends the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection. The
Client-side
service type
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals

between the TQS and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot.
OTN
function
l Supports mapping each channel of 2.5G signals into the ODU1 signals at
the ODU1 interface of the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one
board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards
belonging to the mesh group.

the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
ESC
function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
service signal.

1348
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme


eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783

1349
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TQS board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
Figure 15-353 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQS.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1350
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-353 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS

ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
O/E
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
procssing module
Client-side
Optical
module
OTN
Processing
module
Cross-connect
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQS board can access the following optical signals:
l
In the signal flow of the TQS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQS to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and FEC decoding with OTU1 signals,
and performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing
with STM-16/OC-48 signals. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals
to the backplane for grooming.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1351
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane.
The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, framing of OTU1 signals,
encoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out
four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals.

mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module.
OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQS
and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane.
Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals.
ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
Frames ODU1/OTU1 signals, processes overheads in ODU1/OTU1 signals, and
performs FEC encoding and decoding of the OTU1 signals.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1352
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

15.13.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQS board.

Figure 15-354 shows the front panel of the TQS board.
Figure 15-354 Front panel of the TQS board
TQS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TQS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1353
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQS board. Table 15-155 lists the
Table 15-155 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQS board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

15.13.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TQS board.
Table 15-156 shows the valid slots for the TQS board.
Table 15-156 Valid slots for the TQS board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1354
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 15-157 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQS board and the port numbers
Physical Port
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 15-355 shows the application model of the TQS board. Table 15-158 describes the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1355
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-355 Port diagram of the TQS board
Other tributary/
PID board
Backplane
4 x ODU1
201
(LP1/LP1)-1
202
(LP2/LP2)-1
203
(LP3/LP3)-1
204
(LP4/LP4)-1
3
(RX1/TX1)-1
4
(RX2/TX2)-1
5
(RX3/TX3)-1
6
(RX4/TX4)-1
Client Side
Crossconnect
module

Service
processing
module
Table 15-158 Meaning of NM port of the TQS board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4
LP1-LP4
Internal logical ports. All optical paths are numbered 1.

If the TQS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
The corresponding channels of the four LP ports are respectively connected to the RX1/
TX1-RX4/TX4. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
cross-connection between the LP port of the TQS board and the optical channels of the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1356
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU1LP port of other boards (or the IN/OUT port on the NS2 board) to implement the
cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown Figure 15-356.
Figure 15-356 Cross-connection diagram of the TQS board
WDM side
Other board a
(compatible
mode)
Other board b
(standard
mode)
Client side
201(LP1/LP1)-1
201(LP1/LP1)-2
TQS
201(LP1/LP1)-3
201(LP1/LP1)-4
The client side of the TQS board are cross-connected to the


15.13.9 TQS Loopbacks

Table 15-159 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TQS boards.
Table 15-159 Loopbacks supported by TQS boards
Service
type
Boar
d
Loopback Type
Description
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
TN11
TQS
Client-side
outloop
See Figure 15-357.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-358.
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-357, four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services are received on the client
side. One of the four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services is loopbacked to the client side and
the other three STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services are passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1357
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-357 Client-side outloop on the TN11TQS board

RX1/TX1
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX2/TX2
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-358, four ODU1 services from the backplane are converted into
four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. One
of the four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services is loopbacked to the backplane and the other
three STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services are passed through.
Figure 15-358 Client-side inloop on the TN11TQS board
RX1/TX1
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX2/TX2
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
15.13.10 TQS Parameters

For parameters of TQS, refer to Table 15-160.
Table 15-160 TQS parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

1358
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, OC-48, OTU-1,

STM-16
Default: OTU-1
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

information.
information.
to Disabled.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1359
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG

board resides.
information.
Default: None
15.13.11 Specifications of the TQS

Board

Module
TN11TQ
S
N/A
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
NOTE

NOTE
This module is used to access STM-16 and OTU1 signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16
OTU1 signals.
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Line code
format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

1360
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28

1361
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 signals. The
specifications listed below apply to OTU1 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are STM-16, OC-48.
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
CWDM)-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
80

nm
1471 to 1611
dBm
dBm
dB
8.2
nm
6.5
nm
1.0
Minimum side mode suppression

ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
APD
nm
1270 to 1620

1362
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

CWDM)-80 km
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask


Receiver type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
APD

1363
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

km
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TQS
43
47.3
15.14 TQX
TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

The available functional versions of the TQX board are TN11, TN52, TN53, TN55.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
TQX

1364
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN52
TQX
TN53
TQX
TN55
TQX

Function:
l
The TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX board supports the conversion between the clientside signals and ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN55TQX board supports the
conversion between the client-side signals and ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex electrical signals.
Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX board supports FC800 and FC1200 services.
The TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX support the OTU2 and OTU2e services.
Only the TN55TQX board supports four channels of IEEE 1588v2 function.
Only the TN55TQX board supports four channels of physical clock function.

Specification:
l
The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.14.11
Specifications of the TQX.
Table 15-164 Substitution rules of the TQX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11TQX
TN52TQX,
TN55TQX
The TN52TQX and TN55TQX can be created as TN11TQX

on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without
any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX/
TN52TQX functions as the TN11TQX.
TN52TQX
TN53TQX,
TN55TQX
The TN53TQX and TN55TQX can be created as TN52TQX

on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without
any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TQX
functions as the TN52TQX.
TN53TQX
TN55TQX
The TN55TQX can be created as TN53TQX on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX functions as the
TN53TQX.

1365
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN55TQX
None
15.14.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQX board converts between four FC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and four ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex electrical signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TQX board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-361.
Figure 15-359 Position of the TN11TQX board in the WDM system
G.694.1
4
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
TQX
4
G.694.1
4
Client side
MUX
WDM side
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
TQX
NQ2
4 DMUX
Client side
WDM side
Figure 15-360 Position of the TN52TQX board in the WDM system

G.694.1
10GE LAN
1
10GE WAN
STM-64
TQX
OC-192
OTU2
4
OTU2e
G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
4
Client side
TQX
NQ2
4 DMUX
MUX
WDM side
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
Client side
WDM side
Figure 15-361 Position of the TN53TQX/TN55TQX board in the WDM system

G.694.1
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
1
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
FC800
4
FC1200
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
4
1
NQ2
TQX
4
TQX
NQ2
4
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
4
WDM side

10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
FC800
FC1200
Client side
1366
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The TN11TQX board supports the conversion between four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical
signals.
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical
signals, and supports conversion between four channels of FC800 optical signals and two channels of
ODUflex electrical signals.

The TQX board enables cross-connections at the electrical layer.
Table 15-165 Functions and features of the TQX board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
TQX convert signal as follows:

l 4xFC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/
OTU2e<->4xODU2/ODU2e.
l 4xFC800<->4xODUflex
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports FC800 and FC1200 services.
Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services.
For the TN11TQX and TN52TQX, The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the
STM-64 service is the same. Therefore, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted,
you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.
Crossconnect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals

between the TQX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.
NOTE
The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN55TQX board.
Only the FC800 services support the ODUflex signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1367
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
OTN
function
l Supports mapping each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2/ODU2e

signals at the ODU2/ODU2e interface of the backplane.
l Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The
mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43.
l Supports PM function for ODU2.
l Supports SM and TCM function when the TN52TQX , TN53TQX,
TN55TQX receives OTN services.
Alarm and
performance
event
monitoring
ALS
function
PRBS
function

NOTE
LPT function
is 10GE LAN.
Test frame
Supports the test frame of 10GE LAN services.
IEEE
1588v2
Supports four channels of IEEE 1588v2 only when the TN55TQX board
Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, or receives OTU2 services on its client
side.
Physical
clock
Supports four channels of physical clock only when the TN55TQX board
Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side.
Supported by the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX
Protection
scheme

XFP
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

1368
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3ae
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 15-362 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TQX/TN11TQX.
Figure 15-363 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TQX.
Figure 15-364 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN55TQX.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1369
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-362 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TQX/TN11TQX

ODU2/ODU2e
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
OTN
processing
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
1370
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-363 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TQX

ODU2/ODU2e
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
OTN
processing
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
1371
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-364 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN55TQX

ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
OTN
processing
module
1588
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQX board can access the following optical signals:
l

NOTE
Only TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQXsupports the OTU2/ OTU2e optical signals.

Only TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports the FC800/FC1200 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1372
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TQX board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQX to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out four channels of
ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for grooming.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the
cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as
ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends
out four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/
FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs four
channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals.
electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/
FC1200 optical signals.

encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN
processing module.
ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the
10GE LAN performance monitoring function.
Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/
ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has
the FC performance monitoring function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1373
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
FC800 services can be mapped into ODU2/ODUflex payload area and FC1200 services can be mapped
into ODU2e payload area.

Frames ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex signals.
l
1588 module
According to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, the module transmits the clock information of the
clock board to the next NE or extracts the clock information from the service board and
then transmits the clock information to the clock board.

Power supply module

15.14.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQX board.

Figure 15-365 shows the front panel of the TQX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1374
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-365 Front panel of the TQX board

TQX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TQX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQX board. Table 15-166 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1375
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-166 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQX board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

15.14.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TQX board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, if slots IU1, IU4, IU11, and IU14 house the TQX board, the TQX
board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s. If any of the other slots houses the
TQX board, the TQX board supports a maximum service capacity of 20 Gbit/s.
For the OptiX OSN 8800: The TQX board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s
in any slot.
Table 15-167 shows the valid slots for the TN11TQX board.
Table 15-167 Valid slots for the TN11TQX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-168 shows the valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board.
Table 15-168 Valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-169 shows the valid slots for the TN53TQX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1376
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-169 Valid slots for the TN53TQX board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Table 15-170 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQX board and the port numbers
Physical Port
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Logical Ports
Figure 15-366 shows the port diagrams of the TQX board. Table 15-171 describes the meaning
of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1377
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-366 Port diagram of the TQX

Backplane
4x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1

configured on the NMS.
NOTE
Only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex.
Table 15-171 Meaning of NMS port of the TQX board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4
ClientLP1-ClientLP4

If the TQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
TN11TQX/TN52QX/TN53TQX: Configuration of cross-connection

pass-through.
Step 1: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set
the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
Step 2: Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the
ODU2LP of the other boards, as shown in Figure 15-367.
TN55TQX: Configuration of cross-connection

pass-through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1378
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Step 1: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to
set the Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)
Step 2: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to
set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
Step 3: Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the
ODU2LP of the other boards, as shown in Figure 15-367.
Create ODUflex cross-connections between this board and other boards to support
service pass-through.
Step 1: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to
set the Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex)
Step 2: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to
set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
Step 3: Create the cross-connections of ODUflex level between the ClientLP port and
the ODUflex port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 15-368.
NOTE
The TN55TQX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring
cross-connections for the board, see ODUflex Timeslot to 7.
Figure 15-367 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX

board
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1
Cross connect mode
Other board a
(standard
mode)
Other board b
(compatible
mode)
Client side
TQX
Cross connect mode
The client side of the TQX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1379
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Other board b
TN11TQX:
TN52TQX:
TN53TQX:
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/
TN55TQX:
Figure 15-368 Cross-connection diagram of the TN55TQX board

WDM side
Other board
Cross connect mode
Client side
TQX
Cross connect mode
The client side of the TQX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board
15.14.9 TQX Loopbacks

Table 15-172 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TQX boards.
Table 15-172 Loopbacks supported by TQX boards
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Service
type
Board
Loopback
Type
Description
10GE
LAN/
TN11TQ
X/
Client-side
outloop
See Figure 15-369.

1380
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service
type
Board
Loopback
Type
Description
10GE
WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
FC800/
FC1200
TN52TQ
X/
TN53TQ
X/
TN55TQ
X
Client-side
inloop
See Figure 15-370.
NOTE
The TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services.

When receiving OTU2/OTU2e services, the TN52TQX board supports client-side outloop.
When receiving OTU2/OTU2e services, the TN53TQX/TN55TQX board supports client-side outloop and
client-side inloop.
Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports FC800 and FC1200 services.
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-369, any N of four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/
FC800/FC1200 services from the client side can be looped back to the client side and the
remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services can be
passed through.
Figure 15-369 Client-side outloop on the TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX board

RX1/TX1
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC192/FC800/FC1200
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
RX3/TX3
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
RX4/TX4
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-370, four ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane are converted
into four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services after being
framed, demapped, and decapsulated. Any N of the four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1381
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192//FC800/FC1200 services can be passed
through.
Figure 15-370 Client-side inloop on the TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX board
RX1/TX1
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
RX3/TX3
RX4/TX4
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services

For parameters of the TQX, refer to Table 15-173.
Table 15-173 TQX parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Sets and queries the optical interface

name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1382
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

information.
l TN11TQX: None,
10GE LAN,
OC-192, STM-64

Service Type
Default: None
l TN52TQX: None,
10GE LAN,
OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2E, STM-64
Default: None
l TN53TQX/
TN55TQX: None,
10GE LAN,
OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2E, STM-64,
FC800, FC1200
Default: None
Port Mapping
Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)

service.
NOTE
For the TN11TQX: only
the ClientLP1 and
ClientLP3 ports support
MAC transparent
mapping (10.7G).
Laser Status
Service Mode
Off, On
Default: Off

Client Mode, OTN

Mode

NOTE
Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX
supports this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1383
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description

Rate (Mbit/s)
9953.28, 10312.50

board.
Default: /
NOTE
Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports
this parameter.

information.
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
0s, 100ms, 200ms,

300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: Enabled
Default: 0s
Hold-off Time of
Automatic Laser
Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms,

300ms, 400ms, 500ms,
600ms, 700ms, 800ms,
900ms, 1s, 1100ms,
1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms,
1600ms, 1700ms,
1800ms, 1900ms, 2s
Default: 0s
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600
Default: 9600

information.
automatically disabling lasers. With
detects service interruption to the point
when ALS automatically shuts down the
related lasers.
NOTE
Only the TN55TQX supports this parameter.

automatically enabling lasers. With ALS
enabled, the hold-off time is a time
detects service recovery to the point
when ALS automatically enables the
related lasers.
NOTE
Only the TN55TQX supports this parameter.

NOTE
For the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX,
when Port Mapping is set to Bit
Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum
Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1384
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled

to Disabled.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX
supports this parameter.
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

NOTE

FEC
FEC Mode
Default: FEC

NOTE

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Default: Disabled
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

board resides.
information.
pass-through (LPT).

1385
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled
NOTE
TN53TQX/TN55TQX.
Port Working Mode

(Any->ODU2>OTU2), ODUflex
(Any->ODUflex),
NONE Mode(Not for
port)

NOTE
TN55TQX

(Any->ODU2>OTU2)
15.14.11 Specifications of the TQX

Board
Client-Side Fixed
Optical Module
TN11TQ
X
N/A
TN52TQ
X
N/A
TN53TQ
X
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1386
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Client-Side Fixed
Optical Module
TN55TQ
X
N/A
NOTE
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3

1387
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate )
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1

1388
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Maximum
reflectance
dB
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
-27
-27
-27
-12
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

1389
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11TQX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
TN52TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN53TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN55TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TQX
65.0
71.2
TN52TQX
91.5
100
TN53TQX
45
50
TN55TQX
45
50
15.15 TSXL
TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

The available functional versions of the TSXL board are TN11 and TN53.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
TSXL
TN53
TSXL

1390
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Function:
The TN11TSXL supports the cross-connections of ODU2 level.
The TN53TSXL supports the cross-connections of ODU3 level.
Only the TN53TSXL supports the OTU3 service.
For details, see 15.15.2 Application and 15.15.3 Functions and Features.
Appearance:
The TN53TSXL and TN11TSXL use different front panels with different dimensions. For
details, see 15.15.5 Front Panel and 15.15.11 Specifications of the TSXL.
Specification:
The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.15.11
Specifications of the TSXL.
The TSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
15.15.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TN11TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/
OC-768 optical signals and four channels of ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection.
The TN53TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical
signals and one channel of ODU3 electrical signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-371, and Figure
15-372.
Figure 15-371 Position of the TN11TSXL board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
NS2
STM-256
OC-768
TSXL
MUX
DMUX 4
4
NS2
Client side
NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX 4
TSXL
STM-256
OC-768
NS2
WDM side
Client side
Figure 15-372 Position of the TN53TSXL board in the WDM system

G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
STM-256
OC-768
OTU3
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TSXL
DMUX
NS3
NS3
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side

TSXL
STM-256
OC-768
OTU3
Client side
1391
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In this application scenario, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard
Mode.

The TSXL board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 15-176 Functions and features of the TSXL board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l TN11TSXL:
Maps one channel of STM-256/OC-768 signals on the client side
into four ODU2 signals.
Implements the transparent transmission of 40 Gbit/s services in
a 10 Gbit/s WDM network.
Implements the transparent transmission of client-side SDH/
SONET service clock and alarms.
l TN53TSXL:
Maps one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signals on the
client side into one channel of ODU3 signals.
Implements the transparent transmission of client-side SDH/
SONET/OTN service clock and alarms.
Client-side
service type
TN11TSXL:
l STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s
TN53TSXL:
l STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s
l OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU2 signals between

the TN11TSXL and the cross-connect board.
Supports the cross-connection of one channel of ODU3 signals between
the TN53TSXL and the cross-connect board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1392
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
OTN function
l TN11TSXL: Supports inversely multiplexing one channel of 40 Gbit/

s signals into four channels of ODU2 services.
l TN53TSXL: Supports inversely multiplexing one channel of 40 Gbit/
s signals into one channel of ODU3 services.
to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T
G.709.
l TN11TSXL: Supports PM functions for ODU2.
l TN53TSXL:
Supports PM, TCM, SM functions for ODU3 when the client-side
service type is OTU3.
l Supports PM function for ODU3 when the client-side service type is
STM-256/OC-768.
ALS function
PRBS function
TN11TSXL: Not supported

TN53TSXL: Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
LPT function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN53TSXL
Protection
scheme

Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783

1393
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TSXL consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
Figure 15-373 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL.
Figure 15-374 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TSXL.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1394
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-373 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL

Backplane(service
cross-connection)
4XODU2
Client side
O/E
RX
TX
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
1395
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-374 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TSXL

ODU3
Client side
O/E
RX
TX
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
Processing
module
Cross-connect
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TSXL board can access the following optical signals:
l
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TSXL board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSXL to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one 40 Gbit/s service signal through the RX
interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN
framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one
channel of ODU3 electrical signals to the backplane for grooming.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receive direction
1396
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The signal processing module receives four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one
channel of ODU3 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the
backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk virtual concatenation,
demapping processing. Then, the module sends out one channel of 40 Gbit/s service signal
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one 40 Gbit/s service signal,
and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of one channel of STM-256/OC-768/
OTU3 optical signal.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of STM-256/
OC-768/OTU3 optical signal.

The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module and OTN
processing module.
ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
Frames ODU2, ODU3 signals.

Power supply module

15.15.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TSXL board.

Figure 15-375 shows the front panel of the TN11TSXL board.
Figure 15-376 shows the front panel of the TN53TSXL board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1397
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-375 Front panel of the TN11TSXL board
TSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX
RX
TSXL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1398
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-376 Front panel of the TN53TSXL board
TSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX
RX
TSXL
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TSXL board. Table 15-177 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1399
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-177 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TSXL board
Interface
Type
Function
RX
LC

equipment.
TX
LC
Laser Hazard Level

15.15.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11TSXL board. One slot houses one TN53TSXL.
Table 15-178 shows the valid slots for the TN11TSXL board.
Table 15-178 Valid slots for the TN11TSXL board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16
NOTE
The rear connector of the TN11TSXL board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the
two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11TSXL board, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board
Table 15-179 shows the valid slots for the TN53TSXL board.
Table 15-179 Valid slots for the TN53TSXL board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1400
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 15-180 Mapping between the physical ports on the TSXL board and the port numbers
Physical Port
RX/TX
Logical Ports
Figure 15-377 shows the application model of the TN11TSXL board.
Figure 15-378 shows the application model of the TN53TSXL board.
Table 15-181 describes the meaning of each port.
Figure 15-377 Port diagram of the TN11TSXL board
Other line/
PID board
Backplane
4 x ODU2
151
(imp/imp)-1
151
(imp/imp)-2
151
(imp/imp)-3
151
(imp/imp)-4
3
(RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1401
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-378 Port diagram of the TN53TSXL board

Other line board
Backplane
ODU3
201
3
(RX1/TX1)-1
Client Side
Crossconnect
module

on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from
other boards
Service
processi
ng
module
Table 15-181 Meaning of NM port of the TSXL board
Port Name
Meaning
RX/TX
Corresponding to the client-side optical

interfaces.
imp (inverse multiplexing port)
The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
ClientLP1

numbered 1.

If the TSXL board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
TN11TSXL:
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of ODU2 level between the imp port and the ODU2LP port of the other boards
to achieve grooming of ODU2 services, as shown in Figure 15-379.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1402
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-379 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TSXL board

WDM side
Other board a
(compatible mode)
72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
Other board b
(standard mode)
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1
IN2/OUT2-OCH:2
Client side
151(imp/imp)-1
151(imp/imp)-2
151(imp/imp)-3
TSXL
151(imp/imp)-4
The client side of the TSXL board are cross-connected to the WDM

TN53TSXL:
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of ODU3 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU3LP port of the other
boards to achieve grooming of ODU3 services, as shown in Figure 15-380.
Figure 15-380 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TSXL board

WDM side
Other board
Client side
TSXL
The client side of the TSXL board is cross-connected to the WDM

Other board
TN54NS3
15.15.9 TSXL Loopbacks

Table 15-182 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TSXL boards.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1403
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-182 Loopbacks supported by TSXL boards

Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN11TSXL
Client-side outloop
See Figure 15-381.
Client-side inloop
See Figure 15-382.
Client-side outloop
One STM-256/OC-768 service received on the Client

side is loopbacked, See Figure 15-383.
TN53TSXL
One OTU3 service received on the Client side is

loopbacked, See Figure 15-384.
Client-side inloop
One STM-256/OC-768 service received on the Client

side is loopbacked, See Figure 15-385.
One OTU3 service received on the Client side is
loopbacked, See Figure 15-386.
Loopbacks Supported by TN11TSXL

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-381, one STM256/OC-768 services from the client side can be
looped back to the client side.
Figure 15-381 Client-side outloop on the TN11TSXL
ODU2
STM-256/OC-768
RX/TX
ODU2
ODU2
ODU2
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-382, four ODU2 services from the backplane are converted into
one STM-256/OC-768 service after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. One
STM-256/OC-768 service can be looped back to the backplane.
Figure 15-382 Client-side inloop on the TN11TSXL
ODU2
STM-256/OC-768
RX/TX
ODU2
ODU2
ODU2
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1404
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Loopbacks Supported by TN53TSXL

l
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 15-383, one STM256/OC-768 services from the client side can be
looped back to the client side.
Figure 15-383 Client-side outloop on the TN53TSXL (1)
STM-256/OC-768
RX/TX
ODU3
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
As shown in Figure 15-384, one OTU3 service received on the Client side is demapped
into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated, The one ODU3 service
from the client side can be looped back to the client side.
Figure 15-384 Client-side outloop on the TN53TSXL (2)
OTU3
RX/TX
ODU3
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop
As shown in Figure 15-385, one ODU3 service from the backplane can be looped back to
the backplane.
Figure 15-385 Client-side inloop on the TN53TSXL (1)
STM-256/OC-768
RX/TX
ODU3
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
As shown in Figure 15-386, one ODU3 service from the backplane can be looped back to
the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1405
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-386 Client-side inloop on the TN53TSXL (2)

OTU3
RX/TX
ODU3
Client-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services

For parameters of TSXL, refer to Table 15-183.
Table 15-183 TSXL parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, OC-768,
STM-256, OTU3
Default: STM-256

information.
NOTE
Only the TN53TSXL supports OTU-3
services.
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: Off
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


1406
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled

information.
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled

NOTE
Type is set to OTU3.

FEC
FEC Mode
Default: FEC

NOTE
Type is set to OTU3.

SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

board resides.
information.
commissioning.
NOTE
Only the TN53TSXL supports this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1407
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.15.11 Specifications of the TSXL

Board

Module

Module
TN11TS
XL/
TN53TS
XL
40G Transponder
N/A
NOTE
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
40G Transponder
NRZ
nm
1530 to 1565
dBm
dBm
dB
8.2
dB
35
ps/nm
40
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1290 to 1570
dBm
-6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1408
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
40G Transponder
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
TN11TSXL:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN53TSXL:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TSXL
90.2
96
TN53TSXL
75
83

1409
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
16
PID Unit
About This Chapter

16.1 BMD4
BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz
16.2 BMD8
BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz
16.3 ELQX
ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board
16.4 PTQX
PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary
16.5 NPO2E
NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20channel extended
16.6 NPO2
NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board
16.7 ENQ2
ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1410
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
16.1 BMD4
BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz

The available functional version of the BMD4 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
BMD
4
16.1.2 Application
The BMD4 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes
signals.
Figure 16-1 shows the position of the BMD4 in a WDM system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1411
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-1 Position of the BMD4 in a WDM system

4
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
PTQX
OA
BMD4
OA
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
ELQX
ELQX
OA
BMD4
PTQX 4
OA
PTQX
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX

The BMD4 provides functions and features such as multiplexing, demultiplexing, and in-service
spectrum detection.
Table 16-1 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD4.
Table 16-1 Functions and features of the BMD4
Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function
In a 40-channel system, the BMD4 board multiplexes and

demultiplexes the optical signals.
l Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed
signals with a spacing of 100 GHz to four channels of signals with
a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12-wavelength
multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength
multiplexed signals. The reverse process is similar.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1412
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Function or
Feature
Description
In-service detection
and monitoring of the
spectrum
Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of

optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum
analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the
services.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The BMD4 board consists of the optical module, the control and communication module, and
the power supply module.
Figure 16-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4.
Figure 16-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4
Optical module
T01
T02
T03
T04
IN
Interleaver
R01
R02
R03
R04
Splitter
Coupler
OUT
MON
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
1413
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface
and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into four
channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally,
the four channels of multiplexed signals are output through the T01-T04 optical interfaces.
The four channels of multiplexed signals are received through the R01-R04 optical interfaces
and are transmitted to the coupler. Then, the coupler couples the four channels of multiplexed
signals into one channel of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz. Finally, the signals
are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing
of 100 GHz into four channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that
is, two channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8wavelength multiplexed signals, and uses the coupler to couple the signals with a
spacing of 200 GHz into one channel of 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a
spacing of 100 GHz.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MON interface for detection.

Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from
the CPU.
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Power supply module

Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module
on the board.
16.1.5 Front Panel

There is one indicator, 11 optical interfaces, and laser level label on the front panel of the BMD4.

Figure 16-3 shows the front panel of the BMD4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1414
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-3 Front panel of the BMD4
BMD4
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
T01
R01
T02
R02
T03
R03
T04
R04
BMD4
Indicators
l
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 11 optical interfaces on the front panel of the BMD4. Table 16-2 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1415
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD4

Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel

spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
OUT
LC
Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing

(C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
MON
LC
Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8

board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect
the optical spectrum in service.
The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the
optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical
power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the
optical power at the OUT interface, calculation
formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) =
10 dB.
T01/R01
LC
Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.80 THz to

196.00 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel
spacing.
T02/R02
LC
Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.70 THz to

spacing.
T03/R03
LC
Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.20 THz to

spacing.
T04/R04
LC

spacing.
Laser Hazard Level

The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output
optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
16.1.6 Valid Slots

The BMD4 occupies one slot.
Table 16-3 shows the valid slots for the BMD4 board.
Table 16-3 Valid slots for the BMD4 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17

1416
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
16.1.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4

The characteristic code of the BMD4 consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by
the board.
Table 16-4 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD4.
Table 16-4 Characteristic code of the BMD4
Code
Indication
Description
The first character
Band
Indicates the multiplexing

scheme adopted by the board.
The value C represents the C
band. The value L represents
the L band.
For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD4 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are
in the C band.
16.1.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4

Each optical interface on the BMD4 accesses certain fixed wavelengths.
Table 16-5 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD4 and the relationships between the frequencies
and wavelengths.
Table 16-5 Optical interfaces on the BMD4 and relationships between the frequencies and
wavelengths
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Number of
Wavelengths
Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
T01/R01
12
193.8
1546.917
194.0
1545.322
194.2
1543.730
194.4
1542.142
194.6
1540.557
194.8
1538.976
195.0
1537.397
195.2
1535.822
195.4
1534.250
195.6
1532.681
195.8
1531.116
196.0
1529.553

1417
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Interface
Number of
Wavelengths
Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
T02/R02
12
193.7
1547.715
193.9
1546.119
194.1
1544.526
194.3
1542.936
194.5
1541.349
194.7
1539.766
194.9
1538.186
195.1
1536.609
195.3
1535.036
195.5
1533.465
195.7
1531.898
195.9
1530.334
192.2
1559.794
192.4
1558.173
192.6
1556.555
192.8
1554.940
193.0
1553.329
193.2
1551.721
193.4
1550.116
193.6
1548.515
192.1
1560.606
192.3
1558.983
192.5
1557.363
192.7
1555.747
192.9
1554.134
193.1
1552.524
193.3
1550.918
193.5
1549.315
T03/R03
T04/R04

For BMD4 parameters, refer to Table 16-6.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1418
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-6 BMD4 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name. It is recommended to use the
default value.
Configure Band
Used to configure type of the

working band of a board.
Default: C
Actual Band
Queries the actual working band of

the board.
Actual Working Band

Parity
Queries the parity of the actual

working band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Used to select the desired parity of

the working band.
Default: All
16.1.10 Specifications of the BMD4

The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 16-7 Optical specifications of the BMD4
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529 - 1561
T0x/R0x channel spacinga
GHz
200
IN/OUT channel spacing
GHz
100
Insertion loss
dB
dB
IN-T01
IN-T02
IN-T03
IN-T04
R01-OUT
R02-OUT
R03-OUT
R04-OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1419
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Item
IN->T01/T03@T02/T04
Isolationb
Unit
Value
dB
25
IN->T02/T04@T01/T03
IN->T01@T03
13
IN->T03@T01
IN->T02@T04
IN->T04@T02
R01->OUT@R03
R03->OUT@R01
R02->OUT@R04
R04->OUT@R02
Optical return loss
dB
40
Directivity
dB
45
PMD
dB
0.5
Polarization dependent loss
dB
0.5
Input optical power range
dBm
23
a: T0x represents T01 to T04 ports. R0x represents R01 to R04 ports.
b: In the case of T01/T03@T02/T04, this parameter refers to the isolation between any one
of T01/T03 ports and any one of T02/T04 ports. It is the same case for other isolation item.
T01/T02 ports are intended for blue band signals. T03/T04 ports are intended for red band
signals.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
BMD4
0.2
0.3
16.2 BMD8
BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1420
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Only one functional version of the BMD8 board is available, that is, TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
BMD
8
16.2.2 Application
The BMD8 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes
signals.
Figure 16-4 shows the position of the BMD8 in a WDM system.
Figure 16-4 Position of the BMD8 in a WDM system
4
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
PTQX
OA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
ELQX
ELQX
OA
BMD8
BMD8
OA
PTQX 4
OA
PTQX

PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX
1421
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

The BMD8 provides functions and features such as multiplexing, demultiplexing, and in-service
spectrum detection.
Table 16-8 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD8.
Table 16-8 Functions and features of the BMD8
Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function
In an 80-channel system, the BMD8 board multiplexes and

demultiplexes optical signals.
l Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed
signals with a spacing of 50 GHz into four channels of oddwavelength signals and four channels of even-wavelength
multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, four
channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels
of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. The reverse process is
similar.
Detection and
monitoring of the
online spectrum
Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of

optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum
analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the
services.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The BMD8 board consists of the optical module, the control and communication module, and
the power supply module.
Figure 16-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1422
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8
Optical module
T01
T02
T03
T04
T05
T06
T07
T08
Interleaver
R01
R02
R03
R04
R05
R06
R07
R08
IN
Splitter
OUT
MON
Interleaver
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface
and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into eight
channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz. Finally, the four channels of oddwavelength multiplexed signals are output through the T01-T04 optical interfaces. After
wavelength filtering, the four channels of even-wavelength multiplexed signals are output
through the T05-T08 optical interfaces.
The interleaver multiplexes the four channels of odd-wavelength signals input through the R01R04 optical interfaces and the four channels of even-wavelength signals input through the R05R08 optical interfaces to one channel of optical signals. Finally, the signals are output through
the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical module
1423
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing

of 50 GHz into eight channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz and
uses the interleaver to couple the signals into one channel of 80-wavelength multiplexed
signals with a spacing of 50 GHz.
l

the CPU.
Power supply module

on the board.
16.2.5 Front Panel

There is one indicator, 19 optical interfaces, and laser level label on the front panel of the BMD8.

Figure 16-6 shows the front panel of the BMD8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1424
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-6 Front panel of the BMD8
BMD8
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
MON
T05
T01
R05
R01
T06
T02
R06
R02
T07
T03
R07
R03
T08
T04
R08
R04
BMD8
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 19 optical interfaces on the front panel of the BMD8. Table 16-9 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1425
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD8

Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing

(C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
OUT
LC

MON
LC
Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board

so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect the optical
spectrum in service.
The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical
power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the
MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the
OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm)
= 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB.
T01/R01
LC
Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.850 THz to 196.050

THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing.
T02/R02
LC

T03/R03
LC

T04/R04
LC

T05/R05
LC

spacing.
T06/R06
LC

spacing.
T07/R07
LC

spacing.
T08/R08
LC

spacing.
Laser Hazard Level

16.2.6 Valid Slots

The BMD8 occupies two slots.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1426
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-10 shows the valid slots for the BMD8 board.
Table 16-10 Valid slots for the BMD8 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot on the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the BMD8 displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of
the two occupied slots. For example, if the BMD8 occupies IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the
BMD8 displayed on the NM is IU1.
16.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8

The characteristic code of the BMD8 consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by
the board.
Table 16-11 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD8.
Table 16-11 Characteristic code of the BMD8
Code
Indication
Description
The first character
Band

scheme adopted by the board.
The value C represents the C
band.
For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD8 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are
in the C band.
16.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8

Each optical interface on the BMD8 accesses certain fixed wavelengths.
Table 16-12 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the
frequencies and wavelengths.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1427
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-12 Optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the frequencies and
wavelengths
Interface
Number of
Wavelengths
Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
T01/R01
12
193.85
1546.52
194.05
1544.92
194.25
1543.33
194.45
1541.75
194.65
1540.16
194.85
1538.58
195.05
1537.00
195.25
1535.43
195.45
1533.86
195.65
1532.29
195.85
1530.72
196.05
1529.16
193.8
1546.917
194.0
1545.322
194.2
1543.730
194.4
1542.142
194.6
1540.557
194.8
1538.976
195.0
1537.397
195.2
1535.822
195.4
1534.250
195.6
1532.681
195.8
1531.116
196.0
1529.553
T02/R02
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
12

1428
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Number of
Wavelengths
Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
T03/R03
12
193.75
1547.32
193.95
1545.72
194.15
1544.13
194.35
1542.54
194.55
1540.95
194.75
1539.37
194.95
1537.79
195.15
1536.22
195.35
1534.64
195.55
1533.07
195.75
1531.51
195.95
1529.94
193.7
1547.715
193.9
1546.119
194.1
1544.526
194.3
1542.936
194.5
1541.349
194.7
1539.766
194.9
1538.186
195.1
1536.609
195.3
1535.036
195.5
1533.465
195.7
1531.898
195.9
1530.334
192.25
1559.39
192.45
1557.77
192.65
1556.15
192.85
1554.54
193.05
1552.93
193.25
1551.32
193.45
1549.72
193.65
1548.11
T04/R04
T05/R05
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16 PID Unit
12

1429
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Interface
Number of
Wavelengths
Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
T06/R06
192.2
1559.794
192.4
1558.173
192.6
1556.555
192.8
1554.940
193.0
1553.329
193.2
1551.721
193.4
1550.116
193.6
1548.515
192.15
1560.20
192.35
1558.58
192.55
1556.96
192.75
1555.34
192.95
1553.73
193.15
1552.12
193.35
1550.52
193.55
1548.91
192.1
1560.606
192.3
1558.983
192.5
1557.363
192.7
1555.747
192.9
1554.134
193.1
1552.524
193.3
1550.918
193.5
1549.315
T07/R07
T08/R08

For BMD8 parameters, refer to Table 16-13.
Table 16-13 BMD8 parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

1430
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description

default value.
Configure Band
Used to configure type of the

working band of a board.
Default: C
Actual Band
Queries the actual working band of

the board.
Actual Working Band

Parity
Queries the parity of the actual

working band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Used to select the desired parity of

the working band.
Default: All
16.2.10 Specifications of the BMD8

consumption.
Table 16-14 Optical specifications of the BMD8
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529 - 1561
T0x/R0x channel spacinga
GHz
200
IN/OUT channel spacing
GHz
50
Insertion loss
dB
IN-T01
IN-T02
IN-T03
IN-T04
IN-T05
IN-T06
IN-T07
IN-T08
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1431
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Item
R01-OUT
Unit
Value
dB
9.5
dB
25
R02-OUT
R03-OUT
R04-OUT
R05-OUT
R06-OUT
R07-OUT
R08-OUT
IN->T01/T05 @T02/T06/
T03/T07/T04/T08
Isolationb
IN->T02/T06 @T01/T05/
T03/T07/T04/T08
IN->T03/T07 @T01/T05/
T02/T06/T04/T08
IN->T04/T08 @T01/T05/
T02/T06/T03/T07
IN->T01@T05
13
IN->T05@T01
IN->T02@T06
IN->T06@T02
IN->T03@T07
IN->T07@T03
IN->T04@T08
IN->T08@T04
R01->OUT@R05
R05->OUT@R01
R02->OUT@R06
R06->OUT@R02
R03->OUT@R07
R07->OUT@R03
R04->OUT@R08
R08->OUT@R04
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical return loss
dB
40
Directivity
dB
45
PMD
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dBm
23

1432
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Value
a: T0x represents T01 to T08 ports. R0x represents R01 to R08 ports.
b: In the case of T01/T05@T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08, this parameter refers to the isolation
between any one of T01/T05 ports and any one of T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08 ports. It is the
same case for other isolation item. T01 to T04 ports are intended for blue band signals; the
T05 to T08 ports are intended for red band signals.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
BMD8
0.2
0.3
16.3 ELQX
ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board

The available functional version of the ELQX board is TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN12
ELQ
X
16.3.2 Application
The ELQX board converts four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e
signals into four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals or converts four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1433
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
ODU1 signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is
similar.
Figure 16-7 shows the position of the ELQX in a WDM system.
Figure 16-7 Position of the ELQX in a WDM system
4
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/ 4
OTU2/
OTU2e
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
OA
PTQX
OA
BMD4
BMD4
OA
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX
OA
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
4 OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
4

The ELQX supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS.
Table 16-15 provides the details about the functions and features of the ELQX.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals between
the PTQX board and the cross-connect board.
Table 16-15 Functions and features of the ELQX

Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Converts between four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192,

OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals from the client side and four OTU2/
OTU2e electrical signals, and supports hybrid transmission of the
preceding services. The reverse process is similar.
l Multiplexes 16 ODU1 signals or four ODU2/ODU2e signals from the
backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals, and supports hybrid
transmission of the ODU1 and ODU2/ODU2e services. The reverse
process is similar.
Client-side
service type

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1434
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Function or
Feature
Description
OTN function
l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side signals

into OTU2/OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping comply
with ITU-T G.7041, ITU-T G.709, and GDPS.
l Supports the PM and TCM functions for ODU1.
l Supports the SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
l Supports the TCM function for ODU2.
WDM
specification
ESC function
Supports the ESC function. The supervisory signal is transmitted within the
service signal.
PRBS function
NOTE
type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
LPT function
is 10GE LAN.
FEC encoding

975.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report
the alarms and performance events of the board.
ALS function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
XFP
Supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side.
Loopback
WDM side
Not Supported
Client side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.

1435
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Function or
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3ae
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The ELQX board consists of the client-side optical module, the signal processing module, the
control and communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 16-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1436
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Signal Flow
Figure 16-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800
Client side 4ODU2(e)/16ODU1
RX1
RX2
RX3
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
OTN
processing
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
Backplane
(service cross-connection)
4OTU2(e)
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
The client side of the ELQX board can access the following optical signals:
l
In the signal flow of the ELQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ELQX to the WDM side
of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four optical signals from client equipment through
the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical signals. The clientside optical module can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from
the backplane.
The electrical signals converted from the client optical signals or the ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e
signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal processing module. The signals of
different types are transmitted to different encapsulation and mapping modules. Then, the
encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1437
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
for the signals. Finally, four OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the PTQX board
l
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the
PTQX board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping, and
decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs four ODU2/ODU2e signals, 16 ODU1
signals, or four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e electrical
signals.
The four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals are cross-connected to other boards
through the backplane, or the four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or
OTU2e electrical signals are transmitted to the client-side optical module. The optical
signals are converted into electrical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX4
optical interfaces.
NOTE
The ELQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane.
One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals.
Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE
LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
Reports the working status of the client-side laser.

module.
NOTE
The signal processing module on the ELQX board has fixed cross-connections to the PTQX board.

OTU2 payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the
10GE LAN performance monitoring function.
Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals.
l

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1438
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
the CPU.
detection of each functional module on the board.
l
Power supply module

Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
16.3.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators and eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the ELQX.

Figure 16-9 shows the front panel of the ELQX.
Figure 16-9 Front panel of the ELQX
ELQX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
ELQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1439
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the ELQX. Table 16-16 lists the type and
function of each optical interface.
Table 16-16 Types and functions of the ELQX interfaces
Interface
Type
Function
TX1 - TX4
LC

equipment.
RX1 - RX4
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

16.3.6 Valid Slots

The ELQX occupies one slot.
Table 16-17 shows the valid slots for the ELQX board.
Table 16-17 Valid slots for the ELQX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1, IU4, IU5, IU8, IU11, IU14

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1440
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Table 16-18 Mapping between the physical ports on the ELQX board and the port numbers
Physical Port
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which
one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Logical Ports
Figure 16-10, Figure 16-11 and Figure 16-12 describes the NM ports of the ELQX board.
Table 16-19 lists the indication of each port.
Figure 16-10 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (cross-connections of client-side services)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
Service
Processing
Module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Service
Processing
Module

Service
Processing
Module
1441
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-11 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (backplane-side ODU1-level cross-connections)

Backplane
Crossconnect
module
Service
processing
module
Service
processing
module
Figure 16-12 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (backplane-side ODU2-level cross-connections)

Backplane
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
Table 16-19 Meaning of NM ports of the ELQX

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces
ClientLP1-ClientLP4
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4
Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1,

2, 3, 4.
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1442
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
If the ELQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
cross-connection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the ELQX board, as
shown by (1) in Figure 16-13.
If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to
create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on
the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown Figure 16-14.
If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to
create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on
the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown by (2) Figure 16-13.
The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX board and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of
one-to-one cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created
on the U2000. For details, see Figure 16-15.
Figure 16-13 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU2 level)

Client side
Cross-connection
module
Other board
Client side
Cross-connection
module
ELQX board

the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1
2
1443
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-14 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU1 level)

Client side
1
Other board
Client side
ELQX board
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1444
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-15 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX

Client side
ELQX board
WDM side
141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1
2
PTQX baord
Client side
ELQX board
Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the

PTQX board in a PID group
1
2
Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the


For parameters of the ELQX, refer toTable 16-20.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1445
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-20 ELQX parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Channel Loopback
Outloop

information.
Queries or sets the path Loopback.
Service Type
10GE LAN, 10GE

WAN, OTU-2, OTU2
2E, STM-64

Default: 10GE LAN

Port Mapping
Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G), MAC
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G), Bit
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G)

service.
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default:
l WDM side: Enabled
l Client side:
Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.

1446
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled

pass-through (LPT).
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Automatic, ODU1,
ODU2
Default: Automatic
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC

Actual Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

Actual Band Type
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


wavelength.

1447
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled

to Disabled.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Line Rate

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

information.
board resides.
information.
commissioning.
16.3.10 Specifications of the ELQX

consumption.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1448
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Board
Client-Side Fixed
Optical Module
TN12PT
QX
N/A
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3

1449
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
16 PID Unit
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate )
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12

1450
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1451
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power Consumption

at 25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
(W)
ELQX
86.2
99.1
16.4 PTQX
PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary

The available functional version of the PTQX board is TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN12
PTQ
X
Type
One PID can use only certain wavelengths, as listed in Table 16-23. Table 16-24 lists the
wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies.
Table 16-23 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (ELQX+PTQX)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Serial
No.
Wavelength No.
of the ELQX (on
the Left)
Wavelength No.
of the PTQX
Wavelength No.
of the ELQX (on
the Right)
PTQX Type
33, 37, 41, 45
1, 5, 9, 13
17, 21, 25, 29
TN12PTQX01
34, 38, 42, 46
2, 6, 10, 14
18, 22, 26, 30
TN12PTQX02
35, 39, 43, 47
3, 7, 11, 15
19, 23, 27, 31
TN12PTQX03
36, 40, 44, 48
4, 8, 12, 16
20, 24, 28, 32
TN12PTQX04
49, 53, 57, 61
65, 69, 73, 77
TN12PTQX05

1452
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Serial
No.
Wavelength No.
of the ELQX (on
the Left)
Wavelength No.
of the PTQX
Wavelength No.
of the ELQX (on
the Right)
PTQX Type
50, 54, 58, 62
66, 70, 74, 78
TN12PTQX06
51, 55, 59, 63
67, 71, 75, 79
TN12PTQX07
52, 56, 60, 64
68, 72, 76, 80
TN12PTQX08
NOTE
For the wavelength groups indicated by serial numbers 5-8, only one PTQX board and one ELQX board
are required and the ELQX board should be housed on the right of the PTQX board.
Table 16-24 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
196.05
1529.16
41
194.05
1544.92
196.00
1529.55
42
194.00
1545.32
195.95
1529.94
43
193.95
1545.72
195.90
1530.33
44
193.90
1546.12
195.85
1530.72
45
193.85
1546.52
195.80
1531.12
46
193.80
1546.92
195.75
1531.51
47
193.75
1547.32
195.70
1531.90
48
193.70
1547.72
195.65
1532.29
49
193.65
1548.11
10
195.60
1532.68
50
193.60
1548.51
11
195.55
1533.07
51
193.55
1548.91
12
195.50
1533.47
52
193.50
1549.32
13
195.45
1533.86
53
193.45
1549.72
14
195.40
1534.25
54
193.40
1550.12
15
195.35
1534.64
55
193.35
1550.52
16
195.30
1535.04
56
193.30
1550.92
17
195.25
1535.43
57
193.25
1551.32
18
195.20
1535.82
58
193.20
1551.72
19
195.15
1536.22
59
193.15
1552.12
20
195.10
1536.61
60
193.10
1552.52

1453
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
21
195.05
1537.00
61
193.05
1552.93
22
195.00
1537.40
62
193.00
1553.33
23
194.95
1537.79
63
192.95
1553.73
24
194.90
1538.19
64
192.90
1554.13
25
194.85
1538.58
65
192.85
1554.54
26
194.80
1538.98
66
192.80
1554.94
27
194.75
1539.37
67
192.75
1555.34
28
194.70
1539.77
68
192.70
1555.75
29
194.65
1540.16
69
192.65
1556.15
30
194.60
1540.56
70
192.60
1556.55
31
194.55
1540.95
71
192.55
1556.96
32
194.50
1541.35
72
192.50
1557.36
33
194.45
1541.75
73
192.45
1557.77
34
194.40
1542.14
74
192.40
1558.17
35
194.35
1542.54
75
192.35
1558.58
36
194.30
1542.94
76
192.30
1558.98
37
194.25
1543.33
77
192.25
1559.39
38
194.20
1543.73
78
192.20
1559.79
39
194.15
1544.13
79
192.15
1560.20
40
194.10
1544.53
80
192.10
1560.61
16.4.2 Application
The PTQX is an PID unit. The PTQX board can map four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e signals into four OTU2(e) signals, or map four ODU2(e) signals or 16
ODU1 signals from another board into four OTU2(e) signals. The PTQX also receives eight
OTU2(e) signals from the ELQX board and integrates the 12 OTU2(e) signals into one channel
of optical signals for output. The reverse process is similar.
For the position of the PTQX in a WDM system, see Figure 16-16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1454
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-16 Position of the PTQX in a WDM system

4
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/ 4
OTU2/
OTU2e
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
OA
PTQX
OA
BMD4
BMD4
OA
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX
OA
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
4 OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
4

The PTQX provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS.
Table 16-25 provides the details about the functions and features of the PTQX.
Table 16-25 Functions and features of the PTQX
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Accesses four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192,

OTU2 or OTU2e client-side signals, maps the signals into OTU2(e)
signals, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Hybrid
transmission of the preceding signals is supported.
l Accesses 16 x ODU1 or 4 x ODU2(e) signals from the backplane, maps
the signals into 4 x OTU2(e) signals, and converts the signals into the
standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The
reverse process is similar. Hybrid access of ODU1 or ODU2(e) is
supported.
l Accesses 8 x OTU2(e) signals from the ELQX board through the
backplane, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM
wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is
similar.
l Integrates 12 x OTU2(e) signals into one channel of optical signals.
Client-side
service type

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1455
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Function and
Feature
Description
OTN function
l Maps a maximum of four channels of client-side signals to OTU2/

OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G.
7041, ITU-T G.709, and GDPS.
l Supports the PM and TCM functions for ODU1.
l Supports the SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
l Supports the TCM function for ODU2.
WDM
specification
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
NOTE
type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
LPT function
is 10GE LAN.
FEC encoding

975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Provides optical power detection and reports alarms and performance

events of the board.
ALS function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
XFP
Supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported

1456
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Function and
Feature
Description
Outloop
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3ae
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
Supported
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The PTQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, PID
Figure 16-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN
6800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1457
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800
Backplane
8OTU2(e)
4xODU2(e)/16xODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
4
OTN
processing
module
OUT
PID
Module
IN
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the PTQX board can access the following optical signals:
l
In the signal flow of the PTQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the PTQX to the WDM side
of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical
signals. The PTQX can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from
the backbone.
The electrical signals converted from client optical signals or 16 x ODU1 or 4 x ODU2/
ODU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Different types of signals
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1458
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs
operations such as encapsulation, mapping, OTN framing, and FEC/AFEC encoding. Then,
the module sends out four channels of OTU2(e) signals to the PID module.
The four OTU2(e) signals and the eight OTU2(e) signals cross-connected through the
backplane from the ELQX board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which
are finally output through the OUT optical interface.
l
Receive direction
The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical
interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and
demultiplexes the signal into 12 OTU2(e) signals.
Eight of the 12 OTU2(e) signals are cross-connected through the backplane to the ELQX
board, and the remaining four OTU2(e) signals are transmitted to the signal processing
module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2(e) framing, FEC/AFEC
decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals. Finally, the signal processing
module outputs four channels of electrical signals.
The four channels of electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the
backplane or transmitted to the client-side optical modules. Then, the four channels of
electrical signals are converted into four channels of optical signals that are output through
the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
The PTQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane.
One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals.
Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE
LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
Reports the working status of the client-side laser.
PID module
WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into 12
channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical
signals, and integrates 12 channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals.
Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser.

module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1459
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Encapsulates SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area.
This module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/SONET performance.
OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and
monitors 10GE LAN performance.
Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC
coding and decoding.
l

the CPU.
Power supply module

on the board.
16.4.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators, 10 optical interfaces, and laser level label on the front panel of the
PTQX.

Figure 16-18 shows the front panel of the PTQX.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1460
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-18 Front panel of the PTQX
PTQX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
OUT
IN
TX4
RX4
PTQX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the PTQX. Table 16-26 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1461
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-26 Types and functions of the PTQX interfaces

Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Receives the line signal.
OUT
LC
Transmits the line signal.
TX1-TX4
LC
Transmits the service signal to the client-side

equipment.
RX1-RX4
LC
Receives the service signal from the client-side

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

16.4.6 Valid Slots

The PTQX occupies two slots.
Table 16-27 shows the valid slots for the PTQX board.
Table 16-27 Valid slots for the PTQX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU3, IU7, IU13
NOTE
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the
slot number of the PTQX board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots.
For example, if the PTQX occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the PTQX displayed on the NM is
IU3.
16.4.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX

The characteristic code for the PTQX consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency
values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1462
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-28 Characteristic code for the PTQX

Code
Meaning
Description
The first three digits
The frequency of optical

signal
The last three digits of the

WDM side.
The last three digits

signal

frequency value of the last
WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12PTQX is 605385.

l
"605385" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 196.05 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 193.85 THz.


Table 16-29 Mapping between the physical ports on the PTQX board and the port numbers
Physical Port
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1463
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Logical Ports
Figure 16-19, Figure 16-20, and Figure 16-21 show the NM ports on the PTQX board. Table
16-30 lists the indication of each port.
Figure 16-19 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (cross-connections of client-side services)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
Service
processing
module
Service
processing
module
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
Figure 16-20 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (backplane-side ODU1-level cross-connections)

Backplane
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Service
processing
module
1464
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-21 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (backplane-side ODU2-level cross-connections)

Backplane
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
1(IN/OUT)
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
Table 16-30 Meaning of ports on the PTQX

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
ClientLP1-ClientLP4
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4

2, 3 and 4.
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4
OCHLP1-OCHLP12
IN/OUT
This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.

If the PTQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the PTQX board, as shown
by (1) in Figure 16-22.
1465
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the PTQX
board on the U2000, as shown in Figure 16-23.
If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on the PTQX
board on the U2000, as shown by (2) in Figure 16-22.
The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of one-toone cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the
U2000. For details, see Figure 16-24.
Figure 16-22 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU2 level)

Client side
Other board
except ELQX
Client side
WDM side
PTQX board

the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1
2
1466
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-23 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU1 level)

Client side
Other board
except ELQX
WDM side
PTQX board
the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1467
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-24 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX

Client side
ELQX board
WDM side
2
PTQX board
Client side
ELQX board
Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the

Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the

16.4.10 PTQX Parameters

For parameters of the PTQX, refer toTable 16-31.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1468
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-31 PTQX parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Channel Loopback
Outloop

information.
Service Type
10GE LAN, OC-192,

OTU-2, OTU-2E,
STM-64

Default: 10GE LAN

Port Mapping
Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G), MAC
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G), Bit
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G)

service.
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default:
l WDM side: Enabled
l Client side:
Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

information.

1469
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled

pass-through (LPT).
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Automatic, ODU1,
ODU2
Default: Automatic
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC

Actual Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

Actual Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


wavelength.

1470
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled

to Disabled.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Line Rate

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

information.
board resides.
information.
commissioning.
16.4.11 Specifications of the PTQX

consumption.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1471
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Bo
ard
Client-Side
Fixed Optical
Module
Client-Side
Pluggable Optical
Module
WDM-Side Fixed
Optical Module
WDM-Side
Pluggable
Optical
Module
TN
12P
TQ
X
N/A
km
200 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN
N/A
km
km
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate-0.3 km
& Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3
1530 to 1565
840 to 860

Operating
wavelength
range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565

1472
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
16 PID Unit
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1260 to 1565
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate )
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1

1473
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
16 PID Unit
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single
Rate-0.3 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
wavelengths
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

1474
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type


(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Table 16-34 Specifications of the PID optical module on the DWDM side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN
NRZ

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05

power (single wavelength)
dBm

dBm
-7
dB
6.5
GHz
nm
0.8
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
200
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

enabled) EOL
dBm
-10.5
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

1475
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 3 kg (7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
PTQX
93.6
107.6
16.5 NPO2E
NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20channel extended

The available functional version of the NPO2E board is TN55.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN55
NPO2
E
Type
The TN55NPO2E board has two types: TN55NPO2EL02 and TN55NPO2EL04, which process
different wavelengths.
l
The TN55NPO2EL02 board processes wavelengths 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, and 30.
The TN55NPO2EL04 board processes wavelengths 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, and 32.
A PID group that consists of the TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2 boards, as shown
in Table 16-35, Table 16-36 and Table 16-37.
Table 16-38 lists the mappings between wavelength numbers, wavelengths, and frequencies.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1476
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-35 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2)(200G

system)
Wavelengt
h
Combinati
on No.
Wavelength No. for

TN55NPO2E
Wavelength No.
for TN54ENQ2
Wavelength No. for

TN55NPO2
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10,
14, 18, 22, 26, 30
34, 38, 42, 46
TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54,

58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78
TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12,
16, 20, 24, 28, 32
36, 40, 44, 48
TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56,

60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80
Table 16-36 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2)(120G system)
Waveleng
th
Combinat
ion No.
Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E
Wavelength No. for

TN54ENQ2
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26,

30
34, 38, 42, 46
TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28,

32
36, 40, 44, 48
Table 16-37 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E)(80G system)
Wavelengt
h
Combinati
on No.
Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30
TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
NOTE
The TN55NPO2EL02/TN55NPO2EL04 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2
service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process
only the 4st, 8th, 12th, and 16th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service
processing board, it can also process the 20th, 24st, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For the position where the
TN54PQ2 should be installed on the TN55NPO2E, see 16.5.5 Front Panel.
The TN54ENQ2 board should be housed on the left of the TN55NPO2E board.
The TN55NPO2E board supports DCM-free transmission over long distance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1477
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
196.05
1529.16
41
194.05
1544.92
196.00
1529.55
42
194.00
1545.32
195.95
1529.94
43
193.95
1545.72
195.90
1530.33
44
193.90
1546.12
195.85
1530.72
45
193.85
1546.52
195.80
1531.12
46
193.80
1546.92
195.75
1531.51
47
193.75
1547.32
195.70
1531.90
48
193.70
1547.72
195.65
1532.29
49
193.65
1548.11
10
195.60
1532.68
50
193.60
1548.51
11
195.55
1533.07
51
193.55
1548.91
12
195.50
1533.47
52
193.50
1549.32
13
195.45
1533.86
53
193.45
1549.72
14
195.40
1534.25
54
193.40
1550.12
15
195.35
1534.64
55
193.35
1550.52
16
195.30
1535.04
56
193.30
1550.92
17
195.25
1535.43
57
193.25
1551.32
18
195.20
1535.82
58
193.20
1551.72
19
195.15
1536.22
59
193.15
1552.12
20
195.10
1536.61
60
193.10
1552.52
21
195.05
1537.00
61
193.05
1552.93
22
195.00
1537.40
62
193.00
1553.33
23
194.95
1537.79
63
192.95
1553.73
24
194.90
1538.19
64
192.90
1554.13
25
194.85
1538.58
65
192.85
1554.54
26
194.80
1538.98
66
192.80
1554.94
27
194.75
1539.37
67
192.75
1555.34
28
194.70
1539.77
68
192.70
1555.75
29
194.65
1540.16
69
192.65
1556.15

1478
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
30
194.60
1540.56
70
192.60
1556.55
31
194.55
1540.95
71
192.55
1556.96
32
194.50
1541.35
72
192.50
1557.36
33
194.45
1541.75
73
192.45
1557.77
34
194.40
1542.14
74
192.40
1558.17
35
194.35
1542.54
75
192.35
1558.58
36
194.30
1542.94
76
192.30
1558.98
37
194.25
1543.33
77
192.25
1559.39
38
194.20
1543.73
78
192.20
1559.79
39
194.15
1544.13
79
192.15
1560.20
40
194.10
1544.53
80
192.10
1560.61
16.5.2 Application
As a PID board, the NPO2E board performs conversion between 64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8
x ODU2 signals that are cross-connected through the backplane and 8 x OTU2 optical signals
over standard wavelengths for a WDM system, between 8 x ODU2e signals and 8 x OTU2e
optical signals over standard wavelengths for a WDM system. The NPO2E board also receives
4 x OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from ENQ2 and converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals into
one channel of optical signals for output. Inside the NPO2E board, there is a red/blue band filter,
which converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by the local NPO2E board and 8 x OTU2/
OTU2e signals output by another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals for output. It
also performs the reverse conversion. In addition, the NPO2E board supports hybrid transmission
of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1479
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the TN55NPO2E Board

Figure 16-25 200G system built with the TN55NPO2E board
Client-side
service
Clientside
service
Clientside
service
Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
Tributary 8xODU2e
board
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
OBU
1P1
TN55
NPO2E
TN55
NPO2E
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
TN54
ENQ2
Client-side
service
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
OBU
1P1
Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN55
NPO2
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
TN55
NPO2
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
NOTE
The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the
TN55NPO2EL04 board.

Clientside
service
Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OBU
1P1
TN55
NPO2E
Clientside
service
Tributary
board
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN54
ENQ2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
TN55
NPO2E
OBU
1P1
4xOTU2/
OTU2e

TN54
ENQ2
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
1480
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Client-side
service
Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OBU
1P1
TN55
NPO2E
TN55
NPO2E
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
Client-side
service
OBU
1P1
NOTE
In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is configured with the TN54PQ2
board.
If the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2E/
TN55NPO2 board can process a maximum of 40G services.
When the TN55NPO2E board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on
the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit
end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from
40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the
receive end.

The NPO2E provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 16-39 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPO2E.
Table 16-39 Functions and features of the NPO2E
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Accesses 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight

channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane, maps the signals
into eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and converts the signals
into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar, and hybrid access of ODU0, ODU1 or
ODU2/ODU2e is supported.
l Accesses four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board,
and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
l Integrates twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of
optical signals.
l Converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by the local NPO2E board
and 8 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by another NPO2 board into one
channel of optical signals for output.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1481
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of

ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2E
board and the cross-connect board.
OTN function
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in

the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the PM function for ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2.
l Supports the TCM function and SM function for ODU2 and ODU1.
WDM
specification
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
LPT function
Not supported
FEC encoding

975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Provides optical power detection and reports alarms and performance

events of the board.
IEEE 1588v2
The NPO2E board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 signals.

NOTE
The IEEE 1588v2 signal must be transmitted through optical port 1.
Physical clock
The NPO2E board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals
are cross-connected from the backplane.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Loopback
Channel
Loopback
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1482
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines
for the implementation and usage of the DVB
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1483
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The NPO2E board consists of the signal processing module, PID optical module, control and
communication module, IEEE 1588v2 module, red/blue band filter, and power supply module.
Figure 16-28 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2E.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1484
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2E

Backplane
4XOTU2/
4XOTU2e
64XODU0/32XODU1/8X
ODU2/8XODU2e
8
Crossconnection
module
1588
PQ2 service
processing
sub-board
OUT
PID
Module
IN
OTN
Processing
module
T01
R01
Red/blue
band filter
Signal processing
module
TO
RI
T02
R02
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Required voltage
Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the NPO2E board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2E to the WDM side
of the NPO2E, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or
eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board
through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and
encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
to the PID module.
The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are
finally output through the OUT optical interface.
The red/blue band filter converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through the
OUT port on the PID optical module and 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1485
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
the OUT port on another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals and outputs the
signals through the TO port to the WDM side.
l
Receive direction
The red/blue band filter receives one channel of multiplexed signals through the RI port
and demultiplexes the signals into two channels of optical signals. It outputs 12 x OTU2/
OTU2e optical signals through the TO1 port to the IN port on the PID optical module and
outputs 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals through the TO2 port to the IN port on another
NPO2 board.
demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the
remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing
module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/
AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels
of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
NOTE
The NPO2E board can directly output a multiplexed signal through its OUT port to the WDM side and receive
a multiplexed signal through its IN port from the WDM side.
Module Function
l
Red/blue band filter

In the transmit direction, it multiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (12
wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by the NPO2E board and one channel of
multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by another
NPO2 board.
In the receive direction, it demultiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (20
wavelengths are multiplexed) from the WDM side and outputs one channel of
multiplexed optical signals (12 wavelengths are multiplexed) to the NPO2E board and
one channel of multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) to another
NPO2 board.
PID module
WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into
twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical
signals.
signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed
signals.

The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1486
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2E and the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/
ODU2/ODU2e signals
PQ2 service processing board
Processes 40 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided on
the TN55NPO2E board.
NOTE
After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2E board that works in standard
mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000. For details on how to create a logical PQ2 subboard, see Adding Boards in the Commissioning Guide.
1588 module
the STG board.

the CPU.
Power supply module

on the board.
16.5.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators, optical interfaces, laser level label, and PQ2 sub-board on the front
panel of the NPO2E.

Figure 16-29 shows the front panel of the TN55NPO2E.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1487
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-29 Front panel of the TN55NPO2E

NPO2E
NPO2E
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
T02 R02
T02 R02
TO
TO
RI
RI
T01 R01
T01 R01
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
PQ2
STAT
NPO2E
PQ2 installed
NPO2E
PQ2 not installed
NOTE
The TN55NPO2E can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing
board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process only the 4st, 8th,
12th, and 16th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can
also process the 20th, 24st, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For details, see 16.5.1 Version Description.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the TN55NPO2E panel.
l
There is one indicator on the PQ2 panel.

l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN55NPO2E. Table 16-40 lists the
type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1488
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-40 Types and functions of the TN55NPO2E interfaces

Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Receives 12 channels optical signals that are output by

the red/blue band filter or line-side multiplexed optical
signals.
OUT
LC
Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side

or the red/blue band filter.
R01
LC
Receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals

from the OUT port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed).
T01
LC
Transmits one channel of multiplexed optical signals

to the IN port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed).
R02
LC
Receives optical signals that are output by the OUT port

on the NPO2 board.
T02
LC
Sends one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the

IN port on the NPO2 board (eight wavelengths are
multiplexed).
RI
LC
Receives multiplexed optical signals from the line side.
TO
LC
Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side.
Laser Hazard Level

16.5.6 Valid Slots

The NPO2E occupies two slots.
Table 16-41 shows the valid slots for the NPO2E board.
Table 16-41 Valid slots for the NPO2E board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU3, IU7, IU13, IU17, IU21, IU25, IU29, IU33, IU37, IU41,
IU47, IU51, IU55, IU59, IU63, IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU3, IU7, IU14, IU18, IU22, IU26, IU31, IU35
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU3, IU7, IU13, IU17

1489
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
NOTE
slot number of the NPO2E board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots.
For example, if the NPO2E occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2E displayed on the NM is
IU3.
16.5.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2E

The characteristic code for the NPO2E consists of six digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side.
Table 16-42 Characteristic code for the NPO2E
Code
Meaning
Description

signal

WDM side.

signal

WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN55NPO2E is 600380.

l
is 193.80 THz.


Table 16-43 Mapping between the physical ports on the NPO2E board and the port numbers
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Physical Port
IN/OUT
RI/TO
2
1490
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Physical Port
RO1/TO1
RO2/TO2
NOTE
Logical Ports
The NPO2E board can work only in standard mode. Figure 16-30 shows the port diagram.
NOTE
For information about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible
Mode) in the Configuration Guide.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1491
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-30 Diagram of ports on the NPO2E
12xODU2/
12XODU2e
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
Other tributary board/line board/PID board
ODU1:4
48xODU1
ODU1:1
IN/OUT
ODU1:4
ODU0:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
ODU1:1
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
96xODU0
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
NOTE
The OCH9 to OCH12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board.
If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that
correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1.
The NPO2E board's OCH5 to OCH8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the
TN54PQ2 service processing board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
Cross-connection that must be configured on

the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other
boards

1492
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
ODU0
mapping path
Table 16-44 Meaning of ports on the NPO2E
Port Name
Meaning
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)-ODU2:1-ODU1:
(14)-ODU0:(12)
Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0

signals that are received through the
backplane.
(14)

backplane.
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)
Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/

ODU2E signals that are received through the
backplane.
1(IN/OUT)

l
The
side.
The
NOTE
standard mode.
Figure 16-31 shows the created ODU0 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1493
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-31 Diagram of cross-connections of the NPO2E (ODU0 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
NPO2E board
2
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
side of the NPO2E
side of the NPO2E
Other board a
Other board b
Other board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1494
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:2
NPO2E board
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)

side of the NPO2E
side of the NPO2E
Other board a
Other board b
Other board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1495
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:7
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8
NPO2E board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
side of the NPO2E
side of the NPO2E
Other board a
Other board b
Other board c
Cross-Connections Between the NPO2E and ENQ2

Figure 16-34 shows the created cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1496
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-34 Diagram of cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2

WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
ENQ2 board
1(IN/OUT)--OCH:10
(standard
mode)
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
NPO2E board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8
(standard
mode)
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2,

which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Figure 16-35 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NPO2E board. One board
can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals.
Figure 16-35 Example of service cross-connections on the NPO2E board
ODU0
TOM
TOM
ODU0
ODU1
TN55
NS2
ODU1 NPO2E
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU2/
TDX/ ODU2e
ND2
16.5.10 NPO2E Loopbacks

Table 16-45 lists the types of loopbacks supported by NPO2E board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1497
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-45 Loopbacks supported by NPO2E board

Cross-Connect
Level
Board
Loopback Type
Description
ODU0
TN55N
PO2E
Channel inloop
See Figure 16-36.
Channel outloop
See Figure 16-37.
Channel inloop
See Figure 16-38.
Channel outloop
See Figure 16-39.
Channel inloop
See Figure 16-40.
Channel outloop
See Figure 16-41.
ODU1
ODU2/ODU2e
Loopbacks Supported by TN55NPO2E When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU0

l
Channel inloop
Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 16-36 , 64 ODU0
Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points: as shown in Figure 16-36 , 64 ODU0
services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 32 ODU1 services, which
are then converged into eight ODU2 services. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be
looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1498
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-36 Channel inloops on the TN55NPO2E board

ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 16-37 , eight OTU2
services received from the WDM side is demapped into eight ODU2 services after the
OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services,
each of which is then deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the 64 ODU0 services
can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0
Channel outloop at ODU2 loopback points: as shown in Figure 16-37 , eight OTU2
services received on the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2
overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM
side and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1499
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-37 Channel outloops on the TN55NPO2E board

ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN55NPO2E When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU1

l
Channel inloops
Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points: As shown in Figure 16-38, 32 ODU1 services
are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 32 ODU1 services can be looped
back to the backplane and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points: As shown in Figure 16-38, 32 ODU1 services
cross-connected from the backplane are converged into eight ODU2 services. Any N of the
eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1500
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
Channel outloop at ODU1 loopback points: As shown in Figure 16-39, eight OTU2
services received from the WDM side is demapped into eight ODU2 services after the
OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 services is deconverged into four ODU1
services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1
Channel outloop at ODU2 loopback points: As shown in Figure 16-39, eight OTU2
services received from the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2 services after the
OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to
the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1501
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN55NPO2E When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/

ODU2e
l
Channel inloops
As shown in Figure 16-40, eight ODU2/ODU2e services are cross-connected from the
backplane. Any N of the eight ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the backplane
and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1502
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Channel outloops
As shown in Figure 16-41, eight OTU2/OTU2e services received from the WDM side are
demapped into eight ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is
terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM
side and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

For parameters of the NPO2E, refer to Table 16-46.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1503
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-46 NPO2E parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Channel Loopback
Outloop
Queries or sets path Loopback.
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: On
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.

1504
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Line Rate
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Default: Disabled
Default: Standard
Mode
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only C band is supported.

information.
to Disabled.
information.
commissioning.
16.5.12 Specifications of the NPO2E

consumption.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
WDM-Side Pluggable
Optical Module
TN55NP
O2E
1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (80 km)
N/A

1505
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
NOTE
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
NRZ

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05

dBm
+2

dBm
-4.5
dB
GHz
nm
0.8
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1500

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

enabled) EOL
dBm
-12
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Table 16-48 Specifications of the red and blue band filters on the TN55NPO2E board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
Working wavelength in the C

band
nm
1528 to 1561

1506
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Value
Working wavelength in the blue

band (T01/R01)
THz
196.0 to 193.8
Working wavelength in the red

band (T02/R02)
THz
193.6 to 191.4
Demultiplexing loss (RI->T01,

RI->T02)
dB
Multiplexing loss (R01>T0,

R02->T0)
dB
Isolation between red and blue

bands
dB
13
TN55NPO2E:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN54PQ2:
l
Dimensions of front panel: 24.5 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) (0.96 in. (W) x 2.69
in. (D) x 2.24 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN55NPO2E
143
157.3
TN54PQ2
1.1
1.2
16.6 NPO2
NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board

The available functional versions of the NPO2 board are TN54 and TN55.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1507
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN54
NPO2
TN55
NPO2

l
Function:
The TN54NPO2 board must work with a dispersion compensation module. The
TN55NPO2S board supports 40 km applications without working with a dispersion
compensation module. The TN55NPO2L board supports 80 km applications without
working with a dispersion compensation module.
Appearance:
For the front panels of the TN54NPO2 and TN55NPO2, see 16.6.5 Front Panel.
Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 16.6.12 Specifications of the NPO2.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN54NPO2
TN55NPO2
The TN55NPO2 can be created as TN54NPO2 on the NMS.

upgrade. After substitution, the TN55NPO2 functions as the
TN54NPO2.
NOTE
When you substitute a TN55NPO2 for a TN54NPO2 , configure a
TN54PQ2, otherwise, the latter four wavelengths cannot be processed.
TN55NPO2
None
Type
A PID group that consists of the TN54NPO2, TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2
boards, as shown in Table 16-49, Table 16-50, Table 16-51. Table 16-52 lists the wavelength
numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1508
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-49 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2) (200G
system)
Wavelengt
h
Combinati
on No.
Wavelength No. for

TN55NPO2E
Wavelength No.
for TN54ENQ2
Wavelength No. for

TN55NPO2
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10,
14, 18, 22, 26, 30
34, 38, 42, 46
TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54,

58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78
TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12,
16, 20, 24, 28, 32
36, 40, 44, 48
TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56,

60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80
Table 16-50 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2+ENQ2) (120G system)

Wavelength
Combination
No.
Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/

TN55NPO2
Wavelength No. of
TN54ENQ2
TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13,
17, 21, 25, 29
33, 37, 41, 45
TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/
TN55NPO2L02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30
34, 38, 42, 46
TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15,

19, 23, 27, 31
35, 39, 43, 47
TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/
TN55NPO2L04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
36, 40, 44, 48
Table 16-51 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2) (80G system)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Wavelength
Combination
No.
Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2
TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29
TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/TN55NPO2L02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26,

30
TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31

32
TN54NPO205/TN55NPO2S05: 49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77

78

1509
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Wavelength
Combination
No.
Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2
TN54NPO207/TN55NPO2S07: 51, 55, 59, 63, 67, 71, 75, 79

80
NOTE
The ENQ2 board should be housed on the left of the NPO2 board.
Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free transmission over short distance and the
TN55NPO2L supports DCM-free transmission over long distance.
The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing
board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st,
5th, 9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board,
it can also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should
be installed on the TN55NPO2, see 16.6.5 Front Panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
196.05
1529.16
41
194.05
1544.92
196.00
1529.55
42
194.00
1545.32
195.95
1529.94
43
193.95
1545.72
195.90
1530.33
44
193.90
1546.12
195.85
1530.72
45
193.85
1546.52
195.80
1531.12
46
193.80
1546.92
195.75
1531.51
47
193.75
1547.32
195.70
1531.90
48
193.70
1547.72
195.65
1532.29
49
193.65
1548.11
10
195.60
1532.68
50
193.60
1548.51
11
195.55
1533.07
51
193.55
1548.91
12
195.50
1533.47
52
193.50
1549.32
13
195.45
1533.86
53
193.45
1549.72
14
195.40
1534.25
54
193.40
1550.12
15
195.35
1534.64
55
193.35
1550.52
16
195.30
1535.04
56
193.30
1550.92

1510
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
17
195.25
1535.43
57
193.25
1551.32
18
195.20
1535.82
58
193.20
1551.72
19
195.15
1536.22
59
193.15
1552.12
20
195.10
1536.61
60
193.10
1552.52
21
195.05
1537.00
61
193.05
1552.93
22
195.00
1537.40
62
193.00
1553.33
23
194.95
1537.79
63
192.95
1553.73
24
194.90
1538.19
64
192.90
1554.13
25
194.85
1538.58
65
192.85
1554.54
26
194.80
1538.98
66
192.80
1554.94
27
194.75
1539.37
67
192.75
1555.34
28
194.70
1539.77
68
192.70
1555.75
29
194.65
1540.16
69
192.65
1556.15
30
194.60
1540.56
70
192.60
1556.55
31
194.55
1540.95
71
192.55
1556.96
32
194.50
1541.35
72
192.50
1557.36
33
194.45
1541.75
73
192.45
1557.77
34
194.40
1542.14
74
192.40
1558.17
35
194.35
1542.54
75
192.35
1558.58
36
194.30
1542.94
76
192.30
1558.98
37
194.25
1543.33
77
192.25
1559.39
38
194.20
1543.73
78
192.20
1559.79
39
194.15
1544.13
79
192.15
1560.20
40
194.10
1544.53
80
192.10
1560.61
16.6.2 Application
The NPO2 board is a PID unit. The NPO2 board converts 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32
channels of ODU1 signals, or 8 channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals into 8 channels of standard
WDM wavelength OTU2/OTU2e signals. In addition, the NPO2 board supports hybrid
transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. Further, the NPO2 board receives
4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2, multiplexes 12 channels of OTU2/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1511
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the optical signals. The
Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the NPO2 Board

Figure 16-42 200G system built with the NPO2 board
Client-side
service
Clientside
service
Clientside
service
Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
Tributary 8xODU2e
board
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
OBU
1P1
TN55
NPO2E
TN55
NPO2E
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
TN54
ENQ2
Client-side
service
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
OBU
1P1
Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN55
NPO2
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
TN55
NPO2
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
NOTE
When NPO2 boards are used to form a 200G system, the TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the
TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board.

Figure 16-43 120G system built with the TN55NPO2 board
Clientside
service
Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OBU
1P1
TN55
NPO2
Clientside
service
Tributary
board
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN54
ENQ2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
TN55
NPO2
OBU
1P1
4xOTU2/
OTU2e

TN54
ENQ2
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
1512
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Clientside
service
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
Tributary 8xODU2e
board
OA
OA
TN54
NPO2
Clientside
service
TN54
ENQ2
Tributary
board
TN54
NPO2
OA
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
Clientside
service
OA
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
TN54
ENQ2
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e Tributary
board
Clientside
service

Clientside
service
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
OBU
1P1
TN55
NPO2
TN55
NPO2
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
OBU
1P1
Clientside
service
Client-side
service
Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OA
TN54
NPO2
TN54
NPO2
OA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OA
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
Client-side
service
OA

1513
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
NOTE
In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is configured with the TN54PQ2
board.
If the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2/
TN55NPO2E board can process a maximum of 40G services.
When the TN55NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the
fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit
end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from
40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the
receive end.
When the TN54NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, the single-wavelength incident optical power must be
2 dBm. It is recommended to use an OA board that outputs 2 dBm single-wavelength optical power, such as the
TN12OAU100 board, or use an OA board that outputs 4 dBm single-wavelength optical power and a 2 dB
attenuator.

The NPO2 provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 16-53 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPO2.
Table 16-53 Functions and features of the NPO2
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic function
l Accesses 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight

channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane, maps the signals
into eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and converts the signals
into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar, and hybrid access of ODU0, ODU1 or
ODU2/ODU2e is supported.
l Accesses four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board,
and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
l Integrates twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of
optical signals.
l Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free
transmission over short distance and the TN55NPO2L supports DCMfree transmission over long distance.
Cross-connect
capabilities

ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board
OTN function
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in

the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1514
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Function
and Feature
Description
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
Not supported
FEC encoding

975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Provides optical power detection and reports alarms and performance events
of the board.
IEEE 1588v2
The TN55NPO2 board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 signals.

NOTE
For the TN54NPO2 and TN55NPO2 boards (in compatible mode), the IEEE 1588v2
signal can be transmitted through any of the eight optical ports on the board. For the
TN55NPO2 board (in standard mode), the IEEE 1588v2 signal must be transmitted
through optical port 1.
Physical clock
The TN55NPO2 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1
signals are cross-connected from the backplane.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop
Outloop
Channel
Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Supported
NOTE
The TN55NPO2 board supports
WDM-side loopbacks only when
working in compatible mode.
Supported
NOTE
The TN55NPO2 board supports
ODU2 channel loopback only when
working in standard mode.
1515
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1516
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
16 PID Unit
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The NPO2 board consists of the signal processing module, PID module, control and
communication module, 1588 module, and power supply module.
Figure 16-47 and Figure 16-48 show the functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1517
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-47 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NPO2

64XODU0/32XODU1/
8XODU2/8XODU2e
Backplane
4XOTU2/
4XOTU2e
8
Cross-connect
module
1588
OTN
processing
module
OUT
PID
Module
IN
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
1518
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-48 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN55NPO2

64XODU0/32XODU1
/8XODU2/8XODU2e
Cross-connect
module
1588
Backplane
4XOTU2/4XOTU2e
PQ2 service
processing
sub-board
8
OTN
processing
module
OUT
PID
Module
IN
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the NPO2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2 to the WDM side
of the NPO2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or
eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board
through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and
encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
to the PID module.
The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are
finally output through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the
remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing
module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/
AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels
of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1519
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
Module Function
l
PID module
WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into
twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical
signals.
signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed
signals.

Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2 and the cross-connect
board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/
ODU2e signals
PQ2 service processing board
Processes 40 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided on
the TN55NPO2 board.
NOTE
After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2 board that works in standard
mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000. For details on how to create a logical PQ2 subboard, see Adding Boards in the Commissioning Guide.
1588 module
the STG board.

the CPU.
Power supply module

on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1520
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
16.6.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators, optical interfaces, laser level label, and PQ2 sub-board on the front
panel of the NPO2.

Figure 16-49 shows the front panel of the TN54NPO2.
Figure 16-50 shows the front panel of the TN55NPO2.
Figure 16-49 Front panel of the TN54NPO2
NPO2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
NPO2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1521
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-50 Front panel of the TN55NPO2

NPO2
NPO2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
LASER
RADIATION
WITH OPTICAL
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
PQ2
STAT
NPO2
PQ2 installed
NPO2
PQ2 not installed
NOTE
The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing
board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st, 5th,
9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can
also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For details, see 16.6.1 Version Description.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the NPO2 panel.
l
There is one indicator on the PQ2 panel.

l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NPO2. Table 16-54 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1522
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-54 Types and functions of the NPO2 interfaces

Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC
Laser Hazard Level

16.6.6 Valid Slots

The NPO2 occupies two slots.
Table 16-55 shows the valid slots for the NPO2 board.
Table 16-55 Valid slots for the NPO2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU47, IU51, IU55, IU59, IU63, IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
NOTE
slot number of the NPO2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots.
For example, if the NPO2 occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2 displayed on the NM is
IU3.
16.6.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2

The characteristic code for the NPO2 consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency
values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side.
Table 16-56 Characteristic code for the NPO2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Code
Meaning
Description

signal

WDM side.

1523
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Code
Meaning
Description

signal

WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN54NPO2 is 605385.

l
is 193.85 THz.


Table 16-57 Serial numbers of the interfaces on the NPO2 displayed on the NMS
Physical Port
IN/OUT
NOTE
Logical Ports
The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, and the TN54NPO2 board
can work only in compatible mode.
NOTE
Figure 16-51 shows the board model of the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board in compatible
mode. Table 16-58 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
Figure 16-52 shows the board model of the T55NPO2 board in standard mode. Table
16-59 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1524
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-51 Diagram of ports on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 (compatible mode)

Other tributary board/line
board/PID board

board/PID board

board/PID board
Backplane
64 x ODU0
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
8 x ODU2/ODU2e
32 x ODU1
51
71
(ODU2LP1/
ODU2 ODU2LP1)-1
133(OCHLP1
/OCHLP1)-1
51
IN/OUT
189
189
192
192
58
78
(ODU2LP8/
ODU2 ODU2LP8)-1
58
140(OCHLP8
/OCHLP8)-1
141(OCHLP9
/OCHLP9)-1
144(OCHLP12
/OCHLP12)-1
NOTE
There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the
NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You
do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module
Automatic cross-connection, which does not

need to be configured on the NMS. For
example, if ODU0 signals are required, users
only need to configure cross-connections
from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the
board using the NMS. The board's internal
structure enables transmission of the
multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port.
Users do not need to configure a crossconnection for transmitting the multiplexed
signal.
ODU0 mapping
path

boards

1525
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-58 Meaning of ports on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 (compatible mode)

Port Name
Meaning
ODU0LP1-ODU0LP32

and 2.
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP8

2, 3 and 4.
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP8
OCHLP1-OCHLP12
IN/OUT
This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.
Figure 16-52 Diagram of ports on the TN55NPO2 (standard mode)
12xODU2/
12XODU2e
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
ODU1:4
48xODU1
ODU1:1
IN/OUT
ODU1:4
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
96xODU0
ODU2:1
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1526
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
NOTE
The OCH9 to OCH12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board.
correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:
1ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1.
The TN55NPO2 board's OCH5 to OCH8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the
TN54PQ2 service processing board.
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module

boards
ODU0
mapping path
Table 16-59 Meaning of ports on the TN55NPO2 (standard mode)

Port Name
Meaning
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)-ODU2:(112)ODU1:(14)-ODU0:(12)

backplane.
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)-ODU2:(112)ODU1:(14)

backplane.
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)

ODU2e signals that are received through the
backplane.
1(IN/OUT)

l
The
side.
The
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1527
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, the TN54NPO2 board can
work only in compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see Board
Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1528
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-53 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN55NPO2 (ODU0 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
compatible mode
TN55NPO2 board
standard mode
2
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
side of the TN55NPO2

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1529
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board b
WDM side
TN54NPO2 board
(compatible mode)
2
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1530
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
TN55NPO2
board
compatible mode
standard mode
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)


Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /TN52NS3/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1531
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
TN54NPO2
board
(compatible mode)
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)


Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /TN52NS3/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1532
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
compatible mode
TN55NPO2
board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1
standard mode
2
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board a TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX

Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1533
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
TN54NPO2
board
(compatible mode)
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)
Other board a TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX

Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/
Cross-Connections Between the NPO2 and ENQ2

Figure 16-59 and Figure 16-60 show the created cross-connections between the NPO2 and
ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1534
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-59 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and ENQ2

WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
standard mode
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
ENQ2
board
compatible mode
WDM side
compatible mode
TN55NPO2
board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8
standard mode
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
The cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and

ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1535
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-60 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and ENQ2

WDM side
ENQ2 board
compatible
mode
WDM side
TN54NPO2
board
compatible
mode


Figure 16-61 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NPO2 board. One board
can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e signals.
Figure 16-61 Example of service cross-connections on the NPO2 board
ODU0
TOM
TOM
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
NS2
IN/OUT
NPO2
ODU1
ODU2/
TDX/ ODU2e
ND2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1536
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
16.6.10 NPO2 Loopbacks

Table 16-60 lists the types of loopbacks supported by NPO2 boards.
Table 16-60 Loopbacks supported by NPO2 boards
Cross-Connect
Level
Board
Loopback Type
Description
ODU0
TN55NPO2/
TN54NPO2
Channel inloop
See Figure 16-62.
Channel outloop
See Figure 16-63.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 16-64.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 16-65.
Channel inloop
See Figure 16-66.
Channel outloop
See Figure 16-67.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 16-68.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 16-69.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 16-70.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 16-71.
ODU1
ODU2/ODU2e
NOTE
The TN55NPO2 board supports only WDM-side loopbacks when working in compatible mode and only
ODU2 channel loopbacks when working in the standard mode. The loopback points in the standard mode
are the same as those in the compatible mode.
Loopbacks Supported by TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 When the Cross-Connect Level

Is ODU0
l
Channel inloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1537
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-62 Channel inloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
As shown in Figure 16-63, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side is demapped
into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is
deconverged into four ODU1 services, each of which is then deconverged into two ODU0
services. Any N of the 64 ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1538
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-63 Channel outloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloop
converged into 32 ODU1 services, which are then converged into eight ODU2 services.
Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining
ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1539
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-64 WDM-side inloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop
As shown in Figure 16-65, eight OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped
into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2
services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 service can be
passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1540
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-65 WDM-side outloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

Is ODU1
l
Channel inloops
Any N of the 32 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1541
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-66 Channel inloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
As shown in Figure 16-67, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side is demapped
into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 services is
deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back
to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be
passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1542
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-67 Channel outloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloop
converged into eight ODU2 services. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped
back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1543
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop
As shown in Figure 16-69, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side are
demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the
eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1544
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side
Backplane
Loopbacked services

Is ODU2/ODU2e
l
WDM-side inloops
As shown in Figure 16-70, eight ODU2/ODU2e services are cross-connected from the
backplane. Any N of the eight ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the backplane
and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1545
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloops
As shown in Figure 16-71, eight OTU2/OTU2e services received from the WDM side are
demapped into eight ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is
terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM
side and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
Backplane
WDM-side
Loopbacked services

For parameters of the NPO2, refer to Table 16-61.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1546
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-61 NPO2 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Optical Interface
Loopback
Outloop

NOTE
TN55NPO2 only in the compatible mode.

information.
Channel Loopback
Outloop
Queries or sets path Loopback.
Service Mode
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2

Default: Automatic
NOTE
TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2 (compatible
mode).

Off, On
Laser Status
Default: On
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


1547
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC

Default: FEC
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.17
0 to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
NOTE

information.
wavelength.
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Line Rate
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Default: Disabled
Default: Standard
Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

to Disabled.
information.

1548
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled

commissioning.
Default: Disabled
16.6.12 Specifications of the NPO2

consumption.
Board
WDM-Side Pluggable
Optical Module
TN54NP
O2
200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN
N/A
TN55NP
O2
N/A
NOTE
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code
format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
800 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (40 km)
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

1549
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value

Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
Maximum
mean launched
power (single
wavelength)
dBm
+2
+2
-2
Minimum
mean launched
power (single
wavelength)
dBm
-4.5
-4.5
-6
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
6.5
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.8
0.8
0.8
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
800
1500
200
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
1200 to 1650
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
(FEC enabled)
EOL
dBm
-13.5
-12
-12
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm

1550
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Maximum
reflectance
dB
Value
-27
-27
-27
TN54NPO2:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN55NPO2:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN54PQ2:
l
Dimensions of front panel: 24.5 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) (0.96 in. (W) x 2.69
in. (D) x 2.24 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN54NPO2
134
147
TN55NPO2
143
157.3
TN54PQ2
1.1
1.2
16.7 ENQ2
ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

The available functional version of the ENQ2 board is TN54.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1551
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN54
ENQ
2
16.7.2 Application
The ENQ2 board converts 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four
channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The
Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the ENQ2 Board

Figure 16-72 200G system built with the ENQ2 board
Client-side
service
Clientside
service
Clientside
service
Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
Tributary 8xODU2e
board
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
OBU
1P1
TN55
NPO2E
TN55
NPO2E
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
TN54
ENQ2
Client-side
service
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
OBU
1P1
Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
TN55
NPO2
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
8xOTU2/
OTU2e
TN55
NPO2
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
NOTE
The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the
TN55NPO2EL04 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1552
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Application Scenario 2: 120G system Built with the ENQ2 Board

Figure 16-73 120G system built with the ENQ2 board (TN55NPO2)
Clientside
service
Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e
OBU
1P1
TN55
NPO2
Clientside
service
Tributary
board
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
TN54
ENQ2
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
TN55
NPO2
OBU
1P1
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
TN54
ENQ2
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
Tributary
board
Clientside
service
Figure 16-74 120G system built with the ENQ2 board (TN54NPO2)
Clientside
service
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
8xODU2e Tributary
board
64xODU0/
32xODU1/
8xODU2/
Tributary 8xODU2e
board
OA
OA
TN54
NPO2
Clientside
service
TN54
ENQ2
Tributary
board
TN54
NPO2
OA
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e
Clientside
service
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
OA
4xOTU2/
OTU2e
TN54
ENQ2
32xODU0/
16xODU1/
4xODU2/
4xODU2e Tributary
board
Clientside
service

The ENQ2 supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 16-63 provides the details about the functions and features of the ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1553
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-63 Functions and features of the ENQ2

Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals

or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four
channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and supports hybrid transmission of the
ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e services. The reverse process is similar.
Cross-connect
capabilities

ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board
OTN function

to the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
ESC function
Supports the ESC function. The supervisory signal is transmitted within the
service signal.
PRBS function
LPT function
Not supported
FEC encoding

975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Provides the function to report the alarms and performance events of the
board.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop
Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Supported
NOTE
The TN54ENQ2 board supports
WDM-side loopbacks only when
working in compatible mode.
1554
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function or
Feature
16 PID Unit
Description
Channel
Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Supported
NOTE
The TN54ENQ2 board supports
ODU2 channel loopback only
when working in standard mode.
1555
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Function or
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING
PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1556
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function or
Feature
16 PID Unit
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1

The ENQ2 board consists of the signal processing module, the control and communication
module, and the power supply module.
Figure 16-75 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1557
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Signal Flow
Figure 16-75 Functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2
32XODU0/16XODU1/
4XODU2/4XODU2e
Backplane
4XOTU2/
4XOTU2e
Cross-connect
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
In the signal flow of the ENQ2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the ENQ2 to the WDM side
of the NPO2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal
processing module. Then, the encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation,
mapping, and OTN framing for the signals. Finally, four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
are transmitted to the NPO2 board through the backplane.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives four channels of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals
from the NPO2 board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping,
and decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16
channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals.
The signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1558
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Module Function
l

NOTE
The signal processing module on the ENQ2 board has fixed cross-connections to the NPO2 board.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2 and the cross-connect
board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2
signals
Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals.
l

the CPU.
detection of each functional module on the board.
Power supply module

Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
16.7.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators on the front panel of the ENQ2.

Figure 16-76 shows the front panel of the ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1559
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-76 Front panel of the ENQ2
ENQ2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
ENQ2
Indicators
l
16.7.6 Valid Slots

The ENQ2 occupies one slot.
Table 16-64 shows the valid slots for the ENQ2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1560
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-64 Valid slots for the ENQ2 board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU45, IU49, IU53, IU57, IU61, IU65
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Logical Ports
The TN54ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode.
NOTE
Figure 16-77 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in compatible mode. Table
16-65 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
Figure 16-78 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in standard mode. Table
16-66 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1561
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-77 port diagrams for the TN54ENQ2 (compatible mode)

Other tributary board/
line board/PID board


Backplane
32 x ODU0
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
16 x ODU1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
51
71
(ODU2LP1/
ODU2 ODU2LP1)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
51
173
173
54
176
176
54
74
(ODU2LP4/
ODU2 ODU2LP4)-1
NOTE
There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the
NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You
do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Cross-connect
module
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module

cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP
port on the board using the NMS. The board's
internal structure enables transmission of the
ODU0 mapping
path


1562
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-65 Meaning of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (compatible mode)

Port Name
Meaning
ODU0LP1-ODU0LP16

and 2.
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4

2, 3 and 4.
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4
Figure 16-78 port diagrams for the TN54ENQ2 (standard mode)

Backplane
ODU2:1
4xODU2/
4XODU2e
ODU2:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:1
ODU2:1
ODU1:4
16xODU1
ODU1:1
ODU2:1
ODU1:4
NPO2/
NPO2E
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
32xODU0
ODU2:1
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU0:2
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU2:1
ODU1:4
ODU0:2
NOTE
Service cross-connections of the TN54ENQ2(standard mode) board are configured on the TN55NPO2 or
TN55NPO2E board (either in standard mode) using the NMS.
correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1.
Cross-connect
module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ODU1 mapping path

1563
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Multiplexing
module
ODU2 mapping path
Service
processing
module

ODU0 mapping
path
Table 16-66 Meaning of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (standard mode)

Port Name
Meaning
(14)-ODU0:(12)

signals that are received through the backplane.
(14)

signals that are received through the backplane.
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(912)

ODU2e signals that are received through the
backplane.
1(IN/OUT)

l
The
side.
The
The ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and
When the ENQ2 board works in standard mode, service cross-connections are configured on
the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board using the NMS. The ODUk services processed by the
ENQ2 board are mapped onto OCH9-OCH12 optical channels on the TN55NPO2 or
TN55NPO2E board in standard mode. For details, see Configuration of Cross-connection
(NPO2) and Configuration of Cross-connection (NPO2E).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1564
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-79 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU0 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
ENQ2
board
2
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)

side of the ENQ2
side of the ENQ2
Other board a
Other board b
Other board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1565
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

Client side
203(ClientLP3ClientLP3)-1
Other board a
WDM side
ENQ2 board
2
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)

side of the ENQ2
side of the ENQ2
Other board a
Other board b
Other board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1566
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
ENQ2
board
WDM side
Other board b
(compatible mode)
Other board c
(standard mode)

side of the ENQ2
side of the ENQ2
Other board a
Other board b
Other board c
Cross-Connections Between the NPO2/NPO2E and ENQ2

Figure 16-82 shows the cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2.
Figure 16-83 shows the cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and TN54ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1567
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-84 shows the cross-connections between the TN55NPO2E and TN54ENQ2.
Figure 16-82 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
standard mode
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
ENQ2
board
compatible mode
WDM side
compatible mode
TN55NPO2
board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8
standard mode
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1568
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-83 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and TN54ENQ2

WDM side
ENQ2 board
compatible
mode
WDM side
TN54NPO2
board
compatible
mode

Figure 16-84 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2E and TN54ENQ2

WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
ENQ2 board
1(IN/OUT)--OCH:10
(standard
mode)
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
NPO2E board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8
(standard
mode)
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2,

which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1569
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
16.7.9 ENQ2 Loopbacks

Table 16-67 lists the types of loopbacks supported by ENQ2 board.
Table 16-67 Loopbacks supported by ENQ2 board
Cross-Connect
Level
Boar
d
Loopback Type
Description
ODU0
TN54
ENQ
2
Channel inloop
See Figure 16-85.
Channel outloop
See Figure 16-86.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 16-87.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 16-88.
Channel inloop
See Figure 16-89.
Channel outloop
See Figure 16-90.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 16-91.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 16-92.
WDM-side inloop
See Figure 16-93.
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 16-94.
ODU1
ODU2/ODU2e
NOTE
The TN54ENQ2 board supports only WDM-side loopbacks when working in compatible mode and only
ODU2 channel loopbacks when working in the standard mode. The loopback points in the standard mode
are the same as those in the compatible mode.
NOTE
When an TN54ENQ2 board works in standard mode, channel loopback must be configured at the mapping
NPO2/NPO2E board in standard mode; when an TN54ENQ2 board works in compatible mode, channel
loopback must be configured at the mapping ENQ2 board, WDM-side loopback must be configured at the
mapping NPO2 board in compatible mode.
Loopbacks Supported by TN54ENQ2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU0

l
Channel inloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1570
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-85 Channel inloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
As shown in Figure 16-86, four OTU2 service received from the NPO2/NPO2E board is
demapped into four ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2
service is deconverged into four ODU1 services, each of which is then deconverged into
two ODU0 services. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the NPO2/
NPO2E board at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be
passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1571
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-86 Channel outloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloop
converged into 16 ODU1 services, which are then converged into four ODU2 services. Any
N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1572
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-87 WDM-side inloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop
As shown in Figure 16-88, four OTU2 services received on the NPO2/NPO2E board are
demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the
four ODU2 services can be looped back to the NPO2/NPO2E board and the remaining
ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1573
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-88 WDM-side outloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
ODU0
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU0
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN54ENQ2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU1

l
Channel inloops
Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1574
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-89 Channel inloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Channel outloop
As shown in Figure 16-90, four OTU2 services received from the NPO2/NPO2E board is
demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2
service is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped
back to the NPO2/NPO2E board at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1575
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Figure 16-90 Channel outloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloop
converged into 4 ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to
the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1576
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop
As shown in Figure 16-92, four OTU2 services received from the NPO2/NPO2E board
are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of
the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the NPO2/NPO2E board and the remaining
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1577
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
Backplane
Loopbacked services
Loopbacks Supported by TN54ENQ2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/

ODU2e
l
WDM-side inloops
As shown in Figure 16-93, four ODU2/ODU2e services are cross-connected from the
backplane. Any N of the ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the backplane and
the remaining ODU2/ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1578
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit

ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
Backplane
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloops
As shown in Figure 16-94, four OTU2/OTU2e services received from the NPO2/
NPO2E board are demapped into four ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e
overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to
the NPO2/NPO2E board and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
Backplane
Loopbacked services

Table 16-68 lists the parameters of the ENQ2 board working in compatible mode.
For details about the standard and compatible modes of the board, see Board Model (Standard
Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1579
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
Table 16-68 ENQ2 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Channel Loopback
Outloop
Service Mode
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Line Rate
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Default: Disabled

to Disabled.

PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

commissioning.

1580
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16 PID Unit
16.7.11 Specifications of the ENQ2

The specifications include the dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power Consumption

at 25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
(W)
ENQ2
40
44

1581
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17
17 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Unit
Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing

Unit
About This Chapter

17.1 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing board
17.2 M40V
M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA
17.3 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board
17.4 D40V
D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA
17.5 DFIU
DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board
17.6 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit
17.7 ITL
ITL: interleaver board
17.8 SFIU
SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1582
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17.1 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing board

The available functional versions of the M40 board are TN11 and TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
M40
TN12
M40
Type
Unit
Type
Description
TN11M4
0/
TN12M4
0
01
Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
02
Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Appearance:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The TN11M40 board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12M40 board. The
TN11M40 board occupies three slots. The TN12M40 board occupies two slots. For details,
see 17.1.5 Front Panel.

1583
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11M40
TN12M40
The TN12M40 can be created as TN11M40 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12M40 functions as the
TN11M40.
TN12M40
None
17.1.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40 board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels
of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the M40 board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-1.
Figure 17-1 Position of the M40 board in the WDM system
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
M40
OA
OA
D40
40
40
1
D40
OA
OA
M40
40
40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

The M40 board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals, and
monitor alarms and performance events.
Table 17-1 Functions and features of the M40 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel

of multiplexed signals.
l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1584
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical

signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of

the board.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The M40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
Figure 17-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board.
Figure 17-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board
M01
M02
Multiplexer
Optical module
Splitter
OUT
M40
MON
Temperature Temperature
control
detection
PIN
Detection and temperature control module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
SCC
1585
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical
signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels
of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then
outputs them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of
multiplexed optical signals.

Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature.
Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.

Power supply module

17.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board.

Figure 17-3 and Figure 17-4 show the front panel of the M40 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1586
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-3 Front panel of the TN11M40 board
M40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M01 196.00 M11 195.00

M02 195.90 M12 194.90
M03 195.80 M13 194.80
M04 195.70 M14 194.70
M05 195.60 M15 194.60
M06 195.50 M16 194.50
M07 195.40 M17 194.40
M08 195.30 M18 194.30
M09 195.20 M19 194.20
M10 195.10 M20 194.10
M21 194.00
M22 193.90
M23 193.80
M24 193.70
M25 193.60
M26 193.50
M27 193.40
M28 193.30
M29 193.20
M30 193.10
M31 193.00
M32 192.90
M33 192.80
M34 192.70
M35 192.60
M36 192.50
M37 192.40
M38 192.30
M39 192.20
M40 192.10
M27 M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35 M36
M37
M38
M25 M26
M39 M40
M11 M12
M24
M10
M23
M09
M21 M22
M07 M08
M20
M06
M19
M05
M18
M04
M17
M03
M16
M02
M15
M01
M14
M13
MON OUT
M40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1587
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-4 Front panel of the TN12M40 board

M40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M13
MON
OUT
M01
M27
M28
M02
M11
M12
M39
M40
M26
M01 196.00 M11 195.00

M02 195.90 M12 194.90
M03 195.80 M13 194.80
M04 195.70 M14 194.70
M05 195.60 M15 194.60
M06 195.50 M16 194.50
M07 195.40 M17 194.40
M08 195.30 M18 194.30
M09 195.20 M19 194.20
M10 195.10 M20 194.10
M21 194.00 M31 193.00

M22 193.90 M32 192.90
M23 193.80 M33 192.80
M24 193.70 M34 192.70
M25 193.60 M35 192.60
M26 193.50 M36 192.50
M27 193.40 M37 192.40
M28 193.30 M38 192.30
M29 193.20 M39 192.20
M30 193.10 M40 192.10
M40
NOTE
A table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies is located on the front panel.
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board. Table 17-2 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1588
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40 board
Interface
Type
Function
M01-M40
LC
Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected

to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs.
OUT
LC
Transmits multiplexed signals, when connected to an

optical amplifying board or ITL.
MON
LC
Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum,

when connected to the input interface of the MCA4,
MCA8 or OPM8.
The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite
signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon
(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 input interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board. Table 17-3 and Table 17-4
show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40 board.
Table 17-3 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4001
board (C_EVEN)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.00
1529.55
M21
194.00
1545.32
M02
195.90
1530.33
M22
193.90
1546.12
M03
195.80
1531.12
M23
193.80
1546.92
M04
195.70
1531.90
M24
193.70
1547.72
M05
195.60
1532.68
M25
193.60
1548.51
M06
195.50
1533.47
M26
193.50
1549.32
M07
195.40
1534.25
M27
193.40
1550.12
M08
195.30
1535.04
M28
193.30
1550.92
M09
195.20
1535.82
M29
193.20
1551.72
M10
195.10
1536.61
M30
193.10
1552.52
M11
195.00
1537.40
M31
193.00
1553.33
M12
194.90
1538.19
M32
192.90
1554.13
M13
194.80
1538.98
M33
192.80
1554.94
M14
194.70
1539.77
M34
192.70
1555.75
M15
194.60
1540.56
M35
192.60
1556.55

1589
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M16
194.50
1541.35
M36
192.50
1557.36
M17
194.40
1542.14
M37
192.40
1558.17
M18
194.30
1542.94
M38
192.30
1558.98
M19
194.20
1543.73
M39
192.20
1559.79
M20
194.10
1544.53
M40
192.10
1560.61
Table 17-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4002
board (C_ODD)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.05
1529.16
M21
194.05
1544.92
M02
195.95
1529.94
M22
193.95
1545.72
M03
195.85
1530.72
M23
193.85
1546.52
M04
195.75
1531.51
M24
193.75
1547.32
M05
195.65
1532.29
M25
193.65
1548.11
M06
195.55
1533.07
M26
193.55
1548.91
M07
195.45
1533.86
M27
193.45
1549.72
M08
195.35
1534.64
M28
193.35
1550.52
M09
195.25
1535.43
M29
193.25
1551.32
M10
195.15
1536.22
M30
193.15
1552.12
M11
195.05
1537.00
M31
193.05
1552.93
M12
194.95
1537.79
M32
192.95
1553.73
M13
194.85
1538.58
M33
192.85
1554.54
M14
194.75
1539.37
M34
192.75
1555.34
M15
194.65
1540.16
M35
192.65
1556.15
M16
194.55
1540.95
M36
192.55
1556.96
M17
194.45
1541.75
M37
192.45
1557.77
M18
194.35
1542.54
M38
192.35
1558.58
M19
194.25
1543.33
M39
192.25
1559.39
M20
194.15
1544.13
M40
192.15
1560.20

1590
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Laser Hazard Level

17.1.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one TN11M40 board and two slots house one TN12M40 board.
Table 17-5 shows the valid slots for the TN11M40 board and Table 17-6 shows the valid slots
for the TN12M40 board.
Table 17-5 Valid slots for the TN11M40 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27-IU32, IU35IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
leftmost one of the three slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40 board, the slot number of the
TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40 board, the slot number of the TN12M40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1591
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40

The characteristic code for the M40 board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board
are odd or even.
Table 17-7 Characteristic code for the M40 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band
Indicates the band of the

optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value
L represents L band.
Second character
Odd/even wavelengths
Indicates whether the

wavelengths that carry
signals are odd or even
wavelengths. The value E
represents even wavelengths;
the value O represents odd
wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
17.1.8 Optical Interfaces


Table 17-8 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
OUT
M01-M40
2-41
MON
42

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1592
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For M40 parameters, refer to Table 17-9.

Table 17-9 M40 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Configure Band
Sets the working band type of a board.
Default: C
Actual Band
Queries the actual working band of the board.
Actual Working
Band Parity
Queries the parity of the actual working band

of the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Default: /
17.1.10 Specifications of the M40

Table 17-10 lists the optical specifications of the M40 board.
Table 17-10 Optical specifications of the M40 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
Adjacent channel spacing
GHz
100
Insertion loss
dB
6.5
Reflectance
dB
< -40
nm
1529-1561
Adjacent channel isolation
dB
> 22
Non-adjacent channel isolation
dB
> 25
Polarization dependence loss
dB
0.5
Temperature characteristics
nm/C
0.002
Maximum channel insertion loss difference
dB

1593
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l

TN11M40: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
TN12M40: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11M40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.)
TN12M40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11M40
10.0
13.0
TN12M40
10.0
13.0
17.2 M40V
M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA

The available functional versions of the M40V board are TN11 and TN12.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
M40
V
TN12
M40
V

1594
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Type
Unit
Type
Description
TN11M4
0V/
TN12M4
0V
01
Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
02
Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Appearance:
l
The TN11M40V board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12M40V board. The
TN11M40V board occupies three slots. The TN12M40V board occupies two slots. For
details, see 17.2.5 Front Panel.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11M40V
TN12M40
V
The TN12M40V can be created as TN11M40V on the NMS.

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12M40V functions as the
TN11M40V.
TN12M40V
None
17.2.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40V board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels
of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and adjusts
the input optical power of each channel.
For the position of the M40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-5.
Figure 17-5 Position of the M40V board in the WDM system
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1
M40V
OA
OA
D40
40
40
1
D40
OA
OA
M40V
40
40

OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1595
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The M40V board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals,
monitor alarms and performance events, and adjust optical power.
Table 17-11 Functions and features of the M40V board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one multiplexed signal and

adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Adjusts the optical power of each signal before multiplexing.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The M40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 17-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1596
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board
M01
M02
Optical module
Multiplexer
VOA
Splitter
VOA
OUT
VOA
M40
MON
VOA Temperature
control
control
Temperature
detection
PIN
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical
signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer after the optical power adjustment by VOA. The
multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel
of multiplexed optical signals, and then outputs them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals before multiplexing.
Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of
multiplexed optical signals.

Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1597
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

17.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board.

Figure 17-7 and Figure 17-8 show the front panel of the M40V board.
Figure 17-7 Front panel of the TN11M40V board
M40V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M01 196.00 M11 195.00

M02 195.90 M12 194.90
M03 195.80 M13 194.80
M04 195.70 M14 194.70
M05 195.60 M15 194.60
M06 195.50 M16 194.50
M07 195.40 M17 194.40
M08 195.30 M18 194.30
M09 195.20 M19 194.20
M10 195.10 M20 194.10
M21 194.00
M22 193.90
M23 193.80
M24 193.70
M25 193.60
M26 193.50
M27 193.40
M28 193.30
M29 193.20
M30 193.10
M31193.00
M32192.90
M33192.80
M34192.70
M35192.60
M36192.50
M37192.40
M38192.30
M39192.20
M40192.10
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35 M36
M37
M24
M38
M25 M26
M39 M40
M11 M12
M23
M10
M21 M22
M09
M20
M07 M08
M19
M06
M18
M05
M17
M04
M16
M03
M15
M02
M14
M01
M13
MON OUT
M40V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1598
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-8 Front panel of the TN12M40V board

M40V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M13
MON
OUT
M01
M27
M28
M02
M11
M12
M39
M40
M26
M01 196.00 M11 195.00

M02 195.90 M12 194.90
M03 195.80 M13 194.80
M04 195.70 M14 194.70
M05 195.60 M15 194.60
M06 195.50 M16 194.50
M07 195.40 M17 194.40
M08 195.30 M18 194.30
M09 195.20 M19 194.20
M10 195.10 M20 194.10
M21 194.00 M31 193.00

M22 193.90 M32 192.90
M23 193.80 M33 192.80
M24 193.70 M34 192.70
M25 193.60 M35 192.60
M26 193.50 M36 192.50
M27 193.40 M37 192.40
M28 193.30 M38 192.30
M29 193.20 M39 192.20
M30 193.10 M40 192.10
M40V
NOTE
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board. Table 17-12 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1599
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-12 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40V board
Interface
Type
Function
M01-M40
LC
Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected

to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs.
OUT
LC
Transmits the multiplexed signals, when connected to

an optical amplifier or ITL.
MON
LC

MCA8 or OPM8 board.
signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon
(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 input interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board. Table 17-13 and Table
17-14 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency, and wavelengths of the M40V board.
Table 17-13 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V
board (even)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.00
1529.55
M21
194.00
1545.32
M02
195.90
1530.33
M22
193.90
1546.12
M03
195.80
1531.12
M23
193.80
1546.92
M04
195.70
1531.90
M24
193.70
1547.72
M05
195.60
1532.68
M25
193.60
1548.51
M06
195.50
1533.47
M26
193.50
1549.32
M07
195.40
1534.25
M27
193.40
1550.12
M08
195.30
1535.04
M28
193.30
1550.92
M09
195.20
1535.82
M29
193.20
1551.72
M10
195.10
1536.61
M30
193.10
1552.52
M11
195.00
1537.40
M31
193.00
1553.33
M12
194.90
1538.19
M32
192.90
1554.13
M13
194.80
1538.98
M33
192.80
1554.94
M14
194.70
1539.77
M34
192.70
1555.75
M15
194.60
1540.56
M35
192.60
1556.55

1600
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M16
194.50
1541.35
M36
192.50
1557.36
M17
194.40
1542.14
M37
192.40
1558.17
M18
194.30
1542.94
M38
192.30
1558.98
M19
194.20
1543.73
M39
192.20
1559.79
M20
194.10
1544.53
M40
192.10
1560.61
Table 17-14 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V
board (odd)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.05
1529.16
M21
194.05
1544.92
M02
195.95
1529.94
M22
193.95
1545.72
M03
195.85
1530.72
M23
193.85
1546.52
M04
195.75
1531.51
M24
193.75
1547.32
M05
195.65
1532.29
M25
193.65
1548.11
M06
195.55
1533.07
M26
193.55
1548.91
M07
195.45
1533.86
M27
193.45
1549.72
M08
195.35
1534.64
M28
193.35
1550.52
M09
195.25
1535.43
M29
193.25
1551.32
M10
195.15
1536.22
M30
193.15
1552.12
M11
195.05
1537.00
M31
193.05
1552.93
M12
194.95
1537.79
M32
192.95
1553.73
M13
194.85
1538.58
M33
192.85
1554.54
M14
194.75
1539.37
M34
192.75
1555.34
M15
194.65
1540.16
M35
192.65
1556.15
M16
194.55
1540.95
M36
192.55
1556.96
M17
194.45
1541.75
M37
192.45
1557.77
M18
194.35
1542.54
M38
192.35
1558.58
M19
194.25
1543.33
M39
192.25
1559.39
M20
194.15
1544.13
M40
192.15
1560.20

1601
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Laser Hazard Level

17.2.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one TN11M40V board and two slots house one TN12M40V board.
Table 17-15 shows the valid slots for the TN11M40V board and Table 17-16 shows the valid
slots for the TN12M40V board.
Table 17-15 Valid slots for the TN11M40V board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40V board, the slot number of the
TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40V board, the slot number of the
TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1602
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V

The characteristic code for the M40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
Table 17-17 Characteristic code for the M40V board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and
even wavelengths.


Table 17-18 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
OUT
M01-M40
2-41
MON
42

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1603
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For M40V parameters, refer to Table 17-19.

Table 17-19 M40V parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio

(dB) parameter sets the optical power
attenuation of a board channel so that the
optical power of the output signals at the
transmit end is within the preset range.
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
You can obtain the value range of this

parameter by querying the corresponding
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max.
Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation
Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more
information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter

queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed
by the current optical interface of a board.
See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter

queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed
See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: /
17.2.10 Specifications of the M40V

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1604
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-20 lists the optical specifications of the M40V board.
Table 17-20 Optical specifications of the M40V board
Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100
Insertion loss
dB
8a
Reflectance
dB
< -40
nm
1529-1561
dB
> 22
dB
> 25
Attenuation range
dB
0-15
Loss accuracy
dB
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
dB
0.5
dB
3a
NOTE
a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
l

TN11M40V: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
TN12M40V: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
TN12M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11M40V
20.0
24.95
TN12M40V
16.0
26.0

1605
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17.3 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board

The available functional versions of the D40 board are TN11 and TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
D40
TN12
D40
Type
Unit
Type
Description
TN11D40/
TN12D40
01
Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
02
Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

Appearance:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The TN11D40 board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12D40 board. The
TN11D40 board occupies three slots. The TN12D40 board occupies two slots. For details,

1606
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11D40
TN12D40
The TN12D40 can be created as TN11D40 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12D40 functions as the
TN11D40.
TN12D40
None
17.3.2 Application
The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexing unit. The D40 implements the demultiplexing of
one optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the D40 in the WDM system, see Figure 17-9.
Figure 17-9 Position of the D40 in the WDM system
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
M40
OA
OA
D40
40
40
1
D40
OA
OA
M40
40
40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring.
Table 17-21 Functions and features of the D40
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Demultiplexes main path signal to a maximum of 40 channels of

service.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1607
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

the board.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The D40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
Figure 17-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40.
Figure 17-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40
Optical module
Demultiplexer
Splitter
IN
D01
D02
D40
MON
Temperature
detection
PIN
Temperature
control
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
1608
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals
to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical
signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the
D01-D40 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals.

Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature.
Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.

Power supply module

17.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the D40 front panel.

Figure 17-11 and Figure 17-12 show the front panel of the D40 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1609
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-11 TN11D40 front panel
D40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D01 196.00
D02 195.90
D03 195.80
D04 195.70
D05 195.60
D06 195.50
D07 195.40
D08 195.30
D09 195.20
D10 195.10
D11 195.00
D12 194.90
D13 194.80
D14 194.70
D15 194.60
D16 194.50
D17 194.40
D18 194.30
D19 194.20
D20 194.10
D21 194.00
D22 193.90
D23 193.80
D24 193.70
D25 193.60
D26 193.50
D27 193.40
D28 193.30
D29 193.20
D30 193.10
D31 193.00
D32 192.90
D33 192.80
D34 192.70
D35 192.60
D36 192.50
D37 192.40
D38 192.30
D39 192.20
D40 192.10
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D26
D40
D12
D25
D11
D24
D10
D23
D09
D22
D08
D21
D07
D20
D06
D19
D05
D18
D04
D17
D03
D16
D02
D15
D01
D14
IN
D13
MON
D40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1610
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-12 Front panel of the TN12D40 board

D40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D13
MON
OUT
D01
D02
D11
D12
D27
D28
D39
D40
D26
D01 196.00 D11 195.00

D02 195.90 D12 194.90
D03 195.80 D13 194.80
D04 195.70 D14 194.70
D05 195.60 D15 194.60
D06 195.50 D16 194.50
D07 195.40 D17 194.40
D08 195.30 D18 194.30
D09 195.20 D19 194.20
D10 195.10 D20 194.10
D21 194.00
D22 193.90
D23 193.80
D24 193.70
D25 193.60
D26 193.50
D27 193.40
D28 193.30
D29 193.20
D30 193.10
D31 193.00
D32 192.90
D33 192.80
D34 192.70
D35 192.60
D36 192.50
D37 192.40
D38 192.30
D39 192.20
D40 192.10
D40
NOTE
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 17-22 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1611
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-22 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces

Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the

signals to be demultiplexed.
D01-D40
LC
Transmit demultiplexed signals to the connected "IN"

interface of the OTUs.
MON
LC
Connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8

or OPM8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical
spectrum.
signal at the IN port (10 dB lower than the actual signal
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 output interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 17-23 and Table 17-24 show the
mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the D40 board.
Table 17-23 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4001
board (C_EVEN)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01
196.00
1529.55
D21
194.00
1545.32
D02
195.90
1530.33
D22
193.90
1546.12
D03
195.80
1531.12
D23
193.80
1546.92
D04
195.70
1531.90
D24
193.70
1547.72
D05
195.60
1532.68
D25
193.60
1548.51
D06
195.50
1533.47
D26
193.50
1549.32
D07
195.40
1534.25
D27
193.40
1550.12
D08
195.30
1535.04
D28
193.30
1550.92
D09
195.20
1535.82
D29
193.20
1551.72
D10
195.10
1536.61
D30
193.10
1552.52
D11
195.00
1537.40
D31
193.00
1553.33
D12
194.90
1538.19
D32
192.90
1554.13
D13
194.80
1538.98
D33
192.80
1554.94
D14
194.70
1539.77
D34
192.70
1555.75
D15
194.60
1540.56
D35
192.60
1556.55

1612
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D16
194.50
1541.35
D36
192.50
1557.36
D17
194.40
1542.14
D37
192.40
1558.17
D18
194.30
1542.94
D38
192.30
1558.98
D19
194.20
1543.73
D39
192.20
1559.79
D20
194.10
1544.53
D40
192.10
1560.61
Table 17-24 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4002
board (C_ODD)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01
196.05
1529.16
D21
194.05
1544.92
D02
195.95
1529.94
D22
193.95
1545.72
D03
195.85
1530.72
D23
193.85
1546.52
D04
195.75
1531.51
D24
193.75
1547.32
D05
195.65
1532.29
D25
193.65
1548.11
D06
195.55
1533.07
D26
193.55
1548.91
D07
195.45
1533.86
D27
193.45
1549.72
D08
195.35
1534.64
D28
193.35
1550.52
D09
195.25
1535.43
D29
193.25
1551.32
D10
195.15
1536.22
D30
193.15
1552.12
D11
195.05
1537.00
D31
193.05
1552.93
D12
194.95
1537.79
D32
192.95
1553.73
D13
194.85
1538.58
D33
192.85
1554.54
D14
194.75
1539.37
D34
192.75
1555.34
D15
194.65
1540.16
D35
192.65
1556.15
D16
194.55
1540.95
D36
192.55
1556.96
D17
194.45
1541.75
D37
192.45
1557.77
D18
194.35
1542.54
D38
192.35
1558.58
D19
194.25
1543.33
D39
192.25
1559.39
D20
194.15
1544.13
D40
192.15
1560.20

1613
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Laser Hazard Level

17.3.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one TN11D40 board and two slots house one TN12D40 board.
Table 17-25 shows the valid slots for the TN11D40 board and Table 17-26 shows the valid slots
for the TN12D40 board.
Table 17-25 Valid slots for the TN11D40 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
Therefore, the slot number of the TN11D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
leftmost one of the three occupied slots.
For example, if the TN11D40 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the TN11D40
Table 17-26 Valid slots for the TN12D40 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
Therefore, the slot number of the TN12D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12D40 board, the slot number of the TN12D40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1614
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40

The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
Table 17-27 Characteristic code for the D40
Code
Meaning
Description
The first character
Band

The second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.


Table 17-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
D01-D40
2-41
MON
42

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1615
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For D40 parameters, refer to Table 17-29.

Table 17-29 D40 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)
The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)

parameter queries the threshold value of the
input optical power, which can trigger a board
to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS)
alarm. When the actual input optical power is
lower than this threshold value, the board
reports the MUT_LOS alarm.
See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold
(dBm) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Configure Band
C
Default: C
Used to configure type of the working band of

a board.
Actual Band
Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: /
17.3.10 Specifications of the D40

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Table 17-30 lists the optical specifications of the D40.
Table 17-30 Optical specifications of the D40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100
Insertion loss
dB
6.5
Reflectance
dB
< -40

1616
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
dB
> 25
dB
> 25
dB
0.5
Temperature characteristics
nm/C
< 0.002
dB
-1 dB bandwidth
nm
0.2
-20 dB bandwidth
nm
< 1.4
l

TN11D40: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
TN12D40: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11D40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.)
TN12D40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11D40
10.0
13.0
TN12D40
10.0
13.0
17.4 D40V
D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA

The available functional version of the D40V board is TN11.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1617
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
D40V
Type
Unit
Type
Description
TN11D40V
01
Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
02
Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
17.4.2 Application
As a type of optical demultiplexing unit, the D40V demultiplexes one channel of signals into a
maximum of 40 channels of signals that comply with the related ITU-T Recommendations and
adjusts the output optical power of each channel.
For the position of the D40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-13.
Figure 17-13 Position of the D40V board in the WDM system
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
M40
OA
OA
D40V
40
40
1
D40V
OA
OA
M40
40
40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

The D40V board is mainly used to demultiplex signals, to monitor performance of optical
signals, to monitor alarms and performance events, and to adjust optical power.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1618
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-31 Functions and features of the D40V board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Demultiplexes one channel of signals into a maximum of 40 channels

of signals and adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Adjusts the optical power of each channel of signals after

demultiplexing.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The D40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
Figure 17-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1619
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board
Splitter
Optical module
Demultiplexer
VOA
VOA
IN
VOA
D01
D02
D40
MON
Temperature
detection
PIN
Temperature VOA
control
control
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals
to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical
signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the
D01-D40 optical interfaces after the optical power adjustment by VOA.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals.
Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals after demultiplexing.

Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1620
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

17.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on front panel of the D40V board.

Figure 17-15 shows front panel of the D40V board.
Figure 17-15 Front panel of the D40V board
D40V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D01 196.00
D02 195.90
D03 195.80
D04 195.70
D05 195.60
D06 195.50
D07 195.40
D08 195.30
D09 195.20
D10 195.10
D11 195.00
D12 194.90
D13 194.80
D14 194.70
D15 194.60
D16 194.50
D17 194.40
D18 194.30
D19 194.20
D20 194.10
D21 194.00
D22 193.90
D23 193.80
D24 193.70
D25 193.60
D26 193.50
D27 193.40
D28 193.30
D29 193.20
D30 193.10
D31 193.00
D32 192.90
D33 192.80
D34 192.70
D35 192.60
D36 192.50
D37 192.40
D38 192.30
D39 192.20
D40 192.10
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D26
D40
D12
D25
D11
D24
D10
D23
D09
D22
D08
D21
D07
D20
D06
D19
D05
D18
D04
D17
D03
D16
D02
D15
D01
D14
IN
D13
MON
D40V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1621
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on front panel of the D40V board. Table 17-32 lists the type and
Table 17-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the D40V board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Receives signals to be demultiplexed when connected

to an optical amplifier or ITL.
D01-D40
LC
Transmits demultiplexed signals when connected to the

"IN" interface of the OTUs.
MON
LC

MCA8 or OPM8 board.
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 output interfaces on front panel of the D40V board. Table 17-33 and Table
17-34 show the mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
D40V board.
Table 17-33 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
TN11D40V01 board (C_EVEN)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01
196.00
1529.55
D21
194.00
1545.32
D02
195.90
1530.33
D22
193.90
1546.12

1622
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D03
195.80
1531.12
D23
193.80
1546.92
D04
195.70
1531.90
D24
193.70
1547.72
D05
195.60
1532.68
D25
193.60
1548.51
D06
195.50
1533.47
D26
193.50
1549.32
D07
195.40
1534.25
D27
193.40
1550.12
D08
195.30
1535.04
D28
193.30
1550.92
D09
195.20
1535.82
D29
193.20
1551.72
D10
195.10
1536.61
D30
193.10
1552.52
D11
195.00
1537.40
D31
193.00
1553.33
D12
194.90
1538.19
D32
192.90
1554.13
D13
194.80
1538.98
D33
192.80
1554.94
D14
194.70
1539.77
D34
192.70
1555.75
D15
194.60
1540.56
D35
192.60
1556.55
D16
194.50
1541.35
D36
192.50
1557.36
D17
194.40
1542.14
D37
192.40
1558.17
D18
194.30
1542.94
D38
192.30
1558.98
D19
194.20
1543.73
D39
192.20
1559.79
D20
194.10
1544.53
D40
192.10
1560.61
Table 17-34 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
TN11D40V02 board (C_ODD)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01
196.05
1529.16
D21
194.05
1544.92
D02
195.95
1529.94
D22
193.95
1545.72
D03
195.85
1530.72
D23
193.85
1546.52
D04
195.75
1531.51
D24
193.75
1547.32
D05
195.65
1532.29
D25
193.65
1548.11
D06
195.55
1533.07
D26
193.55
1548.91
D07
195.45
1533.86
D27
193.45
1549.72

1623
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D08
195.35
1534.64
D28
193.35
1550.52
D09
195.25
1535.43
D29
193.25
1551.32
D10
195.15
1536.22
D30
193.15
1552.12
D11
195.05
1537.00
D31
193.05
1552.93
D12
194.95
1537.79
D32
192.95
1553.73
D13
194.85
1538.58
D33
192.85
1554.54
D14
194.75
1539.37
D34
192.75
1555.34
D15
194.65
1540.16
D35
192.65
1556.15
D16
194.55
1540.95
D36
192.55
1556.96
D17
194.45
1541.75
D37
192.45
1557.77
D18
194.35
1542.54
D38
192.35
1558.58
D19
194.25
1543.33
D39
192.25
1559.39
D20
194.15
1544.13
D40
192.15
1560.20
Laser Hazard Level

17.4.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one D40V board.
Table 17-35 shows the valid slots for the D40V board.
Table 17-35 Valid slots for the D40V board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU25, and IU29IU34
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15

1624
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Therefore, the slot number of the D40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost
one of the three slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the D40V board, the slot number of the D40 board
17.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V

The characteristic code for the D40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
Table 17-36 Characteristic code for the D40V board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.


Table 17-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40V board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
IN
D01-D40
2-41
1625
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
MON
42

For D40V parameters, refer to Table 17-38.
Table 17-38 D40V parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)

to generate an optical power loss
(MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input
optical power is lower than this threshold
value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

queries the maximum attenuation rate
allowed by the current optical interface of a
board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1626
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: /
17.4.10 Specifications of the D40V

Table 17-39 lists the optical specifications of the D40V board.
Table 17-39 Optical specifications of the D40V board
Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100
Insertion loss
dB
8a
Reflectance
dB
< -40
nm
1529-1561
dB
> 25
dB
> 30
Attenuation range
dB
0-15
Loss accuracy
dB
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
dB
0.5
dB
3a

1627
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
NOTE
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
D40V
20.0
24.95
17.5 DFIU
DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board

The available functional version of the DFIU board is TN21.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN21
DFIU
17.5.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the DFIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes the signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory
channel.
For the position of the DFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1628
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-16 Position of the DFIU board in the WDM system
OA
DFIU
SC2
DFIU
OA
NOTE
The DFIU board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DFIU boards actually
refer to one physical board.

The DFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals.
Table 17-40 Functions and features of the DFIU board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals in two directions transmitted

along the main path and optical supervisory channel.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The DFIU board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 17-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1629
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board
Optical module
ERC
ERM
Multiplexer
EOUT
ETC
ETM
Demultiplexer
EIN
WRC
WRM
Multiplexer
WOUT
WTC
WTM
Demultiplexer
WN
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Signal Flow
l
The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the WRC
optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the WRM optical
interface into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output
through the WOUT optical interface.
The WIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the
demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path
optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the WTC
and WTM optical interfaces
The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the ERC optical
interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the ERM optical interface
into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output through the
EOUT optical interface.
The EIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the
optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the ETC
and ETM optical interfaces
Module Function
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical module
1630
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing of main path signals and supervisory channel
signals.
l

Power supply module

17.5.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the DFIU board.

Figure 17-18 shows the front panel of the DFIU board.
Figure 17-18 Front panel of the DFIU board
ETM ERM
ETC ERC
EIN EOUT WTMWRM
WTC WRC
WIN WOUT
DFIU
Interfaces
There are twelve optical interfaces on the front panel of the DFIU board. Table 17-41 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1631
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-41 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DFIU board
Interface
Type
Function
WIN
LC
Receives the west line signal.
WOUT
LC
Transmits the west line signal.
WTC
LC
Transmits the west main path signal.
WRC
LC
Receives the west main path signal.
WTM
LC
Transmits the west optical supervisory channel signal.
WRM
LC
Receives the west optical supervisory channel signal.
EIN
LC
Receives the east line signal.
EOUT
LC
Transmits the east line signal.
ETC
LC
Transmits the east main path signal.
ERC
LC
Receives the east main path signal.
ETM
LC
Transmits the east optical supervisory channel signal.
ERM
LC
Receives the east optical supervisory channel signal.
Laser Hazard Level

17.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DFIU board.
Table 17-42 shows the valid slots for the DFIU board.
Table 17-42 Valid slots for DFIU board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, IU11
17.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU

The characteristic code for the DFIU board contains one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1632
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-43 Characteristic code for the DFIU board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

solution adopted by the
board. The value C represents
C band; the value L
represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical
signals are in C band.


Table 17-44 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DFIU board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
WIN/WOUT
WRM/WTM
WRC/WTC
EIN/EOUT
ERM/ETM
ERC/ETC
NOTE

For DFIU parameters, refer to Table 17-45.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1633
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-45 DFIU parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40

Mode, CWDM
Mode
Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the

DFIU board.
Default: C80
Mode
Actual Working
Band Parity
Queries the parity of the actual working band of the

board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
PMD Coefficient
(ps/SQRT(km))
0-1
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
-15 - 30
Default: /
Default: 0.05
Default: 0
This parameter is available only in the ASON

system. Set the parameter according to the fiber
type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber.
17.5.10 Specifications of the DFIU

Table 17-46 Optical specifications of the DFIU board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561

1634
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Item
Unit
Value
range of optical
supervisory channel
nm
1500-1520
Optical return loss
dB
> 40
EIN-ETM
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
Insertion loss
dB
Isolation
dB
> 40
Isolation
dB
> 12
Polarization dependent
loss
dB
< 0.2
ERM-EOUT
WIN-WTM
WRM-WOUT
EIN-ETC
ERC-EOUT
WIN-WTC
WRC-WOUT
EIN-ETM
WIN-WTM
EIN-ETC
WIN-WTC
l
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in.
(D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21DFIU
0.2
0.3
17.6 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit

The available functional versions of the FIU board are TN11, TN12, TN13, and TN21.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1635
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
FIU
TN12
FIU
TN13
FIU
Ya
TN21
FIU
a: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01.

l
Function:
The TN13FIU02 board supports high power input and works with the HBA board. The
other versions of the FIU board do not support high power input. For details, see 17.6.2
Application.
The TN11FIU and TN12FIU boards support reporting of input optical power, but the
TN13FIU and TN21FIU boards do not. For details, see 17.6.4 Working Principle and
Signal Flow.
Appearance:
The TN11 and TN12 versions use the same front panel. The TN13 version uses a
different front panel from the preceding versions. The TN21 version uses a different
front panel from the preceding versions and is applicable to case-shaped equipment. For
details, see 17.6.5 Front Panel and 17.6.10 Specifications of the FIU.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11FIU
TN12FIU
l Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800

V100R004C01 or a later version.

1636
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN12FIU
TN13FIU
l When the ASON function is not required. upgrade the NE

software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later
version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800
l When the ASON function is required, upgrade the NE
software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C03 or a later
TN13FIU
None
TN21FIU
None
17.6.2 Application
As an optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the FIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel.
For the position of the FIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-19 and Figure 17-20.
Figure 17-19 Position of the FIU board in the WDM system (normal optical power)
OTU
OTU
MUX
OA
OA
FIU
SC1
OTU
OTU
DMUX
FIU
DMUX
OTU
OTU
SC1
OA
OA
MUX
OTU
OTU
Figure 17-20 Position of the TN13FIU02 board in the WDM system (high optical power)
OTU
OTU
MUX
HBA
SC1
OTU
OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
DMUX
HBA
FIU
FIU
HBA

DMUX
OTU
OTU
SC1
HBA
MUX
OTU
OTU
1637
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The FIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals, and monitors performance of optical
signals.
Table 17-47 Functions and features of the FIU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main

path and optical supervisory channel.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Optical-layer ASON
Supported by the TN12FIU, TN13FIU and TN21FIU.

The FIU board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and
Figure 17-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board and the
TN12FIU board. Figure 17-22 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU
board and the TN21FIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1638
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board and the TN12FIU
board
Optical module
RC
RM
Splitter
Multiplexer
OUT
MON
TC
TM
Demultiplexer
IN
PIN
Optical power detection module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
1639
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-22 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board and the TN21FIU
board
Optical module
RC
RM
Splitter
Multiplexer
OUT
MON
TC
TM
Demultiplexer
IN
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
l
The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the RC optical
interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the RM optical interface
into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the multiplexed signals through the
OUT optical interface.
The IN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the
optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the TC and
TM optical interfaces
Module Function
l
Optical module
Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path signals and supervisory channel signals.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the line optical signals and sends the signals
to the MON interface for detection.

NOTE
Only the TN11FIU and TN12FIU support the input optical power detection.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1640
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

17.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the FIU board.

Figure 17-23 shows the front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIUboard. Figure 17-24 and Figure
17-25 show the front panel of the TN13FIU board. Figure 17-26 shows the front panel of the
TN21FIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1641
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-23 Front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU board
FIU
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
TC
RC
TM
RM
FIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1642
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-24 Front panel of the TN13FIU01 board
FIU
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
TC
RC
TM
RM
FIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1643
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-25 Front panel of the TN13FIU02 board
FIU
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
TM
RM
IN
TC
RC
OUT
FIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1644
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-26 Front panel of the TN21FIU board
TM
RM
TC
RC
IN
OUT
MON
FIU
Indicators
The TN11FIU board has four indicators on the front panel.
l
The TN12FIU board has four indicators on the front panel.

l
The TN13FIU board has one indicator on the front panel. The TN21FIU board has no indicator
on the front panel.
l
Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU board. Table 17-48 lists the type
Table 17-48 Types and functions of the interfaces on the FIU board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LCa

1645
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
TC
LC
Transmits the main path signal.
RC
LCa
Receives the main path signal.
TM
LC
Transmits the 1510 nm optical supervisory

channel signal.
RM
LC
Receives the 1510 nm optical supervisory

channel signal.
MON
LC
Accomplishes online monitoring of optical

spectrum when it is connected to the input
interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board.
The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total
composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower
than the actual signal power, calculation
formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg
(99/1) = 10 dB).
a: the interface type of the "RC" and "OUT" of the TN13FIU02 are "LSH/APC".
Laser Hazard Level

NOTE
TN13FIU02: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL
1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10
mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
17.6.6 Valid Slots

One slots house one FIU board.
Table 17-49 shows the valid slots for the TN11FIU board.
Table 17-49 Valid slots for the TN11FIU board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1646
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2IU5, IU11
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, IU11
17.6.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU

The characteristic code for the FIU board consists of one character. The character indicates the
band adopted by the board.
Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-53.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1647
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-53 Characteristic code for the FIU board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band; the value L
represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in
C band.


Table 17-54 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
RM/TM
RC/TC
MON
NOTE

For FIU parameters, refer to Table 17-55.
Table 17-55 FIU parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel

1648
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Name
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)

parameter queries the threshold value of the input
optical power, which can trigger a board to
generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm.
When the actual input optical power is lower than
this threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
NOTE
This parameter is supported only by TN11FIU and
TN12FIU .
See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)

Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40

Mode, CWDM
Mode

FIU board.
Default: C80
Mode
Actual Working
Band Parity

board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
PMD Coefficient
(ps/SQRT(km))
0-1
Fiber Type
G652 Fiber, G653

Fiber, LEAF
Fiber, TWRS
Fiber, TWC Fiber,
TWPLUS Fiber,
SMFLS Fiber,
G654B Fiber
Default: /
Default: 0.05

Specifies the type of a fiber.
Default: G652
Fiber
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
-15 - 30
Default: 0


1649
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Send DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
0.0 - 6553.5
Specifies the dispersion compensation value for

the DCM at the transmit end.
Receive DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
0.0 - 6553.5
Default: 0
Default: 0
Specifies the dispersion compensation value for

the DCM at the receive end.
17.6.10 Specifications of the FIU

Table 17-56 Optical specifications of the FIU board
Interface
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561
range of optical
supervisory channel
nm
1500-1520
Optical return loss
dB
> 40
IN-TM
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
Insertion loss
dB
IN-TM
Isolation
dB
> 40
IN-TC
Isolation
dB
> 12
Polarization dependent
loss
dB
< 0.2
RM-OUT
IN-TC
RC-OUT
TN11/TN12/TN13FIU:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
1650
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN21FIU:
l
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220.0 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11/TN12FIU
4.2
4.6
TN13/TN21FIU
0.2
0.3
17.7 ITL
ITL: interleaver board

The available functional versions of the ITL board are TN11 and TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
ITL
TN12
ITL
Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Type
Description
TN11ITL
01
The optical module of the ITL01 board consists of one

interleaver and one coupler. The interleaver is used for
demultiplexing, and the coupler is used for multiplexing.

1651
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit
Type
Description
04
The optical module of the ITL04 board consists of two

interleavers. The interleaver is used for both demultiplexing
and multiplexing.

l
Function:
The optical module on the TN11ITL04 board consists of two interleavers which are
used to multiplex/demultiplex optical signals. This board is mainly used in a system in
which the rate of a single wavelength is 40 Gbit/s. The optical module on the ITL board
of other versions consists of an interleaver and a coupler. The interleaver is used to
demultiplex optical signals, and the coupler is used to multiplex optical signals. For
details, see 17.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.
The TN12ITL board supports the VOA modea, but the ITL board of other versions does
not. For details, see 17.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS.
Appearance:
The TN11 and TN12 versions use different front panels. For details, see 17.7.5 Front
Panel.
Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 17.7.10 Specifications
of the ITL.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11ITL
TN12ITL
Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01

or a later version or update the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800
V100R002C00 or later version.
TN12ITL
TN11ITL
The TN11ITL board can replace the TN12ITL board only in

one application scenario: multiplexing/demultiplexing
between the signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the
signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz.
17.7.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the ITL board implements
multiplexing/demultiplexing between the optical signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and
the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz. The TN11ITL04 board is mainly used in systems
where the bit rate of a single wavelength is 40 Gbit/s.
For the position of the ITL board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-27.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1652
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-27 Position of the ITL board in the WDM system

OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
C_ODD
C_ODD
M40
40
1
OA
C_EVEN
WMU
40
ITL
1
D40
40
1
D40
40
1
OA
C_EVEN
M40
D40
40
1
ITL
C_ODD
WMU
OA
C_ODD
M40
OA
C_EVEN
D40
C_EVEN
40
40
1
M40
40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
NOTE
The WMU board must be used when the 10G OTU with fixed wavelengths is used in the system. In other
cases, the WMU board is optional.

The ITL board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals, and to detect online optical
spectrum.
Table 17-57 Functions and features of the ITL board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes/demultiplexes optical signals between C_ODD signals

and C_EVEN signals.
Detection and
monitoring of the
online spectrum

Optical-layer ASON
Supported by TN11ITL.

The ITL board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 17-28 and Figure 17-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ITL board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1653
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL01/TN12ITL board
Optical module
TO
TE
Interleaver
RO
RE
IN
Splitter
Coupler
OUT
MON
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Figure 17-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL04 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1654
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
TN11ITL01:
l
The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the
interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then,
the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces
respectively.
The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is
output through the OUT optical interface.
TN11ITL04:
l
interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then,
the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces
respectively.
The interleaver multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
TN12ITL:
l
interleaver. Then according to the requirement, get the signals all passed through the TE
interface or split the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the
two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces
respectively.
The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
Module Function
l
Optical module
Performs the transformation between C band optical signals in 100 GHz spacing and C
band optical signals in 50 GHz spacing.

Power supply module

17.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ITL board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1655
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Figure 17-30 and Figure 17-31 show the front panel of the ITL board.
Figure 17-30 Front panel of the TN11ITL board
ITL
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
TO
RO
TE
RE
ITL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1656
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-31 Front panel of the TN12ITL board
ITL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
TO
RO
TE
RE
ITL
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of TN11ITL board.
l
There are four indicators on the front panel of TN12ITL board.

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1657
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the front panel of the ITL board. Table 17-58 lists the type
Table 17-58 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ITL board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing

OUT
LC

TE
LC

(C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
RE
LC

spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
TO
LC

(C_ODD multiplexed signals).
RO
LC

spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals).
MON
LC
Connects to the input port on the MCA4, MCA8 or

OPM8 board so that the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board
can detect the optical spectrum in service.
The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the
optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical
power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the
optical power at the OUT interface, calculation
formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (90/10)
= 10 dB.
Laser Hazard Level

17.7.6 Valid Slots

One slots house one ITL board.
Table 17-59 shows the valid slots for the ITL board.
Table 17-59 Valid slots for the ITL board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

1658
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
TN11ITL: IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36

TN12ITL: IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
17.7.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL

The characteristic code for the ITL board contains one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
Table 17-60 Characteristic code for the ITL board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band.
For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals
are in C band.


Table 17-61 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
RE/TE
RO/TO
MON

1659
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE

For ITL parameters, refer to Table 17-62.
Table 17-62 ITL parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Board Mode
ITL Mode, VOA

Mode
Sets the working mode of a board.
Default: ITL Mode
l ITL Mode: Split the multiplexed optical

signals received through the IN optical
interface into two channels of signals in equal
spacing. Then, the two channels of optical
signals are output through the TO and TE
optical interfaces respectively.
l VOA Mode: The multiplexed optical signals
received through the IN optical interface all
passed through the TE interface.
NOTE
VOA Mode can be configured only when the
services are less than 40 channels.
NOTE
Only for TN12ITL.
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Actual Working
Band Parity
Queries the parity of the actual working band of

the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: /
17.7.10 Specifications of the ITL

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1660
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-63 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL01
Item
Unit
Value
Input channel spacinga
GHz
100
Output channel spacinga
GHz
50
Insertion loss
RE-OUT
dB
< 4.5
dB
< 2.5
dB
<1
Isolation
dB
> 25
RO-OUT
IN-TE
IN-TO
IN-TE
IN-TO
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Directivity
dB
> 45
PMD
ps
< 0.5
dB
< 0.5
dBm
26
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.
Table 17-64 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL04

Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100
GHz
50
Insertion loss
RE-OUT
dB
<3
dB
<3
dB
<1
Isolation
dB
> 25
dB
-40
RO-OUT
IN-TE
IN-TO
IN-TE
IN-TO
Maximum reflectance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1661
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Directivity
dB
> 45
PMD
ps
< 0.5
dB
< 0.5
dBm
26
Table 17-65 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL

Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100
GHz
50
Insertion loss
RE-OUT
dB
< 4.5
dB
< 3.5
dB
<1
Isolation
dB
> 22
RO-OUT
IN-TE
IN-TO
IN-TE
IN-TO
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Directivity
dB
> 45
PMD
ps
< 0.5
dB
< 0.5
dBm
23
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1662
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
The typical power

consumption at 25C (77
F) (W)
The maximum power

consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11ITL
0.2
0.3
TN12ITL
10.0
11.5
17.8 SFIU
SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing

Only one functional version of the SFIU board is available, that is, TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
SFIU
17.8.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the SFIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel
(OSC).
For the position of the SFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-32.
Figure 17-32 Position of the SFIU board in the WDM system
OA
SYS1
ST2
OSC1
OA
NE1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
LINE1
SYS1
SYS1
LINE1
LINE1
SYS1
OA
OSC2
SCC
LINE1
SYS2
S
F
I
U
S
F
I
U
LINE2
LINE2
OSC2
ST2
OA
OSC2
OSC1
OSC1
SCC
SYS2
OA
SYS2
S
F
I
U
S
F
I
U
LINE2
NE2

LINE2
OSC2
ST2
SCC
OSC1
SYS2
OA
NE3
1663
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Of all the OSC boards, only the ST2 board can work with the SFIU board.
A Raman board cannot be configured between two NEs that are interconnected through SFIU boards.

The SFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals.
Table 17-66 Functions and features of the SFIU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main

Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The SFIU board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 17-33 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11SFIU board.
Figure 17-33 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11SFIU board
SYS1
LINE1
OSC1
Optical module
OSC2
LINE2
SYS2
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
SCC

1664
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
The LINE1 optical interface receives or transmits the OSC signals and the signals of the main
optical path. However, it cannot receive the OSC signals and the signals of the main optical path
and transmit OSC signals and the signals of the main optical path at the same time.
The SYS1, SYS2, and LINE2 optical interface receive or transmit the signals of the main optical
path. However, each port cannot receive the signals of the main optical path and transmit the
signals of the main optical path at the same time.
The OSC1 and OSC2 optical interfaces can receive or transmit the OSC signals. One optical
interface, however, cannot receive the OSC signals and transmit OSC signals at the same time.
That is, if the OSC1 or OSC2 optical interface is used to receive the OSC signals, the other
optical interface must be used to transmit OSC signals.
The following describes the signal flow of the SFIU when the OSC1 optical interface receives
the OSC signals and the OSC2 optical interface transmits OSC signals.
l
The OSC signals received through the OSC1 optical interface is output through the LINE1
optical interface.
The OSC signals received through the LINE1 optical interface are output through the OSC2
optical interface. And the signals of the main optical path received through the LINE1
optical interface are output through the SYS1 optical interface.
The signals in the main optical path received through the SYS2 optical interface are output
through the LINE2 optical interface.
The following describes the signal flow of the SFIU when the OSC2 optical interface receives
the OSC signals and the OSC1 optical interface transmits OSC signals.
l
The OSC signals received through the LINE1 optical interface are output through the OSC1
optical interface.
The optical module multiplexes the signals of the main optical path received through the
SYS1 optical interface and the OSC signals received through the OSC2 optical interface
into one channel of optical signals. Then, the one channel of optical signals is output through
the LINE1 optical interface.
The signals in the main optical path received through the LINE2 optical interface are output
through the SYS2 optical interface.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path signals and supervisory channel signals.

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

1665
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the SFIU board.

Figure 17-34 shows the front panel of the TN11SFIU board.
Figure 17-34 Front panel of the TN11SFIU board
SFIU
STAT
CAUTION
HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE
LASERRADIATION
DO NOTVIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
LINE1
LINE2
SYS1
SYS2
OSC1
OSC2
SFIU
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1666
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the SFIU board. Table 17-67 lists the type
Table 17-67 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SFIU board
Interface
Type
Function
LINE1
LC
The LINE1 optical interface is located on the

line side. It sends and receives OSC signals in
addition to transmitting main optical path
signals.
LINE2
LC
The LINE2 optical interface is located on the

line side. It transmits the signals of the main
optical path.
SYS1
LC
The SYS1 optical interface transmits the

signals in the main optical path.
SYS2
LC
The SYS2 optical interface transmits the

signals in the main optical path.
OSC1
LC
The OSC1 optical interface transmits the OSC

signals.
OSC2
LC
The OSC2 optical interface transmits the OSC

signals.
Laser Hazard Level

17.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SFIU board.
Table 17-68 shows the valid slots for the SFIU board.
Table 17-68 Valid slots for the SFIU board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, IU11

1667
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17.8.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU

The characteristic code for the SFIU board consists of one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
Table 17-69 Characteristic code for the SFIU board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band; the value L
represents L band.
C band.


Table 17-70 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFIU board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
LINE1/LINE2
OSC1/OSC2
SYS1/SYS2
NOTE
17.8.9 SFIU Parameters

For SFIU parameters, refer to Table 17-71.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1668
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-71 SFIU parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)

parameter queries the threshold value of the input
optical power, which can trigger a board to
generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm.
When the actual input optical power is lower than
this threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40

Mode, CWDM
Mode

board.
Default: C80
Mode
Actual Working
Band Parity

board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
PMD Coefficient
(ps/SQRT(km))
0-1
Fiber Type
G651 Fiber, G652

Fiber, G655 Fiber
Default: All
Default: 0.05

Sets the fiber type of the board.
Default: /
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
-15 - 30
Send DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
Default: 0

Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of
the transmitting direction.

1669
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Receiving DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of

the receiving direction.
17.8.10 Specifications of the SFIU

Table 17-72 Optical specifications of the SFIU board
Interface
Item
Uni
t
Value
Operating wavelength range (C band)
nm
1528-1561
Operating wavelength range of optical

supervisory channel
nm
1480 to 1520
LINE1SYS1
Insertion loss
dB
1.0
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
LINE1OSC1 @c
Isolation
dB
65
LINE1OSC2 @c
Isolation
dB
40
OSC1SYS1
Directivity
dB
45
Directivity
dB
55
Optical return loss
dB
> 40
LINE2SYS2
LINE1OSC1
LINE1OSC2
SYS1OSC1
OSC1OSC2
OSC2OSC1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1670
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Item
Polarization
dependent loss
Uni
t
Value
C band
dB
< 0.1
OSC channel
dB
< 0.15
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F)(W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)(W)
TN11SFIU
0.2
0.3

1671
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

18
18 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
About This Chapter

18.1 CMR1
CMR1: CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
18.2 CMR2
18.3 CMR4
18.4 DMR1
DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board
18.5 MR2
MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
18.6 MR4
18.7 MR8
18.8 MR8V
MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA
18.9 SBM2
SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1672
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

18.1 CMR1

The available functional version of the CMR1 board is TN21.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN21
CMR
1
18.1.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes
one channel of signals.
For the position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-1.
Figure 18-1 Position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system
Client side
Client side
OTU
OTU
CMR1
CMR1

The CMR1 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to
provide a cascading interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1673
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-1 Functions and features of the CMR1

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/Drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the

multiplexed signals.
WDM specification
Supports the CWDM specification.
Cascade interface
Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop

multiplexing board to achieve expansion.
Wavelength query
Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The CMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
Figure 18-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board.
Figure 18-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board
MO
IN
MI
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical module

Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
1674
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical
module separates one wavelength from the signals and this wavelength is transmitted to the OTU
board or integrated client-side equipment through the D interface. The remaining wavelengths
are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed
with one wavelength added through the A interface by the add optical module. Then, the
multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals.
Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

Power supply module

18.1.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the CMR1 board.

Figure 18-3 shows the front panel of the CMR1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1675
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-3 Front panel of the CMR1 board
IN
D
MO
MI
A
OUT
CMR1
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR1 board. Table 18-2 lists the type
Table 18-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR1 board
Interface
Type
Function
LC
Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the

integrated client-side equipment.
LC
Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated

client-side equipment.
IN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signals.
OUT
LC
Transmits the multiplexed signals.
MI
LC
Cascading input interface, connected to the output

interface of another OADM board.
MO
LC
Cascading output interface, connected to the input

Laser Hazard Level

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1676
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

18.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses on CMR1 board.
Table 18-3 shows the valid slots for the CMR1 board.
Table 18-3 Valid slots for CMR1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11
18.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1

The characteristic code for the CMR1 board contains four digits, indicating the wavelength that
carries the signals processed by the board.
Table 18-4 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1.
Table 18-4 Characteristic code for the CMR1
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Wavelength that carries

optical signals
Indicates the wavelength that

carries the optical signals
processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength
that carries the signals is 1471 nm.


Table 18-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR1 displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
A/D
MI/MO
IN/OUT

1677
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE

For CMR1 parameters, refer to Table 18-6.
Table 18-6 CMR1 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.
Actual Wavelength No./

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )
Queries the operating wavelength at

board.
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default:/
Sets the operating wavelength at the

WDM-side optical interface of a
board.
Configure Band Type
CWDM
Sets the band type.
Default: CWDM
18.1.10 Specifications of the CMR1

Table 18-7 lists the optical specifications of the CMR1 board.
Table 18-7 Optical specifications of the CMR1 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Correspondi
ng interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1260-1360
IN-D
Drop channel insertion loss
dB
Isolation
dB
> 40

1678
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Correspondi
ng interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
A-OUT
Add channel insertion loss
dB
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
0.8
Isolation
dB
25
Reflectance
dB
< -40
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The CMR1 adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
l
in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21CMR1
0.2
0.3
18.2 CMR2

The available functional versions of the CMR2 board are TN11 and TN21.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1679
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
CMR
2
TN21
CMR
2

l
Appearance:
The TN11 and TN21 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See
18.2.5 Front Panel and 18.2.10 Specifications of the CMR2.
Specification:
The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.2.10
Specifications of the CMR2.
The CMR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.2.2 Application
two channels of signals.
For the position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-4.
Figure 18-4 Position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system
Client side
OTU
OTU
CMR2
Client side
OTU
OTU
CMR2

The CMR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of signals, to query
wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1680
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-8 Functions and features of the CMR2 board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/Drops and multiplexes two channels of signals to/from the

WDM specification
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

D1
IN
D2
MO
MI
Drop optical
module
A1
A2
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
1681
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The
remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths.

Power supply module

18.2.5 Front Panel

There are one indicator and eight interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2 board.

Figure 18-6 shows the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board.
Figure 18-7 shows the front panel of the TN21CMR2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1682
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-6 Front panel of the TN11CMR2 board
CMR2
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2
A2
CMR2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1683
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IN
D1
D2
MO
MI
A2
A1 OUT
CMR2
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21CMR2 board.
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2 board. Table 18-9 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Type
Function
A1-A2
LC

D1-D2
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MI
LC


1684
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
MO
LC

Laser Hazard Level

18.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one CMR2 board.
Table 18-10 shows the valid slots for the TN11CMR2 board.
Table 18-10 Slots for the TN11CMR2
Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11

The characteristic code for the CMR2 board contains eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths
that carry the signals processed by the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1685
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-12 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
First wavelength that carries

optical signals
Indicates the first wavelength

that carries the optical signals
Last four digits
Second wavelength that

carries optical signals
Indicates the second

wavelength that carries the
the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571.

l
"1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm.
"1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.


Table 18-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
MI/MO
IN/OUT
NOTE

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1686
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /

board.
Configure Band Type
CWDM
Sets the band type.
Default: CWDM

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1271-1611
nm
20
IN-D1
IN-D2
0.5 dB spectral width
nm
6.5
Drop channel insertion

loss
dB
1.5
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
Non-adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 35

1687
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
nm
6.5
Add channel insertion

loss
dB
1.5
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
1.0
Isolation
dB
13
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1271 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR2 board to corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1271 nm OTU board and line board.

The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR2 are as follows.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR2 are as follows.

l
in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
CMR2
0.2
0.3
18.3 CMR4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1688
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The available functional versions of the CMR4 board are TN11 and TN21.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
CMR
4
TN21
CMR
4

l
Appearance:
The TN11 and TN21 versions have different front panels that have different dimensions.
See 18.3.5 Front Panel and 18.3.10 Specifications of the CMR4.
Specification:
The mechanical specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use.
For details, see 18.3.10 Specifications of the CMR4.
The CMR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.3.2 Application
four channels of signals.
For the position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-8.
Figure 18-8 Position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system
Client side
OTU
OTU
CMR4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Client side
OTU
OTU
CMR4

1689
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes signals, queries wavelengths, and provides a
cascading interface.
Table 18-16 Functions and features of the CMR4 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/Drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the

WDM specification
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1690
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D1
IN
D4
MO
MI
A1
Drop optical
module
A4
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical module

Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The
with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1691
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

18.3.5 Front Panel

There are one indicator and 12 interfaces on the front panel of CMR4 board.

Figure 18-10 show the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board.
Figure 18-11 show the front panel of the TN21CMR4 board.
CMR4
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
CMR4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1692
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IN
D1
D2
D3
D4
MO
MI
A4
A3
A2
A1
OUT
CMR4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21CMR4 board.
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR4 board. Table 18-17 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Type
Function
A1-A4
LC

D1-D4
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MI
LC


1693
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
MO
LC

Laser Hazard Level

18.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one CMR4 board.
Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11

The characteristic code for the CMR4 board contains eight digits, indicating the four
wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1694
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-20 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First and second digits

optical signals
Indicates the middle two

digits of the first wavelength
Third and fourth digits


digits of the second
the board.
Fifth and sixth digits
Third wavelength that carries

optical signals

digits of the third wavelength
Seventh and eighth digits
Fourth wavelength that


digits of the fourth
the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961.
l
"59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.
"61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.


Table 18-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
3
1695
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
A4/D4
MI/MO
IN/OUT
NOTE

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /

board.
Configure Band Type
CWDM
Sets the band type.
Default: CWDM

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1696
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1271-1611 (1371 nm excluded)
nm
20
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
nm
6.5

loss
dB
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
isolation
dB
> 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
nm
6.5

loss
dB
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
Isolation
dB
13
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1291 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR4 board to corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1291 nm OTU board and line board.
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are four wavelength groups.
Table 18-24 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths on the CMR4 board
Group
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
1291
1311
1331
1351
1391
1411
1431
1451
1471
1491
1591
1611
1511
1531
1551
1571

1697
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR4 board are as follows:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR4 board are as follows:

l
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
CMR4
0.2
0.3
18.4 DMR1
DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board

The available functional versions of the DMR1 board are TN11 and TN21.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
DMR
1
TN21
DMR
1

1698
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Appearance:
18.4.5 Front Panel and 18.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1.
Specification:
Specifications of the DMR1.
The DMR1 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.4.2 Application
The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west
directions.
For the position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-12.
Figure 18-12 Position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system
1310nm
OTU
OTU
WD
WIN
D
M
R
1
WOUT
WMO
1310nm
EA
O
A
D
M
O
A
D
M
EMI
D
M
R
EMO
1
WMI
WA
1310nm
EOUT
EIN
ED
1310nm
NOTE
The DMR1 board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DMR1 boards are
actually one physical board.
In the figure, the OADM boards are actually the CMR2 or CMR4 boards.
The OADM board in the figure supports wavelengths ranging from 1471 nm to 1611 nm.

The DMR1 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to concatenate ports, and to
query wavelengths.
Table 18-25 provides the detailed features and functions of the DMR1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1699
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-25 Functions and features of the DMR1 board

Functions and
Features
Description
Basic functions
Adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and

west directions.
WDM specification
Port concatenation

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The DMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
Figure 18-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board.
Figure 18-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board
WD ED
WMO EMO EMI WMI
EA WA
WIN
EIN
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
EOUT
WOUT
OADM optical module

Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
1700
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
WIN receives signals from the west main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals
from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through WD. The remaining signals
are connected to other OADM equipment through WMO. EIN receives signals from the east
main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals from the received signals. The
extracted signals are dropped through ED. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM
equipment through EMO.
Local 1310 nm signals are added through EA, and other signals are added through EMI. After
being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to east main path by EOUT.
Similarly, Local 1310 nm signals are added through WA, and other signals are added through
WMI. After being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to west main path
by WOUT.
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of 1310nm signals and other signals.

Power supply module

18.4.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the board.

Figure 18-14 shows the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board.
Figure 18-15 shows the front panel of the TN21DMR1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1701
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-14 Front panel of the TN11DMR1 board
DMR1
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
WOUT WIN
EOUT
EIN
WMO
WMI
EMO
EMI
WD
WA
ED
EA
DMR1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1702
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-15 Front panel of the TN21DMR1 board
WIN WD
WMO WMI
WA WOUT
EIN
ED
EMO EMI
EA EOUT
DMR1
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21DMR1 board.
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the DMR1 board. Table 18-26 lists the type and function of
each interface.
Table 18-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DMR1 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Type
Function
EA/WA
LC
Receives the 1310 nm optical signals that west and east

client-side equipment transmits.
ED/WD
LC
Transmits 1310 nm optical signals to west and east

EIN/WIN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signals on west and east main

paths.
EOUT/WOUT
LC
Transmits multiplexed signals to west and east main

paths.
EMI/WMI
LC
Serves as concatenation input optical interface. It

connects to the output interfaces on other boards.

1703
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
EMO/WMO
LC
Serves as concatenation output optical interface. It

connects to the input interfaces on other boards.
Laser Hazard Level

18.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DMR1 board.
Table 18-27 shows the valid slots for the TN11DMR1 board.
Table 18-28 shows the valid slots for the TN21DMR1 board.
Table 18-27 Slots for the TN11DMR1
Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 18-28 Slots for the TN21DMR1

Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11
18.4.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1

The characteristics code for the DMR1 board contains four digits, identifying the frequency of
the optical signals processed by the board.
Table 18-29 provides the details on the characteristics code.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1704
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-29 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board

Barcode
Meaning
Description
First to fourth digits
Optical signal frequency
Frequency of the optical

signals processed by the
board
For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that
the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.

Interface Display
Table 18-30 lists the number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the board.
Table 18-30 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board
Interface on Front Panel
Number on the NM
WA/WD
EA/ED
WMI/WMO
WIN/WOUT
EMI/EMO
EIN/EOUT
NOTE

For parameters of the DMR1, refer to Table 18-31.
Table 18-31 DMR1 parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

1705
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
Used to configure the operating

wavelength at the WDM-side optical
Configure Band Type
C+L
Used to configure the band type.
Default: C+L
18.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1

Table 18-32 Optical specifications of the DMR1 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
EA/ED/WA/
WD
range
nm
1260-1360
EIN-ED
WIN-WD

loss
dB
Isolation
dB
> 40
EA-EOUT
WA-WOUT

loss
dB
EIN-EMO
WIN-WMO
Insertion loss
dB
0.8
Isolation
dB
25
EMI-EOUT
WMI-WOUT
Insertion loss
dB
0.8
Isolation
dB
15
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40

1706
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The DMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west
directions from the multiplexed signals.
Mechanical specifications of the TN11DMR1 board:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Mechanical specifications of the TN21DMR1 board:

l
in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
DMR1
0.2
0.3
18.5 MR2

The available functional versions of the MR2 board are TN11 and TN21.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
MR2
TN21
MR2

1707
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Appearance:
18.5.5 Front Panel and 18.5.10 Specifications of the MR2.
Specification:
Specifications of the MR2.
The MR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.5.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes
two channels of signals.
For the position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-16.
Figure 18-16 Position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system
Client side
OTU
OTU
Client side
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
MR2
MR2
OA
OA

The MR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to
Table 18-33 Functions and features of the MR2 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from

the multiplexed signals.
WDM specification

1708
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The MR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and
power supply module.
Figure 18-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board.
Figure 18-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board
D1
IN
D2
MO
MI
Drop optical
module
A1
A2
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1709
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals.
Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so

Power supply module

18.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR2 board.

Figure 18-18 shows the front panel of the TN11MR2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1710
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-18 Front panel of the TN11MR2 board
MR2
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2
A2
MR2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1711
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IN
D1
D2
MO
MI
A2
A1 OUT
MR2
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR2 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21MR2 board.
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR2 board. Table 18-34 lists the type
Table 18-34 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR2 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Type
Function
A1-A2
LC

D1-D2
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MO
LC


1712
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
MI
LC

Laser Hazard Level

18.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one MR2 board.
Table 18-35 and Table 18-36 shows the valid slots for the MR2 board.
Table 18-35 Valid slots for the TN11MR2 board
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11
18.5.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2

The characteristic code for the MR2 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of
the two signals processed by the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1713
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-37 Characteristic code for the MR2 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits

signal
of the frequency that carries
the first optical signal.
Last four digits
Frequency of the second

optical signal
Indicates the last four digits

the second optical signal.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370.
l
"9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz.
"9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.


Table 18-38 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
MI/MO
IN/OUT
NOTE
18.5.9 MR2 Parameters

For MR2 parameters, refer to Table 18-39.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1714
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-39 MR2 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /

board.
Configure Band Type
Sets the band type.
Default: C
18.5.10 Specifications of the MR2

Table 18-40 lists the optical specifications of the MR2 board.
Table 18-40 Optical specifications of the MR2 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561
GHz
100
IN-D1
IN-D2
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
1.5
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
isolation
dB
> 35

1715
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
1.5
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
1.0
Isolation
dB
> 13
Polarization dependence
loss
dB
< 0.2
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40

The MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping wavelengths.
The mechanical specifications of TN11MR2 are as follows:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
The mechanical specifications of TN21MR2 are as follows:

l
Dimensions of front panel: 128.9 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 25.4 mm (W) or 5 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 1 in. (W)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MR2
0.2
0.3
18.6 MR4

The available functional versions of the MR4 board are TN11 and TN21.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1716
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
MR4
TN21
MR4

l
Appearance:
18.6.5 Front Panel and 18.6.10 Specifications of the MR4.
Specification:
Specifications of the MR4.
The MR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.6.2 Application
As a type of optical add/drop multiplexing unit, the MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four
channels of signals.
Client side
OTU
OTU
Client side
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
MR4
MR4
OA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

OA
1717
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/

from the multiplexed signals.
WDM specification
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1718
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D1
IN
D4
MO
MI
A1
Drop optical
module
A4
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical module

Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted
with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1719
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

18.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR4 board.

MR4
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
MR4
Figure 18-23 shows the front panels of the TN21MR4 boards respectively.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1720
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IN
D1
D2
D3
D4
MO
MI
A4
A3
A2
A1
OUT
MR4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR4 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21MR4 board.
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR4 board. Table 18-42 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Type
Function
A1-A4
LC

D1-D4
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MI
LC


1721
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
MO
LC

Laser Hazard Level

18.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot house one MR4 board.
Table 18-43 and Table 18-44 shows the valid slots for the MR4 board.
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-U17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11

The characteristic code for the MR4 board contains eight digits. Each digit indicates the
frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1722
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Frequency of first optical

signal

the first optical signal
Last four digits
Frequency of forth optical

signal

the fourth optical signal
For example, the characteristic code for the MR4 board is 92109240.
l
"9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can
be inferred that:
l
The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz.
The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.


Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
MI/MO
IN/OUT
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1723
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /

board.
Configure Band Type
Sets the band type.
Default: C

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561
GHz
100
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
2.2

1724
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Item
Unit
Value
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
isolation
dB
> 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
2.2
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
Isolation
dB
> 13
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/from the
multiplexed signals. There are ten groups of wavelengths.
Table 18-49 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths of the MR4 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
G
ro
u
p
A1/D1
Wa
vel
en
gth
No.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm)
Fre
que
ncy
(TH
z)
W
av
el
e
n
gt
h
N
o.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm
)
Fre
que
ncy
(T
Hz)
W
av
ele
ng
th
No
.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm
)
Freq
uenc
y
(TH
z)
W
av
el
en
gt
h
N
o.
Wave
lengt
h
(nm)
Frequ
ency
(THz)
80
1560.
61
192.
10
78
1559
.79
192.
20
76
1558
.98
192.
30
74
1558.1
7
192.4
0
72
1557.
36
192.
50
70
1556
.55
192.
60
68
1555
.75
192.
70
66
1554.9
4
192.8
0
64
1554.
13
192.
90
62
1553
.33
193.
00
60
1552
.52
193.
10
58
1551.7
2
193.2
0
56
1550.
92
193.
30
54
1550
.12
193.
40
52
1549
.32
193.
50
50
1548.5
1
193.6
0
48
1547.
72
193.
70
46
1546
.92
193.
80
44
1546
.12
193.
90
42
1545.3
2
194.0
0
A2/D2
A3/D3

A4/D4
1725
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

G
ro
u
p
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
Wa
vel
en
gth
No.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm)
Fre
que
ncy
(TH
z)
W
av
el
e
n
gt
h
N
o.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm
)
Fre
que
ncy
(T
Hz)
W
av
ele
ng
th
No
.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm
)
Freq
uenc
y
(TH
z)
W
av
el
en
gt
h
N
o.
Wave
lengt
h
(nm)
Frequ
ency
(THz)
40
1544.
53
194.
10
38
1543
.73
194.
20
36
1542
.94
194.
30
34
1542.1
4
194.4
0
32
1541.
35
194.
50
30
1540
.56
194.
60
28
1539
.77
194.
70
26
1538.9
8
194.8
0
24
1538.
19
194.
90
22
1537
.40
195.
00
20
1536
.61
195.
10
18
1535.8
2
195.2
0
16
1535.
04
195.
30
14
1534
.25
195.
40
12
1533
.47
195.
50
10
1532.6
8
195.6
0
10
1531.
90
195.
70
1531
.12
195.
80
1530
.33
195.
90
1529.5
5
196.0
0
Mechanical specifications of TN11MR4 board are as follows:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Mechanical specifications of TN21MR4 board are as follows:

l
Dimensions of front panel: 128.9 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 25.4 mm (W) or 5 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 1 in. (W)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MR4
0.2
0.3

1726
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

18.7 MR8

The available functional version of the MR8 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
MR8
18.7.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR8 boar adds/drops and multiplex
eight channels of signals.
Client side
OTU
OTU
Client side
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
MR8
MR8
OA
OA

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1727
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the

WDM specification
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

D1
IN
D8
MO
MI
A1
Drop optical
module
A8
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical module

Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
1728
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted
with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of wavelengths.

Power supply module

18.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8 board.

Figure 18-26 shows the front panel of the MR8 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1729
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-26 Front panel of the MR8 board
MR8
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
D4
IN
A4
OUT
D5
MO
A5
MI
D6
D1
A6
A1
D7
D2
A7
A2
D8
D3
A8
A3
MR8
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 20 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR8 board. Table 18-51 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1730
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
A1-A8
LC

D1-D8
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MI
LC

MO
LC

Laser Hazard Level

18.7.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one MR8 board.
Table 18-52 shows the valid slots for the MR8 board.
Table 18-52 Valid slots for the MR8 board
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot
number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on
the NM is IU1.

the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1731
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

signal
Last four digits
Frequency of the eighth

optical signal

the eighth optical signal
l
"9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
l
The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz.
The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.
The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
A5/D5
A6/D6
6
1732
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
A7/D7
A8/D8
MI/MO
IN/OUT
10
NOTE

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /

board.
Configure Band Type
Sets the band type.
Default: C

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1733
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Interface
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561
GHz
100
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
IN-D5
IN-D6
IN-D7
IN-D8
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
isolation
dB
> 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
IN-MRO
MRI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
3.5
Isolation
dB
> 13
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40

The MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are five groups of wavelengths.
Table 18-57 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8
Group
A1/D1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Waveleng
th No.
80
64
48
32
16
Waveleng
th (nm)
1560.61
1554.13
1547.72
1541.35
1535.04
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.10
192.90
193.70
194.50
195.30

1734
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Group
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
A5/D5
A6/D6
A7/D7
A8/D8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Waveleng
th No.
78
62
46
30
14
Waveleng
th (nm)
1559.79
1553.33
1546.92
1540.56
1534.25
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.20
193.00
193.80
194.60
195.40
Waveleng
th No.
76
60
44
28
12
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.98
1552.52
1546.12
1539.77
1533.47
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.30
193.10
193.90
194.70
195.50
Waveleng
th No.
74
58
42
26
10
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.17
1551.72
1545.32
1538.98
1532.68
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.40
193.20
194.00
194.80
195.60
Waveleng
th No.
72
56
40
24
Waveleng
th (nm)
1557.36
1550.92
1544.53
1538.19
1531.90
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.50
193.30
194.10
194.90
195.70
Waveleng
th No.
70
54
38
22
Waveleng
th (nm)
1556.55
1550.12
1543.73
1537.40
1531.12
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.60
193.40
194.20
195.00
195.80
Waveleng
th No.
68
52
36
20
Waveleng
th (nm)
1555.75
1549.32
1542.94
1536.61
1530.33
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.70
193.50
194.30
195.10
195.90
Waveleng
th No.
66
50
34
18

1735
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Group
Waveleng
th (nm)
1554.94
1548.51
1542.14
1535.82
1529.55
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.80
193.60
194.40
195.20
196.00
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MR8
0.2
0.3
18.8 MR8V
MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA

The available functional version of the MR8V board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
MR8
V
18.8.2 Application
The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals, and adjusts the multiplexed
input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding channel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1736
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-27.
Figure 18-27 Position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system
Client side
OTU
OTU
Client side
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
MR8V
MR8V
OA
OA

The MR8V board is mainly used to add/drop signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a
cascading interface.
Table 18-58 Functions and features of the MR8V board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the

multiplexed signals and adjusts the multiplexed input optical power
of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding
channel.
WDM specification
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The MR8V board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
Figure 18-28 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1737
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board
D1
D8
MO
MI
A1
A2
A8
VOA
VOA
VOA
IN
VO
V
O
A
VI
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM
optical module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The
The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals. After the optical power adjustment by VOA,
the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN or MI interface receives the
adjusted multiplexed signals.
The IN or MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are
multiplexed with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical
module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
NOTE
l The OTM station receives the multiplexed signals through the IN interface and transmits the
multiplexed signals through the VO interface.
l The OADM station receives the multiplexed signals through the MI interface and transmits the
multiplexed signals through the VO interface.
By default, the VO interface is connected to the IN interface on the VOA. The connection on the VOA can
be changed manually.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1738
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals.
Adjusts the input optical power of eight channels. Adjusts the input optical power of
pass-through wavelengths.

Power supply module

18.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8V
board.

Figure 18-29 shows the front panel of the MR8V board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1739
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-29 Front panel of the MR8V board
MR8V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
D4
OUT
A4
IN
D5
MO
A5
MI
D6
D1
A6
A1
D7
D2
A7
A2
D8
D3
A8
A3
VO
VI
MR8V
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 22 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR8V board. Table 18-59 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1740
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-59 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8V board
Interface
Type
Function
A1-A8
LC

D1-D8
LC

IN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side

when the IN interface is not connected to the VO
interface on the same MR8V board.
Receives the adjusted multiplexed signal from the VO
interface when the IN interface is connected to the VO
interface on the same MR8V board by a fiber.
OUT
LC
MI
LC

MO
LC

VI
LC
Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side.
VO
LC
Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN

interface.
Laser Hazard Level

18.8.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one MR8V board.
Table 18-60 shows the valid slots for the MR8V board.
Table 18-60 Valid slots for the MR8V board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16

1741
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot
number of the MR8V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8V board displayed on
the NM is IU1.
18.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V

The characteristic code for the MR8V board contains of eight digits that indicate the frequencies
of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
Table 18-61 Characteristic code for the MR8V board
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

signal
Last four digits

optical signal

"V"
Adjustment of the input

optical power of each
channel
Indicates that the board

adjusts the input optical
power of each channel.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V.
l
"V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
l


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1742
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-62 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8V board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
A5/D5
A6/D6
A7/D7
A8/D8
MI/MO
IN/OUT
10
VI
11
VO
12
NOTE

For MR8V parameters, refer to Table 18-63.
Table 18-63 MR8V parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type

1743
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /

board.
Configure Band Type
Sets the band type.
Default: C
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Min. Attenuation Rate

(dB) to Max.
Attenuation Rate (dB)
Default:Max.
The Optical Interface Attenuation

Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical
power attenuation of a board channel
so that the optical power of the
output signals at the transmit end is
within the preset range.
You can obtain the value range of
this parameter by querying the
corresponding Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB) parameters.
Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM
Max. Attenuation Rate

(dB)
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

parameter queries the maximum
attenuation rate allowed by the
See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate
(dB) (WDM Interface) for more
information.

(dB)
The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB)

parameter queries the minimum
attenuation rate allowed by the
See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate
information.
18.8.10 Specifications of the MR8V

Table 18-64 lists the optical specifications of the MR8V board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1744
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-64 Optical specifications of the MR8V board

Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561
GHz
100
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
IN-D5
IN-D6
IN-D7
IN-D8
1 dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
isolation
dB
> 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
VI-VO
1 dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
Attenuation range
dB
0-20
Adjustment accuracy
dB
1 (attenuation 10 dB)
IN-MRO
MRI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
3.5
Isolation
dB
> 13
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
1.5 (attenuation 15 dB)

1.8 (attenuation >15 dB)

The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are five groups of wavelengths.
Table 18-65 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8V
Group
A1/D1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Waveleng
th No.
80
64
48
32
16
Waveleng
th (nm)
1560.61
1554.13
1547.72
1541.35
1535.04

1745
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Group
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
A5/D5
A6/D6
A7/D7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.10
192.90
193.70
194.50
195.30
Waveleng
th No.
78
62
46
30
14
Waveleng
th (nm)
1559.79
1553.33
1546.92
1540.56
1534.25
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.20
193.00
193.80
194.60
195.40
Waveleng
th No.
76
60
44
28
12
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.98
1552.52
1546.12
1539.77
1533.47
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.30
193.10
193.90
194.70
195.50
Waveleng
th No.
74
58
42
26
10
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.17
1551.72
1545.32
1538.98
1532.68
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.40
193.20
194.00
194.80
195.60
Waveleng
th No.
72
56
40
24
Waveleng
th (nm)
1557.36
1550.92
1544.53
1538.19
1531.90
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.50
193.30
194.10
194.90
195.70
Waveleng
th No.
70
54
38
22
Waveleng
th (nm)
1556.55
1550.12
1543.73
1537.40
1531.12
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.60
193.40
194.20
195.00
195.80
Waveleng
th No.
68
52
36
20
Waveleng
th (nm)
1555.75
1549.32
1542.94
1536.61
1530.33
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.70
193.50
194.30
195.10
195.90

1746
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Group
A8/D8
Waveleng
th No.
66
50
34
18
Waveleng
th (nm)
1554.94
1548.51
1542.14
1535.82
1529.55
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.80
193.60
194.40
195.20
196.00
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MR8V
7.7
8.6
18.9 SBM2
SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board

The available functional versions of the SBM2 board is TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
SBM
2

1747
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

18.9.2 Application
The SBM2 board adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
For the position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-30.
Figure 18-30 Position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system
Client side
OTU
Client side
OTU
OTU
OTU
SBM2
SBM2

The SBM2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, and to provide a cascading
interface.
Table 18-66 Functions and features of the SBM2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

The added and dropped optical signals must be of different
wavelengths.
WDM specification
Supports only the single-fiber dual fed CWDM system.
Cascading interface
Provides a cascading optical interface to cascade other single-fiber

bi-directional OADM boards.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The SBM2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
Figure 18-31 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1748
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board
D1
LINE
D2
A1
Drop optical
module
A2
Add optical
module
EXT
OADM optical module

Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed signals through the LINE interface. After the optical module
processes the multiplexed signals, the board separates the multiplexed signals into two
wavelengths of optical signals and outputs them through the D1 and D2 optical interfaces to the
OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment. The board also receives two wavelengths of
optical signals through the A1 and A2 interfaces, couples them to the multiplexed signals and
outputs the coupled signals through the LINE interface.
The EXT interface is used as a cascade interface. It transmits the multiplexed signals to other
single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed
signals.
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1749
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

18.9.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the SBM2 board.

Figure 18-32 shows the front panel of the SBM2 board.
Figure 18-32 Front panel of the SBM2 board
SBM2
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
EXT
LINE
D1
A1
D2
A2
SBM2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1750
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the SBM2 board. Table 18-67 lists the type
Table 18-67 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SBM2 board
Interface
Type
Function
A1/A2
LC

D1/D2
LC

LINE
LC
Receives and transmits multiplexed signals.
EXT
LC
Cascading interface, transmits the multiplexed signals

to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to
add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed
signals.
Laser Hazard Level

18.9.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SBM2 board.
Table 18-68 shows the valid slots for the SBM2 board.
Table 18-68 Valid slots for the SBM2 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

1751
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



Table 18-69 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
A1
D1
A2
D2
LINE
EXT

For SBM2 parameters, refer to Table 18-70.
Table 18-70 SBM2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Sets and displays the optical

interface name.

Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
Queries the operating wavelength

at the WDM-side optical interface
of a board.
Actual Band Type
No./Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
11/1471.00/208.170 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Sets the operating wavelength at

the WDM-side optical interface of
a board.
Configure Band Type
CWDM
Sets the band type.
Default: CWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1752
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

18.9.9 Specifications of the SBM2

Table 18-71 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2 board.
Table 18-71 Optical specifications of the SBM2 board
Interface
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1271 to 1611
LINE-D1
LINE-D2
Drop channel insertion loss
dB
Isolation
dB
30
A1-LINE
A2-LINE
Add channel insertion loss
dB
Isolation
dB
30
Optical return loss
dB
> 40
Pass-through loss
dB
1.5
CWDM
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
SMB2
0.2
0.3

1753
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

19
19 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop

Multiplexing Unit
About This Chapter

19.1 RDU9
RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band)
19.2 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
19.3 ROAM
ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board
19.4 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board
19.5 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
19.6 WSMD2
WSMD2: 2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board
19.7 WSMD4
19.8 WSMD9
WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1754
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

19.1 RDU9
RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band)

The available functional version of the RDU9 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
RDU
9
19.1.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RDU9 board is used with
the WSM9 board to implement the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1755
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-1 Position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system

Client-side
O
T
U
O O
T T
U U
O
T
U
O O
T T
U U
DMUX
DMUX
DCM
Client-side
MUX
OA
OA
RDU9
WSM9
WSM9
RDU9
MUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
Client-side
O
T
U
OA
OA
DCM
DMUX
O O
T T
U U
O
T
U
Client-side
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.
NOTE
The RDU9 board broadcasts services and the uses the same wavelength for all of its optical ports to drop services.
If the RDU9 only needs to receive a single wavelength, it can be directly connected to an OTU board. In most
situations, however, the RDU9 needs to receive multiplexed wavelengths and must be connected to a D40 board
for wavelength demultiplexing.

The RDU9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
performance, and monitor alarms and performance events.
Table 19-1 Functions and features of the RDU9 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Broadcasts the signals received from the main optical path in nine
directions at the same time.
WDM specification
Supports the DWDM specification.

1756
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The RDU9 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 19-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9.
Figure 19-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9 board
DM1
DM2
DM3
DM4
DM5
DM6
DM7
DM8
Optical demultiplexer module

ROA
MONI
TOA
MONO
IN
EXPO
Optical module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
1757
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface.
The optical signals from the IN optical interface are divided into two channels of signals based
on the optical power by the optical splitter. The main path optical signals are output through the
EXPO interface and other signals are output through the TOA interface.
The RDU9 board can be cascaded to the optical amplifier unit (OAU) through the TOA interface.
If no cascade is required, the signals from the TOA interface should be input to the ROA interface
directly.
The optical wavelength signal from the ROA interface is split equally into different channels of
optical signals, and the signals are then output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces.
A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and
are then output through the MONO interface for performance detection. A few signals are
extracted from the optical signals that are from the ROA interface and are output through the
MONI interface for performance detection.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Broadcasts signals in nine directions.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output
optical power detection.
the MONI/MONO interface for detection.

Power supply module

19.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RDU9 board

Figure 19-3 shows the front panel of the RDU9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1758
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-3 Front panel of the RDU9 board
RDU9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MONO MONI
EXPO
IN
TOA ROA
DM1
DM2
DM3
DM4
DM5 DM6
DM7
DM8
RDU9
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the RDU9 board. Table 19-2 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1759
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RDU9 board
Interface
Type
Function
DM1-DM8
LC
Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the

local station to the optical demultiplexing unit or the
optical add/drop multiplexing unit
IN
LC
EXPO
LC
MONI
LC
Connected to the input interface of the spectrum

analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the
optical spectrum for the input through the ROA
interface.
The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the ROA port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Proa (dBm) - Pmoni
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO
LC

analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for
the signals output through the EXPO interface.
The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
TOA
LC
Used as the cascade output interface.
ROA
LC
Used as the cascade input interface.
NOTE
When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber
jumper.
Laser Hazard Level

19.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one RDU9 board.
Table 19-3 shows the valid slots for the RDU9 board.
Table 19-3 Valid slots for the RDU9 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

1760
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17


Table 19-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RDU9 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
EXPO
DM1-DM8
3-10
TOA/ROA
11
MONI
12
MONO
13

For RDU9 parameters, refer to Table 19-5.
Table 19-5 RDU9 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Sets and displays the optical interface name.
Configure Band
Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1761
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Actual Band
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)

Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
19.1.9 Specifications of the RDU9

Table 19-6 Optical specifications of the RDU9 board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
Insertion loss
IN-Drop (DM1-DM8)
dB
12.5
ROA-Drop (DM1-DM8)
dB
11.5
IN-EXPO
dB
12.5
IN-TOA
dB
Consistency of the insertion loss of each

channel
dB
1.2
Reflectance
dB
< -40
dB
0.5
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
1762
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11RDU9
6.0
6.6
19.2 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board

The available functional version of the RMU9 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
RMU
9
Type
Table 19-7 lists the types of the RMU9 board.
Table 19-7 Type description of the RMU9 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Type
Description
TN11RMU
9
01
Processes the odd and even wavelengths of C-band.
TN11RMU
9
02
Processes the odd and even wavelengths in the C band and

supports the port blocking function.

1763
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

19.2.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RMU9 board is used
with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
The RMU9 board can add eight single-wavelength signal or multi-channel signals to the main
path. Being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit or optical add and drop multiplexing
unit, the multiplexed channels enter the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port. As for
the single channels, they are directly sent to the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port
by the optical transponder units.
For the position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-4.
Figure 19-4 Position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system
Client-side
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
O O O
T T T
U U U
DMUX
O
T
U
MUX
DCM
8
OA
OA
WSD9
RMU9
RMU9
WSD9
MUX
O
T
U
O O
T T
U U
OA
OA
DCM
DMUX
O
T
U
Client-side
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
NOTE
at the same time.

The RMU9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1764
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-8 Functions and features of the RMU9 board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds eight single-wavelength signals or multi-channel signals to the

main path. Used with the OTU with tunable wavelength, the RMU9
board implements the dynamic input of eight channel signals.
WDM specification
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Port blocking
Blocks all input wavelengths at one of the AM1 to AM8 optical

interfaces.
NOTE
Only the TN11RMU902 board supports this function.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The RMU9 board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and
Figure 19-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1765
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board
AM1
AM2
AM3
AM4
AM5
AM6
AM7
AM8
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
Optical multiplexer module

TOA
MONO
ROA
OUT
EXPI
MONI
Optical module
PIN
optical power detection module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The wavelengths to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
NOTE
l The channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) must use a unique wavelength. Otherwise,
the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
l The wavelength used by the channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) cannot be the same
as the wavelength of the optical signals input through the EXPI optical interface. Otherwise, the services
in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
After being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer module, the optical signals input through the
AMn optical interface are output through the TOA optical interface.
The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface can be cascaded with an optical
amplifier board. If no cascading is required, the optical signals are directly input to the ROA
optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1766
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the
optical wavelength signals added on the board through the ROA optical interface, the
multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
A small number of optical signals that are input through the EXPI interface are separated from
the main path and then output through the MONI interface. They are used for optical performance
detection.
A small number of optical signals are separated from those that are output through the TOA
interface and then sent to the MONO interface. These signals are used for optical performance
detection.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Multiplexes eight wavelengths added on the board.
Eight VOAs achieve the in-service adjustment of input optical power.

Detects in real time the optical power of TOA and EXPI interface.

Power supply module

19.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RMU9 board.

Figure 19-6 shows the front panel of the RMU9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1767
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-6 Front panel of the RMU9 board
RMU9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
MONO MONI
OUT EXPI
TOA ROA
AM1
AM2
AM3
AM4
AM5
AM6
AM7
AM8
RMU9
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the RMU9 board. Table 19-9 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1768
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RMU9 board
Interface
Type
Function
AM1-AM8
LC
Receive the single-wavelength signals or multichannel signals that are to be multiplexed into the main
path.
OUT
LC
EXPI
LC
MONI
LC

analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the
optical spectrum for the input signals transmitted by the
main optical path.
signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO
LC

analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for
the signals output through the TOA interface.
signal at the TOA port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Ptoa (dBm) - Pmono
(dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB).
TOA
LC
Used as the cascade output interface.
ROA
LC
Used as the cascade input interface.
NOTE
When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber
jumper.
Laser Hazard Level

19.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one RMU9 board.
Table 19-10 shows the valid slots for the RMU9 board.
Table 19-10 Valid slots for the RMU9 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

1769
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17


Table 19-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
EXPI
OUT
AM1-AM8
3-10
TOA/ROA
11
MONI
12
MONO
13

For RMU9 parameters, refer to Table 19-12.
Table 19-12 RMU9 parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

1770
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

parameter queries the maximum attenuation
rate allowed by the current optical interface
of a board.
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

parameter queries the minimum attenuation
of a board.
Configure Band
Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Actual Band
Queries the actual working band of the

board.
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)

input optical power, which can trigger a
board to generate an optical power loss
value, the board reports the MUT_LOS
alarm.
information.

1771
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Block Port
Disabled, Enabled
Before wavelengths are added to the AM

interface of the RMU9, set this parameter to
Enabled. After configurations of
wavelengths and services on the OTU are
complete, set this parameter to Disabled.
Default: Disabled
Before the OTU where wavelengths are

added is replaced, set this parameter to
Enabled. After the OTU is replaced, and
wavelengths and services are configured,
set this parameter to Disabled.
Actual Working
Band Parity
Queries the parity of the actual working

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Selects the desired parity of the working

band.
Default: All
19.2.9 Specifications of the RMU9

Table 19-13 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9 board.
Table 19-13 Optical specifications of the RMU9 board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
Insertion loss
EXPI-OUT
dB
8.5
AMxa-TOA
dB
12.5b
ROA-OUT
dB
1.5
Reflectance
dB
< -40
Attenuation range
dB
0-15
Attenuation precision
dB
< 1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
VOA attenuation under channel blocking

functionc
dB
> 42
dB
0.5

1772
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
c: Only the TN11RMU902 supports the channel blocking function.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11RMU901
7.7
8.6
TN11RMU902
8.2
19.3 ROAM
ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board

The available functional version of the ROAM board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
ROA
M
Type
Table 19-14 lists the types of the ROAM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1773
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-14 Type description of the ROAM board

Board
Type
Description
TN11ROAM
01
Processes the even

wavelengths in C band.
02
Processes the odd

19.3.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM board is used
with the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement
wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-7.
Figure 19-7 Position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system
OA
OA
ROAM
ROAM
OA
OA
40
DMUX
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
40
O
T
U
O
T
U
DMUX
O O O
T T T
U U U
O
T
U
Client-side
NOTE
at the same time.

The ROAM board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, achieve built-in power
equilibrium, and monitor alarms and performance events.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1774
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-15 Functions and features of the ROAM board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Implements dynamic adding/dropping, pass-through, and blocking of

a maximum of 40 wavelengths with the demultiplexing board as well
as dynamic grooming of wavelengths for services on the ring network.
WDM specification
Power equilibrium
Implements the wavelength-level equilibrium and control of optical

power to flatten the spectrum for the working signals.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

the board.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The ROAM board consists of the planar lightwave circuit (PLC) optical module, control and
Figure 19-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ROAM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1775
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-8 Functions and features of the ROAM board
OUT
M01
M02
M40
VOA
VOA
VOA
EXPI
Optical multiplexer module

Splitter
IN
EXPO
DM
PLC optical module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The main path signals are received through the IN interface. The splitter divides the main path
signals into two channels of the same signals. One signal is output to the optical demultiplexer
unit through the DM interface and demultiplexed into single wavelengths dropped at the local
station. The other signal passes through and is output through the EXPO interface.
The signals to be added at the local station are received through the corresponding M01-M40
interfaces. These signals are multiplexed with the signal input through the EXPI interface and
then output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l
PLC optical module

Multiplexes forty wavelengths added on the board.
The PLC optical module contains the VOA modules that implement the power
adjustment at the wavelength level.
The PLC optical module blocks and terminates the signals dropped at the local station
and adjusts the optical power of other signals.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1776
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

19.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ROAM
board.

Figure 19-9 shows the front panel of the ROAM board.
Figure 19-9 Front panel of the ROAM board
ROAM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
M01 196.00
M02 195.90
M03 195.80
M04 195.70
M05 195.60
M06 195.50
M07 195.40
M08 195.30
M09 195.20
M10 195.10
M11 195.00
M12 194.90
M13 194.80
M14 194.70
M15 194.60
M16 194.50
M17 194.40
M18 194.30
M19 194.20
M20 194.10
M21 194.00
M22 193.90
M23 193.80
M24 193.70
M25 193.60
M26 193.50
M27 193.40
M28 193.30
M29 193.20
M30 193.10
M31193.00
M32192.90
M33192.80
M34192.70
M35192.60
M36192.50
M37192.40
M38192.30
M39192.20
M40192.10
DM
M31
M32
M12
M02
M22
M11
M01
M21
IN
EXPI
EXPO
OUT
M23
M13
M03
M34
M35
M36
M37 M38
M39
M30
M40
M20
M10
M29
M19
M09
M27 M28
M17 M18
M07 M08
M26
M16
M06
M25
M15
M05
M24
M14
M04
ROAM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1777
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 45 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ROAM board. Table 19-16 lists the type
Table 19-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ROAM board
Interface
Type
Function
M01-M40
LC
Add channels from the local station.
DM
LC
Drops channels to the local station.
OUT
LC
IN
LC
EXPO
LC
Used as the cascade interface to transmit the passthrough signal.
EXPI
LC
Used as the cascade interface to receive the passthrough signal.
There are 40 output interfaces on the front panel of the ROAM board. Table 19-17 and Table
19-18 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the ROAM
board.
Table 19-17 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM
board (even)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.00
1529.55
M21
194.00
1545.32
M02
195.90
1530.33
M22
193.90
1546.12
M03
195.80
1531.12
M23
193.80
1546.92
M04
195.70
1531.90
M24
193.70
1547.72
M05
195.60
1532.68
M25
193.60
1548.51

1778
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M06
195.50
1533.47
M26
193.50
1549.32
M07
195.40
1534.25
M27
193.40
1550.12
M08
195.30
1535.04
M28
193.30
1550.92
M09
195.20
1535.82
M29
193.20
1551.72
M10
195.10
1536.61
M30
193.10
1552.52
M11
195.00
1537.40
M31
193.00
1553.33
M12
194.90
1538.19
M32
192.90
1554.13
M13
194.80
1538.98
M33
192.80
1554.94
M14
194.70
1539.77
M34
192.70
1555.75
M15
194.60
1540.56
M35
192.60
1556.55
M16
194.50
1541.35
M36
192.50
1557.36
M17
194.40
1542.14
M37
192.40
1558.17
M18
194.30
1542.94
M38
192.30
1558.98
M19
194.20
1543.73
M39
192.20
1559.79
M20
194.10
1544.53
M40
192.10
1560.61
Table 19-18 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM
board (odd)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.05
1529.16
M21
194.05
1544.92
M02
195.95
1529.94
M22
193.95
1545.72
M03
195.85
1530.72
M23
193.85
1546.52
M04
195.75
1531.51
M24
193.75
1547.32
M05
195.65
1532.29
M25
193.65
1548.11
M06
195.55
1533.07
M26
193.55
1548.91
M07
195.45
1533.86
M27
193.45
1549.72
M08
195.35
1534.64
M28
193.35
1550.52
M09
195.25
1535.43
M29
193.25
1551.32
M10
195.15
1536.22
M30
193.15
1552.12

1779
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M11
195.05
1537.00
M31
193.05
1552.93
M12
194.95
1537.79
M32
192.95
1553.73
M13
194.85
1538.58
M33
192.85
1554.54
M14
194.75
1539.37
M34
192.75
1555.34
M15
194.65
1540.16
M35
192.65
1556.15
M16
194.55
1540.95
M36
192.55
1556.96
M17
194.45
1541.75
M37
192.45
1557.77
M18
194.35
1542.54
M38
192.35
1558.58
M19
194.25
1543.33
M39
192.25
1559.39
M20
194.15
1544.13
M40
192.15
1560.20
Laser Hazard Level

19.3.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one ROAM board.
Table 19-19 shows the valid slots for the ROAM board.
Table 19-19 Valid slots for the ROAM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore,
the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three
slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the ROAM board, the slot number of the ROAM board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1780
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



Table 19-20 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
EXPO
EXPI
OUT
DM
A01-A40
6-45
NOTE
The A01A40 interfaces correspond to the M01
M40 interfaces on the physical front panel.

For ROAM parameters, refer to Table 19-21.
Table 19-21 ROAM parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

board.

1781
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)

alarm.
information.
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: Even
Wavelength Target
-32 to 8
Output Power (dBm) Default: /
Applies to the ROAM board only and is

used to set the single wavelength target
output optical power after add wavelengths
are multiplexed.
19.3.9 Specifications of the ROAM

Table 19-22 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM board.
Table 19-22 Optical specifications of the ROAM board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100
Insertion loss
Mxa-OUT
dB
9b
IN-DM
dB
EXPI-OUT
dB
14b
IN-EXPO
dB
nm
1529 - 1561
dB
> 22
dB
> 25

1782
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Attenuation range
dB
0 to 20
Attenuation precision
dB
< 1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Module switch time
ms
50
Extinction ratio
dB
30
-0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength
nm
> 0.3
-0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through

wavelength
nm
> 0.2
NOTE
a: Mx represents the M01-M40 interface.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11ROAM
66
72.6
19.4 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

The available functional versions of the WSD9 board are TN11, TN12, and TN13.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1783
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
WSD
9
TN12
WSD
9
TN13
WSD
9

l
Appearance:
The TN13WSD9 board uses a front panel different from that of the WSD9 board of
other versions. The TN13WSD9 board occupies three slots. The TN12WSD9 and
TN11WSD9 boards occupy two slots. For details, see 19.4.5 Front Panel and 19.4.9
Specifications of the WSD9.
Specification:
The wavelength of the TN13WSD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing. The
wavelength of the TN12WSD9 and TN11WSD9 boards are separated at 100 GHz
channel spacing. For details, see 19.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9.
The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary according to the version of
the board that you use. For details, see 19.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11WSD
9
TN12WSD
9
Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a

later version.
TN12WSD
9
None
TN13WSD
9
None
19.4.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSD9 board is used with
the WSM9 or RMU9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM
network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1784
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The single-wavelength or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output
through the interfaces of the WSD9 board based on the configuration.
If the dropped signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit for
demultiplexing. Then, the demultiplexed signals enter corresponding OTUs and are sent to the
client-side equipment at the local station.
If the dropped signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is sent directly to the OTU at the local
station.
For the position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-10.
Figure 19-10 Position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system
Client-side
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
O O O
T T T
U U U
MUX
DMUX
DCM
OA
OA
WSD9
WSM9
WSM9
WSD9
MUX
O
T
U
O O
T T
U U
O
T
U
OA
OA
DCM
DMUX
O
T
U
Client-side
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
NOTE
at the same time.

The WSD9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1785
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-23 Functions and features of the WSD9 board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or

chain network can output any wavelength combination to any
interface to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.
WDM specification
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection
Figure 19-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1786
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board
DM1 DM2
DM8
Splitter
IN
Splitter
EXPO
WSS optical module
MONI
MONO
Optical module
Temperature
detection
PIN
Temperature and optical power deteciton module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The main path signal is received through the IN interface. The single-wavelength or multichannel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces
based on the configuration. Other channels pass through the station and are output through the
EXPO interface.
Module Function
l
Optical module
The optical module can combine any wavelengths and transmit the signals through the
DM1-DM8 and EXPO interfaces.
The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains the VOA module that
implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1787
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Temperature and optical power detection module

Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature.

Power supply module

19.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSD9
board.

Figure 19-12 shows the front panel of the WSD9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1788
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-12 Front panel of the WSD9 board
WSD9
WSD9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MONO MONI
MONO MONI
EXPO
EXPO
IN
IN
DM1
DM1
DM2
DM2
DM3
DM4
DM3 DM4
DM5 DM6
DM5 DM6
DM7 DM8
DM7 DM8
WSD9
WSD9
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSD9 board. Table 19-24 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1789
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSD9 board
Interface
Type
Function
DM1-DM8
LC
Transmits the single-wavelength or multi-channel

signal separated from the main path. If the signal is a
multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit. If the signal is a single-wavelength
signal, it is directly sent to the optical transponder unit.
EXPO
LC
IN
LC
MONI
LC

analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical
performance monitoring for the received main path
signal.
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm)
= 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO
LC

performance monitoring for the transmitted main path
signal.
signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
Laser Hazard Level

19.4.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSD9
board.
Table 19-25, Table 19-26 and Table 19-27 show the valid slots for the WSD9 boards.
Table 19-25 Valid slots for the TN11WSD9 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16

1790
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16,
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9 board, the slot
number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSD9
board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the
number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM
is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9
board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house
the TN13WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1791
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
EXPO
DM1-DM8
3-10
MONI
11
MONO
12

For parameters of the WSD9 board, refer to Table 19-29.
Table 19-29 WSD9 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation parameter by querying the corresponding Min.
Rate (dB)
Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB) parameters.
information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed
See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1792
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)

Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default:
l TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9:
Even
l TN13WSD9:
All
19.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9

Table 19-30 Optical specifications of the WSD9 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
Type
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
Optical channels
40
80
GHz
100
50

1793
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Type
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
dB
8b
8b
Maximum channel insertion loss

difference
dB
1.5
1.5
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
-1dB spectral width
nm
> 0.32
> 0.16
Port isolation
dB
> 25
> 25
dB
> 25
> 25
dB
> 30
> 30
Extinction ratio
dB
35
35
Reconfiguration time
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
-40
Directivity
dB
35
35
dB
Attenuation range of each of

dropping wavelengths
dB
0-15
0-15
Attenuation precision of each of

dropping wavelengths
dB
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
Insertion loss
IN-DMxa
IN-EXPO
NOTE
a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.
l
TN11WSD9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)
10.4 in. (H)
10.4 in. (H)
Weight:
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN11WSD9: 2.2 kg (4.9 lb.)

1794
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN12WSD9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
TN13WSD9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSD9
17.0
18.7
TN12WSD9
25.4
28.5
TN13WSD9
25.4
28.5
19.5 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board

The available functional versions of the WSM9 board are TN11, TN12, TN13.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
WSM
9
TN12
WSM
9
TN13
WSM
9

l
Appearance:
The TN13WSM9 board uses a front panel different from that of the WSM9 board of
other versions. The TN13WSM9 board occupies three slots. The TN12WSM9 and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1795
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN11WSM9 boards occupy two slots. For details, see 19.5.5 Front Panel and 19.5.9
Specifications of the WSM9.
l
Specification:
The wavelength of the TN13WSM9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing. The
wavelength of the TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards are separated at 100 GHz
channel spacing. For details, see 19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9.
The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary according to versions. For
details, see19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11WSM
9
TN12WSM
9

later version.
TN12WSM
9
None
TN13WSM
9
None
19.5.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSM9 board is used
with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
The single-wavelength or multi-channel signals to be added to the main path are input through
the interfaces of WSM9 board.
If the added signal is a multiplexed signal, it is received after being multiplexed by the optical
multiplexer unit. If the added signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is directly received after
being converted by the OTU.
For the position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-13.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1796
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-13 Position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system

Client-side
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
O O O
T T T
U U U
DMUX
DCM
MUX
OA
OA
WSD9
WSM9
WSM9
WSD9
8
8
MUX
O
T
U
O O
T T
U U
O
T
U
OA
OA
DCM
DMUX
O
T
U
Client-side
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
NOTE
at the same time.

The WSM9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
Table 19-31 Functions and features of the WSM9 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or

chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through
any interfaces to achieve the dynamic wavelength allocation.
WDM specification
Online optical
performance
monitoring


1797
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported by the TN12WSM9 and TN13WSM9.

The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power
detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 19-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board.
Figure 19-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board
AM1 AM2
AM8
Splitter
Splitter
EXPI
OUT
WSS optical module
MONI
MONO
Optical module
Temperature
detection
PIN
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
1798
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI
optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input
through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
l
If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for
processing and then input to the WSM9 board through the AMn optical interface.
If single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSM9 board
from the optical transponder unit through the AMn interface.
optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are
Module Function
l
Optical module
Selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs them through AM1-AM8 or EXPI.
The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains a VOA module, which
implements the optical power adjustment on a wavelength level.


Power supply module

19.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSM9
board.

Figure 19-15 shows the front panel of the WSM9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1799
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-15 Front panel of the WSM9 board
WSM9
WSM9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MONO MONI
MONO MONI
OUT EXPI
OUT EXPI
AM1
AM2
AM2
AM1
AM3
AM4
AM4
AM3
AM5
AM6
AM6
AM5
AM7
AM8
AM8
AM7
WSM9
WSM9
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSM9 board. Table 19-32 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1800
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSM9 board
Interface
Type
Function
AM1-AM8
LC
Receive the single-wavelength or multi-wavelength

signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path.
OUT
LC
EXPI
LC
MONI
LC
Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer

unit, accomplishes the online optical performance
monitoring for the received main path signal.
MONO
LC
Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer

unit, accomplishes the online optical performance
monitoring for the transmitted main path signal.
signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
Laser Safety Level

TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9:
The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the
maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
TN13WSM9:
The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the
maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3
dBm (136 mW).
19.5.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSM9
board.
Table 19-33, Table 19-34 and Table 19-35 show the valid slots for the WSM9 boards.
Table 19-33 Valid slots for the TN11WSM9 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16

1801
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
NOTE
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9 board, the slot
number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSM9
board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSM9 or TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the
number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM
is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9
board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house
the TN13WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1802
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-36 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
EXPI
OUT
AM1-AM8
3-10
MONI
11
MONO
12

For WSM9 parameters, refer to Table 19-37.
Table 19-37 WSM9 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Sets and displays the optical interface

name.
Optical Interface
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.

(dB)

attenuation rate allowed by the current
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1803
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description

(dB)

Configure Band
Sets the working band of a board.
Default: C
Actual Band

board.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: Even
19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9

Table 19-38 Optical specifications of the WSM9 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
Type
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
Optical channels
40
80
GHz
100
50
Insertion
loss
dB
8b
8b
Maximum channel insertion

loss difference
dB
1.5
1.5
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
-1 dB spectral width
nm
> 0.32
> 0.16
Port isolation
dB
> 25
> 25
dB
> 25
> 25
dB
> 30
> 30
AMxa-OUT
EXPI-OUT

1804
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Type
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
Extinction ratio
dB
35
35
Directivity
dB
35
35
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
-40
dB

adding wavelengths
dB
0-15
0-15

adding wavelengths
dB
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
l
TN11WSM9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)
10.4 in. (H)
10.4 in. (H)
Weight:
l
TN11WSM9: 2.2 kg (4.84 lb.)
TN12WSM9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
TN13WSM9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSM9
17.0
18.7
TN12WSM9
25.4
28.5
TN13WSM9
25.4
28.5

1805
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

19.6 WSMD2

The available functional version of the WSMD2 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
WSM
D2
19.6.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD2 board is used
with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and the optical add and drop multiplexing
unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1806
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-16 Position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system

O
T
U
O
T
U
Client-side
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
MUX
DCM
OA
OA
WSMD2
WSMD2
OA
OA
DCM
MUX
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
Client-side
O
T
U
O
T
U

The WSMD2 board is mainly used to broadcast services, dynamically groom wavelengths,
monitor online optical performance monitoring, and monitor alarms and performance events.
Table 19-39 Functions and features of the WSMD2 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of

configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or
chain network can broadcast the signals received from the main
optical path as two channels of the same signals, and can input any
wavelengths added locally to the AM port.
WDM specification
Online optical
performance
monitoring


1807
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add

wavelengths at the local station.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The WSMD2 board consists of the WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection
Figure 19-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2.
Figure 19-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2
DM
AM
EXPO
EXPI
Splitter
Splitter
IN
OUT
WSS optical
module
Optical module
Coupler
MONI
MONO
Temperature
detection
PIN
PIN
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
1808
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal flow
The optical signals of the main path are accessed through the IN interface. The signals are
broadcast into two same optical signals through the coupler. Then, the board drops one channel
of optical signals at the local station through the DM optical interface. The other channel of
optical signals is output through the EXPO optical interface to other directions.
Optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input
to WSMD2 board through the AM optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added,
the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD2
board through the AM optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be
directly input to the WSMD2 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM interface.
Optical signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD2 board through
the EXPI optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the wavelengths added at the local
station. The multiplexed signals are finally output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l
Optical module
The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through the
following optical interface: EXPI and AM.
The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that implements the power
The Coupler optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it
through DM. It implements the broadcasting from wavelength signals to two ports.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to
MONI/MONO for detection.

Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.

Power supply module

19.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSMD2
board.

Figure 19-18 shows the front panel of the WSMD2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1809
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-18 Front panel of the WSMD2 board
WSMD2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MONO MONI
OUT
IN
EXPO EXPI
DM
AM
WSMD2
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 8 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSMD2 board. Table 19-40 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1810
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-40 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC
DM
LC

local station or other stations to the optical
demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop
multiplexing unit.
AM
LC
Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed

signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the
accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path.
EXPO
LC
Functions as a cascade output optical interface.

Multiple WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through
their EXPO optical interfaces.
EXPI
LC
Functions as a cascade input optical interface. Multiple

WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through their EXPI
optical interfaces.
MONI
LC

signal.
MONO
LC

analyzer unit, monitors the optical performance of the
transmitted main path signal online.
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
Laser Hazard Level

19.6.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one WSMD2 board.
Table 19-41 shows the valid slots for the WSMD2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1811
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-41 Valid slots for the WSMD2 board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
NOTE
the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two
slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD2 board, the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed
on the NM is IU1.


Table 19-42 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
DM
AM
OUT
EXPO
EXPI
MONO
MONI

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1812
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For WSMD2 parameters, refer to Table 19-43.

Table 19-43 WSMD2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)


(dB)

Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

board.

1813
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)
The Input Power Loss Threshold

(dBm) parameter queries the threshold
value of the input optical power, which can
trigger a board to generate an optical power
loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual
input optical power is lower than this
threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: Even
19.6.9 Specifications of the WSMD2

Table 19-44 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD2 board.
Table 19-44 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD2 board
Item
Unit
Value
Optical channels
40
GHz
100
nm
1529-1561
-1 dB spectral width
nm
> 0.32
dB
8a
Insertion loss
AM-OUT
EXPI-OUT
IN-DM
4.5a
IN-EXPO
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
dB
1.5
Port isolation
dB
> 25
Extinction ratio
dB
35

1814
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Directivity
dB
35
dB
Attenuation range of each of adding

wavelength
dB
0-15
Attenuation precision of each of adding

wavelength
dB
1 (0 dB to 10 dB)
1.5 (> 10 dB)
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSMD2
17.0
18.7
19.7 WSMD4

The available functional versions of the WSMD4 board are TN11 and TN12

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1815
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
WSM
D4
TN12
WSM
D4
Type
Table 19-45 lists the version description of the WSMD4 board.
Table 19-45 Version description of the WSMD4 board
Board
Type
Description
TN11WSMD4
01
Processes the even wavelengths in C band.
02
Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.
01
Processes the even wavelengths and odd

TN12WSMD4

l
Function:
The TN11WSMD4 processes 40 wavelengths in C band. The TN12WSMD4 processes
80 wavelengths in C band. For details, see Table 19-45.
Specification:
see 19.7.9 Specifications of the WSMD4.
The TN12WSMD4 board and TN11WSMD4 board are not interchangeable.
19.7.2 Application
with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit
to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1816
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


West client
side
West
ODF
F
I
U
South
ODF
F
I
U
East client
side
WSMD4
WSMD4
WSMD4
WSMD4
South client
side
F
I
U
East
ODF
F
I
U
North
ODF
North client
side

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function

optical path as four channels of the same signals, and can input any
wavelengths added locally to any port.
WDM specification
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.

1817
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Optical power
adjustment

Optical-layer ASON
Supported by the TN11WSMD401 and TN12WSMD4.

The WSMD4 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and
optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 19-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board.
Figure 19-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board
D D D D
M M M M
1 2 3 4
A A A A
M M M M
1 2 3 4
Splitter
Splitter
IN
OUT
RDU optical
WSS optical
module
module
Optical module
MONI
MONO
Temperature
detection
PIN
PIN
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal flow
The optical signals on the main path are accessed through the IN interface. It is broadcast into
four same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The four channels of optical signals
are output through the DM1-DM4 optical interfaces separately. According to the network
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1818
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

planning, the WSMD4 board drops one channel locally and outputs the other three channels to
other directions.
The optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input
to the WSMD4 board through one of the AM1-AM4 optical interfaces. Assume that the optical
signals are input through the AM1 optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the
signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD4 board
through the AM1 optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be directly
input to the WSMD4 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM1 interface. Optical
signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD4 board through the AM2AM4 optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the added wavelengths at the local
station. The multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l
Optical module
The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of
the following optical interfaces: AM1, AM2, AM3 and AM4.
The RDU optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through
DM1-DM4. Implements the broadcasting from wavelength signals to four ports.


Power supply module

19.7.5 Front Panel

board.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1819
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

WSMD4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MONO MONI
OUT
IN
DM1
AM1
DM2
AM2
DM3
AM3
DM4
AM4
WSMD4
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSMD4 board. Table 19-47 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1820
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
AM1-AM4
LC

DM1-DM4
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
IN
LC
MONI
LC

signal.
MONO
LC

signal.
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
Laser Hazard Level

19.7.6 Valid Slots

Table 19-48 shows the valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board.
Table 19-48 Valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67

1821
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
Table 19-49 shows the valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board.
Table 19-49 Valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
NOTE
the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots.
on the NM is IU1.


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
IN
DM1
AM1
OUT
4
1822
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
DM2-DM4
5 to 7
AM2-AM4
8 to 10
MONO
11
MONI
12

For WSMD4 parameters, refer to Table 19-51.
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1823
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description

(dB)

Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band

board.
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)

MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: Even

Table 19-52 Optical specifications of the WSMD4 board
Item
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value
TN11WSMD4
TN12WSMD4
Optical channels
40
80
GHz
100
50
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
-1dB spectral width
nm
> 0.32
> 0.16

1824
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Insertion loss
dB
AMxa-OUT
IN-DMxa
Value
TN11WSMD4
TN12WSMD4
8b
8b
Maximum channel insertion

loss difference
dB
1.5
1.5
Port isolation
dB
> 25
> 25
Extinction ratio
dB
35
35
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
-40
Directivity
dB
35
35
dB

adding wavelength
dB
0-15
0-15

adding wavelength
dB
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (> 10 dB)
1.5 (> 10 dB)
Dimension
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11WSMD4: 3.2 kg (7.1 lb.)
TN12WSMD4: 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSMD4
17
18.7
TN12WSMD4
12
15

1825
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

19.8 WSMD9
WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board

The available functional version of the WSMD9 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
WSM
D9
19.8.2 Application
with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit
to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1826
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
Client side
O
T
U
MUX
DMUX
DCM
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
DM1
IN
LIN
AM1
EXPO
WSMD9
SIN
WSMD9
EXPO
DAS1
IN
SOUT
AM1
DCM
MUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
Client side
LOUT
OUT
EXPI
OUT
LOUT
SIN
EXPI
SOUT
DAS1
DCM
LIN
DM1
DMUX
O
T
U
DCM
O
T
U
Client side
NOTE
Optical interfaces AM2AM8 and DM2DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards
in other dimensions.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function

optical path as nine channels of the same signals, and can input any
wavelengths added locally to any port.
WDM specification
Supports the DWDM specification. The wavelength of the

TN11WSMD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing.

1827
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment

Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The WSMD9 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and
optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 19-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board.
Figure 19-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board
DDDDDDDD
MMMMMMMM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXPO EXPI
A A A A A A A A
MMMMMMMM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Optical demultiplexer
module
Splitter
IN
MONI
Splitter
OUT
Splitter
WSS optical
module
RDU optical
module
MONO
Optical module
PIN
PIN
Temperature
detection
Optical power deteciton module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC

1828
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal flow
The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface.
It is broadcast into nine same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The nine channels
of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces separately.
One channel of the signals is dropped locally through the multiplexer board and the other eight
channels of signals are scheduled to other eight directions.
A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and
are then output through the MONI interface for performance detection.
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI
optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input
through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are
Module function
l
Optical module
The RDU optical module broadcasts signals in nine directions. The nine channels of
optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces
separately.
The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of
the following optical interfaces: AM1 - AM8 and EXPI.


Power supply module

19.8.5 Front Panel

board.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1829
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

WSMD9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION
HAZARDLEVEL 1MINVISIBLE
LASERRADIATION
DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH
NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS
DM1
AM1
DM2 AM2
DM3
AM3
DM4 AM4
DM5
AM5
DM6 AM6
MONO MONI
DM7
OUT
AM7
IN
DM8 AM8
EXPO EXPI
WSMD9
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 22 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSMD9 board. Table 19-54 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1830
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
AM1-AM8
LC

DM1-DM8
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
IN
LC
MONI
LC

signal.
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm)
= 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO
LC

signal.
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
EXPO
LC
EXPI
LC
Laser Hazard Level

19.8.6 Valid Slots

Table 19-55 shows the valid slots for the WSMD9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1831
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-55 Valid slots for the WSMD9 board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
NOTE
the slot number of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots.
on the NM is IU1.


Interface on the NM
IN
EXPO
EXPI
OUT
DM1-DM8
5-12
AM1-AM8
13-20
19.8.8 WSMD9 Parameters

For WSMD9 Parameters, refer to Table 19-57.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1832
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.

(dB)


(dB)

Configure Band
C
Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Used to configure type of the working band

of a board.
Actual Band

board.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: All

1833
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)

MUT_LOS alarm.
information.

Table 19-58 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD9 board
Item
Unit
Value
Optical channels
80
GHz
50
Insertion loss
dB
8b
AMxa/EXPI-OUT
IN-DMxa/EXPO
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
12
dB
1.5
nm
1529-1561
-1dB spectral width
nm
> 0.16
Port isolation
dB
> 25
Extinction ratio
dB
35
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Directivity
dB
35
dB
Attenuation range of each of adding

wavelength
dB
0 to 15

1834
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Attenuation precision of each of adding

wavelength
dB
< 1 (0 to 10 dB)
Dimension
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)

9
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSMD9
25
30

1835
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20 Optical Amplifier Unit
20
Optical Amplifier Unit
About This Chapter

20.1 CRPC
CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band
20.2 DAS1
DAS1: optical amplifier unit
20.3 HBA
HBA: high-power booster amplifier board
20.4 OAU1
OAU1: optical amplifier unit
20.5 OBU1
OBU1: optical booster unit
20.6 OBU2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1836
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20.1 CRPC
CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band

The available functional version of the CRPC board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
CRP
C
Type
Table 20-1 lists the types of the CRPC board.
Table 20-1 Type description of the CRPC board
Board
Type
Description
CRPC
01
Adopts the backward pumping technology.
03
Adopts the forward pumping technology.
20.1.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the CRPC board adopts backward pumping technology. It
supports transmission over ultra-long distance and application of the 40G OTU, and can generate
multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC board must be used with the EDFA.
CAUTION
Always turn off the pump laser of the CRPC board before removing or inserting the fiber to the
CRPC.
For the position of the CRPC board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-1 and Figure 20-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1837
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-1 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (backward pump)
Client
side
Client
side
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
D
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OBU1
OAU1
F
I
U
F
I
U
CRPC
F
I
U
F
I
U
CRPC
OAU1
OBU1
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side
Figure 20-2 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (forward pump)
Client
side
Client
side
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
D
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OBU1
OAU1
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
CRPC
CRPC
F
I
U
OAU1
OBU1
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side

The main function and feature supported by the CRPC board is online optical performance
monitoring.
Table 20-2 Functions and features of the CRPC board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing

energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber.
l Implements the distributed online amplification of signals over
long distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Detects the optical power of the pump laser, temperature control

current, pump current, and back facet current.
Supports return loss detection.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

1838
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The CRPC board consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detection module,
The CRPC board is used at the receive end and the transmit end of the system, making use of
the stimulated Raman scattering effect to amplify the optical signals during transmission.
The CRPC board is located before the receiver. The pump light travels in the reverse direction
of the signal light. Figure 20-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC.
The CRPC board is located after the transmit end. The pump light travels in the same direction
of the signal light. Figure 20-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC.
Figure 20-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (backward pump)
LINE
Splitter
Signal
Signal
Pump light
Pump source
Raman pump optical module
Detection for
pump light
power and
current
Pumping
current and
temperature
control
PIN
SYS
MON
Detection for
temperature
Driving and detection module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
DC power supply
from PDU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
1839
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (forward pump)
LINE
Splitter
Signal
Signal
Pump light
Pump source
MON
Detection for
pump light
power and
current
Pumping
current and
temperature
control
PIN
SYS
Detection for
temperature
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
DC power supply
from PDU
Signal Flow
l
Backward pump
The pump source of the CRPC board sends the pump light to the WDM side through the
LINE optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed
amplification are input through the LINE interface. The splitter then splits them into two,
among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few
supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8)
or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring.
For OptiX OSN 6800: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2
interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with
the SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32/: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC
board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI2 board for the
communication with the SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the
ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC.
Forward pump
The signal light is input through the SYS interface and output to the optical line through
the LINE interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum
analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1840
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

optical performance monitoring. The pump light that is generated by the CRPC board is
output to the optical line through the LINE interface in the same direction as the signal
light, to implement the distributed amplification of the optical signal.
For OptiX OSN 6800: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2
interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for communication with the
SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32/: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC
board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI2 board for the
communication with the SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the
ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC.
Module Function
l

The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical
line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated
Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission.
The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two
channels of signals of different power. One of them is output through the SYS interface
and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals is output to the
MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.

Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating
temperature of the pump laser inside the pump optical module.
Drives the pump laser inside the pump optical module.
Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.

Power supply module

20.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the CRPC board.

Figure 20-5 shows the front panel of the CRPC board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1841
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-5 Front panel of the CRPC board

MON
SYS
LINE
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
CRPC
ALM
RUN
WARNING: FIBERS MUST

BE CONNECTED SEFORE
POWER UP
RS232-1
RS232-2
LAN
Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel.
l
Service alarm indicator (ALM) - red
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the CRPC board. Table 20-3 lists the type and
Table 20-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CRPC board
Interface
Type
Function
LINE
LSH/APC
Receives the line optical signal.
SYS
LC
Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU.
MON
LC
Connected to the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, monitors

performance online.
The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal
at the SYS port (20 dB lower than the actual signal
power, calculation formula: Psys (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
LAN
RJ-45
For OptiX OSN 6800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2

of the AUX interface or the ETH3 interface of the EFI
board for the communications with the SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2/
ETH3 of the EFI2 board for the communications with
the SCC.
RS232-1/
RS232-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
RS232 communication interface

1842
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Laser Hazard Level

After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M,
which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges from10
dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.1.6 Valid Slots

The CRPC board is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is installed outside the cabinet and not
inside the subrack.
Table 20-4 shows the valid slots for the CRPC board.
Table 20-4 Valid slots for the CRPC board
Product
Supported Logical Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
120-123
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
120-123
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
120-123
OptiX OSN 6800
Non-extended slot numbering mode: 28-31

Extended slot numbering mode: 120-123
20.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper

There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and
J4.
Figure 20-6 shows the number of each jumper.
Figure 20-6 Jumpers on the CRPC board
CRPC
10
10
J3
J4
CPU
Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensure
the normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers.
For OptiX OSN 6800:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1843
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3.
Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Non-extended slot numbering mode)
Connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Extended slot numbering mode)
Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4.
Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are
jumper setting regulations in the non-extended slot numbering mode:
When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU28.
When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board
slot is IU29.
When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board
slot is IU30.
When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU31.
The following are jumper setting regulations in the extended slot numbering mode:
slot is IU121.
slot is IU122.
For OptiX OSN 8800:

l
Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are
jumper setting regulations:
slot is IU121.
slot is IU122.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1844
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20.1.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC

The characteristic code for the CRPC board contains one character and two digits, indicating
the gain of the optical signals processed by the board.
Table 20-5 Characteristic code for the CRPC board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Is always G.
Two digits
Gain
Indicate the gain value.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.


Table 20-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
LINE
SYS
MON

For CRPC parameters, refer to Table 20-7.
Table 20-7 CRPC parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.

1845
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Board Work Type
C, C + L, L
Sets the working mode of a board.

According to the board working mode, you
can specify the type of the band from which
the optical signals are accessed.
Default: C
Actual Band

board.
Configure Band
Default: C
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: Off

status of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Fixed Pump Optical

Power (dBm)
The Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

parameter sets or queries the output optical
power of an optical amplifier board.
See D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power
information.
Minmun Fixed
Pump Optical Power
(dBm)
The Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power

(dBm) parameter is used to query the
minimum pump optical power that an
optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed
pump optical power value is smaller than
the minimum value, the board might work
abnormally.
See D.34 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical
Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Maxmun Fixed
Pump Optical Power
(dBm)
The Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical

Power (dBm) parameter is used to query
the maximum pump optical power that an
optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed
pump optical power value is larger than the
maximum value, the board might work
abnormally.
See D.31 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical
Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: All

1846
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20.1.11 Specifications of the CRPC

Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.
Table 20-8 Optical specifications of the CRPC board
Item
Un
it
Value
CRPC01
CRPC03
Pump wavelength range
nm
1400-1500
1400-1500
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
Maximum pump power
dB
m
29
29.5
Channel gain on G.652 fiber
dB
> 10
> 10
Channel gain on G.653 fiber
dB
NA
> 16
Channel gain on LEAF fiber
dB
> 12
NA
Channel gain on TWRS fiber
dB
> 13
NA
Effective noise figure on G.652

fiber
dB
NA
Effective noise figure on G.653

fiber
dB
NA
NA
Effective noise figure on LEAF

fiber
dB
-1
NA
Effective noise figure on

TWRS fiber
dB
-1.5
NA
dB
0.5
0.5
Output connector type
LSH/APC, LC/PC
LSH/APC, LC/PC
l
Dimensions of board: 345.0 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 76.0 mm (W) or 13.8 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 3.0 in. (W)
Weight
l
CRPC01: 4.0 kg (8.8 1b.)
CRPC03: 4.2 kg (9.2 1b.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1847
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
CRPC01
110.0
121.0
CRPC03
70.0
77.0
20.2 DAS1
DAS1: optical amplifier unit

The available functional version of the DAS1 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
DAS1
20.2.2 Application
The DAS1 board is used to amplify optical signals, multiplex and demultiplex the optical
supervisory channel and main optical channel, and process optical supervisory signals in one
direction. The DAS1 board can be used at either the transmit end or the receive end.
For the position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-7.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1848
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-7 Position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system

Client side
Client side
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
MUX
DMUX
DCM
O
T
U
DM1
IN
LIN
AM1
EXPO
SIN
DAS1
WSMD9
SIN
WSMD9
EXPO
SOUT
AM1
DCM
MUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
Client side
DAS1
IN
EXPI
OUT
LOUT
OUT
EXPI
SOUT
LOUT
DCM
LIN
DM1
DMUX
O
T
U
DCM
O
T
U
Client side
NOTE
Optical interfaces AM2AM8 and DM2DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards
in other dimensions.
It is recommended that the DAS1 board be used at a ROADM station.
The DAS1 board cannot be used at an OLA station.

The DAS1 board integrates the functions of an optical amplifier unit, an FIU board (used to
multiplexes the main optical channel and supervisory channel or demultiplexes the supervisory
channel from the main channel signal), and an optical supervisory board. It supports gain
adjustment, in-service monitoring of optical performance, gain locking, and transient state
control.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1849
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-9 Functions and features of the DAS1 board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total

wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans
without electrical regeneration.
l Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main
l Processes one channel of optical supervisory signals.
l Supports transparent transmission of one channel of FE electrical
signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Gain adjustment
The DAS1 board continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB

based on the input optical power.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small number of EDFAamplified optical signals is output through this interface to the optical
spectrum analysis board. In this manner, the spectrum and optical
performance of the multiplexed signal are monitored without
interrupting the services.
Gain lock function
The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or
dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not
affect the signal gain of other channels.
Transient control
function
The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When
channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation
of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth
upgrading and expansion.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l Detects and reports the optical power.
OSC signal
regeneration
The DAS1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has
the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical
amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory
signals are added.
Operating
wavelength for OSC
signals
1511nm
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
eSFP
The RX/TX optical port supports pluggable optical modules.
l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser.

l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump
cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient
temperature of the board.

1850
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The DAS1 board consists of the multiplexer, VOA, EDFA module, demultiplexer, OSC optical
module, service processing module, driving and detection module, control and communication
module, and power supply module.
Figure 20-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board.
Figure 20-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board
RTDC RRDC MONR
LIN
Demultiplexer
RVI
VOA
RPAIN
EDFA module
Splitter
SOUT
TM
RX
TX
O/E
FE signal
processing module
E/O
Supervisory signal
processing module
OSC optical
module
WSC
RM
LOUT
EDFA module
Splitter
Multiplexer
TBA
IN
TBA
OUT
MONT
TRDC
TTDC
PIN
VOA
SIN
PIN
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Required voltage
Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlledby SCC)
1851
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
Signal flow in the main optical channel
l
In the transmit direction:

The board receives line optical signals through the LIN optical interfaces and sends the
signals to the demultiplexer module.
The demultiplexer splits OSC signals from main optical channel signals. The
demultiplexer outputs OSC signals through the TM optical interface and sends the main
optical channel signals to the VOA.
The VOA adjusts optical power of the main optical channel signals and then sends the
signals to the EDFA optical module.
The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain
of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board
through the RTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion
for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the RRDC optical
interface. Then, the EDFA module outputs the amplified signals through the SOUT
optical interface.
In the receive direction:

The board receives multiplexed signals through the SIN optical interface and sends the
signals to the VOA.
The VOA adjusts optical power of the signals and then sends the signals to the EDFA
optical module.
The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain
of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board
through the TTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion
for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the TRDC optical
interface. The EDFA optical module sends the amplified multiplexed signals to the
multiplexer module.
The multiplexer multiplexes the amplified multiplexed signals and OSC signals input
through the RM optical interface as line optical signals, and outputs the signals through
the LOUT optical interface.
Signal flow in the OSC

l
The board receives OSC signals through the TM optical interface, and sends the OSC
signals to the optical receiver module through the RX optical interface.
The optical receiver module converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends
the electrical signals to the service processing module.
The service processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals and sends
the overhead bytes to the SCC board. This module also processes FE electrical signals.
The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board are sent to the optical receiver module
and then are converted into OSC signals by the optical receiver module.
The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board.
After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs.
Signal flow in the FE

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
In the transmit direction: The DAS1 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its
WSC port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the
DAS1 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal through its TX port.
1852
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board.
After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs.
l
In the receive direction: The DAS1 board receives an optical signal from the upstream
board through its LIN port. The demultiplexer splits FE optical signal from main optical
channel signals. The demultiplexer outputs FE signal through the TM optical interface and
sends it to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation through the RX optical
interface. Then, the DAS1 board drops it through its WSC port.
Module Function
l
Multiplexer
Multiplexes main optical channel signals and OSC signals as line optical signals.
Demultiplexer
Demultiplexes line optical signals into main optical channel signals and OSC signals.
VOA
Adjusts optical power of optical signals according to system requirements.
EDFA optical module

Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification.
The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal
to implement the optical power amplification function.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power
detection.

FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals.
Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into
OTU frames, processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding.
OSC optical module

Performs O/E and E/O conversion for one channel of OSC signals.

temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA.
Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

1853
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the DAS1 board.

Figure 20-9 shows the front panel of the DAS1 board.
Figure 20-9 Front panel of the DAS1 board
DAS1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
WSC
TX
RX
TM
RM
MONT MONR LOUT LIN
SOUT SIN
TTDC
TRDC
RTDC RRDC
DAS1
Indicators
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1854
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces and one FE electrical interface on the front panel of the DAS1
board. Table 20-10 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 20-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DAS1 board
Interface
Type
Function
WSC
RJ45
Transmits/Receives the FE electrical signals.
TX
LC
Transmits the supervisory signal.
RX
LC
Receives the supervisory signal.
TM
LC
RM
LC
MONT
LC
MONR
LC
Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU,

accomplishes the online performance monitoring.
The MONT port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite
signal at the LOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Plout (dBm) Pmont (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
The MONR port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite
signal at the SOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Psout (dBm) Pmonr (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
LOUT
LC
Transmits the amplified signal (including the

supervisory signal).
LIN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified

(including the supervisory signal).
SOUT
LC
Transmits the amplified signal(not including the

supervisory signal).
SIN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified (not

including the supervisory signal).
TTDC/TRDC
LC
RTDC/RRDC
LC
Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion

compensation.
Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC interface on the DAS1
board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1855
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Laser Hazard Level

20.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot house one DAS1 board.
Table 20-11 shows the valid slots for the DAS1 board.
Table 20-11 Valid slots for the DAS1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


Table 20-12 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DAS1 board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
LIN/LOUT
RM/TM
RX/TX
RVIa
RPAINa
RRDC
SOUT
RTDC
10
MONR
11
1856
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
SIN
12
TPAINa
13
TRDC
15
TBAOUTa
16
TTDC
17
MONT
18
a: Virtual port
20.2.8 DAS1 Parameters

For parameters of the DAS1, refer to Table 20-13.
Table 20-13 DAS1 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
This parameter provides an option to set the

optical power attenuation of a board
channel so that the input signals power of
the board is within the preset range.
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1857
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Actual Band

board.
Configure Band

of a board.
Default: C
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: All

Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)

MUT_LOS alarm.
Laser Status
Off, On

status of a board.
Default: On

Gain (dB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain

of an optical amplifier board, namely, the
difference of the output power (dBm) to the
input power (dBm).
See D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for
more information.

1858
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal
Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter

specifies the desired gain of the signal
optical power. This parameter is used to
indicate the relative value between the
optical power of output signals and the
optical power of input signals, namely, the
amplifying multiple of the signal optical
power.
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold
(dB) parameters.
Default: The specific

value is related to the
module.
See D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM

Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold

(dB) parameter provides an option to query
the maximum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter
value cannot be set and depends on the
optical module type.
The value can be queried.
See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Nominal Gain Lower

Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold

the minimum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot
be set and depends on the optical module
type.
See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower
more information.
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40

Mode, CWDM Mode
Sets the number of wavelengths supported

by the FIU board.
Default: C80 Mode

DEG Threshold
0 to 10167
Default: 190
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An

alarm is reported when error codes detected
in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more
than the value of this parameter.

1859
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
DEG Monitoring
Time(s)
2 to 10
Sets the signal monitoring time. If the

number of bit errors in the signal exceeds
DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm
is reported.
Degrade Threshold
Before FEC
1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3,

1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6,
1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9,
1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12,
Default: 7
Sets error codes thresholds for signals

before FEC.
Default: 1E-4
Rated Optical Power
(dBm)
-30 - 30
board.
The Rated Optical Power (dBm)

parameter provides an option to set and
query the per-channel rated optical power.
It is a reference value for automatic
adjustment of the optical power. When the
optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are
used in a network, this parameter is
available for the optical amplifier unit.
The value can be set or queried.
See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm)
PMD Coefficient(ps/
SQRT(km))
0-1
Fiber Type
G652 Fiber, G653

Fiber, LEAF Fiber,
TWRS Fiber, TWC
Fiber, TWPLUS
Fiber, SMFLS Fiber,
G654B Fiber
Default: 0.05
This parameter is available only in the

ASON system. Set the parameter
according to the fiber type. Usually, take
the nominal value of the fiber.
Specifies the type of a fiber.
Default: G652 Fiber
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
-15 - 30
Send DCM
Dispersion
Compensation Value
(ps/nm)
0.0 - 6553.5
Receive DCM
Dispersion
Compensation Value
(ps/nm)
0.0 - 6553.5
Default: 0
Default: 0
Default: 0
This parameter is available only in the

ASON system. Set the parameter
according to the fiber type. Usually, take
the nominal value of the fiber.
Specifies the dispersion compensation
value for the DCM at the transmit end.
Specifies the dispersion compensation

value for the DCM at the receive end.

1860
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20.2.9 Specifications of the DAS1

Table 20-14 Optical specifications of the TN11DAS1 board
Item
Specifica
tions of
OA
Uni
t
Value
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
Nominal gain
dB
20
26
31
Nominal input power range
dB
m
-32 to 0
-32 to -6
-32 to -11
Input power range

per channel
40
channels
dB
m
-32 to -16
-32 to -22
-32 to -27
80
channels
dB
m
-32 to -19
-32 to -25
-32 to -30
40
channels
dB
m
-16
-22
-27
80
channels
dB
m
-19
-25
-30
Noise figure (NF)a
dB
8.5
5.5
5.5
Gain response time on adding/

dropping of channels
ms
< 10
< 10
< 10
Channel gain
dB
20 to 31
Gain flatness
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
Multi-channel gain slope
dB/
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Pump leakage at input
dB
m
< -30
< -30
< -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance

at input
dB
-27
-27
-27
Maximum reflectance tolerance

at output
dB
-27
-27
-27
Maximum total output optical

power
dB
m
20
20
20
Nominal singlewavelength input

optical power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1861
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Specifica
tions of
demultipl
exer and
multiplex
er
Specifica
tions of
OSC
optical
module
Uni
t
Value
dB
0.5
Input VOA inherent insertion

loss
dB
1.5
Input VOA dynamic attenuation

range
dB
20
Input VOA adjustment accuracy
dB
Operating wavelength range of

optical supervisory channel
nm
1480 to 1520
Optical return loss
dB
> 40
dB
1.5
Insert loss of C-band
dB
dB
< 0.2
nm
1504.5 to 1517.5
Signal rate
Mbi
t/s
155.52
Launched optical power
dB
m
0.5 to 5
dB
m
-41
Receiver overload
dB
m
-10
Insert loss of optical

supervisory
channel
LIN-TM
0.5
0.5
RMLOUT
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise
figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1862
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11DAS1
22
28.6
20.3 HBA
HBA: high-power booster amplifier board

The available functional version of the HBA board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
HBA
20.3.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the HBA board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end.
For the position of the HBA board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-10.
Figure 20-10 Position of the HBA board in the WDM system
Client
side
Client
side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OTU
OTU
MUX
OTU
OTU
HBA
FIU
DMUX
OAU1
DMUX
HBA
MUX
FIU
OAU1
OTU

OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side
1863
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The HBA board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and
transient control.
Table 20-15 Functions and features of the HBA board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Only applied on the transmit edge of the OTM station in the system
that covers a long fiber span transmission.
l The HBA can amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total
Typical gain
The typical gain of the HBA is 29 dB.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Gain lock function
Transient control
function
of the optical power in the path to implement smooth upgrade and
expansion.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Optical-layer ASON
Supported


The HBA board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
Figure 20-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1864
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board
Splitter
IN
OUT
EDFA optical module

Driving
current
PIN
MON
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA
optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks
the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l
EDFA optical module

detection.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1865
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l

Power supply module

20.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the HBA board.

Figure 20-12 shows the front panel of the HBA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1866
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-12 Front panel of the HBA board
HBA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
IN
OUT
HBA
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the HBA board. Table 20-16 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1867
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HBA board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified.
OUT
LSH/APC
Transmits the amplified signal.
MON
LC
Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, WMU or OPM8,

monitors performance online.
signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon
(dBm) = 10 x lg (999/1) = 30 dB).
Laser Hazard Level

which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges from
10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.3.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one HBA board.
Table 20-17 shows the valid slots for the HBA board.
Table 20-17 Valid slots for the HBA board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU2-IU7, IU12-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU16
NOTE
l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot of the three occupied slots
in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is the number of the
middle slot.
l For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the HBA board, the slot number of the HBA board displayed
on the NM is IU2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1868
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20.3.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA

The characteristic code for the HBA board contains seven characters and digits, indicating the
band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by
the board.
Table 20-18 Characteristic code for the HBA board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character
The second character is

always G.
Third to the fourth digits
Gain
The third to the fourth digits

indicate the gain value.
Fifth character
The fifth character is always

I.
Sixth and seventh digits
Maximum nominal input

optical power
Indicate the maximum

nominal input optical power.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates
that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical
power is -8 dBm.


Table 20-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
MON

1869
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


For HBA parameters, refer to Table 20-20.
Table 20-20 HBA parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Actual Band
Configure Band
Used to configure type of the working band of

a board.
Default: C
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)

information.
Laser Status
Off, On

status of a board.
Default: On

more information.
Gain (dB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of

an optical amplifier board, namely, the
input power (dBm).
more information.

1870
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal
Gain Lower
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies

the desired gain of the signal optical power.
This parameter is used to indicate the relative
value between the optical power of output
signals and the optical power of input signals,
namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal
optical power.
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and
Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
parameters.
Default: 29

Nominal Gain
Upper Threshold
(dB)
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

maximum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value
cannot be set and depends on the optical
module type.
See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold
(dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Nominal Gain
Lower Threshold
(dB)
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)

minimum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be
set and depends on the optical module type.
See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold
(dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All

1871
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Rated Optical
Power (dBm)
-30 - 30
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter

provides an option to set and query the perchannel rated optical power. It is a reference
value for automatic adjustment of the optical
power. When the optical amplifier unit and
ROADM unit are used in a network, this
parameter is available for the optical amplifier
unit.
Default:
l IN: -19
l OUT: 4

20.3.10 Specifications of the HBA

Table 20-21 Optical specifications of the HBA board
Item
Unit
Value
Type
TN11HBA
Channel allocation
nm
1529 - 1561
dBm
-25 to -3
Typical input power of a single

wavelength
dBm
80-channel system: -22

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Noise figure (NF)
dB
<8
Input reflectance
dB
< -45
Output reflectance
dB
< -45
Maximum total output power
dBm
26
Gain response time on adding/dropping of

channels
ms
< 10
Channel gain
dB
291
Gain flatness
dB
2.5
dB
< 0.5

1872
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
HBA
47
75
20.4 OAU1
OAU1: optical amplifier unit

The available functional versions of the OAU1 board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
OAU
1
TN12
OAU
1
TN13
OAU
1
Type
Table 20-22 lists the types of the OAU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1873
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-22 Type description of the OAU1 board

Unit
Type
Description
Gain Range
TN11OAU1
01
Amplifies the input optical signals in C band.
20 dB to 31 dB
02
20 dB to 31 dB
03
24 dB to 36 dB
05
23 dB to 34 dB
00
16 dB to 25.5 dB
01
20 dB to 31 dB
02
20 dB to 31 dB
03
24 dB to 36 dB
05
23 dB to 34 dB
01
20 dB to 31 dB
03
24 dB to 36 dB
05
23 dB to 34 dB
TN12OAU1
TN13OAU1

l
Function:
The TN11OAU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical power, whereas
the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 board supports. For details, see 20.4.4 Working
Principle and Signal Flow.
Appearance:
The TN11, TN12 and TN13 versions have different front panels. For details, see 20.4.5
Front Panel.
Specification:
For the power consumption of each version, see 20.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OAU1
TN12OAU
1,
TN13OAU
1
The TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 can be created as

TN11OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the
latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the
TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 function as the TN11OAU1.

1874
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN12OAU1
TN13OAU
1
The TN13OAU1 can be created as TN12OAU1 on the NMS.

The former can substitute for the latter at tpye 01,03,05, without
any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13OAU1
functions as the TN12OAU1.
TN13OAU1
None
20.4.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OAU1 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end
or receive end.
For the position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-13.
Figure 20-13 Position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system
Client
side
Client
side
OTU
MUX
OBU1
DMUX
OAU1
OAU1
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OBU1
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side

The OAU1 is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain
lock, and transient control.
Table 20-23 Functions and features of the OAU1 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1875
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Gain adjustment
The OAU100 continuously adjusts the gain from 16 dB to 25.5 dB

based on the input optical power.
The OAU101/OAU102 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to
31 dB based on the input optical power.
The OAU103 continuously adjusts the gain from 24 dB to 36 dB based
on the input optical power.
The OAU105 continuously adjusts the gain from 23 dB to 34 dB based
on the input optical power.
NOTE
20.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1 only provides the value of nominal gain.
Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal
gain.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Gain lock function
Transient control
function
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Optical-layer ASON
Supported


The OAU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
Figure 20-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1 board. Figure
20-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1876
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1

TDC
PAOUT
IN
RDC
MON
BAIN
OUT
EDFA optical module

Driving
current
PIN
Splitter
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
1877
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1
TDC
PAOUT
IN
MON
BAIN
OUT
EDFA optical module

VOA
VO
RDC
Driving
current
Splitter
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
PIN
VI
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion
compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through the RDC interface. At last, the
amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical
power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then, the IN
interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals.
Module Function
l
EDFA optical module

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1878
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

detection.
l


Power supply module

20.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OAU1
board.

Figure 20-16, Figure 20-17 and Figure 20-18 show the front panel of the OAU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1879
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-16 Front panel of the TN11OAU1 board

OAU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION
LASERRADIATION
MON
OUT
IN
TDC
RDC
OAU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1880
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


OAU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION
LASERRADIATION
MON
OUT
IN
TDC
RDC
VO
VI
OAU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1881
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


OAU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION
LASERRADIATION
MON
OUT
IN
TDC
RDC
VO
VI
OAU1
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are five optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OAU1. There are seven optical
interfaces on the front panel of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1. Table 20-24 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1882
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OAU1 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC
TDC/RDC
LC
Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion

compensation.
MON
LC

at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal
power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm)
= 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB).
VIa
LC
VOa
LC

interface.
a: Only the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 boards support the interfaces.
Laser Hazard Level

OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103:
OAU105:
which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm
(10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.4.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11OAU1 board or TN12OAU1 board, and one slot houses one
TN13OAU1 board.
Table 20-25 shows the valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board.
Table 20-25 Valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

1883
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU4, IU11
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU4, IU11
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800:

l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore,
the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 6800:
the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 3800:
l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore,
the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 displayed on the
NM is IU2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

1884
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
20.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1

The characteristic code for the OAU1 board contains eight characters and digits, indicating the
gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
Table 20-28 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Is always G.
Second to fifth digits
Gain range
Indicates the range within

which the gain can be
continuously adjusted.
Sixth character
Is always I.

optical power
Indicates the maximum

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates
that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input
optical power is 0 dBm.


are listed in Table 20-29 and Table 20-30.
Table 20-29 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OAU1 board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
IN
1
1885
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
PAOUTa
BAINa
OUT
RDC/TDC
MON
a: Virtual port
Table 20-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 board displayed
on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
PAOUTa
BAINa
OUT
RDC/TDC
MON
VI
VO
a: Virtual port

For parameters of the OAU1, refer to Table 20-31.
Table 20-31 OAU1 parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.

1886
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE
Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports
this parameter.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE
this parameter.

Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE
this parameter.

Actual Band

board.
Configure Band

of a board.
Default: C
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

MUT_LOS alarm.
information.

1887
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Off, On

status of a board.
Default: On

Gain (dB)

input power (dBm).
more information.
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal
Gain Lower
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)

power.
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold
(dB) parameters.

module.

Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)

amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter
value cannot be set and depends on the
optical module type.
See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper
more information.
Nominal Gain Lower

Threshold (dB)

type.
more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1888
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Upper Threshold of
Actual Gain (dB)
Default: All
Displays the upper threshold of the actual

gain of the optical amplifier unit.
NOTE
Only the TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.
Lower Threshold of
Actual Gain (dB)
Displays the lower threshold of the actual

gain of the optical amplifier unit.
NOTE
Only the TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.
Rated Optical Power

(dBm)
-30 - 30
board.

20.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1

Table 20-32 Optical specifications of the TN12OAU100 board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
Nominal gain
dB
16
22
25.5
dBm
-20 to 2
-26 to -4
-32 to -7.5
Input power range per

channel
40 channels
dBm
-32 to -14
-32 to -20
-32 to -23.5
80 channels
dBm
-32 to -17
-32 to -23
-32 to -26.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1889
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
40 channels
dBm
-14
-20
-23.5
80 channels
dBm
-17
-23
-26.5
Noise figure (NF)a
dB
5.5
5.5

ms
< 10
< 10
< 10
Channel gain
dB
16 to 25.5
Gain flatness
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
dB/dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at

input
dB
-27
-27
-27

output
dB
-27
-27
-27
Maximum total output optical power
dBm
18
18
18
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
VI-VO
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB
20
dB

optical power
Adjustment accuracy
Table 20-33 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/TN13OAU101 board

Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
Nominal gain
dB
20
26
31
dBm
-32 to 0
-32 to -6
-32 to -11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1890
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value

channel
40 channels
dBm
-32 to -16
-32 to -22
-32 to -27
80 channels
dBm
-32 to -19
-32 to -25
-32 to -30

optical power
40 channels
dBm
-16
-22
-27
80 channels
dBm
-19
-25
-30
dB
8.5
(TN11OAU101,
TN12OAU101)
5.5
5.5
< 10
< 10
Noise figure (NF)a
7.5
(TN13OAU101)
ms
< 10
Channel gain
dB
20 to 31
Gain flatness
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
dB/dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30

input
dB
-27
-27
-27

output
dB
-27
-27
-27
dBm
20
20
20
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
VI-VOb
Adjustment accuracyb
b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1891
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-34 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 board

Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
Nominal gain
dB
20
26
31
dBm
-32 to -3
-32 to -9
-32 to -14

channel
40 channels
dBm
-32 to -19
-32 to -25
-32 to -30
80 channels
dBm
-32 to -22
-32 to -28
-32

optical power
40 channels
dBm
-19
-25
-30
80 channels
dBm
-22
-28
-32
Noise figure (NF)a
dB
7.5
5.5
5.5

ms
< 10
< 10
< 10
Channel gain
dB
20 to 31
Gain flatness
dB
dB/dB
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30

input
dB
-27
-27
-27

output
dB
-27
-27
-27
dBm
17
17
17
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
VI-VOb
b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1892
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
Nominal gain
dB
24
29
36
dBm
-32 to -4
-32 to -9
-32 to -16
Input power range

per channel
40
channels
dBm
-32 to -20
-32 to -25
-32
80
channels
dBm
-32 to -23
-32 to -28
-32
40
channels
dBm
-20
-25
-32
80
channels
dBm
-23
-28
-32
dB
7.5
(TN11OAU103,
TN12OAU103)
5.5
5.5
< 10
< 10

optical power
Noise figure (NF)a
6.5
(TN13OAU103)
ms
< 10
Channel gain
dB
24 to 36
Gain flatness
dB
dB/dB
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30

input
dB
-27
-27
-27

output
dB
-27
-27
-27

power
dBm
20
20
20
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1893
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
VI-VOb
Unit
Value
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB
20
dB

Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
Nominal gain
dB
23
30
34
dBm
-32 to 0
-32 to -7
-32 to -11
Input power range

per channel
40
channels
dBm
-32 to -16
-32 to -23
-32 to -27
80
channels
dBm
-32 to -19
-32 to -26
-32 to -30
40
channels
dBm
-16
-23
-27
80
channels
dBm
-19
-26
-30
Noise figure (NF)a
dB
< 8.5
<6
<6

ms
< 10
< 10
< 10
Channel gain
dB
23 to 34
Gain flatness
dB
dB/dB
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
<-40
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30

optical power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1894
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value

input
dB
-27
-27
-27

output
dB
-27
-27
-27

power
dBm
23
23
23
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
VI-VOb
l

TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN13OAU1: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 1.8 kg (4.0 lb.)
TN13OAU1: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11OAU101
18.0
24.0
TN11OAU102
14.0
18.0
TN11OAU103
18.0
24.0
TN11OAU105
22.0
29.0

1895
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN12OAU100
11.0
14.0
TN12OAU101
12.0
15.0
TN12OAU102
10.0
13.0
TN12OAU103
12.0
15.0
TN12OAU105
15.0
21.0
TN13OAU101
12.0
15.0
TN13OAU103
12.0
15.0
TN13OAU105
15.0
21.0
20.5 OBU1

The available functional versions of the OBU1 board are TN11, TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
OBU
1
TN12
OBU
1
Type
Table 20-37 lists the types of the TN11OBU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1896
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-37 Type description of the TN11OBU1 board

Unit
Type
Description
Gain Range
TN11OBU1
01
201.5 dB
03
231.5 dB
04
171.5 dB
Table 20-38lists the types of the TN12OBU1 board.

Table 20-38 Type description of the TN12OBU1 board
Unit
Type
Description
Gain Range
TN12OBU1
01
201.5 dB
03
231.5 dB
04
171.5 dB
P1
The TN12BOU1P1 board is an OA board

intended for PID

l
Function:
The TN11OBU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical power of a
wavelength, whereas the TN12OBU1 board supports. For details, see 20.5.4 Working
Appearance:
Panel.
Specification:
For the power consumption of each version, see 20.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OBU1
TN12OBU
1
The TN12OBU1 can be created as TN11OBU1 on the NMS.

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU1 functions as the
TN11OBU1.
TN12OBU1
None

1897
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20.5.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU1 amplifies optical signals.
For the position of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board in the WDM system, see Figure
20-19.
Figure 20-19 Position of the OBU1 board in the WDM system
Client
side
Client
side
OTU
MUX
OBU1
OBU1
DMUX
OTU
OTU
DMUX
OBU1
OBU1
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side
For the position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-20.
Figure 20-20 Position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system
Client side
Tributary
board
NPO2
+
ENQ2
OBU1P1
OBU1P1
NPO2
+
ENQ2
Tributary
board
Client side
NOTE
The TN12BOU1P1 board, configured at the receive site, is an OA board intended for PID and is used together
with the TN55NPO2 board.
In a PID-featured NE with separated optical and electrical subracks, the TN12OBU1P1 board is configured on
the OptiX OSN 6800, and the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2 boards are configured on the OptiX OSN 8800.

The OBU1 board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and
transient control.
Table 20-39 Functions and features of the OBU1 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1898
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Typical gain
l The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB.

NOTE
20.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1 only provides the value of nominal gain.
gain.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Gain lock function
Transient control
function
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Optical-layer ASON
Supported


The OBU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
Figure 20-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board. Figure
20-22 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OBU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1899
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board
Splitter
IN
OUT
EDFA optical module
Driving
current
PIN
MON
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
SCC
1900
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Splitter
OUT
IN
EDFA optical module
Driving
current
VOA
VO
PIN
MON
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
VI
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC )
SCC
Signal Flow
power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN
interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.
NOTE
On a network where PID boards are used, optical signals are input through the TN12OBU1P1 board's VI port
and are transmitted over the fiber connection between its VO and IN ports.
Module Function
l
EDFA optical module

detection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1901
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



Power supply module

20.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU1
board.

Figure 20-23 and Figure 20-24 show the front panel of the OBU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1902
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-23 Front panel of the TN11OBU1 board
OBU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
OBU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1903
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OBU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
VO
VI
OBU1
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OBU1 board. And there are five
optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN121OBU1 board. Table 20-40 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1904
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-40 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU1 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC
MON
LC

power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
VIa
LC
VOa
LC

interface.
a: Only the TN12OBU1 board supports the interfaces.
Laser Hazard Level

20.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one OBU1 board.
Table 20-41 shows the valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board.
Table 20-41 Valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

1905
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
NOTE
The TN12OBU1P1 can be installed only in an OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.
20.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1

The characteristic code for the OBU1 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the
gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
Table 20-43 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
The first character is always

G.
Second and third digits
Gain
The second and the third

digits indicate the gain value.
Fourth character
The fourth character is

always I.

optical power
The fifth and the sixth digits

indicate the maximum
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1906
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-44 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OBU1 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
MON
Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
MON
VI
VO

For parameters of the OBU1, refer to Table 20-46.
Table 20-46 OBU1 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of Max.
Attenuation Rate
(dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE
Only the TN12OBU1/TN12OBU103/
TN12OBU104 support this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1907
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE

Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

parameter queries the minimum attenuation
of a board.
NOTE

Actual Band

board.
Configure Band

of a board.
Default: C
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)

alarm.
information.
Laser Status
Off, On

status of a board.
Default: On

Gain (dB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

input power (dBm).
more information.

1908
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal
Gain Lower
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)

power.
parameters.
Default:
l OBU101: 20dB
l OBU103: 23dB
l OBU104: 17dB

Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)

module type.
information.
Nominal Gain Lower

Threshold (dB)

type.
more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: All

1909
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Rated Optical Power

(dBm)
-30 - 30


board

20.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1

Table 20-47 Optical specifications of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board
Item
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value
TN11OBU10
1/
TN12OBU10
1
TN11OBU10
3/
TN12OBU10
3
TN11OBU10
4/
TN12OBU10
4
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
dBm
-32 to -4
-32 to -3
-32 to -1
Input power
range per
channel
40
channels
dBm
-32 to -20
-32 to -19
-32 to -17
-32 to -23
-32 to -22
-32 to -20
Nominal singlewavelength
input optical
power
40
channels
-20
-19
-17
-23
-22
-20
80
channels
dBm
80
channels
Noise figure (NF)
dB
5.5
6.0
5.5
Nominal gain
dB
20
23
17

ms
< 10
< 10
< 10

1910
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
TN11OBU10
1/
TN12OBU10
1
TN11OBU10
3/
TN12OBU10
3
TN11OBU10
4/
TN12OBU10
4
Channel gain
dB
201.5
231.5
171.5
Gain flatness
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at input
dB
-27
-27
-27
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at output
dB
-27
-27
-27

power
dBm
16
20
16
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuatio
n range
dB
20
dB
VI-VOa
Adjustment accuracya
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU1.
Table 20-48 Optical specifications of the OBU1P1 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529 to 1561
Total input power range at

the VI optical port
dBm
-30 to 7
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
dBm
< -30

1911
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at input
dB
-27
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at output
dB
-27
Maximum total output

optical power
dBm
dB/dB
2.0
dB
0.5
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11OBU1: 1.3 kg (2.9 1b.)
TN12OBU1: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OBU101
11.0
13.0
TN11OBU103
13.0
15.0
TN11OBU104
12.0
14.0
TN12OBU101
10.0
11.0
TN12OBU103
11.0
12.1
TN12OBU104
10.0
12.0
TN12OBU1P1
10.0
11.0
20.6 OBU2

The available functional versions of the OBU2 board are TN11 and TN12.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1912
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
OBU
2
TN12
OBU
2
Type
The OBU2 board is available only in one type, that is, OBU205.

l
Function:
The TN11OBU2 board does not support adjustment of input optical power of a
wavelength, whereas the TN12OBU2 board supports. For details, see 20.6.4 Working
Appearance:
Panel.
Specification:
For the power consumption of each version, see 20.6.10 Specifications of the OBU2.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OBU2
TN12OBU
2
The TN12OBU2 can be created as TN11OBU2 on the NMS.

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU2 functions as the
TN11OBU2.
TN12OBU2
None
20.6.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU2 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end
or receive end.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1913
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-25.
Figure 20-25 Position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system
Client
side
Client
side
OTU
MUX
OTU
OTU
DMUX
OBU2
OBU2
OBU2
OBU2
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side

The OBU2 is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient
control.
Table 20-49 Functions and features of the OBU2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function

Typical gain
The typical gain of the OBU205 is 23 dB.

NOTE
20.6.10 Specifications of the OBU2 only provides the value of nominal gain.
gain.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Gain lock function
Transient control
function

1914
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Optical-layer ASON
Supported


The OBU2 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
Figure 20-26 and Figure 20-27 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2
board.
Splitter
IN
OUT
EDFA optical
module
Driving
current
PIN
MON
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC

1915
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Splitter
OUT
IN
EDFA optical module
Driving
current
VOA
VO
PIN
MON
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
VI
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC )
SCC
Signal Flow
power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN
interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.
Module Function
l
EDFA optical module

detection.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1916
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l

Power supply module

20.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU2 board.

Figure 20-28 and Figure 20-29 show the front panel of the OBU2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1917
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OBU2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
OBU2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1918
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OBU2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
VO
VI
OBU2
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OBU2 board. There are five
optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN12OBU2 board. Table 20-50 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1919
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-50 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC
MON
LC

power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
VOa
LC

interface.
VIa
LC
a: Only the TN12OBU2 board supports the interfaces.
Laser Hazard Level

which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges from
10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.6.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one OBU2 board.
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU4, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1920
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU4, IU11
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800:

the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 6800:
the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 3800:
l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore,
the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 displayed on the
NM is IU2.
20.6.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2

Table 20-53 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

G.
Gain

Fourth character

always I.

1921
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description

optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.


Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
MON
Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
MON
VI
VO

For parameters of the OBU2, refer to Table 20-56.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1922
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-56 OBU2 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

optical power attenuation of a board channel
so that the input signals power of the board is
within the preset range.
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE
Only the TN12OBU2 supports this parameter.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

queries the maximum attenuation rate
allowed by the current optical interface of a
board.
NOTE

Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE

Actual Band
Configure Band

of a board.
Default: C
Input Power Loss
Threshold (dBm)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm.
information.

1923
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Off, On

status of a board.
Default: On

more information.
Gain (dB)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of

an optical amplifier board, namely, the
input power (dBm).
more information.
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal
Gain Lower
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies

the desired gain of the signal optical power.
This parameter is used to indicate the relative
value between the optical power of output
signals and the optical power of input signals,
namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal
optical power.
parameters.
Default: 23dB

Nominal Gain
Upper Threshold
(dB)
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

maximum nominal gain of the optical
module type.
information.
Nominal Gain
Lower Threshold
(dB)
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)

minimum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be
set and depends on the optical module type.
See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold
information.
Actual Working
Band Parity
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

of the board.

1924
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Rated Optical
Power (dBm)
-30 - 30
Default: All

board
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter

provides an option to set and query the perchannel rated optical power. It is a reference
value for automatic adjustment of the optical
power. When the optical amplifier unit and
ROADM unit are used in a network, this
parameter is available for the optical amplifier
unit.
20.6.10 Specifications of the OBU2

Table 20-57 Optical specifications of the OBU2 board
Item
Unit
Value
OBU205
nm
1529-1561
dBm
-24 to 0

channel
dBm
-24 to -16
40
Channels
80
Channels

optical power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
40
Channels
-24 to -19
dBm
80
Channels
-16
-19
Noise figure (NF)
dB
7.0
Nominal gain
dB
23

ms
< 10

1925
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
OBU205
Channel gain
dB
231.5
Gain flatness
dB
2.0
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
dBm
< -30

input
dB
-27

output
dB
-27

power
dBm
23
dB/dB
2.0
dB
0.5
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuatio
n range
dB
20
dB
VI-VOa
Adjustment accuracya
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU2.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11OBU2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.)
TN12OBU2: 1.6 kg (3.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OBU205
17
24

1926
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN12OBU205
14
19

1927
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21
21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit
Cross-Connect Unit and System and

Communication Unit
About This Chapter

21.1 SXM
SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
21.2 SXH
SXH: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
21.3 TN52XCH
TN52XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board
21.4 TN16XCH
TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board
21.5 XCM
XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross)
21.6 XCS
XCS: centralized cross connect board
21.7 XCT
XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
21.8 SCC
SCC: system control and communication unit
21.9 AUX
AUX: system auxiliary interface unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1928
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21.1 SXM
SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

The available functional versions of the SXM board are TNK2 and TNK4. The SXM board is
only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TNK
2SX
M
TNK
4SX
M

The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.1.7 Specifications of the
SXM.
Table 21-1 Substitution rules of the SXM board
Original
Board
Substitute Board
Substitution Rules
TNK2SXM
TNK4SXM
The TNK4SXM can be created as TNK2SXM on

the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter,
without any software upgrade. After substitution,
the TNK4SXM functions as the TNK2SXM.
TNK4SXM
None
None
21.1.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXM cross-connects services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1929
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the position of the SXM board in the system, see Figure 21-1 and Figure 21-2.
Independent use of the SXM board

Figure 21-1 Position of the SXM board in the OCS system
1
SLO16
STM-16
SLQ64
SLQ64
SXM
SLQ64
SLQ64
STM-16
SLO16
SXM
Joint use of the SXM board and the XCT board

Figure 21-2 Position of the SXM board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
NS2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
XCT
SXM
MUX
DMUX 4
4
NS2
DMUX
MUX 4
WDM side
client side
NS2
SXM
XCT
TOM
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
WDM side
client side

The SXM board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 21-2 Functions and features of the SXM board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Grooms services.
Cross-connect
function
Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming.

Supports a maximum of 80 Gbit/s lower-order VC-12 and VC-3
cross-connect grooming.
Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk cross-connect grooming
when the SXM board is jointly used with the XCT board.
Protection scheme
l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection.

l provides 1+1 hot backup.
l provides 1+1 warm backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1930
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Switching mode
Supports manual switching and auto switching.

Supports non-revertive switching.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The SXM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 21-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board.
Figure 21-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board
VC-12/VC-3/VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/
ODU2e/ODU3/ODU3e/ODUflex
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Module Function
l
The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane,
performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/VC-3/VC-12/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, flex) service,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1931
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module
implements service cross-connection.
l

Power supply module

21.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the SXM board.

Figure 21-4 shows the front panel of the SXM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1932
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-4 Front panel of the SXM board

SXM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
SXM
Indicators
l
Interfaces
The SXM board does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1933
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SXM board.
Table 21-3 shows the valid slots for the SXM board.
Table 21-3 Valid slots for the SXM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU10, IU44
21.1.7 Specifications of the SXM

Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
TNK2SXM:
l
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
Weight: 3.74 kg (8.2lb.)
TNK4SXM:
l
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
Weight: 3.00 kg (6.59b.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK2SXM
+TNK2XCT
190
209
5303.6 x (64
n)
5833.6 x (64
n)
TNK4SXM
+TNK4XCT
97
107
1881.2 x (64
n)
2071.32 x (64
n)
TNK2SXM
+TNK4XCT
173
190
3782.5 x (64
n)
4162.5 x (64
n)
TNK4SXM
+TNK2XCT
114
125
3242.5 x (64
n)
3562.5 x (64
n)

1934
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM
and XCT must be configured.
n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
21.2 SXH
SXH: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

The available functional versions of the SXH board are TNK2 and TNK4. The SXH board is

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TNK
2SXH
TNK
4SXH

SXH.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1935
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute Board
Substitution Rules
TNK2SXH
TNK4SXH
The TNK4SXH can be created as TNK2SXH on

the TNK4SXH functions as the TNK2SXH.
TNK4SXH
None
None
21.2.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXH cross-connects services.
For the position of the SXH board in the system, see Figure 21-5 and Figure 21-6.
Independent use of the SXH board

Figure 21-5 Position of the SXH board in the OCS system
1
SLO16
STM-16
SLQ64
SLQ64
SXH
SLQ64
SLQ64
STM-16
SLO16
SXH
Joint use of the SXH board and the XCT board

Figure 21-6 Position of the SXH board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
NS2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
XCT
MUX
DMUX 4
NS2
4
SXH
NS2
DMUX
WDM side
client side
MUX 4
SXH
XCT
TOM
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
WDM side
client side

The SXH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1936
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 21-4 Functions and features of the SXH board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Grooms services.
Cross-connect
function
Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming.
Protection scheme

when the SXH board is jointly used with the XCT board.

Switching mode

Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The SXH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 21-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SXH board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1937
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXH board
VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/
ODU2e/ODU3/ODU3e/ODUflex
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Module Function
l
performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) service, and then
sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module
implements service cross-connection.

Power supply module

21.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the SXH board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1938
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Figure 21-8 shows the front panel of the SXH board.
Figure 21-8 Front panel of the SXH board
SXH
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
SXH
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1939
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
The SXH board does not provide external interfaces.
21.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SXH board.
Table 21-5 shows the valid slots for the SXH board.
Table 21-5 Valid slots for the SXH board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU10, IU44
21.2.7 Specifications of the SXH

TNK2SXH:
l
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
Weight: 3.74 kg (8.1lb.)
TNK4SXH:
l
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
Weight: 2.68 kg (5.8Ib.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK2SXH
+TNK2XCT
130
143
4703.6 x (64
n)
5173.6 x (64
n)
TNK4SXH
+TNK4XCT
95
105
1691.2 x (64
n)
1861.32 x (64
n)
TNK2SXH
+TNK4XCT
113
124
3182.5 x (64n)
3502.5 x (64n)

1940
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK4SXH
+TNK2XCT
112
123
3212.5 x (64n)
3532.5 x (64n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXH
and XCT must be configured.
21.3 TN52XCH
TN52XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board

The available functional version of the TN52XCH board is TN52.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN52
XCH
21.3.2 Application
The XCH cross-connects services.
For the position of the XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-9.
Figure 21-9 Position of the XCH board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
NS2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
XCH
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
MUX
DMUX 4
NS2
4
4
NS2
Client side
DMUX
WDM side
MUX 4
WDM side

XCH
TOM
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
Client side
1941
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 21-6 Functions and features of the XCH board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Implements grooming of services.
Cross-connect
function
Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 1.28 Tbit/s

ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2 or 3) signals or VC-4.
Protection scheme
Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot

backup.
Supports warm backup.
Switching mode
Supports the manual switching and auto switching.

Supports the non-revertive switching.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 21-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1942
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/
ODUflex/ODU3/ODU3e/VC-4
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Module Function
l
The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane,
performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) service, and then sends
the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements
service cross-connection.
Clock processing module

The clock processing module consists of the clock signal receiver, clock signal transmitter,
clock signal trace sub-module, clock source selection sub-module, IEEE 1588 clock
synchronization sub-module, and active/standby STG board switching control sub-module.
Locks the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide
the STG board and the system with the synchronization clock source.
Updates the clock signals periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE.

Power supply module

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1943
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the XCH board.

Figure 21-11 shows the front panel of the XCH board.
Figure 21-11 Front panel of the XCH board
XCH
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
XCH
Indicators
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1944
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
The XCH board does not provide external interfaces.
21.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCH board.
Table 21-7 shows the valid slots for the XCH board.
Table 21-7 Valid slots for the XCH board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU9, IU10
21.3.7 Specifications of the XCH

l
Dimensions of the front panel: 27.9 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
Weight: 3.40 kg (7.49 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN52XCH01
65
72
243 - 3.6 x (32 n)
267.3 - 3.6 x (32

- n)
TN52XCH02
43
47.3
101 - 1.12 x (32

- n)
111 - 1.12 x (32

- n)
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1945
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21.4 TN16XCH
TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board

TThe available functional version of the TN16XCH board is TN16.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN16
XCH
21.4.2 Application
The TN16XCH, a cross-connect and system control board, implements communication between
equipment, synchronizes physical clocks and PTP clocks on the entire NE, implements service
cross-connections, and manages each board on the equipment with the U2000.
For the position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-12.
Figure 21-12 Position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system
External clock
External clock
TN16ATE
TN16ATE
G.694.1
G.694.1
4
4
TQX
TN16
XCH
DMUX 4
NQ2
NQ2
4
Client side
MUX
DMUX
WDM side
TN16
4
XCH
TQX
MUX 4
WDM side
Client side

The TN16XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer, system
control function and clock function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1946
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 21-8 Functions and features of the TN16XCH board
Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 640 Gbit/s

ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2 or 3) signals.
System control
function
l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management

and alarm output of a subrack.
l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes,
the real-time database backup function immediately saves the
changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that
no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered
off. This improves the reliability of the NE.
l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE
date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the
board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs
not to be re-configured after the replacement of the TN16XCH.
l Supports IP over DCC.
l Implements communication between NEs when used with the
TN16AUX by using DCC bytes.
l Supports subrack cascading. The functions of the TN16XCH are
different when it is housed in the master and slave subracks. The
TN16XCH in the slave subrack processes overheads of the slave
subrack. The TN16XCH in the master subrack processes
overheads and alarms of the master and slave subracks, sends
configurations to the slave subrack, and communicates with the
U2000.
Clock function
l Basic function:
Locks the reference clock source.
Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with
G.813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals.
Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream
system.
l Clock source selection function:
Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local
clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself
and the system.
l Time synchronization function:
Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE.
Protection scheme
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

backup.
Supports warm backup.

1947
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Switching mode

Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The TN16XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module,
Figure 21-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board.
Figure 21-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board
Service cross-connection from backplane
(ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex/ODU3/ODU3e)
Time signals/
Clock signals
CPU and control module
Monitoring
module
Power supply
module
Overhead
processing
module
Communication
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
DC power supply
from a backplane
Other boards
Module Function
l
The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane,
performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) service, and then sends
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1948
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements
service cross-connection.
l
Clock procession module

Traces the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source, and provides
the board and system with a synchronization clock source.
Provides a synchronization clock signal, which enables the system to satisfy the
requirements of data setup time and holdoff time.

Implements the control, monitoring and management of each functional module on the
board.
Overhead processing module

Receives overhead signals from the TN16AUX board and processes the overhead bytes.
In the TN16XCH board, the 512 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module.
Sends the overhead signals to the TN16AUX board.
Monitoring module
Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the U2000.
Communication module
Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000.
Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000.
Transmits urgent data through the RS485.
Power supply module

21.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the TN16XCH board.

Figure 21-14 shows the front panel of the TN16XCH board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1949
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-14 Front panel of the TN16XCH board
XCH
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
RESET
XCH
Indicators
l
Interfaces
The TN16XCH board does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1950
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TN16XCH board.
Table 21-9 shows the valid slots for the TN16XCH board.
Table 21-9 Valid slots for the TN16XCH board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU9, IU10
21.4.7 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the TN16XCH board. It switches the power supplied by the
battery on the board on or off.
The battery on the TN16XCH helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure
of the TN16XCH. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a
short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use
a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper.
Figure 21-15 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN16XCH board.
Figure 21-15 Position of the battery jumper on the TN16XCH board
J1
CPU
Battery
Jumper
321
CF Card
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1951
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-16 shows the power jumper.

Figure 21-16 battery jumper
When
battery is
not
required
When
battery is
required
21.4.8 Specifications of the TN16XCH

l
x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H)
Power Consumption
Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN16XCH
40
48
731.4 x (16n)
88.81.4 x (16
n)
21.5 XCM
XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross)

Only one functional version of the XCM board is available, that is TN52.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1952
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Board
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN52X
CM
21.5.2 Application
The XCM is a type of cross-connect unit. The XCM implements the cross-connection of services.
For the position of the XCM in the OCS system, see Figure 21-17.
Figure 21-17 Position of the XCM in the OCS system
1
SLQ64
SLO16
STM-16
XCM
XCM
SLQ64
SLQ64
SLQ64
STM-16
SLO16

The main function and feature of the XCM is the cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 21-10 Functions and features of the XCM
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Grooms services.
Cross-connect
functions
l Supports the centralized electrical-layer grooming of transmitted

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, or ODU3/ODU3e signals.
l Supports the VC-4 higher-order cross-connection and VC-3 and
VC-12 lower-order cross-connection.
l Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s higher-order cross-connect
capacity.
l Supports a maximum of 80 Gbit/s lower-order cross-connect
capacity.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1953
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protection scheme

backup.
Switching mode

Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The XCM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 21-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCM.
Figure 21-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCM
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflexODU3/ODU3e
VC-4/VC-3/VC-12
Backplane (for service cross-connection)
Control
Storage
CPU
communication

Voltages for boards
Power module
Fuse
DC power provided by the backplane
SCC
Backplane (for
SCC control)
Module Function
l
The cross-connect module receives the data from each service board through the backplane
to implement the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k= 0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) signals or VC-4/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1954
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each service
board to complete service cross-connection.
l

Power supply module

21.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the XCM front panel.

Figure 21-19 shows the XCM front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1955
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-19 XCM front panel

XCM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
XCM
Indicators
l
Interfaces
The XCM does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1956
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCM board.
Table 21-11 shows the valid slots for the XCM board.
Table 21-11 Valid slots for the XCM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU9, IU10
21.5.7 Specifications of the XCM

l
x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
Weight: 3.84 kg (8.45 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN52XCM01
125
138
339 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m
368 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m
TN52XCM02
67
73.7
124 - 1.12 x (32

- n) -23 x m
136.4 - 1.12 x
(32 - n) -23 x m
NOTE
l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, m is equal to 0.
l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, m is equal to 1.
21.6 XCS
XCS: centralized cross connect board

The available functional versions of the XCS board are TN11 and TN12.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1957
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
XCS
TN12
XCS

l
Function:
The cross-connection capacities vary according to versions. For details, see 21.6.3
Specification:
XCS.
Table 21-12 Substitution rules of the XCS board
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11XCS
TN12XCS
Upgrade NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a

later version.
TN12XCS
None
21.6.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCS board cross-connects services.
For the position of the XCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-20.
Figure 21-20 Position of the XCS board in the WDM system
OTU
M40
XCS
OTU
OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OA
OA
40
1
D40
OA
OA
M40

OTU
OTU
XCS
40
40
OTU
XCS
D40
40
XCS
OTU
OTU
1958
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The XCS board cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 21-13 Functions and features of the XCS board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Implements grooming of services.
Cross-connect
function
TN11XCS:
l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2
signals or GE services.
l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 320
Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals. Supports a maximum
cross-connect and grooming capacity of 160 Gbit/s for GE
services.
TN12XCS:
l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2
signals or GE services.
l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 360
Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals. Supports a maximum
cross-connect and grooming capacity of 180 Gbit/s for GE
services.
Active/standby
backup
Provides the 1+1 hot backup.
Protection scheme
Supports cross-connect board 1+1 protection.
Switching mode

Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12XCS02.

The XCS board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 21-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1959
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Module Function
l
Receives the data from each service board from the backplane. It performs the grooming
of ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals at the electrical layer, then sends the signals to each
service board and implements the cross-connection.

Power supply module

21.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the XCS board.

Figure 21-22 shows the front panel of the XCS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1960
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-22 Front panel of the XCS board
XCS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
XCS
Indicators
l
Interfaces
The XCS board does not provide external interfaces.
21.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1961
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 21-14 shows the valid slots for the XCS board.
Table 21-14 Valid slots for the XCS board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU9, IU10
21.6.7 Specifications of the XCS

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight
l
TN11XCS: 2.20 lb (1.0 kg)
TN12XCS: 2.65 lb (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11XCS
20.0
22.0
TN12XCS
25.0
27.5
21.7 XCT
XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

The available functional versions of the XCT board are TNK2 and TNK4. The XCT board is

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1962
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TNK
2XCT
TNK
4XCT

XCT.
Original
Board
Substitute Board
Substitution Rules
TNK2XCT
TNK4XCT
The TNK4XCT can be created as TNK2XCT on

the TNK4XCT functions as the TNK2XCT.
TNK4XCT
None
None
21.7.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCT cross-connects services.
For the position of the XCT board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-23.
Figure 21-23 Position of the XCT board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
NS2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
XCT
SXH
/
SXM
MUX
NS2
4
4
NS2
DMUX
WDM side
client side
DMUX 4
MUX 4
SXH
XCT
/
SXM
TOM
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
WDM side
client side

The XCT board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1963
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 21-15 Functions and features of the XCT board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Grooms services.
Cross-connect
function

when the XCT board is jointly used with the SXM/SXH board.
Protection scheme

Switching mode

Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The XCT board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 21-24 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board.
Figure 21-24 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ODU3e/ODUflex
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
1964
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Module Function
l
performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3, flex) service, and then sends the
service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service
cross-connection.

Power supply module

21.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the XCT board.

Figure 21-25 shows the front panel of the XCT board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1965
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-25 Front panel of the XCT board

XCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
XCT
Indicators
l
Interfaces
The XCT board does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1966
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21.7.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCT board.
Table 21-16 shows the valid slots for the XCT board.
Table 21-16 Valid slots for the XCT board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU9, IU43
21.7.7 Specifications of the XCT

TNK2XCT:
l
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
TNK4XCT:
l
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK2SXM
+TNK2XCT
190
209
5303.6 x (64
n)
5833.6 x (64
n)
TNK2SXH
+TNK2XCT
130
143
4703.6 x (64
n)
5173.6 x (64
n)
TNK4SXM
+TNK4XCT
97
107
1881.2 x (64
n)
2071.32 x (64
n)
TNK4SXH
+TNK4XCT
95
105
1691.2 x (64
n)
1861.32 x (64
n)
TNK2SXM
+TNK4XCT
173
190
3782.5 x (64
n)
4162.5 x (64
n)

1967
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK4SXM
+TNK2XCT
114
125
3242.5 x (64
n)
3562.5 x (64
n)
TNK2SXH
+TNK4XCT
113
124
3182.5 x (64n)
3502.5 x (64n)
TNK4SXH
+TNK2XCT
112
123
3212.5 x (64n)
3532.5 x (64n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM/
SXH and XCT must be configured.
21.8 SCC
SCC: system control and communication unit

The available functional versions of the SCC board are TN11, TN16, TN21, TN22, TN51, TN52,
and TNK2.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
SCC
TN16
SCC
TN21
SCC
TN22
SCC
TN51
SCC

1968
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN52
SCC
TNK
2SCC

l
Function:
The TN21SCC and TN22SCC boards do not support SCC data backup, IP over DCC,
subrack cascading, and power supply backup. The other versions support these
functions. For details, see 21.8.3 Functions and Features.
Appearance:
The TN11, TN51, and TN52 versions use the same front panel; the TN21 and TN22
versions use the same front panel; the TNK2 and TN16 version use a front panel different
from that of other versions. The TN21 and TN22 versions are applicable to case-shaped
equipment. For details, see 21.8.5 Front Panel and 21.8.8 Specifications of the
SCC.
Specification:
see 21.8.8 Specifications of the SCC.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11SCC
TN51SCC
l When the ASON function is not used, or only the opticallayer ASON function instead of the electrical-layer ASON
function is used, the TN51SCC can be used to replace the
TN11SCC. Software upgrade is required for the
replacement.
l When the electrical-layer ASON function is used, the
TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN11SCC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN52SCC
Software upgrade is required for the replacement.
TN16SCC
None
TN51SCC
TN52SCC
TN52SCC
None
TNK2SCC
None
TN21SCC
TN22SCC
TN22SCC
None

1969
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
NOTE
If a subrack/chassis uses two SCC boards (one is active and the other is standby), the versions of the two
SCC boards must be the same.
21.8.2 Application
The SCC board is a system control and communication unit that works with the network
management system to manage each board and implements inter-equipment communication.

The SCC board is used for DCC communication, subrack cascading, power supply backup and
clock.
Table 21-17 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/
TN52SCC/TNK2SCC board.
Table 21-18 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN16SCC.
Table 21-19 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board.
Table 21-17 Functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and

alarm output of a subrack.
l Supports the function of the CF card to back up the database. The
NE data (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID, and Node ID) and
the board software are backed up to the CF card. Backing up data
to the CF means that you do not need to reconfigure the NE after
replacing the SCC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
DCC
communication
Supports DCC communication with the NEs for network

management.
Active/Standby
backup
Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system

that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby
board automatically becomes active.

1970
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Clock function
Provides clock source for the system communications.
Subrack cascading
Supports subrack cascading.

The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master
or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave
subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages
the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack
performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also
processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave
subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network
management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued
to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported
Table 21-18 Functions and features of the TN16SCC board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function

l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE
date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the
board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs
not to be re-configured after the replacement of the SCC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
DCC
communication
Implements communication between NEs when used with the

TN16AUX by using DCC bytes.
Active/Standby
backup
Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system

that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby
board automatically becomes active.

1971
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Clock function
l Basic function:
Locks the reference clock source.
Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with
G.813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals.
Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream
system.
l Clock source selection function:
Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local
clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself
and the system.
l Time synchronization function:
Subrack cascading
Supports subrack cascading.

The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master
or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave
subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages
the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack
performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also
processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave
subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network
management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued
to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
Table 21-19 Functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and

alarm output of a chassis.
DCC
communication
Supports DCC communication with the NEs for network

management.
Active/standby
backup
Supported: In DC-powered systems, the two SCCs are used to provide

1+1 hot backup. If the active SCC fails, the standby SCC becomes
active automatically.
Not supported: Active/standby backup configuration is not supported
in AC-powered systems.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Clock function
Provides clock source for the system communications.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported by the TN22SCC.

1972
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN22SCC.

The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module,
communication module, CPU and control module, and power supply module.
Figure 21-26 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCC.
Figure 21-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC board
Clock module
Required
voltage
Power
supply
module
Monitorin
g module
Overhead
processing
module
Communication
Fuse
Backplane
DC power supply from
a backplane
Other boards
Module Function
l

Implements the control, monitoring and management of each functional module on the
board.

Receives overhead signals from the service board and processes the overhead bytes.
In the TN11SCC board, the 360 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module.
In the TN52SCC board, the 1024 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control
module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1973
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

In the TNK2SCC board, the 1024 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control
module.
In the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board, the 40 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the
control module.
Sends the overhead signals to the service board.
l
Monitoring module
Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the U2000.
Clock module
Provides the clock source for the system.
TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC/TN21SCC/TN22SCC:
Receives the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station, and ensures that
the local clock of the local board is synchronized with the clock signals from the OSC
board at the upstream station.
Sends a local clock to the downstream station through the OSC board.
TN16SCC:
Traces the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source, and provides
the board and system with a synchronization clock source.
Provides a synchronization clock signal, which enables the system to satisfy the
requirements of data setup time and holdoff time.
Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000.
Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000.
Transmits urgent data through the RS485.
Power supply module

TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX
OSN 6800/8800 provides the entire system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect
the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system. In addition, it provides power backup
to the boards of which the total power consumption is less than 60W.
TN21SCC/TN22SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 3800 converts the
DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module of the board.
TN16SCC: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by
each module on the board, and provides the system with 10W backup power.
21.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, buttons, and an LED indicator on the front panel.

Figure 21-27 shows the front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board.
Figure 21-28 shows the front panel of the TN16SCC board.
Figure 21-29 shows the front panel of the TNK2SCC board.
Figure 21-30 shows the front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1974
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-27 Front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
SubRACK_ID
RESET
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1975
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-28 Front panel of the TN116SCC board

SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
RESET
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1976
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-29 Front panel of the TNK2SCC board
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRC
ALMC
SubRACK_ID
RESET
LAMP
TEST
ALM
CUT
Figure 21-30 Front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RESET
LAMP
TEST
ALM
CUT
PWR
CRI
MAJ
MIN
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1977
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
There are eight indicators on the front panel.
l
System power supply indicator (PWRA)- dual-colored (red, green)
System power supply indicator (PWRB)- dual-colored (red, green)
Protection power indicator (PWRC)- dual-colored (red, green)
Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow

NOTE
The TNK2SCC/TN16SCC board does not have PWRA and PWRB.

The TN16SCC board does not have ALMC.
There are also four chassis indicators on the front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board.
l
Chassis power supply indicator (PWR) - green
Minor alarm indicator (MIN) - yellow
Major alarm indicator (MAJ) - orange
Critical alarm indicator (CRI) - red
Buttons
There are three buttons on the front panel. Table 21-20 lists the function of each button.
Table 21-20 Functions of the buttons on the SCC board
Button
Function
RESET
Used to reset the SCC.
ALM CUT
Used to clear an audible alarm.
LAMP TEST
Used to test all of the indicators.
NOTE
The TN16SCC board does not have ALM CUT and LAMP TEST.
LED
There is an LED indicator on the front panel. Table 21-21 shows its function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1978
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 21-21 Function of the LED indicator on the SCC board

LED indicator
Function
SubRack_ID
The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is
a master or slave subrack when master/slave subrack mode is used.
"0" indicates the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the subrack ID
is incorrect or fails to be read. The other values indicate slave
subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 21-31.
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave
subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Figure 21-31 LED
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Error
Interfaces
The SCC board does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1979
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SCC board.
Table 21-22 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCC board.
Table 21-23 shows the valid slots for the TN16SCC board.
Table 21-24 shows the valid slots for the TN51SCC/TN52SCC board.
Table 21-25 shows the valid slots for the TNK2SCC board.
Table 21-26 shows the valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board.
Table 21-22 Valid slots for the TN11SCC board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU17, IU18
Table 21-23 Valid slots for the TN16SCC board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU9, IU10
Table 21-24 Valid slots for the TN51SCC/TN52SCC board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU11, IU28
OptiX OSN 6800
IU17, IU18
Table 21-25 Valid slots for the TNK2SCC board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU74, IU85
Table 21-26 Valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 3800
IU8, IU9

1980
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21.8.7 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the SCC board. It switches the power supplied by the battery
on the board on or off.
The battery on the SCC helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of
the SCC. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit,
which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap
to disconnect the battery jumper.
Figure 21-32 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN11SCC board.
Figure 21-32 Position of the battery jumper on the TN11SCC board
CPU
CF
Card
Battery jumper
1
2
3
Battery jumper
Figure 21-33 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN16SCC board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1981
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

J1
CPU
Battery
jumper
321
CF Card
Figure 21-34 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC board.
Figure 21-34 Position of the battery jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC board
CPU
Battery jumper
3
2
1
Battery jumper
Figure 21-35 shows the battery jumper on the TN51SCC board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1982
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Battery Supply
J42
U45
J1
J12
U42
Battery
Jumper
CPU
321
CF Card
Figure 21-36 shows the power jumper on the TN52SCC board.

CPU
321
Battery
Jumper
J1
Battery Supply
U33
U18
CF Card
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1983
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-37 shows the power jumper on the TNK2SCC board.

Figure 21-37 Position of the battery jumper on the TNK2SCC board
Battery Jumper
CPU
Battery Supply
3
2
1
J44
CF
Figure 21-38 shows the power jumper.

Figure 21-38 battery jumper
When
battery is
not
required
When
battery is
required
21.8.8 Specifications of the SCC

l
TN11SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4
in. (H)
TN16SCC: 54.5 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 350.3 mm (H) or 2.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8
in. (H)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1984
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

in. (H)
TN22SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) ox 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7
in. (H)
in. (H)
in. (H)
TNK2SCC: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 110.0 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.4
in. (H)
Weight:
l
TN11SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
TN16SCC: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.)
TN21SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN22SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN51SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
TN52SCC: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
TNK2SCC: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11SCC
27.0
30.0
TN16SCC
32.0
35.0
TN21SCC
14.0
16.0
TN22SCC
10.0
13.0
TN51SCC
18.0
20.0
TN52SCC
23.0
25.1
TNK2SCC
26.7
29.3
21.9 AUX
AUX: system auxiliary interface unit

TN16, The available functional versions of the AUX board are TN11, TN16, TN21, TN22, and
TN51.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1985
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
AUX
TN16
AUX
TN21
AUX
TN22
AUX
TN51
AUX
Type
The system provides two types of the TN11AUX. Table 21-27 lists the types of the TN11AUX.
Table 21-27 Type description of the AUX
Board
Type
Description
TN11AUX
TN11AUX01
Provides three jumpers to set

subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to
7.
TN11AUX02
Provides eight jumpers to set

subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to
31.

l
Function:
The TN16AUX does not provide external interfaces. It provides the inter-subrack
management function. For details, see 21.9.3 Functions and Features and 21.9.4
Working Principle and Signal Flow.
The TN51AUX board does not provide external interfaces. For detail, see 21.9.3
Functions and Features and 21.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.
The TN11AUX board provides various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.
For detail, see 21.9.3 Functions and Features and 21.9.4 Working Principle and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1986
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow. There are three jumpers inside the TN11AUX board, which are used to
set the subrack ID. For detail, see 21.9.7 Jumper.
The TN21AUX and TN22AUX boards are mainly used to provide backup power
supply, various auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces. For detail, see 21.9.3
Functions and Features and 21.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. There are
three jumpers inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the
TN22AUX board. For detail, see 21.9.7 Jumper.
l
Appearance:
The appearance and dimensions of front panels of different hardware versions are
different. The TN51/TN16 board does not provide external interfaces. The TN21 and
TN22 boards are applied to case-shaped equipment. For details, see 21.9.5 Front
Panel and 21.9.8 Specifications of the AUX.
The board software status indicators of the TN21 and TN22 are different. For details,
Specification:
The power consumption of the boards of different versions is different. For details, see
21.9.8 Specifications of the AUX.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11AUX
None
TN21AUX
TN22AUX
If the SCC is the TN22SCC, upgrade the NE software to OptiX

OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version.
TN22AUX
None
TN51AUX
None
TN16AUX
None
21.9.2 Application
The TN51AUX board is a system control and communication unit that does not provide external
interfaces. The TN16AUX, a system control and communication board, provides the intrasubrack management function but does not provide external interfaces. The TN11AUX board
is a system control and communication unit that provides various auxiliary interfaces and
management interfaces. The TN21AUX board and the TN22AUX board are system control and
communication units that provide backup power supply and various auxiliary and management
interfaces.

The TN51AUX board is a system control and communication unit that does not provide external
interfaces. The TN11AUX board is a system control and communication unit that provides
various auxiliary and management interfaces. The TN21AUX board and the TN22AUX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1987
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

are system control and communication units that provide various auxiliary and management
interfaces.
For detailed functions and features of the TN51AUX board, refer to Table 21-28.
Table 21-28 Functions and features of the TN51AUX board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Implements communications between boards or subracks.
Interface
Does not provide external interfaces.
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Implements communication between boards or subracks and intersburack management.

Whether the subrack is configured with a TN16XCH affects the intersubrack management function of the TN16AUX.
l If the subrack is configured with a TN16XCH, the TN16AUX
collects overhead information about other boards and sends the
information to the TN16XCH. After processing overhead
information, the TN16XCH sends the processed information to
the TN16AUX. Then, the TN16AUX sends the information to the
other boards.
l If the subrack is not configured with a TN16XCH, the TN16AUX
collects and processes overhead information about other boards
and sends the processed information to the other boards.
Does not provide external interfaces.
Interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and

management interfaces.

1988
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Interface
Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management

interface.
Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack
communications interfaces
Setting of subrack ID
Sets the subrack ID that contains six bits.
For detailed functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board, refer to Table 21-31.
Table 21-31 Functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides the system with backup power supplies as well as various

auxiliary and management interfaces.
Interface
Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management

interface.
Provides the OAM interface for remote maintenance.
Provides the alarm channel for chassis indicators.
Power supply backup
Provides the entire system with the 3.3 V integrated power supply
backup.
Alarm function
Provides alarms on the failure of 3.3 V integrated backup power

supply, including over-voltage and under-voltage alarms.

The AUX board consists of the CPU and control module, communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 21-39 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN51AUX/TN11AUX/
TN22AUX/TN21AUX board.
Figure 21-40 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16AUX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1989
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN51AUX/TN11AUX/TN22AUX/

TN21AUX board
CPU and control

module
Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Communication
module
Backplane
DC power supply
from a backplane
Other boards
Figure 21-40 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16AUX board
Monitoring
module
Power supply
module
Overhead
processing
module
Communication
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
DC power supply
from a backplane
Other boards
Module Function
l

The CPU module implements the control, monitoring and management of the
communication module and detects the power supply at the same time.
TN11AUX: The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the alarms and
performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information.
TN21/TN22AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each
functional module as well as the clock information.
TN51AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1990
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN16AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each
l
NOTE
The TN51AUX board is connected to the EFI1 and EFI2 boards through the backplane. The interfaces
as follows are provided on the EFI1 and EFI2 boards.
The TN16AUX board is connected to the EFI board through the backplane. The interfaces as follows
are provided on the EFI board.
Provides the inter-board communication interface to connect the service boards and the
SCC. Implements the data communication between boards.
Provides the NM interface and the NM cascading interface that connect the AUX and
the NM terminal.
TN11AUX: Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communication
network interfaces. TN21/TN22AUX: Provides the OAM interface for remote
maintenance.
l
Power supply module

TN11AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by
each module on the board.
TN21/TN22AUX: Supplies power for the AUX. It also provides the entire OptiX OSN
3800 system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any
board in the system.
TN16AUX/TN51AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power
required by each module on the board.
21.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the AUX board.

Figure 21-41 shows the front panel of the TN51AUX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1991
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-41 Front panel of the TN51AUX board

AUX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV

AUX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
ALMC
RESET
SubRACK-ID
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1992
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
ETH1
ETH2
STAT
PROG
AUX
Figure 21-44 shows the front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board.

Figure 21-44 Front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board
STAT
PROG
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
EXT
AUX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel of the TN51AUX board.
There are five indicators on the front panel of the TN16AUX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1993
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

There are two indicators on the front panel of the TN11AUX/TN21AUX/TN22AUX board.
l
Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow
Interfaces
The TN51AUX board provides no external interfaces.
The TN16AUX board provides no external interfaces.
There are four interfaces on the front panel of the TN11AUX board. Table 21-32 lists the type
Table 21-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11AUX board
Interface
Type
Function
NM_ETH1
RJ-45
l Using a network cable, the port connects the

network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 to the
U2000 server to enable the management of the
U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800.
NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one
NE to another NE for communication between NEs.
NM_ETH2
RJ-45

ETH1
RJ-45
Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/

ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other
subracks for communication between the master
subrack and slave subracks.
ETH2
RJ-45
Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/

ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other
subracks for communication between the master
subrack and slave subracks.
There are three interfaces on the front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board. Table 21-33 lists
the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1994
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 21-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN21/TN22AUX board
Interface
Type
Function
NM_ETH1
RJ-45

NM_ETH2
RJ-45

EXT
DB64
Provides the alarm input/output interface, cascading

interface, commissioning network interface and
management serial interface.
Buttons
Buttons are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the buttons, see Table 21-34.
Table 21-34 Functions of the buttons on the TN16AUX board
Button
Function
RESET
Used to reset the TN16AUX board.
ALM CUT
Used to clear an audible alarm.
LAMP TEST
Used to test all of the indicators.
LED
LED indicators are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the LED indicators, see Table
21-35.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1995
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 21-35 Function of the LED indicator on the TN16AUX board

LED indicator
Function
SubRack-ID
The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is
a master or slave subrack in the case of master/slave subrack mode.
"0" indicates the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the subrack ID
is incorrect or fails to be read. The other values indicate slave
subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 21-45.
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave
subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Figure 21-45 LED
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Error
21.9.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one AUX board.
Table 21-36 shows the valid slots for the TN51AUX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1996
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 21-36 Valid slots for the TN51AUX board

Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU41
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU72, IU83
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU21, IU22
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 6800
IU21
Table 21-39 shows the valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board.
Table 21-39 Valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 3800
IU10
21.9.7 Jumper
There are three jumpers inside the TN11AUX01 board, and eight jumpers inside the
TN11AUX02 board. These jumpers are used to set the subrack ID. There are three jumpers
inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the TN22AUX board. There is no
jumper inside the TN51AUX/TN16AUX// board.
Jumper of TN11AUX
The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary
one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel.
The TN11AUX01 board has three jumpers, the jumpers are numbered 3 to 1 from the side close
to CPU, and the jumpers are numbered 1 to 3 from the most significant bit to the lest significant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1997
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

bit. The default value of the four jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other
values indicate slave subracks shows the jumpers on the board.
Figure 21-46 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX01 board
jumpers
CPU
The TN11AUX02 board has eight jumpers, which can be used to implement 32 states that
represent decimal values 0-31. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. In the TN11AUX02
board, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. The default value of the five jumpers is 00000.
"0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 21-47 shows
the jumpers on the board.
Figure 21-47 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board
Jumpers
J4
J3
J2
J17
J16
J15
J18
J14
CPU
When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure or the three pins are not
placed with any jumper cap, it represents the value 1. When a jumper cap is placed over the
right-hand two pins in the figure, it represents the value 0. In Figure 21-48 the value represented
by the three jumpers is 001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is "1". The
value is "0" by default.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1998
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-48 Jumper

jumper cap
representing 0
representing 0
representing 1
TN11AUX01
jumper cap
representing 0
representing 0
representing 0
representing 0
representing 1
TN11AUX02
J16
J15
J4
J3
J2
NOTE
The dashed line between two pins in the figure indicates that a jumper cap may or may not be placed over
the two pins.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service
interruption.
Jumper of TN21/TN22AUX
The TN21AUX has 3 jumpers. Figure 21-49 shows the jumpers.
The TN22AUX has 8 jumpers. Before the board is used, make sure that the setting of the J4
jumper is the same as that shown in Figure 21-50.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1999
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 21-49 Position of the jumper on the TN21AUX
CPU
Jumper
Figure 21-50 Position of the jumper on the TN22AUX
Jumper
Jumper cap
8 (J4)
21.9.8 Specifications of the AUX

l
Dimensions of the front panel:

TN51AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
4.2 in. (H))
TN16AUX: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
4.2 in. (H))
4.7 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2000
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4.7 in. (H))
l
Weight:
TN51AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN16AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
TN11AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN21AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
TN22AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN51AUX
17.5
17.5
TN16AUX
26.5
29.2
TN11AUX
12.0
17.0
TN21AUX
11.7
13.0
TN22AUX
15.0
17.0

2001
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22
22 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
About This Chapter

22.1 HSC1
HSC1: High power unidirectional/bi-directional optical supervisory channel board
22.2 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board
22.3 SC2
SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit
22.4 ST2
ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2002
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22.1 HSC1
HSC1: High power unidirectional/bi-directional optical supervisory channel board

The available functional version of the HSC1 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
HSC1
22.1.2 Application
As a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the HSC1 board processes one channel of
supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the
system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
For the position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-1.
Figure 22-1 Position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system
OAU
OAU
SCC
HSC1
OAU
NE1
F
I
U
F
I
U
HSC1
HSC1
SCC
OAU
F
I
U
OAU
NE2
F
I
U
HSC1
SCC
OAU
NE3
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the
supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-1,
the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are
remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there
is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management.
The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel
(OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2003
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all
the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the
line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into
supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

The HSC1 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals.
Table 22-1 Functions and features of the HSC1 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The HSC1 board is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical supervisory
signal. The HSC1 board supports a maximum of 53 dB span transmission.
Technical
features
The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers.
The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the
OSC.
The HSC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the
HSC1 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces
and monitor other stations.
Regenerati
on
function
The HSC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R
function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information
can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added.
Operating
wavelengt
h
The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.
Loopback
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Opticallayer
ASON
Supported

The HSC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and
Figure 22-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2004
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 22-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board
CMI
decoding
module
O/E
RM
Overhead
processing
module
CMI
encoding
module
E/O
TM
Optical
transmitting
module
Optical
receiving
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Signal Flow
The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical
signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The
overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them
to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends
the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. Finally, the electrical
supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical
transmitting module.
Frame Structure of the OSC Signals

Figure 22-3 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32
timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31.
Figure 22-3 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead
0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
...
14
15
16

...
31
2005
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table
22-2.
Table 22-2 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC
Timeslot
Number
Name
Function
E1 byte
Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one

orderwire phone requires three bytes.
F1 byte
Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface.
3-13, 15
D1-D12
bytes
DCC channel
Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the
issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and
performance events.
The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the
SCC for processing.
14
ALC
byte
Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol

byte.
17
F2 byte
Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the
temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of
specific maintenance.
18
F3 byte
19
E2 byte
Provides the path for orderwire phone.

Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes.
21-23
Optical
layer
overhea
d bytes
Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.
Other
Reserve
d
Module Function
l

Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.

Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.
CMI encoding/decoding module

Performs mutual conversion between the 2 Mbit/s signal.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2006
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for
processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the
electrical signals to the optical transmitting module.
l

Power supply module

22.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the HSC1 board.

Figure 22-4 shows the front panel of the HSC1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2007
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 22-4 Front panel of the HSC1 board
HSC1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EOW
TM
RM
HSC1
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the
HSC1 board. Table 22-3 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2008
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HSC1 board
Interface
Type
Function
TM
LC
RM
LC
EOW
Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone

wires to implement orderwire communication between
NEs.
Laser Hazard Level

22.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one HSC1 board.
Table 22-4 shows the valid slots for the HSC1 board.
Table 22-4 Valid slots for the HSC1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5 and IU11
22.1.7 Characteristic Code for the HSC1

The characteristic code for the HSC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
wavelength range and numbers of optical interface.
Table 22-5 Characteristic code for the HSC1 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

W.

2009
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
Second to tenth characters
Optical signal wavelength

range
The optical signal

wavelength range is 1500 nm
to 1520 nm processed by the
board.
Eleventh character
The eleventh character is

always P.
Twelfth character
Numbers of optical interface
The number of the optical

interface is one.
For example, the characteristic code for the HSC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical
interface is one.


Table 22-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HSC1 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RM/TM
NOTE
22.1.9 HSC1 Parameters

For HSC1 Parameters, refer to Table 22-7.
Table 22-7 HSC1 parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

2010
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Name
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
240/1510.00/198.540
This parameter is queriable only.
Band Type
SMC
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

NOTE
When setting this parameter, ensure that the
automatic loopback release function is enabled.
Off, On
Laser Status

status of a board.
Default: On
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

22.1.10 Specifications of the HSC1

NOTE
Table 22-8 lists the optical specifications of the HSC1 board.
Table 22-8 Optical specifications of the HSC1 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
Signal rate
Mbit/s
4.096
nm
1500 to 1520
Signal coding
CMI

2011
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
dBm
5 to 10
dBm
-48
Receiver overload
dBm
-3
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
HSC1
8.0
8.8
22.2 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board

The available functional versions of the SC1 board are TN11, TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
SC1
TN12
SC1

None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2012
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11SC1
TN12SC1
The TN12SC1 can be created as TN11SC1 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC1 functions as the
TN11SC1.
TN12SC1
None
22.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC1 board processes one channel of
supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the
system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
For the position of the SC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-5.
Figure 22-5 Position of the SC1 board in the WDM system
OA
SCC
SC1
OA
F
I
U
OA
NE1
F
I
U
SC2
SCC
OA
F
I
U
F
I
U
OA
NE2
SC1
SCC
OA
NE3
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory
channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-5, the user can
use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 can be remotely
managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. When configured
as described above, the entire network can be managed.
the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from
the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into

The SC1 board processes and regenerates optical supervisory signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2013
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-9 Functions and features of the SC1 board

Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The SC1 board receives, processes, and transmits one optical supervisory signal.
The SC1 supports a maximum of 48 dB span transmission.
Technical
features
The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the optical
supervisory channel (OSC). The failure of an optical line amplifier does not
affect the performance of the OSC.
The SC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC1
board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces
and monitor other stations.
Regenerati
on
function
The SC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also performs the
3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information
can be received and new supervisory signals are added.
Operating
wavelengt
h
The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.
Loopback
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Opticallayer
ASON
Supported

The SC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, CMI decoding module, overhead
processing module, CMI encoding module, optical transmitting module, control and
Figure 22-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2014
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 22-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board
CMI
decoding
module
O/E
RM
Overhead
processing
module
CMI
encoding
module
E/O
TM
Optical
transmitting
module
Optical
receiving
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Signal Flow

0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
...
14
15
16

...
31
2015
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22-10.
Timeslot
Number
Name
Function
E1 byte

F1 byte
3-13, 15
D1-D12
bytes
DCC channel
performances.
SCC for processing.
14
ALC
byte

byte.
17
F2 byte
18
F3 byte
19
E2 byte

21-23
Optical
layer
overhea
d bytes
Other
Reserve
d
Module Function
l

Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.

Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.

Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s
signal.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2016
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l

Power supply module

22.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SC1 board.

Figure 22-8 shows the front panel of the SC1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2017
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 22-8 Front panel of the SC1 board
SC1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EOW
TM
RM
SC1
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the SC1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2018
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC1 board
Interface
Type
Function
TM
LC
RM
LC
EOW

NEs.
Laser Hazard Level

22.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SC1 board.
Table 22-12 shows the valid slots for the TN11SC1 board.
Table 22-12 Valid slots for the TN11SC1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
22.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1

The characteristic code for the SC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
wavelength range and optical interface number.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2019
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-14 Characteristic code for the SC1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

W.
Second to the tenth

characters

range
The optical signal

board.
Eleventh character

always P.
Twelfth character
The number of the optical

interface is one.
For example, the characteristic code for the SC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical
interface is one.


Table 22-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RM/TM
NOTE

For parameters of the SC1, refer to Table 22-16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2020
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-16 SC1 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
240/1510.00/198.540
Band Type
SMC
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

Laser Status
NOTE
Off, On

status of a board.
Default: On
22.2.10 Specifications of the SC1

Table 22-17 lists the optical specifications of the SC1 board.
Table 22-17 Optical specifications of the SC1 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
Signal ratea
Mbit/s
16.896
nm
1500 to 1520
Signal coding
CMI
dBm
-4 to 0
dBm
-46
Receiver overload
dBm
-3

4.096
-48
2021
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
a: The SC1 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC
channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of
the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
SC1
11.0
14.9
22.3 SC2
SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit

Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
SC2
TN12
SC2

None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2022
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11SC2
TN12SC2
The TN12SC2 can be created as TN11SC2 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC2 functions as the
TN11SC2.
TN12SC2
None
22.3.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC2 board processes two channels
of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information
about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
For the position of the SC2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-9.
Figure 22-9 Position of the SC2 board in the WDM system
OA
SCC
SC1
OA
F
I
U
OA
NE1
F
I
U
SC2
SCC
OA
F
I
U
F
I
U
OA
NE2
SC1
SCC
OA
NE3
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory
channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-9, you can
manage NE1 directly by logging in to it through the Ethernet. NE2 and NE3 are remote
equipment that you can manage through the supervisory channel when there is no data line
connected. By logging in to NE1 and managing NE2 and NE3 through the supervisory channel,
the entire network can be managed.
the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from
the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into

The SC2 board processes and regenerates optical supervisory signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2023
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-18 Functions and features of the SC2 board

Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The SC2 board receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory
signals. The SC2 board supports a maximum of 48 dB span transmission.
Technical
features
The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the OSC. The
failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC.
The SC2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the
SC2 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical
interfaces and monitor other stations.
Regenerati
on
function
The SC2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also provides the 3R
function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information
can be received and new supervisory signals are added.
Operating
wavelengt
h
The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.
Loopback
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Opticallayer
ASON
Supported

The SC2 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and
Figure 22-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2024
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 22-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board
O/E
RM1
CMI
decoding
module
O/E
RM2
Overhead
processing
module
CMI
encoding
module
Optical
receiving
module
E/O
TM1
E/O
TM2
Optical
transmitting
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Signal Flow

0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
...
14
15
16

...
31
2025
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22-19.
Timeslot
Number
Name
Function
E1 byte

F1 byte
3-13, 15
D1-D12
bytes
DCC channel
performances.
SCC for processing.
14
ALC
byte

byte.
17
F2 byte
18
F3 byte
19
E2 byte

21-23
Optical
layer
overhea
d bytes
Other
Reserve
d
Module Function
l

Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals.

Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals.

Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s
signal.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2026
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l

Power supply module

22.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SC2 board.

Figure 22-12 shows the front panel of the SC2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2027
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 22-12 Front panel of the SC2 board
SC2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EOW
TM1
RM1
TM2
RM2
SC2
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the SC2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2028
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-20 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC2 board
Interface
Type
Function
TM1/TM2
LC
Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.
RM1/RM2
LC
Receives the first/second supervisory signal.
EOW

wires to realize orderwire communication between
NEs.
Laser Hazard Level

22.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SC2 board.
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
22.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2

The characteristic code for the SC2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2029
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-23 Characteristic code for the SC2 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

W.

range
The optical signal

board.
Eleventh character

always P.
Twelfth character
The numbers of optical

interface are two.
For example, the characteristic code for the SC2 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical
interface are two.


Table 22-24 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RM1/TM1
RM2/TM2
NOTE

For parameters of the SC2, refer to Table 22-25.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2030
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-25 SC2 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
240/1510.00/198.540
Band Type
SMC
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

Laser Status
NOTE
Off, On

status of a board.
Default: On
22.3.10 Specifications of the SC2

Table 22-26 lists the optical specifications of the SC2.
Table 22-26 Optical specifications of the SC2 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
Signal ratea
Mbit/s
16.896
nm
1500 to 1520
Signal coding
CMI
dBm
-4 to 0
dBm
-46
Receiver overload
dBm
-3

4.096
-48
2031
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
a: The SC2 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC
channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of
the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
SC2
12.5
14.9
22.4 ST2
ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit

The available functional versions of the ST2 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
ST2
22.4.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the ST2 board processes two channels
of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information
about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. In addition, the ST2
board can process the IEEE 1588v2 protocol for time synchronization. The ST2 board also
supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2032
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the position of the ST2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-13.
Figure 22-13 Position of the ST2 board in the WDM system
OA
SCC
ST2
OA
NE1
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
OA
ST2
scc
OA
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
NE2
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
OA
ST2
SCC
OA
NE3
Transmits and receives two channels of optical supervisory signals in the west and east
directions.
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use the
supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. You can use the
Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage it directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment
that you can manage remotely through the supervisory channel if there is no data line
connected. In the scenario described above, you can manage the entire network.
The SCC of NE1 sends network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel
(OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the
SFIU/FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main
path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The SFIU/FIU of NE2 separates the
supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit
converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for
processing.
Performs IEEE 1588v2 clock synchronization.

Extracts clock signals and provides the clock signals for clock synchronization on an NE.
The extracted clock signals can also function as a clock source for the clock board on this
NE.
Sends clock signals of an NE to the downstream NE.
Passes through west and east IEEE 1588v2 packets and service clock signals.
Reports the time information to a clock board for time synchronization on an NE where
the clock board is located.
Transparently transmit two channels of FE electrical signals.

NE1:
In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through
its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the ST2
board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the
downstream board through its TM2 port.
In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM1
board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the ST2 board receives an FE optical
signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port.
NE2: FE optical signals are directly passed at this NE. The ST2 board receives the FE
optical signal through its RM1 board and send it to the downstream board through its TM2
port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2033
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NE3:
In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1
board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the ST2 board receives the FE optical
signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port.
In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through
its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the ST2
board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the
downstream board through its TM2 port.

The ST2 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals. In addition,
the ST2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 function.
Table 22-27 Functions and features of the ST2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory signals.

Supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical
signals.
Supports IEEE 1588 V2 function.
Supports physical clock function.
Supports a maximum of 40 dB transmission.
Supports outloops.
Technical features
The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line
amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the
performance of the OSC.
The ST2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not
properly installed, the ST2 board can still ensure the pass-through of
ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.
Regeneration
function
The ST2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has
the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical
amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory
signals are added.
Operating
wavelength
When the ST2 board works with the SFIU board, the signal
wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM1/TM1 is 1511 nm, and
the signal wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM2/TM2 is 1491
nm.
When the ST2 board works with the FIU board, the supervisory
channel signal wavelength is 1511 nm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
eSFP
The board supports pluggable optical modules that use 1511 nm and
1491 nm wavelengths.
2034
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The ST2 board consists of the optical receiving module, service processing module, 1588
module, optical transmitting module, control and communication module, and power supply
module.
Figure 22-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board.
Figure 22-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board
WSC1
WSC2
RM1
O/E
FE signal
processing module
RM2
O/E
Supervisory signal
processing module
Optical
receiving
module
1588 module
E/O
TM1
E/O
TM2
Optical
transmitting
module
Control
Memory
Communication
CPU

Power supply
module
Required
Voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
Signal Flow
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The optical supervisory signal from the FIU/SFIU board is converted into an electrical
signal by the O/E module. After the conversion, the electrical signal is sent to the service
processing module. The service processing module extracts the supervisory information
from the electrical signal and sends the supervisory information to the SCC board for
processing. In addition, the service processing module extracts a clock signal and sends the
clock signal to the STG board for processing. The overhead bytes processed by the SCC
board, and the clock signal and time information processed by the STG board are sent to
the E/O module, where they are converted into an optical supervisory signal.
2035
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The FE signals are processed separately in the transmit and receive directions.
l
In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its
WSC1 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the
ST2 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal to the downstream board
through its TM1 port. The ST2 board receives another local FE electrical signal through
its WSC2 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the
ST2 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal to the downstream board
through its TM2 port.
In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives the optical supervisory signal and an FE
optical signal from the upstream board through its RM1 board and sends the FE optical
signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the ST2 board drops it
through its WSC1 port. In addition, the ST2 board receives the optical supervisory signal
and another FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM2 board and sends
the FE optical signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the ST2
board drops it through its WSC2 port.
Module Function
l

Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals.

Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals.

FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals.
Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into
OTU frames, processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding.
1588 module
Sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2
protocol, or extracts the clock signal from the optical supervisory signals according to
the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then sends the clock signal to the STG board.

Power supply module

22.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ST2 board.

Figure 22-15 shows the front panel of the ST2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2036
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 22-15 Front panel of the ST2 board

ST2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EOW
WSC1
WSC2
TM1
RM1
TM2
RM2
ST2
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces, one orderwire phone interface and two FE electrical interfaces
on the front panel of the ST2 board. Table 22-28 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2037
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-28 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ST2 board
Interface
Type
Function
TM1/TM2
LC
Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.
RM1/RM2
LC
Receives the first/second supervisory signal.
WSC1/WSC2a
RJ45
Transmits/Receives the first/second channel of FE

electrical signals.
EOW

NEs.
a: Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC1 or WSC2 interface
on the TN11ST2 board.
Laser Hazard Level

22.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one ST2 board.
Table 22-29 shows the valid slots for the ST2 board.
Table 22-29 Valid slots for the ST2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
22.4.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2

The characteristic code for the ST2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2038
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-30 Characteristic code for the ST2 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character

W.

range
The optical signal

wavelength range is 1484.5
nm to 1517.5 nm processed
by the board.
Eleventh character

always P.
Twelfth character
The numbers of optical

interface are two.
For example, the characteristic code for the ST2 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical
interface are two.


Table 22-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ST2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RM1/TM1
RM2/TM2
NOTE

For parameters of the ST2, refer to Table 22-32.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2039
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-32 ST2 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Optical Interface
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

NOTE
Only support Non-Loopback and Outloop.
Off, On
Default: On

status of a board.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Band Type
DEG Threshold
0 to 10167
Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An

alarm is reported when error codes detected
in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more than
the value of this parameter.
Laser Status
Default: 190
DEG Monitoring
Time(s)
2 to 10
Degrade Threshold
Before FEC
1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3,

1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6,
1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9,
1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12,
Default: 7
Sets the signal monitoring time. If the

number of bit errors in the signal exceeds
DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm
is reported.
Sets error codes thresholds for signals
before FEC.
Default: 1E-4
22.4.10 Specifications of the ST2

Table 22-33 lists the optical specifications of the ST2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2040
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 22-33 Optical specifications of the ST2 board

Item
Unit
Value
Signal rate
Mbit/s
155.52
nm
1504.5 to 1517.5
1484.5 to 1497.5
dBm
0.5 to 5
dBm
-41
Receiver overload
dBm
-10
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 0.95 kg (2.09 lb.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
ST2
17.5
19.5

2041
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Optical Protection Unit
23
Optical Protection Unit
About This Chapter

23.1 DCP
DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit
23.2 OLP
OLP: optical line protection unit
23.3 SCS
SCS: sync optical channel separator unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2042
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23.1 DCP
DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit

The available functional versions of the DCP board are TN11 and TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
DCP
TN12
DCP
Type
Board
Type
Description
TN11DCP
01
Supports the single-mode optical module.
02
Supports the multi-mode optical module.
01
Supports the single-mode optical module.
TN12DCP

l
Function:
The TN11DCP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical modules.
The TN12DCP supports single-mode optical module.
Specification:
The power consumption varies according to versions. For details, see 23.1.10
Specifications of the DCP.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2043
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11DCP
TN12DCP
In the case of single mode, the TN12DCP can substitute for the
TN11DCP. For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to
OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the
NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later
TN12DCP
None
23.1.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the DCP board implements intra-board 1+1
protection, optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection) and client-side 1+1
protection.
For the position of the DCP board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-1, Figure 23-2 and Figure
23-3.
Figure 23-1 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
TO11
RI1 1
TO21 MUX
OTU
TI1
RO1
RI11
DMUX RI21
FIU
FIU
RI21 DMUX
TI2
RI12
TO22 MUX
RI12
TI1 OTU
MUX TO21
DCP TO12
OTU RO2
RO1
TO11
DMUX RI22
FIU
FIU
RI22 DMUX
TO12
DCP
RO2
TI2
OTU
MUX TO22
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the DCP board does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2044
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 23-2 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (OWSP protection)
OTU1
1/2
2 x DCP
2/1
OTU1
OTU2
OADM
2/1 (East) 1/2
(East)
2
1
OADM
(West)
2
1
(West)
FIU
FIU
OADM 1/2
(West)
2/1
2 x DCP
2/1
1/2
2
1
OADM
(East)
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
1
2
2
1
OADM
(East)
1
2
OTU2
2/1
1/2
2 x DCP
OADM
2/1 (West) 1/2
FIU
FIU
2
1
OADM
(West)
1
2
2/1 OADM 1/2

(East)
2 x DCP
2/1
OTU2
OTU2
OTU1
: Working signal
1/2
OTU1
: Optical signal
: Protection signal
Figure 23-3 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TO11
RI11
TI1
TO21
RO1
RI21
DCP
TI2
RO2
TO12
RI12
MUX
OTU
(W)
OTU
TO22 (P)
RI22
DMUX
FIU
FIU
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
FIU
MUX
Client-side
RO1
TI1
OTU
RI21
(W)
TO21
RI12
TO12
OTU
(P) RI22
FIU
DMUX
RI11
TO11
DCP
RO2
TI2
TO22
NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the DCP
board can be used for client-side protection.

The DCP board provides intra-board 1+1 protection, OWSP protection and client-side 1+1
protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2045
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 23-1 Functions and features of the DCP board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the

OTU, which has no dual-fed and selective receiving function.
Compared with the OLP, the DCP provides protection for two
signals to implement 1+1 protection.
l Provides client-side 1+1 protection, using a working OTU and a
protection OTU to protect the client-side services.
l Provides the OWSP protection, make use of two different channels
to achieve the protection of one channel of service between all
stations.
Protection scheme
The intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection:

l The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and singleended switching.
l If the performance of the working fiber declines, the system
automatically switches the service from the working path to the
protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because
the APS protocol is not needed.
NOTE
The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-ended switching for GE services.
The OWSP protection:

l The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and dualended switching.
l When the performance of the working fiber declines, the system
automatically switches the service from the working path to the
protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because
the APS protocol is needed.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The DCP board contains the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 23-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2046
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 23-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board
TO11
TO12
TO21
TO22
RI11
TI1
TI2
Optical switch
RO1
RI12
Optical switch
RI21
RO2
RI22
Optical
power detecting
module
Optical module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
One DCP board supports the dual-fed and selective receiving of two channels of optical signals.
The DCP board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section
describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.
l
Transmit direction
The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through
the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.
Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI11
and RI12 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch
selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In
this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface.
The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from
the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2047
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical
power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch
based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the
protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l
Optical module
The optical module consists of two signal dual-fed parts and two signal selection parts.
Signal dual-fed part
Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and
outputs them to the working and protection channels.
Signal selection part
Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical
power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of
optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of
optical signals and outputs it.

Power supply module

23.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the DCP board.

Figure 23-5 shows the front panel of the DCP board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2048
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 23-5 Front panel of the DCP board
DCP
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TO11 RI11
TO12 RI12
TO21 RI21
TO22 RI22
RO1
TI1
RO2
TI2
DCP
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCP board. Table 23-2 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2049
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 23-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCP board
Interface
Type
Function
TI1
LC
Receives the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intraboard 1+1 protection)

Receives the first channel of client-side signals. (clientside 1+1 protection)
Receives one channel of client-side signals. (OWSP
protection)
TI2
LC
Receives the second channel of WDM-side signals.

(intra-board 1+1 protection)
Receives the second channel of client-side signals.
(client-side 1+1 protection)
Receives the optical signals from the adjacent stations.
(OWSP protection)
RO1
LC
Transmits the first channel of WDM-side signals.

Transmits the first channel of client-side signals.
Transmits one WDM-side optical signal to the OTU
board. (OWSP protection)
RO2
LC
Transmits the second channel of WDM-side signals.

Transmits the second channel of client-side signals.
Transmits one optical signal to the adjacent stations.
(OWSP protection)
TO11
LC
Transmits the first channel of signals to the working

multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)
OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Serves as a dual-fed optical interface, transmitting one
optical signal to the working router. (OWSP protection)
TO12
LC
Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection

Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection
Dual fed optical interface, transmitting one optical
signal to the protection router. (OWSP protection)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2050
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
TO21
LC
Transmits the second channel of signals to the working

Connects to the RI12 interface of another DCP board
in the same station by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
TO22
LC
Transmits the second channel of signals to the

protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Transmits the second channel of signals to the
protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Connects to the RI22 interface on the same DCP board
by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
RI11/RI12
LC
Receives the first channel of signals from the working

and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Serve as selective receive interfaces, connecting to the
working route and protection route, respectively.
(OWSP protection)
RI21/RI22
LC
Receives the second channel of signals from the

working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intraboard 1+1 protection)
working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1
protection)
Connects to the TO12 and TO22 interfaces on the same
DCP board, respectively, by using a fiber. (OWSP
protection)
Laser Hazard Level

23.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DCP board.
Table 23-3 shows the valid slots for the TN11DCP board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2051
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 23-3 Valid slots for the TN11DCP board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IIU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
Table 23-4 shows the valid slots for the TN12DCP board.
Table 23-4 Valid slots for the TN12DCP board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IIU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
23.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP

The characteristic code for the DCP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
Table 23-5 Characteristic code for the DCP board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.
Maximum protection
switching time

protection switching time.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that
the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2052
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 23-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TO11/RI11
TO12/RI12
TO21/RI21
TO22/RI22
TI1/RO1
TI2/RO2
NOTE

For parameters of the DCP, refer to Table 23-7.
Table 23-7 DCP parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)
-35 - -10

alarm.
information.
Default: -35

2053
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Initial Variance Value

Between Primary and
Secondary Input Power
(dB)
-10 - 10
The Initial Variance Value Between

Primary and Secondary Input Power
(dB) parameter provides an option to set the
reference value of the optical power variance
between the primary and secondary input
optical interfaces of a board.
See D.19 Initial Variance Value Between
Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Variance Threshold
Between Primary and
Secondary Input
Optical Power (dB)
3-8
Default: 0
Default: 5
The Variance Threshold Between Primary

and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
parameter provides an option to set the
optical power variance threshold of the
primary and secondary optical interfaces of a
board. When the threshold is reached, signal
degrade (SD) occurs. When the variance
between the primary and secondary optical
power exceeds the threshold, the optical
switch switches services to the channel with
better optical power. The configured value
can be queried.
See D.55 Variance Threshold Between
23.1.10 Specifications of the DCP

Table 23-8 Optical specifications of the DCP on the OptiX OSN 8800
Interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Unit
Value
TN11DCPa
TN12DCPb
TI1-TO11
TI1-TO12
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
Insertion loss
at the
transmit end
Single-mode
dB
multimode
dB
4.5
RI11-RO1
RI12-RO1
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Insertion loss
at the receive
end
Single-mode
dB
1.5
Multi-mode
dB

2054
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Item
Unit
Value
TN11DCPa
TN12DCPb
Range of the input optical

power
Single-mode
dBm-
-35 to 7
Multi-mode
dBm
-35 to 0
Single-mode
nm
1270 to
1350,
1528 to 1567
Multi-mode
nm
830 to 870
Switching threshold of optical power

difference
dB
Range of the alarm threshold for the optical

power difference
dB
3 to 8
3 to 8
a: TN11DCP has no single-mode optical module.

b: TN12DCP has no multi-mode optical module.
Table 23-9 Optical specifications of the DCP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN
3800
Interface
Item
Unit
TN11DCP
TN12DCPa
TI1-TO11
TI1-TO12
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
Insertion loss
at the
transmit end
Single-mode
dB
Multi-mode
dB
4.5
RI11-RO1
RI12-RO1
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Insertion loss
at the receive
end
Single-mode
dB
1.5
1.5
Multi-mode
dB
Range of the input optical

power
Single-mode
dBm
-35 to 7
-35 to 7
Multi-mode
dBm
-35 to 0
Single-mode
nm
1270 to
1350,
1528 to 1567
1270 to
1350,
1528 to 1567
Multi-mode
nm
830 to 870
dB
Switching threshold of optical power

difference
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value

2055
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Item
Unit
Range of the alarm threshold for the optical

power difference
Value
dB
TN11DCP
TN12DCPa
3 to 8
3 to 8
a: TN12DCP board has no multi-mode optical module.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
DCP
6.8
7.5
23.2 OLP
OLP: optical line protection unit

The available functional versions of the OLP board are TN11 and TN12.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
OLP
TN12
OLP

2056
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Type
Table 23-10 lists the type description of the TN11OLP board.
Table 23-10 Type description of the TN11OLP board
Board
Type
Description
TN11OLP
01
Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal

power application; supports client 1+1 protection.
TN11OLP
02
Supports multi-mode optical module and is intended for normal

power application; supports client 1+1 protection.
Table 23-11 lists the type description of the TN12OLP board.

Table 23-11 Type description of the TN12OLP board
Board
Type
Description
TN12OLP
01
Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal

power application; supports client 1+1 protection and intra-board
1+1 protection.
03
Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for high

power application; supports optical line protection.

l
Function:
The TN11OLP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical modules. It supports only
normal power application.
The TN12OLP supports single mode optical modules. It supports not only normal power
application but also high power application.
Specification:
The power consumption varies according to versions. For details, see 23.2.10
Specifications of the OLP.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OLP
TN12OLP
In single mode, the TN12OLP can substitute for the TN11OLP.

For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN
6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the NE
software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version,
or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00
or a later version.

2057
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN12OLP
None
23.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the OLP board provides the optical line protection,
intra-board 1+1 protection, and client-side 1+1 protection.
For the position of the OLP board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-6, Figure 23-7, Figure
23-8 and Figure 23-9.
Figure 23-6 Position of the TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection,
application 1)
OTU
OTU
TI
MUX
FIU
OTU
OTU
RI1
RI1
TO1
TO2
RI2
RI2
TO2
RO
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OLP
OLP
RO
DMUX
TO1
FIU
TI
MUX
OTU
OTU
NOTE
at the same time.
Figure 23-7 Position of the TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection,
application 2)
OTU
OTU
FIU
FIU
OA
FIU
FIU
OA
OA
FIU
FIU
OA
OA
FIU
FIU
OA
OA
MUX
OA
OTU
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OLP
OLP
OTU
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
NOTE
at the same time.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2058
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 23-8 Position of the TN12OLP01 board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
TO1
RI1
OTU
TI
RO OLP
TO2
MUX
DMUX
FIU
FIU
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
FIU
RI2
FIU
MUX
DMUX
RI1
TO1
RI2
OLP
RO
TI OTU
TO2
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the OLP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
Figure 23-9 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN11OLP02/TN12OLP01 board in the WDM system

Client-side
Cient-side
TO1
RI1
OTU
(W)
DMUX
MUX
FIU
FIU
MUX
DMUX
TI
RO OLP
OTU RI1
(W) TO1
OLP
TO2 OTU
RI2
(P)
MUX
DMUX
FIU
FIU
DMUX
MUX
RO
TI
OTU RI2
(P) TO2
NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the OLP
board can be used for client-side protection.

The OLP board provides optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1
protection.
Table 23-12 Functions and features of the OLP board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides the optical line protection to ensure the normal receiving of

signals when the line fiber fails.
Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU
that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function.
Provides client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU
and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2059
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protection scheme
The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and single-ended

switching.
NOTE
The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-ended switching for GE services.
Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is

not required.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The OLP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 23-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board.
Figure 23-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board
TO1
TO2
TI
Optical switch
RI1
RO
RI2
Optical power
detecting
module
Optical module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
2060
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The TI optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through
the TO1 and TO2 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI1
and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch
selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In
this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
The selected optical signals are output through the RO optical interface.
The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from
the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical
power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch
based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the
protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l
Optical module
The optical module consists of a signal dual-fed part and a signal selection part.
Signal dual-fed part
Signal selection part
Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical
power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of
optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of
optical signals and outputs it.

Power supply module

23.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OLP board.

Figure 23-11 shows the front panel of the OLP board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2061
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 23-11 Front panel of the OLP board
OLP
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
TO1
RI1
TO2
RI2
RO
TI
OLP
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the OLP board. Table 23-13 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2062
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 23-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OLP board
Interface
Type
Function
TI
LC
Receives the line signal from the FIU board. (optical

line protection)
Receives one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Receives one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1
protection)
RO
LC
Transmits the line signal to the FIU board. (optical line

protection)
Transmits one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Transmits one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1
protection)
TO1/TO2
LC
Transmits the working and the protection signals to the

line side. (optical line protection)
Transmits signals to the working and the protection
Transmits signals to the working and the protection
RI1/RI2
LC
Receives the working or the protection signal from the

line side. (optical line protection)
Receives the signals from the working and the
protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Receives the signals from the working and protection
Laser Hazard Level

23.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one OLP board.
Table 23-14 shows the valid slots for the TN11OLP board.
Table 23-14 Valid slots for the TN11OLP board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

2063
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 6800
IIU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
Table 23-15 shows the valid slots for the TN12OLP board.
Table 23-15 Valid slots for the TN12OLP board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IIU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
23.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP

The characteristic code for the OLP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
Table 23-16 Characteristic code for the OLP board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.
Maximum protection
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2064
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 23-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TO1/RI1
TO2/RI2
TI/RO
NOTE

For parameters of the OLP, refer to Table 23-18.
Table 23-18 OLP parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)
-35 to -10

alarm.
information
Default: -35
for more
information.

2065
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Initial Variance Value

Between Primary and
Secondary Input Power
(dB)
-10 to 10
The Initial Variance Value Between

Primary and Secondary Input Power
(dB) parameter provides an option to set the
reference value of the optical power variance
between the primary and secondary input
optical interfaces of a board.
See D.19 Initial Variance Value Between
Variance Threshold
Between Primary and
Secondary Input
Optical Power (dB)
3 to 8
Default: 0
The Variance Threshold Between Primary

and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
parameter provides an option to set the optical
power variance threshold of the primary and
secondary optical interfaces of a board. When
the threshold is reached, signal degrade (SD)
occurs. When the variance between the
primary and secondary optical power exceeds
the threshold, the optical switch switches
services to the channel with better optical
power. The configured value can be queried.
See D.55 Variance Threshold Between
Default: 5
23.2.10 Specifications of the OLP

Table 23-19 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 8800
Interfa
ce
Item
TI-TO1
TI-TO2
Insertio
n loss at
the
transmit
end
single
mode
Insertio
n loss at
the
receive
end
RI1-RO
RI2-RO
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value
TN11OLPa
TN12OLP01b
TN12OLP03b
dB
multimo
de
dB
4.5
single
mode
dB
1.5
1.5
multimo
de
dB

2066
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfa
ce
Item
Range of the input

optical power
Unit
Value
TN11OLPa
TN12OLP01b
TN12OLP03b
single
mode
dBm
-35 to 7
-30 to 23
multimo
de
dBm
-35 to 0
single
mode
nm
1270 to 1350,
1528 to 1567
1270 to 1350,
1528 to 1567
multimo
de
nm
830 to 870
Switching threshold of optical

power difference
dB
Range of the alarm threshold

for the optical power difference
dB
3 to 8
3 to 8
3 to 8
Operating
wavelength range
a: TN11OLP has no single mode optical module.

b: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.
Table 23-20 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN
3800
Interfa
ce
Item
TI-TO1
TI-TO2
Insertio
n loss at
the
transmit
end
single
mode
Value
TN11OLP
TN12OLP01a
TN12OLP03a
dB
multimo
de
dB
4.5
Insertio
n loss at
the
receive
end
single
mode
dB
1.5
1.5
1.5
multimo
de
dB
Range of the input

optical power
single
mode
dBm
-35 to 7
-35 to 7
-30 to 23
multimo
de
dBm
-35 to 0
single
mode
nm
1270 to
1350,
1528 to 1567
1270 to 1350,
1528 to 1567
1270 to 1350,
1528 to 1567
RI1-RO
RI2-RO
Operating
wavelength range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit

2067
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfa
ce
Item
Unit
Value
TN11OLP
TN12OLP01a
TN12OLP03a
multimo
de
nm
830 to 870
Switching threshold of optical

power difference
dB
Range of the alarm threshold

for the optical power difference
dB
3 to 8
3 to 8
3 to 8
a: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight
l
TN11OLP: 0.9 kg (1.98 lb.)
TN12OLP: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OLP
6.0
6.6
TN12OLP
4.0
4.5
23.3 SCS
SCS: sync optical channel separator unit

The available functional versions of the SCS board is TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2068
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
SCS
Type
Board
Type
Description
SCS
01
Supports single-mode optical module.
02
Supports multi-mode optical module.
23.3.2 Application
As a type of optical protection unit, the SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and boardlevel protection (extended mode).
For the position of the SCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-12 and Figure 23-13.
Figure 23-12 Position of the SCS board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TO11
RI11
MUX
OTU
TO21 (W)
TI1
RO1
RI21
SCS
TI2
RO2
TO12
RI12
OTU
TO22 (P)
DMUX
FIU
FIU
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
FIU
OTU
(W) RI21
RO1
TI1
TO21
RI12
TO12
SCS
OTU
(P) RI22
FIU
DMUX
RI22
Client-side
RI11
TO11
MUX
RO2
TI2
TO22
Figure 23-13 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended
mode)
TBE1
R1
S
C
S
TBE2
TBE1
TBE1
L
4
G
O
A
D
M
F
I
U
F
I
U
TBE2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

O
A
D
M
L
4
G
TBE2
TBE1
S
C
S
R1
TBE2
2069
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and board-level protection (extended
mode).
Table 23-21 Functions and features of the SCS board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Receives signals from the working and the protection OTUs and
implements client-side 1+1 protection.
l Receives signals from the working and the protection TBE and
implements board-level protection (extended mode).
Protection scheme
The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not need
protocol support. Instead, the channel protection executes switching
by detecting SD and SF events of the channel.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The SCS board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 23-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2070
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 23-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board
Optical module
TI1
Splitter
TO11
TO12
TI2
Splitter
TO21
TO22
RO1
Coupler
RI11
RI12
RO2
Coupler
RI21
RI22
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
One SCS board supports the dual-fed and dual receiving of two channels of optical signals. The
SCS board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes
the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.
l
Transmit direction
The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection channels through the TO11
and TO12 optical interfaces.
Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection channels are input through the RI1 and RI2
optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the coupler. The system activates one of the
two channels of optical signals based on the service quality. In this way, the selection of
path optical signals is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1
optical interface. Normally, the working OTU at the receive end is active, and the protection
OTU is standby. Once a fault occurs in the services, an alarm triggers a protection switching.
The system shuts down the working OTU, and activates the protection OTU.
Module Function
l
Optical module
The optical module consists of the splitters and couplers.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2071
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Splitter
Coupler
Receives the signals in the working and the protection channels. The system selects one
channel of optical signals based on the service quality.
l

Power supply module

23.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SCS board.

Figure 23-15 shows the front panel of the SCS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2072
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 23-15 Front panel of the SCS board
SCS
STAT
TO11 RI11
TO12 RI12
TO21 RI21
TO22 RI22
RO1
TI1
RO2
TI2
SCS
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the SCS board. Table 23-22 lists the type
Table 23-22 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SCS board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface
Type
Function
TI1/TI2
LC
Receives the first/second channel of client-side signals.

2073
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
RO1/RO2
LC
Transmits the first/second channel of client-side

signals.
TO11/TO12
LC

and protection OTU.
TO21/TO22
LC

and the protection OTU.
RI11/RI12
LC

and protection OTU.
RI21/RI22
LC

working and protection OTU.
Laser Hazard Level

23.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SCS board.
Table 23-23 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCS board.
Table 23-23 Valid slots for the TN11SCS board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IIU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
23.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS

The characteristic code for the SCS board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2074
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 23-24 Characteristic code for the SCS board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.
Maximum protection
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.


Table 23-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TI1/RO1
TO11/RI11
TO12/RI12
TI2/RO2
TO21/RI21
TO22/RI22
NOTE

For parameters of the SCS, refer to Table 23-26.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2075
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 23-26 SCS parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

default value.
23.3.10 Specifications of the SCS

Table 23-27 lists the optical specifications of the SCS board.
Table 23-27 Optical specifications of the SCS board
Interface
Item
TI1-TO11
TI1-TO12
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
Splitting
insertion loss
RI11-RO1
RI12-RO1
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Coupling
insertion loss
Unit
Value
Single-mode
dB
Multi-mode
dB
4.5
Single-mode
dB
Multi-mode
dB
4.5
Single-mode
nm
1270 to 1350,
1528 to 1567
Multi-mode
nm
830 to 870
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2076
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
SCS
0.2
0.3

2077
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

24 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
24
Spectrum Analyzer Unit
About This Chapter

24.1 MCA4
MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit
24.2 MCA8
24.3 OPM8
OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board
24.4 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitored unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2078
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

24.1 MCA4

The available functional versions of the MCA4 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
MCA
4
Type
Table 24-1 lists the types of the MCA4 board.
Table 24-1 Type description of the MCA4 board
Board
Type
Description
TN11MCA
4
01
Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
02
Detects optical power of 40 Gbit/s or lower signals.

Detects OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
NOTE
In a 40G/10G hybrid system, if the spacing between channels carrying 10
Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s signals is 50 GHz, OSNR of all signals cannot be
detected.
24.1.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA4 board supports spectral analysis for four channels.
For the position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2079
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 24-1 Position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system

OTU
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU
DMUX
OTU
MCA4
MCA4
OTU
OTU
OAU
OAU
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
NOTE
The MCA4 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at both the receive and
transmit ends, you can configure the MCA4 boards at both ends for supervision.

The MCA4 board is mainly used for spectral analysis, APE and power detection.
Table 24-2 Functions and features of the MCA4 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides the spectral analysis for four channels.
Detection function
Supports the following detection functions and reports to the SCC

board. The following information can be displayed on the U2000.
l Optical power of the channel
l Central wavelength
l Optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR)
NOTE
The board only detects the OSNRs of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
detected.
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path

Implements the APE function in cooperation with other boards.
APE function
Detects the optical power of each channel.

Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The MCA4 board consists of the 1x4 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control
Figure 24-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2080
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 24-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board
IN01
IN02
IN03
IN04
Spectrum analysis module
1 4
optical switch
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
Driving and control module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Control and
communication module
Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The 1x4 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the spectral analysis
module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent
to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and
communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The final
spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.
Module Function
l
1x4 optical switch

Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed four channels of optical signals
for spectrum analysis.

Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of
wavelengths.

Drives and controls spectrum.
Controls the 1x4 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2081
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

24.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the MCA4 board.

Figure 24-3 shows the front panel of the MCA4 board.
Figure 24-3 Front panel of the MCA4 board
MCA4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
MCA4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2082
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the MCA4 board. Table 24-3 lists the type
Table 24-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA4 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN4
LC
Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to

receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can
be connected to four "MON" interfaces at the same
time.
24.1.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one MCA4 board.
Table 24-4 shows the valid slots for the MCA4 board.
Table 24-4 Valid slots for the MCA4 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

2083
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the
two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4
For OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the
two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number
For OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot
of the two slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the
number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of
the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU2.
24.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4

The characteristic code for the MCA4 board contains one character, indicating the band of the
optical signals processed by the board.
Table 24-5 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

represents C band. The value
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.


Table 24-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1-IN4
1-4

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2084
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For parameters of the MCA4, refer to Table 24-7.

Table 24-7 MCA4 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Monitoring
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Sets the optical interface monitoring state.

When the monitoring of an optical interface
is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not
analyze the wavelength at this interface.
Sets the working band types of a board.
Configure Band
Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Actual Band

board.
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Port
Displays port name and wavelength

frequency.
Band
Displays the current band.
Wavelength Monitor
Status
No Monitor, Monitor
Default: No Monitor
Sets whether to monitor the current

wavelength. It is recommended to set the
monitor status of wavelengths that bear
services to Monitor.
Board
Displays the board name.
Optical Switch No.
The Optical Switch No. parameter

provides an option to query the current
working optical interface of the multichannel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA).
See D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM
Monitor Interval
(min.)
5 - 49995

supervisory channel for the current board
and to analyze the time interval of the
channel status.
See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM
Default: All
Default: 10

2085
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
WDM type
Default, 100-GHz
Spacing with CRZ,
50-GHz Spacing with
CRZ, 100-GHz
Spacing with 40Gbps,
50-GHz Spacing with
40Gbps
Default: Default
24.1.10 Specifications of the MCA4

Table 24-8 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4 board.
Table 24-8 Optical specifications of the MCA4 board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
Detect range for single channel optical power
dBm
-30 to -10
Detect accuracy for optical power
dB
1.5
Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range

for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and
the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.)
dB
1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)

2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
Detect accuracy for central wavelength
nm
0.1
pcs
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MCA4
8.0
8.5

2086
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

24.2 MCA8

The available functional versions of the MCA8 board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
MCA
8
Type
Table 24-9 lists the types of the MCA8 board.
Table 24-9 Type description of the MCA8 board
Board
Type
Description
TN11MCA
8
01
Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
02
Detects optical power of 40 Gbit/s or lower signals.

Detects OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
NOTE
detected.
24.2.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA8 board supports spectral analysis for eight
channels.
For the position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2087
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 24-4 Position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system

OTU
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU
DMUX
OTU
MCA8
MCA8
OTU
OTU
OAU
OAU
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
NOTE
The MCA8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and
transmit ends, you can configure one MCA8 board at each end to provide supervision.

The MCA8 board provides spectral analysis, automatic power equilibrium (APE) and detection.
Table 24-10 Functions and features of the MCA8
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides spectral analysis for eight channels.
Detection function
Detects the:
l Optical power of the channel
l Central wavelength
l Optical signal-to-noise ratio
NOTE
The board only detects the OSNRs of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
detected.
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path

The MCA8 reports the detected data to the SCC. The U2000 can
display the detected information.
Implements the APE function when the board is used with other
required boards.
APE function
Detects the optical power of each channel.

Optical-layer ASON
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Supported

2088
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The MCA8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control
Figure 24-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board.
Figure 24-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board
IN01
IN02
IN03
IN04

1 8
optical switch
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Control and
communication module
Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and transmits the channel to the
spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data
parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control
and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The
U2000 reports the final spectrum analysis results.
Module Function
l
1x8 optical switch

Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals
for spectrum analysis.

Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of
wavelengths.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2089
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Drives and controls spectrum.

Controls the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.
l

Power supply module

24.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the MCA8 board.

Figure 24-6 shows the front panel of the MCA8 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2090
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 24-6 Front panel of the MCA8 board
MCA8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
MCA8
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MCA8 board. Table 24-11 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2091
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 24-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA8 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN8
LC
Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to

be connected to eight "MON" interfaces at the same
time.
24.2.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one MCA8 board.
Table 24-12 shows the valid slots for the MCA8 board.
Table 24-12 Valid slots for the MCA8 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot
of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number
For the OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot
of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom
slot of the two slots in the chassis. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8
24.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8

The characteristic code for the MCA8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2092
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 24-13 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card
processes optical signals in the C band.


Table 24-14 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1-IN8
1-8

For parameters of the MCA8, refer to Table 24-15.
Table 24-15 MCA8 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Monitoring
Enabled, Disabled
Sets the optical interface monitoring

state. When the monitoring of an optical
interface is set to Disabled, the MCA
board does not analyze the wavelength
at this interface.
Default: Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2093
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band

board.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Port

frequency.
Band
Wavelength Monitor
Status
No Monitor, Monitor
Default: No Monitor

Board
Optical Switch No.

Monitor Interval
(min.)
5 - 49995

supervisory channel for the current
board and to analyze the time interval of
the channel status.
See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.)
information.
WDM type
Default, 100-GHz
Spacing with CRZ, 50GHz Spacing with
CRZ, 100-GHz
Spacing with 40Gbps,
50-GHz Spacing with
40Gbps
Default: All
Default: 10
Default: Default
24.2.10 Specifications of the MCA8

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2094
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 24-16 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8 board.
Table 24-16 Optical specifications of the MCA8 board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
dBm
-30 to -10
Detect accuracy for optical power
dBm
1.5
Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range

for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and
the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.)
dB
1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)

2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
nm
0.1
pcs
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MCA8
12.0
13.0
24.3 OPM8
OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board

Only one functional version of the OPM8 board is available, that is, TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2095
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
OPM
8
24.3.2 Application
The OPM8 board monitors the optical power for eight channels.
For the position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-7.
Figure 24-7 Position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system
OTU
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU
OPM8
OTU
DMUX
OAU
OTU
OTU
OPM8
OAU
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
NOTE
The OPM8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and
transmit ends, you can configure the OPM8 boards at each end for supervision.

The OPM8 board is mainly used for optical power monitoring and APE.
Table 24-17 Functions and features of the OPM8
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides the spectral analysis for eight channels.
Monitoring function
Detects optical power of channels and reports the central wavelength

and optical power to the SCC board.
The results are reported to the SCC and can be displayed on the
U2000.
APE function
Implements the APE function when the board is used with other
required boards.
Monitors the optical power of each channel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2096
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The OPM8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, optical power monitor module, driving and
control module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 24-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OPM8 board.
Figure 24-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the OPM8 board
IN01
IN02
IN03
IN04
IN05
IN06
IN07
IN08
Optical power monitor

module
1 8
optical switch
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals from the board it is connected to,
and sends the channel to the optical power monitor module. After being analyzed and converted,
the optical power value is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface.
The control and communication module reports the value to the SCC board and the U2000. The
final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2097
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Module Function
l
1x8 optical switch

Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals
for optical.
Optical power monitor module

Monitors channel optical power and wavelength information and reports the data to the
driving and control module.

Drives and scans spectrum.
Instructs the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.

Power supply module

24.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the OPM8 board.

Figure 24-9 shows the front panel of the OPM8 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2098
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 24-9 Front panel of the OPM8 board
OPM8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
OPM8
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the OPM8 board. Table 24-18 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2099
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 24-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OPM8 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN8
LC
Connects to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to

be connected to "MON" interfaces of other boards at
the same time.
24.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one OPM8 board.
Table 24-19 shows the valid slots for the OPM8 board.
Table 24-19 Valid slots for the OPM8 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
24.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8

The characteristic code for the OPM8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the
Table 24-20 Characteristic code for the OPM8 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OPM8 board is C, indicating C band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2100
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


For parameters of the OPM8, refer to Table 24-21.
Table 24-21 OPM8 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Monitoring
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Sets the optical interface monitoring state.

When the monitoring of an optical interface
is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not
analyze the wavelength at this interface.
Configure Band
Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Actual Band

board.
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Port

frequency.
Band
Wavelength Monitor
Status
No Monitor, Monitor
Default: No Monitor

Board
Optical Switch No.

Default: All

2101
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Monitor Interval
(min.)
5 - 49995

supervisory channel for the current board
and to analyze the time interval of the
channel status.
See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM
Default: 10
24.3.9 Specifications of the OPM8

Table 24-22 lists the optical specifications of the OPM8 board.
Table 24-22 Optical specifications of the OPM8 board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
dBm
-30 to -10
Detected accuracy for optical power
dB
1.5
Channel spacing
GHz
50/100
pcs
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OPM8
12
15
24.4 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitored unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2102
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The available functional version of the WMU board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
WM
U
24.4.2 Application
The WMU board monitors the wavelengths at a 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing in the system.
For the position of the WMU board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-10.
Figure 24-10 Position of the WMU board in the WDM system
OSC
MUX
DMUX
OA
OA
WMU
MUX
DMUX
FIU
FIU
ITL
WMU
ITL
DMUX
MUX
OA
OA
DMUX
MUX
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2103
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
One WMU board can implement the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions. Figure 24-10 shows
the two WMU boards, which, however, refer to the same WMU board.

The WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths at a channel spacing
of 50 GHz/100 GHz on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system.
Table 24-23 Functions and features of the WMU board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
The board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on

the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at
50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing, and performs centralized
monitoring of the fixed-wavelengths on the OTU at the transmit end
in a transmission system. In addition, the board can monitor the
wavelengths in two different optical transmit directions.
Optical switch
The optical switch is used to select the optical signals from the desired
transmission direction to monitor.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The WMU board consists of the 1x2 optical switch, optical wavelength and power detection
Figure 24-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WMU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2104
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 24-11 Functional block diagram of the WMU board
IN1
IN2
Optical wavelength and power

detection module
1X2
optical switch
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The 1x2 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the optical
wavelength and power detection module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and
converted, the wavelength and optical power information is sent to the control and
communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further
reports the results to the SCC board and the U2000. The final results are displayed on the
U2000.
Module Function
l
1x2 optical switch

Selects one channel of signals from the signals accessed through two optical interfaces for
optical wavelength and power detection.
Optical wavelength and power detection module

Detects each single-wavelength optical signals from the optical channel selection module,
and reports the wavelength and optical power information to the SCC board.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2105
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power supply module

24.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the WMU board.

Figure 24-12 shows the front panel of the WMU board.
Figure 24-12 Front panel of the WMU board
WMU
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
IN1
IN2
WMU
Indicators
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2106
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the WMU board. Table 24-24 lists the type
Table 24-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WMU board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1/IN2
LC
Connects to the MON optical interface on the optical

amplifier boards in two different transmit directions,
respectively, for centralized wavelength monitoring.
24.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses on WMU board.
Valid Slots
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17


Table 24-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
IN1
1
2107
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
IN2

For WMU parameters, refer to Table 24-26.
Table 24-26 WMU parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

interface name. It is recommended to
use the default value.
24.4.9 Specifications of the WMU

Table 24-27 Optical specifications of the WMU board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
GHz
50/100
Per-channel input optical power range
dBm
-36 to -16
GHz
<2.5
Detect accuracy for single channel optical

power
dB
<2
Detect range for Central wavelength offset
GHz
-10 to 10
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
2108
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Optical Module
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11WMU
12
15

2109
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

25
25 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
About This Chapter

25.1 VA1
VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
25.2 VA4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2110
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

25.1 VA1

The available functional versions of the VA1 board are TN11 and TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
VA1
TN12
VA1

l
Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 25.1.10 Specifications of the VA1.
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11VA1
TN12VA1

later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800
V100R003 or a later version.
TN12VA1
None
25.1.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA1 board implements the power adjustment
for one signal.
For the position of the VA1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2111
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 25-1 Position of the VA1 board in the WDM system

OTU OTU
VA1 VA1
VA1
VA1 VA1
VA1
OA
MR2
OA
OTU OTU
OA
MR2
VA1
OA
VA1

The VA1 board adjusts optical power and provides power-off protection.
Table 25-1 Functions and features of the VA1 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Queries the attenuation and adjusts the optical power of one optical
signal according to the control command sent by the SCC.
Power-off protection
Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages to the

corresponding optical receiver due to high optical power when the
power supply recovers.
TN11VA1: When there is no power supplied to the VA1, the
attenuation of the VA1 changes to its maximum value automatically.
Shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA1
still remains its maximum value. When the system begins to work
normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set
last time.
attenuation of the VA1 keeps the original value or changes to its
maximum value automatically. When being the maximum value,
shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA1
last time.
Attenuation range
The variable attenuation range is between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The
resolution is 0.1 dB.
NOTE
The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA1 is 1.5 dB.
Optical-layer ASON
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Supported

2112
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The VA1 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control
Figure 25-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA1.
Figure 25-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1
Variable optical attenuator
IN
OUT
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
According to commands sent by the SCC board, the VA1 board adjusts the power of the input
optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l

Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.

Detects the input and output optical power of the VA1 board.
Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation
to the control and communication module.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2113
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

25.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the VA1 board.

Figure 25-3 shows the front panel of the VA1 board.
Figure 25-3 Front panel of the VA1 board
VA1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
VA1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2114
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the VA1 board. Table 25-2 lists the type
Table 25-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA1 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.
OUT
LC
Transmits the adjusted optical signals.
Laser Hazard Level

25.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one VA1.
Valid Slots
Table 25-3 shows the valid slots for the TN11VA1 board.
Table 25-3 Valid slots for the TN11VA1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2115
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 25-4 Valid slots for the TN12VA1 board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
25.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1

The characteristic code for the VA1 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum
attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.
Table 25-5 Characteristic code for the VA1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
Digits 1 through 3
Attenuation value

attenuation.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 board is 21.5, indicating that the
maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.


Table 25-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2116
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


For parameters of the VA1, refer to Table 25-7.
Table 25-7 VA1 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of Max.
Attenuation Rate
(dB)

power attenuation of a board channel so
that the optical power of the output
signals at the transmit end is within the
preset range.
parameter by querying the
corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate
(dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
parameters.
Default: Value of Max.

Attenuation Rate
(dB)

Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)


(dB)

Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

board.

2117
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: All
25.1.10 Specifications of the VA1

TN11VA1 Optical Specifications

Table 25-8 lists the optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board.
Table 25-8 Optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board
Item
IN-OUT
Unit
Value
Inherent insertion loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
Adjustment accuracy

Item
IN-OUT
Unit
Value
dB
1.5
Dynamic attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
1 (attenuation10dB)
1.5 (attenuation15dB)
Adjustment accuracy
1.8 (attenuation>15dB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2118
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Optical Module
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
VA1
6.5
7.2
25.2 VA4

The available functional versions of the VA4 board areare TN11 and TN12.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
VA4
TN12
VA4

l
Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 25.2.10 Specifications of the VA4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2119
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11VA4
TN12VA4

later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800
V100R003 or a later version.
TN12VA4
None
25.2.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA4 board adjusts optical power for four optical
signals.
For the position of the VA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-4.
Figure 25-4 Position of the VA4 board in the WDM system
VA4
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
VA4
VA4
VA4
OA
MR2
OA
VA4
OA
MR2
VA4
OA
VA4

The VA4 board is mainly used to adjust optical power and provide power-off protection.
Table 25-10 Functions and features of the VA4 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Queries the attenuation and adjust the optical power of four optical
signals respectively according to the control command sent by the
SCC.

2120
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Power-off protection
Supports power-off protection to avoid damage to the corresponding

optical receiver caused by too-high optical power when the power
supply recovers.
attenuation of the VA4 changes to its maximum value automatically.
Shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA4
last time.
attenuation of the VA4 keeps the original value or changes to its
maximum value automatically. When at the maximum value, shortly
after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA4 still
remains at its maximum value. When the system begins to work
the previous time.
Attenuation range
The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The
resolution is 0.1 dB.
NOTE
The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA4 is 1.5 dB.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The VA4 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control
Figure 25-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2121
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 25-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4

IN1
OUT1
IN2
OUT2
IN3
OUT3
IN4
OUT4
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC board, the VA4 board adjusts the power of four
channels of optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l

Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.

Detects the input and output optical power of the VA4 board.
Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation
to the control and communication module.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2122
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

25.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the VA4 board.

Figure 25-6 shows the front panel of the VA4 board.
Figure 25-6 Front panel of the VA4 board
VA4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT1
IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
VA4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2123
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the VA4 board. Table 25-11 lists the type
Table 25-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA4 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN4
LC
Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.
OUT1-OUT4
LC
Transmits the adjusted optical signals.
Laser Hazard Level

25.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one VA4 board.
Valid Slots
Table 25-12 Valid slots for TN11VA4 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2124
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 25-13 Valid slots for TN12VA4 board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
25.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4

Table 25-14 Characteristic code for the VA4 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First to third digits
Attenuation value

attenuation.
maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.


Table 25-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
IN3/OUT3
IN4/OUT4

2125
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE

For VA4 Parameters, refer to Table 25-16.
Table 25-16 VA4 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
to Value of Max.

power attenuation of a board channel so
that the optical power of the output
signals at the transmit end is within the
preset range.
parameter by querying the
corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate
(dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
parameters.
Default: Value of Max.


Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Configure Band
Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2126
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Actual Band

board.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Input Power Loss

Threshold (dBm)

value of the input optical power, which
can trigger a board to generate an optical
power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When
the actual input optical power is lower
than this threshold value, the board
information.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: All
25.2.10 Specifications of the VA4


Item
IN-OUT
Unit
Value
dB
1.5
Dynamic attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
Adjustment accuracy

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2127
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
IN-OUT
Unit
Value
Inherent insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation range
dB
20
dB
1 (attenuation10 dB)
1.5 (attenuation15 dB)
Adjustment accuracy
1.8 (attenuation>15 dB)
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Optical Module
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
VA4
8.5
9.4

2128
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

26 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
26
Optical Power and Dispersion

Equalizing Unit
About This Chapter

26.1 DCU
DCU: dispersion compensation unit
26.2 TDC
TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2129
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

26.1 DCU
DCU: dispersion compensation unit

The available functional version of the DCU board is TN11.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
DCU
26.1.2 Application
As a kind of dispersion compensation board, the DCU board is used at the transmit or receive
end in the transmission system to compensate for the dispersion that is accumulated in an optical
transmission system.
For the position of the DCU board in the WDM system, see Figure 26-1.
Figure 26-1 Position of the DCU board in the WDM system
DCU
OTU
MUX
OBU
DMUX
OAU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
OAU
MUX
OBU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
DCU
OTU
MUX
DCU
OBU
DMUX
OAU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
OAU
OBU
DCU
OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
2130
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The DCU board compensates for the dispersion that is accumulated in the fiber during
transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. This enables the transmitted optical signals
to be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board,
the DCU board can implement long haul optical transmission.
Table 26-1 Functions and features of the DCU board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides dispersion compensation for different transmission distance.
Dispersion
compensation
method
Compensates for the dispersion accumulated in an optical

transmission system, and compresses the optical signal pulse. This
enables the transmitted optical signals to be restored at the output end.
Long haul
transmission with
optical regeneration
Implements long haul transmission when used together with an

optical amplifier board.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The DCU board consists of the dispersion compensation module, control and communication
module, and power supply module.
Figure 26-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2131
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 26-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board
IN
OUT
Dispersion compensation
EDFA optical module
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The dispersion compensation module (DCM) performs the dispersion compensation with the
main path optical signals received through the IN optical interface. Then, the signals are output
through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
The dispersion compensation module

After the optical signal is transmitted for a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is
widened because of the positive dispersion accumulated in the system. This severely affects
the system transmission performance. The DCM employs the negative dispersion borne
with the dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) to offset the positive dispersion in the
transmission fiber, and compresses the input optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical
signals at the output end are restored back to the original signals.

Power supply module

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2132
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

26.1.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the DCU board.

Figure 26-3 shows the front panel of the DCU board.
Figure 26-3 Front panel of the DCU board
DCU
OUT
IN
DCU
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCU board. Table 26-2 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2133
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 26-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCU board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Accesses the multiplexed signals to be compensated in

terms of dispersion.
OUT
LC
Outputs the multiplexed signals that have been

compensated in terms of dispersion.
Laser Hazard Level

26.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DCU board.
Table 26-3 shows the valid slots for the DCU board.
Table 26-3 Valid slots for the DCU board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
26.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU

The characteristic code for the DCU board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber
that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance.
Table 26-4 Characteristic code for the DCU board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Code
Meaning
Description
Character before hyphen (-)
Fiber type
Type of the fiber that the

DCU board works with
Character after hyphen (-)
distance
The transmission distance

achieved through dispersion
compensation

2134
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates
that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance
is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to
separate each distance.


Table 26-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
OUT

For parameters of the DCU, refer to Table 26-6.
Table 26-6 DCU parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Displays the position of the

optical interface.
Optical Interface
Name

interface name. It is
recommended to use the default
value.
26.1.10 Specifications of the DCU

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2135
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 26-7 Optical specifications of the DCU board (1)
Item
Unit
Value
DC
U0
1
DC
U0
2
DC
U0
3
DC
U0
4
DC
U0
5
DC
U06
D
CU
07
DCU0
8
Typical dispersion
compensation distance
km
20
40
60
80
100
120
10
Maximum insertion loss
dB
3.3
4.7
6.4
9.8
2.3
2.8
slope
90%-110%
Polarization mode
dispersion
ps
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.8
0.3
0.3
Polarization-dependent
loss
dB
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Maximum input power a
dBm
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
range
nm
1528-1568
Dispersion compensating
fiber type
G.652 fiber
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.
Table 26-8 Optical specifications of the DCU board (2)

Item
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value
DCU
11
DCU
12
DCU
13
DCU
14
DCU1
5
DCU1
6
Typical dispersion
compensation distance
km
20
40
60
80
100
120
Maximum insertion loss
dB
5.9
6.9
7.8
8.8
slope
90%-110%
Polarization mode
dispersion
ps
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Polarization-dependent
loss
dB
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3

2136
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
DCU
11
DCU
12
DCU
13
DCU
14
DCU1
5
DCU1
6
20
20
20
20
20
Maximum input power a
dBm
20
range
nm
1528-1568
Dispersion compensating
fiber type
G.655 fiber
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Optical Module
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11DCU
0.2
0.3
26.2 TDC
TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board

The available hardware version of the TDC board is TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
TDC

2137
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Type
Table 26-9 lists the types of the TDC board.
Table 26-9 Type description of the TDC board
Board
Type
Description
TN11TDC
01
Compensates for dispersion of DQPSK and ODB optical modules.
02
Compensates for dispersion of DRZ optical modules.
26.2.2 Application
The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in one channel.
If a 40 Gbit/s OTU board is configured with intra-board 1+1 protection, the TDC board must be
configured on the protection path at the receive end. For the application of the board in a WDM
system, see Figure 26-4.
Figure 26-4 Application of the TDC board in a WDM system
O
T
U
O
L
P
TDC
M40
OA
OA
D40
M40
OA
OA
D40
D40
OA
OA
M40
D40
OA
OA
M40
TDC
O
L
P
O
T
U

The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in a single channel and reports information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2138
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 26-10 Functions and features of the TDC board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
The TDC board is used for C-band optical signals.

Compensates for the dispersion in the single channel. The dispersion
is adjustable.
Information report
Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information about the

board.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported by TN11TDC01.

The TDC board consists of the optical module, the driving and detection module, the control
and communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 26-5 is the functional block diagram of the TDC board.
Figure 26-5 Functional block diagram of the TDC board
Optical module
Tunable dispersion
compensation module
IN
OUT
Data
signal
Driving
signal
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
SCC
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Back plane
(Controlled by SCC)
2139
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
The TDC reports hardware information and alarm events to the SCC through the communication
module. One single wavelength optical signal is input through the IN interface. After the
dispersion is compensated for by the compensation module, the signal is output through the
OUT.
Module Function
l
Optical module
The optical module of the TDC board contains a tunable dispersion compensation module.
The system can adjust for the dispersion of the compensation module.

Drives and controls the TDC module, and reports the detected dispersion to the control and
communication module.

Power supply module

26.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicator and interfaces on the front panel of the TDC board.

Figure 26-6 shows the front panel of the TDC board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2140
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 26-6 Front panel of the TDC board
TDC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
TDC
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDC board.
Table 26-11 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2141
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 26-11 Types and functions of the TDC interfaces

Interface
Connector Type
Description
IN
LC
Connected to the optical demultiplexer to input a single

signal that is to be equalized.
OUT
LC
Connected to the OTU to output the equalized a single

signal.
Laser Hazard Level

26.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TDC board.
Table 26-12 shows the valid slots for the TDC board.
Table 26-12 Valid slots for the TDC board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
26.2.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC

The characteristic code for the TDC board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber
Table 26-13 Characteristic code for the TDC board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Code
Meaning
Description
Fiber type
Fiber type that the TDC

board is compatible with
distance

compensation

2142
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that
the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is
tunable.

This section introduces information such as slots, interfaces and parameters for the TDC
configuration in an NM system.

Table 26-14 shows the sequence number displayed in an NM system of the optical interface on
the panel of the board.
Table 26-14 Display of the optical interfaces on the TDC board
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE
An optical interface displayed on the NM denotes a pair of actual optical interfaces, one of which serves
to receive signals and the other of which serves to transmit signals.

For parameters of the TDC, refer to Table 26-15.
Table 26-15 TDC parameters
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

interface name. It is recommended to
use the default value.

2143
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Receive Wavelength
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
Sets Receive Wavelength of a

board. The value of the Receive
Wavelength is as follows:
l CWDM:
11/1471.00/208.170
to
18/1611.00/188.780
l When the receive wavelength of

the board is the same as the
transmit wavelength of the local
board, use the default value,
which indicates keeping the
receive wavelength the same as
the transmit wavelength of the
local board automatically.
Default: /
l When the receive wavelength of

the board is different from the
transmit wavelength of the local
board, the value of this parameter
must be the same as the transmit
wavelength of the peer board;
otherwise, services are affected.
NOTE
For ASON services, this parameter must
be set to the default value.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
The Planned Band Type parameter

sets the band type of the current
working wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE
See D.45 Planned Band Type

information.
26.2.10 Specifications of the TDC

Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical specifications and
power consumption.
Table 26-16 lists the optical specifications of the TDC board.
Table 26-16 Optical specifications of the TDC board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Parameter
Unit
Value
Optical channels
80
Dispersion tuning range
ps/nm
400

2144
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Parameter
Unit
Value
Dispersion tuning resolution
sec
<15
Input power range
dBm
-13 to 0
Dispersion accuracy
ps/nm
10
Output optical power
dBm
The output optical power should

be close to the input power, with
an error range of 1.5 dB.
The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TDC
13
15

2145
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

27 Clock Unit
27
Clock Unit
About This Chapter

27.1 STG
STG: Centralized Clock Board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2146
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

27 Clock Unit
27.1 STG
STG: Centralized Clock Board

The available functional versions of the STG board are TN11, TN52, TNK2.

Boar
d
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800
OptiX OSN
3800
TN11
STG
TN52
STG
TNK
2STG

l
Appearance:
The TN11, TN52 and TNK2 versions use different front panels with different
dimensions. See 27.1.5 Front Panel and 27.1.8 Specifications of the STG.
Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 27.1.8 Specifications of
the STG.
The STG boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
27.1.2 Application
The STG board is a type of clock board, which locks the reference clock source and provides
clock signals and frame signals to the system. The clock signals comply with ITU-T G.813 and
ITU-T G.823.
For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, see Figure 27-1.
For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, see Figure 27-2.
For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 6800, see Figure 27-3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2147
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

27 Clock Unit
Figure 27-1 Position of the TNK2STG in OptiX OSN 8800 T64

external clock
external clock
STI
STG
STG
Clock signals &

Frame signals
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
Clock signals &

Frame signals
G.694.1
G.694.1
1
STI
MUX
NS2
DMUX
TOM
TOM
4
DMUX
NS2
Client side
MUX
NS2
WDM side
WDM side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
NOTE
The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2
function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.
Figure 27-2 Position of the TN52STG in OptiX 8800 T32

external clock
external clock
STI
STG
STG
Clock signals &

Frame signals
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
Clock signals &

Frame signals
G.694.1
G.694.1
1
STI
MUX
NS2
DMUX
TOM
TOM
4
DMUX
NS2
Client side
MUX
NS2
WDM side
WDM side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
NOTE
The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2
function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.
Figure 27-3 Position of the TN11STG in OptiX OSN 6800

external clock
external clock
STG
STG
Clock signals &

Frame signals
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
NS2
DMUX
TOM
TOM
4
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
NS2
Clock signals &

Frame signals
G.694.1
G.694.1
NS2
WDM side
DMUX
MUX
NS2
WDM side

100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
4
Client side
2148
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

27 Clock Unit
NOTE
When the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, the
external clock is input on the STG board.

The STG board is mainly used to lock the reference clock source and provide signal signals and
frame signals to the system.
Table 27-1 Functions and features of the STG board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Locks the reference clock source.

l Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G.
813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals.
l Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream
system.
Active/standby
switching function
In the OptiX OSN 8800, the STG board uses a 1+1 hot backup scheme.
The two STGs serve as mutual backups. When both of them are
normal, one of them functions as the active board, and the other
functions as the standby board. Service boards select the clock source
according to the status of the two STGs. When the active STG is
faulty, an active/standby switching occurs. Then, the standby STG
becomes active, and the services boards select the clock from the
current active STG according to the status of the two STGs.
Clock source
selection function
Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock
source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the
system.
Time
synchronization
function

The STG board consists of a control and communication module and a clock processing module.
Figure 27-4 shows the functional block diagram of the STG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2149
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

27 Clock Unit
Figure 27-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the STG board
Time signals/
Clock signals
Clock signals/Frame signals
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Module Function
l

The clock processing module consists of the clock signal receiver, clock signal transmitter,
clock signal trace sub-module, clock source selection sub-module, IEEE 1588 clock
synchronization sub-module, and active/standby STG board switching control sub-module.
Locks the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide
the STG board and the system with the synchronization clock source.
Updates the clock signals periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE.

Power supply module

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2150
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

27 Clock Unit
27.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the STG board.

Figure 27-5 shows the front panel of the TNK2STG board.
Figure 27-6 shows the front panel of the TN52STG board.
Figure 27-7 shows the front panel of the TN11STG board.
Figure 27-5 Front panel of the TNK2STG board
STG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
Figure 27-6 Front panel of the TN52STG board

STG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2151
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

27 Clock Unit
Figure 27-7 Front panel of the TN11STG board
STG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TOD
CLK
IN
OUT
STG
Indicators
l
Interfaces
Table 27-2 lists details on the interfaces of the TN11STG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2152
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

27 Clock Unit
Table 27-2 Interface description of the STG board

Interface
Connector
Function
IN
SMB
Clock signal input interface
OUT
SMB
Clock signal output interface
CLK
RJ-45
Clock signal input and output

interface
TOD
RJ-45
Time signal input and output

interface
NOTE
The CLK port and the IN/OUT port cannot be used as the input or output port at the same time. If the CLK
port is used to input or output clock signals, the IN/OUT port cannot be used to input/output clock signals.
If the IN/OUT port is used to input/output clock signals, the CLK port cannot be used to input or output
clock signals.
27.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one STG board.
Table 27-3 shows the valid slots for the TN11STG board.
Table 27-3 Valid slots for the TN11STG board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU15, IU16
Table 27-4 shows the valid slots for the TN52STG board.
Table 27-4 Valid slots for the TN52STG board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU42, IU44
Table 27-5 shows the valid slots for the TNK2STG board.
Table 27-5 Valid slots for the TNK2STG board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU75, IU86

2153
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

27 Clock Unit
27.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG

None
27.1.8 Specifications of the STG

l
Dimensions of the front panel:

TNK2STG: 50.3mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2
in. (H))
TN52STG: 28.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
4.2 in. (H))
TN11STG: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN52STG/TNK2STG: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN11STG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TNK2STG
14.0
16.0
TN52STG
13.0
14.1
TN11STG
8.7
9.57

2154
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
28
OCS System Unit
About This Chapter

28.1 BPA
BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board
28.2 EAS2
EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board
28.3 EGSH
EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board
28.4 SF64
SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
28.5 SF64A
SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
28.6 SFD64
SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
28.7 SL64
SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board
28.8 SLD64
SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board
28.9 SLH41
SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board
28.10 SLO16
SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board
28.11 SLQ16
SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board
28.12 SLQ64
SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2155
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
28.1 BPA
BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board

Only one functional version of the BPA board is available, that is, N4.
28.1.2 Application
The BPA is an optical booster and pre-amplifier board. The BPA board provides a BA and a
PA, which are respectively used at the transmit end and receive end of the OptiX OSN 8800.
Figure 28-1 shows the position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system.
Figure 28-1 Position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system
Tx
BA
Rx
Tx
PA
Rx

During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high.
Therefore, the BA and PA are required to ensure that the optical receiver can receive normal
optical signals.
Table 28-1 Functions and features of the BPA board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic functions
Increases the launched optical power of the line board to 13

15 dBm. As a result, when the G.652 optical fiber with a loss
of 0.275 dB/km is used, the transmission distance can be 120
km or above.

2156
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Function and
Feature
Description
Pre-amplification
function
Provides the PA module to pre-amplify the received optical

signals. Increases the power of the small-volume optical
signals by 2233 dB so that the sensitivity of the receiver
increases to 37 dBm.
EDFA
l Supports the automatic control of the laser temperature and

optical power of the EDFA module.
l Supports the automatic monitoring of the input and output
optical power of the EDFA module and query of the optical
power of the EDFA module.
l Supports the protection function of the EDFA module.
When no optical signals are received, the laser is
automatically turned off. When optical signals are
received, the laser is automatically turned on.
Performance events
and alarms
monitoring
Supports the reporting of the performance parameters of the

laser. Reports various alarms and performance events, which
facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Software upgrade
Supports the software upgrade without interrupting services.

The BPA board consists of the optical part, driving and detecting part, and data processing and
communication part.
Figure 28-2 shows the function modules and signal flow of the BPA board.
Figure 28-2 Function modules and signal flow of the BPA board
Optical input
Optical output
Optical input
Optical output
Optical
part
EDFA optical module
Pump current
check
Drive
module
Module
temperature
control
Input/output
power
check
Pump
Drive
current
module
check
Module
temperature
control
Input/output
power
check
Driving
and
detecting
part
A/D or D/A conversion
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Communication
module
Control
module

Data processing and

communication part
2157
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Optical Part
The BPA board has one EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module magnifies the optical
power.
Driving and Detecting Part

The driving and detecting part provides the EDFA optical module with the driving current. It
also checks the working status of each part in the EDFA optical module. In addition, it predicts
and handles possible faults.
The driving and detecting part performs the following functions: checking the pump current,
driving the optical module, controlling the temperature of the optical module, and checking the
input and output optical power.
Data Processing and Communication Part

The data processing and communication part consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. The data
processing and communication part analyzes the test result of the tested circuit. Then, it adjusts
the driving circuit based on the analysis result so that the gain or output optical power of the
EDFA optical module remains in the range of the rated value. It also classifies the abnormal
states represented by the measured values and reports the abnormal states to the NMS.
28.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the BPA board.

Figure 28-3 shows the front panel of the BPA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2158
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-3 Front panel of the BPA board
BPA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
BOUT
BIN
POUT
PIN
BPA
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board:
l
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There are two LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BPA board. Table 28-2 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2159
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BPA board
Interface
Type
Function
BIN
LC
Receives one channel of optical signals for

amplification.
BOUT
LC
Transmits one channel of amplified optical

signals.
PIN
LC
Receives one channel of optical signals for preamplification.
POUT
LC
Transmits one channel of pre-amplified optical

signals.
28.1.6 Valid Slots

The BPA board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on the subrack.
Otherwise, the board does not function.
Valid slots for the BPA board are as follows:
l
IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36 on the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack
IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68 on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
28.1.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA

The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the
board. The characteristic code for the BPA board indicates the output optical power of the optical
interfaces.
Table 28-3 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the
output optical power.
Table 28-3 Relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the output optical
power
Board
Characteristic
Code
Description
SSN4BPA01
01
The receiver sensitivity of the PA module

is 37 dBm.
The output optical power of the BA
module is 14 dBm.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2160
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Display of Optical Interfaces on the NMS

Table 28-4 lists the displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the board on the NMS.
Table 28-4 Displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the BPA board on the NMS
Optical interface
Displayed serial number on the NMS
BOUT
BIN
POUT
PIN
28.1.9 Specifications of the BPA

Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and
power consumption.
Table 28-5 lists the optical specifications of the BPA board.
Table 28-5 Optical specifications of the BPA board
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s or 9953280 kbit/s
Application code
V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, and U-64.2
Line code pattern
NRZ
Input wavelength (nm)
BA: 1530 to 1565

PA: 1550.12
Input optical power

(dBm)
BA: -6 to +3
PA: -28 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at
the rate of 10 Gbit/s)
PA: -38 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at
the rate less than 10 Gbit/s)

(dBm)
13 to 15 (BA)
Sensitivity (dBm)
PA: -37
Noise figure (dB)
BA: < 6.5

PA: < 6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2161
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
NOTE
When you perform a loopback on the PA module of the BPA board, prevent the damage caused by high
input optical power to the optical module.
Laser Safety Class

The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1M, indicating that the maximum output
The mechanical specifications of the BPA board are as follows:
l
Dimensions (mm): 25.4 (W) x 220 (D) x 262.05 (H)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 11 W
28.2 EAS2
EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board

The EAS2 is available in the following functional version: N3.
28.2.2 Application
The EAS2 is used to access Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching
of Ethernet services.
Figure 28-4 shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board.
The Ethernet switching board accesses and converges Ethernet services, and provides the
Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow
classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the
Ethernet switching board performs encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH
mapping/demapping for data.
The Ethernet switching board can be interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and
the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a network-level solution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2162
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-4 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board
NMS
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
VLAN 100
Service flow
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
Line board
Data board
Cross-connect and
timing board
User A1

The EAS2 supports the access of 10 GE Ethernet services, LCAS, and test frame functions.
Table 28-6 provides the functions and features of the EAS2.
Table 28-6 Functions and features of the EAS2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Basic
functi
ons
Receives/Transmits 2x10 GE Ethernet services.
Interfa
ce
types
The optical interfaces are 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-LW Ethernet optical

interfaces, which comply with IEEE 802.3ae.

2163
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Functi
ons
when
being
used
with
an
interfa
ce
board
Provides interfaces on the front panel.
Interfa
ce
charac
teristic
s
Working
modes
10GE full-duplex
Flow
control at
ports
Auto-negotiation mode
Not supported
Non-autonegotiation mode
Supported
Query/
Supported
Setting of
port
status
Query of
interface
types
Supported
RMON
measure
ment
Supported
Setting of Not supported

optical
power
threshold
s
Servic
e
catego
ries
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Hot
optical
module
swapping
Supports hot swapping of SFP+ optical modules.
EPL
service
Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.

2164
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
28 OCS System Unit
Description
EVPL
service
l Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN.

l Supports EVPL services based on VCTRUNK+VLAN.
l Supports QinQ-based EVPL services.
l Supports a maximum of 4096 links.
EPLAN
service
l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum
number of supported VBs is 1.
l Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static
MAC address table that can contain 512 records.
l Supports the setting and query of the aging time of the MAC address
Servic
e
specifi
cation
s
EVPLA
N service
l Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN encapsulation.
Formats
of
Ethernet
data
frames
IEEE 802.3
Supported
Ethernet II
Supported
IEEE 802.1q TAG
Supported
Maximu
m frame
length
l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600

bytes.
MTU
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes
to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets
that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.
Bound
bandwidt
h
128xVC-4
Mapping
granularit
ies
Supports VC-4-Xv (X 64), and VC-4-4c/16c/64c contiguous

concatenation services.
Encapsul
ation
formats
HDLC
Not supported
LAPS
Not supported
GFP-F
Supported
MPLS
technolo
gy
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
l Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
Supports tunnel-based MPLS.

2165
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Protec
tion
schem
es
28 OCS System Unit
Description
VLAN
technolo
gy
Supports a total number of 4095 VLANs, which comply with IEEE

802.1q/p.
Maximu
m uplink
bandwidt
h
20 Gbit/s
VCTRU
NK
specificat
ions
Number of VCTRUNKs: 34
TPS
Not supported
BPS
Not supported
PPS
Not supported
DLAG
Supported
LCAS
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the

bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT
Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
STP/
RSTP
Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply

with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP
Supports MSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1s.
LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Configuration principles are as follows:

l VCTRUNKs 1 and 18 can be bound with a maximum of 64 VC-4
paths. The other VCTRUNKs can be bound with a maximum of
eight VC-4 paths.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.

ERPS
Supports ERPS, which complies with ITU-T G.8032.

NOTE
ERPS cannot be used on the following bridges:
l IEEE 802.1d bridges
l IEEE 802.1ad bridges in SVL/Ingress filter disable mode
Clock
synchr
onizati
on
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Synchron
ous
Ethernet
Supported
IEEE
1588v2
Not supported

2166
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
Maint
enanc
e
featur
es
ETHOAM
QoS
l Supports multicast continuity check (CC), unicast loopback (LB),

link trace (LT), and associated alarms, and complies with IEEE
802.1ag.
l Supports OAM automatic discovery and loopback at the remote end,
and complies with IEEE 802.3ah.
Test
frame
Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes.
Response
to ping
Not supported
Port
mirroring
Supported
Loopbac
k
capabilit
y
PHY layer at Ethernet ports
Inloops
MAC layer at Ethernet ports
Inloops
VC-4 level
Not supported
VC-3 level
Not supported
VC-12 level
Not supported
Ethernet
performa
nce
monitori
ng
(RMON)
l Supports the Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Provides various alarm and performance events, which facilitates the

management and maintenance of the equipment.
l Supports the query of the rate of a port.

l Supports the detection of alarms indicating that the traffic at a port
exceeds the threshold.
l Supports traffic classification that is based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT

+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, MPLS label, or MPLS label+EXP.
l Supports CAR with a granularity of 64 kbit/s.
l Supports eight levels of priority queues at each port.
l Supports port- and queue-based traffic shaping.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2167
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Funct
ion
and
Featu
re
Description
IGMP
snoopi
ng
l Supports the enabling of the IGMP snooping protocol. Supports a maximum of

1024 multicast groups.
l Supports the query of the enabling status of the IGMP snooping protocol.
l Supports the setting and query of the IGMP snooping protocol parameters.
l Supports a maximum of 1024 static multicast groups.
Flow
contro
l
functi
on
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
SDH
ASON
Supported

The EAS2 consists of the interface processing module, mapping module, interface converting
module, logic and control module, clock module, and power module.
Figure 28-5 shows the functional block diagram of the EAS2 by describing how to process 1x10
GE signals.
Figure 28-5 Functional block diagram of the EAS2
Backplane
10GE
Interface
processing
module
Laser
shutdown
Service
processing
module
Interface
converting
module
Encapsulation
module
Digital encapsulation module
Mapping module
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
LOS
Logic and
control module
Communication
Clock reference and frame delimitation
+3.3 V
Clock module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Virtual
concatenation
processing
module
Power
module

Power
module
Fuse
SCC unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
2168
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
In the Transmit Direction

The encapsulation or conversion module demaps and decapsulates the signals received from the
cross-connect unit. Then, the interface converting module performs the interface converting
operations and transmits the signals to the service processing module. The service processing
module implements the functions of the Layer 2 switching and private line service. After the
interface processing module converts parallel signals to serial signals and encodes the serial
signals, the Ethernet interface module transmits the serial signals.
In the Receive Direction

The SFP+ optical module performs O/E conversion on the 10 GE Ethernet signals, and then
transmits the signals to the Ethernet interface module. The Ethernet interface module transmits
the parallel signals to the service processing module to realize the functions of the Layer 2
switching and private line service. The encapsulation module encapsulates and maps the Ethernet
GFP-F frames, and then transmits the signals to the cross-connect unit.
Logic and Control Module

The logic and control module provides the communication, control, and service configuration
functions of the board.
Clock Module
The clock module traces the system reference clock, and generates the required clock signals
when the board is working.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board
require.
28.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EAS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.
Diagram of the Front Panel

Figure 28-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EAS2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2169
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-6 Front panel of the EAS2
EAS2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
EAS2
Indicators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:
l
Connection status indicator (LINK) one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) one color (orange)
Interfaces
The front panel of the EAS2 has two 10 GE interfaces. Table 28-7 describes the types and usage
of the interfaces of the EAS2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2170
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-7 Interfaces of the EAS2

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
IN1IN2
LC
Receives 10 GE signals.
OUT1OUT2
LC
Transmits 10 GE signals.
28.2.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches

The EAS2 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.2.7 Valid Slots

The EAS2 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EAS2 fails to work
properly. The EAS2 occupies one slot in the subrack.
The EAS2 can be installed in slots IU1 to IU8, IU12 to IU27, and IU29 to IU36 on the OptiX
OSN 8800 T32.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 28-8.
Table 28-8 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EAS2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
NOTE
28.2.9 Configuring the Board Functions

The EAS2 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, LCAS,
and LAG. Configure the functions according to actual requirements.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EAS2 by using the U2000:
l
LCAS
LPT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2171
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
LAG
DLAG
ETH-OAM
Test Frame
STP/RSTP
IGMP Snooping

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EAS2 board.
On the NMS user interface, Ethernet Interface of the EAS2 board provides parameters
classified according to External Port and Internal Port. Regardless of an external port or
internal port, the parameter configuration window involves many tab pages. Table 28-9 lists the
tab pages in the parameter configuration window.
Table 28-9 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on
the EAS2 board
Port
Tab
External Port
Basic Attributes
Flow Control
TAG Attributes
Network Attributes
Advanced Attributes
Internal Port
TAG Attributes
Network Attributes
Encapsulation/Mapping
LCAS
Bound Path
Each parameter of the EAS2 on each tab page is described as follows.

l
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in
Table 28-10.
Table 28-10 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Port
Displays all ports available

on the Ethernet board.

2172
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Name
For example, PORT-1
Specifies the name of a

PORT port. The name can
contain up to 32 characters
in English or 16 characters
in Chinese.
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
The Enabled/Disabled
whether to enable a port. A
port can receive services if
Enabled but cannot receive
services if this parameter is
set to Disabled.
Default: Disabled
See D.8 Enabled/Disabled

to obtain the details.
Working Mode
Maximum Frame Length
Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10GE Full-Duplex
LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex
WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex
WAN(SONET mode)
Specifies the working mode

of the Ethernet port on a
board. This parameter
determines the maximum
transmission rate and
communication mode of the
Ethernet port.
1518-9600
Specifies the maximum

frame length supported by
the Ethernet port.
Default: 1522
Port Physical Parameters
Displays the actual working

state of a port.
MAC Loopback
Outloop
The MAC Loopback

parameter specifies the
MAC loopback state at an
Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test
whether equipment runs
normally by creating a
looped path at the MAC
layer and then sending and
receiving signals over the
path.
See D.29 MAC Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
When setting this

parameter, you must ensure
the working modes of the
interconnected ports are the
same. Otherwise, the
services are not available.

2173
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
PHY Loopback
Outloop
The PHY Loopback

PHY loopback state at an
looped path at the PHY
path.
See D.44 PHY Loopback
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in
Table 28-11.
Table 28-11 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port)
Field
Value
Description
Port

Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Symmetric Flow Control,
Send Only, Receive Only
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode is
selected when a port works
in non-autonegotiation
mode.
Default: Disable
See D.41 NonAutonegotiation Flow

Control Mode to obtain
the details.
l
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in
Table 28-12.
Table 28-12 Parameters on the TAG tab page (external port)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Port
Displays the type of a

VCTRUNK port.

2174
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
TAG
Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid
Specifies the type of a data

packet that a port processes.
This parameter is available
only when the network
attribute of the port is PE or
UNI.
Default: Tag Aware
Default VLAN ID
The Default VLAN ID

parameter specifies a
default VLAN ID for a port
that transmits untagged
packets.
VLAN Priority
The VLAN Priority

priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port.
Entry Detection
Enabled, Disabled
The Entry Detection

whether a port detects
packets by tag identifier.
Default: Enabled
See D.11 Entry Detection

l
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in
Table 28-13.
Table 28-13 Parameters on the TAG tab page (internal port)
Field
Value
Description
Port
Displays the type of port,

either PORT or
VCTRUNk.
Name
For example,
VCTRUNK-3
Specifies the name of a

VCTRUNK port. The name
can contain up to 32
characters in English or 16
characters in Chinese.
TAG

UNI.
Default: Tag Aware
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2175
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Default VLAN ID
The Default VLAN ID

parameter specifies a
default VLAN ID for a port
that transmits untagged
packets.
VLAN Priority
The VLAN Priority

priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port.
Entry Detection
Enabled, Disabled
The Entry Detection

Default: Enabled

The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-14.
Table 28-14 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page
Field
Value
Description
Port

either PORT or
VCTRUNk.
Port Attributes
UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware,

NNI
Specifies the position of the

port in the network.
Different port attributes
support different types of
packets.
Default: UNI
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed
in Table 28-15.
Table 28-15 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Port

Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Enabled, Disabled
The Broadcast Packet

Suppression parameter
determines whether to
suppress the traffic of
broadcast packets.
Default: Disabled

2176
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
10%-100%

percentage of broadcast
traffic in the bandwidth of a
port. The broadcast packets
beyond this percentage will
be discarded.
Default: 30%
See D.3 Broadcast Packet

Suppression Threshold to
obtain the details.
l
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are
Table 28-16 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port)
Field
Value
Description
Port
Displays the VCTRUNK

ports.
Mapping Protocol
GFP
Specifies the mapping

protocol adopted by the
VCTRUNK port.
Default: GFP
Scramble
Unscrambled, Scrambling
mode[X43+1], Scrambling
mode[X48+1]
Default: Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
Set Inverse Value for CRC
Specifies whether to
scramble the payload area
of the encapsulation
protocol and which
scramble mode is adopted.
Specifies whether to set an
inverse value for the CRC
field of the HDLC or LAPS
protocol.
You can set this parameter
only when the mapping
protocol is HDLC or LAPS.
Check Field Length
FCS32, No
Default: FCS32
FCS Calculated Bit

Sequence
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Big endian, Little endian

Default: Big endian

Specifies the length of the

CRC field of the mapping
protocol.
Specifies the sequence of
storing the bits in the CRC
field in the FCS frame of the
mapping protocol.
2177
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Extension Header Option
Yes, No
Specifies whether the GFP

encapsulation protocol
supports the extension
header.
Default: No
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table
28-17.
Table 28-17 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port)
Field
Value
Description
Port
VCTRUNKn
Indicates the VCTRUNK

port. The letter n indicates
the number of the
VCTRUNK port.
Enabling LCAS
Enabled, Disabled
The Enabling LCAS

parameter can increase or
decrease the SDH network
capacity without affecting
the service. The capacity is
automatically decreased if a
member fails, and is
automatically increased if
the member recovers.
Default: Disabled
LCAS Mode
Huawei Mode, Standard

Mode
Default: Huawei Mode
Hold off Time(ms)
0-10000
Default: 2000
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

The LCAS Mode

sequence for the sink end to
respond to the MST and
Rs_Ack messages received
from the source end.
The Hold off Time(ms)
(LCAS) parameter is also
called HO Procedure
Timer Duration. It
specifies HO Procedure
Timer Duration of the
LCAS protocol. If the
LCAS coexists with
another network-level
protection scheme (for
example, MSP or SNCP),
you can set this parameter
to postpone the LCAS
switching.
2178
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
0-720
The WTR Time(s)

parameter is also called
WTR Procedure Timer
Duration. It specifies
WTR Procedure Timer
Duration of the LCAS
protocol. Set this parameter
to avoid impact caused by
the alarm jitter on the link
status.
Default: 300
Enabled, Disabled
TSD
Default: Disabled
Min. Members - Transmit

Direction
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2-256
Default: 256

The TSD parameter

specifies the B3 or BIP
error status of a
VCTRUNK member. TSD
stands for trail signal
degrade. When this
parameter is set to
Enabled and if a
VCTRUNK member has
excessive B3 or BIP bit
errors, the LCAS protocol
regards that this member
fails and deletes it from the
available members. If this
parameter is set to
Disabled, the LCAS
protocol does not monitor
the status of the B3 or BIP
bit errors of a VCTRUNK
member.
When the LCAS is enabled,
the LCAS_PLCT alarm is
reported if certain members
in the transmit direction fail
and the number of valid
members is smaller than a
certain value. The Min.
Members - Transmit
Direction parameter
specifies the certain
number of the valid
members in the transmit
direction.
2179
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Min. Members - Receive

Direction
2-256
Specifies the minimum

number of members in the
receive direction. If the
LCAS is enabled and the
number of valid members is
less than the specified
value, an alarm is reported.
Default: 256
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table
28-18.
Table 28-18 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port)
Field
Value
Description
VCTRUNCK Port
Displays the number of the

VCTRUNK port.
Level
Specifies the level of the

VCTRUNK bound path.
Service Direction
Specifies the direction of

the Ethernet service.
Bound Path
Specifies the number of the

bound path, including the
VC4 path number and VC3
path number.
Bound Path Count

bound VCTRUNK ports.
Used Channel
Displays the channels in

use.
Activation Status
Displays whether the path

is active.
28.2.11 Specifications of the EAS2

The technical specifications of the EAS2 include the parameters specified for optical interfaces,
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces

Table 28-19 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2180
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-19 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2
Parameter
Value
Transmission rate
10.3125 Gbit/s or 9.953 Gbit/s
Processing capability
2x10GE signals
Type of optical interface
10GBASE-LR/LW
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
range (nm)
1290 to 1330
Transmission distance (km)
10

power (dBm)
0.5

power (dBm)
-8.2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-12.6

(dB)
3.5
Connector type
LC
Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on the board is Class 1. The maximum launched optical power of
the optical interfaces is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
Ethernet Performance Specifications

Figure 28-7 shows the connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in
the case of overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EAS2.
Figure 28-7 Connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in the case
of overloading and latency specifications
Tested
equipment 1
Tested
equipment 2
Port 1
Port 2
Data network
performance
analyzer
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2181
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-20 lists the throughput specifications of the EAS2. Table 28-21 lists the packet loss
ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2. Table 28-22 lists the latency specifications of the
EAS2.
NOTE
The specifications vary according to the configuration and networking of the test environment and
the VC services bound on the VCG side. The specifications that are obtained in the actual environment
are used.
The specifications in the following tables are obtained in the following scenario: EPL services are
configured and 64 VC-4s are bound on the 10xGE port.
The data network performance is measured by using the SmartBits. The specification values in the
following tables are obtained by using the SmartFlow software of the SmartBits analyzer.
The specific test results depend on the settings on the SmartFlow. The values listed in the following
tables are the values displayed on the SmartBits analyzer.
In the following tables, the value such as (01,01,01) indicates the equipment No., slot No., and port
No. "(01,01,01) to (01,01,02)" and "(01,01,02) to (01,01,01)", however, indicate the forward and
reverse tests values, respectively.
Table 28-20 Throughput specifications of the EAS2

Frame Size
(byte)
Passed Rate
(%)
Tx Frames (pks/
sec)
Rx Frames (pks/
sec)
Total (%)
64
100.00000
14880952
14880952
100.00000
128
98.00000
8278145
8278145
100.00000
256
98.00000
4432624
4432624
100.00000
512
98.00000
2302025
2286453
99.32000
1024
97.00000
1161710
1156436
99.55000
1280
97.00000
932835
927296
99.41000
1518
97.00000
788146
783050
99.35000
Table 28-21 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frame Size
(byte)
Rate Tested
(%)
Tx Frames (pks/
sec)
Rx Frames (pks/
sec)
Total (%)
64
100.00000
14880952
14880952
0.00
128
100.00000
8445945
8445945
0.00
256
99.00000
4480286
4470526
0.21
512
98.00000
2302025
2286453
0.67
1024
97.00000
1161710
1156469
0.45
1280
97.00000
932835
927323
0.59
1518
97.00000
788146
783073
0.64

2182
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-22 Latency specifications of the EAS2

Frame
Size
(byte)
Rate
Tested
(%)
Tx
Frames
(pks/sec)
Rx Frames
(pks/sec)
Min
Latency
(us)
Ave
Latency
(us)
Max
Latency
(us)
64
96.00000
14204544
14204544
24.4
25.681
27.9
128
96.00000
8116883
8116883
24.6
25.944
28.1
256
96.00000
4340277
4340277
25
26.322
28.5
512
96.00000
2256317
2256317
25.9
27.176
29.3
1024
96.00000
1148897
1148897
27.7
28.949
31.2
1280
96.00000
923190
923190
28.6
29.802
32
1518
96.00000
780274
780274
29.4
30.562
32.8
The mechanical specifications of the EAS2 board are as follows:
l
Dimensions (mm): 25.4 (W) x 220 (D) x 254.1 (H)
Weight (kg): 1.1
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the EAS2 at room temperature (25C) is 78 W.
The maximum power consumption of the EAS2 at high temperature (55C) is 91 W.
28.3 EGSH
EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board

Only one functional version of the EGSH board is available, that is, N1.
28.3.2 Application
The EGSH board is used in telecommunication domains such as Ethernet service access,
bandwidth management, and Ethernet service L2 switching.
Figure 28-8 shows the typical networking of the EGSH board. The board provides the following
functions: receives and converges Ethernet services; performs L2 switching of Ethernet data;
isolates Ethernet data ports; classifies the traffic; controls the data traffic; manages the VLAN;
configures data attributes such as the priority; encapsulates and decapsulates data; forms virtual
concatenation; maps and demaps SDH signals. In addition, the board can be interconnected with
the broadband access equipment and data communication equipment to provide a networkwide
solution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2183
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-8 Networking and application of the EGSH board
U2000
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
Service flow
VLAN 100
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
OCS line board

OCS data board
Cross-connect and timing board
User A1

The EGSH board accesses multiple types of Ethernet services and provides various functions
and features such as the MPLS function, VLAN multicast function, QinQ function, and interboard link aggregation function.
Table 28-23 Functions and features of the EGSH board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
The board processes 16xGE services. It provides functions such as O/E

conversion, Ethernet frame processing, mapping, Layer 2 (L2) switching, and
overhead and pointer processing of the service signals. The board is connected
to the active and standby cross-connect boards through the backplane. In this
manner, data is exchanged and services are groomed.
Functions
when being
used with the
interface
board
Accesses 16 channels of Ethernet signals by providing interfaces on the front

panel.

2184
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
Specificatio
ns of the
interface
l Supports the 1000BASE-LX and 1000BASE-SX optical interface.

l Port 6 and port 8 can work as the 1000BASE-T electrical interface at the
same time.
l All the sixteen interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3z.
Format of
service
frames
l Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p formats.
Maximum
uplink
bandwidth
The maximum uplink bandwidth of the EGSH is 10 Gbit/s.
VCTRUNK
s
l The number of supported VCTRUNKs is 24.
Mapping
granularities
Supports VC-4, VC-3, VC-4-Xv (X8), and VC-3-Xv (X24) granularities.
Encapsulatio
n format
Supports the GFP-F encapsulation.
EPL services
Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.
EVPL
services
Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame

encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN.
EPLAN
services
l Supports the L2 convergence and point-to-multipoint (P2MP)

convergence.
l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes and
supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
l One VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or 24

VC-3s.
l Supports the L2 forwarding function.

l Supports switching on the client and SDH sides.
l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the
MAC address table is 32k. The aging time of the MAC address can be set
and queried.
l Supports the configuration of the static MAC route.
l Supports the query of the dynamic MAC address.
l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. Only one VB is
supported. The maximum number of logical ports for one VB is 40.
l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
l Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on VB
+VLAN or VB+LP.
l The services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge are referred
to as EPLAN services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2185
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
EVPLAN
services
l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

l Supports 4095 VLANs.
l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1Q Virtual
Bridge or IEEE 802.1ad Provider Bridge.
MTU
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to
9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter
or exit the IP ports is limited.
MPLS
Supports the MPLS.
VLAN
Supports a maximum of 4000 VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with

IEEE 802.1q/p.
STP
Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and rapid spanning tree
protocol (RSTP) that comply with IEEE 802.1w.
Link
aggregation
Supports the LAG function.
Distributed
link
aggregation
Supports the DLAG protection.
Multicast
function
Supports the multicast function.
ETH-OAM
function
Supports continuity check (CC) for the multicast service, loopback (LB) test
for the unicast service, link trace (LT) test, loop detection (LD), autonegotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance detection.
CAR
Supports the CAR.

The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
QoS flow
classificatio
n
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT

+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, Label Flow, or Label Exp Flow.
LCAS
function
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth

in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT
function
Supports the point-to-point (P2P) LPT and P2MP LPT.
Flow control
function
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Highprecision
time
Supports the synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 V2 clock at ports 2 and 4.
The synchronous Ethernet realizes frequency synchronization, and the IEEE
1588 V2 clock realizes time synchronization.
Test frames
Receives and transmits Ethernet test frames.

2186
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
Loopback
function
Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer).
Protection
schemes
Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet service layer:

l STP/RSTP
l LCAS
l LPT
l LAG
l DLAG
l ERPS
NOTE
ERPS cannot be used on the following bridges:
l IEEE 802.1d bridges
l IEEE 802.1ad bridges in SVL/Ingress filter disable mode
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Alarms and
performance
events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the

Protocol or
standard
compliance
(non-performance
monitoring) with which
transparently transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.1q VLAN

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1d
IEEE 802.1w
IEEE 802.1s
STP
RSTP
MSTP
All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF,
RIP, IGRP etc.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2187
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
(performance monitoring)
for processing services
IEEE 802.3z interface

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1d
IEEE 802.1w
IEEE 802.1s
STP
RSTP
MSTP
Supported
SDH ASON

The EGSH board consists of the interface module, 1588 clock processing module, L2 service
processing module, SDH encapsulation and mapping module, active/standby interface
converting module, logic control module, clock module, and power module.
The processing of 1xGE signal is considered as an example to describe the working principle
and signal flow of the EGSH board.
Figure 28-9 shows the function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board.
Figure 28-9 Function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board
Backplane
GE
GE
O/E
conversion
1588 clock
processing
module
E/O
conversion
L2 service
processing
module
Active/
standby
interface
converting
module
SDH
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Interface module
Laser
shutdown
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit
LOS
Communication
Logic and
control module
Reference clock and frame header

+3.3V
Clock module
Power
module
Power Fuse
module
SCC unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
66 25 125 155
MHz MHz MHz MHz
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2188
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
NOTE
Among the 16 ports of the board, only ports 2 and 4 support the 1588 clock processing module.
In the Receive Direction

The interface module receives the series signals from an external Ethernet device (such as the
Ethernet switch or router), decodes the signals, and converts the signals into parallel signals.
Then, the service processing module delimits the frames, strips the preamble code, terminates
the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet performance.
The service processing module also classifies the traffic according to the service type and
configuration requirements (the packets in the formats of MPLS, L2 MPLS VPN, and Ethernet/
VLAN are supported). In addition, the service processing module adds the tunnel and VC tags
to the services according to the service configuration for mapping and forwarding the services.
At last, the encapsulation module encapsulates the Ethernet frames in the GFP-F format, and
sends the frames to the mapping module where the frames are mapped and are sent to the crossconnect unit on the backplane through the active/standby interface converting module.
In the Transmit Direction

The cross-connect unit sends parallel signals to the encapsulation and mapping module through
the active/standby interface converting module for demapping and decapsulation. Then, the
service processing module determines a route for the signals according to the level of the
equipment on the network, and performs L2 processing of the data services according to the
service type and configuration requirements. The service processing module also delimits the
frames, adds the preamble code, computes the CRC code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet
performance. At last, the interface module converts the parallel signals into serial signals,
encodes the serial signals, and outputs the serial signals through the Ethernet interface.
Interface Module
In the receive direction, the interface module converts the optical signals from an external
Ethernet device (such as the Ethernet switch or router) into electrical signals, and sends the
electrical signals to the L2 service processing module.
In the transmit direction, the interface module converts the electrical signals from the L2 service
processing module into optical signals.
1588 Clock Processing Module

The board supports the synchronization protocol for two 1588 clocks. On the uplink, the 1588
clock processing module extracts service packets from the Ethernet data signals that it receives,
processes the packets, and transparently transmits the Ethernet data signals to the L2 service
processing module. The signal flow on the downlink reverses that on the uplink.
L2 Service Processing Module

This module provides functions such as L2 switching of the received and transmitted Ethernet
data services, port isolation, traffic classification, data traffic control, VLAN management, and
priority configuration.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2189
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
SDH Encapsulation and Mapping Module

This module encapsulates the received data services in the GFP format, decapsulates the
transmitted data services in the GFP format, and maps and demaps the VC-3/4 service granules
in the SDH format.
Active/Standby Interface Converting Module

The active/standby interface module sends the encapsulated SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4 level
to the active and standby cross-connect boards, and selects the SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4
level sent from the active and standby cross-connect boards.
Logic Control Module

The logic control module controls the modules on the board and configures services for these
modules. In addition, the logic control module selects and traces the clock and header signal
sent from the active and standby clock boards.
Clock Module
The clock module traces the system reference clock and generates the clock signals required for
each chip. The clock frequency can be 66 MHz, 25 MHz, 125 MHz, or 155 MHz.
Power Supply Module

The power supply module provides the DC voltage required by each module on the board.
28.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a bar code on the front panel of the EGSH board.

Figure 28-10 shows the front panel of the EGSH board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2190
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-10 Front panel of the EGSH board

SM SFP WORK WITH
G.657A2 FIBER ONLY
G.657A2
EGSH
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
RX 1
2 TX
TX 15
16 RX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 16 optical interfaces on the front panel of the EGSH board, and "16 SFP" is silkscreened
under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2191
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EGSH board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX16
LC
TX1TX16
LC
NOTE
When the 1000BASE-LX optical interface board is used, the G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D
fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door
cannot be closed. Figure 28-11 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.
Figure 28-11 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper

G.652D fiber jumper
58.25
50.75
G.657A2 fiber jumper
50.5
28.3.6 DIP Switches and Fiber Jumpers

No DIP switch or fiber jumper for setting the board is equipped on the EGSH board.
28.3.7 Valid Slots

The EGSH board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot
work normally..
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2192
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the EGSH board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
IU12IU27, and IU29IU36.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the EGSH board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
28.3.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH

The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board.
The characteristic code of the EGSH board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
Table 28-25 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type
of the EGSH board.
Table 28-25 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the EGSH
board
Board
Characteristic
Code
Optical Interface Type
SSN1EGSH10
10
1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)
SSN1EGSH11
11
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
SSN1EGSH12
12
1000BASE-T & 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)a
SSN1EGSH13
13
1000BASE-T & 1000BASE-LX (10 km)b
a: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces,
and the other interfaces on the board are 1000BASE-SX optical interfaces.
b: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces,
and the other interfaces on the board are 1000BASE-LX optical interfaces.
The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over
the 1000BASE-LX optical interface.


Table 28-26 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EGSH board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
3
2193
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Interface on the NM
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
TX9/RX9
TX10/RX10
10
TX11/RX11
11
TX12/RX12
12
TX13/RX13
13
TX14/RX14
14
TX15/RX15
15
TX16/RX16
16
NOTE
28.3.10 Board Protection

The EGSH board supports the distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) protection. The
DLAG protection is a board-level port protection technology.
Figure 28-12 shows the slot configuration for the working and protection EGSH boards in the
OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2194
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-12 Slot configuration for the working EGSH board of a DLAG protection group
FAN
EFI2
EF
I1
PIU
PIU
A S
U T
X G
A
U
X
IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27
S
T
G
PIU
PIU
STI
ATE
IU28 IU29 IU30 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34 IU35 IU36
S
C
C
X
C
H
/
X
C
M
Fiber routing
X
C
H
/
X
C
M
Fiber routing
IU9 IU10
IU1 IU2
IU3 IU4 IU5
E
G
S
H
(A)
IU6
IU7 IU8
IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 IU17 IU18 IU19
S
C
C
E
G
S
H
(B)
E
G
S
H
(A)
E
G
S
H
(B)
FAN
(A): Active
(B): Standby
In Table 28-27, the board in slot 5 protects the board in slot 3, and the board in slot 17 protects
the board in slot 14. DLAG protection is of board level and protects the services between the
ports configured in a protection group on the working and protection boards.
Table 28-27 Slot assignment for the EGSH board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
EGSH (protection board)
Slot 5
Slot 17
EGSH (working board)
Slot 3
Slot 14

2195
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EGSH board.
On the NMS user interface, Ethernet Interface of the EGSH board provides parameters
classified according to External Port and Internal Port. Regardless of an external port or
internal port, the parameter configuration window involves many tab pages. Table 28-28 lists
the tab pages in the parameter configuration window.
Table 28-28 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on
the EGSH board
Port
Tab
External Port
Basic Attributes
Flow Control
TAG Attributes
Network Attributes
Advanced Attributes
Internal Port
TAG Attributes
Network Attributes
Encapsulation/Mapping
LCAS
Bound Path
Advanced Attributes
Each parameter of the EGSH on each tab page is described as follows.

l
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in
Table 28-29.
Table 28-29 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Port

Name
For example, PORT-1
Specifies the name of a port.

The name can contain up to
32 characters in English or
16 characters in Chinese.

2196
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
The Enabled/Disabled
whether to enable a port. A
port can receive services if
Enabled but cannot receive
services if this parameter is
set to Disabled.
Default: Disabled
See D.8 Enabled/Disabled

Working Mode
Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10GE Full-Duplex
LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex
WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex
WAN(SONET mode)
Set the Working Mode

parameter to set the
working mode of the
Ethernet port on the board.
The Working Mode
parameter indicates the
maximum transmission rate
and communication mode
of a port.
Maximum Frame Length
1518-65535
Specifies the maximum

frame length supported by
the Ethernet port.
Default: 1522
Port Physical Parameters
Displays the actual working

state of a port.
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop
The MAC Loopback

MAC loopback state at an
looped path at the MAC
path.
See D.29 MAC Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2197
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
PHY Loopback
The PHY Loopback

PHY loopback state at an
looped path at the PHY
path.
See D.44 PHY Loopback
Physical Type
Displays the type of the

physical port.
Logic Type
SDH-OPPORT
Displays the type of the

logical port.
Default: SDH-OPPORT
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in
Table 28-30.
Table 28-30 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port)
Field
Value
Description
Port

Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode is
selected when a port works
in non-autonegotiation
mode.
Default: Disable
See D.41 NonAutonegotiation Flow

Control Mode to obtain
the details.
Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Enable Dissymmetric Flow
Control, Enable
Symmetric/Dissymmetric
Flow Control
Specifies the flow control

mode adopted when an
Ethernet port works in autonegotiation mode.
Default: Disabled
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-31.
2198
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-31 Parameters on the TAG tab page

Field
Value
Description
Port

either PORT or
VCTRUNk.
TAG

UNI.
Default: Tag Aware
Default VLAN ID
Specifies a default VLAN

ID for a port that transmits
untagged packets.
VLAN Priority
Specifies the priority of the

default VLAN ID of a port.
Entry Detection
Enabled, Disabled
The Entry Detection

Default: Enabled

l
The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-32.
Table 28-32 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page
Field
Value
Description
Port

either PORT or
VCTRUNk.
Port Attributes
UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware
Specifies the position of the

port in the network.
Different port attributes
support different types of
packets.
Default: UNI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed
in Table 28-33.

2199
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-33 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)
Field
Value
Description
Port

Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Disabled, Enabled
suppress the traffic of
broadcast packets.
Broadcast Packet
30%, 40%, 50%, 60%,

70%, 80%, 90%, 100%
Default: Disabled
Default: 30%
Loop Detection
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Loop Port Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

percentage of broadcast
traffic in the bandwidth of a
port. The broadcast packets
beyond this percentage will
be discarded.
Specifies the function of
reporting the self-loop
alarms.
The Loop Port Shutdown
parameter is set to disable
the self-loop port after a
self-loop port is detected if
the loop port shutdown
function is enabled. After
the self-loop port is shut
down, the self-loop port
only transmits or receives
the self-loop detection
packets rather than any
other packets. If the port is
not a self-loop port, it starts
to work again.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are
Table 28-34 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port)
Field
Value
Description
Port

ports.
Mapping Protocol
GFP
Specifies the mapping

protocol adopted by the
VCTRUNK port.
Default: GFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2200
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Scramble
Unscrambled, Scrambling
mode[X43+1], Scrambling
mode[X48+1]
Specifies whether to
scramble the payload area
of the encapsulation
protocol and which
scramble mode is adopted.
Default: Scrambling Mode

[X43+1]
Set Inverse Value for CRC
Specifies whether to set an

inverse value for the CRC
field of the HDLC or LAPS
protocol.
Check Field Length
FCS32, No, FCS16
Specifies the length of the

CRC field of the mapping
protocol.
Default: FCS32
FCS Calculated Bit
Sequence
Big endian, Little endian
Extension Header Option
Yes, No
Default: Big endian
Default: No
Specifies the sequence of

storing the bits in the CRC
field in the FCS frame of the
mapping protocol.
Specifies whether the GFP
encapsulation protocol
supports the extension
header.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table
28-35.
Table 28-35 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port)
Field
Value
Description
Port

ports.
Enabling LCAS
Enabled, Disabled
The Enabling LCAS

parameter can increase or
decrease the SDH network
capacity without affecting
the service. The capacity is
automatically decreased if a
member fails, and is
automatically increased if
the member recovers.
Default: Disabled
See D.10 Enabling LCAS

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2201
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
LCAS Mode
Huawei mode, Standard

mode
The LCAS mode

sequence for the sink end to
respond to the MST and
Rs_Ack messages received
from the source end.
Default: Huawei mode
See D.23 LCAS Mode to

obtain the details.
Hold-off Time(ms)
0, 2000-10000
Default: 2000
WTR Time(s)
0-720
Default: 300
TSD
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Specifies the duration of the

HO (Hold Off) Procedure
timer of the LCAS protocol.
When the LCAS and other
network-level protection
schemes (such as the MSP
and SNCP) coexist, a
proper value of the hold-off
time can be set to delay the
LCAS switching.
Specifies the duration of the
Wait To Restore (WTR)
Procedure timer of the
LCAS protocol. A proper
value of the WTR time can
be set to prevent an alarm
jitter from affecting the link
status.
The TSD parameter
specifies the B3 or BIP error
status of a VCTRUNK
member. TSD stands for
trail signal degrade. When
Enabled, and if a
VCTRUNK member has
excessive B3 or BIP bit
errors, the LCAS protocol
regards that this member
fails and deletes it from the
available members. If this
parameter is set to
Disabled, the LCAS
protocol does not monitor
the status of the B3 or BIP
bit errors of a VCTRUNK
member.
See D.54 TSD to obtain the
details.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2202
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Min. Members-Transmit
Direction
2-256
When the LCAS is enabled,

the LCAS_PLCT alarm is
reported if certain members
in the transmit direction fail
and the number of valid
members is smaller than a
certain value. The Min.
Members-Transmit
Direction parameter
specifies the certain number
of the valid members in the
transmit direction.
Default: 256
See D.35 Min. MembersTransmit Direction to

obtain the details.
Min. Members-Receive
Direction
2-256
Default: 256
Specifies the minimum

number of members in the
receive direction. When the
LCAS is enabled and the
number of valid members is
smaller than this value, an
alarm is reported
.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table
28-36.
Table 28-36 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
VCTRUNCK Port

VCTRUNK port.
Level
Specifies the level of the

VCTRUNK bound path.
Service Direction
Specifies the direction of

the Ethernet service.
Bound Path
Specifies the number of the

bound path, including the
VC4 path number and VC3
path number.
Bound Path Count

bound VCTRUNK ports.
Used Channel
Displays the channels in

use.

2203
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Activation Status
Displays the activation

status of the VCTRUNK.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed
in Table 28-37.
Table 28-37 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port)
Field
Value
Description
Port

ports.
Loop Detection
Enabled, Disabled
The Loop Detection

function of reporting the
self-loop alarms after one
of the following loopback
cases is detected.
Default: Disabled
See D.25 Loop Detection

Loop Port Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
The Loop Port Shutdown

parameter is set to disable
the self-loop port after a
self-loop port is detected if
the loop port shutdown
function is enabled. After
the self-loop port is shut
down, the self-loop port
only transmits or receives
the self-loop detection
packets rather than any
other packets. If the port is
not a self-loop port, it starts
to work again.
See D.26 Loop Port
Shutdown to obtain the
details.
28.3.12 Specifications of the EGSH

Specifications include optical specifications, electrical specifications, laser safety class,
mechanical specifications, and power consumption.
Table 28-38 lists the optical specifications of the EGSH board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2204
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-38 Optical specifications of the EGSH board

Item
Value
Type of optical
interface
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Multi-mode LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1270 to 1355
770 to 860
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
9 to 3
9.5 to 3.5
(dBm)
20
18
Minimum overload
(dBm)
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
Electrical Specifications
Table 28-39 lists the electrical specifications of the EGSH board.
Table 28-39 Electrical specifications of the EGSH board
Type of Interface
Code Pattern
1000BASE-T, RJ-45
4D-PAM5
NOTE
Only port 6 and port 8 of the EGSH board can work as the GE electrical interface.
Laser Safety Class

The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1, indicating that the maximum output
optical power of each optical interface is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
The mechanical specifications of the EGSH board are as follows:
l
Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2205
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 89.3 W
28.4 SF64
SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

Only one functional version of the SF64 board is available, that is, N4.
28.4.2 Application
The SF64 board is a line board. The SF64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to
transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64 board converts the received optical
signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SF64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
Figure 28-13 shows the application of the SF64 board. The SF64 boards can form a ring network
or a chain network in the system.
Figure 28-13 Networking and application of the SF64 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SF64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2206
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-40 Functions and features of the SF64 board

Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
l Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
interface
l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c,

Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply
with the standards defined by Huawei.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
module
l Supports the XFP wavelength-tunable optical module.
Service
processin
g
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c

concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c
Overhead
processin
g
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals.
l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function.
l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with
ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment.
l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module.
l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the
on/off state of a laser.
l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.

l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
l Supports one channel of ECC communication.
l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission
of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Reports various alarms and performance events.
Specificat
ions of the
REG
Does not support the REG.
Protectio
n
schemes
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP.

l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP.
l Supports the linear MSP.
l Supports the SNCP.
l Supports the SNCTP.
l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
l Supports the fiber-shared MSP.
NOTE
Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64 board supports a maximum of two MSP
rings.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2207
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Maintena
nce
features
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
l Supports the PRBS function.
l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SF64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 28-14 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2208
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-14 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board
Backplane
622 MHz
622 MHz
PLL
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
DEMU
X
SPI
10.71
Gbit/s
E/O
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
converting
module
MUX
4x2.67G
bit/s
4x2.5G
bit/s
4x2.67G FEC 4x2.5G

bit/s
bit/s
622 MHz
PLL
Reference clock
K1 and K2
insertion/extraction
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
669 MHz
PLL
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
PLL: phase-locked loop
SPI: SDH physical interface
RST: regenerator section

termination
MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation
HPT: higher order path termination -
SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
O/E Converting Module

l
In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical
signals.
In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals
and sends the SDH optical signals to fibers for transmission.
Detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l
In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into
multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time.
In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received
from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
SDH Overhead Processing Module

This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the
inloop and outloop functions.
l
RST sub-module
In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST
sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes
except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1
byte.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2209
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST
sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and
scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH.
l
MST sub-module
In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST
sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting
the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after
checking the B2 byte.
In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST
sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG
into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer
justifications.
In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the
AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving.
HPT sub-module
In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM
alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and
C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte.
In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.

l
Manages and configures the other modules of the board.
Performs inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface.
Traces the clock signal from the active and standby clock units.
Controls the laser.
Selects the clock signal and frame header signal from the active and standby clock units.
Controls the indicators on the board.
Power Module
require.
28.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of
the SF64 board.

Figure 28-15 shows the front panel of the SF64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2210
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-15 Front panel of the SF64 board
SF64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SF64
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64 board. Table 28-41 lists the type
and function of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2211
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-41 Type and function of the interface on the SF64 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC

The SF64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.4.7 Valid Slots

The SF64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SF64 board cannot
work normally.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SF64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12
IU27, and IU29IU36.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SF64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11
IU42, and IU45IU68.
28.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64

board. The characteristic code for the SF64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 28-42 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and
the type of optical interface.
Table 28-42 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and the type of
optical interface
Board
Characteristic Code
Type of Optical Interface
SSN4SF6401M01
01M01
Fixed-wavelength optical
interface
SSN4SF6401
01
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and

Ue-64.2e


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2212
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-43 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64 board.
Table 28-44 lists all the parameters of the SF64 board.
Table 28-44 Parameters of the SF64 board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path
Displays all available VC3

paths.
For example, SDH-1
Specifies the name of an

optical interface.
Overhead Transfer Mode
DCC Mode, GCC Mode
Sets overhead transfer mode

of the optical interface.
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled
The MSP Sharing parameter

determines whether multiple
multiplex section (MS)
protection groups can be
configured at the same
optical interface.
Default: Disabled
See D.37 MSP Sharing to

obtain the details.
Laser Switch
Off, On
Default: On
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Specifies the laser state of the

line board. In general, the
parameter is set to On.
2213
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Laser Transmission Distance

(m)
The Laser Transmission

Distance (m) parameter
indicates the valid distance
over which the laser sends a
signal. A line board uses
pluggable optical module and
the transmission distance is
determined by the type of the
pluggable optical module.
Optical (Electrical) Interface

Loopback
Outloop
Specifies the loopback state

of an SDH interface. In
general, this parameter is set
to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop
Specifies the VC4 loopback

state on the line board. In
to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
28.4.11 Specifications of the SF64

power consumption.
Table 28-45 lists the optical specifications of the SF64 board.
Table 28-45 Optical specifications of the SF64 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Nominal bit
rate
10.709 Gbit/s
Application
codea
Ue-64.2c
Ue-64.2d
Ue-64.2e

2214
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
OBU101 (-28
dBm to -31
dBm)+
OAU103b +
DCU03 (60) +
MR2
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)c
1 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10.5
OBU101 (-31
dBm to -34 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
OBU101 (-34
dBm to -37 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
OBU101 (-37
dBm to -40 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example,
"OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the OBU101
is -28 dBm to -31 dBm.
b: "OBU101 + OAU103" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured
when the OBU101 and OAU103 are used.
c: The parameters are only for the optical modules. The parameters of the amplifier are not
provided.
Table 28-46 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board.
Table 28-46 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Type of optical
module
1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable
Line code format
NRZ - 80 channels tunable

2215
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value

Maximum mean
launched power
(dBm)
Minimum mean
launched power
(dBm)
-1
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
Central wavelength
(THz)
192.10 to 196.05
Central wavelength
deviation (GHz)
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
(dB)
35
(ps/nm)
1600

Receiver type
APD
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1600
(FEC on) EOL
(dBm)
-24
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-7
Maximum
reflectance (dB)
-27
Table 28-47 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2216
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-47 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
10.709 Gbit/s
Dispersion limit (km)
40
Mean launched optical power (dBm)
-1 to 2
-19
Minimum overload (dBm)
Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/

nm)
800
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
10
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SF64 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
28.5 SF64A
SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

Only one functional version of the SF64A board is available, that is, N1.
28.5.2 Application
The SF64A optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64A board converts the received
optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side.
In addition, the SF64A board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2217
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-16 shows the application of the SF64A board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
Figure 28-16 Networking and application of the SF64A board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SF64A board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
Table 28-48 Functions and features of the SF64A board
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
interface

l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with
l Supports adjustable wavelengths in DWDM applications.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Specificat
ions of the
optical
module
Service
processin
g


2218
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Overhead
processin
g

Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and
maintenance.
Specificat
ions of the
REG
Protectio
n
schemes

l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection
l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP.
NOTE
Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64A supports a maximum of two MSP
protection rings.
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

2219
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Functio
n and
Feature
28 OCS System Unit
Description

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SF64A board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.
Figure 28-17 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2220
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-17 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board
622MHz
622MHz PLL
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
10.71
Gbit/s
DEMUX
16x669
Mbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
MUX
16x669 FEC 16x622

Mbit/s
Mbit/s
O/E
converting
module
MUX/
DEMUX
module
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
622MHz PLL
Reference
clock
K1 and K2 insertion/
extraction
16x622
Mbit/s
Backplane
K1 and K2
Highspeed bus
RST MST MSA HPT
Highspeed bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
669MHzPLL
Frame header
Logic and
control module
+3.3V
Power
module
Communication
Fuse
Power
module
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect unit A
Cross-connect unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V

termination
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit
The function modules are described as follows:

l
signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l

l
RST sub-module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2221
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
byte.
l
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
28.5.5 Front Panel

the SF64A board.

Figure 28-18 shows the front panel of the SF64A board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2222
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-18 Front panel of the SF64A board
SF64A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SF64A
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64A board. Table 28-49 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2223
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-49 Type and function of the optical interface on the SF64A board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC

The SF64A board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.5.7 Valid Slots

The SF64A board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot
work normally.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SF64A board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SF64A board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
28.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A

The characteristic code of the SF64A board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
of the SF64A board.
Table 28-50 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the
SF64A board
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN1SF64A01
01
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d,
Ue-64.2e


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2224
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-51 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64A board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64A board.
Table 28-52 lists all the parameters of the SF64A board.
Table 28-52 Parameters of the SF64A board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.
For example, SDH-1

optical interface.
DCC Mode, GCC Mode

MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled

optical interface.
Default: Disabled

obtain the details.
Off, On
Laser Switch
Default: On
(m)

Specifies the valid distance
over which a laser transmits
optical signals.
See D.21 Laser
Transmission Distance (m)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2225
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description

Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
28.5.11 Specifications of the SF64A

power consumption.
Table 28-53 lists the optical specifications of the SF64A board.
Table 28-53 Optical specifications of the SF64A board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Nominal bit
rate
10.709 Gbit/s
Application
codea
Ue-64.2c
Ue-64.2d
Ue-64.2e
OBU101 (-29
dBm to -26
dBm) +
OAU103b +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
OBU103 (-28
dBm to -25 dBm)
+ OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
OBU101 (-34.6
dBm to -32 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12

OBU101 (-37.9
dBm to -34.9
dBm) + CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
2226
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)c
1 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10.5
provided.
Table 28-54 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64A board.
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
10.709 Gbit/s
40
3 to 2
19

nm)
800
13.5
Laser Safety Class

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2227
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
The mechanical specifications of the SF64A board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
28.6 SFD64
SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

Only one functional version of the SFD64 board is available, that is, N4.
28.6.2 Application
The SFD64 board is a line board. The SFD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SFD64 board converts the received
In addition, the SFD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-19 shows the application of the SFD64 board. The SFD64 boards can form a ring
network or a chain network in the system.
Figure 28-19 Networking and application of the SFD64 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2228
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit

The SFD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
Table 28-55 Functions and features of the SFD64 board
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
l Transmits and receives 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
interface

Specificat
ions of the
optical
module
l Supports the XFP wavelength-tunable optical module.
Service
processin
g

Overhead
processin
g
l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function.
l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with

l Supports two channels of ECC communication.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Specificat
ions of the
REG

2229
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Protectio
n
schemes

NOTE
Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of
K bytes. One SFD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings.
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2230
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SFD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 28-20 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board.
Figure 28-20 Function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board
Backplane
622 MHz
622 MHz
PLL
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
4x2.67G
DEMU
bit/s
X
SPI
10.71
Gbit/s
E/O
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
converting
module
MUX
4x2.5G
bit/s
4x2.67G FEC 4x2.5G

bit/s
bit/s
622 MHz
PLL
Reference clock
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
669 MHz
PLL
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

termination

l
signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2231
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
MUX/DEMUX Module
l

l
RST sub-module
byte.
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2232
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Power Module
require.
28.6.5 Front Panel

the SFD64 board.

Figure 28-21 shows the front panel of the SFD64 board.
Figure 28-21 Front panel of the SFD64 board
SFD64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
SFD64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2233
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SFD64 board. Table 28-56 lists the type
Table 28-56 Type and function of the interface on the SFD64 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX2
LC
TX1TX2
LC

The SFD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.6.7 Valid Slots

The SFD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SFD64 board
cannot work normally.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SFD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SFD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
28.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64

board. The characteristic code for the SFD64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 28-57 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2234
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-57 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and the type of
optical interface
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SFD6401M01
01M01
interface
SSN4SFD6401
01
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and

Ue-64.2e


Table 28-58 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFD64 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SFD64 board.
Table 28-59 lists all the parameters of the SFD64 board.
Table 28-59 Parameters of the SFD64 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.
For example, SDH-1

optical interface.

2235
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
DCC Mode, GCC Mode

Laser Switch
Off, On

Default: On
(m)


Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
28.6.11 Specifications of the SFD64

power consumption.
Table 28-60 lists the optical specifications of the SFD64 board.
Table 28-60 Optical specifications of the SFD64 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Nominal bit
rate
10.709Gbit/s

2236
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Application
codea
Ue-64.2c
Ue-64.2d
Ue-64.2e
OBU101 (-28
dBm to -31
dBm)+
OAU103b +
DCU03 (60) +
MR2
OBU101 (-31
dBm to -34 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
OBU101 (-34
dBm to -37 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)c
1 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10.5
OBU101 (-37
dBm to -40 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
provided.
Table 28-61 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board.
Table 28-61 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Type of optical
module
1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable

2237
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Line code format
NRZ - 80 channels tunable

Maximum mean
launched power
(dBm)
Minimum mean
launched power
(dBm)
-1
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
Central wavelength
(THz)
192.10 to 196.05
Central wavelength
deviation (GHz)
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width (nm)
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
(dB)
35
(ps/nm)
1600

Receiver type
APD
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1600
(FEC on) EOL
(dBm)
-24
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-7
Maximum
reflectance (dB)
-27
Table 28-62 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SFD64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2238
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
10.709 Gbit/s
40
-1 to 2
-19

nm)
800
10
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SFD64 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
28.7 SL64
SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board

Only one functional version of the SL64 board is available, that is, N4.
28.7.2 Application
The SL64 board is a line board. The SL64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to
transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SL64 board converts the received optical
addition, the SL64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-22 shows the application of the SL64 board. The SL64 boards can form a ring network
or a chain network in the system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2239
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-22 Networking and application of the SL64 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SL64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Table 28-63 Functions and features of the SL64 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 optical signals.
Specificati
ons of the
optical
interface
l The N4SL64 board supports the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, P1L1-2D2, and
V-64.2b optical interfaces. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the
I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, and V-64.2b types comply with ITU-T G.691. The
characteristics of the optical interface of the P1L1-2D2 type comply with
ITU-T G.959.
l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Specificati
ons of the
optical
module
l Supports the XFP optical module.
Service
processing


2240
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
Overhead
processing

Alarms
and
performan
ce events
Specificati
ons of the
REG
Protection
schemes

NOTE
Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SL64 supports a maximum of two MSP rings.
Maintenan
ce features

l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Protocol
or
standard
complianc
e
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

2241
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
28 OCS System Unit
Description

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SL64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.
Figure 28-23 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2242
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-23 Function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board
Backplane
622 MHz
PLL
622 MHz
9.953
Gbit/s
O/E
9.953
Gbit/s
DEMU
X
16x622
Mbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
MUX
16x622
Mbit/s
SPI
9.953
Gbit/s
E/O
O/E
converting
module
MUX/
DEMUX
Reference clock
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

termination

l
signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l

l
RST sub-module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2243
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
byte.
l
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
28.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label
on the front panel of the SL64 board.

Figure 28-24 shows the front panel of the SL64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2244
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-24 Appearance of the front panel of the SL64 board
SL64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SL64
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SL64 board. Table 28-64 lists the type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2245
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-64 Type and function of the interface on the SL64 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC

The SL64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.7.7 Valid Slots

The SL64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work
normally.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SL64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12
IU27, and IU29IU36.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SL64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11
IU42, and IU45IU68.
28.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64

board. The characteristic code for the SL64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 28-65 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and
Table 28-65 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and the type of
optical interface
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SL6401M01
01M01
interface
SSN4SL6401
01
I-64.1
SSN4SL6402
02
S-64.2b
SSN4SL6403
03
P1L1-2D2
SSN4SL6404
04
V-64.2b
SSN4SL6405
05
Le-64.2

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2246
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit

Table 28-66 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SL64 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SL64 board.
Table 28-67 lists all the parameters of the SL64 board.
Table 28-67 Parameters of the SL64 board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.
For example, SDH-1

optical interface.
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled

optical interface.
Default: Disabled

obtain the details.
Laser Switch
Off, On
Default: On
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


2247
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description

(m)


Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
28.7.11 Specifications of the SL64

power consumption.
Table 28-68 lists the optical specifications of the SL64 board.
Table 28-68 Optical specifications of the SL64 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Nominal bit
rate
9953280 kbit/s
Application
code
I-64.1
S-64.2b
P1L1-2D2

Le-64.2
V-64.2b
(OBU101 +
OBU101 +
DCU +
MR2)a
2248
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
0 to 2
2 to 40
40 to 80
35 to 60
80 to 120
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
1550.12
Mean
launched
optical
power (dBm)
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to +4
+2 to +4
-1 to 2
(without the
OBU, DCU,
or MR2)
16 (with the
OBU, DCU,
or MR2)
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-11
-14
-24
-21
-17 (without
the OBU,
DCU, or
MR2)
-26 (with the
OBU, DCU,
or MR2)
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1
-1
-7
-8
-1
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
10.5
a: "OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2" indicates that the specifications of the V-64.2b optical
interface are measured when the OBU, DCU, and MR2 are used.
Table 28-69 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SL64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
40
-1 to 2
-17

2249
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
-1

nm)
800
10.5
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SL64 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
28.8 SLD64
SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board

Only one functional version of the SLD64 board is available, that is, N4.
28.8.2 Application
The SLD64 board is a line board. The SLD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SLD64 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-25 shows the application of the SLD64 board. The SLD64 boards can form a ring
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2250
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-25 Networking and application of the SLD64 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SLD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
and performs the MSP protection.
Table 28-70 Functions and features of the SLD64 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specificat
ions of the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and
S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
module
Service
processin
g


2251
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Overhead
processin
g

l Supports two channels of ECC communication.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Specificat
ions of the
REG
Protectio
n
schemes

NOTE
Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of
K bytes. One SLD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

2252
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Functio
n and
Feature
28 OCS System Unit
Description

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SLD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 28-26 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2253
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-26 Function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board
Backplane
622 MHz
9.953
Gbit/s
SPI 9.953
E/O
Gbit/s
DEMUX 16x622
Mbit/s
. .
. .
9.953
Gbit/s
O/E
O/E
SPI
E/
O
O/E
converting
module
9.953
Gbit/s
16x622
Mbit/s
MUX
622 MHz
PLL
Reference clock
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Power
module
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

termination

l
signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l

l
RST sub-module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2254
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
byte.
l
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
28.8.5 Front Panel

the SLD64 board.

Figure 28-27 shows the front panel of the SLD64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2255
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-27 Front panel of the SLD64 board
SLD64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
SLD64
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLD64 board. Table 28-71 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2256
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-71 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLD64 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX2
LC
TX1TX2
LC

The SLD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.8.7 Valid Slots

The SLD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLD64 board
cannot work normally.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SLD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
28.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64

board. The characteristic code for the SLD64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 28-72 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and
Table 28-72 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and the type of
optical interface
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SLD6401
01
I-64.1
SSN4SLD6402
02
S-64.2b


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2257
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-73 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLD64 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLD64 board.
Table 28-74 lists all the parameters of the SLD64 board.
Table 28-74 Parameters of the SLD64 board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.
For example, SDH-1

optical interface.
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled

optical interface.
Default: Disabled

obtain the details.
Off, On
Laser Switch
Default: On
(m)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


2258
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description

Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
28.8.11 Specifications of the SLD64

power consumption.
Table 28-75 lists the optical specifications of the SLD64 board.
Table 28-75 Optical specifications of the SLD64 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Nominal bit
rate
9953280 kbit/s
Application
code
I-64.1
S-64.2b
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
Mean
launched
optical power
(dBm)
-6 to -1
-1 to +2

2259
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-11
-14
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1
-1
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLD64 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
28.9 SLH41
SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board

Only one functional version of the SLH41 board is available, that is, N3.
28.9.2 Application
The SLH41 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-1/STM-4 optical signals. The SLH41 board converts the received
In addition, the SLH41 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side
into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
Figure 28-28 shows the application of the SLH41 board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2260
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-28 Networking and application of the SLH41 board
NE1
NE2
SNCP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect and timing board

The SLH41 board transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals or 16xSTM-1
electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals, extracts
and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 28-76 Functions and features of the SLH41 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals, or 16xSTM-1

electrical signals.
Specificati
ons of the
optical
interface
l The 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical module can be used.

When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the
optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type. The characteristics of the optical
interfaces of the S-1.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957.
When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the
optical interface of the S-4.1 type. The characteristics of the optical
interface of the S-4.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957.
The optical interfaces are adaptive. The SLH41 board supports hybrid
configuration of STM-1/STM-4 optical interfaces.
l The 16xSTM-1 electrical module can be used.
Specificati
ons of the
optical
module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
l Supports the SFP optical/electrical module.

2261
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
Service
processing
l When the STM-1 optical/electrical module is used, the SLH41 board

supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
l When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the
VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation
services.
Overhead
processing
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals or STM-4 signals.

l Supports sixteen channels of ECC communication. Port 1 to port 8 support
the ECC communication by using bytes D1D12. Port 9 to port 16 support
the ECC communication by using bytes D4D12.
l Only interfaces 1-4 supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature
and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms
and
performan
ce events

Protection
schemes

l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP in the case of STM-4 interfaces.
Maintenan
ce features
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical/electrical interfaces.

l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Protocol or
standard
complianc
e
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

2262
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
28 OCS System Unit
Description

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SLH41 board consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead
processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.
This topic describes the working principle and signal flow of the SLH41 board by describing
how to process STM-1/STM-4 signals.
Figure 28-29 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2263
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-29 Function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board
155MHz PLL
STM-1/
STM-4
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
CDR
O/E
E/O
. .
. .
. .
. .
STM-1/
STM-4
S
P
I
CDR
Reference Backplane
clock
Clock unit
extraction
K1 and K2
RST MST MSA HPT
Highspeed bus
Highspeed bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
O/E
converting
module
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
SCC unit
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V

termination
CDR: clock and data recovery
The function modules of the STM-1/STM-4 units are described as follows:

l
signals.
CDR Module
This module restores the data signal and the clock signal.

l
RST sub-module
byte.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2264
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
l
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
28.9.5 Front Panel

the SLH41 board.

Figure 28-30 shows the front panel of the SLH41 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2265
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-30 Front panel of the SLH41 board (considering optical interfaces as an example)
SM SFP WORK WITH
G.657B FIBER ONLY
G.657B
SLH41
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
RX 1
2 TX
TX 15
16 RX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 16 optical/electrical interfaces on the front panel of the SLH41 board, and "16 SFP"
is silkscreened under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2266
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-77 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLH41 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX16
LC/SAA-75J4Y
Receives optical/electrical signals.
TX1TX16
LC/SAA-75J4Y
Transmits optical/electrical signals.
NOTE
The G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted
into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 28-31 shows the G.657A2
fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.
Figure 28-31 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper

G.652D fiber jumper
58.25
50.75
G.657A2 fiber jumper
50.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2267
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit

The SLH41 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.9.7 Valid Slots

The SLH41 board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on a subrack.
Otherwise, the board cannot work normally.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLH41 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SLH41 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
28.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41

The characteristic code of the SLH41 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
of the SLH41 board.
SLH41 board
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN3SLH4102
02
8S-1.1, 8S-4.1
SSN3SLH4103
03
16S-1.1
SSN3SLH4105
05
16S-4.1
The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over
the interface.


Table 28-79 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLH41 board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
1
2268
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Interface on the NM
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
TX9/RX9
TX10/RX10
10
TX11/RX11
11
TX12/RX12
12
TX13/RX13
13
TX14/RX14
14
TX15/RX15
15
TX16/RX16
16
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLH41 board.
Table 28-80 lists all the parameters of the SLH41 board.
Table 28-80 Parameters of the SLH41 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.
For example, SDH-1

optical interface.

2269
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Laser Switch
Off, On

Default: On
(m)


Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
28.9.11 Specifications of the SLH41

power consumption.
Table 28-81 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module
is used.
Table 28-81 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
S-1.1
0 to 15

2270
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1261 to 1360
Launched optical power range (dBm)
15 to 8
28
Overload optical power (dBm)
8.2
Table 28-82 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module
is used.
Table 28-82 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
S-4.1
0 to 15
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1274 to 1356
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
15 to 8
28
8.2
Electrical Specifications
Table 28-83 lists the electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical
module is used.
Table 28-83 Electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical module is
used
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Type of interface
139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s

2271
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Code pattern
CMI
Bit rate of the output signal
Compliant with G.703
Permitted frequency deviation on the input

interface
Permitted attenuation on the input interface
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLH41 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
28.10 SLO16
SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board

Only one functional version of the SLO16 board is available, that is, N4.
28.10.2 Application
The SLO16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLO16 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLO16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-32 shows the application of the SLO16 board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2272
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-32 Networking and application of the SLO16 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SLO16 board receives and transmits 8xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
Table 28-84 Functions and features of the SLO16 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specifica
tions of
the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITUT G.957.
Specifica
tions of
the
optical
module
l Supports the SFP optical module.
Service
processin
g

concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.

2273
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Overhead
processin
g

l Supports the configuration of the D1D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as
transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes.
l Supports eight channels of ECC communication.
l Support the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of
the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events

Specifica
tions of
the REG
Protectio
n
schemes

l Supports the SNCTP
NOTE
One SLO16 board supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

2274
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Functio
n and
Feature
28 OCS System Unit
Description

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SLO16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 28-33 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board by describing
how to process 1xSTM-16 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2275
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-33 Function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board
155MHz
O/E
2.488
Gbit/s
E/O
S
P
I
DEMUX
2.488
Gbit/s
MUX
16x155
Mbit/s
extraction
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
16x155
Mbit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
O/E
converting
module
Backplane
K1 and K2
Highspeed bus
. .
. .
2.488
Gbit/s
155MHzPLL
Reference
clock
Highspeed bus
DCC
MUX/
DEMUX
module
SDH overhead
processing module
Frame header
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3V
Power
module
Power
module
Communication
Fuse
Clock unit
SCC unit
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V

termination

l
signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l

l
RST sub-module
byte.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2276
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
l
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
28.10.5 Front Panel

the SLO16 board.

Figure 28-34 shows the front panel of the SLO16 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2277
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-34 Front panel of the SLO16 board
SLO16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2 RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
SLO16
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLO16 board. Table 28-85 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2278
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-85 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLO16 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX8
LC
TX1TX8
LC

The SLO16 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.10.7 Valid Slots

The SLO16 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot
work normally.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLO16 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SLO16 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
28.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16

The characteristic code of the SLO16 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
of the SLO16 board.
SLO16 board
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SLO1601
01
I-16
SSN4SLO1602
02
S-16.1
SSN4SLO1603
03
L-16.1
SSN4SLO1604
04
L-16.2


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2279
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-87 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLO16 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
IN3/OUT3
IN4/OUT4
IN5/OUT5
IN6/OUT6
IN7/OUT7
IN8/OUT8
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLO16 board.
Table 28-88 lists all the parameters of the SLO16 board.
Table 28-88 Parameters of the SLO16 board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.
For example, SDH-1

optical interface.
Laser Switch
Off, On

Default: On
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2280
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description

(m)


Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
28.10.11 Specifications of the SLO16

power consumption.
Table 28-89 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board.
Table 28-89 Optical specifications of the SLO16 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
25 to 40
50 to 80
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC

2281
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
10 to 3
5 to 0
2 to +3
2 to +3
(dBm)
18
18
27
28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLO16 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
28.11 SLQ16
SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board

Only one functional version of the SLQ16 board is available, that is, N4.
28.11.2 Application
The SLQ16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLQ16 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLQ16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-35 shows the application of the SLQ16 board. The SLQ16 boards can form a ring
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2282
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-35 Networking and application of the SLQ16 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SLQ16 board receives and transmits 4xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
and performs the MSP.
Table 28-90 Functions and features of the SLQ16 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specifica
tions of
the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITUT G.957.
Specifica
tions of
the
optical
module
l Supports the SFP optical module.
Service
processin
g

concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.

2283
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Overhead
processin
g

l Supports the configuration of the D1D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as
transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes.
l Supports four channels of ECC communication.
l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of
the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events

Specifica
tions of
the REG
Protectio
n
schemes

NOTE
One SLQ16 board supports a maximum of four MSP protection rings.
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

2284
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Functio
n and
Feature
28 OCS System Unit
Description

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SLQ16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 28-36 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board by describing
how to process 1xSTM-16 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2285
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-36 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board
Backplane
155 MHz
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E SP
E/O I
2.488
Gbit/s
DEMU 16x155
X
Mbit/s
. .
. .
2.488 O/E
SP
Gbit/s
E/O I
2.488
Gbit/s
16x155
Mbit/s
MUX
Reference clock
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
O/E
converting
module
155 MHz
PLL
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

termination

l
signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l

l
RST sub-module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2286
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
byte.
l
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
28.11.5 Front Panel

the SLQ16 board.

Figure 28-37 shows the front panel of the N4SLQ16 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2287
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-37 Front panel of the N4SLQ16 board
SLQ16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
SLQ16
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-91 lists the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2288
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-91 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ16 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX4
LC
TX1TX4
LC

The SLQ16 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.11.7 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SLQ16 board vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLQ16 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
28.11.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16

board. The characteristic code for the SLQ16 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 28-92 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and
Table 28-92 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and the type of
optical interface
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SLQ1601
01
I-16
SSN4SLQ1602
02
S-16.1
SSN4SLQ1603
03
L-16.1
SSN4SLQ1604
04
L-16.2


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2289
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-93 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ16 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
IN3/OUT3
IN4/OUT4
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLQ16 board.
Table 28-94 lists all the parameters of the SLQ16 board.
Table 28-94 Parameters of the SLQ16 board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.
For example, SDH-1

optical interface.
Laser Switch
Off, On

Default: On
(m)


Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2290
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
28.11.11 Specifications of the SLQ16

power consumption.
Table 28-95 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board.
Table 28-95 Optical specifications of the SLQ16 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Application code
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
25 to 40
50 to 80
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-10 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +3
-2 to +3
(dBm)
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-3
-9
-9
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2

2291
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLQ16 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
28.12 SLQ64
SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board

Only one functional version of the SLQ64 board is available, that is, N4.
28.12.2 Application
The SLQ64 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-64 optical signals. The SLQ64 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLQ64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 28-38 shows the application of the SLQ64 board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
Figure 28-38 Networking and application of the SLQ64 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2292
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit

The SLQ64 board receives and transmits 4xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
Table 28-96 Functions and features of the SLQ64 board
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specificat
ions of the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and
S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
module
Service
processin
g

Overhead
processin
g

l Supports four channels of ECC communication.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and
maintenance.
Specificat
ions of the
REG

2293
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Protectio
n
schemes

l Supports the SNCP
l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP.
NOTE
A single optical interface supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SLQ64 board supports
a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2294
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
SDH
ASON
Supported

The SLQ64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 28-39 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board.
Figure 28-39 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board
622MHz
9.953
Gbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
9.953
Gbit/s
DEMUX
9.953
Gbit/s
MUX
O/E
converting
module
622MHzPLL
Reference
clock
16x622
Mbit/s
extraction
16x622
Mbit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
Backplane
K1 and K2
Highspeed bus
Highspeed bus
DCC
MUX/
DEMUX
module
SDH overhead
processing module
Frame header
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3V
Power
module
Power
module
Clock unit
SCC unit
SCC unit
Clock unit
Communication
SCC unit
Fuse
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V

termination

l
signals.
The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2295
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
MUX/DEMUX Module
l

l
RST sub-module
byte.
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2296
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Power Module
require.
28.12.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, the bar code, and the laser safety class label on the front panel
of the SLQ64 board.

Figure 28-40 shows the front panel of the SLQ64 board.
Figure 28-40 Front panel of the SLQ64 board
SLQ64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
SLQ64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2297
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-97 lists the
Table 28-97 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ64 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX4
LC
TX1TX4
LC

The SLQ64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.12.7 Valid Slots

The SLQ64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot
work normally.
28.12.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64

The characteristic code of the SLQ64 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
of the SLQ64 board.
SLQ64 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SLQ6401
01
I-64.1
SSN4SLQ6402
02
S-64.2b

2298
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit


Table 28-99 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ64 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
RX3/TX3
RX4/TX4
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLQ64 board.
Table 28-100 lists all the parameters of the SLQ64 board.
Table 28-100 Parameters of the SLQ64 board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.
For example, SDH-1

optical interface.
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled

optical interface.
Default: Disabled

obtain the details.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2299
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Laser Switch
Off, On

Default: On
(m)


Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
28.12.11 Specifications of the SLQ64

power consumption.
Table 28-101 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ64 board.
Table 28-101 Optical specifications of the SLQ64 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Application code
I-64.1
S-64.2b
Transmission distance
(km)
0 to 10
10 to 40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC

2300
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
range (nm)
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
6 to 1
1 to +2
(dBm)
11
14
Minimum overload
(dBm)
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLQ64 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2301
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
29
Cables
About This Chapter

29.1 Power Cables and Ground Cables
The equipment has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables.
29.2 Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC,
LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC.
29.3 Ground Cables
The equipment has ground cables, including cabinet door ground cables and a PDU ground cable.
29.4 Alarm Cables
Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/
inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.
29.5 Management Cables
Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and
straight-through network cables.
29.6 Clock/Time Cable
Clock/Time Cable includes cables for other equipment connections, cables for internal
connections, cables for testing equipment connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2302
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
29.1 Power Cables and Ground Cables

The equipment has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables.
29.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables

The -48 V, BGND, and PGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet. One
end of the power cable is connected to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the
equipment room. The other end is connected to the DC power distribution box at the cabinet
top.
Structure
l
When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800: Figure 29-1 shows the structure of
the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND grounding cable.
When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800: Figure 29-2 shows the structure of
the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND grounding cable.
Figure 29-3 shows the structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable for the OptiX OSN
8800 and the OptiX OSN 6800.
Figure 29-1 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable
(when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800)
1
W1
2
W
X1
W1
W2
W2
X2
1m
0.8m
L
1. JG two-hole naked crimping connector
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2. Heat-shrink tube
2303
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Figure 29-2 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable
(when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800)
1
1. Cord end terminal
2. OT single-hole naked crimping connector
3. Cable clip
Figure 29-3 Structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable

3
2
1. OT single-hole naked crimping connector
2. Cable clip 3. JG two-hole naked crimping connector
4. Heat shrink tube
5. Cable
Pin Assignment
None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2304
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Technical Parameters
Table 29-1 Technical parameters of the PGND cables and the -48V/BGND power cables (when
the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800)
Cable
Cabin
et
power
cable
-48 V
power
cable
Usage
Wire Used
Accesses
-48 V DC
to the
cabinet.
-48 V DC power
cable (blue)
l If the required
length of the
power cable is
less than 20 m,
use the 16 mm2
cable.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 20 m
to 35 m, use the
25mm2 cable.
Connector
If copper Plates is
used on the PDU, the
25m-35 mm2 power
cable must be used.
OT naked
crimping
connector
NOTE
If the intended power
cable is longer than 25
m, contact a cable
engineer of Huawei
for tailoring.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 35 m
to 50 m, use the
35mm2 cable.
BGND
cable
Accesses
the BGND
to a
cabinet.
Battery grounding
cable (black)
l If the required
length of the
power cable is
less than 20 m,
use the 16 mm2
cable.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 20 m
to 35 m, use the
25mm2 cable.
If copper Plates is
used on the PDU, the
25m-35 mm2 power
cable must be used.
OT naked
crimping
connector
NOTE
If the intended power
cable is longer than 25
m, contact a cable
engineer of Huawei
for tailoring.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 35 m
to 50 m, use the
35mm2 cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2305
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-2 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (16 mm2) (when the
cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800)
Item
Description
Cabinet -48 V power cable
Cabinet BGND grounding

cable
Connector 1
Cord end terminal-16

mm2-0.024mm-80AInsertion depth 16mm-Green
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-16 mm2-M8
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-450 V/

750 V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-16mm2-Blue-85 A
Connector 1

mm2-0.024mm-80AInsertion depth 16mm-Green
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-16 mm2-M8
Type of the cable

750 V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-16mm2-Black-85 A
Table 29-3 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(25 mm2) (when the
Item
Description

cable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Connector 1

mm2-30 mm-75 A-Insertion
depth 16 mm-Brown
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-25 mm2-M8
Type of the cable

750 V-25 mm2-Blue-110 A
Connector 1

mm2-30 mm-75A-Insertion
depth 16 mm-Brown
Connector 2
Naked crimping connectorOT type-25 mm2-M8
Type of the cable

750 V-25 mm2-Black-110 A

2306
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (35 mm2) (when the
Item
Description

cable
Connector 1
Cord end
terminal-35mm2
-0.03m-105A-Insertion
depth 16mm-Cream-colored
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-35 mm2-M8
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-750V/

450V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-35mm2-Blue-135 A
Connector 1
Cord end
terminal-35mm2
-0.03m-105A-Insertion
depth 16mm-Cream-colored
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-35 mm2-M8
Type of the cable

450V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-35mm2-Black-135 A
Table 29-5 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables

Item
Description
Cabinet PGND grounding

cable
Connector 1
OT naked crimping
connector-35 mm2-M8
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-35 mm2-M8
Type of the cable

450V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-35mm2-Yellow and
green-135 A
29.1.2 Subrack Power Cables

The subrack power cables connect the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top and the
power interface in the subrack interface area, and lead the -48 V power supply from the top of
the cabinet to the subracks. The subrack power cables are correctly connected before delivery.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2307
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Structure (OptiX OSN 8800)

Figure 29-4 shows the subrack power cable.
Figure 29-4 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN 8800
1
W1
W1
W2
W2
X1
X2
1. OT naked crimping connector
Structure (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)

Figure 29-5 shows the subrack power cable.
Figure 29-5 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN6800/3800
1
X1
A
A3
A2
A1
W1
X3
W2
X2
500
1. Cable connector
2. Cable clip
3. Naked crimping connector
Pin Assignment (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)

For the pin assignment of subrack power cables, refer to Table 29-6.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2308
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-6 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables

Cable
Cable
Connector
Cord End
Terminal
Connection
Core Color
W2
X1.A1
X2
A1 connects to
X2.
Blue (-48 V
power)
W1
X1.A3
X3
A3 connects to
X3.
Black (power
ground)
Technical Parameters (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)

The technical parameters of subrack power cables are listed in Table 29-7.
Table 29-7 Technical parameters of subrack power cables
Item
Description
Cable connector X1
Cable connector-D type-3PIN-FemaleSolder injection molding type-No middle

contact
Cord end terminals X2, X3
Common terminal-Conductor Cross

Section-6 mm2-Length 20 mm-30 AInsertion depth 12 mm-Black
Type of the cable W2
Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2Blue-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable
Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2Black-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable
29.2 Optical Fibers

Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC,
LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC.
29.2.1 Classification
The connectors and the length of the fibers are determined according to the site survey that is
conducted before installation.
The optical fibers used by the equipment are classified as shown in Table 29-8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2309
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-8 Classification of optical fibers

Type of Connectors at
Both Ends
Fiber Type
LC/PC-LC/PC
2.0 mm (0.08 in.) singlemode fiber
G.657A2 fiber
2.0 mm (0.08 in.) multimode

fiber
LC/PC-FC/PC
G.657A2 fiber

fiber
LC/PC-SC/PC
G.657A2 fiber

fiber
LSH/APC-FC/UPC
B1 fiber
LSH/APC-LSH/APC
G.652 fiber
NOTE
The G.657 optical fibers provided by Huawei are named G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 optical fibers. The
G.657B optical fibers are short-jacket optical fibers defined in ITU-T G.657 (12/2006). According to ITU-T G.
657 (11/2009), these fibers are classified into G.657A1, G.657A2, G.657B2, and G.657B3 optical fibers. The
G.657B optical fibers provided by Huawei and the G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible and can be
interconnected. In addition, the G.657B and G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible with G.652D optical
fibers. However, the compatibility between customer-purchased G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 and G.
652D optical fibers needs to be verified.
29.2.2 Connectors
Connectors of all optical interfaces on the front panel of the boards are of the LC/PC type. LC/
PC fiber connectors are used with these boards. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the
equipment room are generally of the FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors
are used with them.
Table 29-9 lists details on classification of fiber connectors.
Table 29-9 Classification of fiber connectors
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Type of Fiber Connectors
Description
LC/PC
Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding

polished
FC/PC
Round fiber connector/protruding polished

2310
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Type of Fiber Connectors
Description
SC/PC
Square fiber connector/protruding polished
LSH/APC
Fiber connector with a cap that provides

automatic protection against dust/eightdegree radian surface/protruding polished
The appearances of the fiber connectors are shown in Figure 29-6, Figure 29-7, Figure 29-8
and Figure 29-9.
Figure 29-6 LC/PC fiber connector
The axial operation instead of rotation is required to insert or remove an LC/PC fiber connector.
To insert a fiber jumper that uses an LC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with
the optical interface and apply proper force. To remove the fiber jumper, first, press the clip,
then, slightly push the fiber connector inward, and finally, pull out the connector.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2311
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Figure 29-7 FC/PC fiber connector
Figure 29-8 SC/PC fiber connector
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2312
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Figure 29-9 LSH/APC fiber connector
Cover the optical interfaces of the replaced boards with protective caps in time. Store them in
proper packages to keep the optical interfaces clean. The protective caps recommended are
shown in Figure 29-10, and the protective caps not recommended are shown in Figure 29-11.
Figure 29-10 Protective caps recommended
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2313
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Figure 29-11 Protective caps not recommended
NOTE
The air filter caps made of soft rubber are not recommended, which tends to collect dust and sundries. This type
of caps provides poor dustproof function.
29.3 Ground Cables

The equipment has ground cables, including cabinet door ground cables and a PDU ground cable.
29.3.1 Cabinet Door Ground Cables

The cabinet door ground cables ground the front door, rear door, and side doors. The cabinet
door ground cables are correctly connected before delivery.
Structure
Figure 29-12 shows the structure of the cabinet door ground cables.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2314
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Figure 29-12 Structure of the cabinet door ground cable

1
X1
X2
L
Pin Assignment
None
The technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cables are listed in Table 29-10.
Table 29-10 Technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cables
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm2 (0.01 in.

2)-M6-Tin plating-Insulated ring
terminal-12-10AWG
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-600V-UL1015-0

mm2-10AWG-Yellow/Green-50 A-105 core
strand
29.3.2 PDU Ground Cable

One end of the PDU ground cable is connected to a protection ground screw of the power
distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection ground screw on the top of the
cabinet. The PDU ground cable is correctly connected before delivery.
Structure
Figure 29-13 shows the structure of the PDU ground cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2315
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Figure 29-13 Structure of the PDU ground cable

1
X1
X2
2. Heat-shrink tube
Pin Assignment
None
The technical parameters of the PDU ground cable are listed in Table 29-11.
Table 29-11 Technical parameters of the PDU ground cable
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02

(RV)-10 mm2 (0.02 in.2)-Yellow/Green-62 A
29.4 Alarm Cables

Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/
inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.
29.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to cascade the signals of the indicators at different subracks
in the same cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of one
subrack. The other end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of another
subrack.
Structure
The structure of the cable indicator alarm cable is shown in Figure 29-14.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2316
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Figure 29-14 Structure of the cabinet indicator alarm cable

1
View A
8
4
View B
1
2
X2
X3
X1
A
X4
X5
1. Network interface connector
2. Heat-shrink tube
3. Common plug
4. Ordinary connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable, refer to Table 29-12.
Table 29-12 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable
Connector X1
Connectors X2, X3,

X4, X5
Color
Relationship
X1.4
X2.2
White
Pair
X1.5
X2.1
Green
X1.1
X3.2
White
X1.2
X3.1
Blue
X1.3
X4.2
White
X1.6
X4.1
Brown
X1.7
X5.2
White
X1.8
X5.1
Orange
Pair
Pair
Pair
The technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable are listed in Table 29-13.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2317
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-13 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable

Item
Description
Connector X1
Network interface connector-8PIN-single

row-single port-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector
Connector X2/X3/X4/X5
Common plug-2PIN-single row/2.5 mm (0.1

in.)
Type of the cable
Twisted pair cable -100SEYPVPV-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4

pairs-black
Number of cores
Core diameter
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
29.4.2 Alarm Output Interface Cable

An alarm output interface cable is used to output and concatenate alarm signals. There are RJ45
connectors at both ends of the cable. During alarm signal output concatenation, both ends of the
cable are connected to the ALMO alarm interfaces in different subracks. During alarm signal
output, one end of the cable is connected to the ALMO alarm interface, and the other end of the
cable is connected to a power distribution cabinet or another set of equipment. In this case, alarms
are displayed in a centralized manner.
Structure
Figure 29-15 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable.
Figure 29-15 Alarm output interface cable
1
View A
8
6
3
1
X2
X1
L
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm output interface cable, refer to Table 29-14.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2318
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-14 Pin assignment of X1/X2

Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
Pair
X1.1
X2.1
White-orange
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.3
X2.3
White-green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White-blue
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
X1.7
X2.7
White-brown
Pair
Pair
Pair
The technical parameters of the alarm interface cable are listed in Table 29-15.
Table 29-15 Technical parameters of the alarm output interface cable
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitunshielded-RJ-45 connector-uniconductor

flat cable
Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100UTPCAT5E-0.5 mm (0.02 in.)-24AWG-4

pairs-PANTONE 430U-low-smoke and
halogen-free cable
Number of cores
Core diameter
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
29.4.3 Alarm Input Interface Cable

An alarm input interface cable is used to input alarms of external equipment. One end of the
cable is connected to the ALMI interface in a subrack and the other end is connected to the
external equipment under monitoring.
Structure
Figure 29-16 shows the structure of the cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2319
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Figure 29-16 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable

8
1
1
X1
X2
1. Network interface connector-RJ-45
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to
Table 29-16.
Table 29-16 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
Pair
X1.1
X2.1
White-orange
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.3
X2.3
White-green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White-blue
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
X1.7
X2.7
White-brown
Pair
Pair
Pair
For the technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer
to Table 29-17.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2320
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-17 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable

Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitcrystal model connector
Type of the cable
Communication cable-8 cores category-5

twisted pair-24AWG
Number of cores
Core diameter
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
29.5 Management Cables

Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and
straight-through network cables.
29.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable

The OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface in OptiX OSN 6800/8800.
Structure
Figure 29-17 shows the structure of the OAM serial port cable.
Figure 29-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable
1. DB9 connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable, refer to Table 29-18.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2321
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-18 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port

Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
X1.1
X2.1
Pair
X1.5
X2.5
X1.2
X2.2
X1.3
X2.3
X1.6
X2.6
X1.7
X2.7
X1.8
X2.8
X1.9
X2.9
Pair
Pair
Pair
The technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable are listed in Table 29-19.
Table 29-19 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable
Item
Description
Connector X1, X2
Cable connector-D type-9 PIN-Male-Cable

welding type
Type
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable-100ohmSEYVP-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairsBlack
Number of cores
4 pairs
Length
10.0m (393.7 in.), 20.0m (787.4 in.)
29.5.2 AUX Signal Cable

The AUX signal cable accesses external signals through the serial port used for NM
communications and the management port. The AUX signal cable does not process external
signals in the OptiX OSN 3800.
Structure
Figure 29-18 shows the structure of the AUX signal cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2322
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Figure 29-18 Structure of the AUX signal cable

2
Pos.64
View A
W8
W7
Pos.1
View B
X8
X7
X6
W6
Delander
W5
W1
X5
W4
X1
L1
X4
W3
X3
View C
Pos.9
W2
C
X2
L2
L3
Pos.1
L4
L5
1. DB64 cable connector
3. DB9 cable connector
For the relationship between the connectors X2 to X8X5 and interface types, refer to Table
29-20.
Table 29-20 Relationship between connectors and interface types
Connector
Interface Type
X2
Serial
X3
ALMI1
X4
ALMI2
X5
ALMO
X6
LAMP1
X7
LAMP2
X8
ETH
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the W2 to W8, refer to Table 29-21, Table 29-22, Table 29-23, Table
29-24, Table 29-25, Table 29-26 and Table 29-27.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2323
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-21 Pin assignment of the W2

Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
X1.3
X2.2
Pair
X1.7
X2.3
X1.4
X2.4
X1.1
X2.5
X1.6
X2.6
X1.8
X2.7
X1.5
X2.8
X1.2
X2.9
Pair
Pair
Pair

Connector X1
Connector X3
Relationship
X1.9
X3.1
Pair
X1.11
X3.2
X1.13
X3.3
X1.15
X3.6
X1.17
X3.4
X1.19
X3.5
X1.10
X3.7
X1.12
X3.8
Pair
Pair
Pair
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Connector X1
Connector X4
Relationship
X1.14
X4.1
Pair
X1.16
X4.2
X1.18
X4.3
X1.20
X4.6
X4.4
X4.5

Pair
2324
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X4
Relationship
X4.7
X4.8

Connector X1
Connector X5
Relationship
X1.21
X5.1
Pair
X1.23
X5.2
X1.25
X5.3
X1.27
X5.6
X1.22
X5.4
X1.24
X5.5
X1.26
X5.7
X1.28
X5.8
Pair
Pair
Pair

Connector X1
Connector X6
Relationship
X1.33
X6.1
Pair
X1.35
X6.2
X1.41
X6.3
X1.43
X6.6
X1.37
X6.4
X1.39
X6.5
X1.45
X6.7
X1.47
X6.8
Pair
Pair
Pair
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Connector X1
Connector X7
Relationship
X1.34
X7.1
Pair

2325
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X7
X1.36
X7.2
X1.42
X7.3
X1.44
X7.6
X1.38
X7.4
X1.40
X7.5
X1.46
X7.7
X1.48
X7.8
Relationship
Pair
Pair
Pair

Connector X1
Connector X8
Relationship
X1.61
X8.1
Pair
X1.57
X8.2
X1.53
X8.3
X1.49
X8.6
X8.4
X8.5
X8.7
X8.8
Pair
The technical parameters of the AUX signal cable are listed in Table 29-28.
Table 29-28 Technical parameters of the AUX signal cable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item
Description
Connector X1
Cable connector-D type-64

PIN-8 bit-straight through
connector
Connector X2
Cable connector-D
type-9PIN
Connectors X3-X8
Network interface
connector-8 bit-8PINShielded

2326
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Item
Description
Type of the cable
W1
Communication
cable-26AWGPANTONE430U-Sheilded
W2-W8
Communication
cable-24AWG-8 coresPANTONE445U
Number of cores
29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable

The straight-through network cable connects the equipment and the network management
computer. RJ-45 connectors are used at both ends of the straight-through network cable,
connected to the equipment at two ends.
Structure
Figure 29-19 shows the structure of the straight-through network cable.
Figure 29-19 Structure of the straight-through network cable
8
1
RJ-45
X1
X2
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the straight-through network cable, refer to Table 29-29.
Table 29-29 Pin assignment of the straight-through network cable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
Pair
X1.1
X2.1
White-orange
X1.6
X2.6
Green

Pair
2327
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
X1.3
X2.3
White-green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White-blue
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
X1.7
X2.7
White-brown
Relationship
Pair
Pair
The technical parameters of the straight-through network cable are listed in Table 29-30.
Table 29-30 Technical parameters of the straight-through network cable
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector-8 PIN-8 bitCrystal model connector
Type of the cable
Communication cable-8-core category-5

twisted pair-24AWG
Number of cores
Core diameter
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
29.6 Clock/Time Cable

Clock/Time Cable includes cables for other equipment connections, cables for internal
connections, cables for testing equipment connections.
29.6.1 Cables for other equipment Connections

The cables for other equipment connections are used to connect to BITS/PTN or OptiX OSN
devices.
The cables applicable to these ports are available in four types, as listed in Table 29-31.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2328
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-31 Cables for connecting BITS/PTN device to OptiX OSN devices
External
interface of
board
Port Type
of OptiX
OSN
Device
Port Type
of BITS or
other
Device
Cable
Type
Description
TOD(time)
RJ-45(time)
RJ-45(time)
Straight
through
network
cables
For details, see StraightThrough Network Cable.
CLK/IN /
OUT(clock)
RJ-45 (clock)
SMB (clock)
Special
cables
Single Conversion Cable to

connect RJ45 port and SMB port
and coaxial cables use SMB
connectors at both ends.For
details, see Special Cables and
SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables.
Cables made using coaxial
cables and straight-through
network cables together with
120ohm,75ohm Converter Box.
For details, see Special Cables.
SMB (clock)
SMB (clock)
SMBSMB
Coaxial
cables
Coaxial cables use SMB

connectors at both ends. For
details, see SMB-SMB Coaxial
Cables.
RJ-45 (clock)
RJ-45
(clock)
Cascadi
ng
network
cable
For details, see Cascading

Network Cables .
NOTE
The TN52STI board of an OptiX OSN 8800 device has four 120-ohm RJ45 ports: CLK1, CLK2, TOD1,
and TOD2. The CLK1 and CLK2 ports are used to receive or output clock signals. The TOD1 and TOD2
ports are used to receive or output time signals.
NOTE
The TN11STG board of an OptiX OSN 6800 device has two 120-ohm RJ45 (CLK and OUT) and two 75ohm SMB ports (IN and OUT). Users can use the CLK port or the IN and OUT ports to receive and transmit
clock signals. The CLK port can also be used to output clock signals.
Straight-Through Network Cable

The straight-through network cable connects the OptiX OSN equipment and the network
management computer. RJ-45 connectors are used at both ends of the straight-through network
cable, connected to the equipment at two ends.
For details, see 29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2329
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Special Cables
Special cables are used to connect BITS devices to OptiX OSN devices or OptiX PTN devices.
Each special cable has one SMB connector at one end and an RJ45 connector at the other end.
Structure
Single Cable, Conversion Cable
The single cable uses one RJ45 port at one end and an SMB port at the other end. The length of
such a cable is only 3 meters.
Figure 29-20 shows the structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable.
Figure 29-20 Structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable
1: Coaxial Connector,SMB Socket 2: 75 ohm<->120 ohm PCB 3: Network Interface Connector

X1: RJ45 port X2: SMB port X3: SMB port
Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box
Cables can be made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables together with
120ohm to 75ohm Converter Box. A convertor box is usually used in three scenarios:
l
When an OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a BITS device for clock synchronization,
users need to connect the SMB connectors to the BITS device using two coaxial cables and
the RJ45 connector to the OptiX OSN device using a straight-through network cable.
When the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a OptiX PTN device, users need to connect
the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device using two coaxial cables and the RJ45
connector to the OptiX PTN device using a straight-through cable.
If the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to an clock tester, users need to make two cables
at the field, each with one SMB connector at one end and a BNC connector at the other
end. Then connect the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device and the BNC connector
to the clock tester.
Figure 29-21 shows a converter box, which provides two SMB ports (IN and OUT) on one side
and an RJ45 port on the other side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2330
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Figure 29-21 Structure of SMB-SMB Coaxial cable
Pin Assignment
Table 29-32 provides the pin assignment of the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box.
Table 29-32 Pin assignment when the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box is used
Cable
Converter Box
Port on OptiX OSN

Device
Straight-through network
cable
RJ-45
RJ-45
Coaxial cable
SMB
SMB
NOTE
The connectors on the converter box and on the OptiX OSN device are male and the connectors at the two
ends of the coaxial cable are female.
Table 29-33 provides the parameters of an Special Cables.
Table 29-33 Parameters of an Special Cables
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Cable
Description
Single Cable, Conversion Cable
Single Cable, Conversion Cable, 3m,

2*SMB75SM-IV, 120CC2P0.4P430U(S)
+2*SYFVZ75-1/0.25, MP8-II, Expert 2.0
(BOM:04040582)

2331
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Cable
Description
Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box
1. Coaxial Connector, SMB Socket, 75ohm/

Angle/Male, PCB Welding Type,
Installation Hole D1.3mm, Installation
Holes Spacing 5.1mm
2. A8010 Refiner, AS21TCTA, A8010
Refiner Twisted Pair Cable, Coaxial
Cable Impedance Transforming Board,
3*3 Assembled Board
3. Box Body, Twisted Pair, Coaxial Cable
Conversion Box (SMB Angle Male)
4. For more information of the parameters of
SMB-BNC coaxial cable, see SMB-SMB
Coaxial Cables.
5. For more information of the parameters of
Straight-through network cable, see
Straight-Through Network Cable.
SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables

The SMB-SMB Coaxial cables connect to SMB ports on BITS devices at one end and to SMB
ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end. Each coaxial cable uses an SMB connector at each
end.
Structure
Figure 29-22 shows the structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable.
Figure 29-22 Structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable
Pin Assignment
Table 29-34 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2332
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-34 Pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable

One End
Other End
SMB-core
SMB-core
SMB-ground
SMB-ground
Table 29-35 provides the parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable.
Table 29-35 Parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable
Cable
Description
Cable type
l Trunk Cable, 10.00m, 75ohm, 2.2mm,

SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25,
SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4368
SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25,
SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25,
2m, 10m, 20m
Cable length
29.6.2 Cables for Internal Connections

The type of cables for internal connections of OptiX OSN devices are mainly two scenarios:
connecting NEs on an OptiX OSN network and cascading master and slave subracks on an OptiX
OSN NE.
Table 29-36lists the type of cables for internal connections of OptiX OSN devices.
Table 29-36 Type of cables for internal connections
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Connection
type
signal
Type
Cables
Type
Description
connecting
NEs
clock
Cascading
network
cable
Cascading network cables must be used when

OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 clock ports need
to be connected or when master and slave
subracks on an OptiX OSN NE need to be
cascaded for clock synchronization. For more
information, see Cascading Network Cables .

2333
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Connection
type
cascading
master and
slave
subracks
29 Cables
signal
Type
Cables
Type
Description
time
Straightthrough
network
cable
Straight-through network cables must be used

when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 time ports
need to be connected for time synchronization.
For more information,see Straight-Through
Network Cable.
clock
Cascading
network
cable
ascading networks must be used when master

and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs
to be cascaded for clock synchronization. For
more information, see Cascading Network
Cables .
time
Cascading
network
cable
Cascading networks must be used when master

and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs
to be cascaded for time synchronization. For
more information, see Cascading Network
Cables .
Cascading Network Cables

Cascading network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 clock ports need
to be connected or when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE need to be cascaded
for clock synchronization. Cascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks
on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for time synchronization.
Structure
Figure 29-23 shows the structure of a cascading network cable.
Figure 29-23 Structure of a clock/time cascading network cable with RJ45 connectors at both
ends
Pin Assignment
Table 29-37 provides the pin assignment of a cascading network cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2334
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-37 Pin assignment of a cascading network cable

Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
X1.1 (White-orange)
X2.4 (Blue)
Twisted
X1.2 (Orange)
X2.5 (White-blue)
X1.3 (White-green)
X2.7 (White-brown)
X1.4 (Blue)
X2.1 (White-orange)
X1.5 (White-blue)
X2.2 (Orange)
X1.6 (Green)
X2.8 (Brown)
X1.7 (White-brown)
X2.3 (White-green)
X1.8 (Brown)
X2.6 (Green)
Twisted
Twisted
Twisted
Table 29-38 provides the parameters of cascading network cables.
Table 29-38 Parameters of cascading network cables
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
l Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit

8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector,
24-26AWG,Leads Single Solid Cable,
For OEM Matching 25050057
l Network Interface Connector,8Bit
8Pin,Crystal Plug,Matching 25050014
Cable type
Communication cable-8-core class 5 twisted

pair-24 AWG
Number of wires
29.6.3 Cables for Testing equipment Connections

Clock signal testing cables are used to connect test instruments to OptiX OSN devices.
Table 29-39 lists the main clock signal testing cables.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2335
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Table 29-39 Cables for Testing equipment Connections

Connecti
on
relationsh
ip
Port Type of
Test
Instrument
Port Type
of OptiX
OSN
Device
Cable
Type
Description
Connection
to Clock
test
instrument
BNC(clock)
SMB(clock)
SMBBNCCoaxia
l cables
The coaxial cables use a

BNC port at one end and an
SMB port at the other end.
For more information, see
SMB-BNC Coaxial
Cables.
BNC (clock)
RJ-45 (clock)
Clock signal
testing
cables
These testing cables can be

made using coaxial cables
and straight-through
network cables are together
with 120ohm to 75ohm
Converter Box. For more
information, see Special
Cables, Straight-Through
Network Cable, SMBBNC Coaxial Cables.
BNC(time)
RJ45(time)
Time signal
testing
cables
For more information, see

Time Signal Testing
Cables.
Connection
to Time test
instrument
SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables

The SMB-BNC Coaxial cables connect to SMB ports on clock test instrument at one end and
to BNC ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end.The SMB-BNC coaxial cable use a BNC
port at one end and an SMB port at the other end.
Structure
Figure 29-24 shows the structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable.
Figure 29-24 Structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2336
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 29-40 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable.
Table 29-40 Pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable
One End
Other End
SMB-core
BNC-core
SMB-ground
BNC-ground
Table 29-41 provides the parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable.
Table 29-41 Parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable
Cable
Description
Cable type
Trunk Cable,10.00m, 75ohm, 2.2mm,

SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25,
BNC75AM-II, C, DL2521
Cable length
10m
Time Signal Testing Cables

The time signal testing cables connect to BNC ports on clock test instrument at one end and to
RJ45 ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end.
Structure
Figure 29-25 shows the structure of a time signal testing cables.
Figure 29-25 Structures of the BNC coaxial cable and cable connector
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2337
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

29 Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 29-42 provides the pin assignment of the time signal testing cables.
Table 29-42 Pin assignment of a time signal testing cable
Connector X1 (BNC)
Connector X2 (RJ-45)
Description
Core
6(green)
Pin 6 on the RJ45 connector

on the OptiX OSN device
must be connected to the
BNC port on the time test
instrument.
Ground(Metal shielding)
1(blue)
Pin 1 on the RJ45 connector

on the OptiX OSN device
must be connected to the
ground of the BNC connector
on the time test instrument.
Table 29-43provides the parameters of time signal testing cables.
Table 29-43 Parameters of time signal testing cables
Cable
Description
RJ45
l Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit

8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector,
24-26AWG,Leads Single Solide Cable,
For OEM Matching 25050057
l Network Interface Connector,8Bit
8Pin,Crystal Plug,Matching 25050014
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
BNC
Coaxial Connector,BNC,75ohm,Straight
Plug, Male, Matching SYFVZ-75-1-1, With
Heat Shrink Tube With Itself-For Agintrust
Trunk Cable
Trunk Cable,RSP0/PV4 Plate To DDF, 30m,

75ohm, 2E1, 2.2mm, DIN4X8,
4*SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25

2338
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

30 Optical Attenuator
30
Optical Attenuator
About This Chapter

Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical
attenuators (VOAs).
30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator
A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The
common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and
15 dB.
30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator
A MVOA (mechanical variable optical attenuator) can adjust the optical power on an optical
path in a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of a VOA is 2 dB to 30 dB.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2339
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

30 Optical Attenuator
30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator

A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The
common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and
15 dB.
Figure 30-1 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator.
Figure 30-1 Appearance of a fixed optical attenuator
30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator

A MVOA (mechanical variable optical attenuator) can adjust the optical power on an optical
path in a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of a VOA is 2 dB to 30 dB.
Figure 30-2 shows the appearance of a common VOA.
Figure 30-2 Appearance of a VOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2340
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

31 Filler Panels
31
Filler Panels
About This Chapter

A filler panel is used to fill in a vacant slot.
31.1 Functions and Features
This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel.
31.2 Front Panel
There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel.
31.3 Valid Slots
This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel.
This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2341
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

31 Filler Panels
31.1 Functions and Features

This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel.
A filler panel has the following functions:
l
Prevents exposure of people to hazardous voltage and current in the subrack.
Prevents foreign matter from entering the subrack.
Maintains electromagnetic interference (EMI) compliance.
Maintains proper air flow through the subrack.
31.2 Front Panel

There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel.
Figure 31-1 shows the appearance of a filler panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2342
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

31 Filler Panels
Figure 31-1 Appearance of a filler panel

21136047 21135823 21136389 21132664 21134882 21135716 21135491 21135492
21135493
21136046
31.3 Valid Slots

This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel.
Table 31-1 lists the valid slots for a filler panel.
Table 31-1 Valid slots for a filler panel
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Part Number
Product
Valid Slots
21132664
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
21132664
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU36
21132664
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
21132664
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU18

2343
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

31 Filler Panels
Part Number
Product
Valid Slots
21132664
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
21134882
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU6-IU11
21135491
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU42, IU44
21135492
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU76, IU77
21135492
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU38
21135493
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU69-IU71, IU78-IU82, IU87-IU89
21135493
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU37, IU39, IU40, IU45-IU48
21135716
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU41, IU43
21135716
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU72, IU73, IU83, IU84, IU75, IU86

NOTE
Either slot IU75 or IU86 must be filled by two
filler panels.
21135823
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU9, IU10
21136046
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU74, IU85
21136047
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU9, IU10, IU43, IU44
21136389
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU9, IU10
NOTE
l When slot IU9 or IU10 is used to house a
board except the TN16XCH board, this filler
panel must be inserted before the board is
inserted.
l When slot IU9 or IU10 is empty, it must be
covered with this filler panel and then with a
filler panel identified as 21132664.

This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Table 31-2 lists the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Table 31-2 Technical specifications of a filler panel
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Part Number
21132664
25.4 mm (W) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 10.4 in. (H))
21134882
25.4 mm (W) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.9 in. (H))
21135491
28.8 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H))

2344
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
31 Filler Panels
Part Number
21135492
25.4 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H))
21135493
50.8 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H))
21135716
25.4 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H))
21135823
27.2 mm (W) x 581.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 22.9 in. (H))
21136046
110.0 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (4.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
21136047
34.1 mm (W) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 23.7 in. (H))
21136389
54.5 mm (W) x 350.3 mm (H) (2.1 in. (W) x 13.8 in. (H))

2345
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
Indicators
A.1 Cabinet Indicators

There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and
yellow.
A.2 Subrack Indicator
There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are
in the following colors: red, orange, yellow and green.
A.3 Chassis Indicators
There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red.
A.4 Board Indicators
On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running
status of the board.
A.5 Fan Indicator
There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN.
A.6 PIU Indicator
There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2346
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
A.1 Cabinet Indicators

There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and
yellow.
The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-1.
Table A-1 Meanings of cabinet indicators
Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
power
Power indicator
On (green)
The cabinet is powered

on.
Off
The cabinet is not

powered on.
Critical alarm
indicator
On (red)
There is a critical alarm.
Off
There is no critical alarm.
Major alarm
indicator
On (Orange)
There is a major alarm.
Off
There is no major alarm.
Minor alarm
indicator
On (Yellow)
There is a minor alarm.
Off
There is no minor alarm.
critical
major
minor
A.2 Subrack Indicator

There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are
in the following colors: red, orange, yellow and green.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 subrack indicators are on the panel of the fan tray assembly.
Table A-2 Meanings of subrack indicators

Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
PWR
Power indicator
On (Green)
The subrack works

normally.
Off
The subrack does not

work.
On (Red)
OptiX OSN
6800: CRI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Critical alarm
indicator

2347
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
Off
Major alarm
indicator
On (Orange)
Off
Minor alarm
indicator
On (Yellow)
Off
OptiX OSN
8800: CRIT
MAJ
MIN
A.3 Chassis Indicators

There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red.
Table A-3 Meanings of chassis indicators
Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
PWR
Chassis power supply

indicator
On (green)
The chassis is powered

on.
Off
The chassis is not

powered on.
On (yellow)
Off
On (orange)
Off
On (red)
Off
MIN
Minor alarm indicator
MAJ
Major alarm indicator
CRI
Critical alarm indicator
A.4 Board Indicators

On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running
status of the board.
The meanings of the board indicators are listed in Table A-4,Table A-5 and Table A-6.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2348
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
Table A-4 Meanings of board indicators

Indicato
r
Name
Status
Meaning
STAT
Board hardware
indicator
On (green)
The board works normally.
On (red)
A critical/major alarm occurs on

the board.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs on the

board.
Off
The board is not powered on.
On (red)
The memory check fails.
PROG
Board software
indicator
Loading the board software fails.

The FPGA file is lost.
The board software is lost.
SRV
ACT
Service alarm
indicator
Service activation
indicator
Blinking (red)
On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms:

The BOOTROM check fails.
Blinking quickly
(green)

Writing the flash memory is in
progress.
Blinking slowly
(green)

The BIOS booting is in progress.
On (green)
The board software or FPGA is

uploaded successfully, or the
board software is initialized
successfully.
On (green)
The service is normal with any

service alarm.
On (red)
A critical or major service alarm

occurs.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote service alarm

occurs.
Off
No service is configured.
On (green)
The board is in the working mode.

The board is in the active mode.
Off
The board is not in the working

mode.
The board is in the standby mode.
Blinking quickly
(green)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


Backing up the system database in
batches is in progress.
2349
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
Indicato
r
Name
Status
Meaning
LINK/
ACTn
Data port
connection/data
transceive indicator
On (green)
The data port connection is

normal.
Off
The data port connection is

abnormal.
NOTE
The STAT indicators for the TN13FIU, TN11ITL, TN11SFIU, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4, TN11DMR1,
TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11MR8, and TN11SBM2 boards are green. The STAT indicators are lit when
the boards are powered on and are unlit when the boards are powered off.
Table A-5 Meanings of the indicators on the PQ2 sub-board

Indicato
r
Name
Status
Meaning
STAT
Board hardware
indicator
On (green)
The PQ2 sub-board works

normally.
On (red)
The PQ2 sub-board is abnormal.
On (yellow)
Logical sub-board is not

configured.
Off
The PQ2 sub-board is not powered

on.
Table A-6 Meanings of the indicators on the SCC board

Indicato
r
Name
Status
Meaning
STAT
Board hardware
indicator
On (green)
The board is working normally.
On (red)
A critical alarm occurs on the

board.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs on the board.
Off
The board is not powered on.
On (red)
The memory check fails.
PROG
Board software
indicator
Loading the board software fails.

The FPGA file is lost.
The NE software is lost.
Blinking (red)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)


The BOOTROM check fails.
2350
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicato
r
SRV
ACT
A Indicators
Name
Service alarm
indicator
Service activation
indicator
Status
Meaning
Blinking quickly
(green)

Writing the flash memory is in
progress.
Blinking slowly
(green)

The BIOS booting is in progress.
On (green)
The board software or FPGA is

uploaded successfully, or the
board software is initialized
successfully.
On (green)
The service is normal with any

service alarm.
On (red)
A critical or major service alarm

occurs.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote service alarm

occurs.
Off
No service is configured.
On (green)
The board is in the working mode.

The board is in the active mode.
Off
The board is not in the working

mode.
The board is in the standby mode.
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Indicator for system

power supply
Indicator for system

power supply
Indicator for
protection power
supply
Blinking quickly
(green)

Backing up the system database in
batches is in progress.
On (green)
-48 V power supply A is normal.
On (red)
-48 V power supply A is faulty

(lost or failed).
Off
No power is input.
On (green)
-48 V power supply B is normal.
On (red)
-48 V power supply B is faulty (lost

or failed).
Off
No power is input.
On (green)
The +3.3 V protection power is

normal.
On (red)
The +3.3 V protection power is

lost.

2351
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
Indicato
r
Name
Status
Meaning
ALMC
Alarm cut-off
indicator
On (yellow)
There is no audible or visual

warning in case of an alarm.
Off
Audible warning is generated in

case of an alarm.
A.5 Fan Indicator

There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN.
The corresponding meanings of the Fan indicator are listed in Table A-7.
Table A-7 Meanings of the FAN indicator
Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
OptiX OSN
6800/OptiX
OSN 3800:
STAT
OptiX OSN
8800: FAN
Fan indicator
On (green)
The fan is normal.
On (red)
A major alarm occurs or two or

more fans are faulty.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs or one fan is

faulty.
Off
The fan is not powered on, is

absent, or the software is not
loaded.
A.6 PIU Indicator

There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status.
Table A-8 Meanings of the PIU indicator
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
OptiX OSN
6800/OptiX
OSN 3800:
RUN
OptiX OSN
8800: PWR
Running status
indicator
On (green)
Indicates that the power is

accessed normally.
Off
Indicates that the power is

not accessed.

2352
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B Bar Code for Boards
Bar Code for Boards
and board characteristic code.
B.1 Overview
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs
The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical
modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs.
B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit
The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM
optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules.
B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM
The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical
signals processed by the board.
B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA
The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the
board.
B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU
The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal
input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit
The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals
processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and
the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.
B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit
The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection
switching time.
B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2353
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals
B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit
The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with,
the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2354
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.1 Overview
The information about a bar code can be queried on the U2000, for details refer to Supporting
Tasks.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from
that on the bar code.
Figure B-1 and Figure B-2 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules.
Figure B-3 and Figure B-4 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules.
Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)
Delivery
information
Board model
number
Board version
(TN12)
2102314840107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 19210AG

Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
BOM
Board
name
Characteristic
code

Delivery
information
Board model
number
Board version
(TN12)
2102315653108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01 TPT

BOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
Board Tunable Characteristic

name
code

2355
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Delivery
information
Board version Board

name
(TN12)
2103070768107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01

Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
BOM
Board model
number
First four numbers

of the BOM
Delivery
information
Board version Board

name
(TN12)
03OHFY 108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01
The complete BOM should be

0303OHFY. "03" are taken out in
the BOM above.
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
Board model
number
The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical
module. Table B-1 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2356
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-1 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for OTN boards
Board
Configuration
First Four
Numbers in
the board
BOM
Description
First Four Numbers

in the BOM of the
Required Optical
Module
Board not installed

0303

with a wavelength
tunable optical module
on its WDM side.
Client-side optical
modules need to be
selected as required for
the board.

side)
0303
The board is not

installed with any
modules need to be
required.

and WDM side)
0307

with a fixed optical
module on its WDM
side. Client-side optical
modules need to be
required.

side)
0302
The board is not

installed with any
modules need to be
required.

and WDM side)
0231
Optical modules are

installed on the client
and WDM sides of the
board.
NA

optical modules
Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows:
l
For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the
board is delivered with optical modules installed.
For the SSN3SLH41 board,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2357
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The first four numbers are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not
installed. The first four numbers in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the
board are 3406.
When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four numbers in
the BOM are 0305.
Table B-2 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for of other OCS boards.
Table B-2 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOM for an OCS board (excluding
SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41)
Board
Configuration
First Four
Numbers in
the board
BOM
Description
First Four Numbers

in the BOM of the
Required Optical
Module
Board not installed

0302
The board is not

installed with any
optical module. Optical
modules need to be
required.
3406

optical modules
0305

optical modules.
NA
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs

The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical
modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs.
B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs

The characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the
frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-3.
Table B-3 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Code
Meaning
Description
The first five digit
The frequency of the

DWDM-side optical
transmitter module
Indicate the frequency of the

DWDM-side optical
transmitter module.
The sixth character
The type of the DWDM-side

receiving optical module
The value can be A or P. A

represents APD. P represents
PIN.

2358
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
The seventh character

optical transmitter module
The detailed meaning of the

character is shown in Table
B-4.
NOTE
In the case of the OTU boards with dual fed optical interfaces, such as the LQMD board, the characteristic
code consists of eight digits. The frequency values of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side
are indicated.
The types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules are listed in Table B-4.
Table B-4 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules
Character
Dispersion (1550
nm)
Distance
Rate
1600ps/nm
80km
2.5G
3200ps/nm
170km
2.5G
800ps/nm
40km
10.66G
3200ps/nm
160km
2.5G
1500ps/nm
80km
10.66G
1600ps/nm
80km
10.66G
3200ps/nm
170km
2.5G
800ps/nm
40km
10.66G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.5G
6500ps/nm
320km
2.5G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.5G
6500ps/nm
320km
2.5G
800ps/nm
40km
10.71G
>600ps/nm
>30km
10.71G
>600ps/nm
>30km
10.66G
800ps/nm
40km
10.66G
1800ps/nm
90km
2.66G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.66G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.5G
1500ps/nm
80km
10.66G
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2359
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Character
Dispersion (1550
nm)
Distance
Rate
>600ps/nm
>30km
10.66G
>600ps/nm
>30km
10.71G
6400ps/nm
320km
4.9-5.4G
6400ps/nm
320km
10.66G
1500ps/nm
80km
10.71G
3400ps/nm
170km
4.9-5.4G
800ps/nm
40km
10.71G
>600ps/nm
>30km
10.71G
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is 19210AG. This code indicates the
following features: The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is 192.10 THz;
APD is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side
optical transmitter module is G. For details, refer to Table B-4.
B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs

The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating
the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
Table B-5 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU
Code
Meaning
Description
The first character
Wavelength-tunable
T is the abbreviation for

Tunable, indicating that the
wavelength is tunable.


PIN.
The third character

optical transmitter module
The detailed meaning of the

character is shown in Table
B-6.
The types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules are listed in Table B-6.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2360
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-6 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules

Character
Dispersion (1550
nm)
Distance
Rate
1200ps/nm
60km
10.71G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.66G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.67G
3400ps/nm
170km
5.33G
-1000 to 1100ps/nm
60km
10.71G
4800ps/nm
240km
11.3G
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is TPT. This code indicates the following
features: This board is a wavelength-tunable OTU; PIN is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving
optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is T. For details, refer
to Table B-6.
B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs

The characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and
type of the optical module in the OTU.
Table B-7 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU
Code
Meaning
Description
The first four digits
The wavelength of the

CWDM-side transmitting
optical module
Indicate the wavelength of

the CWDM-side transmitting
optical module.
The fifth character
The type of the CWDM-side


PIN.
The sixth character
The type of the CWDM-side

transmitting optical module
The value can be L or S. L

represents long haul. S
represents short haul.
NOTE
As for the LWX2 board, only information about the first wavelength is indicated.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN13LQM is 1531AS. This code indicates the
following features: The wavelength is 1531 nm; APD is adopted by the CWDM-side receiving
optical module; the CWDM-side transmitting optical module is used for short-haul transmission
(80 km).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2361
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit

The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM
optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules.
The line unit shares the same characteristic code with the WDM-side DWDM optical module
of the wavelength tunable unit. For details, refer to B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM
OTUs and B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs.
B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM

The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical
signals processed by the board.
B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1

The characteristic code for the CMR1 board contains four digits, indicating the wavelength that
carries the signals processed by the board.
Table B-8 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1.
Table B-8 Characteristic code for the CMR1
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Wavelength that carries

optical signals
Indicates the wavelength that

carries the optical signals
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength
that carries the signals is 1471 nm.

The characteristic code for the CMR2 board contains eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths
that carry the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-9.
Table B-9 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

optical signals
Indicates the first wavelength


2362
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
Last four digits

Indicates the second

the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571.

l

The characteristic code for the CMR4 board contains eight digits, indicating the four
wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board.
Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-10.
Table B-10 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First and second digits

optical signals

digits of the first wavelength


digits of the second
the board.
Third wavelength that carries

optical signals

digits of the third wavelength
Fourth wavelength that


digits of the fourth
the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961.
l
"59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2363
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

"61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.
B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1

The characteristics code for the DMR1 board contains four digits, identifying the frequency of
Table B-11 provides the details on the characteristics code.
Table B-11 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board
Barcode
Meaning
Description
First to fourth digits
Optical signal frequency
Frequency of the optical

signals processed by the
board
For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that
the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.
B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2

the two signals processed by the board.
Table B-12 Characteristic code for the MR2 board
Code
Meaning
First four digits

signal
the first optical signal.
Last four digits
Frequency of the second

optical signal
Description

the second optical signal.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370.
l
"9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.

The characteristic code for the MR4 board contains eight digits. Each digit indicates the
frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2364
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Frequency of first optical

signal

Last four digits
Frequency of forth optical

signal

the fourth optical signal
l
"9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can
be inferred that:
l
The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz.
The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.

the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
Code
Meaning
First four digits

signal
Last four digits

optical signal
Description

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2365
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
l
B.4.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V

The characteristic code for the MR8V board contains of eight digits that indicate the frequencies
of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
Table B-15 Characteristic code for the MR8V board
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

signal
Last four digits

optical signal

"V"
Adjustment of the input

optical power of each
channel
Indicates that the board

adjusts the input optical
power of each channel.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V.
l
"V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
l
B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA

The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the
board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2366
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4

The characteristic code for the MCA4 board contains one character, indicating the band of the
Table B-16 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.
B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8

The characteristic code for the MCA8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of
Table B-17 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card
processes optical signals in the C band.
B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU

The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal
input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA

The characteristic code for the HBA board contains seven characters and digits, indicating the
band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by
the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2367
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-18 Characteristic code for the HBA board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character
The second character is

always G.
Third to the fourth digits
Gain
The third to the fourth digits

indicate the gain value.
Fifth character
The fifth character is always

I.
Sixth and seventh digits

optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates
that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical
power is -8 dBm.
B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1

The characteristic code for the OAU1 board contains eight characters and digits, indicating the
Table B-19 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Is always G.
Second to fifth digits
Gain range
Indicates the range within

which the gain can be
continuously adjusted.
Sixth character
Is always I.

optical power
Indicates the maximum

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates
that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input
optical power is 0 dBm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2368
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1

gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
Table B-20 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

G.
Gain

Fourth character

always I.

optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.
B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2

Table B-21 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

G.
Gain

Fourth character

always I.

optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2369
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.6.5 Characteristic Code for the CRPC

The characteristic code for the CRPC board contains one character and two digits, indicating
the gain of the optical signals processed by the board.
Table B-22 Characteristic code for the CRPC board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Is always G.
Two digits
Gain
Indicate the gain value.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.
B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit

The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals
processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and
the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.
B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40

The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
Table B-23 Characteristic code for the D40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Code
Meaning
Description
The first character
Band


wavelengths.

2370
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V

The characteristic code for the D40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
Table B-24 Characteristic code for the D40V board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU

The characteristic code for the DFIU board contains one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
Table B-25 Characteristic code for the DFIU board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band; the value L
represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical
signals are in C band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2371
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU

The characteristic code for the FIU board consists of one character. The character indicates the
band adopted by the board.
Table B-26 Characteristic code for the FIU board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band; the value L
represents L band.
C band.
B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL

The characteristic code for the ITL board contains one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
Table B-27 Characteristic code for the ITL board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band.
For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals
are in C band.
B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40

The characteristic code for the M40 board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2372
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-28 Characteristic code for the M40 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V

The characteristic code for the M40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
Table B-29 Characteristic code for the M40V board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and
even wavelengths.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2373
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit

The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection
switching time.
B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP

The characteristic code for the DCP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
Table B-30 Characteristic code for the DCP board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.
Maximum protection
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that
the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP

The characteristic code for the OLP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
Table B-31 Characteristic code for the OLP board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.
Maximum protection
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS

The characteristic code for the SCS board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2374
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-32 Characteristic code for the SCS board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.
Maximum protection
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.
B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA

The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals
B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1

Table B-33 Characteristic code for the VA1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
Digits 1 through 3
Attenuation value

attenuation.
maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2375
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-34 Characteristic code for the VA4 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First to third digits
Attenuation value

attenuation.
maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit

The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with,
the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.
B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU

The characteristic code for the DCU board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber
Table B-35 Characteristic code for the DCU board
Code
Meaning
Description
Fiber type
Type of the fiber that the

DCU board works with
distance

compensation
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates
that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance
is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to
separate each distance.
B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU

The characteristic code for the GFU board contains two characters and two digits, indicating the
gradient of optical signals processed by the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2376
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-36 Characteristic code for the GFU board

Code
Meaning
Description
First and second characters
The first and second

characters are always GF.
Gradient
Indicate the gradient of

optical signals.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11GFU board is GF10. This code indicates that
the gradient of optical signals processed by the board is 10.
B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC

The characteristic code for the TDC board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber
Table B-37 Characteristic code for the TDC board
Code
Meaning
Description
Fiber type
Fiber type that the TDC

board is compatible with
distance

compensation
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that
the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is
tunable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2377
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

C Quick Reference Table of the Units
Quick Reference Table of the Units
Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical
amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards.
C.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification
The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards
include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
C.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification
The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range,
channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output
power of a single wavelength.
C.3 Other Unit Specification
The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board.
C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio
Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory
signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service
performance monitoring of the optical signals.
C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are
wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different types of loopback.
C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function.
C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2378
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

C.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification

The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards
include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
C.1.1 OTUs and Tributary Boards Specification on the Client Side

The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU) include the access
service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
Table C-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTU boards
Board Name
TN11ECOM
TN11L4G
Access
Service Type
FE
GE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
100 BASEFX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
100 BASEFX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
100 BASEFX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
2379
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN11LDGD
TN11LDGS
GE
GE
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
-19
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Optical
Module
Type

eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
2380
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN12LDM
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical
Module
Type

eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
2381
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN11LDMD
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
-19
-3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km

eSFP
CWDM
2382
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN11LDMS
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2383
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN12LDX
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Minim
um
(dBm)
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
OC-192/
STM-64/
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
OTU2/ OTU2e
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
-24.0
-7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

eSFP
CWDM
2384
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN11LEM24
Access
Service Type
TN11LOA
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
800 ps/nm-C
Band (Odd &
Even
Wavelengths)Fixed
WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
-3
16
1000BASESX, I-850-LC
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000BASELX, I-1310-LC
-3
-9.5
-20
-3
10GBASE-SR
(SFP+)
-1
-7.3
-11.1
-1
10GBASE-LR
(SFP+)
0.5
-8.2
-14.4
0.5
10GBASE-ER/
EW (SFP+)
-4.7
-14.1
-1
10GBASE-SR
(SFP+)
-1
-7.3
-11.1
-1
10GBASE-LR
(SFP+)
0.5
-8.2
-14.4
0.5
10GBASE-ER/
EW (SFP+)
-4.7
-14.1
-1
FC200/GE/
FC100/FDDI/
FICON/
FICON
Express/FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
FE/GE
10GE WAN/
10GE LAN
TN11LEX4
10GE WAN/
10GE LAN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
SFP+
SFP+
eSFP
2385
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
FDDI/FICON/
FE/DVB-ASI
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/FDDI/
FICON/
FICON
Express/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI/FE
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
SDI/HD-SDI/
3G-SDI
270 Mbit/s to 3
Gbit/s multirate
(Video
eSFP)-10 km
-7
-16
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
FDDI/FICON/
FE/DVB-ASI
5
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/FDDI/
FICON/
FICON
Express/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI/FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
CWDM
2386
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN11LOG
TN12LOG
TN11LOM
TN12LOM
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/FDDI/
FICON/
FICON
Express/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI/FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC400
Multirate
-7
-15
SFP+
FC800
1600-M5E-SNI (SFP+)
-1
-7
-7.5
-1
1600-M5E-SNI (SFP+)
-1
-6
-14.4
0.5
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-9.5
-17
GE
GE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
-2.5

eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
2387
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
FC 100/ FC
200/ FC 400/
FICON/
FICON
Express
GE/ FC 100/
FC 200
TN11LQG
GE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
FC400/
FICON4G
Module
(Multimode)
-1
-9
-14
FC400/
FICON4G
Module (Single
mode)
-2
-8
-16
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express
Module
(Multimode)
-2.5
-9.5
-17
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express
Module (Single
mode)
-3
-10
-18
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
2388
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN13LQM
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
-19
-3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
2389
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN11LQMD
TN12LQMD
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
OTU1b/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2390
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN11LQMS
TN12LQMS
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Minim
um
(dBm)
FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
OTU1b/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

eSFP
CWDM
2391
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
-2
-28
-9
Optical
Module
Type
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
L-16.2
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
TN11LSQ
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
40G
Transponder
-6
TN11LSX
OC-192/
STM-64/
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
OTU2/
FC1200a
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
TN12LSX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

eSFP
CWDM
2392
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN13LSX
Access
Service Type
OC-192/
STM-64/
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
OTU2/
FC1200a
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
-24.0
-7
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
-24.0
-7
800 ps/nm-C
Band (Odd &
Even
Wavelengths)Fixed
-3
16
Optical
Module
Type
XFP
TN11LSXL
STM-256/
OC-768
40G
Transponder
-6
TN12LSXL
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
40G
Transponder
-6
TN11LWX2
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2393
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
TN11LWXD
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
Optical
Module
Type
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

eSFP
CWDM
2394
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN11LWXS
TN12LWXS
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Minim
um
(dBm)
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
ETR/ CLOc/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
-19
-3
ETR/ CLO/
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km

eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
CWDM
2395
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN11TMX
TN12TMX
TN11TBE
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Minim
um
(dBm)
ETR/ CLO/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
ETR/ CLO/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
STM-16/
OC-48/ OTU1
(without FEC)
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
eSFP
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
3
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
100 BASEFX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
eSFP
100 BASEFX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
FE
GE/ 10GE
LAN/ 10GE
WAN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2396
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
FE/ GE/ 10GE

LAN/ 10GE
WAN
TN11TDG
GE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
-24
-7
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3

Optical
Module
Type
XFP
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
2397
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
TN12TDX
TN52TDX
TN53TDX
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/OTU2e
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e/
FC800/
FC1200/
CBR_10G
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
-2
-22
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
-24
-7
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
1000 BASEZX-80 km
TN11TDX
Mean Launched
Optical Power

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
CWDM
XFP
XFP
2398
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN54THA
TN54TOA
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
-24
-7
800 ps/nm-C
Band (Odd &
Even
Wavelengths)Fixed
-3
-16
OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI/FE
S-16.1
-5
-18
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/FE/
DVB-ASI
1000BASELX-10km
(I-1310-LC)
-3
-9.5
-20
-3
OTU1/
STM-16/
OC-48/FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
OC-12/
ESCON/
STM-1/OC-3/
DVB-ASI/FE
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
FC200/FC100/
FE/GE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
eSFP
2399
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
ESCON/
STM-1/FE/
DVB-ASI
TN52TOG
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
Optical
Module
Type
GE/FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVBASI/FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/FC100/
GE/STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/DVBASI/FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
SDI/HD-SDI
270 Mbit/s to 3
Gbit/s multirate
(Video
eSFP)-10 km
-7
-16
Video
eSFP
GE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

eSFP
CWDM
2400
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN11TOM
TN52TOM
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical
Module
Type

eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
2401
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
TN11TQM
TN12TQM
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
SDI
1.5 Gbit/s
Multirate
(Video
eSFP)-20 km
-7
-22
eSFP
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
-19
-3
OTU1b/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1.25 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km

eSFP
CWDM
2402
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access
Service Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Minim
um
(dBm)
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
5
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
TN12TQM
OTU1/
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
TN11TQS
STM-16/
OC-48/ OTU1
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
eSFP
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
2.67 Gbit/s
5
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
3
Multirate (eSFP
DWDM)-120
km
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
TN11TQX
TN52TQX
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
-1

2403
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN53TQX
TN55TQX
TN11TSXL
Access
Service Type
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2
/CBR_10G/
FC800/
FC1200
STM-256/
OC-768
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
-24
-7
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(STM64
)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10 Gbit/s Single
Rate -0.3 km
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
-24
-7
800 ps/nm-C
Band (Odd &
Even
Wavelengths)Fixed
-3
-16
40G
Transponder
-6

Optical
Module
Type
XFP
2404
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN53TSXL
Access
Service Type
STM-256/
OC-768/OTU3
Optical Module
Optical
Interface
Type
Supported
40G
Transponder
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minim
um
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
-6
Optical
Module
Type
a: Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX supports FC1200 service.

b: Only TN12LQMD/TN12LQMS/TN12TQM support OTU1 service.
c: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.
C.1.2 OTUs and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side

The main WDM-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards
and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module
type.
Table C-2 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards
Board
Name
TN11L4
G
TN11LD
GD
Access
Service
Type
OTU 5G
STM-16/
OTU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-2
-25
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-3
-25
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-4
-8
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-4
-8
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-5
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-5
-28
-9

2405
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11LD
GS
Access
Service
Type
STM-16/
OTU1
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
(Four Channels-Tunable)
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-1
-5
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-1
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-2
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-2
-28
-9
-2
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-2
-28
-9
TN12LD
M
OTU1

DWDM)-120 km
-28
-9
TN11LD
MD
OTU1

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-4
-8
-28
-9
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-1
-5
-28
-9
-2
-28
-9
TN11LD
MS
OTU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2406
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN12LD
X
TN11LE
M24
TN11LE
X4
TN11LO
A
TN11LO
G
Access
Service
Type
OTU2/
OTU2e
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-2
-28
-9
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd &

Even Wavelengths)-Fixed
-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd &

even wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-ODB-APD
-3
-26
-9

2407
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN12LO
G
TN11LO
M
TN12LO
M
TN11LQ
G
Access
Service
Type
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
FEC 5G/
OTU5G
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-ODB-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-2
-25
-9

2408
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-3
-25
-9
TN13LQ
M
OTU1

DWDM)-120 km
-28
-9
TN11LQ
MD
OTU1

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-4
-8
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-4
-8
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-5
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-5
-28
-9
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-4
-8
-28
-9
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-1
-5
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-1
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-2
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-2
-28
-9
TN12LQ
MD
TN11LQ
MS
OTU1
OTU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2409
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN12LQ
MS
TN11LS
Q
TN11LS
X
TN12LS
X
TN13LS
X
Access
Service
Type
OTU1
OTU3
OTU2/
OTU2e
OTU2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
-2
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-2
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-1
-5
-28
-9
-2
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-2
-28
-9

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
-5
-16

-5
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-ODB-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

2410
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11LS
XL
TN12LS
XL
TN11LS
XLR
TN12LS
XLR
TN11LS
XR
Access
Service
Type
OTU3
OTU3
OTU3
OTU3/
OTU3e
OTU2/
OTU2e
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)

-3
-16

-3
-16

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
-5
-16

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-5
-16

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
-5
-16

-5
-16

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
-5
-16

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-5
-16

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
-5
-16

-5
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-ODB-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

2411
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11LW
X2
TN11LW
XD
TN11LW
XS
TN12LW
XSb
Access
Service
Type
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
DVB-ASI/
FE
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
DVB-ASI/
FE
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
DVB-ASI/
FE/ ETR/
CLO
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)

Wavelength-NRZ-PINa
-1
-5
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APDa
-1
-5
-28

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-2
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-2
-26
-10

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-2
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PINa
-4
-8
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APDa
-4
-8
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-5
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-5
-26
-10
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PINa
-1
-5
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APDa
-1
-5
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-2
-18

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-2
-26
-10

2412
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11TM
X
TN12TM
X
TN11ND
2
Access
Service
Type
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2/
OTU2e
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
-2
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-2
-28
-9

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-ODB-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

Even Wavelength)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

2413
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN12ND
2
TN52ND
2
TN53ND
2
Access
Service
Type
OTU2/
OTU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN51NQ
2/
TN52NQ
2/
TN53NQ
2/
TN54NQ
2
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN11NS
2
OTU2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-3
-26
-9

2414
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN12NS
2
TN52NS
2
TN53NS
2
Access
Service
Type
OTU2/
OTU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
OTU2/
OTU2e
TN11NS
3/
TN52NS
3
OTU3/
OTU3e
TN54NS
3
OTU3/
OTU3e
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)

Wavelength-ODB-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-ODB-APD
-3
-26
-9

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

-3
-16

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
-3
-16

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
-3
-16

-3
-16

-3
-16

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
-5
-16

-5
-16

Wavelength-ODB-PIN
-5
-16

2415
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported

Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m (dBm)
-5
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Receiver
Overload
(dBm)
-16
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
b: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/ CLO services.
Table C-3 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards
Board
Name
TN11EC
OM
Access
Service
Type
GE
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)

CWDM)-40 km
-19
-3

CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
TN11LD
GD
STM-16/
OTU1
1600 ps/nm-CWDM BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD
-0.5
-28
-9
TN11LD
GS
STM-16/
OTU1
2.5
-28
-9
TN12LD
M
OTU1

CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
TN11LQ
G
FEC 5G/
OTU5G
5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP

CWDM)-50 km
-18
5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP

CWDM)-70 km
-28
-9
TN13LQ
M
OTU1

CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
TN11LQ
MD
OTU1
-0.5
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2416
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Access
Service
Type
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
TN11LQ
MS
OTU1
2.5
-28
-9
TN11LW
X2
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
SDI/ FE
2.5
-28
-9
TN11LW
XD
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
SDI/ FE
-0.5
-28
-9
TN11LW
XS
STM-16/
FC200/
FC100/
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
SDI/ FE/
ETR/ CLO
2.5
-28
-9
TN12LW
XSa
a: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/ CLO services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2417
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table C-4 Quick reference table for specifications of WDM-side gray optical modules on OTU boards
Board
Name
TN11LE
M24
TN11LE
X4
Access
Service
Type
OTU2
OTU2
TN11LO
A
OTU2
TN12LO
G
OTU2
TN12TM
X
TN12ND
2
OTU2
OTU2
TN53ND
2
OTU2
TN51NQ
2
OTU2
TN52NQ
2/
TN53NQ
2/
TN54NQ
2
OTU2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
-1
-6
-11
-1
-1
-14
-1
-24
-7
-1
-6
-11
-1
-1
-14
-1
-24
-7
-1
-6
-11
-1
-1
-14
-1
-1
-6
-11
-1
-1
-14
-1
-24
-7
-1
-6
-11
-1
-1
-14
-1
-24
-7
-1
-6
-11
-1
-1
-14
-1
-24
-7
-1
-6
-11
-1
-1
-14
-1
-1
-6
-11
-1
-1
-14
-1
-24
-7
-1
-6
-11
-1
-1
-14
-1

2418
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN53NS2
Access
Service
Type
OTU2
Optical Module
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
-1
-6
-11
-1
-1
-14
-1
C.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification

The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range,
channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output
power of a single wavelength.
Table C-5 Quick reference table for optical amplifier unit
Board
Name
OAU100
DAS1/
OAU101
OAU102
OAU103
OAU105
Channel
Gain (dB)
16 to 25.5
20 to 31
20 to 31
24 to 36
23 to 34
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Nomin
al
Chann
el Gain
(dB)
Input Power Range per Channel

(dBm)
Typical Input Power of a

Single Wavelength (dBm)
40 channels
80 channels
40 channels
80 channels
16
-32 to -14
-32 to -17
-14
-17
22
-32 to -20
-32 to -23
-20
-23
25.5
-32 to -23.5
-32 to -27.5
-23.5
-27.5
20
-32 to -16
-32 to -19
-16
-19
26
-32 to -22
-32 to -25
-22
-25
31
-32 to -27
-32 to -30
-27
-30
20
-32 to -19
-32 to -22
-19
-22
26
-32 to -25
-32 to -28
-25
-28
31
-32 to -30
-32
-30
-32
24
-32 to -20
-32 to -23
-20
-23
29
-32 to -25
-32 to -28
-25
-28
36
-32
-32
-32
-32
23
-32 to -16
-32 to -19
-16
-19
30
-32 to -23
-32 to -26
-23
-26
34
-32 to -27
-32 to -30
-27
-30

2419
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Channel
Gain (dB)
Nomin
al
Chann
el Gain
(dB)
Input Power Range per Channel

(dBm)
Typical Input Power of a

Single Wavelength (dBm)
40 channels
80 channels
40 channels
80 channels
OBU101
201.5
20
-32 to -20
-32 to -23
-20
-23
OBU103
231.5
23
-32 to -19
-32 to -22
-19
-22
OBU104
171.5
17
-32 to -17
-32 to -20
-17
-20
OBU205
231.5
23
-24 to -16
-24 to -19
-16
-19
Table C-6 Quick reference table for TN12OBU1P1

Board Name
Total input power range at the

VI optical port(dBm)

power(dBm)
TN12OBU1P1
-30 to 7
Table C-7 Quick reference table for CRPC

Board Name
Channel Gain (dB)
Maximum Pump Power

(dBm)
G.652 fiber
LEAF fiber
CRPC01
10
12
29
CRPC03
>10
NA
29.5
Table C-8 Quick reference table for HBA

Board
Name
HBA
Channel
Gain (dB)
291
Typical Input Power of a Single

Wavelength (dBm)
80
channels
40
channels
10
channels
Nominal
Input
Power
Range
(dBm)
-22
-19
-13
-25 to -3
Channel Allocation
(nm)
1529 to 1561
C.3 Other Unit Specification

The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2420
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table C-9 Quick reference table for specifications of other boards

Board Name
Insertion Loss (dB)
TN11MR2/TN21MR2
IN-MO
1.0
MI-OUT
TN11MR4/TN21MR4
Add/drop channel
1.5
IN-MO
1.5
MI-OUT
TN11MR8
Add/drop channel
2.2
IN-MO
3.5
MI-OUT
TN11MR8V
Add/drop channel
IN-MO
MI-OUT
TN21CMR1
TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2
Add/drop channel
4.5
IN-MO
MI-OUT
0.8
Add/drop channel
IN-MO
1.0
MI-OUT
TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4
Add/drop channel
1.5
IN-MO
1.0
MI-OUT
TN11DMR1/
TN21DMR1
Add/drop channel
EIN-EMO
0.8
EMI-EOUT
WIN-WMO
WMI-WOUT
Add/drop channel
TN11SBM2
Add/drop channel
TN11D40/TN12D40
6.5
TN11D40V
8a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2421
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Insertion Loss (dB)
TN21DFIU
EIN-ETM
1.5
ERM-EOUT
WIN-WTM
WRM-WOUT
EIN-ETC
ERC-EOUT
WIN-WTC
WRC-WOUT
TN11FIU/TN12FIU/
TN13FIU/TN21FIU
IN-TM
1.5
RM-OUT
IN-TC
RC-OUT
TN11SFIU
LINE1-SYS1
1.0
LINE2-SYS2
LINE1-OSC1
1.5
LINE1-OSC2
TN11ITL01
RE-OUT
<4.5
RO-OUT
IN-TE
<2.5
IN-TO
TN11ITL04
RE-OUT
<3
RO-OUT
IN-TE
<3
IN-TO
TN12ITL
RE-OUT
<4.5
RO-OUT
IN-TE
<3.5
IN-TO
TN11M40/TN12M40
6.5
TN11M40V/TN12M40V
8a
TN11DCP
Transmit-end insertion
loss
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Single mode 4
Multimode 4.5

2422
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Insertion Loss (dB)

Receive-end insertion loss
Single mode 1.5

Multimode 2
TN12DCP
TN11OLP
loss
Single mode 4
Single mode 1.5
loss
Single mode 4
Single mode 1.5
Multimode 4.5
Multimode 2
TN12OLP
TN11SCS
TN11RDU9
loss
Single mode
Multimode
1.5
Wavelength dropping
insertion loss
Single mode
Multimode
4.5
Wavelength adding
insertion loss
Single mode
Multimode
4.5
IN-Drop(DM1-DM8)
12.5
ROA-Drop(DM1-DM8)
11.5
IN-EXPO
12.5
IN-TOA
EXPI-OUT
8.5
AMxb-TOA
12.5a
ROA-OUT
1.5
Mxc-OUT
9a
IN-DM
EXPI-OUT
14a
IN-EXPO
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9/TN13WSD9
IN-DMxd
8a
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9/
TN13WSM9
AMxb-OUT
TN11RMU9
TN11ROAM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
IN-EXPO
8a
EXPI-OUT

2423
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Insertion Loss (dB)
TN11WSMD2
AMxb-OUT
8a
IN-DMxd
4.5
TN11WSMD4/
TN12WSMD4
AMxb-OUT
8a
TN11WSMD9
AMxb/EXPI-OUT
8a
IN-DMxd/EXPO
12
IN-DMxd
a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB.

b: AMx denotes AM1-AM8.
c: Mx denotes M1-M40.
d: DMx denotes DM1-DM8.
C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio

Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory
signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service
performance monitoring of the optical signals.
Table C-10 lists the ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals
of each type of board.
Table C-10 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board
Board Name
Ratio of MON Interface to Received

Signal in Main Path
Ratio of MON Interface to

Transmitting Signal in Main Path
CRPC
"MON"/"SYS" = 1/99 (20 dB)
D40
"MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB)
D40V
"MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB)
DAS1
"MONR"/"SOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
"MONT"/"LOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
FIU
"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
HBA
"MON"/"OUT" = 1/999 (30 dB)
ITL
"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
M40
"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
M40V
"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
OAU1
"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
OBU1
"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2424
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Ratio of MON Interface to Received

Signal in Main Path
Ratio of MON Interface to

Transmitting Signal in Main Path
OBU2
"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
RDU9
"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)
RMU9
"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSD9
"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSM9
"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSMD2
"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSMD4
"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSMD9
"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line

Boards
The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are
wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table C-11.
Table C-11 Basic functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board
Name
Tun
able
Wav
elen
gth
Fun
ctio
n
ESC
Func
tion
ALS
Func
tion
TN11EC
OM
TN11L4G
TN11LD
GD
TN11LD
GS
OTN
Func
tion
FEC Encoding
WDM
Specificatio
n
Opti
cal
Mod
ule
PRB
S on
the
Clie
nt
Side
PRB
S on
the
WD
M
Side
FEC
AFE
C
AFE
C-2
DW
DM
CW
DM
eSFP
eSFP
eSFP
eSFP
TN11LD
M
eSFP
TN11LD
MD
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2425
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Tun
able
Wav
elen
gth
Fun
ctio
n
ESC
Func
tion
ALS
Func
tion
TN11LD
MS
TN12LD
X
TN11LE
M24
TN11LEX
4
OTN
Func
tion
FEC Encoding
WDM
Specificatio
n
Opti
cal
Mod
ule
PRB
S on
the
Clie
nt
Side
PRB
S on
the
WD
M
Side
FEC
AFE
C
AFE
C-2
DW
DM
CW
DM
eSFP
XFP
XFP/
SFP+
XFP/
SFP+
TN11LO
A
eSFP
/SFP
+
TN11LO
G
eSFP
TN12LO
G
eSFP
TN11LO
M
eSFP
TN12LO
M
eSFP
TN11LQ
G
eSFP
TN13LQ
M
eSFP
TN11LQ
MD
eSFP
TN12LQ
MD
eSFP
TN11LQ
MS
eSFP
TN12LQ
MS
eSFP
TN11LSQ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2426
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Tun
able
Wav
elen
gth
Fun
ctio
n
ESC
Func
tion
ALS
Func
tion
TN13LSX
TN11LSX
L
TN12LSX
L
TN11LSX
LR
OTN
Func
tion
FEC Encoding
WDM
Specificatio
n
Opti
cal
Mod
ule
PRB
S on
the
Clie
nt
Side
PRB
S on
the
WD
M
Side
FEC
AFE
C
AFE
C-2
DW
DM
CW
DM
XFP
XFP
TN11LSX
R
XFP
TN11LW
X2
eSFP
TN11LW
XD
eSFP
TN11LW
XS
eSFP
TN11TM
X
eSFP
TN12TM
X
eSFP
TN11ND2
TN12ND2
XFP
TN52ND2
TN53ND2
XFP
TN51NQ2
XFP
TN52NQ2
XFP
TN11LSX
TN12LSX
TN12LSX
LR
TN12LW
XS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2427
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Tun
able
Wav
elen
gth
Fun
ctio
n
ESC
Func
tion
ALS
Func
tion
TN53NQ2
TN54NQ2
TN11NS2
TN52NS2
OTN
Func
tion
FEC Encoding
WDM
Specificatio
n
Opti
cal
Mod
ule
PRB
S on
the
Clie
nt
Side
PRB
S on
the
WD
M
Side
FEC
AFE
C
AFE
C-2
DW
DM
CW
DM
XFP
XFP
TN53NS2
XFP
TN11NS3
TN54NS3
TN11TBE
eSFP
XFP
TN11TD
G
eSFP
TN11TD
X
eSFP
TN53TD
X
XFP
TN54TH
A
eSFP
TN54TO
A
eSFP
TN11TO
M
eSFP
eSFP
TN12NS2
TN52NS3
TN12TD
X
TN52TD
X
TN52TO
M
TN11TQ
M
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2428
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Tun
able
Wav
elen
gth
Fun
ctio
n
ESC
Func
tion
ALS
Func
tion
TN12TQ
M
TN11TQS
TN11TQ
X
TN55TQ
X
OTN
Func
tion
FEC Encoding
WDM
Specificatio
n
Opti
cal
Mod
ule
PRB
S on
the
Clie
nt
Side
PRB
S on
the
WD
M
Side
FEC
AFE
C
AFE
C-2
DW
DM
CW
DM
eSFP
eSFP
XFP
XFP
TN11TSX
L
TN53TSX
L
TN52TO
G
eSFP
TN52TQ
X
TN53TQ
X
NOTE
l "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function
l The SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information
about the modules can be obtained through a query on the U2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface.
l The boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other.
C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line

Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different types of loopback.
Table C-12 Loopback function of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board Name
Client-Side
Inloop
Client-Side
Outloop
WDM-Side
Inloop
WDM-Side
Outloop
Channel
loopback
ECOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2429
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Client-Side
Inloop
Client-Side
Outloop
WDM-Side
Inloop
WDM-Side
Outloop
Channel
loopback
LDGD
LDGS
LDM
LDMD
LDMS
LDX
LOA
LOG
LOM
LQG
LQM
LQMD
LQMS
LSQ
LSX
TN11LSXL
TN12LSXL
LSXLR
LSXR
LWX2
LWXD
LWXS
TMX
ND2
NQ2
NS2
NS3
TDG
TDX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2430
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Client-Side
Inloop
Client-Side
Outloop
WDM-Side
Inloop
WDM-Side
Outloop
Channel
loopback
THA
TOA
TOG
TN11TOM
TN52TOM
TQM
TQS
TQX
TSXL
NOTE
"Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line

Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function.
For detailed protection mode, refer to Table C-13.
Table C-13 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
ntSide
1+1
Prote
ction
IntraBoard
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
ECOM
L4G
LDGD
LDGS
LDM
LDMD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2431
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
ntSide
1+1
Prote
ction
IntraBoard
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
LDMS
LDX
LEM24
LEX4
LOA
LOG
LOM
LQG
LQM
LQMD
LQMS
LSQ
LSX
LSXL
Ya
LSXLR
LSXR
LWX2
LWXD
LWXS
TMX
ND2
NQ2
NS2
NS3
TBE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2432
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
ntSide
1+1
Prote
ction
IntraBoard
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
TDG
TDX
TEM28
THA
TOA
TOG
TOM
TQM
TQS
TQX
TSXL
NOTE
a: The TN11LSXL does not support intra-board 1+1 protection.
NOTE
"Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards

and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection.
For detailed electrical cross-connection functions, refer to Table C-14, Table C-15 and Table
C-16.
Table C-14 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 8800
Board Name
Electrical Cross-Connection
LDM
LDMD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2433
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
LDMS
LDX
LEM24
LEX4
LOA
LOG
LOM
LQM
LQMD
LQMS
LSQ
LSX
LSXL
LSXLR
LSXR
LWXS
TMX
ND2
16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e

NOTE
Only the TN53ND2 supports ODUflex.
NQ2
32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/8 x ODUflex//4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

NOTE
Only the TN53NQ2 supports ODUflex.
NS2
8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1/2 x ODUflex/1 x ODU2/1 x ODU2e

NOTE
Only the TN53NS2 supports ODUflex.
NS3
32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/1 x ODU3/1 x ODU3e

NOTE
Only the TN54NS3 supports ODU3/ODU3e.
TDX
2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e/2x ODUflex

NOTE
Only the TN53TDX supports ODUflex.
THA
32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1
TOA
16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2434
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TOM
8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1
TQX
4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/4 x ODUflex

NOTE
Only the TN55TQX supports ODUflex.
TOG
8 x ODU0
TSXL
1 x ODU3
"N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
Board Name
Integrated Cross-Connection
Distributed Cross-Connection
ECOM
1 x GE
1 x GE
L4G
4 x GE
4 x GE
LDGD
2 x GE
2 x GE
LDGS
2 x GE
2 x GE
LDM
LDMD
LDMS
LDX
LEM24
2 x 10GE
LEX4
2 x 10GE
LOA
LOG
8 x GE
8 x GE
LOM
LQG
4 x GE
4 x GE
LQM
4 x GE
4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1
LQMD
4 x GE
LQMS
4 x GE/1 x ODU1
LSQ
LSX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2435
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Integrated Cross-Connection
Distributed Cross-Connection
LSXL
LSXLR
LSXR
LWX2
LWXD
LWXS
TMX
ND2
8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e
NQ2
NS2
4 x ODU1
NOTE
It is supported by TN11NS2.
NS3
4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e
TBE
16 x GE
TDG
2 x GE/1 x ODU1
2 x GE/1 x ODU1
TDX
8 x ODU1
TOG
4 x ODU1
4 x ODU1/
TN11TOM
8 x GE/4 x ODU1
8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any/4 x ODU1
TN52TOM
4 x ODU1
8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any
TQM
4 x GE/1 x ODU1
4 x GE/4 x Any/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1
TQS
4 x ODU1
4 x ODU1
TQX
4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e
TSXL
4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e
Board Name
ECOM
1 x GE
L4G
4 x GE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2436
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
LDGD
2 x GE
LDGS
2 x GE
LDM
LDMD
LDMS
LDX
LOA
LOG
8 x GE
LOM
LQG
4 x GE
LQM
4 x Any/4 x GE
LQMD
4 x Any/4 x GE
LQMS
4 x Any/4 x GE
LSX
LSXR
LWX2
LWXD
LWXS
TMX
NS2
4 x ODU1
TBE
16 x GE
TDG
2 x GE/1 x ODU1
TDX
8 x ODU1
TOG
4 x ODU1
TOM
8 x GE/8 x Any/4 x ODU1
TQM
4 x Any/1 x ODU1
TQS
4 x ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2437
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D Parameter Reference
Parameter Reference
D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface)

D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)
D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface)
D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)
D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)
D.7 Default VLAN ID
D.8 Enabled/Disabled
D.9 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
D.10 Enabling LCAS
D.11 Entry Detection
D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)
D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface)
D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)
D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface)
D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.18 Hardware REG Enabled
D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM
Interface)
D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface)
D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m)
D.22 Laser-in-Position Status
D.23 LCAS Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2438
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.24 Line Rate

D.25 Loop Detection
D.26 Loop Port Shutdown
D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface)
D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface)
D.29 MAC Loopback
D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.31 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)
D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.34 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.35 Min. Members-Transmit Direction
D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface)
D.37 MSP Sharing
D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.41 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface)
D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface)
D.44 PHY Loopback
D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)
D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface)
D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)
D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)
D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)
D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface)
D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.53 Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.54 TSD
D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.56 VLAN Priority
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2439
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2440
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface)

Description
The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the
This parameter is applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.
Impact on the System

If the automatic laser shutdown function is enabled, the services of the optical interface may be
interrupted.
Values
OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for

WDM-side optical interfaces.
The following table lists the description of each value.

Value
Description
Enabled
After the received signal is lost, the laser is automatically shut

down and stops emitting optical signals. This can prolong the
life span of the laser and avoid injuries to relevant personnel.
l If automatic laser shutdown is enabled for a transmitting
port on the client side of an OTU board, the laser on the
transmitting port will be automatically shut down when the
corresponding port on the WDM side of the board receives
no signal or detects SF. In addition, the laser on the
transmitting port of the local OTU board will be
automatically shut down when the corresponding
receiving port on the opposite OTU board receives no
signal.
After the received signal is lost, the laser is not shut down
automatically. The parameter is usually set to Disabled during
commissioning.
Disabled
Configuration Guidelines
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
In the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800:
2441
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Only the LWX2, LWXD and LWXS support the Automatic Laser Shutdown function of
the WDM side.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 doesn't support the LWX2 and LWXD boards.
Relationship with Other Parameters

None.
D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)

Description
The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service
application scenario.

The signal flow, work mode, and functions of a board vary with the board mode. Therefore,
switching between different board modes interrupts the active services.
Values
The following table lists the work modes of the ECOM board.
Value Range
Default Value
Service Mode, HUB Mode
HUB Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the ECOM board.
Parameter Value
Remarks
Service Mode
Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x GE service.
HUB Mode
Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x FE service.
The following table lists the work modes of the TN12LQMS board.
Value Range
Default Value
NS1 Mode, LQM Mode
LQM Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12LQMS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2442
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Parameter Value
Remarks
NS1 Mode
As a line board, this board adds and drops OTU1 signals in

conjunction with another tributary board.
LQM Mode
As a tributary/line integrated board, this board converges four

channels of Any signals into a channel of OTU1 signals.
NOTE
The NS1 Mode field is valid only when the TN12LQMS board is housed in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
or OptiX OSN 3800 subrack.
The following table lists the work modes of the TN11TOM.

Value Range
Default Value
Cascading Mode, Non-cascading Mode
Non-cascading Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11TOM.
Parameter Value
Remarks
Cascading Mode
Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM side

optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to six
channels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals.
Non-cascading Mode
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

The board supports multiplexing up to four channels of Any
signals into two channels of OTU1 signals.
The following table lists the work modes of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/TN12LSXLR.

Value Range
Default Value
Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode
Electrical Relay Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/
TN12LSXLR.
Parameter Value
Remarks
In the case of an optical-layer system, however, the

Optical Relay Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2443
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The following table lists the work modes of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/

TN54NQ2/TN54NS3.
Value Range
Default Value
Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical

Relay Mode
Line Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/
TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3.
Parameter Value
Remarks
Line Mode
The board works as a line board.
The board works as a wavelength conversion relay unit.

In the case of an optical-layer system, however, the
Optical Relay Mode
Select the board mode according to the actual service application scenario.

None.
D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

Description
The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcast
traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded.

After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the flow of broadcast packets will be limited
according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified
threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.
Values
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value Range
Default Value
10%-100%
30%

2444
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
10%
Indicates that the broadcast packets can

account for a maximum of 10% of the
bandwidth of a port.
20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%


This parameter is available only when Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to
Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2445
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface)

Description
The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board.
The value can be set.
Applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.

When it is set to Unused, no alarm on the optical interface is reported.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Used, Unused
Used

Value
Description
Used
Indicates that the current channel is used.
Unused
Indicates that the current channel is not used.
l
This parameter is set to Used by default.
Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment.
When a channel is not used, you need to disable the laser of the channel. Otherwise, the
laser forcibly enabled alarm may be reported.
D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical
interface on the client side of a board.
This parameter applies to the client side of the optical transponder board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2446
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set
value.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
The specific value range is

related to the board.
The specific value is related

to the board.
Mbit/s
The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services
is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services.

None.
D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) parameter provides an option to query the rate of services
accessed at the optical interface on the client side for the OTUs at any rate.
Applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.

None.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
16-2500
Mbit/s
None.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2447
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.7 Default VLAN ID

Description
The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged
packets.

The default VLAN ID of a packet will be stripped when it traverses a HYBRID port.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
1-4095
None.

None.
D.8 Enabled/Disabled
Description
The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive
services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to
Disabled.

The attributes of a port take effect only after the port is enabled. If a port is disabled, the attributes
of the port will be invalid and the service at this port will be interrupted.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2448
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
Enabled
Enables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the

port take effect.
Disabled
Disables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the

port becomes invalid and the service at the port is interrupted.
None.

None.
D.9 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression

Description
The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the
traffic of broadcast packets.

After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be limited
according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified
threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Disabled, Enabled
Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
Description
Enabled
Indicates that the traffic of broadcast packets

is not limited.
Disabled
Indicates that excess broadcast packets will

be discarded if the traffic of broadcast packets
exceeds the specified threshold.

2449
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Set this parameter only when you need to limit the traffic of broadcast services.

Suppression of broadcast packets is implemented only when this parameter is set to Enabled.
D.10 Enabling LCAS

Description
The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without
affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is
automatically increased if the member recovers.

As a bidirectional protocol, the LCAS can work normally only when some bandwidth is available
in the bidirectional physical paths. If the bandwidth is available in the unidirectional physical
paths only, the LCAS may fail to correctly adjust the bandwidth.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled

Value
Description
Disabled
Disables the LCAS protocol.
Enabled
Enables the LCAS protocol.
You can set Enabling LCAS as required.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2450
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.11 Entry Detection

Description
The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled

Value
Description
Enabled
Enables a port to detect packets by tag identifier.
Disabled
Disables a port to detect packets by tag identifier. In this case,

all packets can traverse the port.
None.

The entry detection states at the ingress and egress ports of a service must be the same.
D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)

Description
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2451
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Values
Value Range
Default Value
Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex
Vary with different boards
l
This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to Ethernet service.
The Ethernet working mode must be consistent with the mode set for the upstream services
of the customer.
If two ports are mutually protected, the Ethernet working mode must be consistent on the
active and standby ports.

None.
D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface)

Description
A flow control mechanism is applied between FC service client-side equipment and between
two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching function of FC services, which ensures that the
bandwidth does not decrease during long haul transmission of FC services. The FC Distance
Extension parameter indicates whether the FC distance extension function is enabled.

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Parameter Value
Remarks
Enabled
Indicates the FC distance extension function is enabled.
Disabled
Indicates the FC distance extension function is disabled.

2452
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

If the distance between the transmit and receive ends of FC services exceeds the maximum
transmission distance that the FC switch supports, the value of the parameter must be set to
Enabled.

This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to FC services.
D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)

Description
The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.

Different FEC modes have different capabilities of enhancing the SNR of the optical signal at
the receive end and support different extended distances of the repeater section.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
FEC, AFEC
Value
Description
FEC
Indicates a technology of coding error correction. It can

correct bit errors generated in signal transmission.
AFEC
Indicates a new technology of coding error correction. It is

suitable for correcting burst bit errors. The AFEC coding
technology has stronger error correction capabilities than the
FEC.
FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same.
According to the network design, set FEC Mode to a proper value.
In the case of expansion of an existing network or proper OSNR, FEC is recommended; in the
case of comparatively poor network performance and high OSNR requirement, AFEC is
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2453
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled.
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800, this parameter is automatically set to AFEC when you set
Service Type to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping to Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G).
D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface)

Description
The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error
correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface.

Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
The specific value is related to the board.

Value
Description
Enabled
Indicates enabling the FEC function of a board.
Disabled
Indicates disabling the FEC function of a board.
The FEC Working State parameter on the transmit end must be consistent with that on the
receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.
NOTE
Two OTUs with different FEC working states can be interconnected.
D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter sets or queries the output optical power of
an optical amplifier board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2454
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Changing the value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) directly influences the optical power
of each wavelength on the line.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
5 dBm-30 dBm (continuously tunable)
None.
Normally, the fixed pump optical power of the CRPC and ROP board should be larger than 23
dBm. The value is related to the system specifications.

Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) must be set within a range between Min. Fixed Pump
Optical Power (dBm) and Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm). If the fixed pump optical
power value is beyond the range, the board might work abnormally.
D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference
of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm).

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
20.0-40.0
None
dB
None.

This parameter is different from the Nominal Gain parameter. The Nominal Gain parameter
indicates the gain of the signal optical power, excluding the noise power. The Gain parameter,
however, is only related to the power and includes the noise power. Therefore, if the noise power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2455
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

occupies a large ratio and the input optical power is low, the gain queried exceeds the nominal
gain of the board.
D.18 Hardware REG Enabled

Description
The Hardware REG Enabled parameter provides an option for enabling or disabling the
hardware regeneration function.

After the hardware regeneration function is enabled, the service at an optical interface is affected.
Values
Valid Value
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled

Value
Description
Enabled
Optical signals are regenerated after being

received by the input optical interface, and
then they are directly sent to the downstream
board. This is similar to an outloop of the
signals between the input and output optical
interfaces.
Disabled
After receiving optical signals, an optical

interface processes the optical signals in a
usual way, like regenerating the signals and
processing the SDH overhead.
None.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2456
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and

Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter
provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary
and secondary input optical interfaces of a board.

l
In the OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800, this parameter functions
as the SD switching threshold reference value for optical line protection (OLP), OTU +
OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/DCP client-side 1+1 protection.
During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between
the primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching threshold, SD switching
occurs. The initial variance value is an important factor in calculating the optical power
variance and affects the service switching.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
-10.0 to 10.0
dB
After the optical power of the system is commissioned and is normal, set this parameter according
to the primary and secondary input optical power and the following formula:
Initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power = Initial input optical power
of the primary optical interface - Initial input optical power of the secondary optical interface

l
The setting of the initial variance affects the calculation of the variance between current
primary and secondary input optical power. The formula for calculating the variance
between current primary and secondary input optical power is as follows:
Variance between current primary and secondary input optical power = current input power
of the primary optical interface - current input power of the secondary optical interface initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power
If the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power exceeds the
value of the Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
parameter, the protection switching occurs.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2457
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface)

Description
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board.

This parameter directly determines whether the corresponding optical interface outputs optical
signals. If this parameter is set to Off, services are interrupted.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Value Range
Default Value
On, Off
For OTU boards:

l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
For amplifier board: On

Value
Description
On
Indicates enabling the laser.
Off
Indicates disabling the laser.
l
Optical wavelength conversion unit

The normal service requires that the lasers on both WDM side and client side should
be opened.
When installing and commissioning OTUs, you must set the Laser Status parameter
to Off to protect the downstream boards.
In the case of the OTUs configured with intra-board 1 + 1 optical channel protection or
client-side 1 + 1 protection, whether to enable or disable the laser on the board client
side is controlled by the NE software automatically. No manual setting is required.
Optical amplifier board

In the case of the CRPC board, you can set optical interface parameters only when the
laser is disabled.
NOTE
After the commissioning, you must set the Laser Status parameter to On.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2458
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In the case of the inter-board 1+1 protection and client-side protection realized by the SCS board, the lasers
on the active and standby OTUs on the client side are open and closed respectively in the case of normal
operation. You must not enable the disabled laser manually. Otherwise, services will be interrupted.
NOTE
The parameter value of Laser Status is not restored automatically by the U2000. That is, after the board
is replaced, the parameter value is set to the default value.

To forcibly enable the laser on the U2000 during commissioning, you need to set the Automatic
Laser Shutdown parameter to Disabled.
D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m)

Description
The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the
laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance
is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module.

This parameter has no impact on the system operation.
Values
Valid Value
Default Value
2000, 10000, 15000, 40000, 80000
The value of this parameter is subject to the type of the optical module. The following table lists
the values of this parameter for different types of optical modules.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical Module Type
Value
I-64.1
10000
S-64.2b
40000
I-16
2000
S-16.1
15000
L-16.1
40000
L-16.2
80000

2459
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

None.

None.
D.22 Laser-in-Position Status

Description
The Laser-in-Position Status parameter indicates whether the physical laser on the line board
is installed.

Values
Valid Value
Default Value
In-Position, Not-in-Position

Value
Description
In-Position
Indicates that the physical laser on the line

board is installed.
Not-in-Position
Indicates that the physical laser on the line

board is not installed.
None.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2460
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.23 LCAS Mode

Description
The LCAS mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and
Rs_Ack messages received from the source end.

The system operation is not affected.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Huawei mode, Standard mode
Huawei mode

Value
Description
Huawei mode
Inverts the RS_Ack message, and then transmits the MST

message.
Standard mode
Transmits the MST message, and then Inverts the RS_Ack

message.
To set the LCAS mode, follow the principles:
l
If the interconnected equipment at the two ends is Huawei equipment, select Huawei
Mode.
If Huawei equipment is interconnected to a third-party equipment, set the interconnected

equipment to the same mode according to the mode supported by the third-party equipment.

None.
D.24 Line Rate

Description
The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2461
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


If the values of the Line Rate parameter for the transmit and receive boards are different, services
are unavailable.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Standard Mode, Speedup Mode

Value
Description
Speedup Mode
Set Line Rate for a board on the line to Speedup Mode

when the following conditions are satisfied.
l An OTU or a tributary board on the line transmits/
receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port
Mapping for the board is set to Bit Transparent
Mapping (11.1 G).
l Line Rate for another board on the line is set to Speedup
Mode.
Standard Mode
Set Line Rate for a board on the line to Standard Mode

when the following conditions are satisfied.
l The conditions for setting Line Rate to Speedup
Mode and Speedup Mode 11.3G are not satisfied.
l Line Rate for another line board on the line is set to
Standard Mode.
l
This parameter should be set according to the actual service mapping mode and the optical
signal rate on the network.
This parameter must be set to the same value at the transmit and receive ends.
The values of the Line Rate parameter for the upstream and downstream boards must be
the same.
In the case of the LSXLR, LSXR, TN12ND2(Relay Mode), TN52ND2(Relay Mode),

TN54NQ2(Relay Mode), and TN54NS3(Relay Mode) boards, it is recommended that you
set Enable Auto-Sensing to Enabled. In this case, the system supports the FEC Type and
Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is
required.
Configuration examples:
l
Example 1:
As shown in Figure D-1, the 52ND2 works as a regeneration board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2462
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

When the 12LSX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port
Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case,
Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode.
In other cases, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode.
Figure D-1 Example 1
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
12LSX
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
52ND2
12LSX
Example 2:
As shown in Figure D-2, the 52ND2(1) and 52ND2(3) work as line boards, and the 52ND2
(2) works as a regeneration board.
When the 52TDX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port
Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode.
In other cases, Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode.
M
U
X
52ND2
(1)
52TDX
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
M
U
X
52ND2
(2)
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
52ND2
(3)
52TDX
Example 3:
As shown in Figure D-3, the 54NS3(1) and 54NS3(3) work as line boards, and the 54NS3
(2) works as a regeneration board.
When the 52TQX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port
Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Speedup Mode.
In other cases, Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Standard Mode.
M
U
X
52TQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
54NS3
(1)
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
M
U
X
54NS3
(2)
D
M
U
X

D
M
U
X
M
U
X
54NS3
(3)
52TQX
2463
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
LSXLR and LSXR: This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to
Enabled.
TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3: This parameter can be set only when Board

Mode is set to Relay Mode and Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled.
D.25 Loop Detection

Description
The Loop Detection parameter specifies the function of reporting the self-loop alarms after one
of the following loopback cases is detected.
l
For the external physical interface of the board, the transmit direction is connected to the
receive direction by a fiber.
The two external physical ports on the board are cross-connected to each other through
fibers.
The cross-connection is created on the same VCTRUNK of the board.
The cross-connection is created between different VCTRUNKs of the board.

After the self-loop check function is enabled for a port, the specified self-loop check packets are
transmitted from the port. One packet is transmitted each second.
Values
Valid Values
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
To check the self-loop port, select Enabled.

The loop port shut-down function takes effect only after the loop check function is enabled.
D.26 Loop Port Shutdown

Description
The Loop Port Shutdown parameter is set to disable the self-loop port after a self-loop port is
detected if the loop port shutdown function is enabled. After the self-loop port is shut down, the
self-loop port only transmits or receives the self-loop detection packets rather than any other
packets. If the port is not a self-loop port, it starts to work again.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2464
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


If a port enables the loop port shut-down function, the IEEE 802.3ah protocol blocks the port
once the port is detected to be a self-loop port. In this case, the services at the port are interrupted.
All the packets based on the upper-level protocol are discarded.
Values
Valid Values
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
To block a self-loop port, select Enabled. Otherwise, select Disabled.

The loop port shutdown function takes effect only after the IEEE 802.3ah protocol and the loop
detection function are enabled.
D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface)

Description
The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical
For optical wavelength conversion unit, WDM side/client side availability: WDM side, client
side

When the loopback mode is set to Inloop or Outloop, services are interrupted.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Outloop
Non-Loopback

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2465
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
Non-Loopback
Indicates that the equipment is normal. Optical interface

loopback is not required when the equipment runs normally.
Inloop
Loops the signals to be output from the output optical

interface back to the input optical interface of the same
equipment at the local end. Inloop is used to test whether the
signal processing on the board is normal.
Outloop
Directly loops the accessed signals of the local equipment

back to the corresponding output optical interface before
signal processing on the premise that the signal structure is
not changed. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber
lines and connectors.
Loopback is usually used for equipment commissioning and troubleshooting. Before adding
services to the equipment, you must check whether loopback is set for the optical interfaces. If
the loopback exists, release it immediately.
Outloop indicates a mode where the unprocessed signals accessed to the local-end equipment
are directly looped back to the corresponding output interface with the signal structure
unchanged. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors
The following figure shows the outloop configuration.
Type
Illustration
Client-side outloop of the

OTU
Outloop OTU
Client side
WDM-side outloop of the

OTU
WDM side
OTU Outloop
Client side
WDM side
Inloop indicates that the processed signal is transmitted from the transmit port at the local end
and then looped back to the receive port at the local end. Inloop is used to test whether the signal
processing on the board is normal.
The following figure shows the inloop configuration.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2466
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Type
Illustration
Client-side inloop of the

OTU
Inloop OTU
WDM side
Client side
WDM-side inloop of the

OTU
OTU
Client side
Inloop
WDM side

None.
D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface)

Description
The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT).

Enabling the LPT does not affect system running but makes it impossible to configure ALS
function.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
Description
Enabled
Indicates that the link_err alarm of the upstream station is

transparently transmitted to the downstream station.

2467
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
Disabled
Indicates that the link_err alarm of the upstream station is not

transmitted to the downstream station.
l
Enabling the LPT can support the system to transparently transmit link status. In this way,
the downstream station can determine the running status of the upstream station according
to whether the link_err alarm occurs, and thus adopts the corresponding working status.
Therefore, whether to enable the LPT depends on the actual network situation.
Before enabling the LPT, ensure the following:

The board to be configured is an Ethernet service (such as the GE service) board.
The services carried on the board are normal.
The services carried on the board are not configured with ALS function.
D.29 MAC Loopback

Description
The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC
layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

A MAC loopback is used for fault locating but can interrupt services. When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the PHY Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the
PHY Loopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to NonLoopback.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Non-Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
Description
Non-Loopback
Indicates that no loopback is configured.
Inloop
Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a port. In

this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.

2468
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
For a GE optical port, GE electrical port, FE optical port, and FE electrical port, an MAC
loopback can be set to only inloop.
For a 10GE optical port, an MAC loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.
By default a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five

minutes.

This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.
D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by

None.
Values
The value can be queried through the system.
None.

None.
D.31 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM

Interface)
Description
The Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the maximum
pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed pump optical power value
is larger than the maximum value, the board might work abnormally.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2469
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Values
Value Range
Default Value
5 dBm-30 dBm
l ROP: 28 dBm
l CRPC: 26 dBm
None.

If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) is larger than the value of Max.
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board might work abnormally.
D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)

Description
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by
a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services.

For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l
A board may transparently transmit FE, GE, or 10GE services by encapsulating them in
GFP-T format. when the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet
Length, this data packet will still be transparently transmitted.
In case of transmission of GE or 10GE services in the GFP-F format, when the length of a
data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, the data packet is discarded.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Value Range
Default Value
1518-9600
9600
None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2470
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


When Service Type is GE or Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), and the
length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, the data packet is
discarded.
When Service Type is GE(GFP-T) or Port Mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G),
and the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, this data packet
will still be transparently transmitted.
D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by

None.
Values
None.

None.
D.34 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM

Interface)
Description
The Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the minimum
pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed pump optical power value
is smaller than the minimum value, the board might work abnormally.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2471
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Values
Value Range
Default Value
5 dBm-30 dBm
20 dBm
None.

If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) is smaller than the value of Min.
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board might work abnormally.
D.35 Min. Members-Transmit Direction

Description
When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit
direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Min.
Members-Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the valid members in
the transmit direction.

When the LCAS is enabled, failure of certain paths does not affect the service in the case of
sufficient bandwidths. The user can set this parameter to enable the reporting of the LCAS_PLCT
alarm only when the number of the valid members in the transmit direction is smaller than a
certain value.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
2-256
256
Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user.
D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Monitor Interval (min.) parameter provides an option to set the supervisory channel for
the current board and to analyze the time interval of the channel status.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2472
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
5 to 49995
10
min
The default value is recommended.

None.
D.37 MSP Sharing

Description
The MSP Sharing parameter determines whether multiple multiplex section (MS) protection
groups can be configured at the same optical interface.

Values
Valid Value
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
Description
Enabled
Indicates that multiple MS protection groups

can be configured at the same optical
interface.
Disabled
Indicates that only one MS protection group

can be configured at the same optical
interface.

2473
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Currently, an optical interface supports a maximum of two MS protection groups.

None.
D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This
parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and
the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power.

Modifying this parameter directly affects the output power of all wavelengths passing through
the amplifier board.
Values
l
OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800
Value Range
Default Value
HBA: 29dB
The specific value is related to the module.
OAU101: 20dB to 31dB, continuously

tunable
tunable
tunable
tunable
OBU101: 20dB
OBU103: 23dB
OBU104: 17dB
OBU205: 23dB
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei provides many types of OAU boards. The different gain ranges of an OAU board
of the same type are applicable to different application scenarios. For example, the gain
range of the OAU101/02 is 20 dB to 31 dB. The gain range from 20 dB to 26 dB is applicable
to the application scenarios with the dispersion compensation module (DCM). The gain
range from 26 dB to 31 dB is applicable to the application scenarios without the DCM.
2474
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The gain range of the OAU103 is 24 dB to 36 dB and is mainly used in long-span links.
The gain range from 24 dB to 30 dB is used when the DCM is accessed. The gain range
from 31 dB to 36 dB is not recommended when the DCM is accessed.
Nominal gain of a board = Maximum gain of a board - Insertion loss between the TDC and
RDC. The range of the nominal gain is related to the input optical power.
If the intermediate insertion loss exceeds the maximum intermediate insertion loss of a
board, the board gain may not reach the nominal gain. In this case, the board locks the gain
according to the intermediate insertion loss.

The gain queried on the U2000 namely, the actually amplified signal optical power by the optical
amplifier board, or the actual gain measured through a meter may be different from the
configured nominal gain, because it is affected by device performance. This is because the optical
amplifier board actually locks the per-channel power instead of the total power. Noises are
generated when the power is amplified by the EDFA and the noise power is at a certain level.
In the case of high input power, the impact from the noise is small and the gain of the total power
is close to the per-channel gain. In the case of low input power, however, the impact from the
noise cannot be neglected. The total output power equals the sum of the signal optical power
and the noise power. The noise power and signal optical power can be assimilated because of
an increase in total gain. This is normal.
In the case of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, you can obtain the value range of the
Nominal Gain parameter of a board by querying the corresponding Upper Nominal Gain
Threshold (dB) and Lower Nominal Gain Threshold (dB) parameters.
D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum
nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be set and depends on
the optical module type.

None.
Values
Queriable only.
None.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2475
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum
nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends
on the optical module type.

None.
Values
Queriable only.
None.

None.
D.41 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Description
Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in nonautonegotiation mode.

Non-autonegotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control,

Disable

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2476
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
Disabled
Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive

ends.
Enable Symmetric Flow

Control
Enables symmetric flow control frames (allows transmission

and receiving) in non-autonegotiation mode.
Send Only
Enables only transmission of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.
Receive Only
Enables only receiving of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.
Set this parameter properly according to actual service configurations.

This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Nonautonegotiation mode.
D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM

Interface)
Description
The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of
a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the
preset range.

None.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
Min. Attenuation Ratio Max. Attenuation Ratio
Max. Attenuation Ratio
dB
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical multiplexer unit and optical demultiplexer unit

2477
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset.
l
Other board
The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large.
It should be controlled within 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time
the attenuation is adjusted in a new project.
During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation
adjustment amplitude should be controlled within 0.5 dB compared with the original
attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted.

You can obtain the value range of this parameter of a board by querying the corresponding Max.
Attenuation Rate (dB) and Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface)

Description
The Optical Switch No. parameter provides an option to query the current working optical
interface of the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA).

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
1-8
None.
l
The MCA supports 8-optical interface detection or 4-optical interface detection, depending
on the type of the MCA.
Before setting the MCA to monitor wavelengths, you are recommended to query this
parameter to confirm that the optical interfaces is available on the MCA.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2478
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.44 PHY Loopback

Description
The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY
layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

A PHY loopback is used for fault locating but interrupts services. When this parameter is set to
Inloop, the MAC Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the MAC
Loopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Non-Loopback

Value
Description
Non-Loopback
Indicates that no loopback is configured.
Inloop
Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a

port. In this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.
l
For a GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for a GE electrical port,
a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
For a 10GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
For an FE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for an FE electrical port,
a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.
By default, a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five

minutes.

This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2479
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)

Description
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.

The configured logical band must be consistent with the actual physical band. Otherwise, a
WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
C, CWDM

Value
Description
Indicates that the current working band is C band.
CWDM
Indicates that the current working band is CWDM band.
None.

None.
D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency

(THz) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the
wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side
of a board.

If the wavelength is incorrectly set, the downstream services may not be normally received.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2480
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Values
C band
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
192.10 to 1196.05
(wavelength spacing: 50
GHz)
THz
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
1271 to 1611(wavelength
spacing: 20 nm)
nm
CWDM band
l
In the case of the OTUs with a fixed wavelength, set the actual wavelength of the
wavelength conversion board.
In the case of the OTUs with a variable wavelength, set the wavelength according to network
wavelength planning.
The same wavelength must be used for a service in the receive and the transmit directions.
If a service travels through multiple regeneration stations, it is recommended that these

regeneration sections use the same wavelength.
It is recommended that the active and standby channels use the same wavelength when the
inter-board channel protection or client-side path protection is configured.
The configured logical wavelength must be consistent with the actual physical wavelength.
Otherwise, a WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported.
In the case of the optical tunable transponders, this parameter directly changes the physical
wavelength but cannot change the band.
In the case of the optical untunable transponders, this parameter can change the logical
wavelength only.
For the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800: Table D-1 lists the
wavelengths available for the CWDM system.
Table D-1 Nominal central wavelengths of the CWDM system
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Wavelengt
h No.
Wavelength (nm)
Wavelength
No.
Wavelength (nm)
11
1471
15
1551
12
1491
16
1571
13
1511
17
1591

2481
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Wavelengt
h No.
Wavelength (nm)
Wavelength
No.
Wavelength (nm)
14
1531
18
1611

None.
D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)

Description
The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service.

None.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Value Range
Default Value
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), MAC

Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Bit Transparent
Mapping (10.7 G), Encapsulated to FEC5G,
Encapsulated to OTU5G
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value
Description
Bit Transparent Mapping

(11.1 G)
Supports transparent bit (11.1 G) transport for 10GE LAN

signals. In this port mapping mode, transmission of signals are
achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This
ensures the encoding gain and correction capability of FEC.
In this mode, the bit rate is 11.1 Gbit/s, which is higher than
the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals.

2482
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
MAC Transparent Mapping

(10.7 G)
In this port mapping mode, 10GE LAN signals are

encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then are mapped into
standard OTU frames. This mode supports transparent
transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode,
the signals are encapsulated in standard OTU2 frames and the
bit rate of the signals is 10.71 Gbit/s. In addition, the FEC/
AFEC code pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in this
mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended for
10G SDH services.
Bit Transparent Mapping

(10.7 G)
Supports transparent bit (10.7 G) transport for 10GE LAN

signals. In this mapping mode, certain AFEC fields are used
for transmission of signals. In this mode, the bit rate of signals
is 10.71 Gbit/s. Thus, for the signals that adopt AFEC, the
encoding gain of AFEC is low and the correction capability
of AFEC is comparatively poor.
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l
Services other than 10GE LAN do not require configuring the port mapping mode.
The port mapping mode of 10GE LAN services can be configured as "Bit Transparent
Mapping (11.1 G)", "MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)" or "Bit Transparent Mapping
(10.7 G)". Users can select a proper mapping mode according to the service transmission
requirements.
"Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" and "Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)" meet
customer requirement for transparent bit transport of 10GE LAN signals. If a 10GE LAN
signal is directly mapped into an OTU frame by means of bit transparent mapping, the
10GE LAN signal will overflow the OTU frame. Thus, to solve this problem, certain AFEC
fields are occupied by the 10GE LAN signal. This is why the AFEC encoding gain is low
and AFEC correction capability is comparatively poor for the signals in the AFEC field.
In the "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" mode, transmission of signals are achieved by
increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures the encoding gain and correction
capability of FEC. In this mode, however, the bit rate is higher than the standard bit rate of
OTU2 signals.
"MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G)" is specific to transparent transmission of 10GE MAC

frames as required by customers. In this port mapping mode, a 10GE LAN signal is
encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then mapped into a standard OTU frame. This mode
supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the
signals are in standard OTU2 frames. In addition, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicable
to 10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended
for 10G SDH services.
The port mapping modes of the upstream and downstream board must be the same.

For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2483
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Set the Line Rate parameter to Standard Mode when the value of this parameter is MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).
Set the Line Rate parameter to Speedup Mode when the value of this parameter is Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1 G).
When the parameter value is changed from MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) to Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC Mode
automatically changes to AFEC.
When the parameter value is changed from Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) to Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC Mode
remains unchanged.
D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)

Description
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status
of a board.
Applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.

The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the
PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled

Value
Description
Enabled
Indicates enabling the PRBS test.
Disabled
Indicates disabling the PRBS test.
The PRBS test is only used for deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Enabled during
network-wide commissioning and to Disabled after the deployment.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2484
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the
PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the
PRBS test.
D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel
rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When
the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available
for the optical amplifier unit.

When the automatic adjustment of the optical power is enabled, this parameter affects the budget
of the optical power on the optical channel of the system.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
-30.0-30.0
The specific value is related

to the board
dBm
l
The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual
configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as
the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally.

None.
D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)

Description
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or
channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which
this OTU board resides.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2485
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


After this parameter is set, set SD Trigger Condition of the protection group in which the OTU
resides to Enabled. When the OTU receives alarms such as B1_SD, the system regards the
received alarms of the OTU as the switching trigger condition of the protection group. As a
result, switching occurs in the protection group.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Value Range
Default Value
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG, None
None

Parameter Value
Remarks
B1_SD
Regeneration section (B1) signal degrade.
OTUk_DEG
OTUk signal degrade.
ODUk_PM_DEG
ODUk_PM signal degrade.
None
No condition is configured for SD switching.
When SD switching is used against a small number of bit errors, the switching is rapidly
performed. Select the proper alarms as the switching trigger conditions depending on the service
status. The alarms, which can be selected as switching trigger conditions, at certain optical
interfaces and channels of a board vary with the board type. If one optical interface supports
various services, all the three alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions. When the service
type is changed, the board automatically counts the corresponding bit errors and reports an SD
alarm according to the actual service type.

None..
D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface)

Description
The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2486
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


None.
Values
For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG
Value Range
Default Value
OTN, SDH
OTN
For the ND2, NQ2, NS2

Value Range
Default Value
ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Automatic
Automatic
For the NS3

Value Range
Default Value
ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Mix, Automatic
Automatic
For the LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA and TQM
Value Range
Default Value
Client Mode, OTN Mode
Client Mode
l
In the case of the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: The mode of line-side services
of boards on an NE at the local end should be the same as that at the opposite end. When
a local-end board need be connected to an SDH service board of another product, the mode
of line-side services should be set to SDH.
In the case of the LQM, LQMD, LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA and TQM boards: When
the client side accesses OTN services, set this parameter to OTN Mode. When the client
side accesses other services, set this parameter to Client Mode.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2487
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input
optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm.
When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
The alarm can be queried.

This parameter is used to determine whether the input optical power is lost for the protection
board, optical multiplexer unit and optical demultiplexer unit. If the optical power is lost, the
relevant alarm is reported. This facilitates fault diagnosis.
When the optical amplifier boards work in the gain locking mode, this parameter triggers the
boards to report the MUT_LOS alarm if the optical power is lost.
Values
Optical protection unit
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
-35.0 to -10.0
dBm
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
-46.0 to -23.0
dBm
Optical supervisory channel unit
For optical multiplexer unit, optical demultiplexer unit and amplifier board, the value can be
queried through the system.
l
Protection board
The default value is usually recommended, namely, -35 dB.
In special cases, you can set this parameter to any value within the allowed range
according to the actual situation.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2488
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.53 Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical
power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (R_LOS) alarm.

This parameter triggers a board to report an R_LOS alarm.
Values
None.

None.
D.54 TSD
Description
The TSD parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD stands
for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled, and if a VCTRUNK member
has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails and deletes
it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol does not
monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member.

The system running is not affected.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
You can set whether to enable the TSD as required.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2489
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


This parameter is valid only when Enabling LCAS is set to Enabled.
D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary

Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and
secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal degrade (SD)
occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the
threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The
configured value can be queried.

l
In the OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800, this parameter functions
as the SD switching threshold reference value for optical line protection (OLP), OTU +
OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/DCP client-side 1+1 protection.
During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between
primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching threshold, the SD switching
occurs. This parameter is used to ensure the service quality and enable services to work in
the channels with better signals.
If the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the value of this
parameter, the POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm is generated. After the threshold is modified,
the corresponding alarm threshold also changes.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
3.0 - 8.0
dB
l
It is recommended to set the threshold to 5 dB.
In special cases, the threshold can be adjusted according to the actual situation.
When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power reaches 5 dB, you
can properly increase the threshold if the services in the channel with lower optical power
are still normal. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power is
far lower than 5 dB, you need to decrease the threshold properly if SD occurs.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2490
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.56 VLAN Priority

Description
The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
0-7
None.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2491
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Glossary
A
AC
See alternating current
access control list
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
ACK
See acknowledgement
acknowledgement
A response sent by a receiver to indicate successful reception of information.

Acknowledgements may be implemented at any level including the physical level (using
voltage on one or more wires to coordinate transfer), at the link level (to indicate
successful transmission across a single hardware link), or at higher levels.
ACL
See access control list
add/drop multiplexer
Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals
contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/
or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Add/drop wavelength
Add/drop wavelength refers to the wavelength that carries the add/drop services in the
OADM equipment.
Address Resolution
Protocol
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to

MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through
ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host
converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.
The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment
through its IP address.
ADM
See add/drop multiplexer
administrative unit
The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
Administrator
A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore
product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
ADSL
See asymmetric digital subscriber line
AGC
See automatic gain control
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2492
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
AID
access identifier
AIS
See alarm indication signal
alarm
A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management

system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery
alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes
to cleared.
alarm cable
The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.
alarm cascading
The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
alarm cause
A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault cause
is the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that is
representative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem.
alarm indication
On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current
status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on.
When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the
orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow
indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on
the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm mask
On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions for
the system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meeting
the conditions.
alarm severity
The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T

recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major,
Minor, Warning.
alarm suppression
A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the
networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function
module of a specific board.
alarm type
Classification of alarms with different attributes. There are six alarm types as following:
Communication: alarm indication related with information transfer. Processing: alarm
indication related with software or information processing Equipment: alarm indication
related with equipment fault Service: alarm indication related with QoS of the equipment
Environment: alarm related with the environment where the equipment resides, usually
generated by a sensor Security: alarm indication related with security
ALC
See automatic level control
ALC link
A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single

station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils optical
power control on the line that contains the link.
ALC node
The ALC functional unit. It corresponds to the NE in a network. The power detect unit,
variable optical attenuator unit, and supervisory channel unit at the ALC node work
together to achieve the ALC function.
ALS
See automatic laser shutdown
alternating current
Electric current that reverses its direction of flow (polarity) periodically according to a
frequency measured in hertz, or cycles per second.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2493
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
American National
Standard Institute
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.
American National Standard Institute (ANSI) participates in defining network protocol
standards.
American Standard
Code for Information
Interchange
American Standard Code for Information Interchange - the standard system for
representing letters and symbols. Each letter or symbol is assigned a unique number
between 0 and 127.
ANSI
See American National Standard Institute
antistatic floor
A floor that can quickly release the static electricity of the object contacting it to prevent
accumulated static electricity
APD
See avalanche photodiode
APE
automatic power equilibrium
APID
access point identifier
application-specific
integrated circuit
A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in
the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.
By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for
many needs.
APS
See automatic protection switching
ARP
See Address Resolution Protocol
arrayed waveguide
grating
A device, built with silicon planar lightwave circuits (PLC), that allows multiple
wavelengths to be combined and separated in a dense wavelength-division multiplexing
(DWDM) system.
ASCII
See American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASE
amplified spontaneous emission
ASIC
See application-specific integrated circuit
ASON
See automatically switched optical network
asymmetric digital
subscriber line
A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone

lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides
continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most
of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive
information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice)
information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from
512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps.
Asynchronous
Transfer Mode
A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.
A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in
the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.
Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATAG
autonomously generated correlation tag
ATM
See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU
See administrative unit
auto-negotiation
An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to
automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2494
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
automatic gain control A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a
function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.
automatic laser
shutdown
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters

and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control A well-known application in communication systems with a given input signal
conditioned to produce an output signal as possible, while supporting a wide gain range
and controlled gain-reduction and gain recovery characteristics.
automatic protection
switching
Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch

to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatically switched A network which is based on technology enabling the automatic delivery of transport
optical network
services. Specifically, an ASON can deliver not only leased-line connections but also
other transport services such as soft-permanent and switched optical connections.
avalanche photodiode
A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.

Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.
AWG
See arrayed waveguide grating
B
background block
error ratio
The ratio of background block errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a
fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.
backup
A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of
database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data
synchronization between active and standby boards.
bandwidth
A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a

network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the
transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
BAS
See broadband access server
basic input/output
system
A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control

programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
bayonet-neillconcelman
A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
BBE
background block error
BBER
See background block error ratio
BC
See boundary clock
BDI
Backward Defect Indication
BEI
backward error indication
BER
See bit error rate
BIAE
backward incoming alignment error
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2495
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
bill of material
Listing of all the subassemblies, parts and raw materials that go into the parent assembly.
It shows the quantity of each raw material required to make the assembly. There are a
variety of display formats for BOMS, including single level, indented, modular/
planning, transient, matrix and costed BOMs [APICs, CMSG].
BIOS
See basic input/output system
BIP
See bit-interleaved parity
BIP-8
See bit interleaved parity order 8
bit error
An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding

bit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate
Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the
communications quality of a network.
bit interleaved parity

order 8
A frame is divided into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)in a parity unit. Then arrange
the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the
corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.
bit-interleaved parity
A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the
transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the
first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the
covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
BITS
See building integrated timing supply
BMC
best master clock
BNC
See bayonet-neill-concelman
BOM
See bill of material
boundary clock
A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths.
BPDU
See bridge protocol data unit
BPS
board-level protection switching
bridge protocol data

unit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
bridging
The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channels
simultaneously.
broadband access
server
A server providing features as user access, connection management, address allocation

and authentication, authorization and accounting. It also works as a router featuring
effective route management, high forwarding performance and abundant services.
broadcast
A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is

determined by the broadcast address.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2496
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
broadcast service
The unidirectional services from one service source to multiple service sinks.
building integrated
timing supply
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
BWS
Backbone WDM System
C
cable tie
The tape used to bind the cables.
capex
See capital expenditure
capital expenditure
Capital expenditures (CAPEX or capex) are expenditures creating future benefits. A

capital expenditure is incurred when a business spends money either to buy fixed assets
or to add to the value of an existing fixed asset with a useful life that extends beyond the
taxable year. Capex are used by a company to acquire or upgrade physical assets such
as equipment, property, or industrial buildings.
CAR
See committed access rate
CBS
See committed burst size
CC
See connectivity check
CCI
connection control interface
CCM
See continuity check message
CD
chromatic dispersion
CDMA
See Code Division Multiple Access
CE
See customer edge
CENELEC
See European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computers
main data-transfer path, the bus.
centralized alarm
system
The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.
CF
See compact flash
CGMP
Cisco Group Management Protocol
channel
A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two

or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),
and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
channel spacing
The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channels

in a WDM device.
CIR
See committed information rate
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2497
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
CIST
Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CLEI
common language equipment identification
CLNP
connectionless network protocol
CLNS
connectionless network service
clock synchronization
Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal
frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.
clock synchronization A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588
compliant with
V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control
precision time protocol system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.
clock tracing
The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
CM
See configuration management
CMEP
connection monitoring end point
CMI
coded mark inversion
coarse wavelength
division multiplexing
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into

the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM
does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
Code Division Multiple A communication scheme that forms different code sequences by using the frequency
Access
expansion technology. In this case, subscribers of different addresses can use different
code sequences for multi-address connection.
committed access rate
A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
committed burst size
committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
rate
conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
Common Object
Request Broker
Architecture
A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of

programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two
programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different
platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or
ORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the object
comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP,
object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented.
compact flash
Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
concatenation
A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be
used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2498
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Configuration Data
A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can
collaborate with other Nes in an entire network. Thus, configuration data is the key factor
for normal running of an entire network.
configuration
management
1. A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization

(ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software.
2. Configuration Management (CM) is a system for collecting the configuration
information of all nodes in the network.
configure
To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
congestion
An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service

efficiency.
connecting plate
A metallic plate which is used to combine two cabinets.
connection point
A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound
to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the
input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is
characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point
is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
connectivity check
Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by
each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
continuity check
message
CCM is used to detect the link status.
convergence
1. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or
several channels of required signals.
2. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific
routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.
convergence service
A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for

the specific requirements of the convergence service user.
CORBA
See Common Object Request Broker Architecture
corrugated pipe
Used to protect optical fibers.
CPLD
Complex Programmable Logical Device
CPU
See central processing unit
CRC
See cyclic redundancy check
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CSES
consecutive severely errored second
CSMA
carrier sense multiple access
CST
Common Spanning Tree
current alarm
An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled.
current performance
data
Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers,

namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of a
performance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data only
in the specified monitoring period.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2499
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
customer edge
A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
CWDM
See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancy
check
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
DAPI
destination access point identifiers
Data backup
A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data loss
in the case of the damage or failure in the original storage area.
data communication
network
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data

Communication Function (DCF).
data communications
channel
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
DBPS
distribute board protect system
DCC
See data communications channel
DCF
See dispersion compensation fiber
DCM
See dispersion compensation module
DCM frame
A frame which is used to hold the DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module).
DCN
See data communication network
DDF
See digital distribution frame
DDN
See digital data network
demultiplexer
A device that separates signals that have been combined by a multiplexer for transmission
over a communications channel as a single signal.
dense wavelength
division multiplexing
Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of
single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing
as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.
device set
A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into different

device sets, users can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If an
operation authority over one device set is assigned to a user (user group), the authority
over all the devices in the device set is assigned to the user (user group), thus making it
unnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately.
It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, device
type, or another criterion.
DHCP
See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2500
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
diamond-shaped nut
A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet.
digital data network
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber
channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex
technology.
digital distribution
frame
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with
transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,
cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital subscriber line

access multiplexer
A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that
receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and
puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques.
dispersion
compensation fiber
A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion
of transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
dispersion
compensation module
A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the

dispersion of transmitting fiber.
Distance Vector
Multicast Routing
Protocol
An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical
dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
datagrams with its neighbors.
distributed link
aggregation group
The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection

technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end.
In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services
can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the
inter-board ports.
DLAG
See distributed link aggregation group
DMUX; DEMUX
See demultiplexer
DNI
Dual Node Interconnection
domain
A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
DRDB
dynamic random database
DRZ
differential phase return to zero
DSCP
Differentiated Services Code Point
DSCR
dispersion slope compensation rate
DSLAM
See digital subscriber line access multiplexer
DSP
Digital Signal Processing
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF
See dual tone multiple frequency
DTR
data terminal ready
dual tone multiple

frequency
In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set combinations of

two specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the
other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used.
dual-ended switching
A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected
entity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.
DVB
Digital Video Broadcasting
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2501
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
DVMRP
See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
DWDM
See dense wavelength division multiplexing
Dynamic Host
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol.
Configuration Protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host
requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet
network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
E
E2E
End to End
EAPE
enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium
EBS
See excess burst size
ECC
See embedded control channel
EDFA
See erbium doped fiber amplifier
eDQPSK
enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying
EFM
See Ethernet in the first mile
ejector lever
A lever for removing circuit boards from an electronic chassis.
electric supervisory
channel
A technology realizes the communication among all the nodes and transmits the
monitoring data in the optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electromagnetic
compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications

equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic
interference
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or

limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electrostatic discharge
The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different
electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
element management
system
An element management system (EMS) manages one or more of a specific type of

network elements (NEs). An EMS allows the user to manage all the features of each NE
individually, but not the communication between NEs - this is done by the network
management system (NMS).
embedded control
channel
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
EMC
See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI
See electromagnetic interference
EMS
See element management system
enterprise system
connection
A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system.
It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
EPL
See Ethernet private line
EPLAN
See Ethernet private LAN service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2502
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
erbium doped fiber

amplifier
An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of
optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of
Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light
source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
ESC
See electric supervisory channel
ESCON
See enterprise system connection
ESD
See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack
Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
eSFP
enhanced small form-factor pluggable
Ethernet
A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision

Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..
Ethernet in the first

mile
Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes the
advantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFM
provides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. In
addition, it meets the users requirements on high definition television system (HDTV)
and Video On Demand (VOD).
Ethernet private LAN

service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a

dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or
MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line
A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point
connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet virtual
private LAN service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet virtual
private line
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
ETS
European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
ETSI 300mm cabinet
A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standards
of the ETSI.
European Committee
for Electrotechnical
Standardization
The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization was established in 1976

in Brussels. It is the result of the incorporation of two former organizations. It aims to
reduce internal frontiers and trade barriers for electrotechnical products, systems and
services.
EVOA
electrical variable optical attenuator
EVPL
See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN
See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2503
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
excess burst size
A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Extended ID
The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network
segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.
External cable
The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces and
optical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals.
eye pattern
An oscilloscope display of synchronized pseudo-random digital data (signal amplitude

versus time), showing the superposition of accumulated output waveforms.
F
F1 byte
The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network
providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for
special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte.
fast Ethernet
Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times
faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so
on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following
three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),
100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical
fibers).
fault
A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault
does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external
resources and intentional settings.
FBG
fiber Bragg grating
FC
See fiber channel
FDB
flash database
FDDI
See fiber distributed data interface
FE
See fast Ethernet
FEC
See forward error correction
fiber channel
A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber
channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-mode
and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair
copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and
connectionless services.
fiber distributed data

interface
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for highspeed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for
transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on
the token ring network.
fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2504
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
fiber patch cord
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
fiber spool
A device used in coiling up an extra length of optical fibers.
Fiber trough
The trough that is used for routing fibers.
fiber/cable
Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical
entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user
information and network management information) and perform transmission function
in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable
transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber
connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs
represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical
fiber type.
field programmable
gate array
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit

(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arrays.
FIFO
See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol
A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out
A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
Flow
An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network

management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards,
it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present,
two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID
and port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist
in the same port.
FMT
See fiber management tray
FOADM
fixed optical add/drop multiplexer
FOAs
fixed optical attenuator
Forced switch
For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless
an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the
protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
forward error
correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.
four-wave mixing
Four-Wave Mixing (FWM), also called four-photon mixing, occurs when the interaction
of two or three optical waves at different wavelengths generates new optical waves,
called mixing products or sidebands, at other wavelengths.
FPGA
See field programmable gate array
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2505
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

frame
E Glossary
A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.
frame alignment signal A distinctive signal inserted in every frame or once in every n frames, always occupying
the same relative position within the frame, and used to establish and maintain frame
alignment.
FTP
See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex
A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both

directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line
telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard
at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with
one lane for each direction.
G
gain
The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical
amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,
which expressed in dB.
gain flattening filter
Gain Flattening Filter (GFFs), also known as gain equalizing filters, are used to flatten
or smooth out unequal signal intensities over a specified wavelength range. This unequal
signal intensity usually occurs after an amplification stage (for example, EDFA and/or
Raman). Typically, GFFs are used in conjunction with gain amplifiers to ensure that the
amplified channels all have the same gain. A static spectral device that flattens the output
spectrum of an erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
Gateway IP
When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used
to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the
gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot
identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP
networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the
network and one IP address of the Ethernet port.
gateway network
element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
the NM application layer
Gb
See gigabit
GCC
general communication channel
GCP
See GMPLS control plan
GE
See gigabit Ethernet
GE ADM
The technology can optimize GE service transport over WDM for Metro network. It
owns the capability of GE service convergence and grooming and benefits to use the
network resource more effectively.
generic framing
procedure
A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been
standardized by ITU-T SG15.
GFF
See gain flattening filter
GFP
See generic framing procedure
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2506
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
gigabit
In data communications, a gigabit is one billion bits, or 1,000,000,000 (that is, 10^9)
bits. It's commonly used for measuring the amount of data that is transferred in a second
between two telecommunication points.
gigabit Ethernet
GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.
It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning
System
A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and

timing services to worldwide users.
GMPLS
generalized multiprotocol label switching
GMPLS control plan
The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei.
The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the
traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series
support the ASON features.
GNE
See gateway network element
GPS
See Global Positioning System
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with
graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
grounding
The connection of sections of an electrical circuit to a common conductor, called the

ground, which serves as the reference for the other voltages in the circuit.
GSSP
General Snooping and Selection Protocol
GUI
See graphical user interface
H
Hardware loopback
A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface
to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.
HCS
See hierarchical cell structure
HDB
high density bipolar code
HDLC
See high level data link control
hierarchical cell
structure
This is a term typically used to describe the priority of cells within a mixed environment.
That is when Macro, Micro, and Pico cells may be viewed as candidates for cell
reselection the priority described by the HCS will be used in the associated calculations.
high level data link

control
The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer
of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by
adding a trailer and a header.
History alarm
The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.
History Performance
Data
The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported
and stored in the NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2507
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
I
IAE
incoming alignment error
IC
See integrated circuit
ICC
ITU carrier code
ICMP
See Internet Control Message Protocol
ID
See identity
identity
The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively

recognizable or known.
Idle resource optical

NE
When the U2000 is started successfully, an NE icon called "Idle ONE" will be displayed
on the topological view. In this NE, the subracks and boards that are not divided to other
optical NEs (such as OTM, OADM and other NEs) are retained. In this NE, idle DWDM
subracks and boards are reserved, which can be distributed to other ONEs. Double-click
the NE icon to view all the currently idle DWDM subracks or boards in the network.
IE
See Internet Explorer
IEC
See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF
See Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP
See Internet Group Management Protocol
Input jitter tolerance
The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when
modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored
seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30
second measurement intervals.
Institute of Electrical
and Electronics
Engineers
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
integrated circuit
A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
integrated services
digital network
A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for the

voice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on a
small number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensive
transmission service.
intelligent power
adjustment
A technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of
optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, the
performance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well.
Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the slice
of broken fiber.
Internal cable
The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and
optical interfaces within the cabinet.
internal spanning tree
A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2508
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
International
Electrotechnical
Commission
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.
International
Organization for
Standardization
An international association that works to establish global standards for communications

and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted
ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers
connected by communications networks.
International
Telecommunication
Union
A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
radio networks (ITU-R).
International
Telecommunication
UnionTelecommunication
Standardization Sector
An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications

technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a
letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For
example, X.25 comes from the X series which deals with data networks and open
system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Control
Message Protocol
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering
Task Force
A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.

Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with
studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet
Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups
that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher
of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Explorer
Microsoft's Web browsing software. Introduced in October 1995, the latest versions of
Internet Explorer include many features that allow you to customize your experience on
the Web. Internet Explorer is also available for the Macintosh and UNIX platforms.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
IP
See Internet Protocol
IP address
A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to
the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets.
An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values
of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the
IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identify
the host itself.
IP over DCC
The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote
NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead
DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.
IPA
See intelligent power adjustment
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2509
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
IPG
inter-packet gap
ISDN
See integrated services digital network
ISO
See International Organization for Standardization
IST
See internal spanning tree
ITU
See International Telecommunication Union
ITU-T
See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization

Sector
J
Jitter
Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.
Jitter transfer
The physical relationship between jitter applied at the input port and the jitter appearing
at the output port.
L
label switched path
A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label

switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
LACP
See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG
See link aggregation group
LAN
See local area network
LAPD
link access procedure on the D channel
LAPS
link access protocol-SDH
Laser
A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
layer
A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically

as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer
of its characteristic information.
LB
See loopback
LCAS
See link capacity adjustment scheme
LCD
See liquid crystal display
LCN
local communication network
LCT
local craft terminal
LED
See light emitting diode
LHP
long hop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2510
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
light emitting diode
A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product
on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights and
perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical
mice and laser-class printers.
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to

increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE
802.3ad.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity
adjustment scheme
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.
Link Control Protocol
In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes,
configures, and tests data-link Internet connections.
link state
advertisement
The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is the
condition of the link.
linktrace message
The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP
is called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC
address of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply
For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the
source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is
called Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the
TTL of LTM minus 1.
liquid crystal display
A type of display that uses a liquid compound having a polar molecular structure,
sandwiched between two transparent electrodes.
LLC
See logical link control
LMP
link management protocol
LOC
loss of clock
local area network
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching
When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
logical link control
According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper
sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media
(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
logical port
A logical port is a logical number assigned to every application.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2511
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
loopback
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP
See loss of pointer
LOS
See Loss Of Signal
loss of pointer
Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the

PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of
cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
Loss Of Signal
Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received
signal.
Lower subrack
The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.
LP
See logical port
LPT
link-state pass through
LSA
See link state advertisement
LSP
See label switched path
LT
linktrace
LTM
See linktrace message
LTR
See linktrace reply
M
MA
Maintenance Associations
MAC
See media access control
MADM
multiple add/drop multiplexer
main distribution
frame
A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
main path interface at

the transmitter
A reference point on the optical fiber just after the OM/OA output optical connector.
main topology
A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display).
The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine
interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms
of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic
network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.
maintenance domain
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The
devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point
Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
MAN
See metropolitan area network
managed object
The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that may
be managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receive
port, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, and
regenerator section.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2512
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Management
information
The information that is used for network management in a transport network.
management
information base
A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It

comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
manual switch
Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists
on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
Mapping
A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of
an SDH network.
marking-off template
A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation
holes for the cabinet.
MD
See maintenance domain
MDB
Memory Database
MDF
See main distribution frame
MDP
message dispatch process
MDS
message distribution service software
ME
maintenance entities
mean launched power
The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by the
transmitter.
Mean Time Between

Failures
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure

of the reliability of the system.
media access control
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
MEP
maintenance end point
metropolitan area
network
A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer
resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local
area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).
The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger
network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is
also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them
with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
MFAS
See multiframe alignment signal
MIB
See management information base
MIP
maintenance intermediate point
MLD
See multicast listener discovery
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2513
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
MLM laser
See multi-longitudinal mode laser
MO
See managed object
mother board
A printed board assembly that is used for interconnecting arrays of plug-in electronic
modules.
mounting ear
A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or
components.
MP
See maintenance point
MPI
main path interface
MPI-R
main path interface at the receiver
MPI-S
See main path interface at the transmitter
MPLS
See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MS
Multiplex Section
MSA
Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSI
multi-frame structure identifier
MSOH
See multiplex section overhead
MSP
See multiplex section protection
MSPP
multi-service provisioning platform
MST
See multiplex section termination
MSTI
See multiple spanning tree instance
MSTP
See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTA
Mail Transfer Agent
MTBF
See Mean Time Between Failures
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit
multi-longitudinal
mode laser
An injection laser diode which has a number of longitudinal modes.
multicast listener
discovery
The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
connected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6
networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which
the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the
multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment
signal
A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, always

occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and
maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTP
instance
within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for
frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST
Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2514
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section
overhead
The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH
definition.
multiplex section
protection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
multiplex section
termination
The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH frame
signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
multiplexer
Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of

aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels
being fixed.
Multiplexing
A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
MUX
See multiplexer
MVOA
mechanical variable optical attenuator
N
NA
No Acknowledgment
NCP
See Network Control Protocol
NE
See network element
NE database
There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following:

(1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery;
(2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM;
(3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM.
In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same
time. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB
to FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database is
restored in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, the
main control restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due to
the exhaustion of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2515
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
NE Explorer
The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and
maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
NE ID
An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a
unique NE ID.
NE Panel
A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks,
boards, and ports on an NE. In the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the
configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.
NE-side data
The NE configuration data that is stored on the SCC board of the equipment. The NEside data can be uploaded to the network management system(NMS) and thus is stored
on the NMS side.
NEBS
Network Equipment Building System
NEF
See network element function
Network Control
Protocol
This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implements
path control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link.
network element
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which
manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC
board.
network element
function
A function block which represents the telecommunication functions and communicates

with the TMN OSF function block for the purpose of being monitored and/or controlled.
network management
The process of controlling a network so as to maximize its efficiency and productivity.

ISO's model divides network management into five categories: fault management,
accounting management, configuration management, security management and
performance management.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
System
network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.
network segment
A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all
nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
point
access OSI network services.
Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. It
synchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client.
NM
See network management
NMS
See Network Management System
NNI
See network node interface
NOC
network operation center
Noise figure
An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing a
system.
NSAP
See network service access point
NTP
See Network Time Protocol
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2516
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
O
OA
See optical amplifier
OADM
See optical add/drop multiplexer
OADM frame
A frame which is used to hold the OADM boards.
OAM
See operation, administration and maintenance
OC
See optical coupler
OCI
open connection indication
OCP
See optical channel protection
OD
optical demultiplexing
ODB
optical duobinary
ODF
See optical distribution frame
ODUk
optical channel data unit-k
OEQ
optical equalizer
OFC
open fiber control
OLA
See optical line amplifier
OLP
See optical line protection
OM
optical multiplexing
OMS
optical multiplexing section
ONE
See optical network element
Online Help
The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions
for using their features when so requested by the user.
OOF
See out of frame
OPA
optical power adjust
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.
Open Systems
Interconnection
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by

different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different
categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.
Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.
Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source
and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation,
administration and
maintenance
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
OpEx; OPEX
operation expenditure
OPS
optical physical section
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2517
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
optic fiber connector
A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source
(or a detector).+
optical add/drop
multiplexer
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel
and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical amplifier
Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the

stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.
optical attenuator
A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the
optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is
available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.
optical channel
A signal transmitted at one wavelength in a fiber-optic system.
optical channel
protection
In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain

wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical
channel protection is configured.
optical coupler
A coupler for coupling light in an optical system. Multiple discrete layers of alternating
optical materials have respective first and second indexes of refraction. The thickness of
each layer is a fraction of the light wavelength.
optical distribution
frame
A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
optical line amplifier
A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input optical
signals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA is
the EDFA amplifier.
optical line protection
A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and singleended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibers
forms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line is
normal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carries
line signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large.
optical network
element
A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/drop

multiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The types
of ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC. The locating of an ONE is
equivalent to that of a common NE. In a view, an ONE is displayed with an icon, like a
common NE and its alarm status can be displayed with colors. Logically, an ONE consists
of different subracks. Like a common NE, an ONE cannot be expanded or entered like
a sub-network. Similar to a common NE, an ONE provides a list of the subracks that
form the NE to display the board layout.
optical signal-to-noise
ratio
The most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. The ratio
of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. That is, OSNR = signal power/
noise power.
optical spectrum
analyzer
A device that allows the details of a region of an optical spectrum to be resolved.

Commonly used to diagnose DWDM systems.
optical supervisory
channel
A technology that realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission network

and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working
channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm).
Optical switch
A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects,
or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2518
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
optical time domain

reflectometer
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system
and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light
loss and locate the fiber fault.
optical transmission
section
Optical transmission section allows the network operator to perform monitoring and
maintenance tasks between NEs.
optical transponder
unit
A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2compliant WDM wavelength.
optical transport
network
A network that uses the optical signal to transmit data
optical wavelength
shared protection
In the optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP), the service protection between
different stations can be achieved by using the same wavelength, realizing wavelength
sharing. This saves the wavelength resources and lowers the cost. The optical wavelength
shared protection is mainly applied to the ring network which is configured with
distributed services. It is achieved by using the OWSP board. In a ring network where
services are distributed at adjacent stations, each station requires one OWSP board. Then,
two wavelengths are enough for configuring the shared protection to protect one service
among stations.
OPU
optical channel payload unit
OPUk
optical channel payload unit-k
orderwire
A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or

maintenance engineers of different stations.
original equipment
manufacturer
An original equipment manufacturer, or OEM is typically a company that uses a

component made by a second company in its own product, or sells the product of the
second company under its own brand.
OSA
See optical spectrum analyzer
OSC
See optical supervisory channel
OSI
See Open Systems Interconnection
OSN
optical switch node
OSNR
See optical signal-to-noise ratio
OSPF
See open shortest path first
OTDR
See optical time domain reflectometer
OTM
optical terminal multiplexer
OTN
See optical transport network
OTS
See optical transmission section
OTU
See optical transponder unit
OTUk
optical channel transport unit-k
out of frame
An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specified

number of consecutive frame bit positions.
The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
overhead cabling
Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
OWSP
See optical wavelength shared protection
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2519
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
P
PA
pre-amplifier
packet over SDH/

SONET
A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS
interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of
packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
packet switched
network
A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.
Packing case
A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.
Paired slots
Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane.
pass-through
The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any given
direction of transmission.
PBS
See peak burst size
PCB
See printed circuit board
PCC
protection communication channel
PCC
See policy and charging control
PCS
See physical coding sublayer
PDH
See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDL
See polarization dependent loss
PDU
Protocol Data Unit
PE
Provider Edge
peak burst size
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not
less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak information rate
Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be
not less than the committed information rate.
Performance register
Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history
performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES
register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so
every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is
used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so
as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
PGND
protection ground
phase-locked loop
A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of
a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or referencefrequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,
is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the
incoming or reference frequency.
PHY
See physical sublayer & physical layer
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2520
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
physical coding
sublayer
The PCS further helps to define physical layer specifications for 10 gigabit Ethernet after
having been broken down into their Physical Media Dependent Sublayer or PMD. Each
sublayer places the 10GBASE standards into either LAN or WAN specifications.
physical sublayer &

physical layer
1. physical sublayer: One of two sublayers of the FDDI physical layer. 2. physical layer:
In ATM, the physical layer provides the transmission of cells over a physical medium
that connects two ATM devices. The PHY is comprised of two sublayers: PMD and TC
PID
photonics integrated device
PIM-DM
protocol independent multicast-dense mode
PIM-SM
See protocol independent multicast sparse mode
PIN
See Positive Intrinsic Negative
PIR
See peak information rate
plesiochronous digital
hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
PLL
See phase-locked loop
PMD
polarization mode dispersion
PMI
payload missing indication
POH
path overhead
point to multipoint
A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations
(from one to many).
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
Point-to-Point Protocol PPPoE, point-to-point protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulating
over Ethernet
PPP frames in Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with DSL services. It offers standard
PPP features such as authentication, encryption, and compression.
Pointer
An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to
the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.
polarization dependent The maximum, peak-to-peak insertion loss (or gain) variation caused by a component
loss
when stimulated by all possible polarization states. It is specified in dB units.
policy and charging
control
Short for Policy and Charging Control, the PCC is defined in 3GPP R7. The PCC
provides the QoS control and service-based charging functions in the wireless bearer
network.
POS
See packet over SDH/SONET
Positive Intrinsic
Negative
Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- and
n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers.
Power box
A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
power distribution box A power box through which the power enters the cabinet and is re-distributed to various
components, at the mean time, the Power Distribution Box protects the electric devices
from current overload.
PPP
See Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE
See Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2521
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
PRBS
See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC
primary reference clock
PRI
See primary rate interface
primary rate interface
An interface consisting of 23 channel Bs and a 64 kbit/s channel D that uses the T1 line,
or consisting of 30 channel Bs and a channel D that uses the E1 line.
printed circuit board
A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components

using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
protection ground
cable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one
half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path
A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection policy
In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protection
policies can be selected as required. Protection policy refers to the protection mode given
the priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above,
the protection preference is divided into trail protection and subnet connection
protection.
Protection service
A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol independent
multicast sparse mode
It is applicable to large-scale multicast networks with scattered members.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
sequence
values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
PSI
payload structure identifier
PSN
See packet switched network
PSTN
See public switched telephone network
PT
payload type
PTMP
See point to multipoint
PTN
packet transport network
PTP
Point-To-Point
public switched
telephone network
A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public

subscribers. Sometimes called POTS.
Q
QA
Q adaptation
QoS
See quality of service
quality of service
A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.

Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2522
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
R
radio network
controller
An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of
the radio resources.
RAI
remote alarm indication
RAM
See random access memory
random access memory Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the central processing unit
(CPU) or other hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order.
Note that the various types of ROM memory are capable of random access but cannot
be written to. The term RAM, however, is generally understood to refer to volatile
memory that can be written to as well as read.
Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Receiver Sensitivity
Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received

power at point R to achieve a 10-12 (The FEC is open).
reconfiguration optical The WDM equipment supports the ROADM. It flexibly and dynamically adjusts add/
add/drop multiplexer drop wavelengths of sites on the network by adjusting the pass-through or block status
of any wavelength without affecting the service transmission in the main optical channel.
This implements wavelength allocation among sites on the network. After the ROADM
is used, the existing services are not affected during upgrade. The wavelength can be
modified quickly and efficiently during network maintenance, which reduces
maintenance cost. In addition, the ROADM supports the equalization for optical power,
which equalizes the optical power at the channel level.
Reed Solomon Code
A type of forward error correcting codes invented in 1960 by Irving Reed and Gustave
Solomon, which has become commonplace in modern digital communications.
reference clock
A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks
for reference.
Reflectance
The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.
REG
A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
Regeneration
The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
REI
Remote Error Indication
Resource Reservation
Protocol
The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is
used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport
layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control
protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
RF
Radio Frequency
RFC
Requirement for Comments
RFI
remote failure indication
ring network
A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes,
forming a circular pathway for signals.
RIP
See Routing Information Protocol
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2523
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
RMON
remote network monitoring
RNC
See radio network controller
ROADM
See reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer
route
A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
Routing Information
Protocol
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
RS Code
See Reed Solomon Code
RS232
In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can

communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the
transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RSTP
See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP
See Resource Reservation Protocol
RZ
return to zero code
S
S1 byte
In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference
source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization
of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NE
will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection
switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality
information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to
transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the
multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality
grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be
implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.
Safe control switch
The IPA safe switch is set in consideration of the long-span networking requirement,
which cannot allow too low output optical power. If the safe control switch is turned off,
IPA restarting optical power is the specified output power of the OAU. Otherwise, the
IPA restarting optical power is restricted to less than 10 dBm.
SAN
See storage area network
SAP
service access point
SAPI
source access point identifiers
SBS
stimulated Brillouin scattering
SC
See square connector
SD
See signal degrade
SD trigger flag
SD stands for signal degrade. The SD trigger flag determines whether to perform a
switching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network
management system.
SDH
See synchronous digital hierarchy
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2524
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
SDI
See Serial Digital Interface
SDP
serious disturbance period
Search domain
Search field refers to the range of IP addresses being searched. In the TCP/IP, the IP
addresses include: Category A address (1.0.0.0---126.255.255.255). For example,
10.*.*.*, whose search field is 10.255.255.255, all 10.*.*.* to be searched. Category B
address (128.0.0.0---191. 255. 255. 255). For example, 129.9.*.*, whose search field is
129.9.255.255, all 129.9.*.* to be searched. Category C address (192.0.0.0---223. 255.
255. 255). For example, 192.224.9.*, whose search field is 192.224.9.255, all
192.224.9.* to be searched. Category D address (224.0.0.0---230.255.255.255), which
is reserved. Category E address (240.0.0.0---247.255.255.255), which is reserved. Netid 127.*.*.*, in which .*.*.* can be any number. This net-ID is a local address.
Secure File Transfer

Protocol
A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Self-healing
Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the

NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found
by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that
time.
Serial Digital Interface An interface for transmitting digital signals.

Serial Line Interface
Protocol
Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement
transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection
function with a known IP address.
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the
forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization
(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA
may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement
as a whole or partially.
Service protection
A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.
SES
See severely errored second
SETS
See synchronous equipment timing source
settings
Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >= 10-3 or at least one defect. Time
interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio
greater than 10-3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) .
SF
See signal fail
SFP
See small form-factor pluggable
SFTP
See Secure File Transfer Protocol
shock-proof reinforce
A process by which the cabinet is fastened to the wiring frame or the top of the equipment
room so that the cabinet stands stably.
shortcut menu
A menu that is displayed when right-clicking an objects name or icon. This is also
referred to a context menu.
side door
The side door of a cabinet is used to protect the equipment inside the cabinet against
unexpected touch and environment impact.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2525
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
side mode suppression The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total
ratio
source spectrum to the second largest peak.
side trough
The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the
cabinet.
signal cable
Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber
signal cable.
signal degrade
A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect
(e.g., dDEG) condition is active.
signal fail
A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal to noise ratio
The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network
Management Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end of
the protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectional
failure.
single-mode fiber
A type of fiber optic cable through which only one type of light signal with a fixed wave
length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10
microns. This type of fiber is used to transmit data in long distance.
SLA
See service level agreement
SLIP
See Serial Line Interface Protocol
SLM
single longitudinal mode
SM
section monitoring
small form-factor
pluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SMF
See single-mode fiber
SMSR
See side mode suppression ratio
SNCP
See subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP
See subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR
See signal to noise ratio
soft permanent
connections
An ASON connection which features flexible and dynamic adjustment of routes. SPC
includes different classes of services (CoS).
SONET
See synchronous optical network
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2526
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

span
E Glossary
The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spans
determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and varies
according to transmission system type.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant
network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune
a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SPC
See soft permanent connections
SPM
self phase modulation
SQL
See structured query language
square connector
Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style".
SRLG
Shared Risk Link Group
SRS
stimulated Raman scattering
SSM
See Synchronization Status Message
SSMB
synchronization status message byte
SSU
synchronization supply unit
STM
Synchronous Transfer Mode
STM-1
See synchronous transport mode 1
STM-4
Synchronous Transport Module of order 4
storage area network
An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers,
tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system the
devices appear as locally attached devices.
STP
See Spanning Tree Protocol
structured query
language
A database query and programming language widely used for accessing, querying,
updating, and managing data in relational database systems.
sub-network
Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of
network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or
correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock
subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a
sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and
closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a
topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network
planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space
can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on
the equipments under their management.
sub-network number
A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A subnetwork ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a user phone number. An
oderwire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the user number.
subnet mask
The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection
protection
subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance
falls below a required level.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2527
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
subnetwork connection SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty,
tunnel protection
the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.
support
A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor, it is made of welded steel
plates and is used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling.
Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed under
the supports, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfy
the insulation requirements.
Suppression state
An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression

status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not
occur even when the alarm conditions are met.
Switching priority
There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary
board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the
same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher
priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message
Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
synchronize NE time
To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so as
to synchronize all NEs with the server.
synchronous digital
hierarchy
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the
transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is
suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since
it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous
equipment timing
source
The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts of
multiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock.
synchronous optical
network
A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to

connect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data
types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiples
of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).
synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.

mode 1
T
TCM
Tandem Connection Monitoring
TCP
See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM
See time division multiplexing
TE
See traffic engineering
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2528
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Telecommunication
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.
terminal multiplexer
A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals
into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals
into multiple channels of low rate signals.
TFTP
See Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TIM
trace identifier mismatch
time division
multiplexing
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
Time Slot
Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able
to interconnect.
Time Synchronization
Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the
synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals
keeps consistent with the UTC time.
time to live
A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.
The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the
network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,
and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TL1
See Transaction Language 1
TLV
Type/Length/Value
TM
See terminal multiplexer
TMN
See Telecommunication Management Network
TP
traffic Policing
traffic engineering
A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
Transaction Language Transaction Language One is a widely used telecommunications management protocol.
1
TL1 is a vendor-independent and technology-independent man-machine language. TL1
facilities can be provided as part of an OSS for interacting with either underlying
management systems or NEs. One popular application is for a management system (or
NE) to package its trap/notification data in TL1 format and forward it to an OSS
component. ...(from authors.phptr.com/morris/glossary.html) Transaction Language 1
(TL1) is a widely used, "legacy", management protocol in telecommunications. It is a
cross-vendor, cross-technology man-machine language, and is widely used to manage
optical (SONET) and broadband access infrastructure in North America. It is defined in
GR-831 by Bellcore (now Telcordia). (from en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TL1)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2529
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Transmission Control
Protocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
tray
A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.
tributary unit group
One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VCn payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that
mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed
to increase flexibility of the transport network
Trivial File Transfer

Protocol
A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for
applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP
restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is
small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines.
trTCM
Two Rate Three Color Marker
TTI
trail trace identifier
TTL
See time to live
TU
tributary unit
TUG
See tributary unit group
U
UAS
unavailable second
UAT
See unavailable time event
UDP
See User Datagram Protocol
unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely
errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The
event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than within 10 consecutive
seconds.
UNI
See user network interface
universal time
coordinated
The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintained

atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide.
Unprotected
Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot
be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is
interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.
upload
An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network

Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored
at the NMS side.
Upper subrack
The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.
User
A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation
rights of a user in the NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2530
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

User Datagram
Protocol
E Glossary
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
UTC
See universal time coordinated
V
VB
virtual bridge
VC
See virtual container
VCG
See virtual concatenation group
VCI
See virtual channel identifier
virtual channel
identifier
A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to
identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on
its way to its destination.
virtual concatenation
group
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
virtual concatenation link
virtual container
The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists
of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block
frame structure which repeats every 125 s or 500 s.
virtual local area

network
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
virtual path identifier
The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which
VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via
connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
VLAN
See virtual local area network
VOA
Variable Optical Attenuator
voice over IP
An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP
See voice over IP
VPI
See virtual path identifier
VPN
See virtual private network
VRRP
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2531
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
W
WAN
See wide area network
wavelength division
multiplexing
A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of
single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple
channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
Wavelength protection The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection
group
structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. The
wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the
wavelength protection group.
WDM
See wavelength division multiplexing
WEEE
waste electrical and electronic equipment
wide area network
A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
Working path
The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.
Working service
A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.
WRR
weighted round Robin
WSS
wavelength selective switching
WTR
Wait To Restore
WXCP
wavelength cross-connection protection
WXCP service
The WXCP service is also called the GE ADM protection service. The WXCP is a type
of channel protection based on ring network. It adopts the dual fed and selective receiving
principle and uses the cross-connection function to achieve service switching between
working and protection channels.
X
XFP
10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable
XPM
cross-phase modulation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

2532

Huawei OSN 8800 PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Huawei OSN 8800 PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document

About This Document

OptiX OSN 8800

OptiX OSN 6800

OptiX OSN 3800

iManager U2000 Web LCT

Network Planning Engineer

Hardware Installation Engineer

Installation and Commissioning Engineer

Field Maintenance Engineer

Network Monitoring Engineer

Data Configuration Engineer

System Maintenance Engineer

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

Indicates an electrical module.

All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version

l Added descriptions of the TN11LOA, TN55TQX, TN53TDX,

l Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections

l Added service mapping paths from FC400 and 3G-SDI to ODUflex.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document

l Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.

Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version

l Added descriptions of the TN54TOA, TN54THA, TN53TQX,

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version

l Added descriptions of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

Added a description of the TN12LOM board's capability to support 3GSDI services.

Added descriptions of the TN55NPO2 board.

Added descriptions of the TN52XCM02.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version

Deleted information about the TN13LSXL.

Added information about the LPT function and protocol or standard

Added information about the TN52XCH02.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-30) Based on Product Version

l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX

Introduction to fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document